A330 Espm 1

Customer : XF Manual: ESPM
Type : A330 Selected effectivity: 111-111

Rev. Date : Oct 01/11
Introduction
INTRODUCTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
NOTE: For the obsolescence/interchangeability status of the tools, refer to the Tool Equipment Manual. (TEM)
NOTE: The Electrical Standard Practices data related to Power Plant is shown in the AMM 70-71-XX.
NOTE: There are several Chapter 20, depending on the vendor responsible for the system (ECE, Honeywell, etc.) but whatever the vendor,
their chapter 20 follows the same layout.
The Electrical Standard Practices Manual (ESPM) gives descriptive data and procedures for the electrical installations on all aircraft of the
AIRBUS family.
The standard practices information in this manual tells you how to do maintenance and repairs on the standard electrical items and thus
ensure the continued airworthiness of the aircraft.
NOTE: For users of this manual

If you cannot find the data or a procedure you need to ensure the continued airworthiness of the aircraft, or if you think that the
information given is not complete, contact Airbus.
The ESPM is broken down in two main chapters:

- Chapter 00 (common part) with:
- General, How to use (00-INTRO)
- Indexes
- Chapter 20 with:
- Safety Practices (20-10-00)
- Tools (20-25-XX)
- Subjects related to standard rules and recommendations (20-3X-XX):
Specific areas (20-31-XX) .
Identification/marking (20-32-XX)
Wire harnesses (20-33-XX)
- Subjects related to standard electrical items and connecting parts with their description (P/N identification and characteristics) and
their related processes (connection procedure or connection table) (20-4X-XX):
Sleeves, End Caps and Ferrules (20-42-XX) .
Splices and Pressure Seals (20-43-XX)
Connectors and Terminal Blocks (20-44-XX)
Miscellaneous Electrical Items (20-45-XX)
Circuit breaker, Relay and Relay Base (20-46-XX)
Terminals and Contacts (20-48-XX)
- Subjects related to maintenance processes (20-5X-XX):
Standard Processes (20-51-XX) .
Inspection/Check and Test (20-52-XX)
Repair Processes (20-53-XX)
Protection during Maintenance Checks (20-54-XX)
Cleaning (20-55-XX)
If any part or all of the ESPM is translated, the official version is the original English-language version produced by AIRBUS.
2. Correspondence
Correspondence concerning this publication should be directed to:
-----------------------------------------------------------------
AIRBUS SAS
Technical Data Support and Services
1 Rond Point Maurice BELLONTE
31707 Blagnac Cedex
FRANCE
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Or by the "Request for Information/Revision" form.
3. Definitions
A. Definition of Terms
The terms below are used in the ESPM and are defined as follows:
- Standard Practices:
Standard industry practices that are not specific to AIRBUS aircraft.
Procedures specific to AIRBUS aircraft and applicable to several systems.
Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 1 of 5

Introduction
- Torque:
Term used when a procedure requires a specific torque value.
- Tighten:
Term used when no specific torque value is required.
- WARNING:
Calls attention to use of materials, processes, methods, procedures or limits that you must obey precisely to prevent injury or death
to persons.
- CAUTION:
Calls attention to methods and procedures that you must obey to prevent damage to equipment.
- NOTE:
Calls attention to methods which make the job easier or give supplementary or explanatory information.
B. Part Number (P/N) Construction
It is only with a P/N (not with a FIN) that you can access to the ESPM information.
The P/Ns listed in the ESPM are made up of two parts:
- A basic element which is the standard number/family.
- A suffix which defines the item.
e.g. Basic element (standard) + suffix(item) = Full P/N
NSA936504 TC0607 NSA936504TC0607
ASNE0261 CF24 E0261CF24
NOTE: For ASNE standards, the 3 letters "A, S, N" are omitted in the P/N.
For clarity, only the suffix (item) (e.g. E0617 for ASNE0617) is shown in the tables.
However, you can identify the full P/N because the applicable standard number is always shown on the page. (In the title or/and
on top of the table)
NOTE: For tool military part number (MIL), the P/N consists of the letter M and of the basic specification number.
e.g.: M 81969 / 01-01

- ----- -- --
| | | |
| | | ----- Dash number from specification sheet
| | -------- Specification sheet number
| -------------- General specification number
------------------ "M" Military part number indicator
4. Units of Measurement
A. Abbreviations
AIRBUS Technical Publications use the metric and non-metric systems of measurement. The system used in the original reference
documents is shown first, followed by the conversion into the other system in brackets.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| U.S. CUSTOMARY SYSTEM | SI-METRIC MEASUREMENT SYSTEM |
|------------------------------------|----------------------------------------|
| ABBREVIATION | DEFINITION |ABBREVIATION | DEFINITION |
|---------------|--------------------|-------------|--------------------------|
| deg.F | Degrees Fahrenheit | deg.C | Degrees Celsius |
| ft. | Foot | m | Meter |
| USgal | US Gallon | l | Liter |
| USquart | US Quart | l | Liter |
| in. | Inch | mm | Millimeter |
| in.2 | Square Inch | mm2 | Square Millimeter |
| in.2 | Square Inch | cm2 | Square Centimeter |
| lb | Pound | kg | Kilogram |
| lbf | Pound force | daN | Deca Newton |
| lbf.in. | Pound Force-Inch | m.daN | Meter deca Newton |
| | (Torque) | | |
| lbf.ft | Pound Force-Foot | m.daN | Meter deca Newton |
| | (Torque) | | |
| in.Hg | Inch of Mercury | hPa | Hecto Pascal |
| oz | Ounce (Weight) | g | Gram |
| psi | Pound Square Inch | bar | Bar |
| lb.min | Pound per minute | kg.min | Kilogram per minute |
| USgal.min | US Gallon per | l.min | Liter per minute |
| | | W/dm2 | Watt per square decimeter|
| | | cc | Cubic Centimeter |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Introduction
B. Conversion Tables
Temperature conversion from degrees Celsius (deg.C) to degrees Fahrenheit (deg.F):
deg.F = 1.8 x deg.C + 32.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FROM: S.I.Measurement System TO: US Customary System
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 bar = 14.5037 psi
1 mm2 = 0.0016 in.2
1 cm2 = 0.1550 in.2
1 daN = 2.2481 lbf
1 g = 0.0353 oz
1 hPa = 0.0295 in.Hg
1 kg = 2.2046 lb
1 kg.min = 2.2046 lb.min
1 l = 0.2641 USgal
1 l = 1.057 USquart
1 l.min = 0.2641 USgal.min
1 m.daN = 88.4956 lbf.in
1 m.daN = 7.3801 lbf.ft
1 m = 3.2809 ft
1 mm = 0.0394 in
1 cm3 = 0.06102 in3
1 hPa = 0.0145 psi
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
FROM: US Customary System TO: S.I.Measurement System
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 psi = 0.0689 bar
1 in.2 = 645.1600 mm2
1 in.2 = 6.4516 cm2
1 lbf = 0.4448 daN
1 oz = 28.3495 g
1 in.Hg = 33.8640 hPa
1 lb = 0.4536 kg
1 lb.min = 0.4536 kg min
1 USgal = 3.7854 l
1 USgal.min = 3.7854 l.min
1 USquart = 0.9464 l
1 lbf.in = 0.0113 m.daN
1 lbf.ft = 0.1356 m.daN
1 ft = 0.3048 m
1 in = 25.4 mm
1 in3 = 16.3871 cm3
1 in.Hg = 0.491 psi
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Temperature conversion from degrees Fahrenheit (deg.F) to degrees Celsius (deg.C):
deg.C = 0.5555 x (deg.F - 32)
5. Glossary of Abbreviations used in the ESPM
ABBREVIATION SIGNIFICATION
A Amber
A Alternate
A/C Aircraft
AC Alternating current
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
AECMA The European Association of Aerospace Industries
Ag Silver
AINS Aircraft Information Network System
Al Aluminum
APU Auxiliary Power Unit
ARINC Aeronautical Radio INCorporated
ARPT Airport

Introduction
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASM Aircraft Schematics Manual
ASSY Assembly
ATA Air Transport Association of America
ATC Air Traffic Control
ATE Automatic Test Equipment
ATLAS Abbreviated Test Language for All Systems
AUTO Automatic
AUX Auxiliary
AVAIL Available
AVNCS Avionics
AWM Aircraft Wiring Manual
AWY Airway
B AWY Blue
BK Black
BR Brown
BUS Busbar
C Close
C Clear
C Celsius
C Centigrade
C/B Circuit Breaker
C/L Check List
CAB Cabin
CINS Cabin Information Network System
CO Carbon Dioxide
COM Communication
COMSAT Communication Satellite
CSK Countersinks
Cu Copper
Cw Clockwise
DC Direct Current
D/O Description and Operation
DIA Diameter
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
DNC Do not Connect
EFCS Electrical Flight Control System
ELEC Electric, Electrical, Electricity
ELT Emergency Locator Transmitter
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
ES Spain
ETFE Ethylene-Tetrafluorethylene
EU Europe
EQPT Equipment
EWIS Electrical Wiring Interconnection System
F Fahrenheit
FEP Perfluorethylenepropylene
FIG Figure
FIN Functional Item Number
FR France
FWD Forward
G Green
GB Great Britain
GND Ground

Introduction
GPS Global Positioning System

GY Grey
H Hot (Electrical Point)
HF High Frequency
IDENT Identification, Identifier, Identify
IDG Integrated Drive Generator
IPC Illustrated Parts Catalog
ISO International Standardization Organization
ISOL Isolated
IT Italy
L Length
L/G Landing gear
LED Light Emitting Diode
LOC Localizer
MAG Magnetic
MAINT Maintenance
MAN Manual
MAX Maximum
MED Medium
MID Middle
MIL Military Standard
MIN Minimum
MISC Miscellaneous
MLS Microwave Landing System
MS Military Standard
NAS Navy and Army Standard
NAS National Aerospace Standard
Ni Nickel
NiAl Alumel
Text continues : see text below

20 - STANDARD PRACTICES-AIRFRAME (Airbus)
SAFETY PRACTICES (Airbus)
SAFETY PRACTICES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
For work on the electrical system it is necessary:
- to know and obey the standard safety practices,
- to have a good knowledge of the electrical standard practices,
- to have a good knowledge of requirements (processes, WARNINGS, CAUTIONS etc..) before you start the
work.
This is necessary to prevent injury to persons and/or damage to equipment.
This document gives general safety practices for work on the aircraft electrical systems and parts of these
systems such as: wires, wire routing, conduits, connections, splices, etc...
These safety practices do not replace local regulations specified by local authorities.
WARNING: THE CORRECT SEPARATION BETWEEN SENSITIVE WIRING AND WIRING OF OTHER
SYSTEMS IS NECESSARY TO PRESERVE THE CRITICAL IGNITION SOURCE PREVENTION
FEATURES OF THE SYSTEM DESIGN AND IS THEREFORE CLASSIFIED AS A CRITICAL
DESIGN CONFIGURATION CONTROL LIMITATION (CDCCL). A CDCCL MUST BE KEPT IN THE
APPROVED CONFIGURATION TO ENSURE UNSAFE CONDITIONS DO NOT DEVELOP AS A
RESULT OF MODIFICATION, MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR.
CAUTION: ALWAYS OBEY THE PRECAUTIONS THAT FOLLOW TO KEEP ELECTRICAL WIRING IN A
SATISFACTORY CONDITION (ELECTRICALLY AND MECHANICALLY SERVICEABLE).
WHEN YOU DO MAINTENANCE WORK, REPAIRS OR MODIFICATIONS, ALWAYS KEEP
ELECTRICAL WIRING, COMPONENTS AND THE WORK AREA AS CLEAN AS POSSIBLE. TO DO
THIS:
- PUT PROTECTION, SUCH AS PLASTIC SHEETING, CLOTHS, ETC. AS NECESSARY ON
WIRING AND COMPONENTS
- REGULARLY REMOVE ALL SHAVINGS, UNWANTED MATERIAL AND OTHER
CONTAMINATION.
THESE PRECAUTIONS WILL DECREASE THE RISK OF CONTAMINATION AND DAMAGE TO
THE ELECTRICAL WIRING INSTALLATION.
IF THERE IS CONTAMINATION, REFER TO ESPM CHAPTER 20-55-00, CLEANING.
2. Maintenance
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT NO AC OR DC POWER SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO THE AIRCRAFT

ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS.
THERE IS A RISK OF ELECTROCUTION IF THE AC OR DC POWER STAYS CONNECTED.
WARNING: DO NOT LOOK INTO THE END OF A FIBER-OPTIC CABLE. THERE IS A RISK OF LASER
RADIATION, WHICH YOU WILL NOT SEE. LASER RADIATION IS DANGEROUS FOR YOUR
EYES.
A. Electrical Safety Practices.

Before you start work: open, safety and tag the circuit breaker(s) related to the system/equipment to
prevent the supply of electrical power to the system/equipment during the maintenance work.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
This prevents the risk of:

-
Electric shocks that can occur if you touch energized wiring connections, terminals, etc...
- Short circuits that can occur if metal tools or parts accidentally touch energized wiring, terminals,
contacts, etc...
NOTE: Some circuits breakers (A320 family only) have a red threaded bush (P/N A92529086000). This
bush prevents reset of the circuit breaker in flight (the crew cannot pull it).
If, for maintenance safety reasons, it is necessary to open such a circuit breaker, you can remove
the red threaded bush with a standard wrench.
WARNING: BEFORE YOU USE A MATERIAL REFERRED TO IN THIS PUBLICATION, YOU MUST KNOW
ALL OF THE APPLICABLE PRECAUTIONS.
THESE PRECAUTIONS TELL YOU HOW TO:
- USE THE MATERIAL SAFELY,
- KEEP THE MATERIAL SAFELY,
READ THE SAFETY DATA SHEETS FROM THE MANUFACTURER OR THE SUPPLIER OF
THE MATERIAL TO LEARN THE RECOMMENDED PRECAUTIONS. OBEY YOUR LOCAL
REGULATIONS.
WARNING: USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS

ONLY WITH A GOOD FLOW OF AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA.
THESE MATERIALS ARE POISONOUS AND FLAMMABLE AND SKIN IRRITANTS.
OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
PUT ON PROTECTIVE CLOTHING.
DO NOT GET THEM IN YOUR MOUTH.
DO NOT SMOKE.
DO NOT BREATHE THE GAS.
GET MEDICAL HELP IF YOUR SKIN OR EYES BECOME IRRITATED.
B. Materials
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE ELECTRIC TOOLS ON THE AIRCRAFT BECAUSE THERE
ARE RISKS OF ELECTROCUTION OR EXPLOSION. IF THERE ARE LOCAL REGULATIONS
RELATED TO ELECTRIC TOOLS, MAKE SURE THAT YOU OBEY THEM.
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE ELECTRIC TOOLS IN AREAS WHERE THERE ARE RISKS
OF EXPLOSION (FUEL TANKS, FUEL VAPOUR AREAS, ETC.). REFER TO YOUR LOCAL
REGULATIONS AND MAKE SURE THAT YOU OBEY THEM. SOME ELECTRIC TOOLS
SUCH AS HEAT GUNS, SOLDERING IRONS AND TOOLS WITHOUT INTRINSIC
PROTECTION ARE NOT PERMITTED IN THESE AREAS.
C. Tools
Never use electric tools which deliver an energy of more than 0.02 millijoule in fuel tanks or in areas
where there are flammable vapors.
Never use heat-generating tools in the fuel tanks or in areas where there are flammable vapors.
Use only crimp-type contacts, terminals, splices, sleeves (non-heat shrinkable sleeves) in these areas.
D. Cables
For cables in harnesses that are identified by a P/N (engine, landing gear, fuel tanks, etc...), also refer to
the applicable manufacturer documentation (CMM).
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Safety Practices - Typical Tag

STANDARD TOOLS - GENERAL (Airbus)
STANDARD TOOLS - GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
NOTE: For the obsolescence/interchangeability status of the tools, refer to the Tool Equipment Manual.
This chapter gives the description, operation and application field of the tools necessary for the removal or
installation of items of equipment installed on aircraft:
2. Structure of the Chapters
A. Stripping Tools (Ref. 20-25-10)
B. Crimping Tools (Ref. 20-25-20)
C. Shrinking Tools (Ref. 20-25-30)
D. Insertion/Extraction Tool (Ref. 20-25-40)
E. Miscellaneous Tools (Ref. 20-25-50)
F. Marking Tools (Ref. 20-25-60)
3. Checking Procedure
NOTE: The correct combination of cable, tool, terminal end or connector is the first stage in a connection
procedure.
The tools used must be approved and examined regularly.
Before use, you must examine each tool for:

-
identification (tool Serial No.).
-
clean condition of die faces.
-
no damage.
-
no corrosion.
- no wear.
Tools used regularly must be cleaned daily so dirt and plating do not collect on die faces.
You must be careful not to cause damage to the die faces.
The transportation tools must let you move the harnesses on a flat surface and not hung. The work
benches used to make the harnesses must not have sharp or protruding edges.
STRIPPING TOOLS (Airbus)
STRIPPING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the description and operation for stripping tools.


A. General Requirements for Stripping Electrical Cables (Ref. 20-25-11)
B. Stripping Tools - Description and Operation (Ref. 20-25-12)
C. Specific Stripping Procedure - Description and Operation (Ref. 20-25-13)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STRIPPING OF ELECTRICAL CABLES

(Airbus)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STRIPPING OF ELECTRICAL CABLES DESCRIPTION

AND OPERATION
1. General
This topic gives the requirements and the miscellaneous procedures to strip different types and gauges of
electrical cables that are installed on aircraft.
You must strip conductors before all crimping or soldering operations.
NOTE: For some cables, a specific stripping procedure is necessary to increase or decrease the cable
diameter before you can do the procedure that follows (e.g. solder sleeve installation, crimping of
contacts, etc.).
2. Definition
The stripping operation must remove the insulation from the cable along a given length with tolerances. It must
not cause damage to the core strands or the shielding and must not decrease the initial performance of the
cable.
The insulation must have a clean cut and not start tears or unwanted untwining of the insulating sheath.
NOTE: You always strip a cable end almost immediately before the connection of the cable.
Do not put stripped cables in storage.
3. Stripping Procedure
A. Items to be Stripped:
You can strip all the existing cable types (single core or multicore cables, standard, screened or coaxial
cables).
But the stripping procedure is not the same. There are differences for cables with a specific procedure
due to the cable characteristics. These characteristics can be related to the materials in the cables, to
their specific design in the case of coaxial cables (impedance) or to the type of each conductor part of the
assembly in the case of specific single or multicore cables.
Example:
Multicore cable E0299 HD has a coaxial cable, plus a five-wire shielded cable, plus a single core.
The wire or wires in a shielded cable will be dealt with as a single core cable after stripping and cutting to
length of the cable shield .
B. Stripping Length
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(1) Single core or each element of a multicore cable:
The stripping length is related to the length necessary to connect the cable conductor to the end
component. It is also related to the dimensions of the end component barrel plus the tolerances of the
stripped cable aft of the barrel.
This length "A" is given in the topic related to the use of each end component.

The stripping tools are related to the gauge of the cable to be stripped.
(2) Single core or multicore screened cables or coaxial cables:
Stripping is in several steps:
- Step 1: Stripping of the insulation (L stripping length)
- Step 2: If necessary, stripping of the screening (L1 and L2 stripping lengths)
- Step 3: Stripping of the conductor(s) (stripping length A)
The miscellaneous stripping lengths are given in the topic related to the use of each end component.
For step 1:
The insulation (PTFE, plastic, etc.) covers the screening.
The stripping length "L" is related to the length necessary to connect the cable and is given in the
topic related to the use of each end component.
Tools such as scalpels or scissors are necessary to strip this insulation.
For step 2:
The cutting length for the screening is related to:
- the electrical function of the cable and of the screening,
- the type of cable,
- the type of end component to be connected to the cable.
In all cases, the length of the screening removed must be as short as possible but sufficient for more
work (pinning, unpinning and two repairs to be made at first wiring).
The length must be approximately:
- 50 mm (1.9685 in.) for a screening termination,
- 80 mm (3.1496 in.) maximum if the screening continuity rework must be stepped because of space
requirements aft of the equipment to which the wiring will be connected.
Tools such as scalpels or scissors are necessary.
For step 3:
The stripping length is related to the length necessary to connect the cable conductor to the end
component. It is also related to the dimensions of the end component barrel plus the tolerances of the
stripped cable aft of the barrel.
This length "A" is given in the topic related to the use of each end component.
The stripping tools are related to the gauge of the cable to be stripped.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO NOT CUT THE BRAIDED SHIELD OR CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE
CENTER CONDUCTOR WHEN YOU STRIP THE CABLE.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOOLS THAT HAVE V-SHAPED OR SHEAR-TYPE KNIVES. THIS TYPE OF
KNIFE CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO CABLES.
C. Stripping Procedure for each Applicable Tool:

(Ref. Fig. 002)
WARNING: BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THESE TOOLS. THEY ARE SHARP AND CAN
CUT YOU.
(1) Scalpels, cutters, cable knives or equivalent:
NOTE: During the stripping operation, for a good stripping quality, you must hold the cable at right
angles to the blades and remove the insulation parallel to the cable axis.
(a) Conditions of application

Manual insulation stripping with cutting tools is permitted for:
- cables with cross sections more than 5 mm2 or wire gauge 10,
- fire-resistant cable insulation,
- screened cables (braided screening or helical screening),
- coaxial cables.

(b) Insulation stripping procedure

(Ref. Fig. 003)
- The end of the cable must have a clean cut.
- Find the location where it is necessary to cut the insulation. With a scalpel, without pressure,
make a circular notch on the cable insulation to start to cut the insulation.
- Fold the cable on the notch to break the insulation.
- With your hand or adhesive tape or an applicable tool that does not cause damage to the
conductor, pinch the cable end on the insulation and remove it.
(c) Screening stripping procedure
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
In relation to the screening type of the cable and/or the type of screening pick-up to be made,
there are several possible procedures to strip the screening.
1 Cutting flush with the insulator:
- With scissors, cut the screening flush with the insulator, bring the strands back in the cable
direction.
- In relation to the type of cable, slide a heat-shrinkable sleeve specified in the wiring
documents on the shielding end.
2 Window-type stripping
You can only use solder sleeves after this type of stripping.
This stripping procedure lets you step the screening pick-up more easily when there are
many screened cables:
Cutting:
- Make 3 circular notches along a length L related to the sleeves used.
- Make a longitudinal notch and remove the pieces of insulation.
- Move and put the solder sleeve in position on the screening.
Sliding:
- Make a circular notch.
- Slide the insulation on the screening along a length L and keep it in position.
- This length L is related to the length of the solder sleeve used.
- Move and put the solder sleeve in position on the screening.
3 Wrapping and cutting:
You can also install mechanical ferrules or solder sleeves on a stripped tubing on a cable
end.
- After the insulation is stripped along a length L:
L: length necessary, as short as possible but sufficient, for more work (pinning, unpinning,
repairs, etc.).
- Unwind the braided screening and cut at the length L or wind the helical screening on the
length B.
L1/L2: length related to the type of end component (mechanical ferrule, solder sleeve).
- You will move and put the solder sleeve in position on the screening.
These procedures are related to the end component you will connect. They are specified
and given in the topic related to these end components.

20-25-12 - STRIPPING TOOLS (Airbus)
STRIPPING TOOLS (Airbus)
STRIPPING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO NOT CUT THE BRAIDED SHIELD OR CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CENTER CONDUCTOR
WHEN YOU STRIP THE CABLE.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOOLS THAT HAVE V-SHAPED OR SHEAR-TYPE KNIVES. THIS TYPE OF KNIFE CAN CAUSE DAMAGE
TO CABLES.
1. General
This topic gives the description of stripping tools.
You can use miscellaneous procedures and miscellaneous tools.
These include:
- Manual tools (scalpels, cutters or equivalent tools)
- Semi-automatic tools (STRIPMASTER and DAVUM)
- Specific tools
- Thermal tools
- Automatic tools.
WARNING: BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THESE TOOLS. THEY ARE SHARP AND CAN CUT YOU.
2. Scalpels, cutters or equivalent tools

(Ref. Fig. 001)
NOTE: During the stripping operation, you must hold the cable at a 90 deg. angle to the blades and remove the insulation parallel to the
cable axis.
A. Application conditions
Manual insulation stripping with cutting tools is permitted for:
- cables with cross-sections of more than 5 mm2 or wire gauge 10
- fire-resistant cable insulation
- screened cables (braided screening or helical screening)
- coaxial cables.
3. STRIPMASTER and DAVUM tools
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
There are many types of STRIPMASTER and DAVUM manual stripping pliers.
Each type of pliers has an engraved reference number.
Each type of pliers includes several cavities related to a cable size.
NOTE: When it is necessary to change the stripping dies, you must always change the two parts. After you change the dies, you must
make and examine samples.
A. Example of stripping tools

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| IDEAL-STRIPMASTER |STRIPPING DIES| COLOR | CABLE | PERMITTED WIRES |
| AND DAVUM WIP-TMC | (BLADES) | OF | CLAMPING |-----------------|
| COMPLETE TOOL P/N | P/N |HANDLES| JAWS SET P/N | GAUGES | TYPE |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|---------|-------|
| 45-2020 * | 45-2020-1 | Blue | LB722 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| 45-1952 * | 45-1952-1 | Blue | LB722 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| 45-2834 * | | Green | LB731 | | |
|-------------------| 45-2824-1 |-------|--------------| | |
| LB1092 or L5617 * | | Black | LB198 |26 to 16 | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| TMCPCW1 ** | TMCW1 | Black | LB722 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| TMCPCW3 ** | TMCW3 | Green | TMCMP3 | | |

|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| LB1092 or L5617 *| L5211 * | Yellow| LB198 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|---------| |
| 45-1773 * | 45-1773-1 | Red | LB198 | |METRIC |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| 45-2824-9 * | 45-2824-1 |Violet | LB731 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| TMCPCW3BTAD1 ** | TMCW3 |Violet | TMCMP3 |24 to 16 | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| | 45-1773-1 * | Black | LB198 | | |
| | 45-2824-1***| Black | LB198 | | |
| LB1092 or L5617 *|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| | TMCW1D1 ** | Black | LB198 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|---------| |
| LB1092 or L5617 *| L4421 * | White | LB198 |22 to 16 | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|---------| |
| 45-1774 * | 45-1774-1 | Black | LB197 |14 and 12| |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|---------| |
| 45-1939 * | 45-1939-1 | Red | LB721 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| 45-2825-9 * | 45-2825-1 |Violet | LB730 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| 45-2835 * | 45-2825-1 | Green | LB730 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| TMCPCW2 ** | TMCW2 | Grey | LB721 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|14 to 10 | |
| TMCPCW4 ** | TMCW4 | Green | TMCMP4 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| TMCPCW4BTAD2 ** | TMCW4 |Violet | TMCMP4 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| | 45-1939-1 * | Red | LB197 | | |
| | 45-2825-1***| Red | LB197 | | |
| LB1091 or L5616 *|--------------|-------|--------------| | |
| | TMCW2A16 ** | Red | LB197 | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|---------|-------|
| TMCPCW2-810 ** | TMCW2810 | Green | - |10 and 8 | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|---------|-------|
| 45-092 * | L4421 | Blue | LB198 |22 to 16 | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|---------| |
| | L5211 | | | | |
| 45-171 * | or | Blue | LB198 |26 to 16 | US |
| | 45-1654-1 | | | | |
|-------------------|--------------|-------|--------------|---------| |
| | 45-1608-1 | | | | |
| 45-170 * | or | Red | LB197 |14 to 10 | |
| | L5210 | | | | |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE: The difference between 45-2020 and 45-1952 stripping pliers is the position of the wire gauge cavities on the stripping dies.
* IDEAL STRIPMASTER
** DAVUM WIP-TMC
*** Stripping pliers that have this configuration, (dies, color of handles, clamping jaws, no cable stop) are only approved for the
stripping of CF or DM cables.
(1) Contents of jaws set
-----------------------------------------------------------
| JAWS | MOVABLE | FIXED | CHARACTERISTICS |
| SET P/N | JAW P/N | JAW P/N | |
|-----------|-----------|-----------|---------------------|
| LB721 | LB718 | LB719 | specific for hard- |
|-----------|-----------|-----------| to-grip surfaces |
| LB722 | LB718 | LB720 |(e.g. Kapton, Teflon)|
|-----------|-----------|-----------|---------------------|
| LB197 | LB5212 | L5215 | |
|-----------|-----------|-----------| |

| LB198 | LB5212 | L5217 | |

|-----------|-----------|-----------| standard for all |
| LB730 | LB727 | LB728 | products |
|-----------|-----------|-----------| |
| LB731 | LB727 | LB729 | |
-----------------------------------------------------------
(2) Removal/installation
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
- Steps 1 and 2: Remove the two screws that hold the fixed jaw.
- Step 3: Remove the fixed jaw (bottom jaw).
- Step 4: Remove the movable jaw (top jaw).
- Step 5: Make sure that you do not find damage (tears, strain) on the removed parts. Replace with new ones, if necessary.
- Step 6: Install the movable jaw (top jaw).
- Step 7: Install the fixed jaw (bottom jaw).
- Step 8: Install the two screws and tighten.
NOTE: On the old manufacturing tool, you can only remove the movable jaw.
NOTE: When it is necessary to change the stripping dies, you must always change the two parts. After you change the dies,
you must make and examine samples.
B. Example of stripping tools that use IDEAL blades

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| COMPLETE TOOL | | PERMITTED |
|----------------------------------| IDEAL BLADES | WIRE GAUGES |
| P/N | MANUFACTURER | | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------|-----------------|
| H35-9 | HELLERMANN | L5436 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| H35-12 | HELLERMANN | | 30 to 26 |
|-------------------|--------------| L5561 | |
| 45-178 | IDEAL FRAME | | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------|-----------------|
| H35-26 | HELLERMANN | 45-1316-1 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| 45-1610 | IDEAL | 45-1610-1 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| 45-1610 | IDEAL | 45-1715-1 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| H35-6 | HELLERMANN | 45-1987-1 | 26 to 16 |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| 45-2618 | IDEAL FRAME | 45-2618-1 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| H35-6 | HELLERMANN | | |
|-------------------|--------------| L5563 | |
| 45-1610 | IDEAL | | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------|-----------------|
| 45-1513 | IDEAL | 45-1513-1 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| H35-15 | HELLERMANN | | |
|-------------------|--------------| | |
| LB1809 | IDEAL FRAME | 45-1773-1 | 24 to 16 |
|-------------------|--------------| | |
| 55-1773 | IDEAL ERGO | | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| H35-8 | HELLERMANN | L5211 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------|-----------------|
| 45-403 | IDEAL | K6492 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| 24 |
| 45-403 | IDEAL | K6499 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------|-----------------|
| H35-27 | HELLERMANN | 45-1819-1 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| H35-16 | HELLERMANN | | 14 to 12 |

|-------------------|--------------| 45-1774-1 | |
| LB1808 | IDEAL FRAME | | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------|-----------------|
| 45-1610 | IDEAL | 45-1611-1 | |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| LB1809 | IDEAL FRAME | 45-2564-1 | 14 to 10 |
|-------------------|--------------|----------------------| |
| H35-7 | HELLERMANN | L5210 | |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Wire gauge code on stripping die
For some stripping tool dies, the wire gauge is not stamped, it is a code.
For the relation with the wire gauge, refer to the table that follows.
----------------------------------------------------------------
| STRIPPING | CODE | WIRE | NOMINAL CROSS-SECTION |
| DIE P/N | ON DIE | GAUGE | mm. (IN) |
|-------------|------------|---------|-------------------------|
| | .2 | 24 | 0.25 (0.010) |
| | .4 | 22 | 0.4 (0.016) |
| 45-1773-1 | .6 | 20 | 0.6 (0.024) |
| | .10 | 18 | 1.0 (0.039) |
| | .12 | 16 | 1.2 (0.047) |
|-------------|------------|---------|-------------------------|
| 45-1774-1 | 20 | 14 | 2.0 (0.079) |
| | 30 | 12 | 3.0 (0.118) |
----------------------------------------------------------------
D. Stripping-tool allocation table
In the table below, you can find the stripping tool to use for some wire type codes.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | | STRIPPING TOOL |
| CABLE P/N | WIRE | WIRE |-----------------------------------------|
| | TYPE | GAUGE | STRIPPING DIES | CABLE CLAMPING |
| | CODE | | | JAW |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 2 X DL22 | refer to E0437DL |
| ABS0053 | PL |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 24 to 18 | TMCW1 | LB722 |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 24 to 18 | W200A + TMCW5 |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | | 45-2824-9 * + 45-2824-1 ** |
| | | 24 to 16 |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | TMCW3 | TMCMP3 |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| ABS0949 | AD | | 45-2825-9 * + 45-2825-1 ** |
| | | 14 to 10 |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | TMCW4 | TMCMP4 |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 08 to 000 | scalpel |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | ADB | 2 X AD24 to | refer to ABS0949AD |
| | | 2 X AD000 | |
| |------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | ADC | 3 X AD24 to | refer to ABS0949AD |
| | | 3 X AD000 | |
| ABS1354 |------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | ADD | 4 X AD24 to | refer to ABS0949AD |
| | | 4 X AD000 | |
| |------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | ADE | 5 X AD24 to | refer to ABS0949AD |
| | | 5 X AD000 | |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0259 | HE | 2 X 24 | 45-2020-1 | LB722 |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0260 | BF | 24 to 18 | 45-1773 * + 45-1773-1 ** |

|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | | 45-1773-1 ** or |
| | | |LB1092 * or L5617 * + 45-2824-1 ** or |
| | | 24 to 16 | TMCW1D1 ** |
| | | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | TMCW3 | TMCMP3 |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0261 | CF | 24 to 22 | 45-2020-1 | LB-722 |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | | 45-1939-1 ** or |
| | | |LB1091 * or L5616 * + 45-2825-1 ** or |
| | | | TMCW2A16 ** |
| | | 14 to 10 |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | TMCW2 | LB721 |
| | | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | TMCW4 | TMCMP4 |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 14 to 12 | 45-1774-1 | LB197 |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 10 and 8 | TMCW2810 | - |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | | 45-2834 * + 45-2824-1 ** + LB-731 ***|
| | | 26 to 16 |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | 954 * | 45-950-4 |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | | 55-1773 * + 45-1773-1 ** |
| | | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | LB1092 * or + 45-1773-1 ** or |
| | | | L5617 * TMCW1D1 ** |
| | | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | TMCW1 | TMCPCW1 |
| | | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | TMCW3 | TMCMP3 |
| | | 24 to 16 |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | W200A * + W2-23118-2 ** |
| | | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | 45-2824-1 | LB731 |
| E0262 | DK | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | H35/15 * + 45-1773-1 ** + L731 *** |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | | 45-2835 * + 45-2825-1 ** + LB730 ***|
| | | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | TMCW2 | LB721 |
| | | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | 14 to 10 | LB1091 * or + 45-1939-1 ** or |
| | | | L5616 * TMCW2A16 ** or |
| | | | 45-2825-1 ** |
| | | |-----------------------------------------|
| | | | TMCW4 | TMCMP4 |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 14 to 12 | 45-2835 * + 45-1774-1 ** |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 10 and 08 | TMCW2810 | - |
| | |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 08 to 06 | scalpel |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0264 | PF | 2 X CF24 to | refer to E0261CF |
| | | 2 X CF10 | |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0265 | PG | 2 X DK24 to | refer to E0262DK |
| | | 2 X DK06 | |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0266 | QF | 3 X CF24 to | refer to E0261CF |
| | | 3 X CF10 | |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|

| E0267 | QG | 3 X DK24 to | refer to E0262DK |

| | | 3 X DK06 | |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0268 | RF | 4 X CF24 to | refer to E0261CF |
| | | 4 X CF10 | |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0269 | RH | 4 X DK24 to | refer to E0262DK |
| | | 4 X DK06 | |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0409 | BG | 24 | 45-2618-1 | - |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 24 to 18 | TMCW1 | LB-722 |
| E0437 | DL |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 22 to 16 | LB1092 * or L5617 *| L4421 |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 06 | scalpel |
| | YV |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 06 | 9922801500 | - |
| E0438 |------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 04 to 00 | scalpel |
| | DL |--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | | 04 to 00 | 9922801600 | - |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| E0471 | QP | 3 X YV06 | scalpel |
|-------------|------|--------------|-----------------------------------------|
| EN2267-007B | PN | 2 x DM26 | refer to EN2267-008A DM |
| | | to | |

Specific tools
4. Specific tools
A. HELLERMANN H35
These pliers can use many blades, in relation to the cable insulation thickness.
(1) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 007)
-
Select the tool in relation to the wire gauge and the wire type code.
- Make sure that the wire size is correct. Put the wire in position in the center of the applicable die, in the bottom part of the
cutting blade. Make sure that the necessary stripping length protrudes from the die. Make sure that the cable axis is at 90
deg. angle to the cutting blade.
- Squeeze the handles of the tool to close the cutting blades and remove the applicable length of insulation. While you do
this, apply and keep a light tension on the wire away from the tool. Make sure that you squeeze the handles until a ratchet
holds the left and right parts of the head apart.
- When you initially release the handles, the wire clamp will open and the cutting blades will open sufficiently to release the
wire. You must remove the wire at this time. When you release the handles more, the ratchet will operate. This will cause
the heads to come quickly together, which discards the stripped part of the insulation.
NOTE: If you do not remove the wire before the heads come quickly together, this will cause damage to the conductor strands.
If this occurs, you must not try to repair the stripped end. You must cut it off and strip the wire again.
(2) Stripping-tool allocation table

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | WIRE | | STRIPPING TOOL | TOOL |
| CABLE P/N | TYPE | WIRE GAUGE |------------------------------| BODY |
| | CODE | | TOOL | BLADE | COLOR |
|-------------|--------|------------|---------------|--------------|--------|
| E0260 | BF | 24 to 18 | H35/15 | 45-1773-1 | red |
|-------------|--------|------------|---------------|--------------|--------|
| E0261 | CF | 24 to 16 | H35/15 | 45-1773-1 | red |
| | | 14 to 12 | H35/16 | 45-1774-1 | black |
|-------------|--------|------------|---------------|--------------|--------|
| E0262 | DK | 24 to 16 | H35/15 | 45-1773-1 | red |
| | | 14 to 12 | H35/16 | 45-1774-1 | black |
|-------------|--------|------------|---------------|--------------|--------|
| | AK | 24 to 16 | H35/6 | 45-1987-1 | - |
| |--------|------------|---------------|--------------|--------|
| NSA935000 | DE | 24 to 16 | H35/6 | L5563 | - |
| |--------|------------|---------------|--------------|--------|
| | DG | 24 to 16 | H35/6 | L5563 | - |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. IDEAL 45-403
(Ref. Fig. 008)
You must use these pliers with, e.g. blades IDEAL K6492 or K6499.
(1) Procedure
- Put the tool on the outer sheath in the position related to the length you must strip. Make the number of turns necessary to
cut the insulation while you apply moderate pressure.
-
Remove the tool.
-
Remove the outer sheath.
C. NO-NIK 023
(Ref. Fig. 009)
NOTE: You can use these pliers with a stop which you use to adjust the length you must strip.
These pliers have an engraved arrow on the jaws.

(1) Procedure
- Put the cable in position in the direction shown by the arrow on the tool and related to the necessary stripping length (the
length is related to the end item you must install).
-
Pull the pliers in the same direction as the arrow and cut the remaining cable.

Specific tools
D. DAVUM TMCTS031M
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(1) Procedure
- Fully engage the cable between the jaws of the stripping tool.
- Squeeze the tool handles one time. Release the pressure, make a quarter of a turn and squeeze the conductor again.
- Apply a longitudinal force in the conductor axis to remove the cut end of the insulation.
E. ABISOFIX type A3
(Ref. Fig. 011)
This tool is used to remove the anti-signal protection installed on the core insulation on some coaxial cables.
It is used only for the wire diameters 0.6 mm (0.0236 in.) to 2.0 mm (0.0787 in.) .

Thermal tools
5. Thermal tools
A. HOTWEEZERS
(Ref. Fig. 012)
This type of stripping tool is made of a power supply M10 and a thermal knife (hotnife) 2A.
The thermal knife has a heated blade and is used when it is dangerous, for personnel and components, to use a cutter or scalpel.
The heating is adjustable from 149 deg.C (300.20 deg.F) to 843 deg.C (1549.40 deg.F) .
(1) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 013)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
- Adjust the power supply to:
- H9 position ( 650 deg.C (1202.00 deg.F) minimum) for wires derived from AD and DR cables (VNA, VNB, VNC, VND,
MLA, MLB, MLC and MLD cables).
- H10 position ( 750 deg.C (1382.00 deg.F) minimum) for wires derived from CF, DM and DW cables.
-
Install the tool LABINAL D22-029 (or equivalent) in the correct position on the cable.
-
Put the blade flush with the end of this tool.
-
Cut the insulation with the knife in a perpendicular position.
(2) Stripping tool allocation table

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | STRIPPING TOOL |
| CABLE P/N | WIRE TYPE CODE * |---------------------------------------|
| | | POWER SUPPLY | HAND UNIT |
|-------------|---------------------|--------------------|------------------|
| ABS1356 | VNA, VNB, VNC, VND | | |
|-------------|---------------------| HOTWEEZERS M10 | THERMAL KNIFE 2A |
| EN2714-013 | MLA, MLB, MLC, MLD | | (HOTNIFE) |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Derived from AD and DR cables

Automatic tools
6. Automatic tools
A. FE400 (SERIES 4 LTD)
(Ref. Fig. 015)
This tool is used for unshielded cables (gauges 30 to 14) and for a stripping length of 1.5 mm (0.0590 in.)
to 10 mm (0.3937 in.) .

20-25-13 - SPECIFIC STRIPPING PROCEDURE (Airbus)
SPECIFIC STRIPPING PROCEDURE (Airbus)
SPECIFIC STRIPPING PROCEDURE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic gives the stripping procedure for special cases. These special cases are for example:
-
To decrease the wire diameter (seal the wire)
-
To increase the wire diameter (adapt it to the connector cavities)
- Special cable types.
The cables for which a special stripping procedure is necessary and which are installed on the aircraft
have the codes that follow:
-
ABS0386WF twinax cable (2 cores)
- ABS0949AD aluminum cable
EN2267-010DR family copper cable
-
E0259HE screened cable (2 cores)
-
E0274UD24 multicore screened cable (3 cores)
- E0290XM24 coaxial cable (2 cores)
NSA935357XU coaxial cable (2 cores)
-
E0291SW screened cable (1 core)
-
E0299HD multicore cable (3 cores: RG316 + CF24 + CF22)
- E0300HG24 (ex NSA935309YW) multicore screened cable (5 cores)
E0289YZ multicore screened cable (4 cores)
-
E0349WC triaxial cable (1 core)
-
E0738WR coaxial cable (1 core)
- E0437DL high temperature cable
ABS0053PL22 high temperature cable (2 X DL22 cores)
NSA935132DJ20 high temperature cable
- EN2346-005DW unscreened high temperature cable
EN4608-004GP screened high temperature cable
EN4608-005GPB screened high temperature cable
- NSA935306YK multicore screened cable (2 cores)
NSA935298YK multicore screened cable (2 cores).
2. ABS0386WF
(Ref. Fig. 001)
This cable is a twinax cable and includes 2 cores gauge 24 and 2 fillers.
The procedure that follows is used to decrease the core insulations for correct connection in the connector.
NOTE: Apply first, as necessary, the procedure for the shield stop or shield continuity. You must cut the two
fillers during this procedure.
- Step 1: Strip each core to the length "A".

(Ref. Fig. 001)

- Step 2: Select the applicable length "B" of shrinkable sleeve NSA937210MB.

Put the sleeve in position and shrink with the applicable tool for each core.
- Step 3: Strip each core to the length "*" as necessary for the contact used.
NOTE: This length is related to the contact to be connected.
3. ABS0949AD and EN2267DR

(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
AD cable has an aluminum conductor and DR cable has a copper conductor.
NOTE: Crimp the contact as quickly as possible after stripping to prevent corrosion of the conductor.
A. Before stripping (only for AD cable)

(Ref. Fig. 004)
NOTE: For AD cable gauges 24 to 12 with laser marking:

-
You must cut the cable between two adjacent square laser markings.
- If you cut on one of the markings, you must then cut the cable between the two subsequent
square laser markings.
Cut and remove a short piece of cable, minimum 50 mm (1.9685 in.) at the end of the cable. You
must not use the piece of cable that can have possible corrosion contamination.
For cutting, the tools IDEAL T-cutter 45-074 or WEIDMULLER KT8-900265 are recommended. If
not available you can use tools IDEAL T-cutter 45-260 or 45-123.
Put a colored mark on the cable (refer to chapter 20-48-24).
B. Stripping
(Ref. Fig. 002)
Strip the cable to the length "A" depending on the contact used (for cable DR), or depending on the wire
gauge (for cable AD) with the applicable tool.
For the largest wire gauges, you can use the blue disk rubber grip IDEAL 45-333 or equivalent to remove
the insulation more easily.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
C. Reshaping procedure
(Ref. Fig. 003)
After cutting and stripping, make sure that the section of the cable is circular.
If not, you must reshape the section with the applicable tool, depending on the wire gauge.
Select the applicable tool.
- For wire gauges 26 to 12:
- Insert the cable between the jaw ends and grip until the section becomes circular.
- For wire gauges 10 to 0000:
- Fully insert the cable in the tool and turn the tool several times around the cable until its section
becomes circular.
4. E0259HE
(Ref. Fig. 005)
This cable is screened and includes 2 cores gauge 24.
The procedure that follows is used to reduce the core insulations to allow correct connection in the connector.
NOTE: Apply first, depending on the case, the procedure for the shield stop or shield continuity.
A. Stripping for connection with 0161, E0162, E0163, E0164, E0165, E0166, E0170 and E0390 connectors
-
Strip the cores to the length "A"

- Slide and shrink the sleeve NSA937210MB0145 on the conductor, making sure that the lengths "B"
and "D" are correct.
NOTE: If method "E" of solder sleeve installation is used for shield continuity (refer to chapter 20-42-21),
it is necessary to do a shield stop using a NSA937494-04-30 sleeve (refer to chapter 20-42-12).
5. E0274UD24
(Ref. Fig. 006)
This cable is screened and includes 3 cores gauge 24.
The procedure that follows is used to do shield continuity with E0160-1-0-H solder sleeve on this cable.
A. Stripping
- Step 1: Slide a sleeve E0718-06 on the cable.
- Step 2: Make a circular cut at a distance "A" and remove the insulation.
- Step 3: Unwind the braid.
- Step 4: Cut the braid to the length "B".
NOTE: For the installation procedure of the solder sleeve, refer to chapter 20-42-21.
6. E0290XM and NSA935357XU

(Ref. Fig. 007)
These cables are coaxial cables and include 2 cores.
The procedure that follows is used to do shield continuity with E0160-1-3-H solder sleeve on these cables.
A. Stripping
- Slide a sleeve E0718-06-XX on the cable.
- Step 1: Make a circular cut at a distance "A" from the cable end.
- Step 2: Remove the insulation.
- Step 3: Cut the braid to the length "B.
NOTE: You cannot install E0160-1-0-H solder sleeves on some XM24 cables. You must thus install
E0160-1-1-H.
7. E0291SW
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
This cable is a signal transmitting cable used in fuel gage systems.
The procedure that follows is used to do shield continuity with E0160-1-0-H solder sleeve or shield stop on this
cable.
A. Stripping
(1) For shield continuity
(Ref. Fig. 008)
- Step 1: Make three circular cuts to get dimension "A".
- Step 2: Make a longitudinal cut and remove the insulation to a distance "B" from the cable end.
(2) For shield stop
(Ref. Fig. 009)
-
Step 1: Strip the cable to the lengths "A" and "B" in relation to the connector and contacts used.
- Step 2: Install and shrink a sleeve E0718-01 or NSA937494-001 to the correct length in relation
to the connector you will install.

8. E0299HD
(Ref. Fig. 010)
This cable is composed of 3 cables:
-
E0261CF24 screened multicore cable (4 cores)
-
E0261CF22 cable
- RG316 coaxial cable
The procedure that follows is used to do shield continuity on RG316 and CF24 cables and to connect a
NSA1599 connector.
A. Stripping
-
Strip the cables to the lengths A, B, C, D, E, F and G with the applicable tool.
- For shield continuity, do circular cuts A1 and B1, slide the cut insulator and do shield continuity
connection method "E" (refer to chapter 20-42-21).
(1) For RG316 coaxial cable, strip the core to the length "H".
(2) For CF24 and CF22, strip the cores to the length "*" depending on the contact used.
9. E0300HG24 (ex NSA935309YW) and E0289YZ
(Ref. Fig. 011)
These cables are screened and include:
- For E0300HG24:
- 1 cable UD24 (3 cores) + 4 cables XM24 (2 cores).
- For E0289YZ:
- 2 cables UD22 (3 cores) + 2 cables TK22 (2 cores).
The procedure that follows is used to do shield continuity with E0160-1-3H solder sleeve on these
cables.
A. Stripping
-
Step 1: Slide the shrinkable sleeve and the solder sleeve on the cable.
- Step 2: Cut and remove the insulation and the braid to get the dimension "A". Unwind and cut the
polyimide tape and remove the packing.
-
Step 3: Make a circular cut at a distance "B" from the end of the insulation.
-
Step 4: Move the cut external insulation to get the dimension "C".
10. E0349WC
(Ref. Fig. 012)
(Ref. Fig. 013)
This cable is a triaxial cable and includes 1 core and 2 shielding braids that are separately insulated.
The procedure that follows is used to do shield continuity with E0160-1 solder sleeve on this cable.
A. Stripping
(1) For shield continuity and connection to size 20 standard connectors (e.g. NSA1599, E0052, E0053,
E0054, EN3646)
(Ref. Fig. 012)

- Step 1: Strip the cable to the lengths "A", "B", "C" and "D". Install the shield continuity on each
braid.
- Step 2: Install and shrink 2 sleeves E0718-01, -02 and -03 or NSA937494-01, -02 and -03 to the
correct lengths "F", "G" and "H". Strip the cable to the length "E" for crimping of contact PA2000,
SA2000, M2018 or F2018.
(2) For shield stop and connection to BNC type connector NSA938601F03
(Ref. Fig. 013)
- Step 1: Strip the cable to the lengths "A", "B" and "C".
- Step 2: Install and shrink the sleeve E0718-05-25 to the correct length.
- Install a shield stop on the second braid (refer to chapter 20-42-20).
11. E0738WR
(Ref. Fig. 014)
This cable is a coaxial cable that has two shielding braid screens with a layer of high-immunity aluminized
polyimide tape between them.
The procedure that follows is used to install contacts and connectors.
A. Stripping
-
Step 1: Strip the cable to the length in relation to the contact and connector you will use.
-
Step 2: Move the outer braid over the inner one.
- Use scissors to cut and remove as much as possible the high immunity tape from between the two
braids.
-
Step 3: Move the outer braid over the inner one.

ABS0053PL22, E0437DL and NSA935132DJ20
Text continues : see text above
12. ABS0053PL22, E0437DL and NSA935132DJ20

(Ref. Fig. 015)
This high temperature cable has layers of insulation.
The procedure that follows is used to decrease the core insulation for correct connection in the connector.
A. Stripping
- Step 1: Strip the cable to the length "A" with a cutter or a scalpel and complete with the applicable
tool for correct cutting of the external insulation.
-
Step 2: Strip the silicon fiber wrapping of the cable to the length "B".
- Step 3: Slide and shrink a shrinkable sleeve NSA937210MB on the end of the conductor. Make sure
that the lengths "D" and "E" are correct.
-
Step 4: Strip the cable to the length "*", in relation to the contact used.
13. EN2346-005DW, EN4608-004GP and EN4608-005GPB

(Ref. Fig. 016)
This high temperature cable has 3 layers of insulation.
The procedure that follows is used to decrease the core insulation for correct connection in the connector.
A. Stripping
- Step 1: Strip the cable to the length "A" with a cutter or a scalpel and complete with the applicable
tool for correct cutting of the external insulation.
-
Step 2: Strip the fire protection layer of the cable to the length "B".
- Step 3: Slide and shrink a shrinkable sleeve NSA937210MB on the end of the conductor. Make sure
that the lengths "D" and "E" are correct.
-
Step 4: Strip the cable to the length "*", in relation to the contact used.
14. NSA935298YK and NSA935306YK

(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 017)
(Ref. Fig. 018)
These cables are screened and include 2 cores and an anti-signal PTFE tape.
The procedure that follows is used to do shield continuity with E0160-1-1-H solder sleeve on these cables.
A. Stripping
-
Step 1: Make three circular cuts to get dimension "A".
- Step 2: Make a longitudinal cut and remove insulation to a distance "B" from the cable end. Install
the solder sleeve (refer to chapter 20-42-21).
-
Step 3: Make a circular cut to get dimension "C".
-
Step 4: Remove the insulation.
-
Step 5: Cut and remove the braid and the anti-signal PTFE tape and cut the filler.
-
Step 6: Remove the anti-signal PTFE tape from the cores to get dimension "D".
-
Step 7: Install a shrinkable sleeve NSA937210MB0300 and shrink to get dimensions "E" and "F".

ABS0053PL22, E0437DL and NSA935132DJ20
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping and Shrinking Tools ABS0386WF
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping and Shrinking Tools ABS0949AD and
EN2267DR
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Reshaping of the Cable ABS0949AD and
EN2267DR
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Cutting Tools ABS0949AD and EN2267DR
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping and Shrinking Tools E0259HE
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cable E0274UD24
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cables E0290XM and NSA935357XU
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cable E0291SW and NSA935306YK -
for Shield Continuity
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cable E0291SW - for Shied Stop
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping Tools E0299HD
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cables E0300HG24 and E0289YZ
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cable E0349WC - for Shield
Continuity
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cable E0349WC - for Shield Stop
Figure 014.1 / Graphic SH 014.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cable E0738WR
Figure 015.1 / Graphic SH 015.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping ABS0053PL22 and E0437DL
Figure 016.1 / Graphic SH 016.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping EN2346-005DW, EN4608-004GP and
EN4608-005GPB
Figure 017.1 / Graphic SH 017.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cable NSA935298YK or
NSA935306YK
Figure 018.1 / Graphic SH 018.1 Specific Stripping Procedure - Stripping of Cable NSA935298YK or
NSA935306YK

20-25-20 - CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
CRIMPING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give description and operation for crimping tools.
A. General Requirements for Crimping of Electrical Connections (Ref. 20-25-21)
B. Hand Crimping Tools (Ref. 20-25-22)
C. Hydraulic Hand Crimping Tools (Ref. 20-25-23)
D. Pneumatic Crimping Tools (Ref. 20-25-24).
E. Miscellaneous Crimping Tools (Ref. 20-25-29).

General
1. General
The chapters that follow give description and operation for crimping tools.

Structure of the Chapters

A. General Requirements for Crimping of Electrical Connections (Ref. 20-25-21)
B. Hand Crimping Tools (Ref. 20-25-22)
C. Hydraulic Hand Crimping Tools (Ref. 20-25-23)
D. Pneumatic Crimping Tools (Ref. 20-25-24).
E. Miscellaneous Crimping Tools (Ref. 20-25-29).

20-25-21 - GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR CRIMPING OF ELECTRIC
CONNECTIONS (Airbus)
GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR CRIMPING OF ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS (Airbus)
GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR CRIMPING OF ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic gives the minimum standard necessary to get satisfactory electrical joints and also gives the testing of the crimping tools
used in their manufacture.
2. Definition
The crimping gives the electrical and mechanical connection of the wire to an item of equipment or to a connecting system through the
end fitting.
For some contacts (e.g. ABS1380, ABS1381), mechanical crimping and contact sealing are done at the same time.
A. Design Requirements
-
the crimping must compress the strands of the wire but must not cause breakage or start rupture.
-
the connection must not decrease the initial electrical characteristics of the wire.
- the connection must let the assembly made (wire + end fitting + connected item) meet the requirements given in the
standards related to the different assembled components.
- the connection of a component (diode, resistor) to an end termination must be considered as the connection of a nickel-
plated copper-alloy multistrand-wire of the same diameter.
Example: diameter 0.6 mm (0.0236 in.): as 24 size
diameter 0.8 mm (0.0314 in.): as 22 size
diameter 1 mm (0.0393 in.): as 20 size
B. Tensile Strength
(Ref. Fig. 001)
The tensile strength of crimped connections for the different wires must be more than the values given in table 1.
C. Sealing Test (e.g. for AD cables)
You must do the sealing test of the crimped connection on a cable length of 0.5 m (1.64 ft.) .
You must blow the air between the core of the cables and the insulator.
Increase the pressure up to 1 bar (14.5037 psi) (with a maximum speed of 0.2 bar (2.9007 psi) /second) then do a stabilization
step (3 s) and measure the leakage value in cm3/h for 5 minutes.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
| Source | Permitted leakage | Permitted leakage |
| of | for 1 hour | for 5 minutes |
| leakage | with pressure | with pressure |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Rear of the contact | 12 cm3/h (0.73 in3/h)| 1 ml (0.001 USquart) |
|----------------------|----------------------|----------------------|
| Inspection hole | 60 cm3/h (3.66 in3/h)| 5 ml (0.005 USquart) |
----------------------------------------------------------------------
D. Multiple Conductor Crimping Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 002)
NOTE: Only 2 conductors can be inserted into the same contact barrel.
NOTE: You must not twist or cross the conductor cores.
- Insert the two stripped conductors into the contact barrel side-by-side.
- Crimp with the applicable tool.
E. Geometrical Distortion of the End Fittings
Geometrical distortions related to crimping must not hinder, or cause more precautions in, the use of the end fitting in the cavity.
For lugs and removable contacts, the geometrical distortions must not hinder or prevent correct use of the tools specified for the
installation or the removal of the item from the cavity.
For removable contacts, the concentricity defects will be:
-
0.30 mm (0.0118 in.) max. for size 12 and 16 contacts,
-

0.28 mm (0.0110 in.) max. for size 20 contacts and below.

The increase in the crimping barrel diameter will be:
-
0.15 mm (0.0059 in.) max. for size 12 and 16 contacts,
-
0.05 mm (0.0019 in.) max. for size 20 contacts and below.
F. Position of Wire Insulation after Crimping (Barrel Closed) and (Open Barrel)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
3. Procedure
A. Pre-crimping checks
(1) Make sure the wire is correctly stripped (Ref.Chapter. STRIPPING TOOL).
NOTE: For aluminum cable, make sure that there is no oxidation.
NOTE: The connecting surfaces must be clean. (Do not touch them with your bare hands).
(2) Make sure the combination of cable, tool, terminal end or connector is correct.
(a) Select the correct crimping tool and locator (Ref. CRIMPING TOOLS tables).
- Make sure that the locator is in the correct position on the crimping tool.
(b) Before you use a tool, make sure there is:
- Identification (tool serial No.) with its own applicable history card.
If the tool used does more than 1000 crimps in 12 months, a test must be done, unless specified differently.
- clean die faces,
- no damage,
- no corrosion,
- no wear.
Tools that are used regulary must be cleaned each day so that dirt and plating do not collect on die faces.
Be careful not to cause damage to the die faces.
(c) Make one full cycle without contact to make sure that the tool operates correctly.
(3) Preparation checks
- All the strands must be engaged in the barrel of the contact. They must not be bent or spread.
- The cable insulation must not be engaged in the barrel of the contact.
- The stripped conductor must be engaged along the full length of the crimp zone.
B. Post-crimping checks
(1) You must do these visual checks on all crimped joints:
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
(Ref. Fig. 012)
-
correct shape and location of crimp,
-
no fracture and rough or sharp edges,
- burrs are inherent with some types of crimping,
(There must not be too many of these burrs as you cannot remove them without a tool),
-
crimping indents away from inspection hole,
-
crimping indents correctly on the center of the barrel,
-
no damage caused on the attaching system, or to the female-contact pressure system (removable contacts),
-
permitted geometrical distortion, correct die mark,

-
wire seen through inspection hole, if applicable,
- position of insulation after crimping,
(Ref. Fig. 003)
- position of wire after crimping,
(Ref. Fig. 004)
-
no strands out of the crimping barrel (and/or out of the inspection hole),
-
no cut strands,
- sufficient insertion of conductor strands in barrel where it is possible to do a check that does not cause damage to the
conductor,
-
no damage to the conductor.
-
You cannot see bending with your eyes.
NOTE: It is recommended that you lightly pull on each crimp with your hands to make sure that there is no movement of the
conductor in the crimp.
But you must consider the size of the cable you examine.
4. Periodic Tests
A. Test Intervals
-
You must do gauging on each new tool before you use it and, if applicable, specimen checks.
- You must do gauging on each tool at 1000 and 2000 crimps and only send it back for use if correct. The check at 3000
crimps will include gauging and specimen checks. You must do this procedure at the subsequent checks at intervals of 1000
crimps.
-
All tools that are not used regulary must be examined each 12 months for gauging requirements, with the same procedure.
- When it is time to do a 1000-crimp or 12-month check, you must not use the tool again until you know the results of the test
interval and the tool is certified for use.
B. Gauging of Tools:
(Ref. Fig. 013)
To do the test for each tool, you must insert the GO, NO GO gauge.
(1) Example:
Gauge part number: M22520-3-1
(2) Procedure:
- Use a GO, NO GO gauge to do a check of the condition of the crimping tool. When you squeeze the tool handles, the
GO part must go through the dies, the NO GO part must not go through.
- Only one gauge is necessary for the periodic in-service inspection of the crimping tool.
(Ref. Fig. 014)
(3) Inspection Gauge Limits (e.g. for M22520-1-01 crimping tool)
----------------------------------------------------------
| Selector No. | "GO" DIA. | "NO GO" DIA |
| | mm | in. | mm | in. |
|-----------------|---------|--------|---------|---------|
| 1 | 0.7112 | 0.0280 | 0.8382 | 0.0330 |
| 2 | 0.8182 | 0.0320 | 0.9398 | 0.0370 |
| 3 | 0.9144 | 0.0360 | 1.0414 | 0.0410 |
| 4 | 0.9906 | 0.0390 | 1.1176 | 0.0440 |
| 5 | 1.1430 | 0.0450 | 1.2700 | 0.0500 |
| 6 | 1.3208 | 0.0520 | 1.4478 | 0.0570 |
| 7 | 1.4986 | 0.0590 | 1.6256 | 0.0640 |
| 8 | 1.7272 | 0.0680 | 1.8542 | 0.0730 |
----------------------------------------------------------
Use gauges listed above for inspection of tool for different positions of selector knob.
This inspection is not mandatory.
C. Ratchet test
This test finds satisfactory operation of the ratchet with the GO and NO GO gauges. You must engage the gauges from the

locator side of the tool.

(1) Procedure
Example: tool MS3191-1
(a) Under-crimp condition
Close the tool on the NO GO gauge pin until it applies a light pressure on the pin. Remove the NO GO gauge.
NOTE: You must make sure that you do not crimp the gauge.
The tool must not touch and must not automatically go back to the fully open position when the pressure is released from
the handles.
(b) Over-crimp condition
Close the tool to the fully closed (STOP) position. Keep pressure on the tool handles while you engage the GO gauge
pin. The pin must go in freely and the tool must automatically go back to the fully open position when the pressure is
released from the handles.
D. Labelling of specimens
Specimens shall be correctly labelled and carry the following information:
- Name of the department submitting specimens
- Date
- Applicable testing standard
- Tool Part No and Manufacturer
- Tool Serial No.
- Die No. if applicable
- Termination Part No.
- Wire type and gauge
- Manufacturing Process identity (to which the specimens are prepared).
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Table 1 - Minimum Tensile Strength of Crimped Connections (daN)
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 General Requirements for Crimping - Multiple Conductors Crimping Procedure
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Position of Wire Insulation after Crimping (Closed Barrel)
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Position of Wire after Crimping (Open Barrel)
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 General Requirements for Crimping - Acceptance Criteria after Crimping
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 General Requirements for Crimping - Acceptance Criterias after Crimping Copper Terminals
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 General Requirements for Crimping - Acceptance Criterias after Crimping Copper Terminals
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 General Requirements for Crimping - Acceptance Criterias after Crimpinp Aluminium Terminals
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 General Requirements for Crimping - Acceptance Criterias after Crimpinp Aluminium Terminals
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 General Requirements for Crimping - Acceptance Criterias after Crimping Aluminium Terminals

20-25-22 - HAND CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
HAND CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
HAND CRIMPING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic gives the description and procedure for the hand crimping tools that follow:
- MS3191 and MS3191A
- M22520-2-01, M22520-7-01, MS3198 and MS3198-1
- AMP 59500
- AMP 69710
- M22520-1-01
- M22520-5-01 and M22520-10-01
- AMP 46121, 49775(-1) (ex 47386), 47387, 48518 and 409775-1
- AMP 59239-4 or 59239-8
- AMP 46447 and 49935
- AMP 46673
- AMP 45730, 46467, 46468, 46469 and 46470
- AMP 220015-1, 220015-2 and 220045-2
- AMP 46073, 46074 and 59282
- AMP 656075-1
- AMP 220066-1
- AMP 69272-1 and 69260-1
- AMP 49965
- AMP 69322-1
- AMP 69354-1
- AMP 69355
- AMP 576778, 576779, 576780, 484364-1, 576781, 576782, 576783, 576784, 69694-1 and 59461
- AMP 69376-1, 69376-2 and 476408
- AMP 654174-MODA
- PRONER BNC4 (P/N S111001129070) and 11BNC04
- AMP 753898-1
- DANIELS GMT221
- CANNON CCT1612
- DANIELS M309 and M300BT
- AMP 525651
- RENNSTEIG 8500-0501-6, 8500-0506-6, 8510-0502-6, 8510-0503-6, 8520-0504-6, 8520-0505-6 and 8530-0601-6.
- CANNON 683-51470-4
- CANNON CA58073-000
- CANNON CCTDM
- CANNON CCT408M and CCTHX4-524
- DMC M300BT
- TYCO 1901600-1, 1901600-2, 1901611-1 and 1901611-2
- AMP 91593-1
- AMP 169994-1
- AMP 654174-1 and 654174-2
- AMP 2063760-1
2. MS3191 and MS3191A Hand Crimping Tool
A. Example of connection P/N used with this tool
------------------------------------------------------------
| CRIMPING TOOLS | CONNECTION |
|-------------------------|---------------------------------
| NORM | P/N | P/N | TYPE |
|------------|----------- |-------------|-------------------
| MS | MS3191 | NSA938167 | NORMAL CONTACTS |
| | | NSA938168 | |
| | | NSA938189 | |
|------------|------------|-------------|----------------- |

| MS | MS3191-A | NSA938171 | COAXIAL CONTACTS |

| | | NSA938172 | |
------------------------------------------------------------
B. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(1) The basic tool is identified MS3191-A.
(2) The same tool, supplied with three standard locators in the handle when not in use, is identified MS3191-1.
(3) These standard locators are used to crimp many contacts or crimp ends (20, 16 or 12 gauge) for NAS1599, MIL-C-
26482, DPA, DPAMA, DPX, etc. connectors.
C. Table of standard locators
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CONTACT | LOCATOR |
| GAUGE |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| | MS | BUCHANAN | COLOR |
|--------------|--------------------|----------------------|-----------------|
| 20 | MS3191-20A | 11062 | RED |
|--------------|--------------------|----------------------|-----------------|
| 16 | MS3191-16A | 2520-3 | BLUE |
|--------------|--------------------|----------------------|-----------------|
| 12 | MS3191-12A | 2520-4 | YELLOW |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
D. Procedure
(1) Locator installation
-
Fully close the tool handles to release the ratchet and then release the handles.
-
Loosen the locking screw of the locator retaining latch.
-
Pull the locator retaining latch to the open position.
- Pull the locator release slide and remove the locator found in the tool. Install the selected locator with the flat
part of the locator opposite the flat part of the tool. The collar of the locator must be at the tool face.
-
Push the retaining latch and tighten the locking screw.
- You can use the tool at this time. No adjustments are necessary.
To store the standard locators in the handle when not in use, pull and turn the cap out.
(2) Crimping
- Open and close the tool several times to do a check of correct tool ratchet operation (a locator must be in
position to operate the tool).
-
Make sure that the locator in position in the tool is the one related to the contact to be crimped.
-
Fully close the tool handles and then release.
-
Engage the stripped end of the conductor in the contact barrel.
-
Hold the tool vertically and horizontally engage the conductor and contact assembly between the dies.
-
Fully close the tool handles to do a full crimping cycle.
-
Remove the crimped contact.
E. Vendors
MS3191 hand crimping tools are supplied by the vendors in the list below, with the part numbers that follow:
-------------------------------
| Vendor | Vendor P/N |
------------------------------|
| Souriau | 8465 |

| Amphenol | 294-1166 |
| Amphenol | 294-126 |
| Socapex | 809-700 |
| Jaeger | 597-218 |
| E.A Martin | 11800 |
| Buchanan | 10692 |
| Bendix | 11-7295 |
| Radiall | 212-290 |
| Deutsch | 41-000 |
-------------------------------
3. M22520-2-01, M22520-7-01, MS3198 and MS3198-1 Hand Crimping Tools
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|----------------------------------|
|---------|-------------- |---------------|------------------|
| | | ABS0973 | |
| | | ABS0974 | |
| MIL | M22520-2-01 | ABS1581 | QUADRAX CONTACTS |
| | | ABS1582 | |
| | | EN3155-074 | |
| | | EN3155-075 | |
|---------|---------------|---------------|------------------|
| | | AMP 225936-2 | |
| | | E0173 | |
| | | E0375 | COAXIAL CONTACTS |
| | | M39029-55-344 | |
| | | NSA938171 | |
| | | NSA938172 | |
| | | NSA938400 | |
| | |---------------|------------------|
| | | E0180 | COAXIAL PLUGS |
| | | NSA938012 | |
| | | NSA938013 | |
| | |---------------|------------------|
| | | E0078 | NORMAL CONTACTS |
| | | E0170 | |
| | | E0171 | |
| | | E0252 | |
| | | E0374 | |
| | | E0395 | |
| | | E0396 | |
| MIL | M22520-2-01 | E0445 | |
| MIL | M22520-7-01(*)| E0446 | |
| MS | MS3198 | E0546 | |
| | | E0547 | |
| | | E0685 | |
| | | EN3155-003 | |
| | | NSA937910 | |
| | | NSA938151 | |
| | | NSA938152 | |
| | | NSA938159 | |
| | | NSA938160 | |
| | | NSA938164 | |
| | | NSA938165 | |
| | | NSA938187 | |
| | | NSA938190 | |
| | | NSA938191 | |

| | | NSA938193 | |
| | | NSA938194 | |
| | | NSA938402 | |
| | | NSA938403 | |
| |---------------|---------------| |
| | MS3198-1 | NSA938190 | |
| | | NSA938191 | |
--------------------------------------------------------------
(*) Only for Normal Contacts
B. Designation
(1) M22520-2-01 and MS3198
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(a) These crimping tools are used to crimp wire gauges 26 thru 12.
(b) You can adjust the crimp depth with an 8-position selector knob.
(c) A positioner (or locator) is necessary for correct crimping of contact.
(d) Positioners (or locators) for the MS3198 tool are interchangeable with those for the M22520-2-01 tool.
(2) M22520-7-01
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(a) This crimping tool is used to crimp contact barrels of sizes 26 thru 12.
(b) You can adjust the crimp depth with an 8-position selector knob.
(c) A positioner (or locator) is necessary for correct crimping of contact.
C. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(1) Locator installation
- Remove the safety pin.
- Select the applicable locator for the contact to be crimped.
- Put the locator in position on the lock plate and turn the locator 90 to lock it in position.
- Install the safety pin.
(2) Setting of selector knob
(a) For M22520-2-01 and M22520-7-01
- Refer to data plate to select the correct setting number.
- Lift the selector knob and put the selected number opposite index "SEL. NO.".
- Install the safety pin.
(b) For MS3198
-
Refer to data plate on locator to select the correct setting number.
- Setting is done in relation to the tool manufacturer:
- Either do a full turn of a self-locking button and the number comes into view in a window on the side
(BUCHANAN),
- or lift, turn and align the indicator. To lock the button, release it when its notch is opposite the pin
(DANIELS).
(3) Crimping
- Engage the contact between the indents in the locator.
- Engage the stripped wire against the contact stop and make sure that no strands are out of the crimped barrel.
- Fully close the tool until the ratchet releases.
- Remove the crimped assembly.
D. Vendors
MS3198, M22520-2-01 and M22520-7-01 crimping tools are identified as follows:
-------------------------------------------------------------------


| |----------------------------------------------------|
| | MS3198 | M22520-2-01 | M22520-7-01 |
|------------|---------------|-------------------|----------------|
| Daniels | MH780 | AFM8 | MH860 |
| Daniels | MH800 | -- | -- |
| Buchanan | 612596 | 615717 | 616336 |
| Souriau | 8476 | -- | -- |
| Deutsch | MH800 | -- | -- |
| Radiall | -- | 282281 | -- |
|------------|---------------|-------------------|----------------|
| Socapex | 809801 | -- | -- |
| Amphenol | 294-266 | -- | -- |
| Amphenol | 294-268 | -- | -- |
| Jaeger | 579316 | -- | -- |
| AMP | -- | 601966-1 | -- |
-------------------------------------------------------------------

AMP Hand Crimping Tool P/N 59500
E. Table of Standard Positioners

-----------------------------------------
| Positioner |
|---------------------------------------|
| Norm | P/N |
|-----------------|---------------------|
| ABS | ABS0079* |
| ABS | ABS0080** |
|-----------------|---------------------|
| MIL | M22520-2-02 |
| MS | MS3198-1PA |
|-----------------|---------------------|
| MIL | M22520-2-03 |
| MS | MS3198-2PA |
| Amphenol | 294-1551-01 |
|-----------------|---------------------|
| Daniels | L3198-20HD |
| Daniels | K181 |
| Daniels | 613652 |
| Daniels | K127-2 * |
|-----------------|---------------------|
| MIL | M22520-7-03 |
| Daniels | 86-2 |
|---------------------------------------|
| NEUTRIK | CRB01 |
|---------------------------------------|
| EN | EN3155-003 * |
| EN | EN3155-004 * |
| EN | EN3155-006 ** |
| EN | EN3155-007 * |
| EN | EN3155-008 ** |
| EN | EN4008-006 ** |
| EN | EN4008-007 * |
-----------------------------------------
* Only for M22520-2-01
** Only for M22520-7-01
4. AMP Hand Crimping Tool P/N 59500
---------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|---------------|-------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 59500 | NSA937503 | FERRULES |
| | | NSA937505 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------
B. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)

AMP hand crimping tool P/N 59500 is used to crimp high-temperature ferrules.
C. Installation of dies
-
Each set of dies has a male and a female die.
-
Put the male and female dies together so that the color-coded grooves are aligned.
- Pull the female-die holding pin out of the tool. Squeeze the handles together as far as they will go.
The male-die holding screw will now come into view. Turn the holding screw so that the slot points to
the top of the tool.
- Push the assembled die set into the head of the tool with the color-coded grooves aligned with the
die guide pin.
-
Turn the male-die holding screw a quarter turn left or right to lock the die.
- Open the handles slightly and push the female die down so that the hole in the female die is aligned
with the hole in the tool. Insert the female-die holding pin.
D. Extraction of dies
- Squeeze the handles until the male-die holding screw comes into view. Turn the screw so that the
slot points to the top of the tool.
-
Remove the female-die holding pin.
-
Push the male die up and out of the tool with a small screwdriver or drift pin.
E. Crimping procedure
- Put the ferrule on the cable and make sure that the braided screen goes on and around the ferrule.
Attach the ground cable, if necessary.
- Open the tool handles fully and put the ferrule assembled on the cable fully into the lower crimp area
of the dies.
- Hold the ground cable and the screened cable in position and squeeze the tool handles until the
"certi-crimp" ratchet releases. Open the handles and remove the crimped assembly.
-
Install an insulating cap (if post insulated ferrule).
- For high-temperature ferrules, install a TEFLON insulation cap and crimp the color-coded ring with
the same dies as used for the ferrule.
5. AMP Crimping Tool P/N 69710
---------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|---------------------------------- |
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| | | ABS0714 | COAXIAL CONTACTS |
| | |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 69710 | NSA938601 | COAXIAL PLUGS |
| | | NSA938621 | |
| | |---------------|-------------------|
| | | NSA936501 | TERMINALS |
---------------------------------------------------------------
B. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(1) AMP Crimping tool P/N 69710 is used to crimp PIDG Stratotherm terminals.

(2) Terminals and tools are supplied by AMP.

(3) Crimping of terminals is done in one operation:
- either with a removable-die crimping tool,
- or with a fixed-die crimping tool.
6. M22520-1-01 Hand Crimping Tool
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|------------------|
| | | E0201 | |
| | |---------------|------------------|
| | | E0461 | |
| | | E0462 | |
| | | E0463 | |
| | |---------------|------------------|
| | | ABS0832 | |
| | | E0078 | |
| | | E0170 | |
| | | E0252 | |
| | | E0374 | |
| | | E0395 | |
| | | E0396 | |
| | | E0445 | |
| | | E0446 | |
| | | E0546 | |
| | | E0547 | |
| MIL | M22520-1-01| EN3155-003F | NORMAL CONTACTS |
| | | NSA932829 | |
| | | NSA932833 | |
| | | NSA937910 | |
| | | NSA938151 | |
| | | NSA938152 | |
| | | NSA938159 | |
| | | NSA938160 | |
| | | NSA938164 | |
| | | NSA938165 | |
| | | NSA938184 | |
| | | NSA938185 | |
| | | NSA938192 | |
| | | NSA938193 | |
| | | NSA938194 | |
| | | NSA938403 | |
--------------------------------------------------------------
B. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(1) The specification part number for the basic tool is M22520-1-01.

(2) The tool can crimp 26 to 12 gauge wires and has a selector knob numbered from 1 to 8 to adjust the
crimping depth.
(3) Crimping is done with a turret head assembly or positioner which you must install on the tool.
(4) The most frequently used turret (Specification P/N M22520-1-02) is used to
(Ref. Fig. 007)
crimp all contacts to MS3190, NAS1660, MS83723, etc. standards. These would be crimped with the
MS3191 tool and the standard locators stored in the handle.
C. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(1) Turret installation
-
Push the turret trigger to release the locators.
-
Put the turret in position on the ring with the screws opposite the attachment holes.
- When the turret is in position on the ring, attach it with a 9/64 allen wrench (the turret is attached
with 2 captive hollow hexagonal screws).
(2) Locator selection
- Push the trigger to unlock the locators.
- Select the locator in relation to the color given on the data plate.
- Move the selected color opposite the index mark.
- Push and lock.
(3) Indenter depth selection
- Refer to the data plate to select the correct depth.
- Open the tool before you select.
- Lift and turn the selector knob to move the selected number opposite the selection index.
- Put the safety pin back in position.
- Do the operation again each time the wire or contact is changed.
NOTE: For M22520-1-01 used with turret M22520-1-04, for series production purpose, the crimping
selector must be modified. On the selector, the "cable size" option must be masked or
removed (only notches 1 to 8 must be maintained). The tool must be identified with label "-1-
04".
(4) Crimping
- Engage the conductor in the contact and make sure that you can see it through the inspection
hole. Make sure that no strands are out of the barrel.
-
Engage the contact between the indents in the locator.
-
Fully close the tool until the ratchet releases.
-
Remove the crimped assembly.
D. Vendors
You can get M22520-1-01 crimping tools from the vendors that follow:
------------------------------
|-------------|--------------|
| Daniels | AF8 |
| Buchanan | 615708 |

| Amphenol | 294-542 |
| Socapex | 809857 |
| Radiall | 282291 |
-----------------------------
E. Table of Standard Positioners
--------------------------------
| POSITIONER P/N |
|------------------------------|
| NORM | P/N |
|--------------|---------------|
| MIL | M22520-1-02** |
| MIL | M22520-1-04 |
| MIL | M22520-1-05* |
| Daniels | TH1A |
| Daniels | TH70 |
| Buchanan | 615709 |
| Amphenol | 294-1889-01 |
| Socapex | 809859 |
| DMC | TP567 |
--------------------------------
* For specific contacts
** For ABS0852 crimping, you must use the adaptor FRAMATOME 8660-2745
7. Crimping Tools M22520-5-01 and M22520-10-01
(Ref. Fig. 008)
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|------------------|
| | | E0173 | |
| | | E0178 | |
| | | E0201 | |
| | | E0375 | |
| | | M39029/55-344 | |
| | | NSA938400 | |
| MIL |M22520-5-01 |---------------|------------------|
| MIL |M22520-10-01| E0180 | |
| | | E0461 | |
| | | E0462 | |
| | | E0463 | |
| | | NSA938012 | |
| | | NSA938013 | |
--------------------------------------------------------------
B. Description
(1) These are found in different sizes with similar design.
These tools have many dies with one, two or three crimping chambers. Die P/N selection will be
related to use.

(a) M22520-5-01
Used with interchangeable dies with 1, 2 or 3 crimping chambers (hexagon or circular).
-----------------------------------------------
| DIE SET P/N |
|---------------------------------------------|
| MIL STANDARD | EQUIVALENT |
|------------------------|--------------------|
| NORM | P/N | NORM | P/N |
|--------|---------------|-----------|--------|
| MIL | M22520-5-03 | DANIELS | Y196 |
|--------|---------------|-----------|--------|
| MIL | M22520-5-05 | DANIELS | Y197 |
|--------|---------------|-----------|--------|
| MIL | M22520-5-07 | DANIELS | Y195 |
|--------|---------------|-----------|--------|
| MIL | M22520-5-08 | DANIELS | Y215 |
|--------|---------------|-----------|--------|
| MIL | M22520-5-37 | DANIELS | Y138 |
|--------|---------------|-----------|--------|
| MIL | M22520-5-45 | DANIELS | Y143 |
|--------|---------------|-----------|--------|
| MIL | M22520-5-61 | DANIELS | Y178 |
-----------------------------------------------
(b) M22520-10-01

AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 46121, 49775(-1) (ex 47386), 47387 and 48518
This tool is smaller than HX4 and is used in areas where access is not easy.
It is used with interchangeable dies with 1 or 2 hexagon crimping chambers.
C. Table of standard locators
--------------------------------
| LOCATOR P/N |
|------------------------------|
| NORM | P/N |
|--------------|---------------|
| Daniels | K127-2 |
| EN | EN4008-007 |
--------------------------------
D. Vendors
M22520-5-01 and M22520-10-01 crimping tools are supplied by the vendors in the list below with the part numbers that
follow:
-------------------------------------------------
| | Vendor P/N |
| Vendor |---------------------------------|
| | M22520-5-01 | M22520-10-01 |
|-------------|----------------|----------------|
| RADIALL | 282293 | - |
-------------------------------------------------
E. Extraction of Dies
- Remove the lock pins from the tool.
- For the upper die, engage the extraction tool and tap on the top of the tool.
- For the lower die, put the extraction tool in position and make the tool handles open.
F. Installation of Dies
- Make sure the lock pins are removed.
- Open the tool.
- Install the die rail slot in the die rail.
- Close the tool to make sure the dies are correctly installed.
8. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 46121, 49775(-1) (ex 47386), 47387 and 48518
(Ref. Fig. 009)
A. Example of connection P/N used with this tool:
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| | 46121 | | |
| | 47386-0 | | |
| | 47386-2 | NSA936503 | |
| | 47387-0 | | |
| | 47387-2 | | TERMINALS |
| | 48518 | | |
| | 49775 | | |
| AMP |----------- |---------------| |
| | 47386-0 | ABS0909 | |
| | 47386-8 | | |
| | 49775 | | |
| |------------|---------------|-------------------|
| | 47386-0 | NSA936604 | END CAPS |
| | 47387-0 | | |
| | 49775-1 | | |
---------------------------------------------------------------

B. Designation
The tool P/N is etched on the body.
The handle end colors agree with the color of the terminal to be crimped.
After crimping, make sure that you can see the correct dot code on the terminal barrel. This shows that the tool was
correct for the task.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TOOL P/N | OTHER | TOOL | TOOL COLOR | WIRE | CONNECTION |
| | TOOL P/N* | DESCRIPTION | AND DOT | GAUGE | INSULATED |
| | | | | | COLOR |
|-----------|-----------|---------------|--------------|-------|------------|
| 47386-2 | - | short handles | | | |
| 49775 | | | | | |
|-----------|-----------|---------------| one dot (.) | 14-12 | yellow |
| | 47386 | | yellow/red | | red |
| 47386-0 | 47386-4 | long handles | | | |
| 49775-1 | 409775-1 | | | | |
|-----------|-----------|---------------|--------------|-------|------------|
| 47387-2 | - | short handles | | | |
|-----------|-----------|---------------| two dots (..)|20-16HD| green |
| 47387-0 | 47387 | long handles | blue/green | 16-14 | blue |
|-----------|-----------|---------------|--------------|-------|------------|
| 46121 | - | long handles | one dot (.) | | |
|-----------|-----------|---------------| yellow/red | 26-22 | yellow |
| 48518 | - | short handles | | | |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
* A tool can have several P/Ns for the same vendor (different country of
origin, etc.).
C. Crimping procedure
- Open the jaws fully and insert the terminal. The palm of the terminal must protrude through the terminal stop and the
barrel must touch the terminal stop. For transverse crimping, put the terminal palm through the slot.
- Close the handles until the terminal is held. Put the stripped cable into the barrel. Hold the cable in position and
close the handles fully until the ratchet releases.
NOTE: When you crimp "in line" splice joints, you must use the same position as for terminals and crimp each half of
splice (two crimping operations).
9. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 59239-4 or 59239-8

(Ref. Fig. 010)
---------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 59239-4 | NSA936604 | END CAPS |
| | 59239-8 | | |
---------------------------------------------------------------
B. Designation
The tool P/N is etched on the body.
The tool color code agrees with the color of the end cap to be crimped.
NOTE: Only wire gauge 10 must be stripped before crimping of the cap.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TOOL P/N | OTHER | TOOL | TOOL COLOR | WIRE | CONNECTION |
| | TOOL P/N* | DESCRIPTION | AND DOT | GAUGE | INSULATED |
| | | | | | COLOR |
|-----------|-----------|---------------|--------------|-------|------------|
| 59239-4 | 59239-8 | insulation | one dot (.) | | |

| | | crimping pins | yellow | 12-10 | yellow |

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
origin, etc.).
-
Put the insulation adjustment pin(s) in position in hole "1".
-
Squeeze the tool handles until the ratchet releases to open the tool.
- Engage the cap against the locator between the tool jaws. Hold the cap, without deformation, between the lightly
tightened jaws.
-
Engage the cable in the cap and squeeze the handles until the ratchet automatically releases, which opens the tool.
-
Remove the crimped cap.
NOTE: After crimping, make sure that you can see the correct dot code on the end cap barrel. This shows that the tool
was correct for the task.
10. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 46447 and 49935

(Ref. Fig. 011)
- Example of connection P/N used with this tool
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| | | NSA936809 | SPLICES |
| | |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 46447 | E0521 | |
| | | NSA936507 | |
| | | NSA936510 | TERMINALS |
|------------|------------|---------------| |
| AMP | 49935 | NSA936506 | |
| | | NSA936510 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------
- Crimping tool P/N 46447
Engraved plate: high temperature, red-painted.
-----------------------
| TOOL 46447 |
| CRIMP SIZE |
|---------------------|
| 22 - 16 |
| 16 - 14 |
| 12 - 10 |
-----------------------
Engraved plate: low temperature, blue-painted.
-----------------------
| TOOL 49935 |
| CRIMP SIZE |
|---------------------|
| 16 - 14 |
| 12 - 10 |
-----------------------
A. Crimping procedure
- Put the splice/terminal in position and center it in the indenter or between the tool dies. If you can see the soldered
seam on the splice/terminal, put it in position and center it opposite the punch.
-
Squeeze the tool handles to hold the splice/terminal in the crimping position.

-
Engage the cables in the splice/terminal and make sure that all strands are in the splice/terminal.
- Move the two handles together and apply pressure to do the crimping operation. Make sure full crimping is done
(when the ratchet releases).
-
- Do a check of the crimped splice/terminal to make sure that:
- The cable insulator does not go into the splice/terminal barrel,
- The crimping indents are centered,
- The stripped conductors do not protrude too much (< 1 mm (0.0393 in.) ).
11. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 46673
(Ref. Fig. 012)
--------------------------------------------------------------
| CRIMPING TOOL | CONNECTION |
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 46673 | E0348 | TERMINAL |
---------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------
| TOOL 46673 |
| CRIMP SIZE |
|---------------------|
| 22 - 16 |
-----------------------
B. Crimping procedure
(1) Example: terminal crimping
- Strip the wire to the applicable length.
- To open the crimping jaws, squeeze the tool handles together until the CERTI-CRIMP ratchet releases.
NOTE: You cannot open the tool handles until they are fully closed.
- Put the terminal in position in the crimping jaws. Make sure that the edge of the wire barrel sleeve is against the
locator.
- Squeeze the handles sufficiently to hold the terminal tightly in position, but not to cause deformation of the
terminal barrel.
- Engage the stripped wire through the insulation barrel sleeve and into the wire barrel sleeve until it is flush with
the outer edge of the sleeve.
-
Fully squeeze the tool handles until the CERTI-CRIMP ratchet releases.
-
Remove the crimped terminal from the crimping jaws.
C. Insulation crimping adjustment

You can adjust the insulation crimping with two pins engaged in holes numbered:
1 = tight
2 = medium
3 = loose
To get the correct insulation grip:
- Engage pins into position 3.
- Put the terminal in position in the crimping jaws as given in the crimping procedure.
- Engage an unstripped wire into only the insulation barrel sleeve of the terminal.
- Do a test crimp as given in the crimping procedure.
- Remove the crimped terminal and do a check of the insulation support.
- If necessary, adjust the pins and do a test crimp again until you get the correct insulation grip.
12. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 45730, 46467, 46468, 46469 and 46470
(Ref. Fig. 013)

A. Example of connection P/N used with these tools:

--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| | 45730 | | |
| | 46467 | | |
| AMP | 46469 | NSA936803 | SPLICES |
| | 46470 | E0360 | |
| | 46468 | | |
| |------------|---------------|-------------------|
| | 46468 | NSA936504 | TERMINALS |
---------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Example: splice crimping
-
To strip the wires, obey the instructions given in the applicable chapter.
-
Make sure that the insulation sleeve is on the wire before stripping or crimping.
-
Use the applicable crimping tool related to the reference number of the splice.
-
Open the crimping jaws by squeezing the tool handles together until the CERTI-CRIMP ratchet releases.
- For barrel type 1:
- Put the splice in the crimping tool die. The end to be crimped is against the stop of the crimping tool.
- Put one half of the splice in the splice barrel crimping-nest, as shown.
(Ref. Fig. 013)
Note that the barrel is against the stop.
- Squeeze the handles sufficiently to hold the splice tightly in position, but not to cause deformation of the splice
barrel.

AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 220015-1, 220015-2 and P/N 220045-2

- Engage the correctly stripped wire into the splice barrel through the stop side.
- Engage the correctly stripped wire into the splice barrel through the crimping die.
- To crimp one half of the splice, squeeze the tool handles together until the CERTI-CRIMP ratchet releases. Let the tool
handles open FULLY.
- Remove the splice and put the uncrimped half of the splice in the barrel crimping area. Squeeze the handles sufficiently to
hold the splice tightly in position.
-
Engage the correctly stripped wire into the splice barrel.
- To complete the crimp, close the handles until the ratchet releases. To see if the splice is correctly crimped, compare it to
the figure.
(Ref. Fig. 013)
13. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 220015-1, 220015-2 and P/N 220045-2
(Ref. Fig. 014)
(Ref. Fig. 015)
Example of connection P/N used with this tool
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| | | E0375 | |
| | | NSA938400 | |
| | 220015-1 | NSA938601 | |
| | | NSA938621 | |
| | | NSA938641 | |
| | | NSA938661 | |
| AMP |------------|---------------| COAXIAL PLUGS |
| | 220015-2 | NSA938601 | |
| | | NSA938621 | |
| |------------|---------------| |
| | 220045-2 | NSA938641 | |
| | | NSA938661 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------
Checks of the crimping tools must be done at intervals.
This requirement is certified by an inspection stamp.
Two test crimps successively made with the same tool are necessary on each connector.
The tools have a ratchet system to do full crimping of the terminal.
A. Crimping procedure
(1) AMP220045-2
(Ref. Fig. 015)
(a) Contacts
- Make sure that the reversible locator points in the correct direction.
- Slide the ferrule on the stripped cable.
- Install the contact on the crimping tool.
- Lightly squeeze the tool to hold the contact but do not cause strain on the barrel.
- Engage the stripped end of the cable into the contact barrel up to the dielectric.
- Fully squeeze the tool until the ratchet releases.
- Remove the crimped contact.
(b) Ferrule
- Slide the connector body on the crimped contact and push the small end of the connector below the braid until the
cable dielectric touches the connector dielectric.
-
Slide the ferrule into the connector.
-
Squeeze the tool until the ratchet releases.
(2) AMP220015-1 and 22015-2

(Ref. Fig. 014)

(a) Contacts
- Slide the ferrule on the stripped cable.
- Set the center contact locator with the knurled knob located aft of the head:
- To the "closed" position for a short contact,
- To the "open" position for a long contact.
- Engage the stripped end of the cable into the contact and make sure that the cable dielectric is against the contact.
- Put the contact in the head of the pliers.
- Push the cable perpendicularly to the locator.
- To crimp, fully squeeze the handles together until the ratchet releases and lets the jaws open.
- Remove the crimped contact.
(b) Ferrule
- Engage the crimped center contact into the front part of the connector with the cable braid on its support aft of the
connector.
-
Move the ferrule on the braid.
-
Put the connector in the head of the pliers with the cable on the "cable side --->" side.
-
Make sure that the ferrule is in the upper jaw and the shoulder of the connector body is against the jaw.
-
Squeeze the handles together until the ratchet releases and lets the jaws open.
-
Remove the connector.
14. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 46073, 46074 and 59282
(Ref. Fig. 016)
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| | 46073 | | |
| | 46074 | NSA936805 | |
| AMP | 59282 | | SPLICES |
| |------------|---------------| |
| | 46073 | ABS0249 | |
|--------------------------------------------------------------
- Operate the tool handle until the "certi-crimp" ratchet releases and the handles open fully. When the ratchet is engaged, you
cannot open the handles until the full crimping cycle is completed.
- Engage the stripped cable into the splice. The end of the conductor must come into view in the window indent of the splice.
Make sure that the cable insulation does not go into the crimp barrel.
-
Push the splice in the locator, the window indent on the splice points to the nest.
-
Hold the cable in position and close the handles until the ratchet releases.
- To crimp the other half of the splice, remove it and change its position in the locator. If you cannot turn the splice, turn the tool
over. Do these operations again.
-
Make sure that the conductor comes into view in the window.
15. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 656075-1

(Ref. Fig. 017)
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 656075-1 | ABS0231 | TERMINALS |
---------------------------------------------------------------
16. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 220066-1
(Ref. Fig. 018)


--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| | | AMP225936-2 | |
| AMP | 220066-1 | E0375 | COAXIAL CONTACTS |
| | | NSA938400 | |
|--------------------------------------------------------------
17. AMP Hand Crimping Tool P/N 69260-1 and 69272-1
(Ref. Fig. 019)
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 69260-1 | NSA936601 | END CAPS |
| | 69272-1 | | |
|--------------------------------------------------------------
B. Designation
(1) 69260-1
(Ref. Fig. 019)
The head of the tool P/N 69260-1 has two crimping areas.
The tool dies and cap rings have a color code for a given wire insulation diameter range.
Crimp the color-coded cap ring in the applicable color-coded dies.
(2) 69272-1
(Ref. Fig. 020)
The head of the tool P/N 69272-1 has three crimping areas.
The tool dies and cap rings have a color code for a given wire insulation diameter range.
Crimp the color-coded cap ring in the applicable color-coded dies.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TOOL P/N | OTHER | TOOL | TOOL DIE | WIRE | CONNECTION |
| | TOOL P/N* | DESCRIPTION | COLOR | GAUGE | INSULATED |
| | | | | | COLOR |
|-----------|-----------|---------------|--------------|-------|------------|
| | | insulation | | | |
| 69260-1 | - | crimping pins | brown | - | brown |
| | | (2 positions) | natural | | natural |
|-----------|-----------|---------------|--------------|-------|------------|
| | | insulation | green | | green |
| 69272-1 | - | crimping pins | orange | - | orange |
| | | (3 positions) | white | | nickel |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
origin, etc...).
- Squeeze the tool handles until the ratchet releases to open the tool.
- Engage the cap in the applicable indent. Make sure that the cap is fully engaged against the back of the indent.
- Lightly close the tool handles to hold the cap in position but do not cause deformation of the cap.
- Fully engage the unstripped cable in the cap.
- To crimp, squeeze the tool handles until the ratchet releases and automatically opens the handles.
- Remove the crimped assembly.
18. AMP Hand Crimping Tool P/N 49965
(Ref. Fig. 021)
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|

|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 49965 | NSA936505 | TERMINALS |
---------------------------------------------------------------
19. AMP 69322-1 Hand Crimping Tool
(Ref. Fig. 022)
This tool is used to crimp high-temperature parallel splices on wires, gauges 22 to 10.
20. AMP Hand Crimping Tool P/N 69354-1
(Ref. Fig. 023)
--------------------------------------------------------------
|------------------------|----------------------------------- |
|------------|-----------|----------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 69354-1 | NSA936505 | TERMINALS |
---------------------------------------------------------------
21. AMP 69355 Hand Crimping Tool
(Ref. Fig. 024)
This tool is used to crimp terminals and splices on wires, gauge 8.
---------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| | | E0360 | BUTT SPLICE |
| | | E0521 | TERMINAL |
| AMP | 69355 | NSA936506 | TERMINAL |
| | | NSA936507 | TERMINAL |
| | | NSA936803 | BUTT SPLICE |
| | | NSA936808 | PARALLEL SPLICE |
---------------------------------------------------------------
22. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 576778, 576779, 576780, 484364-1, 576781, 576782, 576783, 576784, 69694-1 and 59461
(Ref. Fig. 025)
---------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| | 576778 | | |
| | 576779 | | |
| | 576780 | | |
| | 484364-1 | | |
| AMP | 576781 | NSA936501 | TERMINALS |
| | 576782 | | |
| | 576783 | | |
| | 576784 | | |
| | 69694-1 | | |
| | 59461 | | |
---------------------------------------------------------------
B. Crimping with Fixed-Die Crimping Tools
Use the table below to select the crimping tool in relation to the wire and terminal to be crimped. Do a check of tool condition,
appearance and operation between two periodic checks.
C. Insulation Crimping Adjustment Procedure
(1) The insulation crimp section of each tool has three adjustment positions.
(2) To do the adjustment, remove the insulation adjustment pin from its housing and engage it in the applicable position.


AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 69376-1, 69376-2 and 476408
-
Engage the adjustment pin in the No. 3 position.
-
Put the terminal in the crimping dies as for normal crimping.
- Get the wire applicable to the terminal and engage the unstripped wire into only the insulation
grip part of the terminal.
If two wires are crimped in the same terminal, do the grip test with the two wires.
-
Crimp the terminal.
- Remove the terminal and do a check of the insulation grip as follows: bend the wire back and
forth. The terminal sleeve must continue to hold the wire insulation.
- If the wire comes out, set the insulation adjustment pin to the No. 2 position and do the test
again.
-
If the test results are not satisfactory, set the adjustment pin to the No. 1 position.
(4) The table below gives the crimping adjustments currently in use.
--------------------------------------------------------------
| CABLE | WIRE TYPE | INSTALLATION |
| GAUGE | CODE | SETTING |
|------------------|-----------------------------------------|
| 24 | BF,CF,DK,DM,DR | 1 |
|------------------|--------------------|--------------------|
| | CF | 1 |
| 22 |--------------------|--------------------|
| | BF,DK,DM,DR | 2 |
|------------------|--------------------|--------------------|
| 20 | BF,CF,DK,DM,DR | 1 |
|------------------|--------------------|--------------------|
| | CF,DM,DR | 1 |
| 18 TO 10 |--------------------|--------------------|
| | BF,DK | 2 |
--------------------------------------------------------------
23. AMP Hand Crimping Tools P/N 69376-1, 69376-2 and 476408
(Ref. Fig. 026)
--------------------------------------------------------------
|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 69376-1 | NSA938601 | |
| AMP | 69376-2 | NSA938621 | COAXIAL PLUGS |
|------------|------------|---------------| |
| AMP | 476408 | NSA938601 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------
24. AMP Hand Crimping Tool P/N 654174M0DA
(Ref. Fig. 027)
--------------------------------------------------------------

| CRIMPING TOOL | CONNECTION |

|-------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|----------- |---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 654174M0DA | DAN387 | TERMINAL |
---------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Example: Terminal crimping
- Put the terminal in position in the support (for the position, refer to the crimping tables).
- Engage the stripped wire in the terminal until it touches the stop.
- Fully squeeze the tool handles until the ratchet releases.
- Remove the crimped terminal from the crimping jaws.
25. PRONER Hand Crimping Tools BNC4 (P/N S111001129070) and 11BNC04
(Ref. Fig. 028)
---------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| | "BNC4" | E0256 | |
| PRONER |S111001129070| | TERMINALS |
| |-------------|---------------| |
| | 11BNC04 | E0721 | |
----------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------
PRONER BNC4 hand crimping tool (P/N S111001129070) is used to crimp open-barrel connecting elements
(e.g. E0256) that have crimping legs.
Crimping chamber change
NOTE: After any crimping chamber change, operate the tool at no load to make sure that operation is correct.
Then tighten the knurled nut while you squeeze the tool handles.
On the barrel:
- Loosen the knurled nut.
- Open the tool.
- Turn the barrel to select the correct crimping chamber.
On the indenter:
NOTE: Loosen the indenter screw.

- Open the tool.
- Remove the indenter.
- Turn or change the indenter, while you make sure it points in the correct direction in the slot.
- Tighten the screw.
NOTE: Three interchangeable indenters, each with 2 indentations, are available.
26. AMP Hand Crimping Tool P/N 753898-1

(Ref. Fig. 029)
---------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|

|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 753898-1 | ABS0374 | TERMINALS |
----------------------------------------------------------------
The tools have a ratchet system to do full crimping before jaw opening.
There must be an inspection stamp that guarantees periodic checks.
27. DANIELS Hand Crimping Tool P/N GMT221
(Ref. Fig. 030)
----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| DANIELS | GMT221 | E0367 | NORMAL CONTACTS |
----------------------------------------------------------------
28. CANNON Hand Crimping Tool P/N CCT1612
(Ref. Fig. 031)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CRIMPING TOOLS | LOCATORS | CONNECTION |
|--------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------------|
| NORM | P/N | P/N | P/N | TYPE |
|---------|----------|-----------------------|-----------|-----------------|
| CANNON | CCT1612 | L1612-10, L1612-14, | NSA938192 | NORMAL CONTACTS |
| | | L1612-15 or L1612-20 | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
This tool must have a locator related to the contact you will crimp.
The locator is attached to the tool with a latch.
Tool CCT1612 has a 2-position stop, one for gauge 16 contacts and the other for gauge 12 contacts.
A GO-NO GO gauge is used to do a check of the condition of the crimping tool.
29. DANIELS Hand Crimping Tool P/N M309 and M300BT
(Ref. Fig. 032)
(Ref. Fig. 033)
----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| DANIELS | M309 | ABS0715 | COAXIAL CONTACTS |
----------------------------------------------------------------
The tool is used to crimp 18 to 12 gauge wires and has a selector knob with position 1 to 8 used to adjust the
crimp depth.
You do crimping with a turret head assembly or positioner which must be installed on the tool.
The tool has a double action ratchet. You cannot open the tool if the cycle is not completed.
A. Turret installation
-
Push the turret trigger to release the locators.
-
Put the turret in position on the ring with the screws opposite the attachment holes.
- When the turret is in position on the ring, attach it with a 9/64 allen wrench (the turret is attached with
2 captive hollow hexagonal screws).

B. Indenter depth selection

- Refer to the data plate to select the correct depth.
- Open the tool before you select.
- Lift and turn the selector knob to move the selected number opposite the selection index.
- Put the safety pin back in position.
- Do the operation again each time the wire or contact is changed.
(1) Crimping
- Engage the conductor in the contact and make sure that you can see it through the inspection
hole. Make sure that no strands are out of the barrel.
-
Engage the contact between the indents in the locator.
-
Fully close the tool until the ratchet releases.
-
30. AMP hand crimping tool P/N 525651

(Ref. Fig. 034)
----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 525651 | ABS0501 | TERMINAL |
----------------------------------------------------------------
B. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 034)
The head of the tool has two crimping areas marked with the letters A and B.
(Ref. Fig. 034)
-
Strip the cable to the applicable length.
- To open the crimping jaws, squeeze the tool handles together until the CERTI-CRIMP ratchet
releases.
- Put the terminal in position in the crimping jaws. Make sure that the center of the terminal cable
barrel is aligned with the center of the cable barrel crimping jaw.
- Squeeze the handles sufficiently to hold the terminal tightly in position but not to cause deformation
of the terminal barrel.
-
Engage the stripped cable through the cable slot in the locator and into the cable barrel.
-
Fully squeeze the tool handles until the CERTI-CRIMP ratchet releases.
-
Remove the crimped terminal from the crimping jaws.
D. Insulation crimping adjustment

(Ref. Fig. 034)
You can adjust the insulation crimping with a pin engaged in holes numbered:
1 = tight
2 = medium
3 = loose

- Engage the pin into position 3.

- Put the terminal in position in the crimping jaws as given in the crimping procedure.
- Engage an unstripped cable into the insulation barrel of the terminal.
- Do a test crimp as given in the crimping procedure.
- Remove the crimped terminal and do a check of the insulation support.
- If necessary, adjust the pins and do a test crimp again until you get the correct insulation grip.
31. RENNSTEIG Hand Crimping Tools P/N 8500-0501-6, 8500-0506-6, 8510-0502-6, 8510-0503-6, 8520-0504-6,
8520-0505-6 and 8530-0601-6
This tool is only used for AD cables.
During crimping, mechanical crimping and contact sealing are done at the same time.
NOTE: The handles and the turrets of this tool are purple (special color for AD cables).

----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| | 8500-0501-6 | | |
| | 8500-0506-6 | | |
| | 8510-0502-6 | ABS1380 | |
| RENNSTEIG | 8510-0503-6 | ABS1381 | CONTACTS |
| | 8520-0504-6 | | |
| | 8520-0505-6 | | |
| | 8530-0601-6 | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------
B. Crimping Procedure
(1) Tool Setting
(Ref. Fig. 035)
NOTE: This setting is not applicable for tool references 8500-XXXX-6 and 8530-XXXX-6.
NOTE: One setting knob is used to adjust the mechanical crimping and the other is used to adjust
the contact sealing.
- Pull and turn each setting knob on each side of the tool to the color pitch applicable to the cable
gage.
(2) Locator Setting
(Ref. Fig. 036)
- Make sure that the applicable turret is attached to the tool with screws. If not, get the applicable
turret and attach it to the tool with screws. Obey the maximum torque value of
0.1 m.daN (8.84 lbf.in) .

CANNON Hand Crimping Tool P/N CA58073-000
- To get a locator, pull the turret and turn it until the necessary locator is in front of the screw at
the top of the tool.
- Push the locator into the tool and turn the turret lightly to make sure that the locator is locked.
To remove the locator, pull the turret.
NOTE: If a locator is pushed in when the turret is removed from the tool, you can use an allen key to
push the allen screw and thus release the locator.
(Ref. Fig. 037)
(3) Crimping procedure

(Ref. Fig. 038)
- Before crimping, make sure that the settings are done on the two setting knobs (not applicable
for tool references 8500-XXXX-6 and 8530-XXXX-6).
-
Make sure that the locator is pushed into the tool.
-
Do one full cycle without a contact to make sure that the tool operates correctly.
- Engage the cable into the contact crimping barrel and move it horizontally as far as the positive
mechanical stop.
-
Put the contact in the tool and move it horizontally as far as the positive mechanical stop.
- Make sure that the location in the tool is correct (the contact must be stopped against the locator
to prevent crimping on the contact shoulder).
-
Push the cable and make sure that the cable and the contact are in the center of the tool.
- Squeeze the tool handles tightly and slowly in one continuous operation (a constant speed is
recommended).
-
Release the handles.
-
Remove the crimped contact from the fully opened tool.
NOTE: When the operator starts to squeeze the tool handles, he must fully complete the operation.
32. CANNON Hand Crimping Tool P/N CA58073-000

-----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|------------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|--------------------|
| CANNON | CA58073-000 | NSA938400 | COAXIAL CONTACTS |
-----------------------------------------------------------------
33. CANNON Hand Crimping Tool P/N CCTDM
-----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|------------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|--------------------|
| CANNON | CCTDM | E0305 | COAXIAL CONTACTS |

-----------------------------------------------------------------
34. CANNON Hand Crimping Tools P/N CCT408M and CCTHX4-524
-----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|------------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|--------------------|
| CANNON | CCT408M | NSA938400 | COAXIAL CONTACTS |
| | CCTHX4-524 | | |
-----------------------------------------------------------------
35. CANNON Hand Crimping Tool P/N 683-51470-4
-----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|------------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|--------------------|
| CANNON | 683-51470-4 | NSA938400 | COAXIAL CONTACTS |
-----------------------------------------------------------------
36. DMC Hand Crimping Tool P/N M300BT
(Ref. Fig. 039)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------|-----------------------|-----------------------------|
|---------|----------|-----------------------|-----------|-----------------|
| DMC | M300BT | TP14988 | ABS1344 | NORMAL CONTACTS |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
37. TYCO Hand Crimping Tool P/N 1901600-1, 1901600-2, 1901611-1 and 1901611-2
(Ref. Fig. 040)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|----------------------|---------------------|-----------------------------|
|---------|------------|---------------------|-----------|-----------------|
| | 1901611-1 | 1-1901611-1 | | |
| | 1901611-2 | | | |
| TYCO |------------|---------------------| NSA936501 | TERMINAL |
| | 1901600-1 | 1-1901600-1 | | |
| | 1901600-2 | | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
38. AMP hand crimping tool P/N 91593-1
(Ref. Fig. 041)
----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|


|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 91593-1 | ABS0374 | TERMINAL |
----------------------------------------------------------------
(Ref. Fig. 042)
----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 169994-1 | ABS0374 | TERMINAL |
----------------------------------------------------------------
40. AMP hand crimping tool P/N 654174-1 and 654174-2
(Ref. Fig. 043)
(Ref. Fig. 044)
----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 654174-1 | DAN387 | TERMINAL |
| | 654174-2 | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------
(Ref. Fig. 045)
----------------------------------------------------------------
|--------------------------|-----------------------------------|
|------------|-------------|---------------|-------------------|
| AMP | 2063760-1 | ABS0374 | TERMINAL |
----------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Hand Crimping Tool MS3191 and MS3191A
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Hand Crimping Tool M22520-2-01 and M22520-7-01
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Hand Crimping Tool MS3198 and MS3198-1
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Hand Crimping Tool-AMP P/N 59500

Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Hand Crimping Tool M22520-1-01
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Hand Crimping Tool M22520-5-01 and M22520-10-1
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Hand Crimping Tools-AMP 46121, 47386, 47387, 48518 and 49775
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Hand Crimping Tools-AMP P/N 59239-4
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Hand Crimping Tools-AMP P/N 46447 and 49935
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Hand Crimping Tools-AMP P/N 46673
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Hand Crimping Tools-AMP P/N 45730, 46467, 46468, 46469 and 46470
Figure 014.1 / Graphic SH 014.1 Hand Crimping Tools-AMP P/N 220015-1 and 220015-2
Figure 016.1 / Graphic SH 016.1 Hand Crimping Tools-AMP P/N 46073, 46074 and 59282
Figure 019.1 / Graphic SH 019.1 Hand Crimping Tool-AMP 69260-1
Figure 020.1 / Graphic SH 020.1 Hand Crimping Tool - AMP 69272-1
Figure 023.1 / Graphic SH 023.1 Hand Crimping Tool-AMP P/N 69354-1
Figure 024.1 / Graphic SH 024.1 Hand Crimping Tool - AMP 69355
Figure 025.1 / Graphic SH 025.1 Hand Crimping Tools-AMP P/N 576778, 576779, 576780, 484364-1, 576781,
576782, 576783, 576784, 69694-1 and 59461
Figure 026.1 / Graphic SH 026.1 Hand Crimping Tools-AMP P/N 69376-1, 69376-2 and 476408

Figure 027.1 / Graphic SH 027.1 Hand Crimping Tool - AMP 654174MODA
Figure 028.1 / Graphic SH 028.1 Hand Crimping Tool-PRONER BNC4 P/N S111001129070
Figure 029.1 / Graphic SH 029.1 Hand Crimping Tool-AMP P/N 753898-1
Figure 030.1 / Graphic SH 030.1 Hand Crimping Tool-DANIELS P/N GMT221
Figure 031.1 / Graphic SH 031.1 Hand Crimping Tool - CANNON P/N CCT1612
Figure 032.1 / Graphic SH 032.1 Hand Crimping Tool - DANIELS M309 and M300BT
Figure 033.1 / Graphic SH 033.1 Hand Crimping Tool - DANIELS M309 and M300BT
Figure 034.1 / Graphic SH 034.1 Hand Crimping Tools - AMP P/N 525651
Figure 035.1 / Graphic SH 035.1 Hand Crimping Tools - RENNSTEIG
Figure 037.1 / Graphic SH 037.1 Hand Crimping Tools - RENNSTEIG - Procedure to release a Locator when the
Turret is Removed
Figure 039.1 / Graphic SH 039.1 Hand Crimping Tools - Hand Crimping Tool DMC M300BT with DMC Locator
TP1498
Figure 040.1 / Graphic SH 040.1 Hand Crimping Tool - TYCO 1901611-1, 1901611-2, 1901600-1 and 1901600-2
Figure 042.1 / Graphic SH 042.1 Hand Crimping Tools - AMP 169994-1

20-25-23 - HYDRAULIC HAND CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
HYDRAULIC HAND CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
HYDRAULIC HAND CRIMPING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic give description and procedure for the tools that follow:
- Hand Hydraulic Crimping Tool P/N 69061, 69062, 69062-2 and 59975-1
2. Hand Hydraulic Crimping Tool P/N 69061, 69062, 69062-2 and 59975-1
(Ref. Fig. 001)
A. Installation of Crimping Dies or Nests
The head of the tool holds two dies for crimping of wires gauge 8 to 2.
Correct positioning of dies is performed as follows :
(1) Press latch to open crimping head.
(2) Pull back nest lock and rotate thumb knob until the desired nest is obtained.
(3) With nest properly located, nest lock will spring back into position.
If not the case, nest lock will not spring back into position and crimping head will not close.
(4) Close crimping head.
B. Example of Crimping
(1) Open pressure relief valve for a few seconds to ensure that indenter is located in neutral position.
Close pressure relief valve.
(2) Locate splice between indenter and nest, with brazed seam facing indenter.
(3) Using short pumping strokes, pump handles sufficiently to hold splice in position without deferming
barrel.
(4) Insert stripped end of wire into splice barrel.
(5) Continue pumping strokes until handles require less effort to pump showing that pressure relief valve
operates and that crimping cycle is complete.
(6) Open pressure relief valve lever until indenter returns to neutral position.
(7) Open crimping head and remove crimped assembly.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Hand Hydraulic Crimping Tool P/N 69061, 69062, 69062-2 and 59975-1

Hand Hydraulic Crimping Tool P/N 69061, 69062, 69062-2 and 59975-1
2. Hand Hydraulic Crimping Tool P/N 69061, 69062, 69062-2 and 59975-1
(Ref. Fig. 001)
A. Installation of Crimping Dies or Nests
The head of the tool holds two dies for crimping of wires gauge 8 to 2.
Correct positioning of dies is performed as follows :
(1) Press latch to open crimping head.
(2) Pull back nest lock and rotate thumb knob until the desired nest is obtained.
(3) With nest properly located, nest lock will spring back into position.
If not the case, nest lock will not spring back into position and crimping head will not close.
(4) Close crimping head.
(1) Open pressure relief valve for a few seconds to ensure that indenter is located in neutral position.
Close pressure relief valve.
(2) Locate splice between indenter and nest, with brazed seam facing indenter.
(3) Using short pumping strokes, pump handles sufficiently to hold splice in position without deferming
barrel.
(4) Insert stripped end of wire into splice barrel.
(5) Continue pumping strokes until handles require less effort to pump showing that pressure relief valve
operates and that crimping cycle is complete.
(6) Open pressure relief valve lever until indenter returns to neutral position.
(7) Open crimping head and remove crimped assembly.

20-25-24 - PNEUMATIC CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
PNEUMATIC CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
PNEUMATIC CRIMPING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic gives the description and procedure for the tools that follow:
- PICO Crimping Tool Models 500D1
- CANNON Crimping Tool Model CBT600 and CBT600B
- DANIELS Pneumatic Crimping Tool WA27-309-EP
- MIL Crimping Tool M22520-23-01
- DMC Pneumatic Tool WA23-01
2. PICO Crimping Tool Model 500D1
A. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(1) The model 500D1 crimping tool is used to crimp Flight Connector contacts, gauges 8 to 4/0.
(2) This is a full-cycling pneumatic tool which you cannot open until the full crimping cycle is completed.
(3) This tool operates with a supply of clean, dry air or inert gas in a pressure range of 6 to 9 bars. The
value is related to the size of the contact you will crimp.
(1) With the tool in the full operating condition, insert the contact and the wire.
(2) Press the trigger.
NOTE: You cannot open the indentors until the full crimping cycle is completed.
3. CANNON Crimping Tool Models CBT600 and CBT600B

A. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 002)
The model CBT600 is an air-operated crimping tool which you can operate with a hand valve or foot
valve.
It can also operate as a portable crimping tool.
A basic model CBT600 crimps all contacts, size 12 thru size 4 at the air line pressure of 80 to 100 PSI.
The model CBT600B crimps size 0 contacts at the air line pressure of 120 PSI.
The tool must have an air line filter and lubricator for highest performance levels.
B. Locator Part Numbers
------------------------------------------------------
| CONTACT | POWER | CRIMP | | |
| SIZE | CRIMP | HEAD | LOCATOR | GAUGE |
| | TOOL | | | |
|---------|----------|----------|-----------|---------|
| 12 | CBT600 | CCH-12-7 | CCHP-12-2 | -- |
|---------| |----------|-----------|---------|
| 8 | OR | CCH-8-1 | CCHP-8-1 | CCH-8-1 |
|---------| |----------|-----------|---------|
| 4 | CBT600B | CCH-4-1 | CCHP-4-1 | CCH-4-1 |
|---------|--------- |----------|-----------|---------|

| 0 | CBT600B | CCH-0-1 | CCHP-0-9 | CCH-0 |

-------------------------------------------------------
C. Example of Crimping
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(1) Loosen and remove the retainer ring.
(2) Select the locator in relation to the contact you will crimp.
(3) Insert the locator into the power unit and make sure that the pin is in correct position.
(4) Install the jaws in relation to the size of the contact you will crimp.
Make sure that the pin is in position in its housing.
(5) Tighten the retainer ring again and connect the tool to the pneumatic supply network. Do two tool
cycles. You must tighten the ring after each cycle to make sure that the head is in the correct position
for crimping.
(6) Put the stripped wire into a contact and insert into the locator. Push the foot or hand valve to crimp.
The tool automatically makes a full cycle crimp.
4. DANIELS Pneumatic Crimping Tool WA27-309-EP
A. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 005)
This tool has a full-cycle ratcheting control-mechanism and uses a compressed air source (5 to 8 bars).
B. Example of crimping
(1) With the tool in the full operating condition, insert the contact and the wire.
(2) Push the foot valve and hold momentarily while the tool crimps.
(3) Release to complete the tool cycle.
5. MIL Crimping Tool M22520-23-01
A. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 006)
This crimping tool is used to crimp contacts, gauge 8 to 0000.
This tool operates with a supply of controlled, filtered and lubricated air in a pressure range of 6.2 bar
(89.9233 psi) to 8.6 bar (124.7324 psi) .
B. Locator and Die Part Numbers
----------------------------------------------------
| CONTACT | DIE | LOCATOR | GAUGE |
| SIZE | P/N | P/N | |
|---------|--------------|--------------|----------|
| 8 | M22520-23-02 | M22520-23-09 | G693 |
|---------|--------------|--------------|----------|
| 6 | M22520-23-03 | M22520-23-10 | G694 |
|---------|--------------|--------------|----------|
| 4 | M22520-23-04 | M22520-23-11 | G695 |
| | | M22520-23-12 | |
|---------|--------------|--------------|----------|
| 0 | M22520-23-05 | M22520-23-13 | G696 |
| | | M22520-23-14 | |
|---------|--------------|--------------|----------|
| 00 | M22520-23-06 | M22520-23-15 | G697 |

|---------|--------------|--------------|----------|
| 0000 | M22520-23-07 | M22520-23-16 | G698 |
----------------------------------------------------
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(1) Loosen and remove the retainer ring.
(2) Select the locator in relation to the contact you will crimp.
(3) Insert the locator into the power unit and make sure that the pin is in correct position.
(4) Install the jaws in relation to the size of the contact you will crimp.
Make sure that the pin is in position in its housing.
(5) Tighten the retainer ring again and connect the tool to the pneumatic supply network. Do two tool
cycles. You must tighten the ring after each cycle to make sure that the head is in the correct position
for crimping.
(6) Put the stripped wire into a contact and insert into the locator. Push the foot or hand valve to crimp.
The tool automatically makes a full cycle crimp.
6. DMC Pneumatic Crimping Tool WA23-01
(Ref. Fig. 007)
A. Locator and Dies Installation
(1) Remove the attachment screw.
- Select the correct locator in relation with the contact to crimp.
(2) Install the locator ensuring that the stud is correctly installed.
- Select the correct dies in relation with the contact to crimp.
(3) Install the dies by entering the stud in its housing.
(4) Screw the attachment cover.
B. Crimping Procedure
(1) Connect the tool to a pneumatic network.
(2) Cycle the tool once to check it operates correctly.
(3) Insert the cable with the contact to crimp in the tool until it bottoms.
(4) Operate the tool with the control button.
(5) Wait until the cycle has been completed then remove the crimped assembly.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 PICO Crimping Tool Model 500D1
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 CANNON Crimping Tool Models CBT600 and CBT600B
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Pneumatic Crimping Tools - CBT600 and M22520-23-01
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Pneumatic Crimping Tools - CBT600 and M22520-23-01

Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Pneumatic Crimping Tool - DANIELS WA27-309-EP
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 MIL Crimping Tool - M22520-23-01
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Pneumatic Crimping Tools - DMC WA23-01

20-25-29 - MISCELLANEOUS CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
MISCELLANEOUS CRIMPING TOOLS (Airbus)
MISCELLANEOUS CRIMPING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. List of Described Tools
- AMP Hydraulic Foot Pump P/N 781019 (ex 69064) or 523199-2 or -3
- AMP Electric/Hydraulic Crimping Machine P/N 69120 or 1804700-2 and 439798-1
- ENERPAC Pneumatic/Hydraulic Crimping Tool P/N PA133
2. AMP Hydraulic Foot Pump P/N 781019 (ex 69064) or 523199-2 or -3
(Ref. Fig. 001)
A. Designation
Hydraulic foot pumps P/N 781019 (ex 69064) or 523199-2 or -3 are used to crimp the splices, connections
and terminals that follow:
High-temperature parallel splices,
High-temperature wire splices,
Termalum butt splices, for aluminum RB wire,
Stratotherm flag terminals,
Copalum terminals.
(1) For P/N 523199-2:
- The maximum operating pressure is
700 bar (10152.6390 psi) .
(2) For P/N 523199-3:
- The maximum operating pressure is
580 bar (8412.1866 psi) .
(3) Example of connection P/N used with this tool
---------------------
| TOOL | HEAD |
|---------|---------|
| 69064 | 69051 |
| | 69066 |
---------------------
(4) Make sure that the oil level is at the notch on the dipstick. Add oil, if
B. Preparation of Tool
(1) Put the foot pump in a vertical position with the dipstick nut up.
(2) Remove the dipstick.
(3) Make sure that the oil level is at the notch on the dipstick. Add oil, if necessary.
(4) If necessary, connect the hose.
(5) Install the dipstick and put the tool in a horizontal position.
NOTE: You must always use the tool in a horizontal position.
(1) Remove the cap from the crimping head adaptor.

(2) Slowly operate the foot pedal until the oil comes into view at the end of the hose.
(3) Connect the applicable crimping head to the hose adaptor.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(4) Install the applicable dies in the head.
(5) Put the terminal or splice in the dies.
(6) Lift the reset pedal, then put it back to the down position.
(7) Operate the foot pedal until the dies hold the terminal or splice lightly in position.
(8) Put the stripped end of the wire in the terminal or splice.
(9) Operate the foot pedal until the by-pass valve opens and the ram goes back to the neutral position.
(10) Open the crimping head and remove the terminal or splice. Before each crimp, push the reset handle
fully down and do the steps above again.
When the last crimp is completed, release the pressure and remove the crimping head.
Install caps on the crimping head and hose.
3. AMP Electric/Hydraulic Crimping Machine P/N 69120 or 1804700-2 and 439798-1
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
A. Designation
AMP electric/hydraulic crimping machine P/N 69120 or 1804700-2 and 439798-1 is used to crimp:
- Splices
- Terminals
- Crimp sleeves/ferrules.
(1) For P/N 69120 or 1804700-2:
(a) Power is controlled by a handle or a foot switch.
In this case, you must use an adaptor P/N 47206.
(b) The motor voltage is 110 volts (P/N 69120-1) or 220 volts (P/N 69120-2).
(c) The maximum operating pressure is:
-
580 bar (8412.1866 psi) for P/N 69120.
-
700 bar (10152.6390 psi) for P/N 1804700-2.
(d) Example of connection P/N used with this tool
-------------------------------
| TOOL | HEAD | DIES |
|---------|---------|---------|
| | 69099 | 69216 |
| | | 69217 |
| 69120 |---------|---------|
| | 69051 | - |
| |---------|---------|
| | 69066 | - |
-------------------------------
(2) For P/N 439798-1:

(a) A foot switch controls the power.

(b) The motor voltage is 220 volts.
(c) The maximum operating pressure is 580 bar (8412.1866 psi) .
(1) For P/N 69120 or 1804700-2:
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
Always keep the unit in a vertical position.
Do not operate the unit without its crimping head.
(a) Remove the protective caps.
(b) Attach the applicable crimping head to the handle control or to the coupling adapter if you use the
foot switch.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(c) Put the applicable dies in the head.
(d) While you use the hand control to move the ram forward, push and release the reset button then
push the trigger. With the foot control, push and release the reset pedal (LH) and then push the
ram advance pedal (RH).
(e) Put the terminal or splice in the dies and move the ram forward sufficiently to hold the terminal or
splice in the dies. To do this, operate the trigger or pedal with short strokes. The ram will not go
back to neutral until the crimping cycle is completed, unless you push the pressure release button
on the electrical control box.
(f) Put the stripped wire in the terminal or splice.
(g) Squeeze and hold the trigger or ram advance pedal until the crimping cycle is completed and the
ram goes back to neutral.
(h) Remove the crimped terminal or splice.
(2) For P/N 439798-1:
(Ref. Fig. 005)
Always keep the unit in a vertical position.
Do not operate the unit without its crimping head.
(a) Remove the protective caps.
(b) Attach the applicable crimping head to the hydraulic hose.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(c) Put the applicable dies in the head.
(d) Push and release the reset pedal (green light comes on).
(e) Put the terminal or splice in the dies and move the ram forward sufficiently to hold the terminal or
splice in the dies. To do this, operate the run pedal with short strokes. The ram will not go back to
neutral until the crimping cycle is completed, unless you push the dump pedal.
(f) Put the stripped wire in the terminal or splice.
(g) Squeeze and hold the run pedal until the crimping cycle is completed and the ram goes back to
neutral.

(h) Remove the crimped terminal or splice.

4. ENERPAC Pneumatic/Hydraulic Crimping Tool P/N PA133
(Ref. Fig. 006)
A. Designation
Pneumatic/hydraulic crimping tool ENERPAC PA133 is used to crimp:
- Terminals
- Crimp sleeves/ferrules.
This tool is energized with compressed air at 6.86 bars (99.56 psi). It supplies a hydraulic pressure which
you must adjust to between 560 bars (8122 psi) and 600 bars (8702 psi) for crimping.
You can connect several crimping heads at the end of the oil pressure hose (e.g. MECATRACTION VF13
for E0466 or AMP 58422-1 for E0422).
B. Example of crimping
For E0422 terminal:
-
Connect the applicable crimping head to the hose adaptor.
-
Make sure that the applicable dies are installed in the head.
-
Operate the foot switch until the dies are in contact with the barrel of the terminal.
- Put the stripped cables fully in the barrel and make sure that the mark (made on the cable after
stripping) is in the correct position near the barrel.
-
Operate the foot switch.
- Stop the crimping operation when the pressure of the power unit is between 560 bars (8122 psi) and
600 bars (8702 psi).
-
Move the locking lever laterally.
-
Push the release pedal to let the die move back.
-
Remove the crimped terminal.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 AMP Hydraulic Foot Pump P/N 781019 (ex 69064) or 523199-2 or -3
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 AMP Crimping Head P/Ns 58422-1 (ex 69993 or 69066) and 69051
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 AMP Crimping Head P/Ns 69099
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 AMP Electric/Hydraulic Crimping Machine P/N 69120 or 1804700-2
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 AMP Electric/Hydraulic Crimping Machine P/N 439798-1
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 ENERPAC Pneumatic/Hydraulic Crimping Tool P/N PA133

20-25-30 - SHRINKING TOOLS (Airbus)
SHRINKING TOOLS (Airbus)
SHRINKING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE ELECTRIC TOOLS ON THE AIRCRAFT BECAUSE THERE ARE
RISKS OF ELECTROCUTION OR EXPLOSION. IF THERE ARE LOCAL REGULATIONS
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE ELECTRIC TOOLS IN AREAS WHERE THERE ARE RISKS OF
EXPLOSION (FUEL TANKS, FUEL VAPOUR AREAS, ETC.). REFER TO YOUR LOCAL
REGULATIONS AND MAKE SURE THAT YOU OBEY THEM. SOME ELECTRIC TOOLS SUCH AS
HEAT GUNS, SOLDERING IRONS AND TOOLS WITHOUT INTRINSIC PROTECTION ARE NOT
PERMITTED IN THESE AREAS.
1. General
The chapters that follow give the operation of the tools used to shrink sleeves, end caps or solder sleeves
used in aircraft.
A. Hot Air Generators (Ref. 20-25-31)
B. Infrared Generators (Ref. 20-25-32).

General
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE ELECTRIC TOOLS ON THE AIRCRAFT BECAUSE THERE ARE
RISKS OF ELECTROCUTION OR EXPLOSION. IF THERE ARE LOCAL REGULATIONS
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE ELECTRIC TOOLS IN AREAS WHERE THERE ARE RISKS OF
EXPLOSION (FUEL TANKS, FUEL VAPOUR AREAS, ETC.). REFER TO YOUR LOCAL
REGULATIONS AND MAKE SURE THAT YOU OBEY THEM. SOME ELECTRIC TOOLS SUCH AS
HEAT GUNS, SOLDERING IRONS AND TOOLS WITHOUT INTRINSIC PROTECTION ARE NOT
PERMITTED IN THESE AREAS.
1. General
The chapters that follow give the operation of the tools used to shrink sleeves, end caps or solder sleeves
used in aircraft.

Structure of the Chapters

A. Hot Air Generators (Ref. 20-25-31)
B. Infrared Generators (Ref. 20-25-32).

20-25-31 - HOT AIR GENERATORS (Airbus)
HOT AIR GENERATORS (Airbus)
HOT AIR GENERATORS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The hot air generators have the P/Ns that follow:
-
Type CV1981
-
Type 500
-
Type 1500 or Ref 695-01-A4-433
-
Type HL/HG STEINEL
- Reflectors (PR12, PR13, PR21, PR23,...)
The tool must obey the related operating and safety instructions and be
applicable for its related use. Thus, you can only use equipment on which the hot air temperature is the same as the
shrinking temperature of the shrinkable sleeve or moulding.
A continuously adjustable hot air temperature is recommended. The equipment must also have a contact protection at the
hot air opening to prevent injuries and the risk of fire.
NOTE: To give maintenance personnel protection from electrical shocks, Airbus strongly recommends the use of tools with a
power supply lower than 50V as requested by French law. If such tools are not available, it is strongly recommended to
use insulation transformers to supply the high voltage tools.
2. Hot Air Generator Characteristics

A. Type CV1981 Generators
(Ref. Fig. 001)
There are two generators in this range.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | |SUPPLY | POWER | SELECTOR | SWITCH |
| MANUFACTURER | P/N | | | |--------|
| | | (V) | (W) | POSITION | O | I |
|------------ -|--------------------------|-------|-------|----------|----|---|
| | CV1981-220V-1460W | 220 | 1460 | 0 To 10 | | |
| |--------------------------|-------|-------|----------| | |
| | CV1981-42V-960W | 42 | 960 | 0 To 10 | | |
| |--------------------------|-------|-------|----------| | |
| RAYCHEM | CV1981-230V-1600WPID | 230 | 1600 | 0 To 10 | OFF| ON|
| | (European version) | | | | | |
| |--------------------------|-------|-------|----------| | |
| | CV1981-120V-1600WCANPIDF | 120 | 1600 | 0 To 10 | | |
| | (US version) | | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
These generators can be used to shrink end caps, shrinkable sleeves or solder
sleeves (ex NSA937790).
NOTE: The tool CV1981-42V-960W is not available at this time.

As an alternative to this tool, to work on the aircraft, we recommend that you use an insulating transformer (ref :
42517 - Manufacturer : LEGRAND or equivalent) with a power of 1600VA with the tools that follow:
- CV1981-230V-1600WPID (European version)
- CV1981-120V-1600W-CANPIDF (US version)
- HG2000E
- HG3000SLE
You can use different reflectors to agree with the sleeve you will shrink:
PR12, PR13, PR13C, etc...
B. Type 500 Generator

The heat gun has a removable handle and base assembly that gives more than one operating position.

There is an OFF-COLD-HOT selector switch.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------
| MANUFACTURER | MODEL | SUPPLY(AC) | POWER | Temp. Range | COLOR |
| | | V | W | deg.C (deg.F) | |
|--------------|--------|------------|--------|---------------------|-------|
| | 500A | 110 | 1500 | 500-700(932-1292) | GREEN |
| RAYCHEM | 502 | 220 | 1500 | 500-700(932-1292) | GREEN |
| | 750 | 110 | 2000 | 750-1000(1382-1832) |YELLOW |
| | 752 | 220 | 2000 | 750-1000(1382-1832) |YEllOW |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
RAYCHEM does not make these Type 500 heat guns at this time but you can continue to use them.
They are replaced by Type 1500 heat guns.
C. Type 1500 generator
These can have 900W or 1100W heating elements. The switch position agrees with the power output as follows:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | | | SWITCH POSITION |
| MANUFACTURER | P/N | SUPPLY | MODEL |---------------------------|
| | | V | | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
|---------------|-------|---------|------------ |-----|-----|----|-----|----|
| | | | TG119/900A | |400W |500W|900W | |
| | 1501A | 110(AC) |-------------|COLD |-----|----|-----|COLD|
| | | | TG119/1100A | |200W |900W|1000W| |
| RAYCHEM |-------|---------|-------------|-----|-----|----|-----|----|
| | | | TG119/900A | |400W |500W|900W | |
| | 1502A | 220(AC) |-------------|COLD |-----|----|-----|COLD|
| | | | TG119/1100A | |200W |900W|1000W| |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
PR12, PR13, PR13C, etc.
NOTE: The reference 695-01-A4-433 has a type 1500 generator (supplied with 24V) and a 42V (DC) transformer. This tool
uses the same reflector family.
D. HL/HG STEINEL type generator

(Ref. Fig. 002)
There are four generators in this range.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | |SUPPLY |POWER | SELECTOR POSITION |
| MANUFACTURER| P/N | | |---------------------------|
| | | (V) | (W) | 0 | I | II |
|-------------|--------------------|-------|------|---|------ -------|--------|
| | HL2000P-220V-2000W | 220 | 2000 | | | |
| RAYCHEM |--------------------|-------|------| | | |
| | HL1802E-230V-2000W | 230 | 2000 | | | |
|-------------|--------------------|-------|------|OFF| INTERMEDIATE |MAXIMUM |
| | HG2000E-230V-2000W | 230 | 2000 | | | |
| STEINEL |--------------------|-------|------| | | |
| |HG3000SLE-230V-2000W| 230 | 2000 | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PR12, PR13, PR13C, etc.
3. Reflector Characteristics
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
To make sure that there is a constant supply of heat around the heat shrinkable sleeves or moulding, the heating equipment has
a nozzle attachment (reflector).
Make sure that the dimensions and shape of the reflector are applicable for the related application.
4. Operating Procedure
A. Temperature
The minimum temperature for shrinking is :

-------------------------------------------------------------------
| P/N | TYPE | Temperature deg. C (deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| ABS0061 | Shrink Sleeve | 150 deg. C (302 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| ABS0266 | Shrinkable Moulding | 175 deg. C (347 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| ABS0312 | Shrinkable Moulding | 135 deg. C (275 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| ABS0916 | Shrink Sleeve | 175 deg. C (347 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| ABS1471 | Heat Shielded Sleeve | 300 deg. C (572 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| E0056 | Shrinkable Moulding | 135 deg. C (275 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| E0056 | Shrinkable Moulding | 135 deg. C (275 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| E0096* | Shrinkable Moulding | 135 deg. C (275 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| E0096** | Shrinkable Moulding | 175 deg. C (347 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| E0126 | Shrink Sleeve | 125 deg. C (257 deg. F) to |
| | | 135 deg. C (275 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| E0484 | Shrink Sleeve | 100 deg. C (212 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| E0541 | Butt Splice | 340 deg. C (644 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| E0718 | Shrink Sleeve | 175 deg. C (347 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| DAN128 | Shrinkable Moulding | 135 deg. C (275 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| DAN132 | Shrink Sleeve | 175 deg. C (347 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| NSA936603 | End Cap | 135 deg. C (275 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| NSA937201 | Identification Sleeve | 125 deg. C (257 deg. F) to |
| | | 200 deg. C (392 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| NSA937210 | Shrink Sleeve | 250 deg. C (482 deg. F) |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
-------------------------------------------------------------------
* Only for material code 3, 4 and 5
** Only for material code 12
To make shrinking faster and to prevent too much heat on the conductor for a long period, it is recommended to operate at
temperatures 100 deg.C (212.00 deg.F) higher than those specified.
If NSA937210 sleeves are at temperatures of more than 327 deg.C (620.60 deg.F) , the sleeves will become transparent.

B. Procedure
NOTE: The hot-air tool must have a pre-heating time to get to the set heating temperature. Approximately 1 minute is
necessary for this procedure.
Do not start the shrinking process before then.
-
Use the correct reflector dimensions to agree with the dimensions of the sleeve.
-
Put the reflector in the generator.
-
Set the generator to "ON".
-
The thermoplastic rings melt and the outer sleeve shrinks after a few seconds.
- If there is a solder sleeve, continue heating until the solder preform melts (the solder ring can collapse immediately
before the flow of solder, but this does not show that the joint is completed).
- At this step, remove the sleeve assembly from the heat stream. Shrinking is completed as the sleeve becomes cool and
goes back to its initial color.
NOTE: To extend the service life of the heating elements, it is recommended to operate the hot-air equipment with cold air
for approx. 1/2 to 3 minutes (refer to the type of equipment) before you set it to off.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Shrinking Tools - Hot Air Generators CV1981
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Shrinking Tools - Hot Air Generators HL1802E, HL2000, HG2000 and HG3000
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Shrinking Tools - Reflector Allocation table PR 12 to PR 13C
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Shrinking Tools - Hot Air Generator Reflectors PR 21 to PR 26

20-25-32 - INFRARED GENERATORS (Airbus)
INFRARED GENERATORS (Airbus)
INFRARED GENERATORS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Infrared generators used to shrink solder sleeves have the codes that follow:
ED7-001
ED7-004
ED7-005
ED7CONT
ED7BATTBOX
NOTE: The tool must obey the related operating and safety instructions and be applicable for its related use.
2. Infrared Generator Characteristics

A. Type ED7-001
(Ref. Fig. 001)
The mobile generator ED7-001 is used with a gun IR1759 (STANDARD OPENING) or IR3104 (LARGE OPENING) and an external reflector.
An extension flex AT7-101 is supplied to use guns with 24V in the aircraft.
Generators supplied with an extension flex are adjusted and cannot be used without an extension flex unless they are re-adjusted.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| | GENERATOR | SUPPLY | POWER | TIMER | GUN P/N |
| MANUFACTURER | P/N | (V) | (W) | | |
|--------------|--------------|--------|-------|-------|---------------|
| | | | 250 |0 to 99| IR1759MK2/A |
| | ED7-001MK2 |220/240 | (50hz)|CYCLES | or |
| | | | | | IR3104MK2/A |
| |--------------|--------|-------|-------|---------------|
| | | | 250 |0 to 99| IR1759MK31 |
| | ED7-001MK31 |220/240 | (50hz)|CYCLES | or |
| | | | | | IR3104MK31 |
| RAYCHEM |--------------|--------|-------|-------|---------------|
| | | | 250 | 1 to | IR1759MK3 |
| | ED7-001MK3 | 230 | (50hz)|250 sec| or |
| | | | | | IR3104MK3 |
| |--------------|--------|-------|-------|---------------|
| | | | 250 | | IR1759MK4 |
| | ED7-001MK4 | 230 or| (50hz)| - | or |
| | | 110 | (60hz)| | IR3104MK4 |
------------------------------------------------------------------------
This generator can be used in manual or automatic mode.
In manual mode, the generator operates as a simple switched supply for the gun and is turned on and off by a trigger on the gun. In this mode the
generator always supplies full power to the gun while the trigger is depressed.
Timer operating principle :
Use "CHAUFFE" (Heat) coded wheels to show heating time in seconds,
Example : For a 24 second heating time, show 2 and 4.
In automatic mode, you can set the generator to control the gun with one of
twenty stored program sequences. Each sequence controls the time and level of
the supply voltage to the gun. The sequence is started by pressing and
releasing the trigger on the gun and continues until automatic completion or
until the trigger is pressed again.
To start the sequence, push and release the trigger on the gun. The sequence continues until it is automatically completed or until you push the trigger
again.
B. Type ED7-004
(Ref. Fig. 002)
Mobile generator ED7-004 is used with a gun IR1759 (STANDARD OPENING) or IR3104 (LARGE OPENING) and an external reflector.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| MANUFACTURER | GENERATOR | SUPPLY | POWER | TIMER | GUN P/N |
| | P/N | (V) | | | |
|--------------|-------------|---------|-------|--------|------------ |
| | | | | | IR1759MK3 |
| RAYCHEM |ED7-004MK2 | 110 | 60HZ | - | or |
| | | | | | IR3104MK3 |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
You can use this generator in manual modes only.
generator always supplies full power to the gun while the trigger is pushed in.
NOTE: This generator is recommended when it is necessary to use a tool not supplied with 220/240V (50HZ).

C. ED7-005
(Ref. Fig. 003)
Mobile generator ED7-005 is used with a gun IR1759 (STANDARD OPENING) or IR3104 (LARGE OPENING) and an external reflector.
Generators supplied with an extension flex are adjusted and cannot be used without an extension flex unless they are readjusted.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
| | P/N | (V) | (W) | | |
|--------------|-------------|---------|-------|---------|-----------|
| | | | | 0 to 99 | IR1759 |
| RAYCHEM | ED7-005 | 220/240 | 250 | CYCLES | or |
| | | | | | IR3104 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Timer operating principle:
- Use CHAUFFE (Heat) coded wheels to show the heating time in tenths of a second,
- Use PAUSE coded wheels to show the pause time in tenths of a second,
- Use CYCLES coded wheels to show the necessary number of cycles,
NOTE: One cycle is equal to one heating period plus one pause period.
Example : For total heating time of 24 seconds,
- display 60 with "CHAUFFE" coded wheels,
- display 01 with "PAUSE" coded wheels,
- display 60 with "CYCLES" coded wheels,
RAYCHEM no longer make these generators but you can continue to use them.
They are replaced by type ED7-001 generators.
D. ED7CONT
(Ref. Fig. 004)
The mobile generator ED7CONT is used with a gun IR1759 (STANDARD OPENING) or IR3104 (LARGE OPENING) and an external reflector.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | P/N | (V) | | | |
|--------------|--------------|---------|---------|----------|------------|
| | | | | NO | IR1759MK4 |
| RAYCHEM | ED7CONTMK4 | 230V or | 50/60Hz | variable | or |
| | | 110V | | to 50sec | IR3104MK4 |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
This generator can be supplied in 220-240V or 110-115V AC.
It detects the supply voltage automatically.
You can use this generator in manual mode only.
generator always supplies full power to the gun while the trigger is pushed in.
Once the trigger is released, or the maximum operating period of 50 seconds is reached, the generator will automatically switch to a TIME OUT mode
(green 'ON' LED changes to yellow).
The length of the TIME OUT period will be the same as the 'ON' time.
E. ED7BATTBOX
(Ref. Fig. 005)
The mobile generator ED7BATTBOX is used with a gun IR1759 (STANDARD OPENING) or IR3104 (LARGE OPENING) and an external reflector.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | P/N | (V) | | | |
|--------------|-----------------|---------|---------|----------|------------|
| | | | | | IR1759MK4 |
| RAYCHEM |ED7BATTBOXMK4 | 230V or | 50/60Hz | - | or |
| | | 110V | | | IR3104MK4 |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Infrared gun Characteristics
(Ref. Fig. 006)
NOTE: Make sure that you always keep the reflectors or mirrors of the infrared generator clean, to make sure that heating is constant.
A. Type IR3104
Large opening:
- Max. dia.
6 mm (0.2362 in.)
- Max. length
25 mm (0.9842 in.) or with clamps 19 mm (0.7480 in.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | GUN | REFLECTOR | LAMP |
|MANUFACTURER|---------------------------|With clamps|-----------------------|
| | P/N |SUPPLY|POWER| P/N | P/N |SUPPLY |POWER|
| | | (V) | (W) | | | (V) | (W) |

|------------|--------------|------|-----|-----------|---------|-------|-----|
| |IR3104MK2/A | 24 | 250 | AT3147 | | | |
| |--------------|------|-----|-----------| | | |
| | IR3104MK31 | 24 | 250 |AT3147MK31 | | | |
| RAYCHEM |--------------|------|-----|-----------|NAE-143-3| 24 | 250 |
| | IR3104MK3 | 24 | 250 |AT3147MK3 | | | |
| |--------------|------|-----|-----------| | | |
| | IR3104MK4 | 24 | 250 |AT3134 | | | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Type IR1759
Standard opening:
- Max. dia.
9 mm (0.3543 in.)
- Max. length
30 mm (1.1811 in.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | GUN | REFLECTOR | LAMP |
|MANUFACTURER|---------------------------|With clamps|-----------------------|
| | P/N |SUPPLY|POWER| P/N | P/N |SUPPLY |POWER|
| | | (V) | (W) | | | (V) | (W) |
|------------|--------------|------|-----|-----------|---------|-------|-----|
| |IR1759MK2/A | 24 | 250 | AT3132 | | | |
| |--------------|------|-----|-----------| | | |
| | IR1759MK31 | 24 | 250 |AT3132MK31 | | | |
| RAYCHEM |--------------|------|-----|-----------|NAE-143-3| 24 | 250 |
| | IR1759MK3 | 24 | 250 |AT3132MK3 | | | |
| |--------------|------|-----|-----------| | | |
| | IR1759MK4 | 24 | 250 |AT3132 | | | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Type IR550 MARK II
(Ref. Fig. 005)
This tool must be supplied in 110-115 V AC.
If this tool is not available you can use IR1759 type tool as equivalent.
4. Operating procedure
(Ref. Fig. 007)
NOTE: Make sure that you always keep the reflectors or mirrors of the infrared generator clean, to make sure that heating is constant.
- Put the generator selector in Auto position.
- Adjust the generator to agree with the generator type and the sleeve.
- Choose the gun and the reflector to agree with the solder sleeve.
- Push the reflector trigger and engage the wires and the slevee in the reflector.
- Make sure that the assembly is in the correct position.
- Turn the soldering on to the infrared source.
- Push the trigger of the infrared gun to start. The gun stops automatically at the end of the cycle.
- After 3 to 5 seconds, remove the wire assembly.
- Make sure that the solder sleeve is correctly shrunk.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Infrared Generators - Description ED7-001
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Infrared Generators - Description ED7CONT
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Infrared Generators - Description ED7BATTBOX
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Infrared Generators - Description IR1759 and IR3104
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Infrared Generators - Operating Procedure

20-25-40 - INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOLS (Airbus)
INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOLS (Airbus)
INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the description and operation of the insertion/extraction tools.
A. General Requirements for Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools (Ref. 20-25-41).
B. Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools (Ref. 20-25-42).

20-25-41 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTACT
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTACT INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOLS

(Airbus)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTACT INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOLS

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
1. General
This topic gives the requirements and the procedures to insert/extract the removable contacts used on aircraft.
2. Principle
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
Because of the size of crimping tools, contact insertion is done out of the connecting item.
The contact connected to the cable is then inserted into its housing through the rear of the connecting item
with a tool, if necessary.
To make maintenance and possible modifications easier, possible removal/installation is kept. These contacts
are removable contacts.
You must put the removable contacts in the correct position and lock them in connecting items to get reliable
electrical connections.
Most connecting items of removable electrical contacts use a plastic or metallic contact retention system
(CLIP) which is a part of the main or central insulation (CLIP HOUSING).
This device has spring tabs which retract when the contact collar goes through. They lock the contact in
position on the shoulder housing when it touches its forward stop.
In this position only, contacts can support:
-
the loads when the plug section is put in or removed from the receptacle.
-
tensile loads on the cable.
-
vibrations.
-
impacts.
- etc.
Thus, contacts must be in this position to make sure that they do their electrical connecting function.
To extract the contact, slide the tool (split tube shape) on the cable, then insert into the cavity. The tool
pushes the clip tabs into the released position and the collar is free. Pull the cable to extract the contact
from the cavity.
Contacts that are not correctly inserted are not held in the connecting item. They can move randomly as
the effect of shock or vibration.
This movement can cause:
-
contact resistance to increase.
-
a total loss of electrical continuity.
-
random loss of contact.
NOTE: All the illustrations show a male contact (pin). The procedure is the same for a female contact (socket).
CAUTION:
WHEN YOU PUT THE CABLE AND CONTACT ASSEMBLY INTO THE CONNECTOR, DO NOT

APPLY TOO MUCH FORCE, SPECIALLY IF YOU USE A METAL INSERTION TOOL. IF YOU
APPLY TOO MUCH FORCE, YOU WILL CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CABLE INSULATION OR TO
THE CABLE.
3. Contact Insertion with Tool

(Ref. Fig. 003)
Do not use lubricants for easier assembly. These materials can go into the contacts and change their
characteristics.
NOTE: During insertion or extraction operations with the tool, you must make sure that you do not turn the
tool. This is to prevent:
-
Damage to the clips.
- Damage to the end of the tool.
Unwanted material from a damaged tool can stay in the cavities of the connector, which can
prevent its correct connection.
NOTE: To make contact insertion in the modules/connectors easier and to make the check done on the
locking of each contact better, you must untwist twisted wires along a length of
60 mm (2.3622 in.) before you connect them to connectors or modules.
A. Check before insertion

Make sure that:
-
There are no unwired contacts, sealing plugs, etc. in the cavities.
- The selected tool is the correct tool for the type and size of contact (Ref. 20-48-XX) and the correct
end (you must use the COLORED END of the tool).
- The tool is in the correct condition.
(Ref. Fig. 004)
Tools, specially tools for small contacts, are easily damaged. Do a visual check of their condition:
broken ends, gouges, wearing, etc.
B. Insertion procedure
(1) With a plastic or metal pen type tool:
When plastic and metal pen tools are available, select a plastic pen tool. You must only use a metal
pen tool when the equivalent plastic pen tool is not available or when there is a problem with it.
-
Get the colored end of the tool.
-
With your thumb, slide the cable into the opening.
-
Apply a light tension so that the collar of the contact touches the front of the tool.
- To stop all relative movement, hold the cable between your thumb and the anti-slip part of the
tool.
(2) For other tools:
-
Install the wired contact in the tool.
-
Align the contact with the cavity.
- Push forward. When the collar goes through the clip, you will hear a small click and feel the
locking.
-

Make the cable free. To do this, release the pressure.

-
Remove the tool from the cavity. To do this, pull rearward. The tool slides over the cable.
- Make sure that the contact is correctly locked.
Lightly pull the cable rearward. If you feel movement of the cable, do the insertion procedure
again.
-
If locking is correct, remove the tool from the cable.
C. After insertion
Make sure that:
- The contact is correctly locked in the cavity.
- After tool/cable separation, do a check to make sure that the cable is not damaged.
4. Contact Extraction
NOTE: During insertion or extraction operations with the tool, you must make sure that you do not turn the
tool. This is to prevent:
-
Damage to the clips
- Damage to the end of the tool.
Unwanted material from a damaged tool can stay in the cavities of the connector, which can
prevent its correct connection.
A. Check before extraction

Make sure that:
- The tools are in the correct condition.
B. Extraction of Wired Contacts procedure
(Ref. Fig. 005)
- Select the correct tool for the type and size of contact (Ref. 20-48-XX) and the correct end (for
example you must use the WHITE END of the plastic tool).
-
Slide the cable you will disconnect into the opening of the tool.
- Slide the tool (split tube shape) on the cable. Insert into the cavity until it touches the stop (the tool
pushes the clip tabs into the released position and the collar is free).
-
Pull the cable. The collar goes through the clip.
-
Hold the cable between your thumb and the anti-slip part of the end of the tool (or close the clip tool).
-
Pull the cable/tool assembly to extract the contact from the cavity.
- After the tool/cable separation, make sure that:
There is no damage on all items.
C. Extraction of Unwired Contacts procedure
(Ref. Fig. 006)
-
Select the correct tool end fitting for the type and size of contact and install it into the tool.
-
Insert the tool in the selected cavity.
- Slide the tool in until it touches the stop. Use a light force to insert the barrel of the contact inside the
end fitting. The outer side of the end fitting retracts the clip tabs.
-
Pull the tool/contact assembly out of the cavity.

-
Use the piston of the tool to drive the contact off the end fitting.
- After the tool/cable separation, make sure that:
There is no damage on all items.
D. Contact unlocking from the front
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(1) On the front end of the connector, engage the tool into the contact cavity to the stop.
- The tool unlocks the contact.
- The tool releases the cable and contact assembly half way out of the cavity.
(2) Remove the tool.
(3) Carefully pull out the cable and contact assembly from the connector.
(4) Make sure that all the components are in the correct condition.
5. Manual insertion of contact
(Ref. Fig. 008)
NOTE: You can do this operation only if the connecting item does not have a grommet and if the cable is
sufficiently rigid.
Before insertion, make sure that there are no unwired contacts, sealing plugs, etc. in the cavities.
- Push the contact axially into the cavity. You will hear and feel a click when the contact collar goes
through the clip.
-
Pull lightly on the cable to make sure that the contact is correctly locked.
NOTE: A
0.1 mm (0.0039 in.) to 0.5 mm (0.0196 in.) movement of the contact is permitted. If the movement is
more, do the insertion operation again.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Insertion/Extraction Tools - Connector Cavity
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Continuity Defect Caused by Incorrect Locking of a Contact
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Contact Insertion with Tool
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Example of Damaged Tools
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Extraction of Wired Contacts
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Extraction of Unwired Contacts
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Contact Extraction From Front Side
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Contact Insertion without Tool

20-25-42 - CONTACT INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOLS (Airbus)
CONTACT INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOLS (Airbus)
CONTACT INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic gives the description of the insertion/extraction tools and their equivalents.
2. General Tool Configuration
Different tools can be used in relation to the type and size of contact to be inserted/extracted.
A. Examples of Insertion/Extraction Tools
(1) Tools for normal contacts
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(2) Tools for coaxial contacts
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(3) Tools for dummy contacts and unwired normal contacts
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(4) Tools for miscellaneous connection types
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools - Normal Contacts - M81969-1 and Equivalent
Tools
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools - Normal Contacts - M81969-8 and Equivalent
Tools
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools - Normal Contacts - M81969-17, M81969-18
and Equivalent Tools
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools - Normal Contacts - M81969-19 and
Equivalent Tools
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools - Coaxial Contacts - M81969-28-01, M81969-
28-02 and Equivalent Tools
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools - Dummy Contact and Unwired Normal
Contact - M81969-30 and Equivalent Tools

20-25-42 - CONTACT INSERTION/EXTRACTION TOOLS (Airbus)
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools - Miscellaneous Connection Types - M81969-
14 and Equivalent Tools
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools - Miscellaneous Connection Types -
Equivalent Tools
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Contact Insertion/Extraction Tools - Miscellaneous Connection Types -
Equivalent Tools

20-25-50 - MISCELLANEOUS TOOLS (Airbus)
MISCELLANEOUS TOOLS (Airbus)
MISCELLANEOUS TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the description and operation of miscellaneous tools used for maintenance
processes.
A. Wiring Tools (guns) (Ref. 20-25-51)
B. Wire Protection Tools (Ref. 20-25-52)
C. Pushbutton Switch and Indicator Light Tools (Ref. 20-25-53)
D. Tools for Connectors (Ref. 20-25-54)
E. Tools for Standard Electrical Standard Processes (Ref. 20-25-55)
F. Tools for Pressure Seals (Ref. 20-25-56)
G. Tools for Harness Attachment (Ref. 20-25-57)
H. Specific Tools for Connection Items (Ref. 20-25-58)

20-25-51 - WIRING TOOL (GUNS) (Airbus)
WIRING TOOL (GUNS) (Airbus)
WIRING TOOL (GUNS) - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic gives the description and procedure for wiring tools.
Wiring tools used to attach wires have the references that follow:
- GS2B
- GS4H
- GTH
- GTS
- MARKIII (or MK3SP)
- MK7
- MK9
- P46
- WT193.
Wiring tools used to remove tie wraps have the references that follow:
- 80075004
- 8605150S02.
2. Definition
During the wiring operation, you must attach the cables together to get harnesses that agree with the requirements and rules for the
routing.
This type of tool is used to install or remove tie wraps NSA935401 (Refer to chapter 20-33-44 related to tie wraps).
3. Attachment of cables
A. Characteristics
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| WIRING TOOL | TIE WRAP DIMENSION CODE |
| | WIDTH IN mm (in in.) |
|------------------------------|----------------------------------------------|
| | | | 03 | 04 or 13| 05, 06 or| 10 | 12 |
|MANUFACTURER|HANDLE|ADJUSTMENT| | | 08 | | |
| P/N |COLOR | | 2.5 mm| 3.7 mm | 4.8 mm | 7.6 mm | 8.9 mm |
| | | |(0.1in)|(0.145in)|(0.189in) |(0.31in)|(0.35in)|
|------------|------|----------|-------|---------|----------|--------|--------|
| PANDUIT | | SELECTOR | MIN | INT | STD | - | - |
|GS2B and GTS|BLACK |----------|-------|---------|----------|--------|--------|
| | | TENSION |1 to 2 | 3 to 5 | 6 to 8 | - | - |
|------------|------|----------|-------|---------|----------|--------|--------|
| PANDUIT | | SELECTOR | - | - | - | STD | HVY |
|GS4H and GTH| RED |----------|-------|---------|----------|--------|--------|
| | | TENSION | - | - | - | 1 to 4 | 5 to 8 |
|------------|------|----------|-------|---------|----------|--------|--------|
|LEGRAND P46 | - | TENSION | 2 | 4 | 5 | - | - |
| (32088) | | | | | | | |
|------------|------|----------|-------|---------|----------|--------|--------|
| HELLERMAN | | | | | | | |
| MARKIII | - | TENSION |1 or 2 | 2 or 3 | 3 or 4 | - | - |
| (MK3SP) | | | | | | | |
|------------|------|----------|-------|---------|----------|--------|--------|
| THOMAS | | | | | | | |
| & BETTS | - | TENSION |2 or 3 | 3 or 4 | 4 or 5 | - | - |
| WT193 | | | | | | | |
|------------|------|----------|-------|---------|----------|--------|--------|
| HELLERMAN | | SELECTOR | MIN | INT | STD | STD | HVY |
| MK7 and MK9|BLACK |----------|-------|---------|----------|--------|--------|
| | | TENSION |1 to 2 | 3 to 5 | 6 to 8 | 1 to 4 | 5 to 8 |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

B. Installation procedure
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU SET THE CORRECT TENSION ON THE GUN. IF THE TENSION IS TOO HIGH, DAMAGE
WILL OCCUR TO THE TIE WRAP (THE HEAD WILL BREAK OR THERE WILL BE STRETCHING OF THE STRAP)
AND TO THE WIRE INSULATION.
IF THE TENSION IS NOT SUFFICIENT, THE TIE WRAP WILL NOT BE SUFFICIENTLY TIGHT.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE DIMENSION CODE OF THE TIE WRAP IS SATISFACTORY FOR THE DIAMETER OF THE
BUNDLE.
(1) Tying with the gun

(Ref. Fig. 004)
-
Select the tie wrap in relation to the harness diameter.
-
Select the applicable wiring tool in relation to the tie wrap size.
- Step 1:
- Put the tie wrap around the harness with the section of the locking head on the outer side.
- Step 2:
- Engage the free end of the tie wrap into the locking head and pull tightly with your hand.
- Use the applicable tool and adjustment.
- Make sure that the tool is set to the correct value.
- Step 3:
- Put the gun nose near the tie wrap locking-head and engage the free end of the tie into it.
- Pull the trigger.
- The tie wraps are tightened. When you get the necessary tension, the tie wrap is automatically cut and the tie end is
ejected.
- You must make sure that no sharp edges protrude from the cable tie head because this can cause damage to adjacent
cable harnesses or injury to personnel.
NOTE: You must set the wiring tool to the minimum tension to attach the coaxial cable on a harness. (Put the tie wrap in the
shape of an eight to apply the pressure equally.)
(2) Tying with your hand
NOTE: In unusual cases [when you cannot use a cable-tie installation tool because you cannot get access (small areas)], it is
possible to install a satisfactory cable tie manually.
-
Select the tie wrap in relation to the harness diameter.
-
Put the tie wrap around the harness with the section of the locking head on the outer side.
-
Engage the free end of the tie wrap into the locking head and pull with your hand.
-
Complete tying with your hand.
-
You must not use too much force (the cable ties can crush the harnesses).
-
If you do not sufficiently tighten the cable tie, it will slide on the cables.
-
You must cut the cable tie as flush as possible with the cable tie head.
- You must make sure that no sharp edges protrude from the cable tie head because this can cause damage to
adjacent cable harnesses or injury to personnel.
- But you must not manually tighten cable ties for an attachment point (V clamp) or for opposite adjacent cable
harnesses, where there is less than
10 mm (0.3937 in.) clearance.
(3) Check of correct tightening

- After tightening, the tie wrap cannot slide longitudinally along the harness but can lightly turn around the harness.
4. Tie wrap removal
A. 80075004 RENNSTEIG
(Ref. Fig. 005)
This type of tool is used to remove tie wraps with cutting of the tie wrap head.
You must use cutter pliers 80075004 RENNSTEIG to remove the plastic tie wraps. Cut the head but do not cause damage to the
cables.

NOTE: You must not use cutters, knives or scissors to remove plastic tie wraps.
B. 8605150S02 KNIPEX
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
This type of tool is used to remove tie wraps without cutting of the tie wraps head.
(1) Push on the setting knob and keep it pushed.
(2) Move the mobile jaw to the correct position in relation to the size of the tie wrap you will remove.
(3) Apply pressure to the tie wrap head with the pliers.
(4) Make sure that you put the pliers' jaws in position perpendicularly to the harness.
(5) Apply sufficient pressure to cause a large distortion of the head.
(6) Release the pressure on the handles. This is theoretically sufficient to release the free end of the tie wrap from the head.
(7) If the end of the tie wrap does not release, to remove the tie wrap:
- Push the head with your thumb or
- Apply a light pressure to the head again with the pliers.
NOTE: You must not make oscillatory movements with the pliers to release the free end of the tie wrap from the head.
After removal, discard the tie wrap.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Wiring Tool (Guns) - Description GS2B and GS4H (PANDUIT)
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Wiring Tool (Guns) - Description MK3SP (HELLERMAN), P46 (Legrand) and WT193 (Thomas & Betts)
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Wiring Tool (Guns) - Description GTH and GTS (PANDUIT) and MK7 and MK9 (HELLERMAN)
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Wiring Tool (Guns) - Procedure
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Wiring Tool - Description and Procedure 80075004 RENNSTEIG
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Wiring Tool - Description 8605150S02 KNIPEX
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Wiring Tool - Procedure 8605150S02 KNIPEX

20-25-52 - WIRE PROTECTION TOOL (Airbus)
WIRE PROTECTION TOOL (Airbus)
WIRE PROTECTION TOOL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter deals with the description and operation of the tools used for some specific procedures to apply on conduits.
These tools have the following references:
- SUPERFLEXIT cutter 27672 or 27460 - drain hole tool
- ROUNDIT 5-19 - textile conduit installation tool
- ICORE/ISOFLEX 16-016X-12 - convoluted conduit connection tool
- ICORE 16-0987 - conduit expansion tool
- ICORE 16-0803 - hydraulic/pneumatic crimping tool
- ICORE 19600 and REMA 58006-00 type HP50 - crimping pliers
- THOMAS & BETTS WT3176G and IZUMI 404062 (model 15)
2. SUPERFLEXIT cutter 27672 or 27460 - Draining Tool
(Ref. Fig. 001)
A. General
A drain hole gives the electrical bundle protection from liquid accumulated in the conduit.
There must be drain holes in all convoluted conduits (e.g. ABS0887, E0432, NSA935805, NSA935806) with low points,
except for:
- Conduits on sealed harnesses
- Conduits in a pressurized compartment
- Moving conduits which allow moisture to drain
- Small conduits, size code 02, 03 and 04
- Small conduits used inside overbraided bundles
(1) For shielded conduits
For shielded conduits which are made of convoluted conduits, the drain hole is made during manufacture with a
specific tool before delivery and installation.
Drain holes or drain hole zones are identified on each side by yellow sleeves.
NOTE: If, during installation, the drain holes are not put in the correct position (lowest point), you must put drain holes
at the lowest point and secure the shield (refer to chapter 20-33-32).
(2) For non-shielded conduits

Drain holes will be made after installation of the conduit at the lowest point.
B. Description of the Tool
The draining tool SUPERFLEXIT cutter N 27672 is used to make a drain hole at the low point of convoluted conduit type
ABS0887, E0432, NSA935805 and NSA935806.
Depending on the chosen blade end, two different sizes of holes can be made:
- Small hole on conduit size code 6 through 28
- Large hole on conduit size code 32 through 48.
The size of the hole depends on the size of the conduit.
The applicable conduit size code is engraved on each end of the blade.
NOTE: The tool 27460 is supplied with two blades, one for conduit diameters of
6 mm (0.2362 in.) thru 28 mm (1.1023 in.) and the other for larger diameters.
C. Procedure
- Select the tool blade side applicable to the conduit size code.
- Mark the conduit low point where the drain hole must be made.
- Pass the tool under the conduit at the location marked.
- Hold the tool perpendicular to the conduit and the blade horizontal.
- Insert the convolution (rib) inside the blade aperture.
- Push the tool perpendicularly to the conduit to cut the convolution peak (downwards).
NOTE: This operation can be carried out with this tool without risk for the cables routed in the conduit.

NOTE: On overbraided conduits the drain holes are made by the manufacturer on the full length of the convoluted conduit.
No hole must be made on the overbraiding.
3. ROUNDIT 5-19 - Textile Split Conduit Installation Tool

A. General
The conduit installation tool is used to install the EN6049-006 and EN6049-007 conduit type on the electrical bundle.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
The tool roundit 5-19 can be used on either side depending on the conduit size code to be installed.
Head tool side 5/8 for conduit size code 5 and 8.
Head tool side 13/19 for conduit size code 13 and 19.
C. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 003)
- Select the tool side applicable to the conduit diameter.
- Install the wire bundle in the applicable aperture of the tool (detail 1).
- Bolt the wire bundle in the tool (detail 2).
- Install the EN6049-006 and EN6049-007 conduit on the tool.
- Insert the conduit by the nose cone and the lateral aperture (detail 3).
- Install the conduit around the bundle by moving the tool along the bundle (detail 4) up to the end of the conduit.
- Remove the tool from the bottom of the conduit (detail 5).
- Remove the tool from the bundle (detail 6).
4. ICORE/ISOFLEX 16-016X-12 - Convoluted Conduit Connection Tool
A. General
The convoluted conduit connection tool is used to install a nipple on the convoluted conduit to connect it at the rear of a
connector;
These nipples or end pieces have the following codes:
E0074 and E0109, straight.
E0075, straight for convoluted conduit with braid sheath.
E0115, right angle.
(Ref. Fig. 004)
The size of the tool depends on the size of the conduit.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CONDUIT SIZE | TOOL |
| |-------------------------------------------------|
| CODE | MANUFACTURER | TOOL REFERENCE |
|------------------------|---------------------------|---------------------|
| 06 | | 16-0160-12 |
|------------------------| |---------------------|
| 09 | | 16-0161-12 |
|------------------------| |---------------------|
| 10 | | 16-0162-12 |
|------------------------| |---------------------|
| 12 | | 16-0163-12 |
|------------------------| ICORE/ISOFLEX |---------------------|
| 14 | | 16-0164-12 |
|------------------------| |---------------------|
| 16 | | 16-0165-12 |
|------------------------| |---------------------|
| 20 | | 16-0166-12 |
|------------------------| |---------------------|
| 24 | | 16-0167-12 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 005)
-
Cut the convoluted conduit to length. The cut must be clean, no tear is authorized.

-
Push the connector nut and the outer ring along the conduit, observing the installation direction (step 1).
-
Select the applicable tool. Put the tool end side A (the conical end) inside the convoluted conduit to flare it (step 2).
- Put the inner ring to side B of the tool; use the tool to insert the inner ring up to the shoulder into the flared conduit end
(the cone on the inner ring must point to the conduit end (step 3)).
-
Remove the tool; the inner ring must remain in the conduit.
-
Use tool side A to properly flange the protruding conduit end to the inside (step 4).
-
Push the outer ring and the connector nut forward and screw them to the nipple or angle piece (step 5).
5. Conduit Expansion Tool ICORE 16-0987

A. General
The conduit expansion tool is used to adapt the diameter of convoluted conduits to the diameter of backshells, end pieces
and conduit fittings that have to be installed.
B. Description of tool
(Ref. Fig. 006)
Several sizes of end bit can be selected depending on the size of the convoluted conduit.
C. Procedure
- Select the correct end bit depending on the conduit size by rotating the head of the tool.
- Insert the selected end bit in the end of the conduit.
- Press the tool until the diameter of the conduit is correct.
- Extract the tool from the conduit.
6. Hydraulic/Pneumatic Crimping Tool ICORE 16-0803
A. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 007)
ICORE hydraulic/pneumatic crimping tool ICORE 16-0803 is used for crimping sleeves on backshells, end pieces and
conduit fittings.
Power is controlled by a foot switch.
B. Die table
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | CHECK DIMENSIONS |
| | |------------------------------------------|
| CONDUIT SIZE | DIE ICORE P/N | DIAMETER OF OPENING |MAX. SLEEVE DIAMETER|
| | | FOR SECOND CRIMP | AFTER CRIMPING * |
| | | OPERATION mm (in.) | mm (in.) |
|------------------|---------------|---------------------|--------------------|
| VW-06 | V-06 | 16-1227-06 | 10.11 (0.3980) | 10.26 (0.4039) |
|---------|--------|---------------|---------------------|--------------------|
| VW-09 | V-09 | 16-1227-09 | 12.50 (0.4921) | 12.65 (0.4980) |
|---------|--------|---------------|---------------------|--------------------|
| VW-10 | V-10 | 16-1227-10 | 13.40 (0.5275) | 13.55 (0.5334) |
|---------|--------|---------------|---------------------|--------------------|
| VW-12 | V-12 | 16-1227-12 | 15.40 (0.6062) | 15.55 (0.6122) |
|---------|--------|---------------|---------------------|--------------------|
| VW-14 | V-14 | 16-1227-14 | 16.96 (0.6677) | 17.11 (0.6736) |
|---------|--------|---------------|---------------------|--------------------|
| VW-16 | V-16 | 16-1227-16 | 18.61 (0.7326) | 18.76 (0.7385) |
|---------|--------|---------------|---------------------|--------------------|
| VW-20 | V-20 | 16-1227-20 | 21.76 (0.8566) | 21.91 (0.8625) |
|---------|--------|---------------|---------------------|--------------------|
| VW-24 | V-24 | 16-1227-24 | 25.73 (1.0129) | 25.88 (1.0188) |
|---------|--------|---------------|---------------------|--------------------|
| VW-32 | V-32 | 16-1227-32/1 | 33.42 (1.3157) | 33.57 (1.3216) |
| | | 16-1227-32/2 | | |

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* If, after crimping, the sleeve diameter is larger than specified, the sleeve may be recrimped twice, rotated by 90 , in the
cavity for the second crimping operation. If the specified dimensions are not achieved even then, crimping tool and
components must be checked.
7. Crimping Pliers ICORE 19600 and REMA 58006-00 type HP50
A. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 008)
Crimping pliers ICORE 19600 and REMA 58006-00 are used in replacement of ICORE 16-0803 for crimping sleeves on
backshells, end pieces and conduit fittings.
B. Die table
(1) For ICORE 19600:
---------------------------------------------------
| CONDUIT SIZE | DIE ICORE P/N |
|---------------------------|---------------------|
| VW-06 | V-06 | 16-1234-06 |
|-------------|-------------|---------------------|
| VW-09 | V-09 | 16-1234-09 |
|-------------|-------------|---------------------|
| VW-10 | V-10 | 16-1234-10 |
|-------------|-------------|---------------------|
| VW-12 | V-12 | 16-1234-12 |
|-------------|-------------|---------------------|
| VW-14 | V-14 | 16-1234-14 |
|-------------|-------------|---------------------|
| VW-16 | V-16 | 16-1234-16 |
|-------------|-------------|---------------------|
| VW-20 | V-20 | 16-1234-20 |
|-------------|-------------|---------------------|
| VW-24 | V-24 | 16-1234-24 |
---------------------------------------------------
(2) For REMA 58006-00 type HP50:
-------------------------------------------------
| CONDUIT SIZE | DIE REMA P/N |
|---------------------------|-------------------|
| VW-06 | V-06 | VW-06 |
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
| VW-09 | V-09 | VW-09 |
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
| VW-10 | V-10 | VW-10 |
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
| VW-12 | V-12 | VW-12 |
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
| VW-14 | V-14 | VW-14 |
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
| VW-16 | V-16 | VW-16 |
-------------------------------------------------
8. Crimping pliers THOMAS & BETTS WT3176G and IZUMI 404062 (model 15)
A. Designation
(Ref. Fig. 008)
Crimping pliers THOMAS & BETTS WT3176G and IZUMI 404062 (model 15) are used for the installation of crimping
sleeves on coaxial connectors.
NOTE: To crimp sleeves ABS0333, you must use the crimping pliers with the die GS710G.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Wire Protection Tool - Draining Tool Description and Use SUPERFLEXIT Cutter 27672

Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Wire Protection Tool - Protection Installation Tool Description ROUNDIT 5-19
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Wire Protection Tool - Protection Installation Tool Procedure ROUNDIT 5-19
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Wire Protection Tools - Convoluted Conduit Connection Tool Description ICORE/ISOFLEX 16-
016X-12 Type
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Wire Protection Tools - Convoluted Conduit Connection Tool Procedure ICORE/ISOFLEX 16-
016X-12 Type

20-25-53 - SWITCH AND INDICATOR LIGHT TOOLS (Airbus)
SWITCH AND INDICATOR LIGHT TOOLS (Airbus)
SWITCH AND INDICATOR LIGHT TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description of the tools used for the removal/installation of pushbuttons, toggle and rotary switches, and indicator lights.
2. Tools
A. Tools for pushbutton switches and indicator lights
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| |Illuminated| TOOL REFERENCE FOR |
| FUNCTION |pushbutton |-------------------------------------------------|
| | P/N | ECE | EATON | KORRY |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Extraction tool|E0415 |ECE 0UT74 |EATON | |
|Head from | | |851-30486-510 | |
|body | | |(ex MSC584-901) | - |
| | | |or | |
| | | |EATON 58T-101 | |
| |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| |ABS0951 |ECE 0UT74 | |ECE 0UT74 |
| | |or EATON | |or EATON |
| | |851-30486-510 | |851-30486-510 |
| | |(ex MSC | |(ex MSC584-901) |
| | |584-901) | - |or |
| | |or | |EATON 58T-101 |
| | |EATON 58T-101 | |or |
| | | | |KORRY 29082-001 |
| |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| |NSA933689 |ECE 0UT74 |EATON | |
| |head | |851-30486-510 | |
| | | |(ex MSC584-901) | - |
| | | |or | |
| | | |EATON 58T-101 | |
| |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| |NSA933XXX |ECE 0UT83 | | |
| |type |or | | |
| |except |NSA933684 | - | - |
| |933689 | | | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Extraction tool|NSA933XXX |ECE 0UT74 |EATON | |
|Body from |type |or |851-30486-510 | |
|mounting sleeve| |ECE 0UT86 |(ex MSC584-901) | - |
| | | |or | |
| | | |EATON 58T-101 | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Guiding tool |E0415 |ECE 0UT75 |EATON | |
|for screwdriver| |modified by |851-30486-506 | |
| | |AIRBUS |(ex MSC584-501) | |
| | | |or | - |
| | | |EATON 58T-108 | |
| | | |or ECE | |
| | | |0UT75 modified | |
| | | |by AIRBUS | |
| |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| |ABS0951 |ECE 0UT217 | - |KORRY 29085-001 |
| |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| |NSA933XXX |ECE 0UT75 |EATON | |
| |type | |851-30486-506 | |
| | | |(ex MSC584-501) | - |
| | | |or | |
| | | |EATON 58T-108 | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Dynamometric |E0415 |ECE 0UT87-1 | |

|screwdriver | |or EATON | |

|0.012 to | |851-30486-508 | |
|0.014 m.daN | |(ex MSC584-510) | |
|(1.062 to | |or | |
|1.239 Lbf.in) | |EATON 58T-106 | - |
|(Body | |or | |
|installation in| |Powell Duffryn | |
|mounting | |TLS022 + Blade | |
|sleeve) | |AM DP27478SP 0.3x3 | |
| | | | |
| |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| |NSA9333XXX |ECE 0UT87-1 |EATON | |
| |type |or |851-30486-508 | |
| | |Powell Duffryn|(ex MSC584-510) | |
| | |TLS022 + Blade|or | |
| | |AM DP27478SP |EATON 58T-106 or| - |
| | |0.3x3 |Powell Duffryn | |
| | | |TLS022 + Blade | |
| | | |AM DP27478SP | |
| | | |0.3x3 | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Dynamometric |ABS0951 |ECE 0UT87-2 | |ECE 0UT87-2 |
|screwdriver | | | | |
|0.0085 to | | | | |
|0.010 m.daN | | | - | |
|(0.752 to | | | | |
|0.885 Lbf.in) | | | | |
|---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------|
|Connector E0417|ABS0951 |ECE 0UT141 | |EATON |
|extractor | | | |851-30486-507 |
| | | | - |(ex MSC584-502) |
| | | | |or |
| | | | |EATON 58T-107 |
| |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| |E0415 |ECE 0UT141 |EATON | |
| | | |851-30486-507 | - |
| | | |(ex MSC584-502) | |
| | | |or | |
| | | |EATON 58T-107 | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Fixture |NSA |ECE 0UT70 | | |
|Mounting sleeve|933672 | | | |
| |to 933677 | | | |
| |and NSA | | - | - |
| |933681 | | | |
| |to 933683 | | | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|Screwdriver |ALL | |
|Blade width | | |
|3 mm | | |
|(0.118 in) | | No specific |
|(Body removal | | |
|from mounting | | |
|sleeve) | | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
B. Tools for toggle and rotary switches
(1) 0UT131
(Ref. Fig. 003)
This tool is used for the removal/installation of toggle switch E0028 (ex. NSA931422 and NSA931423).
3. Procedure
You can find the illuminated pushbutton switch removal/installation procedure in chapters 20-45-11 and 20-45-11-E.
You can find the toggle and rotary switch removal/installation procedures in chapters 20-45-21 and 20-45-23.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Switch and Indicator Light Tools - Description ECE, EATON and POWELL DUFFRYN

Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Switch and Indicator Light Tools - Description ECE (Only for NSA)
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Switch and Indicator Light Tools - Description ECE tools

20-25-54 - TOOLS FOR CONNECTORS (Airbus)
TOOLS FOR CONNECTORS (Airbus)
TOOLS FOR CONNECTORS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and operation of the tools used for some specific procedures to be applied
on connectors.
These tools have the codes that follow:
- UTICA 529, SOURIAU 8498-03, GLENAIR TG69, FACOM 410S and CRESCENT 52910N - Rubber-jaw
pliers.
-
OCETA OCE23-270 and SOURIAU 8500-30, 8533-1151 and 8599-0831 - Tightening support.
- SOURIAU 8665-133, DANIELS DRK425 (AIR-LB 001901-003-00) and ANDERTON AM12 polarization
key removal tools.
-
AIR-LB 001901-001-00 tightening wrench tool.
-
DMC BTBS609 and GLENAIR TG70 - Strap Wrench
-
SNAP-ON AN8508XXB - Notched hex nut wrench and SNAP-ON FCXXA or FCXXB - Hex nut wrench
-
FACOM 116-50 - Sliding-jaw pin Wrench
2. Rubber-jaw pliers and FACOM 410S, UTICA 529, SOURIAU 8498-03 with inserts 8500-1015, GLENAIR TG69
and CRESCENT 52910N.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
A. General
Rubber-jaw pliers are used to install and remove the backshells and connectors more easily. The correct
tightening can thus be done without damage to the backshells or connectors.
B. Description of the tool
The pliers are adjustable with several positions in relation to the size of the backshells and connectors.
They have non metallic replaceable inserts. For backshells, they are used with the tightening support
SOURIAU 8500-30 or 8533-1151 for EN2997 connectors or 8599-0831 for EN3645 connectors or
equivalent.
C. Procedure
- Select the tool applicable to the size of the backshell or connector to be installed or removed.
- Adjust the jaws of the pliers to the correct diameter.
(1) Installation
- Tighten the backshell onto the connector manually.
- Use the pliers to fully tighten the backshell.
(2) Removal
- Use the pliers to loosen the backshell from the connector.
- Fully loosen the backshell manually.
3. Tightening support SOURIAU 8500-30 and OCETA OCE23-270
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
A. General

The tightening support is used to hold the connector to remove/install the backshells more easily.
B. Procedure
- Select the cavity in relation to the connector size.
- Insert the connector in the selected cavity. Obey the same principle as for connections to
receptacles.
- Use rubber-jaw pliers to tighten or loosen the backshell.
4. 8665-133, DRK425 (AIR-LB 001901-003-00) and ANDERTON AM12 Polarization Key Removal Tools
(Ref. Fig. 004)
A. General
8665-133, DRK425 and AM12 tools are used to remove the polarization keys from the connectors more
easily.
B. Procedure
(1) SOURIAU 8665-133
-
Insert the tool on the front face of the connector until you feel the release of the retaining ring.
- Hold the tool and the connector tightly together and push the plunger on the tool to release the
polarization key.
(2) DANIELS DRK425 (AIR-LB 001901-003-00)
- Insert the tool on the front face of the connector until you feel the release of the retaining ring.
NOTE: The plunger of the tool will extend at the same time.
- Hold the tool and the connector tightly together and push the plunger on the tool to release the
polarization key.
(3) ANDERTON AM12
- Use the tool to install or extract the retaining clip of polarization keys E0391.
5. AIR LB 0001901-001-00 Tightening Wrench Tool
(Ref. Fig. 005)
A. General
This tool is used to tighten the attachment screws of the connectors installed on the structure of the
aircrafts.
B. Procedure
- Select the applicable tip and install it on the tightening wrench.
- Tighten the attachment screws of the fixed connector to the applicable torque value.
6. DMC BTBS609, BTBS611 and GLENAIR TG70 - Strap Wrench
(Ref. Fig. 006)
A. General
This tool is used to tighten the backshell on the connector.
For composite backshells with notched hexagonal nut, use a strap wrench equipped with a torque wrench
and a wrench adaptor (e.g. FACOM R232) if required.
NOTE: The square drive is used to insert the torque wrench.
B. Procedure
Install the strap around the backshell and tighten with handle in clockwise direction.
7. SNAP-ON AN85081XX - Notched hex nut wrench and SNAP-ON FCXXX - Hex nut Wrench
(Ref. Fig. 007)

A. General
These tools are used to tighten the backshell on the connector with a torque wrench with a 3/8 square
drive.
NOTE: You must use the size of tools that is related to the size of the backshell.
8. FACOM 116-50 - Sliding-jaw pin Wrench

(Ref. Fig. 008)
A. General
This tool is used to tighten the backshell on the connector after insertion of its pins in the holes.
9. DMC CMXXXX and equivalents - Connector Locking Tools
(Ref. Fig. 009)
A. General
This tool is used to hold the connector when you must tighten the backshell on it.
NOTE: This tool must be used with a sliding handle (e.g FACOM R120 or equivalent) and if necessary,
wrench adaptor (e.g FACOM R232).
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 003)
- Select the correct tool size in relation to the connector to be installed.
- Install and tighten manually the backshell on the connector.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Tools for Connectors - Rubber-Jaw Pliers UTICA 529, SOURIAU 8498-03,
GLENAIR TG69, FACOM 410S and CRESCENT 52910N.
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Tools for Connectors - Tightening supports SOURIAU 8500-30 and OCETA
OCE23-270
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Tools for Connectors - Connector Locking Tools and Tightening Supports DMC
CMXXXX and SOURIAU 85XX
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Tools for Connectors - Polarization Key Removal Tool - SOURIAU 8665-133,
AIR-LB 001901-003-00, DANIELS DRK425 and ANDERTON AM12
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Tools for Connectors - Tightening Wrench Tool - AIR-LB 001901-001-00
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Tools for Connectors - Strap Wrench Tool - DMC BTBS609 and GLENAIR TG70
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Tools for Connectors - Notched Hex Nut Wrench and Hex Nut Wrench SNAP-ON
AN8508XXX and SNAP-on FCXXX
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Tools for Connectors - Sliding-Jaw Pin Wrench FACOM 116-50
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Tools for Connectors - Connector Locking Tool DMC CM837RB10

20-25-55 - TOOLS FOR ELECTRICAL STANDARD PROCESSES (Airbus)
TOOLS FOR ELECTRICAL STANDARD PROCESSES (Airbus)
TOOLS FOR ELECTRICAL STANDARD PROCESSES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter deals with the description and operation of the tools frequently used for some procedures to be
applied for general cases.
- BELZER VAN EXTRA 2855 - locking pliers
- No specific - soldering iron
- ACRATORK TNS55, TORQUE LEADER and FACOM - Torque wrench and screw driver
2. Locking Pliers BELZER VAN EXTRA 2855
(Ref. Fig. 001)
A. General
The locking pliers BELZER VAN EXTRA 2855 are used to safety some electrical parts with lockwire. This
is to prevent loosening or unscrewing of these parts.
The tool is a pair of steel pliers equipped with a twisting mechanism and a locking system.
3. Soldering Iron (no specific)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
A. General
Soldering irons are used to solder electrical connections.
The tool is composed of an electrical power supply, an iron and a base on which to place the iron when it
is not used.
C. Procedure
- Switch "ON" the electrical power supply.
- Select the correct temperature depending on the diameter of the wires to be soldered.
- Make sure the tip of the iron is clean before soldering.
- Do not hesitate to wipe the tip on the wet spong when it is hot as much as necessary.
D. Associated items
- Solder pump
- Desolder braid
4. Torque Wrench
(Ref. Fig. 003)
A. General
Torque wrenches are used to apply a specified torque on a screw, nut or any screwed part.
The tool is equipped with a system for adjustment to any torque value. Different sizes of tools are
available depending on the required torque value.
C. Procedure
- Select the applicable tool.
- Install the correct adaptor on the tool depending on the diameter of the screw/nut to be torqued.
- Put the torque wrench at a right angle to the torquing axis.

20-25-55 - TOOLS FOR ELECTRICAL STANDARD PROCESSES (Airbus)
- Put your hand in the middle of the handle.

- Gradually pull at a right angle to the torque wrench.
- Immediatly stop torquing when the wrench "clicks".
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Tools for Electrical Standard Processes - Locking Pliers BELZER VAN EXTRA
2855
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Tools for Electrical Standard Processes - Soldering Iron No Specific
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Tools for Electrical Standard Processes - Torque Wrench ACRATORK TNS55,
TORQUE LEADER and FACOM

20-25-56 - TOOLS FOR PRESSURE SEALS (Airbus)
TOOLS FOR PRESSURE SEALS (Airbus)
TOOLS FOR PRESSURE SEALS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description of the tools and some specified procedures to use them on pressure seals.
-
DEUTSCH 057-0854-00 - Fastening wrench
-
DEUTSCH 057-0750-00 - Harness shaping tool
- DEUTSCH 057-0852-29, DEUTSCH 057-0853-42 wrench adapters and related torque wrench
TORQUELEADER TBN65 or equivalent
- DULAC ET NOZIERES SADI TESSIERI & COLOMBINI SAS 9142729634 and 9142729637 hook wrench
adapters and related torque wrench TORQUELEADER TSN55 or equivalent.
2. Fastening Wrench - DEUTSCH 057-0854-00
A. Designation
Fastening wrench DEUTSCH 057-0854-00 is used to lock pressure seal ABS1378 in position during
tightening of the attachment nut or other accessories.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
Tool DEUTSCH 057-0854-00 is used in relation to the shell size of the pressure seal used.
One end of the tool can hold a size 28 pressure seal and the other can hold a size 36 pressure seal.
C. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
- Identify the size of the pressure seal you will lock.
- Put the pressure seal in the correct end of the tool and make sure that it is locked.
- Tighten the attachment nut against the panel with an applicable tool.
3. Harness Shaping Tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00
A. Designation
Harness shaping tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00 is used to shape the harness during preparation and
before assembly of pressure seal ABS1378.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
Tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00 can be used on harness diameters from 4 mm (0.1574 in.) to 41 mm
(1.6141 in.) .
C. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 002)
- Wind self-welding tape ABS5334 around the harness, then put it in tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00 and
adjust it below the grip strap.
-
Turn the grip roller manually until the grip strap is tightened.
- Torque the grip roller to
0.2 m.daN (17.69 lbf.in) with a dynamometric screwdriver.
NOTE:
You must not tighten the mechanism too much:

20-25-56 - TOOLS FOR PRESSURE SEALS (Airbus)
The grip stop mark must not align with the red mark on the tool.
4. Wrench Adapter - DEUTSCH 057-0852-29 and DEUSTCH 057-0853-42

A. Designation
This type of tool is used to correctly tighten the rear nut of the pressure seals.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
Tool DEUTSCH 057-0852-29 or 057-0853-42 is used in relation to the shell size of the pressure seal.
C. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 003)
-
Identify the size of the pressure seal.
- Get the correct wrench adapter and put it in dynamometric torque wrench TORQUELEADER TBN65
or equivalent.
-
Torque the nut to the applicable value.
5. Hook Wrench Adapter - DULAC ET NOZIERES SADI TESSIERI & COLOMBINI SAS 9142729634 and
9142729637
A. Designation
This type of tool is used to correctly tighten the attachment nut on the panel for pressure seal ABS1378.
(Ref. Fig. 004)
Hook wrench adapter 9142729634 or 9142729637 is used in relation to the shell size of the pressure seal.
C. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
-
Identify the size of the pressure seal.
- Get the correct hook wrench adapter and put it in dynamometric torque wrench TORQUELEADER
TSN55 or equivalent.
-
Torque the nut to the applicable value.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Tools for Pressure Seals - Fastening Wrench DEUTSCH 057-0854-00
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Tools for Pressure Seals - Harness Shaping Tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Tools for Pressure Seals - Torque Wrench and Adapter DEUTSCH 057-0853-42,
DEUTSCH 057-0852-29 and TORQUELEADER TBN65
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Tools for Pressure Seals - Torque Wrench and Adapter 9142729634,
9142729637 and TORQUELEADER TSN55

20-25-57 - TOOLS FOR HARNESS ATTACHMENT (Airbus)
TOOLS FOR HARNESS ATTACHMENT (Airbus)
TOOLS FOR HARNESS ATTACHMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic gives the description and the procedures for harness attachment tools.
Harness attachment tools used to attach the wires on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- 99D57004005000 - Raceway harpoon tie removal tool
- BAND-IT A30199 and A40199 - Mechanical pliers for E0805 metallic clamping strip installation
- BAND-IT A35599 and A35199 - Pneumatic pliers for E0805 metallic clamping strip installation
2. Raceway Harpoon-Tie Removal-Tool 99D57004005000
A. General
The raceway harpoon-tie removal-tool 99D57004005000 is used to remove the harpoon tie from the
raceway. It compresses the barbs on the head of the tie.
B. Description
(Ref. Fig. 001)
The tool material is NYLON 66. For easy installation in position below the head of the harpoon tie, this tool
has a counter-elbowed form.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE TOO MUCH FORCE TO ROCK THE TOOL. THIS CAN CAUSE DISTORTION OF
THE RACEWAY AND DAMAGE TO ITS MOUNTING.
BE CAREFUL NOT TO CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE WIRING WHEN YOU PULL THE TIE FROM
A POPULATED RACEWAY CHANNEL.
C. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(1) Step 1:
- Place the tool under the raceway and put the hole in position in the end of the tool on the barbs
of the tie to be removed.
-
Rock the tool downwards to compress the tie barbs.
(2) Step 2:
-
Pull the tie, fairlead and retainer out of the raceway channel.
- Do a visual check of the wiring to make sure there is no damage. Damaged wiring must be
replaced or repaired (Refer to chapter 20-53-2X - electrical wire repair).
3. Pliers BAND-IT A30199 and A40199
A. General
The pliers BAND-IT A30199 and A40199 are used to hold metallic clamping strip E0805 to attach metallic
conduits on backshells.
B. Description
(Ref. Fig. 002)
This tool is a mechanical pliers model which has a clamping and a cutting handle. Two models are
available.
(1) Clamp allocation table
---------------------------------------------------------

| TOOL | METALLIC CLAMPING STRIP |

|-----------------------------|-------------------------|
| P/N | NORM | COLOR OF | P/N | WIDTH |
| | | THE HEAD | | mm (in.) |
|--------|---------|----------|---------|---------------|
| A30199 | BAND-IT | CHROMED | E0805-1 | 3.17 (0.125) |
|--------|---------|----------|---------|---------------|
| | | | E0805-2 | |
| A40199 | BAND-IT | BLACK |---------| 6.35 (0.250) |
| | | | E0805-3 | |
---------------------------------------------------------
C. Procedure
NOTE: Make sure that the head of the clamping is identified (e.g. "BAND-IT") and a triangle is engraved
near the opposite end of the clamp. Do not use unmarked clamps.
NOTE: Before installation of the metallic clamping strip E0805, you must first install the backshell on the
connector.
(Ref. Fig. 003)

(1) Step 1:
- Get the correct clamp size and wind it two times around the applicable harness, through the
head each time.
(2) Step 2:
(Ref. Fig. 004)
- Use the correct mechanical pliers and do a check for validity.
- Remove the two handle clips to release the pliers.
- Hold the pliers by the tool body and push the insertion lever to insert the clamp.
(3) Step 3:
- Squeeze the clamping handle several times until the clamp touches the tool.
(4) Step 4:
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
-
Put the clamp in position in its final clamping point.
- Squeeze the clamping handle several times until clamping starts. Then firmly squeeze until the
pliers lock.
NOTE: If the pliers unlock a first time, change the metallic clamping strip.
NOTE: If the pliers unlock a second time, change the pliers and the clamping strip.
NOTE: If a problem occurs, you can operate the release lever with a flat screw driver to release the
clamping.
(5) Step 5:
- Squeeze the cutting handles until the clamp cuts.
(6) Step 6:
- Use the insertion lever to remove the clamping strip offcut from the pliers.
(7) Step 7:

- Put the clamping strip offcut in the applicable bin.

4. Pliers BAND-IT A35599 and A35199
The pliers BAND-IT A35999 and A35199 are used to hold metallic clamping strip E0805 to attach metallic
conduits on backshells.
A. Description
(Ref. Fig. 007)
This tool is a pneumatic pliers model. It has a control and regulating air source system and pneumatic
pliers. Two models are available.
(1) Clamp allocation table
----------------------------------------------
| TOOL | METALLIC CLAMPING STRIP |
|------------------|-------------------------|
| P/N | NORM | P/N | WIDTH |
| | | | mm (in.) |
|--------|---------|---------|---------------|
| A35599 | BAND-IT | E0805-1 | 3.17 (0.125) |
|--------|---------|---------|---------------|
| | | E0805-2 | |
| A35199 | BAND-IT |---------| 6.35 (0.250) |
| | | E0805-3 | |
----------------------------------------------
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 007)
NOTE: Make sure that the head of the clamping is identified (e.g. "BAND-IT") and that this mark can be
seen on the clamp. Do not use clamps that have no mark.
NOTE: Before installation of the metallic clamping strip E0805, you must first install the backshell on the
connector.
(1) Get the correct clamp size and wind it two times around the applicable harness, through the head
each time.
(2) Connect the air source to the tool, make sure that the pressure is adjusted between 6.9 and 7.6 bars.
(3) On the pressure gauge adjust to 1.45 bars for small clamps and 3.10 bars for large clamps. Use the
pressure-regulator adjustment knob to do this.
(4) Step 1:
(Ref. Fig. 008)
- Set cut-off button to AUTO
- Insert the clamp in the related slot and feed through with the actuator button.
(5) Step 2:
-
Put the clamp in position in its final clamping point.
- Operate the pliers with the actuator button to get the correct tightening and clean cut of the
clamp.
NOTE: If a problem occurs, you can push the red button RESET to release the clamping.

Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Tools for Harness Attachment - Procedure 99D57004005000
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Tools for Harness Attachment - Description BAND-IT A30199 and A40199
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Tools for Harness Attachment - Metallic Clamping Strip E0805 BAND-IT A30199,
A40199, A35599 and A35199
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Tools for Harness Attachment - Procedure BAND-IT A30199 and A40199
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Tools for Harness Attachment - Metallic Clamping Strip E0805 BAND-IT A30199
and A40199
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Tools for Harness Attachment - Description BAND-IT A35599 and A35199

20-25-58 - SPECIFIC TOOLS FOR CONNECTION ITEMS (Airbus)
SPECIFIC TOOLS FOR CONNECTION ITEMS (Airbus)
SPECIFIC TOOLS FOR CONNECTION ITEMS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and operation of special tools for connection items.
- 68101L929111001
- 68101LE0466TSXXX
- 68101GDXX
2. Tool 68101LE0466TSXXX or 68101GDXX
A. General
For correct crimping of E0466 terminals, it is necessary to make a mark on the cables AD and YV with the
tool 68101LE0466TSXXX or 68101GDXX.
NOTE: As an equivalent, you can use a terminal cut along its longitudinal axis. Make sure that you
removed the sealing ring and remaining grease.
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
- Select the correct size of tool, in relation to the terminal size.
Step 1:
- Put the stripped cable in the tool.
- Make a mark on the KAPTON, in line with the tool.
Step 2 (for YV cable only)
- Put the NOMEX in position in the tool
2 mm (0.0787 in.) aft of the sealing ring and make a mark in line with the tool.
3. Tool 68101L929111001
A. General
For correct crimping of ABS1380 and ABS1381 terminals, it is necessary to make a mark on the cable AD
with the tool 68101L929111001.
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 002)
- Select the correct size on the tool in relation to the cable gauge.
- Engage the cable fully in the tool.
- Make a mark on the cable with a permanent pen.
NOTE: The tip of the permanent pen must be in contact with the rear stop of the tracing slot of the tool.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Specific Tools for Connection Items - Description and Procedure
68101LE0466TSXX or 68101GDXX
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Specific Tools for Connection Items - Description and Procedure
68101L929111001

20-25-60 - MARKING TOOLS (Airbus)
MARKING TOOLS (Airbus)
MARKING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO NOT CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CABLE INSULATION DURING THE
CABLE MARKING PROCEDURE.
DAMAGE TO THE INSULATION CAN CAUSE DETERIORATION OF THE MECHANICAL AND
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CABLE.
1. General
The chapters that follow give the description and operation of the tools used for the marking of cables.
2. Structure of the Chapter
A. Marking Tools - UV Laser for Cables (Ref. 20-25-61).
B. Marking Tools for Item Identification (Ref. 20-25-65).

20-25-61 - MARKING TOOLS - UV LASER FOR CABLES (Airbus)
MARKING TOOLS - UV LASER FOR CABLES (Airbus)
MARKING TOOLS - UV LASER FOR CABLES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This tool is used to write the cable functional identification on the cables (4 characters for ATA 100 circuit and
4 characters for the wire number).
For more data, refer to 20-32-20 Wire Identification.
The manufacturer identifies the cables on which EXCIMER (UV) laser can be used to do the marking. These
cables are identified on the sheath by the character "U" in the identification number.
Example: EN2266-005 A 002
E0261 CF 20 U FR A 91
| | | | | | --- Year of manufacture
| | | | | -------- Manufacturer code
| | | | ------------ Country of manufacture
| | | ----------------- Marking type code:
| | | C code = CO2 laser
| | | U code = UV laser
| | ------------------------- Wire gauge code
| ------------------------------- Wire type code
---------------------------------------- Standard P/N
UV laser marking is applied to cables with an optimized top coat directly markable PTFE tape or extruded
insulated ETFE.
You must do The marking only on cables longer than 75 mm (2.9527 in.) .
This type of marking is used to identify the cables that follow:
ABS0949AD
ABS0972KB
ABS1356 VNA/VNB/VNC
ABS1503KD
E0261 CF-U
E0262 DK-U or EN2267-008ADM
E0265 PG-U or EN2267-007BPN
E0270 SJ-U
E0271 ST-U or EN2714-011AGJ
E0272 TK-U
E0273 TT-U or EN2714-011B
E0274 UD-U
E0275 UE-U or EN2714-011C
E0807 WX26
EN2267-010DR
EN2346-005 DW
EN2714-013 MLA/MLB/MLC
EN3345-011 KL24
EN3375-004 WJ24
EN3375-008 KD24
EN4604-003 WZ
EN4608 GPA/GPB/GPC
NSA935131 DG
NOTE: The marking must not cause damage to the cable that will prevent the correct performance of the
cable.

2. Characteristics
A. UV Laser
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(1) Main characteristics of the laser
The laser must be a pulsed source of UV energy with the characteristics that follow:
-
Supplies sufficient energy to get the fluence necessary for marking,
-
Keeps a preset output energy during production operation,
-
Lets you start the laser output from an external source,
-
Wavelength between 240 nm and 380 nm,
- Laser fluence at marking place on the cable = 8 mJ/mm2 (milliJoule/square millimeter) to 13
mJ/mm2,
-
Laser pulse length = 3 ns to 35 ns,
-
Depth of marking not more than 20 microns +/- 1 micron.
NOTE: If the wavelength is 355 nm only, this will prevent the use of excimer/308 nm markers
(2) Printing requirements

Printing orientation is related to longitudinal cable axis.
Lettering orientation is related to the cable diameter and the printing method.
The minimum length of the cable is 300 +10 -10 mm (11.8110 +0.3937 -0.3937 in.) .
3. Principle
The laser is oriented on a mask where the characters are hollowed out. Each character selected automatically
is written on the cable by removal of the external clear varnish.The cable moves continuously.
A. Marking Characteristics
B. Marking Pitch
The marking on the cables must be as follows:
(1) Cables shorter than 2 m (6.56 ft.)
The marking on the cable must be an integer number of identical steps between 35 mm (1.3779 in.)
and 77 mm (3.0314 in.) and as near as possible to 77 mm (3.0314 in.) .
(2) For cable longer than 2 m (6.56 ft.)
The marking space is 35 mm (1.3779 in.) to 77 mm (3.0314 in.) at each end over a length of 1 m
(3.28 ft.) and with maximum interval of 385 mm (15.1574 in.) in the middle part. The length with the
77 mm (3.0314 in.) marking space at each cable end is a multiple of the integer marking length and
77 mm (3.0314 in.) space + area with no marking at end of the cable. This length must be as near as
possible to 1 m (3.28 ft.) .
NOTE: If the middle-part length of the cable is more than

77 mm (3.0314 in.) space and less than
385 mm (15.1574 in.) space + 2X 77 mm (3.0314 in.) space, markings are applied on one or
two intermediate spaces on the middle part of the cable.
NOTE: If the middle-part length of the cable is less than

77 mm (3.0314 in.) space, markings are applied on the full cable length as on a cable shorter
than 77 mm (3.0314 in.) .

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO NOT CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE CABLE INSULATION DURING
THE CABLE MARKING PROCEDURE.
DAMAGE TO THE INSULATION CAN CAUSE DETERIORATION OF THE MECHANICAL AND
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CABLE.
C. Quality Requirements
It must be possible to read the marking character. If a part of this marking is missing, the cable is not
acceptable. The marking must be written on the center of the cable and on maximum 80% of the cable
diameter.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
The contrast must be more than:
- 50% 1% for UV laser marking
4. Safety Precautions
The laser marking causes unhealthy, irritant or toxic fumes which must be removed at their source. For the
most satisfactory efficiency, it is recommended to use an extraction system to send the fumes to an activated
carbon filter. PTFE decomposition between 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) and 400 deg.C (752.00 deg.F) causes
the fumes that follow:
- In large quantities:
TETRAFLUORETHYLENE (slightly toxic),
HYDROFLUORIC acid (highly toxic),
- In small quantities at approximately
400 deg.C (752.00 deg.F) :
PERFLUOROISOBUTYLENE (highly toxic).
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Marking Tool - UV Laser - Character Cell Orientation UV Laser Tool

20-25-65 - MARKING TOOLS FOR ITEM IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
MARKING TOOLS FOR ITEM IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
MARKING TOOLS FOR ITEM IDENTIFICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Marking tools for identification items installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- IBM 6742-2
- LEXMARK 2590 and 2400 printers (ex LEXMARK 2390)
- TYCO T408M, T312M, T412M and T424M printers (ex ZEBRA 140)
- EPSON STYLUS COLOR 3000 and LQ870 printers
2. IBM 6742-2 printer
A. General
This tool is used in "TMS90 system" to mark the labels and sleeves that follow:
- E0248-A (-B and -P)
- E0470-A (and -P)
- NSA937201ME (MG, MH and MD)
(1) Procedure
-
Install the label on the printer.
-
Adjust the printer to the maximum printing pressure and print the label.
- Make sure that there is not too much ink and that you can read the marking. If there is too much
ink, you can remove it with a lint-free cotton cloth.
-
Adjust the permatizer RAYCHEM TMS208 to the correct value and do 2 permatizings.
-
Make sure that the printing is resistant and that you can read it.
3. LEXMARK 2590, 2400 printer (ex LEXMARK 2390)

(Ref. Fig. 001)
A. General
This tool is used in "SIX system" to mark the labels and sleeves that follow:
- E0248-A (-B and -P)
- E0470-A (and -P)
- NSA937201MR (MT, MK and ML)
(1) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
-
On the right of the machine next to the power cable, switch "ON" the power switch.
-
On the control panel, the "TENSION" marking is lit and "PAPER" is flashing.
-
Put the paper selector level on "CONTINUOUS".
-
Engage the end of the paper roll in the drive roller.
- On the control panel, push "ON" the "ALT" then push "ON" the "PARKING" pushbutton (the
paper roll is positioned on the first line of printing).
-
Use the "MICRO" button to adjust the end of the paper roll to the correct position and to adjust

the positioning bar, if necessary.

- Adjust the printing head position with the thickness cursor position:
6 for E0248 label
4 for E0470 label
-
To print, select the print option of the WINTOTAL software.
NOTE: For labels only, you must do permatizing with RAYCHEM TMS208.
NOTE: For LEXMARK 2590, after printing wait 30 minutes before you apply the fixative.
4. TYCO T408M or TYCO T312M or T412M or T424M printer (ex ZEBRA 140)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
A. General
This tool is used in "SIX system" to mark the sleeves that follow:
- NSA937201MR (MT, MK and ML)
(1) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 002)
-
At the rear of the machine, switch "on" the power switch.
- On the control panel, make sure that the "I/O POWER", "PAPER OUT", "PAUSE" and "ERROR"
markings are lit.
- For the installation of the impression roller, open the printer cowl. Engage the strip and guide it
along the white line inside the machine.
-
Push the end of the paper roll over the red mark.
-
On the control panel, "PAPER OUT" goes off.
- Depending on the type code of the sleeve, correctly position the end of the paper roll in the
printing head.
-
Lower the open/close lever of the printing head.
-
On the control panel, push the "PAUSE" button then the "CALIBRATION" button.
- For ajustment of contrast, push the "SET-UP"/EXIT" button and push the right or left arrow to
decrease or increase the contrast (basic value for all sleeves is "19").
-
Use the "FEED" button to control paper roll progress.
- To stop printing, push the "PAUSE" button (you can empty the machine memory by pushing the
"PAUSE" button until the "DATA" light goes off).
-
To print, select the print option of the WINTOTAL software.
NOTE: The process is the same for the "recto" and "verso" modes.
5. EPSON STYLUS COLOR 3000 printer

(Ref. Fig. 003)
A. General
This tool is used to mark the sleeve that follows:
- ABS0724
(1) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 003)

- Print the labels with PHOTO DELUXE/SCAN/EXEL program.

- Install the labels in the PROLABO oven preheated to
120 deg.C (248.00 deg.F) for 12 minutes.
- Do not cut the labels until they are completely cool.
6. EPSON LQ870
A. General
- E0248A
- NSA937201MR (MT)
(1) Characteristics
(Ref. Fig. 003)
The Epson LQ870 Dot Matrix Printer with a narrow carriage is a fully compatible, 24-pin letter-quality
dot matrix printer. It has a 24-pin dot matrix. It has a maximum print speed of 300 cps.
NOTE: After printing, wait 30 minutes before you apply the fixative.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Marking Tools for Identification Items LEXMARK 2590, 2390 or 2400
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Marking Tools for Identification Items ZEBRA 140 or TYCO T408M or TYCO
T312M or T412M or T424M
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Marking Tools for Identification Items EPSON STYLUS COLOR 3000 and
EPSON LQ870

20-30 - STANDARD RULES AND RECOMMENDATIONS (Airbus)
STANDARD RULES AND RECOMMENDATIONS (Airbus)
STANDARD RULES AND RECOMMENDATIONS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the general design description and requirements related to the electrical
installations on aircraft.
A. Specific areas (Ref. 20-31-XX)
B. Identification and Marking (Ref. 20-32-XX)
C. Wire harness (Ref. 20-33-XX)

20-31 - SPECIFIC AREAS (Airbus)
SPECIFIC AREAS (Airbus)
SPECIFIC AREAS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General:
The chapters that follow give the general design description and requirements related to the specific areas.
2. Structure of the chapters:
A. Specific areas location (Ref. 20-31-30).
B. Electrical items installation depending on the area (20-31-40).
SPECIFIC AREAS LOCATION (Airbus)
SPECIFIC AREAS LOCATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the location of the specific areas on the aircraft.
2. Zoning Requirements and Methods
A. Definition
The completed Zoning, Access Panel and Door Identification must meet these requirements :
- Zoning must be simple and logical.
- It must be usable by all airlines as a framework to do maintenance tasks.
- The zoning must be adaptable to current and future aircraft.
- It must let the airlines customize the system to their use (if necessary).
B. Zoning Method
The system consists of Major Zones, Major Sub-Zones and Zones.
Each Zone is based on a three-figure number. The zones, where possible, are defined by actual physical boundaries such as wing
spars, major bulkheads, cabin floor, control surface boundaries, skin, etc.
(1) Major Zone
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
| N | AREA |
|----|------------------------------------------------------------------|
|100 | Lower part of the fuselage to rear pressure bulkhead (lower part |
| | defined as that area below the main cabin floor) |
|----|------------------------------------------------------------------|
|200 | Upper part of fuselage to rear pressure bulkhead (upper part |
| | defined as that area above the main cabin floor) |
|----|------------------------------------------------------------------|
|300 | Empennage (including fuselage area behind the rear pressure |
| | bulkhead) |
|----|------------------------------------------------------------------|
|400 | Powerplants and pylons and nacelles |
|----|------------------------------------------------------------------|
|500 | Left Wing |
|----|------------------------------------------------------------------|
|600 | Right Wing |
|----|------------------------------------------------------------------|
|700 | Landing Gear and Landing Gear Doors |
|----|------------------------------------------------------------------|
|800 | Doors |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Major zone boundaries are identified by :
- Frame/Station/Stringer for fuselage
- Ribs for wings and vertical/horizontal tail
- Station for nacelle and pylon
(2) Major Sub-Zones

These are divisions of the Major Zones, for example 100 is divided into 110, 120, 130, 140, etc.
The Major Sub-Zone/numbering sequence for the fuselage must run from front to rear. In case of double deck passenger
fuselage, the numbering for the main deck can be 220, 230, 240 and 250, and for the upper deck 260, 270, 280 and 290. The
numbering for the cockpit must be 210.
(3) Zones
These are divisions of Major Sub-Zones, for example 120 is divided into 121, 122, 123.
The sequence of Zones for the fuselage main and upper decks (if any) must run from front to rear and away from the floor line.
For example :
- Left/Right Main Deck 231/232
- Left/Right Main Deck Ceiling (if required) 233/234
- Left/Right Upper Deck 271/272
- Left/Right Upper Deck Ceiling (if required) 273/274
NOTE: Main/upper deck ceilings can be defined if required.
(4) Left or Right Zones

A single figure indicates, where applicable, left or right hand zones. An odd number indicates a left-hand or center zone and an
even number indicates a right-hand zone, for example :
131 left side 132 right side 133 center zone
or
731 left main gear 741 right main gear
When feasible, odd numbers are given to the zones to the left of the centerlines fuselage or nacelle centerlines, and even
numbers to the zone to the right of the centerlines.
the sequence of zone numbers should preferably run from inboard to outboard, front to rear in the wing; forward to aft and away
from the floor line in the fuselage and from root to tip in the vertical tail.
NOTE: If no side differentiation is necessary (for example, bilge area), the odd numbering for the "center zone" is used.
3. Structure of the chapter

A. Pressurized Areas (Ref. 20-31-31)
B. Skydrol Areas (Ref. 20-31-32)
C. Vibration Areas (Ref. 20-31-33)
D. Hot Areas (Ref. 20-31-34)
E. SWAMP Areas (Ref. 20-31-35)
F. Fuel Areas and Fuel Vapor Areas (Ref. 20-31-36)
G. Fire Areas (Ref. 20-31-37)
PRESSURIZED AREAS (Airbus)
PRESSURIZED AREAS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the location of the pressurized areas on the aircraft.
2. A300 - A310 - A300/600 Pressurized Areas
(Ref. Fig. 001)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
| AREAS | DESIGNATION |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 121 | Avionics Compartment |
| 122 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 131 | FWD Cargo Compartment |
| 132 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 133 | FWD Bay Under FWD Cargo Compartment Floor |
| 134 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 135 | AFT Bay Under FWD Cargo Compartment Floor |
| 136 | |

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 137 | Bay between AFT Bulkhead of FWD Cargo Compartment |
| 138 | and FWD Pressure Bulkhead of Wing Center Box |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 145 | Pressurized Zone Between Wing Center Box/Main Landing |
| 146 | Gear Well and Cabin Floor |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 151 | AFT Cargo Compartment |
| 152 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 153 | Bay Under AFT Cargo Compartment Floor |
| 154 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 161 | Bulk Cargo Compartment |
| 162 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 163 | Bay Under Bulk Cargo Compartment Floor |
| 164 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 171 | AFT Cabin Underfloor Compartment |
| 172 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 200 | Upper Half of Fuselage |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
3. A318 - A319 - A320 - A321 Pressurized Areas
(Ref. Fig. 002)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 121 | FWD Avionics Compartment |
| 122 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 125 | Lateral Avionics Compartment |
| 126 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 127 | AFT Avionics Compartment |
| 128 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 129 | Stair Bay |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 132 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 133 | Bay Under Forward Cargo Compartment Floor |
| 134 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 137 | Bay between AFT Bulkhead of Forward Cargo Compartment |
| 138 | and Forward Pressure Bulkhead of Wing Center Box |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 145 | Pressurized Zone Between Wing Center Box/Main Landing |
| 146 | Gear Well and Cabin Floor |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 152 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 154 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 162 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 164 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

| 172 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A330 - A340 Pressurized Areas
(Ref. Fig. 003)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 121 | Avionics Compartment |
| 122 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 132 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 133 | Compartment Under FWD Cargo Compartment Floor |
| 134 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 137 | Compt Between AFT Partition of FWD Cargo |
| 138 | Compt to FWD Pressure Bulkhead of Wing Center Box |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 145 | Pressurized Zone Between Wing Center Box/ Main Gear |
| 146 | Well and Cabin Floor |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 152 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 153 | Compt Under AFT Cargo Compartment Floor |
| 154 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 161 | Bulk Cargo Compartment |
| 162 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 163 | Compt Under Bulk Cargo Compartment Floor |
| 164 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 172 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
5. A380 Pressurized Areas
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 121 | Curved Bulkhead Area (FR5 to FR10B) |
| 122 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 123 | Main Avionics Compartment (FR10B to FR17) |
| 124 | |
|---------|-------------------------------------------------------- |
| 131 | Lower-Deck Forward Cargo Compartment: From the Lower |
| 132 | Side of Main Deck Cabin Floor to the Upper Side of the |
| | Cargo Compartment Floor (FR17 To FR44/45) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 133 | Underfloor Compartment below the Lower-Deck Forward |
| 134 | Cargo-Compartment From the Bottom Centerline to the |
| | Lower Side of the Cargo Compartment Floor (FR16 to |
| | FR44/45) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 135 | Optional Lower-Deck Facilities in the Forward |
| 136 | Cargo Compartment (FR33 to FR44/45) |

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 137 | Area behind the Forward Cargo-Compartment Rear Partition|
| 138 | and the Center-Wing Box Forward Spar, from the Bottom |
| | Centerline to the Lower Side of the Main-Deck Cabin |
| | Floor (FR44/45 to FR46) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 147 | Pressurized Zone between the Center Wing Box, the Main |
148 | Landing-Gear Bay and the Lower Side of the Cabin Floor |
| | (FR46 To FR72) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 151 | Lower-Deck Aft Cargo-Compartment: From the Lower Side of|
| 152 | the Main Deck Floor to the Upper Side of the Cargo |
| | Compartment Floor (FR56 to FR86/87) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 153 | Underfloor Compartment below the Lower-Deck Aft-Cargo |
| 154 | Compartment from the Bottom Centerline to the |
| | Cargo-Compartment Floor Lower-Side (FR56 to FR86/87) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 161 | Lower-Deck Bulk Cargo-Compartment from the Lower Side of|
| 162 | the Main Deck Floor to the Upper Side of the Bulk |
| | Cargo-Compartment Floor (FR86/87 to FR90/91) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 163 | Underfloor Compartment Lower-Deck Bulk Cargo-Compartment|
| 164 | Underfloor from the Bottom Centreline To the Bulk Cargo |
| | Compartment Floor Lower- Side (FR86/87 to FR90/91) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 171 | Underfloor Compartment Below the Aft Cabin FR90/91 to |
| 172 | the Rear Pressure Bulkhead |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 200 | Upper Half Fuselage (above Main Deck Floor) to the |
| | Forward Face of the Rear Pressure Bulkhead (FR5 to FR95)|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 811 | Forward Avionics Compartment Door |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 821 | Lower-Deck Forward/Aft Cargo-Compartment door |
| 822 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 823 | Lower-Deck Bulk Cargo-Compartment Door |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 831 | Main-Deck Passenger/Crew Door M1L/M1R |
| 841 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 842 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 834 | Main Deck Passenger/Crew Door M4L/M4R |
| 844 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 845 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 852 | Upper-Deck Passenger/Crew Door U1L/U1R |
| 862 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 854 | Upper-Deck Passenger/Crew Door U3L/U3R |
| 864 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------

20-32 - IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING (Airbus)
IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING (Airbus)
IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the general design requirements related to the electrical installations identification on aircraft.
A. Wire and bundle identification (Ref. 20-32-2X)
B. Electrical Item identification (Ref. 20-32-5X)
WIRES AND HARNESS IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
WIRES AND BUNDLES IDENTIFICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the general identification requirements related to the electrical wire and bundle on aircraft.
A. Wire identification by the manufacturer (Ref. 20-32-21)
B. Wire functional identification (Ref. 20-32-22)
C. Bundle functional identification (Ref. 20-32-23)
WIRE IDENTIFICATION BY THE SUPPLIER (Airbus)
WIRE IDENTIFICATION BY THE SUPPLIER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic covers the identification and the markings made by the manufacturer during the manufacture of the wires and cables.
Definitions :
AWG :
American Wire Gauge.
Conductor :
The conductor is the conducting element of the cable formed from one or more strands.
Core :
Assembly of a conductor and insulation which then form part of a complete single or multiconductor cable.
Cable or wire :
A cable is an assembly consisting of a conductor, insulation and, where applicable, a sheath, screen or jacket.
2. P/N Identification
All the wire types (US and Metric) agree with Standards (ABS, ASNE, EN, NSA,...).
The wires are identified as follows:
A. General case:
ABSXXXX XX XX
EXXXX XX XX
NSAXXXXXX XX XX
--------- -- --
| | |
| | ---------- Wire gauge (1 until 4 characters) (Ref. para. 5)
| |
| -------------- Wire type code (Ref. para. 4)
|
---------------------- Standard P/N (Not written on the wire)
ENXXXX-XXX X XXX X
---------- - --- -
| | | |
| | | ---- Insulation color code (Ref. table 7 and 8)
| | |
| | |
| | -------- Wire gauge code (Ref. para. 5)

| |
| ------------ Code letter for number of cores (Ref. table 9)
|
------------------- Standard P/N (Not written on the wire)
(Ref. para. 4)
B. Specific cases
(1) For E0260, E0261 and E0262 P/Ns:
E026X XX XX - X
----- -- -- -
| | | |
| | | --------- Single-core cable - insulation color code
| | | (Ref. table 7)
| | --------------- Wire gauge
| |
| ----------------------- Wire type code (Ref. para. 4)
|
-------------------------------- Standard P/N (Not written on the wire)
(2) For ABS1354
ABS1354 XX X XX
------- -- - --
| | | |
| | | ------- Wire gauge
| | |
| | ---------- Number of cores (ref. table 9)
| |
|
(3) For EN4604-005
EN4604-005 WL
---------- -
| |
| ------------ Wire type code
|
(Ref. para. 4)
3. Wire Types
There are two families of wire types:
A. United States (US)
The United States (US) wire types are installed on A300/A310/A300-600. Their core diameter has US diameters.
e.g. AKA gauge 24 has 19 strands diameter 0.127 mm (0.0050 in.) .
B. Metric (M) types:
The Metric (M) wire types are installed on the other Airbus A/C for weight saving.
e.g. CF gauge 24 has 19 strands diameter 0.12 mm (0.0047 in.) .
C. Wire type interchangeability table
NOTE: The tables that follow give the interchangeability between wire types. for example, if a DK is not available, you can replace it by a DM.
Although these wires have different structures, they are fully interchangeable (for a given marking type).
(1) US -> Metric - one way interchangeability tables

If it is necessary to replace a US type wire on the aircraft and if the US type wire is no longer available, you can use an interchangeable
Metric wire (Ref. one way interchangeability tables (US->Metric)). All the Metric wires are available.
(a) Single wires
-------------------------
| US | M |
|-----------|-----------|
| AKA | CF |
| AKB | CF |
| BE | BF |
| DE | DK |
-------------------------
(b) Twisted wires
------------------------- ------------------------- -------------------------
| TWO WIRES | | THREE WIRES | | FOUR WIRES |
| US | M | | US | M | | US | M |

|-----------|-----------| |-----------|-----------| |-----------|-----------|

| PD | PF | | QD | QF | | RD | RF |
| PE | PG | | QE | QG | | RE | RH |
------------------------- ------------------------- -------------------------
(c) Shielded wires
--------------- -------------- --------------- ------------------------
| SINGLE WIRE | | TWO WIRES | | THREE WIRES | | MULTI WIRES |
| US | M | | US | M | | US | M | | US | M |
|------|------| |------|-----| |------|------| |--------|--------------|
| SE | ST | | TG | TT | | UG | UE | | YE | HA (5 Wires)|
| SF | SJ | | TJ | TK | | UK | UD | | YD | YF (6 Wires)|
| SFA | SJ | | TJA | TK | | UKA | UD | | YN | HB (5 Wires)|
| SFB | SJ | | TJB | TK | | UKB | UD | | YR | YZ (10 Wires)|
| SG | SW | | | | | | | | YP | HC (11 Wires)|
--------------- -------------- --------------- -------------------------
(d) Extensible cord
--------------------------
| US | M |
|------------|-----------|
| YS | YX |
--------------------------
(2) Metric -> Metric - one-way interchangeability table
-------------------
| WIRE | WIRE |
| TYPE | TYPE |
| CODE | CODE |
|--------|------- |
| CF | DR |
|--------|------- |
| MG | MMG |
|--------|--------|
| PF | DRB |
|--------|--------|
| QF | DRC |
|--------|--------|
| RF | DRD |
|--------|--------|
| SJ | MLA |
|--------|--------|
| TK | MLB |
|--------|--------|
| UD | MLC |
|--------|--------|
| YT | HP |
-------------------
(3) Metric -> Metric - two-way interchangeability table
(a) ASNE -> EN
-------------------
| WIRE | WIRE |
| TYPE | TYPE |
| CODE | CODE |
|--------|--------|
| DK | DM |
|--------|--------|
| HA | MJ |
|--------|--------|
| PG | PN |
|--------|--------|
| QG | QL |
|--------|--------|
| RH | RK |
|--------|--------|
| ST | GJ |
|--------|--------|
| TT | MH |
|--------|--------|
| UE | UU |
-------------------

(b) ABS -> EN

-------------------
| WIRE | WIRE |
| TYPE | TYPE |
| CODE | CODE |
|--------|--------|
| VJ | VV |
|--------|--------|
| VR | MJ |
---------|---------
(c) ABS/ASNE/EN -> EN
-------------------
| WIRE | WIRE |
| TYPE | TYPE |
| CODE | CODE |
|--------|--------|
| DK/DM | DR |
|--------|--------|
| PG/PN | DRB |
|--------|--------|
| QG/QL | DRC |
|--------|--------|
| RH/RK | DRD |
|--------|--------|
| ST/GJ | MLA |
|--------|--------|
| TT/MH | MLB |
|--------|--------|
| UE/UU | MLC |
|--------|--------|
| VJ/VV | MLD |
|--------|--------|
|HA/VR/MJ| MME |
------------------|
4. Wire Type Codes
NOTE: The tables that follow give the characteristics and the related P/Ns for each wire type. For a wire type code, if there are several related P/Ns,
these wires have the same structure and the P/Ns are fully interchangeable.
Tables 1-A to 1-Y give the list of the wire type codes in alphabetic sequence and the related standard P/Ns (US and Metric wire type families).
It is the wire type code which is written on the wire and not the standard P/N.
NOTE: You must use the applicable tools to strip the wires (US or Metric). Refer to ESPM chapter 20-25-11.
TABLE 1-A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Single-core and Multicores Identification Coding |
| Normal Use - Unshielded - T < 200 C (392 F) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| WIRE | TYPE | INSULATOR | SPECIFICATION | STANDARD |
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| AD | Aluminum (UV laser | PI/PTFE | |ABS0949 |
| | marking) | | | |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| ADA | Aluminum (Ink jet | PI/PTFE 1 ADA | |ABS1354 |
| | marking) | Single-core | | |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| Use only for | | |
| | |multicore cable| | |
| | | | | |
| ADB | Ink jet marking | PI/PTFE 2 ADA| |ABS1354 |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| ADC | Ink jet marking | PI/PTFE 3 ADA| |ABS1354 |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| ADD | Ink jet marking | PI/PTFE 4 ADA| |ABS1354 |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| ADE | Ink jet marking | PI/PTFE 5 ADA| |ABS1354 |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| AKA | 600V-200 C (392 F) | KAPTON/PTFE | ex AK |NSA935012 |

| AKB | 600V-200 C (392 F) | KAPTON/FEP | SNIAS 451242/78 |NSA935012 |

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-B
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Single Wire Identification Coding |
| Panel Wiring - T < 200 C (392 F) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| BE | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PTFE | MIL-W-16878 |NSA935041 |
| BF | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PTFE | |E0260 |
| BJ |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| XL-ETFE | |ABS0826 |
| | (landing gear only) | | | |
| BP |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| XL-ETFE | |ABS0820 |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Normal Use - Unshielded T = 200 C (392 F) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CF | 600V-200 C (392 F) | KAPTON/FEP | | E0261 |
| | (Ink jet or hot | | | |
| | stamp marking) | | | |
| | CF-C | FEP or PTFE | | E0261 |
| | (Co2 laser marking) | | | |
| | CF-U | FEP or PTFE | | E0261 |
| | UV laser marking) | | | |
| | CF-Y | FEP or PTFE | | E0261 |
| |YAG/X3 laser marking | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-D
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Normal Use - Unshielded - T > 200 C (392 F) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| DE | 600V | PTFE-KAPTON-PTFE | AIR 4524 |EN2267-008 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | |(ex. |
| | | | | NSA935130)|
| | | 2 DE | |EN2267-007 |
| | | | |(ex. |
| | | | | NSA935248)|
| | | 3 DE | |EN2267-007 |
| | | | |(ex. |
| | | | | NSA935248)|
| DG | 600V | KAPTON-GLASS-PTFE| AIR 4524 |NSA935131 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | or |
| | | | |EN2854-003A|
| DJ | 600V | PTFE-FIREPROOF | AIR 4524 |NSA935132 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| SILICA | | |
| DK | 600V | PTFE-KAPTON-PTFE | | E0262 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| | (Ink jet marking) | PTFE-KAPTON-PTFE | | E0262 |
| | DK-C | | | |
| | (CO2 laser marking) | | | |
| | DK-U | PTFE-KAPTON-PTFE | | E0262 |
| | (UV laser marking) | | | |
| | DK-Y (YAG X3 laser | PFFE-KAPTON-PTFE | | E0262 |
| | marking) | | | |
| DL | 600V | PTFE-FIREPROOF- | MIL-W-25038/3 | E0437 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| SILICA | or prEN2234 | |

| DM | 600V | PI/PTFE | |EN2267-008A|

| | (UV laser marking) | Single wire | | |
| DMA | 600V | Single-core | |EN2267-007A|
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| use only for | | |
| | (Ink jet marking) | multicore cable | | |
| DR |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | |EN2267-010A|
| DRA |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| Single-core | |EN2267-009A|
| | | use only for | | |
| | | multicore cable | | |
| DRB |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 2 DRA | |EN2267-009B|
| DRC |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 3 DRA | |EN2267-009C|
| DRD |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 4 DRA | |EN2267-009D|
| DW |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE | |EN2346-005A|
| | UV laser marking | Single wire | | |
| DWA |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE | |EN2346-005N|
| | | Single-core | | |
| DWB |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE 2 DWA | |EN2346-005B|
| DWC |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE 3 DWA | |EN2346-005C|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

20-31-32 - SKYDROL AREAS (Airbus)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Pressurized Areas - All Zones For A300 - A310 - A300/600
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Pressurised Areas - All Zones For A318 - A319 - A320 - A321
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Pressurized Areas - All Zones For A330 - A340
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Pressurized Areas - Fuselage Zone For A380
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Pressurized Areas - Fuselage and Wing Zone For A380
SKYDROL AREAS (Airbus)
SKYDROL AREAS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the location of the Skydrol areas on the aircraft.
2. A300 - A310 - A300/600 Skydrol Areas
(Ref. Fig. 001)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 123 | Nose Gear Well |
| 124 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 147 | Main Gear Well and Hydraulics Compartment |
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 311 | Horizontal and Vertical Stabilizer Attachment Area |
| 312 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 322 | Vertical Stabilizer Leading Edge |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 323 | Vertical Stabilizer Spar Box |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 325 | Vertical Stabilizer Trailing Edge |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 334 | Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing Edge |
| 344 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 512 | Wing Leading Edge |
| 612 | |
| 523 | |
| 623 | |
| 524 | |
| 624 | |

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 571 | Main Gear Well |
| 671 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 575 | Wing Trailing Edge |
| 675 | |
| 581 | |
| 681 | |
| 591 | |
| 691 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 711 | Nose Gear |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 731 | Main Landing Gear |
| 741 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
3. A318 - A319 - A320 - A321 Skydrol Areas
(Ref. Fig. 002)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 311 | Fuselage AFT Tail Section |
| 312 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 344 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 521 | Wing Inboard Fixed Leading Edge Structure |
| 621 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 522 | Wing Outboard Fixed Leading Edge Structure |
| 622 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 671 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 574 | False Spar Box |
| 674 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 575 | Wing AFT Outboard Section and Trailing Edge Fixed |
| 675 | Structure |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

| 711 | Nose Gear |

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 741 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A330 - A340 Skydrol Areas
(Ref. Fig. 003)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 124 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 143 | Area Between Keel Beams |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 149 | Center Line Gear Well |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 195 | Hydraulics Compartment and Fairing |
| 196 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 311 | Rear Fuselage Section |
| 312 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 344 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 621 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 522 | Wing Center Fixed Leading Edge Structure |
| 622 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 623 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 571 | Main Landing Gear Well |
| 671 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 573 | Wing Inner Trailing Edge Fixed Structure |
| 673 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 574 | Wing Center Trailing Edge Fixed Structure |
| 674 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

| 575 | Wing Outer Trailing Edge Fixed Structure |

| 675 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 711 | Nose Gear |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 741 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 751 | Center Line Gear |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
5. A380 Skydrol Areas
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 125 | Area behind the Nose Front Fairing (FR0 to FR10B) |
| 126 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 127 | Nose Landing Gear Bay (FR10B to FR16) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 141 | Center Wing Box (FR46 to FR56) |
| 142 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 143 | Wing Landing-Gear Bay (FR56 to FR63) |
| 144 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 145 | Body Landing-Gear Bay (FR63 to FR72) |
| 146 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 193 | L and R Center Belly-Fairing from the Bulkhead at |
| 194 | FR47/48 to the Bulkhead at FR53/54 (near FR54) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 195 | L and R Belly Fairing above the Center Wing Box |
| 196 | (FR39 to FR56) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 197 | L and R Main Landing-Gear Well and Bay 1 of the Yellow |
| 198 | Hydraulic Compartment (from Bulkhead at FR53/54 to FR72)|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 199 | Rear Belly Fairing and Bay 2 of the Yellow Hydraulic |
| | Compartment (from FR72 to FR81/82) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 311 | L and R Rear Fuselage (FR95 to FR110) |
| 312 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 322 | Vertical Stabilizer Leading-Edge |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 323 | Vertical Stabilizer Spar-Box |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 324 | Vertical Stabilizer Tip |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 325 | Vertical Stabilizer Trailing-Edge |

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 336 | Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing-Edge |
| 346 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 451 | Pylon Front Secondary-Structure |
| 461 | |
| 471 | |
| 481 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 453 | Pylon Upper Karmans |
| 463 | |
| 473 | |
| 483 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 455 | Pylon Primary Structure |
| 465 | |
| 475 | |
| 485 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 457 | Aft Pylon Fairing |
| 467 | |
| 477 | |
| 487 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 459 | Pylon Rear Secondary-Structure |
| 469 | |
| 479 | |
| 489 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 521 | Inboard Fixed Leading-Edge Structure from Rib 1 to Rib |
| 621 | 14 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 522 | Center Fixed Leading-Edge Structure from Rib 14 to Rib |
| 622 | 30 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 523 | Outboard Fixed Leading-Edge Structure from Rib 30 to Rib|
| 623 | 48 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 571 | Main Landing-Gear Well |
| 671 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 572 | Shroud Box |
| 672 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 573 | Inner Trailing-Edge Fixed Structure from Rib 9 to Rib 15|
| 673 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 574 | Center Trailing-Edge Fixed Structure from Rib 15 to Rib |
| 674 | 35 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 575 | Outer Trailing-Edge Fixed Structure from Rib 35 to Rib |
| 675 | 48 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 711 | Nose Landing Gear |

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 731 | L and R Main Landing Gear |
| 741 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 751 | L and R Body Landing Gear |
| 761 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 833 | Main Deck Emergency/Exit Door M3L/M3R |
i 843 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 853 | Upper Deck Passenger/Crew door U2L/U2R |
| 863 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Skydrol Areas - All Zones For A300 - A310 - A300/600
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Skydrol Areas - All Zones For A318 - A319 - A320 - A321
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Skydrol Areas - All Zones For A330 - A340
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Skydrol Areas - Fuselage and Belly Fairing Zone For A380
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Skydrol Areas - Fuselage, Wing, THS and Pylon Zone For A380
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Skydrol Areas - Landing Gear Zone For A380
VIBRATION AREAS (Airbus)
VIBRATION AREAS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the location of the vibration areas on the aircraft.
2. A300 - A310 - A300/600 Vibration Areas
(Ref. Fig. 001)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 124 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 311 | Horizontal and Vertical Stabilizer Attachment Area |
| 312 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

| 313 | Tail Cone APU Air Intake Area |

| 314 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 315 | Tail Cone APU and Accessory Compt Delimited by Fire |
| 316 | Walls |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 331 | Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Leading Edge |
| 341 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 332 | Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Tip |
| 342 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 344 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 411 | Pylon Leading Edge |
| 421 | |
| 412 | |
| 422 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 413 | FWD Upper Pylon |
| 423 | |
| 414 | |
| 424 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 415 | FWD Lower Pylon |
| 425 | |
| 416 | |
| 426 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 430 | Power Plants and Nacelles |
| 440 | |
| 450 | |
| 460 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 481 | |
| 472 | |
| 482 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 473 | AFT Upper Pylon |
| 483 | |
| 474 | |
| 484 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 711 | Nose Gear |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 731 | Main Gear |

| 741 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------

A318 - A319 - A320 - A321 Vibration Areas
3. A318 - A319 - A320 - A321 Vibration Areas

(Ref. Fig. 002)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 311 | AFT Fuselage Tail Section |
| 312 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 314 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 315 | Tail Cone APU and Accessory Compartment Delimited |
| 316 | by Fire Walls |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 341 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 342 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 344 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 421 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 423 | |
| 414 | |
| 424 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 415 | Lower Pylon |
| 425 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 481 | |
| 472 | |
| 482 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 473 | Lower Fairing |

| 483 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 475 | Rear Pylon |
| 476 | |
| 485 | |
| 486 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 477 | Rear Fairing |
| 487 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 711 | Nose Gear |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 731 | Main Gear |
| 741 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A330 - A340 Vibration Areas
(Ref. Fig. 003)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 124 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 195 | Hydraulics Compartment and Fairings |
| 196 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 311 | Rear Fuselage Section |
| 312 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 314 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 315 | Tail Cone APU and Accessory Compartment |
| 316 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 341 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|


| 342 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 344 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 461 | |
| 471 | |
| 481 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 452 | Upper Forward Pylon |
| 462 | |
| 472 | |
| 482 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 463 | |
| 473 | |
| 483 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 454 | Lower and Rear Fairings |
| 464 | |
| 474 | |
| 484 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 711 | Nose Gear |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 731 | Main Gear |
| 741 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
5. A380 Vibration Areas
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 126 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 127 | Nose Landing-Gear Bay |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 144 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 146 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 191 | L and R Forward Belly-Fairing and Air Conditioning |
| 192 | Compartment FR32/33 to the Bulkhead at FR47/48 |

| | (near FR48) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 195 | L and R Belly-Fairing above the Center Wing Box from |
| 196 | FR39 to FR56 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 197 | L and R Main Landing-Gear Well and Bay 1 of the Yellow |
| 198 | Hydraulic Compartment (from the Bulkhead at FR53/54 to |
| | FR72) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 199 | Rear Belly-Fairing and Bay 2 of the Yellow Hydraulic |
| | Compartment (from FR72 to FR81/82) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 311 | L and R Rear Fuselage |
| 312 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 313 | Tail-Cone APU Intake Area (FR110 to FR112 and FR112 to |
| | FR117 above APU Fireproof Compartment) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 315 | Tail-Cone APU Compartment (FR112 to FR117) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 319 | Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Spar-Box Fuel-Tank |
| | inside the Fuselage - Between Rib 4 (L) and Rib 4 (R) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 322 | Vertical Stabilizer Leading-Edge |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 323 | Vertical Stabilizer Spar-Box |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 331 | L and R Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Leading-Edge |
| 341 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 333 | L and R Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Spar-Box |
| 343 | Fuel-Tank from Rib R4 and Rib R8 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 332 | L and R Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Tip |
| 342 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 344 | R Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing- Edge |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 335 | L and R Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Spar-Box Dry |
| 345 | Area from Rib 8 to Rib 25
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 336 | L and R Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing-Edge |
| 346 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 337 | L and R Inner Elevator |
| 347 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

| 338 | L and R Outer Elevator |

| 348 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 461 | |
| 471 | |
| 481 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 463 | |
| 473 | |
| 483 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 455 |Pylon Primary Structure |
| 465 | |
| 475 | |
| 485 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 467 | |
| 477 | |
| 487 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 469 | |
| 479 | |
| 489 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 511 | Droop Nose 1 |
| 611 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 612 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 513 | Slat 1 |
| 613 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 514 | Slat 2 |
| 614 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 515 | Slat 3 |
| 615 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 516 | Slat 4 |
| 616 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 517 | Slat 5 |
| 617 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 518 | Slat 6 |
| 618 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 621 | 14 |

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 622 | 30 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 623 | 48 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 531 | Flap Track Fairing 2 |
| 631 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 632 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 633 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 634 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 635 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 536 | Wing Tip |
| 636 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 541 | Feed Tank 2/3 (from Rib 1 to Rib 8) Forward of the |
| 641 | Center Spar |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 542 | Inner Tank (from Rib 1 to Rib 13) Aft of the Center Spar|
| 642 | and from Rib 8 to Rib 13 Forward of the Center Spar |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 543 | Mid Tank (from Rib 13 to Rib 22) |
| 643 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 544 | Feed Tank (from Rib 22 to Rib 34) |
| 644 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 545 | Surge Tank (from Rib 34 to Rib 35) |
| 645 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 546 | Outer Tank (from Rib 35 to Rib 45) |
| 646 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 550 | Vent Tank (from Rib 45 to Rib 48) |
| 650 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 561 | Inboard Flap |
| 661 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 562 | Center Flap |
| 662 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 563 | Outboard Flap |
| 663 | |

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 671 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 672 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 673 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 674 | 35 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 675 | 48 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 581 | Spoiler 1 |
| 681 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 582 | Spoiler 2 |
| 682 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 583 | Spoiler 3 |
| 683 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 584 | Spoiler 4 |
| 684 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 585 | Spoiler 5 |
| 685 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 586 | Spoiler 6 |
| 686 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 587 | Spoiler 7 |
| 687 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 588 | Spoiler 8 |
| 688 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 591 | Inboard Aileron |
| 691 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 592 | Center Aileron |
| 692 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 593 | Outboard Aileron |
| 693 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 741 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|


| 761 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 833 | Main Deck Emergency Exit/Door M3L/M3R |
| 843 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 853 | Upper Deck Passenger/Crew Door U2L/U2R |
| 863 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------

20-31-34 - HOT AREAS (Airbus)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Vibration Areas - All Zones For A300 - A310 - A300/600
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Vibration Areas - All Zones For A318 - A319 - A320 - A321
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Vibration Areas - All Zones For A330 - A340
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Vibration Areas - Fuselage and Belly Fairing Zone For A380
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Vibration Areas - Fuselage, Wing, THS and Pylon Zone For A380
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Vibration Areas - Landing Gear Zone For A380
HOT AREAS (Airbus)
HOT AREAS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the location of the hot areas on the aircraft.
2. A300 - A310 - A300/600 Hot Areas
(Ref. Fig. 001)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 143 | Air Conditioning Compartment |
| 144 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 421 | |
| 412 | |
| 422 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 423 | |
| 414 | |
| 424 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 415 | FWD Lower Pylon |
| 425 | |
| 416 | |
| 426 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 433 | Air Intake Ring |
| 434 | |
| 443 | |

| 444 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 451 | Thrust Reverser Zone |
| 452 | |
| 461 | |
| 462 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 481 | |
| 472 | |
| 482 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 473 | Aft Upper Pylon |
| 483 | |
| 474 | |
| 484 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 475 | Aft Lower Pylon |
| 485 | |
| 476 | |
| 486 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
3. A318 - A319 - A320 - A321 Hot Areas
(Ref. Fig. 002)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 191 | Air Conditioning Compartment and Fairing |
| 192 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 313 | Tail Cone APU Air Intake area |
| 314 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 315 | Tail Cone APU & Accessory Compartment Delimited by |
| 316 | Firewalls |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 421 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 423 | |
| 414 | |
| 424 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 425 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 433 | Air Intake Lip |
| 434 | |
| 443 | |
| 444 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 435 | Fan and Accessory Gear Box |

| 436 | |
| 445 | |
| 446 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 481 | |
| 472 | |
| 482 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 473 | Lower Fairing |
| 483 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 475 | Rear Pylon |
| 485 | |
| 476 | |
| 486 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 477 | Rear Fairing |
| 487 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A330 - A340 Hot Areas
(Ref. Fig. 003)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 191 | Air Conditioning Compartment and Fairing |
| 192 | |
| 193 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 314 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 315 | Tail Cone APU & Accessory Compartment |
| 316 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 411 | |
| 421 | Engine Air Intake |
| 431 | Air Intake Lip |
| 441 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 422 | |
| 432 | |
| 442 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 461 | |
| 471 | |
| 481 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 452 | Upper Forward Pylon |
| 462 | |
| 472 | |

| 482 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 463 | |
| 473 | |
| 483 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 454 | Lower and Rear Fairings |
| 464 | |
| 474 | |
| 484 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
5. A380 Hot Areas
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 191 | L and RH Forward Belly-Fairing and Air-Conditioning |
| | (near FR48) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 317 | Tail-Cone APU Exhaust Area |
| | (FR117 to the End of the Aircraft) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 411 | Engine Air Intake |
| 421 | |
| 431 | |
| 441 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 412 | Engine Fan And Accessory Gearbox |
| 422 | |
| 432 | |
| 442 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 413 | Engine Hot Section |
| 423 | |
| 433 | |
| 443 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 414 | Engine Exhaust Nozzle |
| 424 | |
| 434 | |
| 444 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 461 | |
| 471 | |
| 481 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

| 463 | |
| 473 | |
| 483 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 455 | Pylon Primary Structure |
| 465 | |
| 475 | |
| 485 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 467 | |
| 477 | |
| 487 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 469 | |
| 478 | |
| 489 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Hot Areas - All Zones For A300 - A310 - A300/600
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Hot Areas - All Zones For A318 - A319 - A320 - A321
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Hot Areas - All Zones For A330 - A340
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Hot Areas - Fuselage Zone For A380
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Hot Areas - Pylon and Belly Fairing Zone For A380
SWAMP AREAS (Airbus)
SWAMP AREAS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the location of the SWAMP (Severe Weather And Moisture Prone) areas on the aircraft.
2. A300 - A310 - A300/600 SWAMP Areas
(Ref. Fig. 001)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 124 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 147 | Main Gear Well and Hydraulics Compt |
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

| 512 | Wing Inboard Fixed Leading Edge Struture |

| 612 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 523 | Center Fixed Leading Edge Structure |
| 623 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 524 | Outboard Fixed Leading Edge Structure |
| 624 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 531 | Wing Tip |
| 631 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 671 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 575 | Wing Trailing Edge |
| 675 | |
| 581 | |
| 681 | |
| 591 | |
| 691 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 711 | Nose Gear |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 731 | Main Gear |
| 741 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
3. A318 - A319 - A320 - A321 SWAMP Areas
(Ref. Fig. 002)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 344 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 621 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 622 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 534 | Wing Tip |
| 634 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 571 | Main Gear Well Bay |
| 671 | |

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 574 | False Spar Box |
| 674 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 575 | Wing AFT outboard Section and Trailing Edge Fixed |
| 675 | Structure |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 711 | Nose Gear |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 731 | Left and Right Main Gears |
| 741 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A330 - A340 SWAMP Areas
(Ref. Fig. 003)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

A380 SWAMP Areas

| 124 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 344 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 521 | Wing Inboard Fixed Leading Edge Struture |
| 621 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 522 | Wing Center Fixed Leading Edge Struture |
| 622 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 623 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 571 | Main Landing Gear Well |
| 671 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 573 | Wing Inner Trailing Edge Fixed Structure |
| 673 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 574 | Wing Center Trailing Edge Fixed Structure |
| 674 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 575 | Wing Outer Trailing Edge Fixed Structure |
| 675 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 711 | Nose Gear |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 731 | Main Gear |
| 741 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
5. A380 SWAMP Areas
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 126 | |

A380 SWAMP Areas
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 127 | Nose Landing-Gear Well (FR10B to FR16) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 144 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 146 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 336 | L and R Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Trailing-Edge |
| 346 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 621 | 14 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 622 | 30 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 623 | 48 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 671 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 672 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 673 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 674 | 35 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 675 | 48 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 741 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 761 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 833 | Main Deck Emergency Exit/Door M3L/M3R |
| 843 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 853 | Upper Deck Passenger/Crew Door U2L/U2R |
| 863 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------

A380 SWAMP Areas
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 SWAMP Areas - All Zones For A300 - A310 - A300/600
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 SWAMP Areas - All Zones For A318 - A319 - A320 - A321
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 SWAMP Areas - All Zones For A330 - A340
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 SWAMP Areas - Fuselage Zone For A380
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 SWAMP Areas - Fuselage, Wing and THS Zone For A380
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 SWAMP Areas - Landing Gear Zone For A380
FUEL AREAS AND FUEL VAPOR AREAS (Airbus)
FUEL AREAS AND FUEL VAPOR AREAS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the location of the fuel and fuel vapor areas on the aircraft.
2. A300 - A310 - A300/600 Fuel and Fuel Vapor Areas
(Ref. Fig. 001)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 141 | Wing center Box |
| 142 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 143 | Air Conditioning Bay (Below vapor seal) |
| 144 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 145 | Pressurized Zone Between Wing Center Box/Main |
| 146 | Gear Wells and Cabin Floor. |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 147 | Main Gear Well and Hydraulics Bays |
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 319 | Horizontal Stabilizer Center Section |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 333 | Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 413 | Upper FWD Pylon Zone |
| 414 | |
| 423 | |
| 424 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 415 | Lower FWD Pylon Zone |

A380 SWAMP Areas
| 416 | |
| 425 | |
| 426 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 541 | Forward Inboard Section of Main Fuel Tank |
| 641 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 542 | Aft Inboard Section of Main Fuel Tank |
| 642 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 543 | Outboard Section of Main Fuel Tank |
| 643 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 550 | Outboard Fuel Tank |
| 650 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 560 | Vent Tank |
| 660 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
3. A318 - A319 - A320 - A321 Fuel and Fuel Vapor Areas
(Ref. Fig. 002)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 141 | Wing Center Box |
| 142 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 191 | Air Conditioning Compartment and Fairings |
| 192 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 413 | Upper FWD Pylon |
| 414 | |
| 423 | |
| 424 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 540 | Fuel Tank |
| 640 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 550 | Vent Surge Tank |
| 650 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| ACT | Additional Center Tank |
| | (eg. in 151/152 area - cargo bay ) |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A330 - A340 Fuel and Fuel Vapor Areas
(Ref. Fig. 003)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 141 | Wing Center Box |

A380 SWAMP Areas
| 142 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 148 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 149 | Center line Gear Well |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 191 | Air Conditioning Compartment and Fairings |
| 192 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 319 | Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Center Spar Box |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 333 | Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Spar Box |
| 343 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 461 | |
| 471 | |
| 481 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 452 | Upper FWD Pylon |
| 462 | |
| 472 | |
| 482 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 540 | Fuel Tank |
| 640 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 550 | Vent Surge Tank |
| 650 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
5. A380 Fuel and Fuel Vapor Areas
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 141 | Center Wing Box (FR46 to FR56 or FR46 to FR 51 with |
| 142 | Center Tank) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 147 | Pressurized Zone between the Center Wing Box, the Main |
| 148 | Landing-Gear Bay and the Lower Side of the Cabin Floor |
| | (FR46 to FR72) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 149 | Center Tank (if Installed, FR51 to FR56) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 191 | L and R Forward Belly-Fairing and Air-Conditioning |
| | (near FR48) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

A380 SWAMP Areas

|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 317 | Tail-Cone APU Exhaust Area (FR117 to the End of the |
| | Aircraft) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 319 | Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Spar-Box Fuel-Tank |
| | inside the Fuselage from Rib 4 (L) to Rib 4 (R) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 333 | L and R Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Spar-Box Fuel- |
| 343 | Tank from Rib 4 to Rib 8 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 335 | L and R Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer Spar-Box Dry |
| 345 | Area from Rib 8 to Rib 25 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 344 | Trimmable-Horizontal Stabilizer Spar-Box Vent-Tank from |
| | Rib 9 to Rib 25, RH only |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 463 | |
| 473 | |
| 483 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 469 | |
| 479 | |
| 489 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 621 | 14 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 622 | 30 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 623 | 48 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 541 | Feed Tank 2/3 (from Rib 1 to Rib 8) Forward of the |
| 641 | Center Spar |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 642 | (from Rib 8 to Rib 13) Forward of the Centre Spar |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 643 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 544 | Feed Tank (from Rib 22 to Rib 34) |
| 644 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 545 | Surge Tank (from Rib 34 to Rib 35) |
| 645 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

A380 SWAMP Areas
| 646 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 550 | Vent Tank (from Rib 45 to Rib 48) |
| 650 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 662 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 663 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 671 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 673 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 674 | 35 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 675 | 48 |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Fuel and Fuel Vapor Areas - All Zones For A300 - A310 - A300/600

20-31-37 - FIRE AREAS (Airbus)
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Fuel and Fuel Vapor Areas - All Zones For A318 - A319 - A320 - A321
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Fuel and Fuel Vapor Areas - All Zones For A330 - A340
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Fuel and Fuel Vapor Areas - Fuselage and Belly Fairing Zone For A380
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Fuel and Fuel Vapor Areas - Fuselage and Wing, THS and Pylon Zone For A380
FIRE AREAS (Airbus)
FIRE AREAS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the location of the fire areas on the aircraft.
2. A300 - A310 - A300/600 Fire Areas
(Ref. Fig. 001)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 313 | Tail Cone APU Intake Area |
| 314 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 316 | Walls |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 421 | |
| 412 | |
| 422 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 436 | |
| 445 | |
| 446 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 451 | Thrust Reverser Zone |
| 452 | |
| 461 | |
| 462 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 453 | FWD Hot Section Zone |
| 454 | |
| 463 | |
| 464 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

| 455 | AFT Hot Section Zone |

| 456 | |
| 465 | |
| 466 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 473 | Upper AFT Pylon Zone |
| 474 | |
| 483 | |
| 484 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 475 | Lower AFT Pylon Zone |
| 476 | |
| 485 | |
| 486 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
3. A318 - A319 - A320 - A321 Fire Areas
(Ref. Fig. 002)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 314 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 316 | Walls |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 421 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 436 | |
| 445 | |
| 446 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 451 | Thrust Reverser |
| 452 | |
| 461 | |
| 462 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 453 | Hot Section |
| 454 | |
| 463 | |
| 464 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
4. A330 - A340 Fire Areas
(Ref. Fig. 003)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 314 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 315 | Tail Cone APU and Accessory Compartment |

| 316 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 422 | |
| 432 | |
| 442 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 423 | |
| 433 | |
| 443 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 417 | Thrust Reverser |
| 418 | |
| 427 | |
| 428 | |
| 437 | |
| 438 | |
| 447 | |
| 448 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 461 | |
| 471 | |
| 481 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
5. A380 Fire Areas
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
---------------------------------------------------------------------
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 317 | Tail-Cone APU Exhaust Area (FR117 To the End of the |
| | Aircraft) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 412 | Engine Fan and Accessory Gearbox |
| 422 | |
| 432 | |
| 442 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 423 | |
| 433 | |
| 443 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 417 | L and R Engine Thrust-Reverser |
| 418 | |
| 427 | |
| 428 | |
| 437 | |
| 438 | |

| 447 | |
| 448 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 461 | |
| 471 | |
| 481 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 611 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 612 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 513 | Slat 1 |
| 613 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 514 | Slat 2 |
| 614 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 515 | Slat 3 |
| 615 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 516 | Slat 4 |
| 616 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 621 | 14 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 522 | Center Fixed Leading Edge Structure from Rib 14 to Rib |
| 622 | 30 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 523 | Outboard Fixed Leading Edge Structure from Rib 30 to Rib|
| 623 | 48 |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 642 | (from Rib 8 to Rib 13) Forward of the Center Spar |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 643 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------i
| 544 | Feed Tank (from Rib 22 to Rib 34) i
| 644 | i
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------i
| 545 | Surge Tank (from Rib 34 to Rib 35) i
| 645 | i
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 646 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 561 | Inboard Flap |
| 661 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|

| 662 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 663 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 574 | Center Trailing Edge Fixed Structure (from Rib 15 to Rib|
| 674 | 35) |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 582 | Spoiler 2 |
| 682 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 583 | Spoiler 3 |
| 683 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 584 | Spoiler 4 |
| 684 | |
i---------i---------------------------------------------------------i
| 585 | Spoiler 5 i
| 685 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 587 | Spoiler 7 |
| 687 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 588 | Spoiler 8 |
| 688 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 591 | Inboard Aileron |
| 691 | |
|---------|---------------------------------------------------------|
| 592 | Center Aileron |
| 692 | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Fire Areas - All Zones For A300 - A310 - A300/600
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Fire Areas - All Zones For A318 - A319 - A320 - A321
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Fire Areas - All Zones For A330 - A340
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Fire Areas - Fuselage Zone For A380
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Fire Areas - Fuselage, Wing and Pylon Zone For A380
ELECTRICAL ITEMS INSTALLATION DEPENDING ON THE AREA (Airbus)
ELECTRICAL ITEMS INSTALLATION DEPENDING ON THE AREA - DESCRIPTION AND

OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the electrical items installation depending on the area.
2. A300/A310 Electrical Items Installation
(Ref. Fig. 001)
3. A319/A320/A320 Electrical Items Installation
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
5. A380 Electrical Items Installation
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
6. Miscellaneous Electrical Items Installation Requirements
A. Fixing of connectors
(1) In Pressurized Areas
Fixed circular connectors with square flanges (for example E0053 or similar) shall be safetied with
two (minimum) diametrically opposed screws.
Connectors for non-essential systems (for example ABS0354) or equivalent installed in the cabin
electric systems shall be safetied in a connector bracket with two opposite quick released fasteners.
(2) In Non-Pressurized Areas
Steel or alloy connectors (for example E0053 or similar) shall be safetied with four screws.
(3) In Fuel Tanks
Jam nut connectors are used.
For installation of connectors in fuel area, refer to chaper 20-44-10.
B. Fixing of Terminal Blocks
The end-clamps of the terminal blocks must be safetied with lockwire in the following cases :
- Wiring in vibration areas.
- Wiring of EFCS in pressurized areas.
- When the terminal blocks are located above mechanical flight control cables (A300-A310
programm).
NOTE: For more information about locking procedures, refer to chapter 20-51-10.
C. Backshells Installation
(Ref. Fig. 008)
D. Labels Installation
In engines, APU and pylons areas, specific engraved labels attached by rivets shall be used.
E. Harness Tying
(1) Pylon Areas

20-31-40 - ELECTRICAL ITEMS INSTALLATION DEPENDING ON THE AREA
(Airbus)
ELECTRICAL ITEMS INSTALLATION DEPENDING ON THE AREA (Airbus)
ELECTRICAL ITEMS INSTALLATION DEPENDING ON THE AREA - DESCRIPTION AND

OPERATION
1. General
This chapter gives the electrical items installation depending on the area.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
3. A319/A320/A320 Electrical Items Installation
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
5. A380 Electrical Items Installation
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
6. Miscellaneous Electrical Items Installation Requirements
A. Fixing of connectors
Fixed circular connectors with square flanges (for example E0053 or similar) shall be safetied with
two (minimum) diametrically opposed screws.
Connectors for non-essential systems (for example ABS0354) or equivalent installed in the cabin
electric systems shall be safetied in a connector bracket with two opposite quick released fasteners.
Steel or alloy connectors (for example E0053 or similar) shall be safetied with four screws.
(3) In Fuel Tanks
Jam nut connectors are used.
For installation of connectors in fuel area, refer to chaper 20-44-10.
B. Fixing of Terminal Blocks
The end-clamps of the terminal blocks must be safetied with lockwire in the following cases :
- Wiring in vibration areas.
- Wiring of EFCS in pressurized areas.
- When the terminal blocks are located above mechanical flight control cables (A300-A310
programm).
NOTE: For more information about locking procedures, refer to chapter 20-51-10.
C. Backshells Installation
(Ref. Fig. 008)
D. Labels Installation
In engines, APU and pylons areas, specific engraved labels attached by rivets shall be used.

20-31-40 - ELECTRICAL ITEMS INSTALLATION DEPENDING ON THE AREA
(Airbus)
E. Harness Tying
(1) Pylon Areas
Harnesses are tied with high temperature lacing tape NSA8420.
In areas where T > 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) , lacing tape NSA8420-7 shall be used only to close
split conduits EN6049-007.
(2) Fuel Tank Areas
(Ref. Fig. 009)
F. Sealing
(1) In All Areas
For optical unused cavities, sealing plugs shall be used.
All the unused openings (switches, lights) shall be fitted with a sealing plug to prevent fluid
projections.
Where fluid and fuel vapour are present, sealing plugs shall be used or some other forms of
protection installed.
(4) In Fuel and Fuel Vapour Areas
Connectors shall be fitted with sealing plugs.
NOTE: For more information about sealing plugs, refer to chapter 20-48-40.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Electrical Items Installation Depending on the Area - A300/A310 Program
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Electrical Items Installation Depending on the Area - A319/A320/A321 Program
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Electrical Items Installation Depending on the Area - A319/A320/A321 Program
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Electrical Items Installation Depending on the Area - A380 Program
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Electrical Items Installation Depending on the Area - A380 Program
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Electrical Items Installation Depending on the Area - Backshells Installation
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Electrical Items Installation Depending on the Area - Harness Tying

IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING (Airbus)
IDENTIFICATION AND MARKING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the general design requirements related to the electrical installations identification on aircraft.
A. Wire and bundle identification (Ref. 20-32-2X)
B. Electrical Item identification (Ref. 20-32-5X)
WIRES AND HARNESS IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
WIRES AND BUNDLES IDENTIFICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the general identification requirements related to the electrical wire and bundle on aircraft.
A. Wire identification by the manufacturer (Ref. 20-32-21)
B. Wire functional identification (Ref. 20-32-22)
C. Bundle functional identification (Ref. 20-32-23)
WIRE IDENTIFICATION BY THE SUPPLIER (Airbus)
WIRE IDENTIFICATION BY THE SUPPLIER - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This topic covers the identification and the markings made by the manufacturer during the manufacture of the wires and cables.
Definitions :
AWG :
American Wire Gauge.
Conductor :
The conductor is the conducting element of the cable formed from one or more strands.
Core :
Assembly of a conductor and insulation which then form part of a complete single or multiconductor cable.
Cable or wire :
A cable is an assembly consisting of a conductor, insulation and, where applicable, a sheath, screen or jacket.
2. P/N Identification
All the wire types (US and Metric) agree with Standards (ABS, ASNE, EN, NSA,...).
The wires are identified as follows:
A. General case:
ABSXXXX XX XX
EXXXX XX XX
NSAXXXXXX XX XX
--------- -- --
| | |
| | ---------- Wire gauge (1 until 4 characters) (Ref. para. 5)
| |
|
---------------------- Standard P/N (Not written on the wire)
ENXXXX-XXX X XXX X
---------- - --- -
| | | |
| | | ---- Insulation color code (Ref. table 7 and 8)
| | |
| | |
| | -------- Wire gauge code (Ref. para. 5)

| |
| ------------ Code letter for number of cores (Ref. table 9)
|
(Ref. para. 4)
B. Specific cases
(1) For E0260, E0261 and E0262 P/Ns:
E026X XX XX - X
----- -- -- -
| | | |
| | | --------- Single-core cable - insulation color code
| | | (Ref. table 7)
| | --------------- Wire gauge
| |
| ----------------------- Wire type code (Ref. para. 4)
|
-------------------------------- Standard P/N (Not written on the wire)
(2) For ABS1354
ABS1354 XX X XX
------- -- - --
| | | |
| | | ------- Wire gauge
| | |
| | ---------- Number of cores (ref. table 9)
| |
|
(3) For EN4604-005
EN4604-005 WL
---------- -
| |
| ------------ Wire type code
|
(Ref. para. 4)
3. Wire Types
There are two families of wire types:
A. United States (US)
The United States (US) wire types are installed on A300/A310/A300-600. Their core diameter has US diameters.
e.g. AKA gauge 24 has 19 strands diameter 0.127 mm (0.0050 in.) .
B. Metric (M) types:
The Metric (M) wire types are installed on the other Airbus A/C for weight saving.
e.g. CF gauge 24 has 19 strands diameter 0.12 mm (0.0047 in.) .
C. Wire type interchangeability table
NOTE: The tables that follow give the interchangeability between wire types. for example, if a DK is not available, you can replace it by a DM.
Although these wires have different structures, they are fully interchangeable (for a given marking type).
(1) US -> Metric - one way interchangeability tables

If it is necessary to replace a US type wire on the aircraft and if the US type wire is no longer available, you can use an interchangeable
Metric wire (Ref. one way interchangeability tables (US->Metric)). All the Metric wires are available.
(a) Single wires
-------------------------
| US | M |
|-----------|-----------|
| AKA | CF |
| AKB | CF |
| BE | BF |
| DE | DK |
-------------------------
(b) Twisted wires
------------------------- ------------------------- -------------------------
| TWO WIRES | | THREE WIRES | | FOUR WIRES |
| US | M | | US | M | | US | M |

|-----------|-----------| |-----------|-----------| |-----------|-----------|

| PD | PF | | QD | QF | | RD | RF |
| PE | PG | | QE | QG | | RE | RH |
------------------------- ------------------------- -------------------------
(c) Shielded wires
--------------- -------------- --------------- ------------------------
| SINGLE WIRE | | TWO WIRES | | THREE WIRES | | MULTI WIRES |
| US | M | | US | M | | US | M | | US | M |
|------|------| |------|-----| |------|------| |--------|--------------|
| SE | ST | | TG | TT | | UG | UE | | YE | HA (5 Wires)|
| SF | SJ | | TJ | TK | | UK | UD | | YD | YF (6 Wires)|
| SFA | SJ | | TJA | TK | | UKA | UD | | YN | HB (5 Wires)|
| SFB | SJ | | TJB | TK | | UKB | UD | | YR | YZ (10 Wires)|
| SG | SW | | | | | | | | YP | HC (11 Wires)|
--------------- -------------- --------------- -------------------------
(d) Extensible cord
--------------------------
| US | M |
|------------|-----------|
| YS | YX |
--------------------------
(2) Metric -> Metric - one-way interchangeability table
-------------------
| WIRE | WIRE |
| TYPE | TYPE |
| CODE | CODE |
|--------|------- |
| CF | DR |
|--------|------- |
| MG | MMG |
|--------|--------|
| PF | DRB |
|--------|--------|
| QF | DRC |
|--------|--------|
| RF | DRD |
|--------|--------|
| SJ | MLA |
|--------|--------|
| TK | MLB |
|--------|--------|
| UD | MLC |
|--------|--------|
| YT | HP |
-------------------
(3) Metric -> Metric - two-way interchangeability table
(a) ASNE -> EN
-------------------
| WIRE | WIRE |
| TYPE | TYPE |
| CODE | CODE |
|--------|--------|
| DK | DM |
|--------|--------|
| HA | MJ |
|--------|--------|
| PG | PN |
|--------|--------|
| QG | QL |
|--------|--------|
| RH | RK |
|--------|--------|
| ST | GJ |
|--------|--------|
| TT | MH |
|--------|--------|
| UE | UU |
-------------------

(b) ABS -> EN

-------------------
| WIRE | WIRE |
| TYPE | TYPE |
| CODE | CODE |
|--------|--------|
| VJ | VV |
|--------|--------|
| VR | MJ |
---------|---------
(c) ABS/ASNE/EN -> EN
-------------------
| WIRE | WIRE |
| TYPE | TYPE |
| CODE | CODE |
|--------|--------|
| DK/DM | DR |
|--------|--------|
| PG/PN | DRB |
|--------|--------|
| QG/QL | DRC |
|--------|--------|
| RH/RK | DRD |
|--------|--------|
| ST/GJ | MLA |
|--------|--------|
| TT/MH | MLB |
|--------|--------|
| UE/UU | MLC |
|--------|--------|
| VJ/VV | MLD |
|--------|--------|
|HA/VR/MJ| MME |
------------------|
4. Wire Type Codes
NOTE: The tables that follow give the characteristics and the related P/Ns for each wire type. For a wire type code, if there are several related P/Ns,
these wires have the same structure and the P/Ns are fully interchangeable.
Tables 1-A to 1-Y give the list of the wire type codes in alphabetic sequence and the related standard P/Ns (US and Metric wire type families).
It is the wire type code which is written on the wire and not the standard P/N.
NOTE: You must use the applicable tools to strip the wires (US or Metric). Refer to ESPM chapter 20-25-11.
TABLE 1-A
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Normal Use - Unshielded - T < 200 C (392 F) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| AD | Aluminum (UV laser | PI/PTFE | |ABS0949 |
| | marking) | | | |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| ADA | Aluminum (Ink jet | PI/PTFE 1 ADA | |ABS1354 |
| | marking) | Single-core | | |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| Use only for | | |
| | | | | |
| ADB | Ink jet marking | PI/PTFE 2 ADA| |ABS1354 |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| ADC | Ink jet marking | PI/PTFE 3 ADA| |ABS1354 |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| ADD | Ink jet marking | PI/PTFE 4 ADA| |ABS1354 |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| ADE | Ink jet marking | PI/PTFE 5 ADA| |ABS1354 |
| |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| | | |
| AKA | 600V-200 C (392 F) | KAPTON/PTFE | ex AK |NSA935012 |

| AKB | 600V-200 C (392 F) | KAPTON/FEP | SNIAS 451242/78 |NSA935012 |

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-B
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Panel Wiring - T < 200 C (392 F) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| BE | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PTFE | MIL-W-16878 |NSA935041 |
| BF | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PTFE | |E0260 |
| BJ |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| XL-ETFE | |ABS0826 |
| BP |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| XL-ETFE | |ABS0820 |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-C
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Normal Use - Unshielded T = 200 C (392 F) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CF | 600V-200 C (392 F) | KAPTON/FEP | | E0261 |
| | (Ink jet or hot | | | |
| | stamp marking) | | | |
| | CF-C | FEP or PTFE | | E0261 |
| | (Co2 laser marking) | | | |
| | CF-U | FEP or PTFE | | E0261 |
| | UV laser marking) | | | |
| | CF-Y | FEP or PTFE | | E0261 |
| |YAG/X3 laser marking | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-D
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Normal Use - Unshielded - T > 200 C (392 F) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| DE | 600V | PTFE-KAPTON-PTFE | AIR 4524 |EN2267-008 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | |(ex. |
| | | | | NSA935130)|
| | | 2 DE | |EN2267-007 |
| | | | |(ex. |
| | | | | NSA935248)|
| | | 3 DE | |EN2267-007 |
| | | | |(ex. |
| | | | | NSA935248)|
| DG | 600V | KAPTON-GLASS-PTFE| AIR 4524 |NSA935131 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | or |
| | | | |EN2854-003A|
| DJ | 600V | PTFE-FIREPROOF | AIR 4524 |NSA935132 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| SILICA | | |
| DK | 600V | PTFE-KAPTON-PTFE | | E0262 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| | (Ink jet marking) | PTFE-KAPTON-PTFE | | E0262 |
| | DK-C | | | |
| | (CO2 laser marking) | | | |
| | DK-U | PTFE-KAPTON-PTFE | | E0262 |
| | DK-Y (YAG X3 laser | PFFE-KAPTON-PTFE | | E0262 |
| | marking) | | | |
| DL | 600V | PTFE-FIREPROOF- | MIL-W-25038/3 | E0437 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| SILICA | or prEN2234 | |

| DM | 600V | PI/PTFE | |EN2267-008A|

| | (UV laser marking) | Single wire | | |
| DMA | 600V | Single-core | |EN2267-007A|
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| use only for | | |
| | (Ink jet marking) | multicore cable | | |
| DR |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | |EN2267-010A|
| DRA |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| Single-core | |EN2267-009A|
| DRB |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 2 DRA | |EN2267-009B|
| DRC |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 3 DRA | |EN2267-009C|
| DRD |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 4 DRA | |EN2267-009D|
| DW |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE | |EN2346-005A|
| | UV laser marking | Single wire | | |
| DWA |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE | |EN2346-005N|
| DWB |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE 2 DWA | |EN2346-005B|
| DWC |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE 3 DWA | |EN2346-005C|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Wire Type Codes
TABLE 1-F
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Special Cable Identification Coding |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | |
| CODE | | | | P/N |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| FA |150 deg.C (302 deg.F)| BONDING BREAD | | E0641 |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-G
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | |
| CODE | | | | P/N |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| GJ |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PI/PTFE | |EN2714-011A|
| | | 1 DMA | | |
| GPA |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE | |EN4608-004A|
| GPB |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE 2 GPA | |EN4608-004B|
| | | | | or |
| | | | |EN4608-005B|
| GPC |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE 3 GPA | |EN4608-004C|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-H
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | |
| CODE | | | | P/N |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| HA | 600V MULTI | 5 DK12 | | E0287 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| KAPTON-PTFE | | |
| HB | 600V MULTI | 1 XE + 4 DK | | E0263 |
| HC | 600V MULTI | 1 XE + 10 DK | | E0292 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| KAPTON - PTFE | | |
| HD |MULTIWIRE AOP SYSTEM | 4 CF + RG316 | | E0299 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| ADF SYSTEM | | |
| HE |BUS WIRE 200 C(392 F)| PTFE - KAPTON | | E0259 |
| HG |MULTIWIRE 600V- | 1 UD + 4 XM | | E0300 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| FEP | | |
| HH |EXTENSIBLE CORD | CF-FEP sheath | | E0385 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| HL |EXTENSIBLE CORD | CF-FEP sheath | | E0488 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| HM |THERMOCOUPLE CHROMEL | PTFE | | E0527 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| HN |THERMOCOUPLE ALUMEL | PTFE | | E0528 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| HP |CHROMEL ALUMEL | HM + HN | | E0529 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PTFE | | |
| HQ |THERMOCOUPLE | FEP/POLYIMIDE | |ABS1704 |

Wire Type Codes
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |

| HX |MULTIWIRE | PTFE | |ABS1527 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 1 DR16 | | |
| |UV laser marking |+3 DR18 | | |
| | |+6 DR20 | | |
| | |+8 DR24 | | |
| HY |MULTIWIRE | PTFE | |ABS1529 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 1 DR18 | | |
| |UV laser marking |+5 DR24 | | |
| | |+2 MLB24 | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-K
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Quad Cable Identification Coding |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| KB | Quadrax for digital | FEP | | ABS0972* |
| | transmission | | | |
| |125 deg.C (257 deg.F)| | | |
| KD | Quadrax | FEP | | ABS1503 |
| |125 deg.C (257 deg.F)| | | |
| KG | Twinax | PTFE - FEP | | EN3375-003|
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| KH | Quadrax | FEP | | ABS1580 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| KM | Coaxial | FEP | | ABS1250 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* This type of wire must be installed in a harness with a specific direction. To avoid confusion when wiring, the manufacturer has
marked the letters "A-B" every 300 mm (11.8110 in.) on the wire sheath. (Ref. Chapter Wiring 20-33-11)
TABLE 1-L
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Optic fiber Cable Identification Coding |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|--------|---------------------|---------------|-----------------|----------- |
| LF |125 deg.C (257 deg.F)| SILICONE | | ABS0963-003|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-M
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Single-core and Multicores Coding Identification - insulated and shielded |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|----------|---------------------|---------------|----------------------------|
| MG |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| 7 CF | | ABS0682 |
| | | PI/PTFE | | |
| MH |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PI/PTFE | |EN2714-011B|
| | | 2 DMA | | |
| MJ |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| PI/PTFE | |EN2714-012E|
| | | 5 DMA | | |
| MLA |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 1 DRA | |EN2714-013A|
| MLB |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 2 DRA(TWISTED)| |EN2714-013B|
| MLC |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 3 DRA(TWISTED)| |EN2714-013C|
| MLD |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 4 DRA(TWISTED)| |EN2714-013D|
| MME |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 5 DRA | |EN2714-014E|

Wire Type Codes

| MMF |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 6 DRA | |EN2714-014F|
| MMG |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 7 DRA | |EN2714-014G|
| MMH |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 8 DRA | |EN2714-014H|
| MMK |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| 9 DRA | |EN2714-014K|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-P
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Two Twisted Unshielded Wires Identification Coding |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|----------|---------------------|---------------|----------------|-----------|
| PD | 600V | PI | |NSA935246 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| (2 AKA or AKB)| | |
| PE | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE (2 DE)| |NSA935247 |
| PF | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PI (2 CF) | | E0264 |
| PG | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE (2 DK)| | E0265 |
| PH | 600V-180 C (356 F) | XL-ETFE (2 BP)| | ABS0821 |
| | (Landing gear only) | | | |
| PL | 600V | MINERAL FIBER | | ABS0053 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| /PTFE (2 DL) | | |
| PN | 600V-260 C (500 F) | 2 DMA | |EN2267-007B|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-Q
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Cable Identification Coding |
| Three Twisted Unshielded - T = or > 200 C (392 F) |
| Red/Light Blue/Yellow Color |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|------|---------------------|-------------------|----------------|-----------|
| QD | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PI (3 AKA or AKB) | BMS13-51-1-3-GA| NSA935388 |
| | | | or | |
| | | |Color Mark Three| |
| | | | BMS13-51-1-1-GA| |
| QE | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE (3 DE) | | NSA935387 |
| QF | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PI (3 CF) | | E0266 |
| QG | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE (3 DK) | | E0267 |
| QH | 600V-180 C (356 F) | 3 BP / XL-ETFE | | ABS0822 |
| QL | 600V-260 C (500 F) | 3 DMA / PI-PTFE | |EN2267-007C|
| QP | 600V-180 C (356 F) | PI/PA BRAID (3 YV)| | E0471 |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-R
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Four Twisted Unshielded Wires 200 C (392 F) < T < 260 C (500 F) |
| Red/Light Blue/Yellow/Green Color |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|------|---------------------|-------------------|----------------|-----------|
| RD | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PI (4 AKA or AKB) | |NSA935393 |
| RE | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE (4 DE) | |NSA935381 |
| RF | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PI (4 CF) | | E0268 |
| RH | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE (4 DK) | | E0269 |
| RK | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PTFE/PI (4 DMA) | |EN2267-007D|

Wire Type Codes
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-S
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Normal Use - Insulated and Shielded |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|-------|---------------------|-------------------|---------------|-----------|
| SE | 600V-260 C (500 F) | KAPTON/PTFE | AIR 4524 |NSA935171 |
| SF | 600V-200 C (392 F) | KAPTON-FEP SHEATH | AIR 4524 |NSA935172 |
|SFA/SFB| 600V-200 C (392 F) | KAPTON-FEP SHEATH | |NSA935172 |
| SG | 600V-200 C (392 F) | PTFE/KAPTON/ | |NSA935173 |
| | | FEP 130pF/m | | |
| SJ | 600V-200 C (392 F) | 1 CF | | E0270 |
| | Ink jet marking | | | |
| | SJ-C | PI | | E0270 |
| | CO2 laser marking | | | |
| | SJ-U | PI | | E0270 |
| | UV laser marking | | | |
| | SJ-Y | PI | | E0270 |
| | YAG-X3 laser marking| | | |
| ST | 600V-260 C (500 F) | 1 DK | | E0271 |
| | Ink jet marking | KAPTON/PTFE | | |
| | ST-C | | | E0271 |
| | ST-U | | | E0271 |
| | ST-Y | | | E0271 |
| SW | 600V-200 C (392 F) | KAPTON-PTFE | | E0291 |
| | | FEP 130pF/m | | |
| SX | 600V-180 C (356 F) | XL-ETFE | | ABS0823 |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-T
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Pair Twisted, Shielded and Insulated |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|-------|---------------------|-------------------|---------------|-----------|
| TC | 600V-180 C (356 F) | XL-ETFE | | ABS0824 |
| TG | 600V-260 C (500 F) | KAPTON-PTFE | AIR 4524 |NSA935211/ |
| | | KAPTON SHEATH | |213 |
| TJ | 600V-150 C (302 F) | KAPTON-FEP SHEATH | AIR 4524 |NSA935212 |
|TJA/TJB| 600V-200 C (392 F) | 2 AKA/AKB | |NSA935214 |
| | | KAPTON-FEP SHEATH | | |
| TK | 600V-200 C (392 F) | 2 CF | | E0272 |
| | Ink jet marking | KAPTON-FEP | | |
| | TK-B | | | E0272 |
| | TK-C | | | E0272 |
| | TK-U | | | E0272 |
| | TK-Y | | | E0272 |

Wire Type Codes
| TT | 600V-260 C (500 F) | 2 DK | | E0273 |

| | Ink jet marking | PI-PTFE | | |
| | TT-C | | | E0273 |
| | TT-U | | | E0273 |
| | TT-Y | | | E0273 |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-U
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Three Twisted, Shielded and Insulated |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|-------|---------------------|-------------------|---------------|-----------|
| UC |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| XL-ETFE | | ABS0825 |
| UD | 600V-200 C (392 F) | 3 CF | | E0274 |
| | Ink jet marking | KAPTON-FEP | | |
| | UD-B | | | E0274 |
| | UD-C | | | E0274 |
| | UD-U | | | E0274 |
| | UD-Y | | | E0274 |
| UE | 600V-260 C (500 F) | 3 DK | | E0275 |
| | Ink jet marking | KAPTON-PTFE | | |
| | UE-C | | | E0275 |
| | UE-U | | | E0275 |
| | UE-Y | PI/FEP | | E0275 |
| UG | 600V-260 C (500 F) | KAPTON-PTFE | AIR 4524 |NSA935251/ |
| | | KAPTON SHEATH | |254 |
| UK | 600V-150 C (302 F) | KAPTON-FEP SHEATH | AIR 4524 |NSA935252 |
| | | | |/253 |
|UKA/UKB| 600V-200 C (392 F) | 3 AKA/AKB | |NSA935252 |
| | | KAPTON-FEP SHEATH | |/253 |
| UU | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PTFE/PI | |EN2714-011C|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-V
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Four and Five Twisted, Shielded and Insulated |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|-------|---------------------|-------------------|---------------|-----------|
| VH | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE | | ABS0311 |
| VJ | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE | | ABS0323 |
| VM | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE | |EN2714-003D|
| VNA |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| 1 AD | | ABS1356 |
| | UV laser marking | Single-core | | |
| VNB |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| 2 VNA | | ABS1356 |

Wire Type Codes
| VNC |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| 3 VNA | | ABS1356 |

| VND |180 deg.C (356 deg.F)| 4 VNA | | ABS1356 |
| VR | 600V-260 C (500 F) | KAPTON/PTFE 5 DK | 462205/84 | ABS0124 |
| VV | 600V-260 C (500 F) | PI/PTFE 4 DMA | |EN2714-011D|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-W
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Coaxial Cable Identification Coding |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|------|---------------------|-------------------|----------------|-----------|
| WA | COAXIAL | POLYIMIDE-PTFE | |NSA935358 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| WB | COAXIAL | POLYIMIDE-PTFE | |NSA935359 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| WC | TRIAXIAL | PTFE | | E0349 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| WD | DOUBLE SHIELD | FEP | | E0406 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| WF | TWINAX | KAPTON-FEP | | ABS0386 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| WJ | TWINAX | PTFE-FEP | |EN3375-004 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| WQ | COAXIAL | PTFE-FEP | MIL-C-17D | ABS0710 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| WN |200 deg.C (392 drg.F)| PTFE-FEP | | E0692 OR |
| COAXIAL | | |EN4604-007 |
| WR | DOUBLE SHIELD COAX | PTFE-FEP | | E0738 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| WX | COAXIAL-200 C(392 F)| 2 CF | | E0807 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| WZ | COAXIAL-200 C(392 F)| FEP | |EN4604-003 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 1-X
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Coaxial Cable Identification Coding |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|------|---------------------|-------------------|----------------|-----------|
| XA | RG 58C/U-85 C(185 F)| POLYETHYLENE-PVC | MIL-C-17D |NSA935340 |
| XD | RG 214/U-85 C(185 F)| POLYETHYLENE-PVC | MIL-C-17D |NSA935343 |
| XE | RG 188A/U | PTFE | MIL-C-17D |NSA935344 |
| XF | RG400/U-200 C(392 F)|PTFE-DOUBLE SHIELD | MIL-C-17D | E0293 |
| XG | RG 141A/U | PTFE | MIL-C-17D |NSA935346 |
| XJ | RG 59B/U-85 C(185 F)| POLYETHYLENE-PVC | MIL-C-17D |NSA935347 |
| XK | RG302/U-200 C(392 F)| PTFE-FEP | MIL-C-17D |NSA935348 |
| XL | SPECIAL-85 C(185 F) | POLYETHYLENE-PVC | MIL-C-17D |NSA935349 |
| XM | 600V - 200 C(392 F) | KAPTON-PTFE | | E0290 |
| XR | RG165/U-250 C(482 F)| PTFE-GLASS FIBER | MIL-C-17D |NSA935354 |
| XS | RG225/U-200 C(392 F)| PTFE-GLASS FIBER | MIL-C-17D |NSA935355 |
| XT | RG 187A/U | FEP | MIL-C-17D |NSA935356 |
| |250 deg.C (482 deg.F)| | | |
| | or RG 178B/U | | | |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| FEP | | |
| XU | 600V - 200 C(392 F) | PTFE-KAPTON | |NSA935357 |

Wire Type Codes
| | TWINAX | | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Gauges
TABLE 1-Y
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TYPE | | | | P/N |
| CODE | | | | |
|------|---------------------|-------------------|-----------------|----------|
| YA | 600V-150 C (302 F) | KAPTON-FEP | AIR 4524 |NSA935290 |
| | ALU | GLASS-NOMEX | | |
| YB | CHROMEL.22 | PTFE-YELLOW | AIR 4524 |NSA935291 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| YC | ALUMEL.22 | PTFE-PINK | AIR 4524 |NSA935292 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| YD | 600V-MULTI | 6 DE-KAPTON-PTFE | AIR 4524 |NSA935293 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| YE | 600V-MULTI | 5 DE-KAPTON-PTFE | AIR 4524 |NSA935294 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| YF | 600V-MULTI | 6 DK-KAPTON-PTFE | | E0286 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| YG | CHROMEL-ALUMEL | PTFE-ASBESTOS | MIL-W-5846 |NSA935296 |
| |315 deg.C (599 deg.F)| | | |
| YJ | EXTENSIBLE CORD | | AIR 4524 |NSA935297 |
| |150 deg.C (302 deg.F)| | | |
| YK | 600V-VIBRO | KAPTON-PTFE | AIR 4524 |NSA935298/|
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | |306 |
| YL | CHROMEL.20 |ASBESTOS-WHITE PTFE| MIL-W-5846 |NSA935299 |
| |315 deg.C (599 deg.F)| | | |
| YM | ALUMEL.20 |ASBESTOS-GREEN PTFE| MIL-W-5846 |NSA935300 |
| |315 deg.C (599 deg.F)| | | |
| YN | 600V-MULTI | 1 XE + 4 DE | AIR 4524 |NSA935301 |
| YP | 600V-MULTI | 1 XE + 10 DE | AIR 4524 |NSA935302 |
| YQ | EXTENSIBLE CORD | AK PVC SHEATH | |NSA935303 |
| |105 deg.C (221 deg.F)| (FOUR WIRES) | | |
| YR | 600V | 6 UKA + 4 TJA | |NSA935304 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| FEP-KAPTON-BRAID | | |
| YS | EXTENSIBLE CORD | AKB-PVC SHEATH | |NSA935305 |
| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| (FIVE WIRES) | | |

Gauges
| YT | CHROMEL-ALUMEL | 1 YB + 1 YC | AIR 4524 |NSA935307 |

| |260 deg.C (500 deg.F)| | | |
| YU | 600V - ALU | KAPTON (TAPE) | AIR 4524 |NSA935308 |
| |150 deg.C (302 deg.F)| NOMEX GLASS | | |
| YV | 600V - NICKEL-ALU | KAPTON-GLASS NOMEX| | E0438 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| YW | 600V - MULTI | 4 XU + 1 UKA - FEP| |NSA935309 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| | | |
| YX | EXTENSIBLE CORD | PVC SHEATH | | E0288 |
| |105 deg.C (221 deg.F)| | | |
| YY | See NOTE | - | - | - |
| YZ | 600V | 4 TK + 6 UD | | E0289 |
| |200 deg.C (392 deg.F)| FEP-BRAID-KAPTON | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE: YY is the AWM/AWL code of a wire that is a vendor sub-assembly of an equipment and whose type could be given by the CMM of the equipment.
5. Gauges
The table that follows gives the list of wire gauges and the related sections.
----------------------------------------------------------------------
| | EN | |
| AWG | WIRE | REAL SECTION |
| GAUGE | GAUGE |--------------------------------------------|
| | CODE | IN mm2 | IN IN2 |
|-----------|-----------|----------------------|---------------------|
| 26 | 001 | 0.15 | 0.2 x 10-3 |
| 24 | 002 | 0.25 | 0.3 x 10-3 |
| 22 | 004 | 0.40 | 0.5 x 10-3 |
| 20 | 006 | 0.60 | 0.9 x 10-3 |
| 18 | 010 | 1.00 | 1.5 x 10-3 |
| 16 | 012 | 1.20 | 2 x 10-3 |
| 14 | 020 | 2.00 | 3 x 10-3 |
| 12 | 030 | 3.00 | 4 x 10-3 |
| 10 | 050 | 5.00 | 7 x 10-3 |
| 10 | 051* | 5.00 | 7 x 10-3 |
| 8 | 090 | 9.00 | 10 x 10-3 |
| 6 | 140 | 14.00 | 20 x 10-3 |
| 4 | 220 | 22.00 | 30 x 10-3 |
| 3 | 280 | 28.00 | 38 x 10-3 |
| 2 | 340 | 34.00 | 50 x 10-3 |
| 1 | 420 | 42.00 | 60 x 10-3 |
| 0 | 530 | 53.00 | 80 x 10-3 |
| 00 | 680 | 68.00 | 0.1 |

Gauges
| 000 | 850 | 85.00 | 0.13 |

| 0000 | 107 | 107.00 | 0.167 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------
* Flexible construction which may be used an alternative.
NOTE: On the electrical drawings only, the large gauges have a special codification.
---------------------------------
| DRAWING GAUGE | AWG GAUGE |
|-----------------|-------------|
| 100 | 0 |
| 200 | 00 |
| 300 | 000 |
| 400 | 0000 |
---------------------------------
6. Manufacturer Identification
A. Identification by Printing of External Sheaths
This identification has a series of figures printed horizontally.
If the wire external diameter is less then 1.27 mm (0.0500 in.) , vertical printing is permitted.
(1) United States (US) wire types :
Printing (as per SPEC 451242/78) with a pitch of 300 mm (11.8110 in.) plus or minus 50 mm (1.9685 in.) pitch along the whole length of the wire. It must be of the
type :
AA-BB-C-22
Example : AKA - FF - L - 20
The code consists of 4 groups of letters or figures. The groups are separated by a dash or a space.
Group 1 : Two or three letters identify the wire type code (Ref. tables 1-A to 1-Y).
e.g. AKA
Group 2 : Two letters identify the manufacturer and the country (Ref. table 2). e.g. FF (FILOTEX/FRANCE).
Group 3 : One or two letters indicate the year of manufacture (Ref. table 3).
e.g. L (1973)
Group 4 : Wire gauge.
e.g. 20
Example :
AKA - FF - L - 20
| | | |------- Wire Gauge
Wire Type Code | | |
Wire per NSA935012 -----| | |------------ Year of Manufacture (1973)
|---------------- Country and Manufacturer Code
( FRANCE - FILOTEX )
(2) Metric (M) wire types :

Gauges
(a) ASN/NSA Standard P/Ns

Printing must be green as per Federal Standard No. 595a :
- light green (Ref. 34230 or 14272 or 14187) for elements E0261 and E0262.
- dark green (Ref. 14109) for elements E0260, E0263 to E0275, E0286 to E0292, E0299 and E0300.
The dark green color can vary depending on the insulation color.
The red, black and dark green elements must be marked white.
Marking by laser, the cable will be marked black and the marking will also be black for purple color optical cables.
Printing must be made at 300 mm (11.8110 in.) pitch over the whole length of the cable. It must be of the type : CF 20 X-FA-A.
The five letter or figure groups are separated by a dash or a space sufficient to prevent any confusion.
- UP TO 1986 :
Group 1 : Two letters identify the wire type (Ref. tables 1-A to 1-Y).
e.g. CF
e.g. 20
Group 3 : One letter indicates the year of manufacture (Ref. table 3).
e.g. X (1983)
Group 4 : Two letters indicate the country and the manufacturer
(Ref. table 2).
e.g. FA (FRANCE/FILECA)
Group 5 : no code : FEP coating, code A : PTFE coating (Ref. table 4).
Example (up to 1986) :
CF 20 X-FA-A
| | | | |
Wire type code | | | | |-------- Code A : PTFE coating
Wire per E0261 -------| | | |---------- Country and Manufacturer Code
| | (FRANCE-FILECA)
| |------------- Manufacture Year Code (1983)
Wire Gauge ----------|
- FROM 1987 TO 1990 :
e.g. CF
e.g. 20
Group 3 : Two letters indicate the year of manufacture (Ref. table 3).
e.g. AB (1987)
Group 4 : Two letters identify the country of manufacture (Ref. table 2).
e.g. FR (FRANCE)
Group 5 : One letter identifies the manufacturer (Ref. table 2).
e.g. A (FILECA)
Group 6 : No code : FEP coating, code A : PTFE coating (Ref. table 4).
Example (from 1987 to 1990) :
CF 20 AB-FR-A-A
| | | | | |

Gauges
Wire Type Code | | | | | |------- PTFE coating

Wire per E0261 -------| | | | |--------- Manufacturer Code (FILECA)
| | |------------ Country of manufacture (FRANCE)
Wire Gauge ----------| |
|-------------- Manufacture Year Code (1987)
- FROM 1991
e.g. CF
e.g. 24
Group 3 : One letter indicates the coating code for laser marking (Ref. table 4).
e.g. C (FEP)
Group 4 : Two letters identify the country of manufacture (Ref. table 2).
e.g. FR (FRANCE)
Group 5 : One letter identifies the manufacturer (Ref. table 2).
e.g. A (FILECA)
Group 6 : Two numbers indicate the year of manufacture (Ref. table 3).
e.g. 91 (1991)
Example (FROM 1991) :
CF 24 C FR A 91
Wire Type Code | | | | | |
Wire per E0261 -----| | | | | |----------- Year of manufacture
Wire Gauge --------| | | |-------------- Manufacturer Code
| |----------------- Country of manufacture
Coating code --------------|
(Ref. table 4)
(b) EN Standard P/Ns
- UP TO 1998:
Example:
EN2266-005 A 002 P FR A 98
----- -- -- - -- - --
| | | | | | |-----
Manufacture Year Code
| | | | | | (Ref. table 3)
| | | | | |---------
Manufacturer Code (Ref. table 2)
| | | | |--------------
Country of Manufacture
| | | | (Ref. table 2)
| | | |------------------
Core insulator color code
(Ref. table 7 and 8)
| | | ---------------------- Wire gauge code
| | ---------------------------- Code letter for number of cores
| (Ref. table 9)
|-------------------------------------- Standard P/N

Gauges
- FROM TO 1998:
Example:
EN CF U 24 FR A 98
-- -- - -- -- - --
| | | | | | |----- Manufacture Year Code (Ref. table 3)
| | | | | |--------- Manufacturer Code (Ref. table 2)
| | | | |-------------- Country of Manufacture (Ref. table 2)
| | | |------------------ AWG Wire gauge
| | |----------------------- Specific Code (Ref. tables 1-A to 1-Y)
| |---------------------------- Wire type code (Ref. tables 1-A to 1-Y)
|
|--------------------------------- Reference to EN Standard wire
(c) Fiberglass cable
Example:
LF XXX 00
-- --- -
| | |---- Manufacture Year Code
| |--------- Manufacturer and country of manufacture codes
|-------------- Wire type code (wire per ABS0963-003)
(3) TABLE 2 - Manufacturer and Country Identification Code
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | OLD CODE (up to 1986) | NEW CODE (from 1987) |
| |------------------------|-------------------------|
| MANUFACTURER | COUNTRY | MANUFACTURER | COUNTRY | MANUFACTURER |
| | CODE * | CODE | CODE * | CODE |
|----------------------|---------|--------------|----------|--------------|
| AXON | - | - | FR | X |
| BRAND-REX (ex BICC) | G | B | GB | B |
| CHAMPLAIN | - | - | US | C |
| DEUTSCH(Connectors) | - | - | FR | L |
| DRACA (ex FILECA) | F | A | FR | A |
| NEXANS (ex FILOTEX) | F | F | FR | F |
| GORE | - | - | DE | G |
| KABELMETAL | D | K | DE | K |
| TYCO (ex RAYCHEM) | - | - | GB | S |
| REINSHAGEN | D | R | DE | R |
| TENSOLITE | - | - | US | T |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
* F or FR = France , D or DE = Deutschland , G or GB = Great Britain,
US = United States
(4) TABLE 3 - Printed Identification Coding of Year of Manufacture

Gauges
( as per ISO DOC 2574 (TC20/SC1 DOC N774 )

------------------------ --------------------------- -------------------------
| Year | Code | | Year | Code | | Year | Code |
|--------|-------------| |--------------|----------| |------------|----------|
| 1971 | J | | 1986 | AA | | 2001 | 01 |
| 1972 | K | | 1987 | AB | | 2002 | 02 |
| 1973 | L | | 1988 | AC | | 2003 | 03 |
| 1974 | M | | 1989 | AD | | 2004 | 04 |
| 1975 | N | | 1990 | AE | | 2005 | 05 |
| 1976 | P | | 1991 | 91 | | 2006 | 06 |
| 1977 | R | | 1992 | 92 | | 2007 | 07 |
| 1978 | S | | 1993 | 93 | | 2008 | 08 |
| 1979 | T | | 1994 | 94 | | 2009 | 09 |
| 1980 | U | | 1995 | 95 | | 2010 | 10 |
| 1981 | V | | 1996 | 96 | | 2011 | 11 |
| 1982 | W | | 1997 | 97 | | 2012 | 12 |
| 1983 | X | | 1998 | 98 | | 2013 | 13 |
| 1984 | Y | | 1999 | 99 | | 2014 | 14 |
| 1985 | Z | | 2000 | 00 | | 2015 | 15 |
------------------------ --------------------------- -------------------------
(5) TABLE 4 - Coating Codes
The coating code corresponds to the wire insulation capacity to protect its environment from the electromagnetic or calorific radiance of the wire. The coating type
defines the marking type to be used.
The coating code is a letter marked after the wire type and before the wire gauge.
-------------------------------------------| |---------------------------------
| | 200 C CABLES | | 260 C CABLES |
| Coating | (CF and derivatives) | | (DK and derivatives) |
| Code |--------------------------------| |--------------------------------|
| | Marking type | Coating | | Marking type | Coating |
|------------------------------------------| |--------------------------------|
| No code | Hot-stamp marking | FEP | | Hot-stamp marking | No |
| | | | | | coating |
|---------|----------------------|---------| |----------------------|---------|
| A * | - | PTFE | | - | - |
|---------|----------------------|---------| |----------------------|---------|
| C | C02 laser marking | FEP | | C02 laser marking | PTFE |
|---------|----------------------|---------| |----------------------|---------|
| U | UV laser marking | FEP | | UV laser marking | PTFE |
|---------|----------------------|---------| |----------------------|---------|
| Y | YAG x 3 laser | PTFE | | YAG x 3 laser marking| PTFE |
| | marking | | | | |
-------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------

Gauges
* Screened and sheathed multi-core

(6) Quadrax wire identification
To avoid confusion when wiring, the manufacturer has marked the letters "A-B" every 30 cm (11.81 in.).
The "A" side corresponds to the end where the conductor is on the right.
At the "A" end the conductor colours are, in a clockwise direction:
- Red, green, blue and yellow
B. Identification by Colored Thread
This identification consists of the manufacturer's identification twisted threads and two threads for the year of manufacture (Ref. tables 5 and 6).
- For single wire, threads are inserted during the manufacturing phase between the core and the insulating sheath or between the external sheath and the insulation
sheath.
- For multi wire, twisted or not, threads are inserted between the external sheath and the conductors.
The thread and printing must resist the maximum operating temperature of the wires.
TABLE 5 - Colored Thread Identification Coding of Manufacturer
------------------------------------------------------------------
| VENDOR | NUMBER OF THREADS | THREAD COLOR |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
| NEXANS (ex FILOTEX) | 2 | Black-Grey |
| DRACA (ex FILECA ) | 3 | Black-Yellow-Black |
| KABELMETAL | 2 | Red-Green |
| REINSHAGEN | 1 | Pink |
| BRAND REX (ex BICC) | 3 | Brown-Green-Red |
| AXON | 2 | Blue-White |
| TENSOLITE | 2 | White-Red |
------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE 6 - Colored Thread Identification Coding of Year of Manufacture
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------
| Year | 1st Thread | 2nd Thread | | Year | 1st Thread | 2nd Thread |
| -------|--------------|--------------| |--------|--------------|------------|
| 1971 | BROWN | RED | | 1994 | GREEN | ORANGE |
| 1972 | GREEN | BLACK | | 1995 | GREEN | GREY |
| 1973 | GREEN | WHITE | | 1996 | GREEN | YELLOW |
| 1974 | GREEN | RED | | 1997 | GREEN | BROWN |
| 1975 | BLACK | WHITE | | 1998 | GREEN | BLUE |
| 1976 | BLACK | RED | | 1999 | BLUE | VIOLET |
| 1977 | WHITE | RED | | 2000 | BLUE | ORANGE |
| 1978 | BLUE | BLACK | | 2001 | BLUE | GREY |
| 1979 | BLUE | WHITE | | 2002 | BLUE | YELLOW |
| 1980 | BLUE | RED | | 2003 | BLUE | BROWN |
| 1981 | YELLOW | BLACK | | 2004 | BROWN | VIOLET |
| 1982 | YELLOW | WHITE | | 2005 | BROWN | ORANGE |
| 1983 | YELLOW | RED | | 2006 | BROWN | GREY |

Gauges
| 1984 | GREY | BLACK | | 2007 | BROWN | YELLOW |

| 1985 | GREY | WHITE | | 2008 | YELLOW | VIOLET |
| 1986 | GREY | RED | | 2009 | YELLOW | ORANGE |
| 1987 | VIOLET | BLACK | | 2010 | YELLOW | GREY |
| 1988 | VIOLET | WHITE | | 2011 | GREY | VIOLET |
| 1989 | VIOLET | RED | | 2012 | GREY | ORANGE |
| 1990 | ORANGE | BLACK | | 2013 | ORANGE | VIOLET |
| 1991 | ORANGE | WHITE | | 2014 | BROWN | BLACK |
| 1992 | ORANGE | RED | | 2015 | BROWN | WHITE |
| 1993 | GREEN | VIOLET | | | | |
---------------------------------------- --------------------------------------

TABLE 7 - Single-Core Cable - Insulation Color Code
C. Identification by Printed Tapes

This identification includes a series of digits and letters printed on a tape.
Printing will be done along the whole length of tape :
- at minimum pitch of 300 mm (11.8110 in.) plus or minus 50 mm (1.9685 in.) when printing is visible through the external sheath.
- at maximum pitch of 75 mm (2.9527 in.) plus or minus 25 mm (0.9842 in.) in the other cases.
Printing must be dark-colored.
For single cable, tapes are inserted during the manufacturing phase between the core and the insulation sheath or between the external sheath and the insulating
sheath.
For multicore cable, twisted or not, tapes are inserted between the external sheath and the conductors.
The tape and printing must resist the maximum operating temperature of wires.
D. Application of Identification
(1) United States (US) wire types :
(a) Single-core cables :
Printing on external sheath for gauge 6 to 26.
Colored thread for gauge 0000 and 4.
(b) Twisted multi-core cables :
- Printing of composition element reference (e.g. : AKA-FF-G-20).
- Printing of assembly reference on blue-colored wire (e.g. : QD-FF-G-20).
(c) Shielded single-core cables :
- Printing of composition element reference on the element.
- Printing of the assembly reference on the external sheath.
(d) Shielded multi-core cables :
- Colored threads under the sheath.
- Printing of composition element reference on the blue-colored wire (e.g. : AKA-FA-G-20).
- Printed tape positioned under the external sheath.
- Printing of assembly reference on the external sheath.
- Printing of the assembly reference on the blue-colored wire (e.g. : TJB-EF-R-24).
- Printing of the element reference on each element (e.g. : AKB-FF-R-20).
(2) Metric (M) cable types :
(a) Single-core cables :
Printing on the external sheath.
(b) Twisted multi-core cables :
Printing of composition element reference and its color on each element (e.g. : CF20X-FA-A).
Element color as per para. 6.

(c) Shielded single-core cables :

- Printing of element reference on the element.
Mandatory printing of the assembly reference on external sheath.
- For laser printed cable, marking only on the external sheath.
Marking on the element is optional.
(d) Shielded multi-core cables :
- Printing of element reference on each element.
Optional printing of the assembly reference on the external sheath except indications on specific sheets. Each marking is linked by a dashed line.
- For laser printed cable, marking only of the external sheath.
Marking on the element is optional.
Element color as per para. 6.
(3) Coaxial Cables
Printing on external sleeve must be white, green or black.
- SOLUTION 1 :
Example 1 (up to 1986) :
WD AA F A
| | | |
| | | ----- Manufacturer code (Ref. table 2)
Wire Type code | | |
| ----------- Country code (Ref. table 2)
------------------ Manufacturing year code (Ref. table 3)
Example 2 (From 1987 to 1990) :
WD AB FR A
| | | |
| | | ----- Manufacturer code (Ref. table 2)
Wire Type code | | |
| ----------- Country code (Ref. table 2)
------------------ Manufacturing year code (Ref. table 3)
Example 3 (From 1991) :
WD FR A 91
| | | |
| | | ----- Manufacturing year code (Ref. table 3)
Wire type code | | |
| ----------- Manufacturer code (Ref. table 2)
------------------ Country code (Ref. table 2)
- SOLUTION 2 :
MIL Marking code :
e.g. : RG400/U, manufacturing year code, country or manufacturer.
7. TABLE 7 - Single-Core Cable - Insulation Color Code

A. As per MIL.STD.681B
NOTE: MIL.STD.681B standard includes E026X single-core cables.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| COLOR | INSULATION COLOR |
| CODE | |
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| 0 | Black |
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| 1 | Brown |
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| 2 | Red (as per FEDERAL STANDARD 595a Ref. 31302) |
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| 3 | Orange (as per FEDERAL STANDARD 595a Ref. 22510) |
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| 4 | Yellow (as per FEDERAL STANDARD 595a Ref. 23655) |
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| | Light green | Reserved for gauge 22 |
| | | (as per FEDERAL STANDARD 595a |
| | | Ref. 24585, 24664, 24670, 24672) |
| 5 |----------------|------------------------------------------------|
| | Dark green | For other gauges and sheath |
| | |(equivalent to FEDERAL STANDARD 595a Ref. 34108)|
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| 6 | Light blue (as per FEDERAL STANDARD 595a Ref. 35488) |
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| 7 | Violet |
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| 8 | Grey |
|-----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------|
| 9 | White |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. As per EN (Only for Single-Core Cables)
---------------------------- ----------------------------
| COLOR | INSULATION | | COLOR | INSULATION |
| CODE | COLOR | | CODE | COLOR |
|-----------|--------------| |-----------|--------------|
| A | Red | | H | Orange |
|-----------|--------------| |-----------|--------------|
| B | Blue | | J | Purple |

|-----------|--------------| |-----------|--------------|
| C | Yellow | | K | Violet ** |
|-----------|--------------| |-----------|--------------|
| D | Green | | L | Light Red ** |
|-----------|--------------| |-----------|--------------|
| E | White | | P | * |
|-----------|--------------| |-----------|--------------|
| F | Black | | Q | * |
|-----------|--------------| |-----------|--------------|
| G | Brown | | R | * |
---------------------------- |---------------------------
| S | * |
----------------------------
** The color can be different depending of the wire type.
NOTE: M, N, T, U, V and W codes not yet allocated.
* For these codes the color depends on the cable size code :
-------------------------------------------------------------------
| CABLE | COLOR CODE |
| SIZE |-------------------------------------------------------|
| CODE | P | Q | R | S |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 001 | White | Pink | White | Light green |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 002 | White | White | Light blue | White |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 004 | Light green | Light green | White | Light green |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 006 | White | Pink | Light green | White |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 010 | White | White | White | White |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 012 | White | Light green | Light blue | White |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 020 | White | Pink | White | White |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 030 | White | White | White | White |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 050 | White | Light green | White | White |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 051 | White | Light green | White | White |

|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
| 090 | White | - | White | White |
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
|---------|-------------|-------------|-------------|-------------|
-------------------------------------------------------------------
8. TABLE 8 - Multi-Cores Cables - Insulation Color Code (only for EN P/Ns)
The tables that follow give the insulation color code for the cables and the insulation color for the core(s) in relation to the number of cores in the cable.
To find the insulation color code of a cable :
- Refer to the insulation color code allocation table to find the possible insulation color codes depending on the EN P/N.
- Find the color code depending on the number and the color of the cores in the cable.
A. Insulation Color Code Allocation Table and Insulation Color Code A
(Ref. Fig. 001)
B. Insulation Color Code B or C
(Ref. Fig. 002)
C. Insulation Color Code D or Q
(Ref. Fig. 003)
D. Insulation Color Code F, G or P
(Ref. Fig. 004)
E. Insulation Color Code H, J or R
(Ref. Fig. 005)
F. Insulation Color Code For EN2346 and EN4608 PN/s
(Ref. Fig. 006)
9. TABLE 9 - Number of cores (only for ABS and EN P/Ns)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| LETTER CODE | A | B | C | D | E | F | G | H | J | K |
|-------- -----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-------|
| NUMBER OF | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10* |
| CORES | | | | | | | | | |or 11**|
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* For EN P/Ns
** For ABS P/Ns

Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Wires Identification by the Manufacturer - Insulation Color Code Table 8 - Insulation Color Code Allocation Table and Insulation Color
Code A
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Wires Identification by the Manufacturer - Insulation Color Code Table 8 - Code B and C (for EN P/Ns)
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Wires Identification by the Manufacturer - Insulation Color Code Table 8 - Code D and Q (for EN P/Ns)
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Wires Identification by the Manufacturer - Insulation Color Code Table 8 - Code F, G or P (for EN P/Ns)
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Wires Identification by the Manufacturer - Insulation Color Code Table 8 - Code H, J or R (for EN P/Ns)
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Wires Identification by the Manufacturer - Insulation Color Code Table 8 - Code For EN2346 and EN4608 P/Ns
WIRE FUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
WIRE FUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the identification and marking rules applicable to electrical cables.
A cable is identified by its:
- Type, type code and gauge (Ref. 20-32-21).
- Color code.
- Cable number.
2. Cable Color Code
The normal color of a single core cable will not be given.
The cable color codes are used if necessary to more accurately identify the cables. Most of the time, color codes are used for multicore cables.
A Amber
B Blue
BK Black
BR Brown
C Clear
G Green
GY Grey
O Orange
P Purple
PK Pink

R Red
V Violet
W White
Y Yellow
NOTE: The code N is obsolete for cables. When you see this on a cable it is the some as BK.
3. Cable Number
All cables connected on the aircraft must be identified. It is the functional identification of the cable.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
NOTE: Cables shorter than

75 mm (2.9527 in.) screens, bonding cables shorter than 300 mm (11.8110 in.) and shunts need no identification.
A. Cable Identification Rules

A numeric reference system is used for cable identification.
A cable is identified by two groups of four figures with a space between them. The first four figures are the ATA 100 circuit reference followed by as many as four
figures that give the number of the cable in the circuit.
NOTE: If necessary, one more figure is added after these two groups to identify the color of the cable.
If necessary, one more figure is added (letter "S") to identify the safety cable.
NOTE: Some cables have the FIN 0000-000X. These cables do not have an electrical function. They are used to increase the diameter of the harness to which
they belong.

20-32-23 - HARNESS FUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
2314 - 9904 R
2792 - 0162 B S
---- ---- - -
| | | |
| | | ----- S = safety cable code (if necessary)
| | |
| | -------- Wire color code (if necessary)
| |
| -------------- No. of the cable in the circuit
|
--------------------- No. of the circuit defined by ATA Spec 100
B. Cable Marking
Cable marking procedures depend on the category of the cables.
There are three main categories of cable:
- Printable cables.
- Non-printable cables.
- Cables without marking.
(1) Printable cables
(Ref. Fig. 002)
NOTE: We recommend to print cables with a length from

75 mm (2.9527 in.) to 150 mm (5.9055 in.) but identification with one identification sleeve is permitted.
(a) Definition
Printable cables are identified by direct marking of the identification on the insulation, at regular intervals.
This category mainly concerns:
- 26 to 6 gauge cables longer than
75 mm (2.9527 in.) (aircraft harnesses or large VU harnesses).
(b) Operation
- For single-core cables, hot stamp marking or laser marking will be used depending on the coating code.
- For shielded cables, laser marking will be used.
Printing will be performed on the whole length of the cable.
- For cables shorter than
2000 mm (78.7402 in.) : at a maximum pitch of 75 mm (2.9527 in.) .
- For cables longer than
2000 mm (78.7402 in.) :
- at a maximum pitch of 75 mm (2.9527 in.) along a length of 1 m from each end.
- at a maximum pitch of 380 mm (14.9606 in.) on the center portion of the cable.
(c) Special cases
- If a modification calls for the shortening of a cable in the zone of the
75 mm (2.9527 in.) pitch ( 1000 mm (39.3701 in.) ) from each end, you will install a cable identification sleeve at the
shortened end.
- Cables from one partner connected by a different partner:
- With the usual identification, these cables will also have a sleeve that shows the terminal and the electrical
identifier of the item to be connected. The terminal identifier is put on the identification placard of the item to be
connected. This rule is applicable to cables from one partner connected to the connecting items of a different
partner.
- Cables routed to standardized electrical items, not installed in VUs, must show the identifier of the terminal (on
NSA937201) to which they are connected.
-
You can put markings on some optical cables (e.g. ABS0963-003) with UV laser but you cannot use hot stamping.
(2) Non-printable cables or cables with Identification Sleeves

(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(a) Definition
Non-printable cables are cables that cannot have direct marking due to their physical structure or whose insulation can
be deteriorated by marking (e.g. coaxial cables). These cables must be identified by sleeves.
This category includes:
-

Large gauge cables (gauge 14 and below), (except the cables printed by CO2 laser mentioned previously).
-
Draw and spare cables.
- Usual medium gauge cables, length less than
2500 mm (98.4252 in.) , located inside electronics racks.
- All cables printable by hot stamping and connected to at least one end termination (VN, VG, VC) located in a
Skydrol zone (ref. Specific Areas chapters).
-
Safety cables identified by the letter S.
-
Optical cables (depending on the code type).
-
Coaxial cables.
NOTE: We recommend to print cables with a length from

75 mm (2.9527 in.) to 150 mm (5.9055 in.) but identification with one identification sleeve is permitted.
NOTE: Cables with a length of more than

150 mm (5.9055 in.) must be identified with one sleeve at each end.
NOTE: You must install identification sleeves on branches and junctions (only if branch and junction lengths are more
than
1 m (3.28 ft.) ).
NOTE: If the harness has no branches, you must attach a VB marking to the harness at intervals of
2 m (6.56 ft.) . This is not applicable if the harness is supplied in raceways or if other interval values are specified
in the design document.
(b) Operation
Cables are identified with sleeves NSA937201.
-------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | SLEEVE TYPE | OPERATING TEMP |
|---------------|----------------------|--------------------|
| | | HIGH TEMP. |
| MA | NOT RETRACTABLE | -55 to 150 deg.C |
| | | -67 to 302 deg.F |
|---------------|----------------------|--------------------|
| | | HIGH TEMP. |
| MD, MK, ML | HEAT RETRACTABLE | -55 to 200 deg.C |
| | | -67 to 392 deg.F |
|---------------|----------------------|--------------------|
| ME, MG, MR, | | LOW TEMP. |
| MT, MH | HEAT RETRACTABLE | -55 to 135 deg.C |
| | | -67 to 275 deg.F |
-------------------------------------------------------------
The sleeves will be adapted to the cable gauge and installed as close as possible to the terminations ( 150 mm (5.9055
in.) max.).
These sleeves can be printed to show the cable identification characters.
Markings must be clearly legible, abrasion-proof and resistant to aircraft liquids (synthetic hydraulic fluid, kerosene...)
The character height is 3.2 mm (0.1259 in.) minimum.
Sleeves installed on cables of a length of less than or equal to 2500 mm (98.4252 in.) in electrical power centers, pylons,
SWAMP areas and SKYDROL areas will be shrunk.
The sleeves are white, printed in black except for:
- Safety cables (code S) that have pink sleeves, printed in black.
- Aluminum cables that have grey sleeves printed in black for identification.
For EFCS, when printing is not possible, two sleeves must be used:
- One white sleeve (or grey for aluminum cable) with black printing for cable identification.
- One pink sleeve with black printing for FIN on the harness.
NOTE: When a safety cable is in aluminum, the sleeve must be pink and printed in black.
1 Single-core cables
(Ref. Fig. 003)
- These cables are identified with sleeves NSA 937201 ME.
-
Sleeve length must be between

25 mm (0.9842 in.) and 35 mm (1.3779 in.) .

2 Sheathed multi-core cables (cores of different colors)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
a The multi-core cable and the cores have different identification markings (only A300 / A300-600 / A310).
The cable will have one (or several) sleeve at each end with the information below:
- the identification of each cable with its color code,
- the identification of the assembly (the multi-core cable).
b The multi-core cable and the cores have the same identification marking (A320 to A380 family).
The color code is used to connect the cables (cables of the same color).
3 Sheathed multi-core cables (cores of same color)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(only A300 / A300-600 / A310)
Each cable has an identification number.
If the cable is shielded, the shield will also have an identification sleeve.
4 Twisted cables without sheath
(Ref. Fig. 003)
a Cables of same color:
The identification will be printed on a sleeve at the ends of each cable.
b Cables of different colors:
Each cable has a different identification.
The color code is a letter.
To do the identification, you can use:
- one single sleeve,
- several sleeves (one for each cable) if the single sleeve cannot be less than
150 mm (5.9055 in.) from the termination equipment.
NOTE: If a twisted cable is partially untwisted over a length >=

200 mm (7.8740 in.) , you must install an additional identification sleeve on each individual cable.
c Phase identification special case

(Ref. Fig. 005)
When the three-core cables for phases have cores of the same color, use red, yellow and blue sleeves to
identify phases A, B and C respectively.
The sleeve will be installed at the rear of the terminal crimping zone with the pliers (speculum) STERLING KKD
or KG type.
Sleeve P/N: NSA 937201 MA... (the sleeve dia. will match the wire dia.).
When the three-core twisted cables have cores of different colors, do not use these phase identification
sleeves.
The phase identification rule is:
- Phase A : red
- Phase B : yellow
- Phase C : blue
(c) Special cases
1 Ground pick-ups on safety cables
-
Ground pick-ups on safety cables will be identified by a pink sleeve printed in black.
- If a grounding chain is made on a group of shielded safety cables, only the last ground pick-up cable will be
identified by a pink sleeve printed in black.
- When safety and normal cable pick-ups are mixed, only the last ground pick-up cable will be identified by a
pink sleeve printed in black.
2 Shielding pick-up wires
- If there is a change of FIN, the shielding pick-up wire must be printed when its length is less than
140 mm (5.5118 in.) .
- If there is no change of FIN (chain), the shielding pick-up wire will not be identified. This is applicable to all
lengths.
C. Specific Identification Marking
(Ref. Fig. 006)

NOTE: You must not shrink the sleeve NSA937201.
(1) For optical cables:

A specific label E0248 attached with NSA8420 lacing tape is used:
- at 2 m (6.56 ft.) intervals on straight line harnesses.
- adjacent to pressure seals, floors, partitions, etc. for harnesses that go through them.
- adjacent to end components (at each end of the cable).
- adjacent to optical cable exits (when the optical cable routing is in a standard harness).
NOTE: You can use sleeves to identify the optical cable, because they are easy to make. If you use a shrink sleeve, do not
shrink it after installation.
NOTE: A specific label ABS0724 or NSA931025 is installed adjacent to the optical connectors to show the special
precautions related to this type of connector.
NOTE: You must not use cable ties to attach the label. This can cause damage to the cable.
(2) For spare wire identification:

A specific sleeve NSA937201 is installed adjacent to the end components to give information.
(3) For draw wire identification:
A specific sleeve NSA937201 is installed adjacent to the end components to give information.
(4) For coaxial cables:
(Ref. Fig. 006)
You must add a label ABS5342-01 at each end of the coaxial cable to give enough space for specific connection (e.g. spring
connectors etc.)
This label must not have a black line and must have the manual indication "NO TYING BEYOND THIS POINT".
You must install it a maximum of 250 mm (9.8425 in.) from the rear of the coaxial contact.
(5) For coaxial cable repair ends:
NOTE: For labels and sleeves, all colors are permitted except pink and red.
The number of repairs on a coaxial cable is identified adjacent to the end component with:
- E0248 label or equivalent,
- E0683 self-adhesive label or equivalent.
If the above labels are not available, you can use NSA937201 sleeve or equivalent (not shrunk).
(6) Cables without markings
- Very short cables shorter than
75 mm (2.9527 in.) and ground pick-up cables (ferrule-to- ferrule or to connector) are not identified.
- Cables used for circuit breaker monitoring (only for A320 program),
- Monitoring cables between two adjacent "in-line" circuit breakers (only for A330, A340 and A380),
- Cables in small VUs (BF type - flexible cables) are not printable.
- Bonding cables shorter than
300 mm (11.8110 in.) .
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Cable Functional Identification - Cables Identification
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Cable Functional Identification - Example for Printable Cables
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Cable Functional Identification - Example for Non-Printable Cables
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Cable Functional Identification - Example for Non-Printable Cables
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Cable Functional Identification - Identification of 3 Phases Cable with Same Color
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Cable Functional Identification - Specific Identification Marking
HARNESS FUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)

HARNESS FUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the identification and marking rules applicable to electrical harnesses.
A. Definition
(1) Harness

Harness identification
A harness is a group of cables attached together.

All cables are identified (Ref. chapter 20-32-22).
A vendor or the airframe manufacturer can supply some harnesses (for example in some radio or fuel
systems). Such harnesses will have a FIN and will be identified as all other components.
If supplied by a vendor (code YY), it will have a part number.
If made by the airframe manufacturer, it will have a drawing number.
Only the graphic symbol on the wiring diagram will identify the difference between two such cases.
(2) Wiring segregations or routes
For safety and to prevent possible interference, electrical harnesses are routed in relation to their
type and function in a number of physically isolated routes. These wiring segregations or routes are
divided into categories related to the aircraft type.
A 2-digit reference is used to identify these categories (Ref. chapter 20-33-20).
2. Harness identification
A. Principle
Flags and labels on harnesses give many types of data:
- Positioning data such as the frame:
These positioning flags give harness pick-up points for correct installation of the harness on the
aircraft.
- Functional data (routes, sub-routes):
These functional identification labels must show the routes in the harness and be in a position to
prevent all risks of errors caused by in-service retrofit work.
- Functional Item Number (FIN) identification at harness end:
You must identify harness ends with E0248A labels (4 holes) where the identification of the end is
shown.
For typical harnesses, these labels are white with black printing and are attached with two cable ties
NSA935401.
NOTE: In all cases, you must attach labels with the same tying device used for harness tying.
NOTE: In severe environment areas, you must use and attach labels E0248A (6 holes) with three cable
ties NSA935401.
- They are usually put in areas of high wiring density:

At each harness end, at maximum intervals of:
- 4 m (13.12 ft.) , in the same area (frame or rib) (for A318/A319/A320/A321 and A330/A340).
- 2 m (6.56 ft.) (for A400M and A380).
For harnesses with a diameter of less than 5 mm (0.1968 in.) , you must replace labels E0248 with
sleeves NSA937201.
For pylon harnesses, you must use white shrunk sleeve NSA937201 or white E0248A (6 holes).
The identification includes the FIN of the termination with, in some cases, the abbreviated functional
designation. These markers are found 130 mm (5.1181 in.) maximum from the end.
A380 wing route identification must be at each harness end and at intervals of 2 meters so that you
can see the harness identification.
B. General Harness Marking
(1) Identification of harness characteristics
This harness identification prevents the risk of harness inversion.
The labels E0248 used are white.
This identification type on harnesses must give the data that follows:
(Ref. Fig. 001)

(a) For a harness which is a constituent assembly:

- Part number of the harness (e.g. L9299812500000)
- Constituent assembly code (e.g. LB682)
- Harness number (e.g. 8125VB)
- Serial number (e.g. SER PL1001).
(b) For a harness which is a not constituent assembly:
- Part number of the harness (e.g. L9299812500000)
- Harness number (e.g. 8125VB)
- Serial number (e.g. SER PL1001).
(2) VB marking
(Ref. Fig. 002)
If the harness has no branches, you must attach a VB marking to the harness at intervals of 2 m
(6.56 ft.) . This is not applicable if the harness is supplied in a raceway and if other interval values are
specified in the design document.
Labels are not necessary on branches shorter than 1 m (3.28 ft.) .
(3) Harness end identification
(Ref. Fig. 002)
Cables that stop at the same connecting component are identified by a label E0248 (4 holes).
The identification can show the electrical identifier of the component written on one or two lines
centered:
- horizontally in relation to the vertical sides of the placard,
- vertically in relation to the placard attachment holes.
(Ref. Electrical Items Functional Identification chapter: 20-32-51)
C. Positioning Flags and Route Identification Labels - Marking
(1) For A300, A300/600 and A310 only:
Positioning flags are not used in this aircraft family.
(2) For A318, A319, A320 and A321 only:
(Ref. Fig. 003)
This positioning and route identification is a reference given on a maximum of 3 lines, parallel to the
harness axis:
- First line: Zone or geographical location of the harness (19 characters maximum) (optional).
- Second or third line: Routes and sub-routes (19 characters maximum in each line).
The character height is 4.5 mm (0.1771 in.) .
Example: C10/PL
1S/1SF/1SL
NOTE: Positioning flags must stay in position on the aircraft and not be moved from their initial
position.
NOTE: Labels for route identification can be bonded on the structure (frame).
(3) For A330, A340, A380, A400M and A350 only:

(Ref. Fig. 004)
Positioning flags and route identification labels are used together. There must be a distance of 40 mm
(1.5748 in.) between the two labels.
Harness identification is a reference given with:
- Positioning flag: shows the axis of the structural item used as a reference.
- Identification label: Routes and sub-routes.
Examples: F35 (positioning label)
1S/1SF/1S1 (identification label)

NOTE: Positioning flags must stay in position on the aircraft and not be moved from their initial
position.
D. Label Type and Installation Procedure
NOTE: The reference number must be written permanently.
(1) For A318, A319, A320 and A321 only

(Ref. Fig. 003)
Cable harnesses are identified with adhesive label E0683 or label E0248.
(a) Standard harnesses
The identification marking is made with E0683 labels.
This type of marking is yellow, self-adhesive and stamped in black.
The reference will be shown on the label as many times as possible in relation to the loom
diameter (a minimum of two times).
The positioning of the label on the harness is related to the wiring direction.
The positioning of the marking must be as shown in the drawings.
NOTE: When the harness has protective sleeves longer than

500 mm (19.6850 in.) , the identification marking must be label E0248 put on the
protective sleeve ends, 10 mm (0.3937 in.) from the clamps.
(b) Sheathed pylon harnesses

The identification marking is label E0248-6H attached to the harness with lacing tape NSA8420
or sleeve NSA937201.
This type of marking is yellow and stamped in black.
(2) For A318, A319, A320, A321, A330, A340, A350, A380 and A400M only
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
Cable harnesses are identified by identification label E0248-6H and positioning flag ASNA3565 or
ABS5342-02.
-
ASNA3565 must be installed on A318/A319/A320/A321, A330 and A340.
- ABS5342A-02 must be installed on A340-500/600, A350, A380 and A400M.
Flag ASNA3565 or ABS5342-02 is used to show the correct position of the harness on the
structure. This flag is blue with a straight black line 1 mm (0.0393 in.) thick and gives the
mechanical position reference.
(Ref. Fig. 006)
-
For G routes, you must install the labels on each cable.
- For harnesses protected with convoluted conduit (e.g. ABS0887 or NSA935805) you must install
the flag on the harness (in harness area not protected with conduit) or on the conduit (if
protection is installed on all the length of the harness).
- An identification label must be installed adjacent to a positioning flag:
50 mm (1.9685 in.) maximum and 30 mm (1.1811 in.) minimum from the positioning flag.
- The positioning flag must be installed so that the black line is along the axis of the structural item
used as a reference.
- When they are part of or attached in a harness, you must identify non-essential or civil routes by
yellow ABS5342-01 tape (without black line) installed at maximum intervals of
1 m (3.28 ft.) on straight parts of the harness. The number of the route + (non essential or civil)
must be written on the tape.
- For A350 and A380 only, you must identify essential (ESS) and non-essential (N ESS) routes
with yellow E0248-6H labels or equivalent installed at

2 m (6.56 ft.) intervals.

- For A400M only, you must identify "mission or civil" routes with yellow E0248-6H labels or
equivalent.
(a) Installation Procedure
1 For general process:
(Ref. Fig. 006)
- 1 - Cut a piece of the tape to a length related to the diameter of the cables.
- 2 - Align the axis of the tape with the reference axis. Wind the tape around a few
cables.
- 3 - Wind the tape two times around all the cables.
- 4 - If the diameter of the harness is <
10 mm (0.3937 in.) , fold the tape to make a flag.
- 5 - If the diameter of the harness is > or =
10 mm (0.3937 in.) , wind the tape but do not make a flag.
- 6 and 7 - Identify the frame with a marker pen
0.4 mm (0.0157 in.) (STABILO 841 or equivalent.
2 For the installation of flags on optical cables, you must obey the special procedure.
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(3) On dynamic harnesses (between a mobile and fixed part)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
For a harness at a hinge, a minimum length is necessary to prevent tears or breaks of the harness.
To make sure you have a correct installation of the harness, you must install ASNA5107 flags along
the reference axes of the first attachment items on the two sides of the hinge. These positions must
be shown in the harness installation drawings. In this case, flag ASNA5107 is used for positioning,
identification and to increase the mechanical protection of the harness below the clamp.
NOTE: If, adjacent to the last clamp, the last identification is with a white label E0248, label
ASNA5107 is only used to increase the mechanical protection of the harness below the
clamp and the positioning flag.
(4) Identification on split conduits

(Ref. Fig. 008)
You must install positioning flags ABS5342, if possible, on wires without protective hose or braid. For
split conduits EN6049-006/007, you can install the flag below the conduit but you must make sure
that the flag can be seen externally.
(5) Route identification for spare conduits
(Ref. Fig. 008)
The route identification for spare conduits must be with labels E0248 with black markings on a yellow
background. They are attached with cable ties NSA935401 or lacing tape NSA8420.
3. Specific Harness Marking
NOTE: You must not shrink sleeve NSA937201.
A. Identification on the structure at pressure seal or connector flange area

(Ref. Fig. 002)
- You must install an adhesive label as near as possible to the pressure seal or connector flange on
the panel or structure. You must make sure that you can clearly see this label.
- Connector flanges installed in areas that you can see from the front and rear must have markings
only on the front panel or structure.
- Connector flanges that you cannot see from the rear must have markings on two sides of the panel
or structure.

-
Pressure seals must have markings on two sides of the panel or structure.
B. For Q routes
(Ref. Fig. 008)
A special label ABS1475 is added. It is a pre-printed E0248 type label.
- The text "CAUTION FUEL TANK HARNESS ONLY" is written in red on a white background.
- You must attach this label with lacing tape NSA8420 or cable tie NSA935401.
You must tie-install this label:
- at intervals of
1.2 m (3.93 ft.) (maximum pitch) on straight line harnesses
- adjacent to pressure seals, floors, partitions, etc. for harnesses that go through them
- adjacent to end components
- not applicable in fuel tanks.
C. For Electrical Flight Control System (EFCS)
- FIN labels are pink with black printing. They are attached with lacing tape NSA8420 or cable tie
NSA935401.
- For EFCS harnesses without other harnesses in their routing, cable ties or lacing tape can be used
to attach identification labels.
- For EFCS harnesses with other harnesses, you must use lacing tape NSA8420 to prevent damage
to adjacent harnesses caused by the heads of cable ties.
D. For optical harnesses (one or more cables):
You must use a specific identification with label E0248 attached with lacing tape NSA8420:
- at intervals of 2 m (6.56 ft.) on straight line harnesses
- adjacent to pressure seals, floors, partitions, etc. for harnesses that go through
- adjacent to end components
- adjacent to optical cable exits (when the optical cable is routed in a standard harness).
NOTE: As an alternative, you can use a sleeve (e.g. NSA937201ME) but you must not shrink it.
NOTE: A special label ABS0724 or NSA931025 is installed adjacent to the optical connectors to show
special precautions related to this type of connector.

20-32-50 - ELECTRICAL ITEMS IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
E. For high voltage

(Ref. Fig. 009)
Harnesses that contain routes X (or some routes G) with 230 V (or 400 V) voltage must be identified with black text on a white label E0248.
The label that shows the voltage is installed:
- At intervals of
2 m (6.56 ft.) (maximum pitch) on straight line harnesses,
- Adjacent to pressure seals, floors, partitions etc. for harnesses that go through them,
- Adjacent to end components.
F. For tempest black A harness (for A400M only)

(Ref. Fig. 009)
A specific label E0248 is installed:
- At intervals of
2 m (6.56 ft.) (maximum pitch) on straight line harnesses,
- Close to the pressure seal, floor, partition etc. for through-harnesses,
- Close to the end components,
- Close to the cable exit (when the optical cable routing is in a standard harness).
The label must be attached by the same tying device that was used for bundle tying.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Harness Functional Identification - Example of Identification on Harness
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Harness Functional Identification - Example of Marking on Harnesses
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Harness Functional Identification - Identification with E0683 Description and Installation (for A318/A319/A320/A321 only)
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Harness Functional Identification - Positioning and Identification with E0248 Description and Installation (for
A318/319/320/321,A330/340/380/350 and A400M)
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Harness Functional Identification - Example of Harness Identification
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Harness Functional Identification - Flag Installation on Standard Cables
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Harness Functional Identification - Flag Installation on Optical Cables
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Harness Functional Identification - Identification/Positioning
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Harness Functional Identification - Example of Harness Identification
ELECTRICAL ITEMS IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
ELECTRICAL ITEMS IDENTIFICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapter that follows gives the general design requirements related to the electrical item identification on aircraft.
A. Electrical Item Functional Identification (Ref. 20-32-51)
ELECTRICAL ITEMS FUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
ELECTRICAL ITEMS FUNCTIONAL IDENTIFICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the identification and marking rules applicable to the standard electrical items.
NOTE: Boxes, panels or equipment that contain parts with voltages of more than 42 V which are liable to expose maintenance personnel to hazardous
operations must have a label reading: "CAUTION HIGH VOLTAGE INSIDE". This label (ABS0724 for example) must have
6 mm (0.2362 in.) white letters on a red background.

2. Electrical Items Functional-Identification Definition

A. Functional Item Numbers (FIN)
The electrical equipment items on the aircraft are identified by a unique identifier, designated Functional Item Number. (FIN)
The composition of the FIN differs between the various AIRBUS families:
(1) For WB, SA and LR programs only:
- Example for WB and SA programs:
301 RH 1 A 1
| | | | |
| | | | -- Supplementary part identification
| | | | (backshell, housing, etc.)
| | | ----- Connector identification (up to three letters)
| | -------- Suffix (up to three numbers)
| ----------- Circuit letter code
---------------- Sequence number
- Example for LR program:
1115 VN 412
| | |
| | -------- Suffix (up to three numbers)
| ------------ Circuit letter code
------------------ Sequence number
(a) The composition of the FIN is:
Example: 301RH1A1
- A two-letter code that shows to which system or circuit the equipment belongs or that shows, for all components not specifically
related to a circuit, a fictitious circuit (letter V) and the type of component.
-
Suffixes which give the unique identification for individual items of equipment.
-
Connector identification when it is a part of an item and the same FIN number as this item.
-
Supplementary part identification (backshell, housing, etc.) when this part of an item has the same FIN number as this item.
NOTE: Identical components which have the same function in the same circuit are differentiated by a suffix number.
The general rule is that an even suffix identifies a component on the right-hand side and an odd suffix identifies a component on
the left-hand side.
Example: 14CA1
(2) For A380 only:

(a) For circuits VC, VD, VG, VN, VP, VS and VT, the FIN format consists of 9 digits:
Example: 2512VN024
- The first digit indicates the installation area.
- The 2nd, 3rd and 4th digits indicate the partner allocation number.
- The two-letter code indicates the fictitious circuit (V) and the type of component (N).
- The last three numbers indicate the detailed location or multiple elements of the component.
(b) For circuits VB, VE and VX, the FIN format consists of 7 to 9 digits:
Example: nnnnVBnnn
- The 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th numerical digits indicate the partner allocation number.
- The two-letter code indicates the fictitious circuit (V) and the type of component.
- The last three numbers indicate the multiple elements of the component. (It is possible to use only one number)
(c) For circuit VU, the FIN format consists of 7 to 9 digits:
Example: 1115VU1
- The 1st and 2nd numerical digits indicate the partner allocation number.
- The 3rd and 4th numerical digits (00) indicate a main assembly containing sub-assemblies.
- For the 4th digit:
An odd number indicates the left side. (Except 5)
An even number indicates the right side.
Number "5" indicates a panel located on the aircraft centerline.
- The two-letter code indicates the fictitious circuit (V) and the type of component (U).
- The last three numbers indicate the multiple elements of the component. (It is possible to use only one number)
B. Fictitious Circuit (letter V)
Fictitious circuits (letter V) are allocated to types of components that cannot be identified as part of a specific system circuit.
(1) The codes of these fictitious circuits are:
VB = Cable bundle/harness
VC = Connector (appended letter A, B, etc. is added to identify the free connector: E.g. 1204VC A)
NOTE: For A380, there is no space or dash before the appended letter.
VD = Module diode unit

VE*= Panel. (commercial) (not used for WB and SA programs)

VG = Screwed ground terminal block

VI = Connector plate/mount
VN = Ground point
VP = Pressure seal
VR = Resistance
VS = Splice
VT = Terminal block
VU*= Panel
VX*= Printed circuit board assembly
VZ*= Spare cable
* These fictitious components are not given in the ESPM.
(2) Examples:
Components which are directly associated with a geographical block or which have interfaces with several circuits.
All these fictitious components are identified in the equipment list of their fictitious circuit.
There are different kinds of fictitious-circuit electrical components:
- Components covered by a standard part number
e.g.: VS (splice), VP (pressure seals), VC (connector), etc.
- Components designed to support and assemble electrical items for a given function, usually integrating several items of equipment and/or
cables of different circuits. These components are covered by an aircraft drawing number.
e.g.: VB (cable bundle), VX (printed electronic circuit board)
C. Electrical Flight Control System (EFCS)
The EFCS harnesses have specific connectors (VC).
These connectors make the interface between:
- The different EFCS harnesses.
- The EFCS harnesses and equipment.
- The EFCS harnesses and the different VU panels to which they are connected.
The EFCS harnesses and equipment are clearly identified by a pink or red mark.
Identification of each item is made by a permanent label that shows the functional item number. (FIN)
3. Electrical Items Functional-Identification Marking
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
The ways to mark the items depend on the item categories and location.
There are three ways to mark:
- Self-adhesive label (ABS0724, E0470, E0683 or NSA931025).
- Identification Sleeve (E0646, NSA937201 or NSA937203).
The functional identification of equipment may be given on white sleeves when it is difficult to install labels near the equipment.
These sleeves must be positioned immediately after the identification of the connector, or include this identification.
Functional identification sleeves must be fitted where equipment is removable from its front face.
- Identification label (ABS1475 or E0248) with NSA935401 (TY-RAP type).
NOTE: In all cases, you must attach labels with the same tying device used for harness tying.
NOTE: It is not permitted to use metallic labels in the boxes and on panels that contain electrical items.
NOTE: It is not permitted to use metallic labels on CFRP structure.
NOTE: If it is not easy to read the label during the maintenance operation, or in case of ambiguity, a second label that shows the type of equipment as
indicated on the wiring diagram will also be added to the loom.
The ways to mark must be designed taking into account temperature ranges and environmental constraints.
- When a functional limitation is specified for an equipment, a white label NSA931025 or ABS0724 printed in black must be installed over the
identification label of the equipment. It must not be possible to see the functional marking below these labels.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
A. Item Identification on Panels and Racks
(1) Marking type
(a) On panels or racks, the functional identification marking is:
In pressurized area:
- With ABS0724 or E0470 for normal system.
- With PINK ABS0724 or PINK E0470 for EFCS system.
In non-pressurized area:
- With NSA931025 for normal system.
- With PINK NSA931025 for EFCS system.
NOTE: In non-pressurized area, it is necessary to bond label with material number 09-008C and to apply varnish material number 07-018
to the label.

(b) On circuit breaker panels, use labels:

- For areas free of hydraulic fluid, in accordance with NSA931025 Type 01,
- For areas in which hydraulic fluid (e.g.: Skydrol or Hyjet IV) is found, in accordance with NSA931025 Type 02.
(2) Identification of unplugged ventilation holes
An indelible and visible marking must identify the ventilation holes, located at the bottom of equipment racks (ARINC 600).The identification rule
is applicable on all items fitted with ventilation holes (e.g ventilation boxes).
This marking can be made manually by a line, a band or an other marking, which remains visible when the support in installed on the shelf.
(3) Operation
The labels are positioned above or to the left of items, and in exceptional conditions (when it is not possible to use the above or left hand
positions) below and to the right of items.
They are always visible when items are in place.
They are printed in white on black background or black on white background.
(a) Pressure seals (VP)
A self-adhesive label is bonded to the support on each side of the pressure seal.
(b) Splices and Diodes
No self-adhesive label is necessary.
(c) Ground modules (VG) and ground points (VN)
Bond a self-adhesive label to the support near the ground module or point.
(d) Stud-type or modular terminal blocks (VT)

Electrical Items Functional-Identification Marking
The terminal blocks are identified by a label fixed to the support, near the rail.
(e) Miscellaneous equipment
On circuit breakers or coded equipment items directly connected on aircraft, etc. install a self-
adhesive label on the support near the equipment.
NOTE: Relays with the spike suppression function must be identified with an additional blue
mark on the structure adjacent to the FIN label.
(f) Relays
1 On A380:
- Use identification label ABS0724-006A013 for Normal relays on Normal system. (Label
has white background with black letters)
- Use identification label ABS0724-006P013 for Normal relays on EFCS system. (Label
has pink background with black letters)
- Use identification label ABS0724-006B013 for spike suppression relay on Normal
system. (Label has blue background with black letters)
- Use identification label ABS0724-006 for spike suppression relay on EFCS system.
(Label has blue and pink background with black letters)
(g) Specific Items
All specific EFCS equipment items (connectors, terminal blocks, relays) are identified clearly and
permanently with a pink or red adhesive label (E0248) bonded to the structure near each item.
B. Item Identification on Cable Bundles
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(1) Marking type
Bundles of items are identified:
- For cables subjected to temperatures above
150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) , with E0248 labels and NSA8420-7 lacing tape.
- For wiring subjected to temperatures above
260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F) , with NSA937201 sleeves.
NOTE: The labels must be attached by a minimum of two harness tying devices.
This identification sleeve or label has:

- In all cases, the FIN of the item.
- When the bundle ends in a VU, the VU number.
- And if necessary, the functional designation.
- On harness with diameter less than
5 mm (0.1968 in.) , the identification label must be replaced by a sleeve NSA937201.
NOTE: In vibration areas or in Severe Weather and Moisture Prone (SWAMP) areas, you must use a
label E0248 16HP (6 holes) with three tie-wrap NSA935401.
NOTE: It is necessary to shrink the sleeves in electrical power centers or in areas that have severe
environnemental conditions.
NOTE:
Identification sleeves must be in a position as near as possible to the connection you must
identify (max. distance
100 mm (3.9370 in.) ). If necessary, you can attach these sleeves with cable ties to prevent

sliding.
NOTE: Identification sleeves can be shrunk. In this case, it must still be possible to turn, slide and
read them.
(2) Operation
These types of marking are made of plastic.
They are white for standard bundles or pink for the bundles of EFCS items, with FIN marking in black.
They are installed on the cable bundle at 130 mm (5.1181 in.) maximum from the end.
If the harness has no branch, you must attach a VB marking to the harness at intervals of 2 m (6.56
ft.) . This is not applicable if the harness is supplied in raceways and if other interval values are
specified in the design documents.
Labels are not necessary on branches shorter than 1 m (3.28 ft.) .
Their position on the bundle will make correct reading possible when the bundle terminations are
connected.
Safety cables are identified by a pink colored sleeve or with the letter "S" printed at the end of the
P/N. (E.g.: 3151-0309S)
For EFCS harness:
- If the harness is routed alone, use tie-wrap NSA935401 with labels.
- If the harness is routed with other harnesses, use lacing tape NSA8420 with labels.
(a) Movable connectors (VC-A)
The identification sleeve or placard in position on the harness:
-
Always shows the electrical identifier (Functional Item Number - FIN).
- Shows the electrical identifier (FIN) and the VU identifier when the harness is routed to a
VU.
If a sleeve (i.e. overbraiding, open sleeve or PTFE sleeve) is used on the cable, the
marking must be made on the sleeve.
(b) Rack connectors
NOTE: When segregation is required, the identification is installed on one bundle and does not
include the other routes.
Install an identification label E0248 or sleeve NSA937201 on the ARINC 600 and 404A
connectors (ABS0831, E0161, E0163, E0165, E0086, E0145, E0147, E0726 and E0729 ) or
derived connectors.
(c) Optical connectors
(Ref. Fig. 009)
- A specific label ABS0724 or NSA931025 is installed near the optical connectors to indicate
particular precautions related to this type of connector. This label must have
3.2 mm (0.1259 in.) high black characters on a white background.
NOTE: You must use lacing tape NSA8420 to attach the identification labels. The use of
NSA935401 is not permitted to prevent damage to optical fiber harnesses.
NOTE: To make installation of the identification easier, the use of a sleeve is permitted. If you
use a shrink sleeve, you must not shrink it to prevent damage.
(d) Ground modules (VG/VH) and ground points (VN)

- On the harnesses: A label E0248 or sleeve NSA937201 with the FIN. (A340 only)
- In the racks or boxes: No identification sleeve or label.
- A self-adhesive label is affixed on the structure near the module or grounding point.

- On VN for the A350, the type and system number of grounding must be shown on the label.
(e) Stud-type or modular terminal blocks (VT)
- Terminal blocks are identified by a self-adhesive label affixed to the structure near the rail.
When modular terminal blocks are attached to blankets, labels must be installed on the
terminal rail.
-
Wiring of stud-type terminal blocks (power): Install a label E0248 or sleeve NSA937201.
-
Wiring of modular terminal blocks (signal): No plate to be installed.
- The standard electrical items (e.g. resistors or diodes) mounted on a terminal block are
identified by a sleeve NSA 937201.
This sleeve (shortened to minimum length) is placed on the component tail and must not
prevent cooling.
- Each lug must be identified with its FIN number and terminal block number (VT) with a
white label E0248 or a white sleeve NSA937201.
- On harnesses, the functional item number (FIN) is not mandatory when the terminal block
(VT) is on a VU.
- For modular blocks, each module must be identified with a label NSA937901E. This
identification rule is also applicable to a single module.
(f) Splices (VS)
1 Not removable, not reducing
A group of splices (max. 4) is identified by a label E0248 or sleeve NSA937201 positioned
near the group.
NOTE: If the splice is inside a split textile conduit, the identification label E0248 must be
over the split textile conduit.
2 Diodes, resistors and removable splices

A sleeve is installed on each side of the component.
NOTE: If the splice is inside a split textile conduit, the identification label E0248 must be
over the split textile conduit.
3 Reducing splices
No identification sleeve.
(g) Diode
A diode is identified by a label E0248 or a sleeve NSA935201, on the cable, positioned alongside
the diode.
(h) Pressure Seal (VP)
The pressure seals through which the cable bundle is routed are identified by two E0248 labels
with lacing tape NSA8420-7 or two sleeves NSA937201, one on each side of the seal.
(i) Coded equipment items directly connected on aircraft
With or without cut-to-length: Install a label E0248 or sleeve NSA937201 near the coded
equipment.
(j) Specific items
All specific EFCS equipment items (connectors, terminal blocks, relays, circuit-breakers) are
clearly and permanently identified with pink labels (E0248) or pink sleeves (NSA937201) printed
in black, which are indelible and clearly visible and bonded to the structure near the items.
(k) Shielding continuity connection
A white background sleeve printed in black identifies shielding continuity connections.

Pink background sleeves printed in black identify shielding continuity connections on safety
cables.
Where shielding continuity is made with several cables with at least one safety cable, only a pink
background sleeve with black printing identifies the last shielding continuity cable.
(l) Fuel routing
(Ref. Fig. 009)
A label is provided at the locations where direct access can be made by the maintenance
operator. (Not required inside fuel tanks) tying.
Along the Q route harness, a specific identification must be used. (ABS1475)
(m) Miscellaneous equipment
On circuit breakers, relays, connectors (VC or VD), no identification label.
C. Special Cases
(Ref. Fig. 010)
For marking with E0248 labels and E0470 adhesive labels refer to para. (b).1_ and (b).2_.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE METAL LABELS IN BOXES THAT CONTAIN ELECTRICAL ITEMS AND
WIRING. IF THERE IS CHAFING OF THE CABLE INSULATION OR THE ELECTRICAL
COMPONENTS, SUCH LABELS CAN CAUSE SHORT CIRCUITS.
(1) Electrical Boxes (large and small VUs)
NOTE: A large VU is an electrical assembly consisting only of CF/DM/DR-type cables where the
radius of curvature is equal to 6xD.
A small VU is an electrical assembly consisting mainly of BF-type cables with low radius of
curvature equal to 3xD.
The electrical boxes have a label E0470 with the VU identification Number and a label NSA931025
with the Aircraft Number (MSN).
(2) Small VUs
(a) Identification of cables
In small VUs, the cables (BF or CF type) have the sleeve E0646MF (EX NSA937204 MF)
marked with the identification of the connection terminal of the related end.
Safety cables are identified with a pink sleeve, with the cable number printed in black.
Cables of the following items are not identified:
- Cut-off receptacle (VC)
- Modular terminal block (VT)
- Ground point (VN)
- Illuminated VU plug (LF)
- Diode module (VD)
(b) Identification of FIN
A small label (E0248) must be used to identify all the equipment or electrical standard items, but
not those that follow:
- Cut-off receptacle (VC),
- Modular terminal block (VT),
- Ground point (VN),
- Illuminated VU plug (LF),
- Diode module (VD),
- Relay,
- Circuit breaker,
- Soldered selector switch.
(3) Large VUs

(Ref. Fig. 011)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Electrical Item Functional-Identification - Marking Types E0248, E0470, E0646
(ex NSA937204), NSA937201, NSA937203
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Electrical Items Functional Identification - Unplugged ventilation holes
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Electrical Item Functional-Identification - Installation
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Electrical Item Functional-Identification - Installation
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Electrical Item Functional-Identification - Electrical Items table
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Electrical Item Functional-Identification - Electrical Items Table
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Electrical Item Functional-Identification - Examples of Marking
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Electrical Item Functional Identification - Examples of Marking on Harnesses
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Electrical Item Functional-Identification - Examples of Marking
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Electrical Item Functional-Identification - Example of Marking in Small VUs
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Electrical Item Functional-Identification - Example of Marking in Large VUs

20-33 - WIRE HARNESSES (Airbus)
WIRE HARNESSES (Airbus)
WIRE BUNDLES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The sections that follow give the general design, description and requirements related to the installation of
electrical wire harnesses on aircraft.
2. Structure of the chapters that follow:
A. Wire harnesses - Wiring (Ref.20-33-1X)
B. Wire harnesses - Separation/Routing (Ref.20-33-2X)
C. Wire harnesses - Protection (Ref.20-33-3X)
D. Wire harnesses - Attachment (Ref.20-33-4X)
WIRING (Airbus)
WIRING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the general design requirements related to the (re)installation of electrical wire
harnesses on aircraft.
A. Manufacture and (re)installation of wiring (20-33-11)
MANUFACTURE AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING (Airbus)
MANUFACTURE AND INSTALLATION OF WIRING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. Definitions
A. Cable or wire:
A cable is an assembly that as a conductor, insulation and, where applicable, a sheath, screen or jacket.
B. Conductor:
The conductor is the conducting element of the cable made of one or more strands.
C. Core:
Assembly of a conductor and insulation which are part of a full single or multiconductor cable.
D. Harness or bundle:
A harness is made of a set of electrical wires.
Each harness has a special route.
E. Circuit

Assembly of components that are in the same ATA/ Sub ATA chapter.
F. Section
Cable or assembly of cables installed between:
- Two electrical components
- Or two items of equipment
- Or an electrical component and an item of equipment.
G. Electrical line:
Assembly of sections electrically connected.
H. Wiring:
Electrical wiring is an electrical connection between two or more points that does not include the related
termination devices and the necessary devices for its installation and identification.
J. Electrical items:
Electrical items are all the connecting items (splices, connectors, terminal blocks, pressure seals, etc.)
and end elements such as terminals, contacts, etc., for which Airbus is responsible (these do not include
Buyer Furnished Equipment (BFE) items).
K. EWIS (Electrical Wiring Interconnection System)
According to 14 CFR 25.1701 and CS 25.1701 Regulations, EWIS is:
Any wire, wiring device or combination of these, including termination devices, installed in any area of the
aircraft for the purpose of transmitting electrical energy , including data and signals, between two and
more intended termination points. This typically includes, but is not limited to:
(1) Wires and cables,
(2) Busbars,
(3) The termination point on electrical devices, including those on relays, interrupters, switches,
contactors, terminal blocks and circuit breakers, and other circuit protection devices.
(4) Connectors, including feedthrough connectors,
(5) Connector accessories,
(6) Electrical grounding and bonding devices and their related connections,
(7) Electrical splices,
(8) Materials used to add protection on wires, including wire insulation, wire sleeving, and conduits that
have electrical termination for bonding,
(9) Shield or braids,
(10) Clamps and other devices used to route and hold the wire harnesses,
(11) Cable tie devices,
(12) Labels or other means of identification,
(13) Pressure seals,
(14) EWIS components in shelves, panels, racks, junction boxes, distribution panels, and backplanes of
equipment racks, including, but not limited to, ciruit board backplanes, wire integration units, and
external wiring of equipments.
EWIS components in electrical equipment or avionics that are approved for environmental conditions,
and the external connectors that are part of that equipment, are not included in EWIS definition.
Optical fibers are also not included in the EWIS definition.
L. Wiring attachment:

All items used to attach, tie or make up the wiring and used to obey the routing and separation rules.
Clamps, raceways, sheaths or conduits used for an electrical function are included in this definition.
(For more data, refer to chapters 20-33-30 - Harness Protection - and 20-33-40 - Harness Attachment)
M. Routing and separation
Design and installation rules obeyed for sufficient separation and electrical isolation from other systems
and structure.
2. General requirements
A. General rules
(1) It is not permitted to cause stress on the wiring:
For example:
- Do not pull on cables or harnesses when the cable ties or attachment items are tightened,
- Do not put or hang objects or tools on cables or harnesses,
- Do not walk or sit on harnesses.
(2) You must use components, or their approved alternatives (list in the applicable manual), for
maintenance, repair or modification of the aircraft. The design and installation of EWIS modifications
to the original type design must be to the same standards as used in the original design.
(3) Be careful when you use cutting or abrasive tools, corrosive products or heating devices in any wiring
area.
(4) You must put protection on all the disconnected wiring ends (Refer to 20-54-00 - Protection During
Maintenance Check).
(5) You must adjust the cable-tie installation tools to prevent damage to the cable insulation because of
overtightening (This requirement is very important for coaxial wires, optical fiber cable). (Refer to 20-
25-51 - Wiring Tool - and 20-33-44 - Tie Wraps Description and Operation).
(6) The head of a cable tie NSA935401 must not be in contact with an adjacent harness.
(7) It is not permitted to use cable ties NSA935401 in conduits and raceways.
(8) The diameter variation (difference between minimum and maximum diameter) of a tied bundle made
of the same number of cables must not be more than 10% of its minimum diameter.
(9) During installation, you must remove cable ties used for adjustment and carrying but not for the final
attachment of the harnesses.
(10) When harnesses are moved, you must carry them and not pull them.
(11) Use foam or non-abrasive fittings as a protection on edges and through-holes when you route
harnesses near or through holes during installation.
(12) Prevent contact between harnesses and sharp edges. If, during installation, you must pull the
harnesses along sharp edges, they must have plastic parts/sections.
(13) It is not permitted to attach cables or conduits directly or not directly to pipes.
(14) If it is possible that cables come into contact with plastic insulating-blankets studs, you must cut the
studs to prevent contact with harnesses.
NOTE: Contact between cables P, M, S, R, T, U, V and the blankets is permitted but between the G
route and the blankets is not permitted.
NOTE: For the A350, the P, G, X routes must not touch the blankets.
NOTE: You must not cut fire-resistant studs. You can replace them with shorter studs.

(15) You must not attach cables/wires without protection directly to metal surfaces (stucture,
overbraiding).
(16) Use precautions to keep electric cables as far as possible from high-temperature sources.
(17) Do not put cables or connections below fluid unions.
CAUTION: ALWAYS OBEY THE PRECAUTIONS THAT FOLLOW TO KEEP ELECTRICAL WIRING IN
A SATISFACTORY CONDITION (ELECTRICALLY AND MECHANICALLY
SERVICEABLE).
WHEN YOU DO MAINTENANCE WORK, REPAIRS OR MODIFICATIONS, ALWAYS KEEP
ELECTRICAL WIRING, COMPONENTS AND THE WORK AREA AS CLEAN AS
POSSIBLE. TO DO THIS:
- PUT PROTECTION, SUCH AS PLASTIC SHEETING, CLOTHS, ETC. AS
NECESSARY ON WIRING AND COMPONENTS
- REGULARLY REMOVE ALL SHAVINGS, UNWANTED MATERIAL AND OTHER
CONTAMINATION.
THESE PRECAUTIONS WILL DECREASE THE RISK OF CONTAMINATION AND
DAMAGE TO THE ELECTRICAL WIRING INSTALLATION.
IF THERE IS CONTAMINATION, REFER TO ESPM CHAPTER 20-55-00, CLEANING.
(18) You must always keep the wiring clean. You must remove loose objects or fluids before installation.
(19) If an EWIS failure occurs, the routing and separation is important to keep the hazardous effects of
the failure in limits. To do this, you must keep the routing and separation in accordance with the
aircraft basic design for the life of the aircraft (For more data, refer to 20-33-20 - Separation/Routing).
WARNING: DO NOT REPAIR UNSATISFACTORY CABLES IN FUEL TANKS. SUCH REPAIR IS NOT
PERMITTED (REFER TO SFAR 88 REQUIREMENTS FOR FUEL IGNITION
PREVENTION). IF YOU FIND AN UNSATISFACTORY CABLE IN A FUAL TANK, YOU
MUST REPLACE IT WITH A NEW ONE THAT HAS THE SAME P/N.
(20) In fuel tanks

- In fuel tanks you must attach cables with red cable ties for the A380. This is recommended for
other AIRBUS families. They are easier to find.
-
Electrical harnesses and connectors installed in fuel tanks must have a mechanical protection.
- It is not permitted to use components (black tape ASNA5107-B, lockwire, etc) that could clog
pump filters in fuel tanks.
(21) In landing gear bay and hydraulic compartment
-
Electrical harnesses and connectors must have a mechanical protection.
- You must use conduits as a protection on dynamic harness ends with connectors between the
last attachment point and the connector backshell.
(22) In the engines, the cables connected must have a wire gauge smaller than 20.
If a 20 wire gauge cable is installed, it must be a high strength alloy
conductor and the connector must have a support (e.g. backshell).
(23) At hinge points:
Where a harness follows the movement of a component, it can be twisted (4 turns/meter) to give
correct travel when the moveable component is operated.
(24) Installation of in-line standard electrical items
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)

(a) You must put standard electrical items (diodes, butt or parallel splices, resistors, etc.) installed in-
line on wires on the outer side of the harnesses for easy access, identification, inspection or
replacement.
These items must not be in the locations that follows:
-
In a section of harness that can move.
-
In harness routing with a curve (small bend radius).
-
In conduits or other types of wire protection in which the item does not stay in view.
-
In overbraided harnesses.
-
In connector backshells.
-
Below clamps or other types of cable support.
-
Below cable ties.
- Below galleys and/or toilet areas, unless a special device gives good protection from the
infiltration of liquids. This special device could be an umbrella or a drip loop at each end of
the splice to prevent this type of infiltration.
(b) When they are in the same area, they must, when possible, be staggered in families along the
harness. There must be a minimum distance of 10 mm (0.3937 in.) between two items of the
same family or two items of different families.
All in-line standard electrical items must at a minimum distance of 60 mm (2.3622 in.) to 300 mm
(11.8110 in.) behind the item or equipment.
NOTE: In areas where splices cannot be individually staggered, a grouping by family is allowed.
(c) Shielding termination must be positioned approximately 70 mm (2.7559 in.) behind the connector
(to facilitate removal and possible repairs of the contact).
(d) Repair by splice
Splices must be staggered in family along the harness with a maximum of four splices in parallel.
There must be a minimum distance of 10 mm (0.3937 in.) between each item or family.
When splices are installed for a repair inside an open conduit (e.g EN6049-006/007), a label
E0248 with the indication "SPLICE INSIDE" must be installed on the conduit with cable tie
NSA935401 or lacing tape NSA8420.
(25) You must put a mechanical protection on electrical and optical cables that are hidden by removable
mechanical items to prevent possible damage during installation or maintenance.
(26) EFCS (Electrical Flight Control System) wiring

General requirements
On EFCS harnesses, if you find defects during the harness manufacturing phase in the workshop,
and before installation of the main related harness, you must replace the damaged wires.
The installation of more non-EFCS wires in EFCS harnesses is not permitted.
Make and tie EFCS harnesses separately, then, where necessary, attach them to the related
harness.
For shielded harnesses, you can include EFCS cables directly in the main harness.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
NOTE: You must correct all defects that you find on an EFCS harness or cable installed on the
aircraft: replace or temporarily repair cable(s) (refer to 20-53-27 - EFCS Wire Repair) or add
more EFCS cables to the outer side of the EFCS harness.
(27) You must not install diodes, blocks, relays, circuit breakers and resistors out of VUs.
B. Installation distances
(1) Distance from the environment
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(a) Distance from structure and equipment:
The electrical cables routes must not, even intermittently, come into contact with the adjacent
structure or fixed or movable items of equipment (flight controls, bellcranks, etc.).
- When the distance between the attachment point and the nearest edge of the structure
(edge to edge) is more than
10 mm (0.3937 in.) , refer to case B.
(Ref. Fig. 005)
- When the thickness of the structure to go through is more than
10 mm (0.3937 in.) , refer
(Ref. Fig. 005)
to case B.
- When the distance between the attachment point and the nearest edge of the structure
(edge to edge) is less than or equal to
10 mm (0.3937 in.) and the thickness of the structure to go through is less than 10 mm
(0.3937 in.) , refer to case C.
(Ref. Fig. 006)
- If there is no relative movement between structure and conduit (except for G and P routes),
the distance can be
0 mm (0.0000 in.) between the harness with protection and the structure (metal or non-
conductive).
If you cannot obey these requirements, you must add special protection:
-
PTFE adhesive tape DAN269 on the structure.
- Convoluted conduit ABS0887 on the harness.
For harnesses without protection (except G route), if you cannot get the minimum distance
of 10 mm (0.3937 in.) between the harness and the structure, apply Teflon tape to the
structure or the adjacent equipment or system. This tape must extend 25 mm (0.9842 in.)
on each side of the applicable zone.
If it is not possible to install the Teflon tape, install EN6049-006/007. This conduit must
extend 25 mm (0.9842 in.) on each side of the applicable zone. Use cable ties NSA935401
or lacing tape NSA8420 to attach the conduit. Change the clamp dimension if necessary.
Change the fixing screws to make sure that at least three threads protrude through the nut.
NOTE:
For a better clearance, it is possible to add or increase the height of the spacers (up to

3.6 mm (0.1417 in.) max.) to the electrical brackets and the secondary structure. You
must not add or increase the number of spacers when they are directly attached to the
primary structure.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THERE ARE NO ELECTRICAL INJECTIONS IN CONDUCTIVE

COMPOSITE SURFACES. ELECTRICAL INJECTIONS CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
THE COMPOSITE MATERIAL.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT WIRES AND HARNESSES DO NOT TOUCH CONDUCTIVE
COMPOSITE SURFACES.
(b) Distance from conductive composite surface

(Ref. Fig. 007)
- For all categories of routes, a minimum secured distance of
10 mm (0.3937 in.) between electrical harnesses and composite conductive surfaces is
necessary.
- Installation of added protection:
(Ref. Fig. 008)
For all routes, a secured distance of 10 mm (0.3937 in.) is permitted with added protection
between the conductive composite surface and cables, and if the structure thickness is
more than 10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
The thickness of this protection must be 3 mm (0.1181 in.) minimum in PEEK material for G
routes.
The thickness of this protection must be 2 mm (0.0787 in.) minimum in PA6.6 material for
other routes.
(c) Distance from fuel tank boundary or a part of the structure in fuel vapour areas
(Ref. Fig. 009)
These rules are applicable for harness routing in fuel boundaries or adjacent structures in fuel
vapour areas (pipes, structure, equipment, etc.)
(d) Distance from piping
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
- Usually, harness routes must be above or adjacent to piping and as far as possible (a
minimum of
50 mm (1.9685 in.) ) from pipes that contain flammable fluids (such as fuel, oxygen and
hydraulic fluids).
- This minimum distance can be decreased to
15 mm (0.5905 in.) if the pipes do not contain flammable or very hot fluids (air, water, etc.).
- The distance between an oxygen line and coaxial wire must be more than
15 mm (0.5905 in.) .
-
Do not attach the harnesses directly to the piping.
-
Do not use separators between the piping and the harnesses.
- Separators must not be used for overlengths or to prevent contact with the structure. They
must not be used as an attachment point.
(e) Distance from other harnesses
(Ref. Fig. 012)
(Ref. Fig. 013)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
(Ref. Fig. 015)

NOTE: You must not use NSA5527 as a harness separator on the A380 and subsequent
programs.
There must be at least 25 mm (0.9842 in.) between routes of different aircraft networks (e.g
ROUTE 1 & ROUTE 2).
There must be at least 25 mm (0.9842 in.) between Commercial / Non-Essential & Technical /
Essential Routes of the same categorie (e.g 25 mm (0.9842 in.) between 1M & 2M COM, 1M &
3M...).
To keep the electrical wiring isolated, you can use separators and spacers (ABS0054, ABS0731,
ABS1144, ABS1526, NSA5527, E0688 or equivalent).
When it is mandatory to use spacers or separators, they are shown on the installation drawings.
If necessary, you can add spacers (except for P, G, X and EFCS routes where a manufacturing
validation is necessary) to get a correct clearance but you must keep them to a minimum.
If the secured distance between two harnesses on the level of two attachment points is the sum
of the mechanical distance or segregation and sagging, a securing device is not necessary.
- Securing device (not the recommended solution):
Add a securing device only for distances between attachment points that are less than or
equal to 75 mm (2.9527 in.) . You can secure the distance between two harnesses with:
-
More attachment points.
-
A separator (type ABS1144).
-
Ramps (ABS1576).
NOTE: You must use ABS1526 and E0688 separators only in pressurized areas.
NOTE: You must not use ABS0054 and ABS0731 separators:

- in SWAMP areas
- in hot areas
- on G, P routes, and for A350 only on X routes.
NOTE: When separators are necessary to attach P routes, you must use two ABS1339 clamps
in butterfly configuration. (This requirement is not applicable in SWAMP and hot areas).
NOTE: Separators are used for segregation only.
NOTE: During maintenance, if necessary (because of sagging, to get a correct clearance

between harnesses or with the structure), you can add separators or spacers but it is
mandatory to keep them to a minimum.
You cannot use separators and spacers in hot areas. In these areas, use lacing tape
NSA8420-2 as a separator (noose-type knot).
NOTE: For EFCS harnesses, you can use spacers or separators as a temporary repair only.
This repair cannot stay on the aircraft for more than 20 months. Route the harness again
(refer to the segregation rules) at the subsequent maintenance check.
NOTE: In panels and boxes:

- You can use separators E0688, ABS1144 and ABS1526 (such as VUs with ARINC
600 connectors)
- It is mandatory to use clamps ABS1339 or NSA5516CND (for attachment of
stressed and large harnesses).
For more data about the distances necessary between routes, refer to 20-33-22 -
Separation Rules.
For more data about description and installation of the separators and spacers, refer to

20-33-41 - Cables Supports.
(f) Loss of segregation

This can occur when there is extra length on the cable. In case of loss of segregation, do the
following steps:
Measure the distance between the two routes. The distance must be 25 mm (0.9842 in.) or more
at all locations; this includes areas where there is cable deflection.
If the distance is less than 25 mm (0.9842 in.) :
- Distribute the extra length along the harness, or
- Install the applicable separator or spacer at the level of the non-conformity.
(g) Distance between connection and first attachment point
It is recommended to put the first attachment point at 300 mm (11.8110 in.) maximum from the
connection.
This distance must accommodate length for connection and disconnection of connectors with no
tension on the connection.
This distance can include when appropriate:
- drip loop,
- overlength for repair and stowage.
(h) Distances applicables to terminal lugs
(Ref. Fig. 016)
The distance between the terminal lug and the structure (conductive or not) must be a minimum
of 5 mm (0.1968 in.) . Obey this distance also when the terminal lug orientation is in the opposite
direction. The distance between the active part of the terminal lug barrels must be a minimum of
5 mm (0.1968 in.) . The distance between the terminal lug and the terminal-block chamber
partition must be a minimum of 2 mm (0.0787 in.) .
If you cannot obey these rules, change the direction of the terminal or bend it.
(i) Loose conduits that touch the structure or another component
(Ref. Fig. 016)
Measure the distance between the conduit and the structure. The distance must be more than or
equal to 10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
If the distance is less than 10 mm (0.3937 in.) , attach the conduits together with a cable tie
NSA935401 and install a spacer NSA5586 to prevent rubbing.
(j) Bonding braid and wiring
(Ref. Fig. 016)
Make sure that the bonding braid does not touch the wiring. If it does, turn the braid terminal to
prevent interference between the bonding braid and the wiring.
NOTE: Do not use this repair procedure for braids that move.
If you cannot do this step, add a PTFE heat-shrink sleeve NSA937210 to the bonding braid.
C. Wire replacement/addition
(1) Cable addition principles
NOTE: The addition of electrical cables in harnesses must not change the basic principles
(manufacturing and installation) of the initial electrical installation.
The added cable(s) must be fully included in the basic existing harness (normal or EFCS).
You must obey route separation in relation to added cables.
As far as possible use existing conduits of the basic installation.
NOTE: Make sure that there is no stress between the existing cables and the added cables.

(2) Installation
NOTE: This operation is done step by step and not on the full length of the harness.
- Open the clamps and attachment devices.

- Remove the harness and split conduit ties and the identification label attachments.
- Install new cables. Use the existing harness for the routing of these new cables.
- Install again the harness and split conduit ties.
NOTE: If a large number of cables is added, adapt the size of the cables.
- Close the clamps and attachment devices.
NOTE: The routing of the added cables can be done below or above the flag datum markers. These
markers must stay in view.
(3) Removal
-
It is necessary to remove each cable separately after removal of the end fittings.
- For one or two cables smaller than or equal to gauge 16 or smaller than or equal to gauge 22
twisted two-wires cable, you can remove the cable(s) without untying and retying of the harness.
-
For other cables, you must do the tying of the harness before you remove the initial cable ties.
- For a cable that goes through a pressure seal, cut it
100 mm (3.9370 in.) before the last harness attachment on the two sides of the pressure seal.
-
You must use end caps (e.g. NSA936601 or NSA936604) to give protection to the cable ends.
D. Spare conduits and spare wires in overbraided conduits

(1) For modification and maintenance work on added cables (for example in areas where you cannot get
access easily), you can use a spare convoluted-type conduit (PTFE or equivalent) with the harness.
The conduit dimension must be 20% minimum of the harness section with a minimum diameter
dimension of 9. Make sure that the draw cable is installed in the spare conduit before installation in
the harness.
(2) Sometimes, it is necessary to have provisions for added spare wires in the protection.
- The number of spare wires (of the same gauge as the functional wires) must be 20% minimum
of the number of functional wires in the harness.
- You must identify the spare wires with a sleeve marked with a "spare wire" label and an
insulating end cap NSA936601 at each end. In a bundle protection, you must wind Teflon tape
ABS5330 on the end cap to prevent it chafing on the wire.
- Before you use a spare wire, make sure that there is full compatibility between:
- The spare wire type and gauge and the system it is connected to,
- The spare wire route and the related system (obey the segregation rules).
(3) Draw wire
(Ref. Fig. 017)
A draw wire is an gauge 18 cable installed in all conduits in which it is not easy to engage one more
cable directly. It is recommended when the conduit length is more than 500 mm (19.6850 in.) (except
for conduits where all the cables have a disconnectable termination such as connectors, terminal
blocks, etc.).
The draw must extend a minimum of 100 mm (3.9370 in.) on each side of the conduit.
Each end of the draw wire must be insulated with a heat shrinkable sleeve or a crimped insulating
end cap (for example NSA936601) to prevent damage the other cables.
You must install a sleeve marked "DRAW WIRE" at each end to identify it from the other cables.

You must fold each end of the draw wire on the conduit and attach it with a minimum of 2 cable ties.
(a) Addition of 1 single-core cable:
To add a single-core cable (wire gauge 16 and more), you must route it below the ties (lacing
tape NSA8420 or cable tie NSA935401) but you must not untie it.
(b) Addition of more than 2 single-core cables (wire gauge 24 to 18) or 1 twisted two-core cable:

Standard harnesses
You must untie and tie the harness again pitch by pitch (a maximum of 5 ties).
NOTE: To tie again, it is mandatory to use ties of the same type as the ties you removed.
(c) Addition of cables other than those of para. (a) and (b):
It is mandatory to untie/tie again pitch by pitch.
To tie again, it is mandatory to use ties of the same type as the ties you removed and install them
with recommended tools.
(4) Cable removal principles
It is necessary to do the removal cable by cable after removal of the end fittings.
For more than 2 single-core cables (wire gauge 16) or 1 two-core cable (wire gauge 20), you must tie
the loom again in the same conditions.
If cables go through pressure seals, you must cut and put a protection of 100 mm (3.9370 in.) before
the last loom mount on each side of the pressure seal.
3. Standard harnesses
A. Constitution
(Ref. Fig. 018)
(Ref. Fig. 019)
(1) To make installation and maintenance easier, the harnesses are not combed on their full length, but:
- Wires must not go through the harness.
- Wires must not extend from the harness (correct tying pitch helps prevent this condition).
NOTE: - For overbraided harnesses attached together, tying pitch must be between
75 mm (2.9527 in.) and 100 mm (3.9370 in.) .
- For harnesses with split conduit protection (EMI) (e.g. EN6049-008) attached together,
tying pitch must be between
75 mm (2.9527 in.) and 100 mm (3.9370 in.) .
NOTE: In zones of stress (curves, high wiring density, derivation level, in VUs and on ramps), the
tying pitch must be decreased to
50 mm (1.9685 in.) .
NOTE: If it is necessary to prevent a slack condition in a harness, do not decrease the space
between the cable ties or the lacing tapes.
(2) Tools and tooling

Tools are necessary to do the wiring. Make sure these tools are applicable for use and do a periodic
check (refer to the applicable maintenance regulation).
(3) The maximum harness diameter must not be more than:
-
50 mm (1.9685 in.) when the distance between the supports is < 535 mm (21.0630 in.) ( 580
mm (22.8346 in.) for the A380 program).
-
45 mm (1.7716 in.) when the distance between the supports is > 535 mm (21.0630 in.) (< 660
mm (25.9842 in.) for the A380 program).
NOTE: In special cases (e.g. quantity of cables, not sufficient space) AIRBUS can give its approval
for installation of harnesses with a diameter larger than specified. For this, you must refer to
AIRBUS support and give a correct and full justification.

Standard harnesses
(4) Usually, in a harness that has different groups of wires, you must tie each group of wires with lacing
tape NSA8420 (enclosed cable tie NSA935401 is not permitted, but it is permitted for optical wires.
Refer to chapter 4.D)
Cable ties NSA935401 on the outer side of harnesses attach the groups of wires together.
(Ref. Fig. 019)
(5) The harness must include at minimum:
-
one gauge 20 or 22 or 24 wire,
-
or two gauge 22 or 24 or 26* wires (*for copper wire, only for A380 program),
- or one gauge 20 wire, plus one gauge 22 or 24 or 26* wire (*for copper wire, only for A380
program).
(For installation on aircraft of a smaller number of cables and if these cables are attached to a
cable support NSA935504 or equivalent, apply protection tape ASNA5107 or equivalent around
the harness).
(6) At branches
(Ref. Fig. 020)
- To make sure that harnesses are not twisted when installed, it is necessary to knwow the
position and direction of the branches on aircraft before you tie the harnesses and branches.
- Crossed tying is only permitted with lacing tape NSA8420. (It is not permitted to use cable tie
NSA935401).
(7) Twisted cables
(Ref. Fig. 021)
(a) Pre-twisted cables (2, 3, 4... wires) made to design specifications are installed on the aircraft.
Cables are twisted to remove the voltages induced by electrical and magnetic fields. These
measures are specified in the design documents. Cables are twisted manually or with a machine
during manufacture.
To make the insertion of contacts easier and to do a better check of locking of each contact, you
must untwist twisted cables on a length of 60 mm (2.3622 in.) + or - 10 mm (0.3937 in.) before
you connect to connectors or modules.
NOTE: It is necessary to pull on each wire to make sure that the contacts are locked correctly.
(b) Cable lay

The cable lay is given by the number of pitches on a specified length (1 meter). The pitch of the
cable is the distance between two similar adjacent points on one wire in the formed wrap.
(c) Lay forming process
NOTE: This process is only used for cables twisted during manufacture and untwisted too much
for connection.
NOTE: It is important to make sure that the cables are not damaged. If they are damaged, it is
mandatory to replace them.
- You must twist the wires until they fit tightly together.
- You must twist the wires in the same direction as at initial manufacture.
- The lay forming procedure is related to the number of cables that you must twist:
- You can twist 2, 3 and 4 wires directly.
- If you must twist 5 wires, twist 4 wires around 1 wire with the final pitch.
- If you must twist 6 wires, twist 4 wires around 2 wires twisted together with the final pitch.
B. Protection

Standard harnesses
The routing of wire harnesses must not let them touch the structure or adjacent equipment.
Harness protections are installed in locations where the wire harnesses could touch the structure or to
make sure that the segregation rules are obeyed.
When the harness is installed on movable mechanical parts, it must have a mechanical protection
between two attachment points and it must be attached with cable ties NSA937401 every 50 mm (1.9685
in.) .
(Ref. Fig. 022)
(Ref. Fig. 023)
NOTE: A short distance or the contact between a harness with protection and the structure is permitted if
this harness does not have a relative movement against this part of the structure.
For more data, refer to 20-33-3x - Harness protection.

(1) Structure feedthroughs
(Ref. Fig. 024)
(Ref. Fig. 025)
(a) Harness that go through structural feedroughs without contact
The distance clearances are the same as those between harness and structure or equipment
(refer to para. 2.B.(1)).
In unusual conditions, the edge through which the harness goes can have protection (grommet
ABS1020). You cannot use this protection only.
To prevent contact between the harness and the protection, it is necessary for the harness to
have an attachment on a minimum of one side of the structure.
When you cannot obey the distance clearances of para.2.B.(1) , if it is possible, install a
protection ABS1020 or similar protection around the hole in the structure. After installation, it is
mandatory to get a clearance of 2 mm (0.0787 in.) between the harness and the protection.
When it is not possible to install a protection ABS1020 and when the harness does not have
another protection, do these steps:
- Put split conduit EN6049-006/007 as a protection on the harness. After installation of the
conduit, it is mandatory to get a clearance of
2 mm (0.0787 in.) between the harness and the edge of the hole.
The conduit must extend 25 mm (0.9842 in.) on each side of the applicable zone. Use cable
ties NSA935401 or lacing tape NSA8420 to attach the conduit. Change the clamp
dimensions if necessary. Change the fixing screw if necessary to make sure that a minimum
of 3 threads protrude through the nut.
NOTE: For a better clearance, it is possible to add or increase the height of the spacers (up to
3.6 mm (0.1417 in.) max.) to the electrical brackets and the secondary structure. You
must not add or increase the number of spacers when they are directly attached to the
primary structure.
(b) Harness that go through structural feedthroughs with contact

Where harnesses go through holes in the structure, use a clamp to attach the harness a
minimum of 100 mm (3.9370 in.) from the edge of the hole.
1 Solution 1:
- Add a silicone extrusion such as NSA360002, NSA939510, ASNA2679 or equivalent
on the structure. The wiring must not touch this protection.
2 Solution 2:
-
Add a mounting plate on the structure.
- Install protection ABS1020 to prevent direct contact between the harnesses and the
hole in the structure.

Standard harnesses
- Wind black tape ASNA5107-B on the harness and attach with a cable tie at the two
wound ends.
The routing of the harness must be straight at the exits to prevent stress on the
grommet.
3 Solution 3 (for special grommet only):
- Install the harness with a
10 mm (0.3937 in.) minimum straight part on each side of the structure feedthrough.
- Install flags to show the correct position of the harness on the attachment points.
NOTE: Each shielded harness must go through its related hole.
NOTE: Some types of structure feedthrough must be installed by bonding (Refer to SRM
chapter 51).
(c) Procedure to bond the profile on the structure

(Ref. Fig. 024)
- Use sandpaper (grain 80) to roughen the bonded surfaces, on the profile and on the
structure.
-
Clean these surfaces.
- Apply a thin and uniform coat of primer (Material No. 08-044A) on the surfaces of the
profile.
- Apply a thin coat of adhesive paste ASNA4049 (thickness about
0.1 mm (0.0039 in.) ) on the profile.
-
The resin must be used quickly, not more than 30 min after preparation.
-
Install the profile on the structure.
-
Remove unwanted resin with a soft cloth and solvent.
- Polymerise the resin for 4 hours at
40 deg.C (104.00 deg.F) .
C. Installation
Before you install a harness, make sure that:
- The installation and routing areas are clean.
- The harness and the insulation are in the correct condition.
- The through holes in the structure have a protection.
- The raceways are clipped and tied (if applicable).
(1) Breakouts for terminal blocks
(Ref. Fig. 026)
When there are wiring breakouts to terminal blocks, make groups of wires that go to 3 or 4 modules
or terminals, to have less ties.
(2) Monitoring cables on adjacent circuit breakers
(Ref. Fig. 026)
It is necessary to tie monitoring cables with cable ties. These cables must not touch metal parts.
(3) Attachment items (cable supports)
NOTE: At each end of the convoluted conduit and split conduit, you must supply a minimum length
between the attachment device and the conduit end:
-
10 mm (0.3937 in.) to 20 mm (0.7874 in.) for A318/319/320/321/330/340.
-

Standard harnesses
15 mm (0.5905 in.) to 20 mm (0.7874 in.) for A380.

For more data about the description and installation procedure, refer to 20-33-40 - Harness
Attachment.
D. Manufacturing dimension tolerances

(Ref. Fig. 027)
E. Overlength
(1) Overlength of wiring
(Ref. Fig. 028)
(Ref. Fig. 029)
(Ref. Fig. 030)
(Ref. Fig. 031)
NOTE: It is not permitted to make complete loops to reduce the overlength of cables and harnesses.
NOTE: Allowed tolerances applicable in pressurized areas and for A380 program only:
If there is no special stowage area for the harnesses, you can manage the harness
overlength as follows:
-
In curves,
-
In drip loops,
-
On interface tubular supports,
-
Between harness attachment points,
- On the harness itself (only for VG and VN single cable overlength).
The harness overlength must be attached to prevent relative movement.
Full harness loops are not permitted except for 3M/4M/23M/24M routes.
Make sure tha the harness bend radii and distances in relation to the structure, the other
systems and bundles agree with the installation rules.
The length of the harness is calculated to agree with the installation rules (minimum distance
from the structure, normal harness shape, etc.).
For each type of installation, the harness length is related to the datum location.
- An overlength of approximately
50 mm (1.9685 in.) maximum is included in the length of harnesses to keep to a
minimum the effects of vibrations on devices and loads on wires, attachments and
junctions.
This overlength must be distributed at each end of the harness (make sure that you
obey this during the (re)installation of the harness).
-
When necessary, do a check of the harness length in each interface area.
(2) Overlength at ends

Optical cables and harnesses
(Ref. Fig. 032)

- Add approximately
50 mm (1.9685 in.) of overlength to the length of the harness in these cases:
- To help the installation and removal of connectors and the locking and unlocking of contacts.
- To make the removal of equipment (for example small VUs) from a rack possible:
The overlength must be 100 mm (3.9370 in.) + VU length.
(Ref. Fig. 033)
- To make end fitting replacement repairs possible (contacts, lugs) (but not optical cables):
. 2 repairs for 26 to 12 wire gauge at each end. Overlength is a minimum of 14 mm (0.5511 in.)
at each end.
. 1 repair for 10 to 04 wire gauge at each end. Overlength is a minimum of 20 mm (0.7874 in.) at
each end for copper cables, 35 mm (1.3779 in.) at each end for aluminium cables.
. 1 repair for 03 to 0000 wire gauge at each end. Overlength is a minimum of 30 mm (1.1811 in.)
at each end for copper cables, 60 mm (2.3622 in.) at each end for aluminium cables.
. For coaxial cables (for number of repairs permitted, refer to 20-53-23 - Coaxial Cable Repair).
An overlength of 30 mm (1.1811 in.) for one repair is given at each end of the Avionic Full
Duplex Ethernet Switched (AFDX) cables.
- There must be no stress at the connection points during installation of cables. Cables must not
be in tension after connection.
F. Bend radii
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(1) The minimum bend radius for a harness that has no optical or coaxial cables attached must be equal
to 6 times the external diameter of the largest group of wires included in the harness.
NOTE: If a harness has two single cables (not twisted), the minimum bend radius applicable to this
harness is the minimum bend radius of the largest cable.
Example: for a harness with 2 CF18, the minimum bend radius is 10 mm.
(2) For harness installed on movable mechanical parts, obey the minimum bend radius in the worst
position of the harness.
(3) 26 to 12 gauge copper and aluminum cables
The minimum bend radius must be equal to 6 times the outside diameter of the cable/wire.
(4) 10 to 0000 gauge copper and aluminium cables
the minimum bend radius must be equal to 10 times the outside diameter of the cable/wire.
In unusual conditions, you can decrease this value to 6 times the diameter (not for the A350).
(5) BE or BF flexible cables
The minimum bend radius is 3 times the external diameter of the cable.
(6) Special case: when G-routes are attached with bobbin, the internal minimum bend radius must be
equal to 6 times the bobbin diameter.
G. Drip Loop for Fluids
(Ref. Fig. 034)
(Ref. Fig. 035)
A wire, cable or harness that can possibly touch fluids or which can have contamination must include a
drip loop to prevent fluid penetration into the rear of the connectors or end terminations.
It is not necessary to use the drip loop principle when :
-
The last attachment point is lower than the connector or terminations.
-

Wires/cables are connected to a grounding point.

- Connections that are installed on a plate have a down angle of 15 degrees minimum to prevent fluid
ingress.
- Connections and the last attachment point have protection covers (umbrella) larger than the item that
must have protection. In this condition, the last attachment point must not be lower than the
VU/connectors.
The cover/umbrella must be a protection for the connections and the terminations in all flight
configurations and the drainage channel must point away from the equipment.
The ideal shape of the drip loop is defined by L1, L2 and L3 lengths.
The length of the drip-loop neutral axis must not be more than 300 mm (11.8110 in.) between the
rear of the connector and the last attachment point. The L1 length is in relation with this limitation.
The L2 length is defined by the cable bend radius, in relation with the cable diameter and the cable
type.
The minimum L3 length is 5 mm (0.1968 in.) .
H. Put harnesses in position on aircraft
- To put the harness in position, use the installation flags on the harness head to show the start of the
uncoiling direction. Before harness removal/installation, and if there are no initial flags, identify the
harness attachment points with new flags (for example curve, hinge, etc.).
- Be careful when you put harnesses in position. It is recommended to install a temporary protective
tubing on the harness to do this.
- Usually, harness twisting is not permitted. But, slight twisting without stress on the wires is permitted
to put the branches in the correct direction at hinged movable parts.
- Do not bend the harness more than the minimum bend radius during handling and installation in the
aircraft (Refer to para. 3. C. (2) (a)).
- It is not permitted to make full loops to remove tension in harnesses, but it is permitted in the
stowage areas.
- You must obey the attachment rules (Refer to 20-33-40 - Harness Attachment). Always use the
fasteners specified in the related documents (for example non-magnetic fasteners near ADF
antennas or in magnetic compass areas).
- When it is necessary to put the harness in position on the various supports, untightened ties hold the
harness to put it in position.
- It is not permitted to let the harness hang, even temporarily (for attachment to a support or work on
the structure). The harness must have protection and support so that it will not touch items that can
cause damage to it because of fretting.
-
Unconnected connectors must have a protection (caps), (Refer to 20-54-10 - Protection by Caps).
J. Inspection procedure
After installation of the wiring, it is necessary to do periodic checks. Refer to 20-52-10 - Inspection Check.
4. Optical cables and harnesses
WARNING: DO NOT LOOK INTO THE END OF A FIBER-OPTIC CABLE. THERE IS A RISK OF LASER
RADIATION, WHICH YOU WILL NOT SEE. LASER RADIATION IS DANGEROUS FOR YOUR
EYES.
A. General requirements
It is possible to install an optical fiber cable in R and S route harnesses in all areas.
It is possible to install an optical fiber cable in M route harnesses only in non-pressurized areas.
The mix of electrical and optical fiber cables in the same connector is not permitted. It is permitted for
ARINC 404/600 connectors to prevent dust contamination.
You cannot install an optical fiber cable in P and G routes.
You must put protective caps on optical end faces immediatly after disconnection. You must remove these
caps immediatly before connection. During installation, you must not touch the optical end faces.
In case of contamination, perform a cleaning operation (refer to chapter 20-55-60).

B. Protection
Optical fiber cables or harnesses have the protection that follows:
-
A bobbin NSA5539, for single optical cable (at a cable tie, a cable support or on a tubular support).
- Self-amalgamating silicone tape ASNA5107-B, for multi-optical cables (at a cable tie, a cable support
or on a tubular support, a minimum of 3 turns).
Optical fiber cables must have a protection in backshells: silicon tape ASNA5107 or equivalent.
C. Check before installation
Make sure that:
-
The specified attachment points are available and produced,
- If there are no immediate plans for rework on the structure, make sure that the applicable protection
devices are installed to prevent all damages and shocks to the harnesses,
-
Cable run and routing areas are clean,
-
Harnesses and sharp edges of the structure do not touch one another,
-
The harness and insulators are in good condition,
-
Cable runs through the structures have protection,
-
Optical cables are routed to prevent stresses on the connection points,
-
Optical cables are not damaged or do not have contamination,
-
Optical end faces have protective caps,
-
Routing raceways are clipped and tied.
D. Precautions and installation requirements

The length of the harnesses is accurately calculated. A flag at the head of the harness is used for pre-
positioning. It shows the start of the unwinding direction . This flag is specified on the manufacturing
documents and the installation drawings.
Be careful when you put the assemblies in position and transport cables and harnesses, to prevent impact
and crushing. Do not drag optical fibers. Carry them manually or with an appropried handling system.
Be careful when you unwind the cables and harnesses to prevent possible twisting and knots.
During installation, it is necessary to keep the connectors aligned with the optical cable as much as
possible, to prevent tension on the cable.
During installation, optical cables or harnesses must be held by loosened ties allowing position adjustment
before definitive tightening.
Added cable ties (and all temporary cable ties) necessary for handling, transfer and other work must be
colored. It is necessary to remove these ties during installation. The heads of the cable ties must not
touch an adjacent harness.
During installation and maintenance work, if you obey the minimum bend radius requirement, this will
prevent possible damage of the optical cable.
If possible, do not twist optical cables to decrease torsion effects on the optical fiber. Slight twisting
without stress on cables is permitted for a change of direction of the optical cables.
It is not permitted to touch the optical end faces. If there is contamination or if you touch optical end faces,
you must clean them (refer to 20-55-60).
E. Installation in pressurized areas
(1) Optical fiber cables or harnesses installed alone

NOTE: When the tightening pitch is more than

150 mm (5.9055 in.) , the full optical cable must have split conduit EN6049-006/007 as a
protection.
(a) Installation with clamps or V-supports

(Ref. Fig. 036)
(Ref. Fig. 037)
For one optical fiber cable installed alone without a split conduit, a bobbin NSA5539 must be
used for protection at attachment points.
When a split conduit protects the optical fiber cable, it is not necessary to install other protection
at attachment points.
For two optical fiber cables and more, a protection of self-welding tape ASNA5107- B (3 turns
minimum) must be installed at attachment points.
(b) Installation on a ramp
(Ref. Fig. 037)
For one optical fiber cable, either bobbin NSA5539 or self-welding tape ASNA5107-B (3 turns
minimum) must be installed at attachment points, secured with cable tie NSA935401 or lacing
tape NSA8420.
For two optical fiber cables and more, self-welding tape ASNA5107-B (3 turns minimum) must be
installed at attachment points, secured with cable tie NSA935401 or lacing tape NSA8420.
(2) Optical fiber cables or harnesses installed with electrical harness
NOTE: Optical fiber cables must not be wired with an harness that has a high operating temperature
(e.g power and generator cables).
(a) Optical fiber cables integrated inside an electrical harness

(Ref. Fig. 038)
Optical cables can be integrated inside an electrical harness. The cable or harness derivation
must be attached by two points to avoid stress and to follow bend radius requirements.
When an harness integrates optical cables or harnesses, a protection (tape ASNA5107-B) must
be installed at each attachment point.
(b) Optical cables installed outside an electrical harness
(Ref. Fig. 039)
(Ref. Fig. 040)
Optical cable or harness must be attached to the electrical harness and protected by a bobbin
NSA5539 (for one optical cable) or with tape ASNA5107 (for two optical cables and more) at
each attachment point.
When you install an optical cable or harness on an electrical harness installed and tied with cable
ties NSA935401, the heads of these ties must not touch the optical cable. In this installation
configuration, it is permitted that an optical cable touches the flat surface of the main harness
cable ties.
- The tightening pitch must be between
40 mm (1.5748 in.) and 200 mm (7.8740 in.) .
- You must not install a cable tie immediatly near a different one. A minimum of
20 mm (0.7874 in.) is necesssary to prevent stress the optical fiber cable.
You can attach a maximum of four optical fiber cables or optical fiber harnesses (less than
four cables) on the side of an electrical harness (safety attached by cable ties between
those of the electrical harness and out of the harness attachments).
If there are more than four optical fiber cables, you must install them in the electrical
harness attachments. If necessary, use a clamp of a larger dimension.
F. Installation in non-pressurized areas

Optical cables routed in non-pressurized areas must have split conduit EN6049-006/007/009 as a
protection.
G. Tying
It is necessary to use lacing tape NSA8420 or cable ties NSA935401-04 to tie optical cables.
Tying shapes the harness and distributes the mechanical loads along all cables.
NOTE: There are different types of lacing tape NSA8420 available. For a given harness diameter, use the
largest one to decrease the pressure on the cable.
NOTE: Do not tigthen to much when you install optical fiber cables. It can cause cable crushing and
optical fiber failures.
H. Overlength
(Ref. Fig. 033)
(Ref. Fig. 041)
It is necessary to have a maximum overlength of 50 mm (1.9685 in.) at each end of the optical cable to
make connection/disconnection and maintenance of the connectors easier.
A ladder ABS0054 can be installed in order to manage the overlength.
This 50 mm (1.9685 in.) overlength must include a drip loop.
J. Bend radii
With optical cables attached, the minimum bend radius must be more than 10 times the external diameter
of the largest optical cable or 20 mm (0.7874 in.) .
The bend radius must not be less than the minimum permitted radius of the largest cable included in the
harness.
The bend radius must not be less than 20 mm (0.7874 in.) .
For transportation, storage and packing, the minimum bend radius must be 40 mm (1.5748 in.) .
K. Drip loop
The drip loop must agree with the bend radius requirements. You must install the optical connectors
above the cable to prevent contamination.
The drip loop must allow the displacement (spring effect) of optical contacts when you make connection to
prevent mechanical stress on contacts.
L. Tightening
In vibration areas, you must tighten and lock all optical items. You must observe special precaution during
tightening operation because an insufficient tightening can cause a lack of signal transmission.
NOTE: The use of glue is not permitted.
5. Coaxial cables and harnesses

A. Installation
Some coaxial cables have a strictly calculated length. This length is specified in the AWL.
NOTE: If a repair decreases the cable length to below the minimum tolerance, you must replace the full
cable (Refer to 20-53-23 - Coaxial Cable Repair).
(1) Coaxial cables (or harnesses) attached on tubular support

(Ref. Fig. 042)
(2) Coaxial cables wired in an electrical harness:
(Ref. Fig. 043)

Quadrax cables and harnesses
NOTE: The head of the cable ties must be in the half of the harness circumference opposite the
coaxial cable.
(a) Solution 1:
- Set the cable tie installation tools to minimum tension. Cross the cable tie to apply the
pressure equally.
(b) Solution 2:
- Wrap 2 or 3 turns of silicone tape ASNA5107 or equivalent around the harness and the
coaxial cable and tie the coaxial cable on the harness with cable tie NSA935401.
(c) Solution 3:
- Wind 2 or 3 turns of silicon tape ASNA5107 or equivalent around the harness and the
coaxial cable and tie the coaxial cable on the harness with cable tie NSA935401.
(3) Coaxial cables wired alone:
(Ref. Fig. 044)
(Ref. Fig. 045)
(a) Solutions 1 and 2 (for 3 coaxial cables or more):
1 Solution 1:
NOTE: You must add 2 or 3 turns of silicone tape ASNA5107 around the coaxial cable
before installation of the clamp (only for WD, WN, WL or WZ coaxial cable).
- Install a plastic clamp ABS1339 on the coaxial cable.

2 Solution 2:
- Wind 2 or 3 turns of silicone tape ASNA5107 around the coaxial cable and install
clamp NSA5516.
(b) Solutions 3, 4 and 5 (only for 1 or 2 SW, XF, WB, WA or XE coaxial cables):
1 Solution 3:
- Install a plastic clamp ABS1339.
2 Solution 4:
clamp NSA5516.
3 Solution 5:
- Tighten the coaxial cable on the V support NSA935504 (or equivalent) with cable tie
NSA935401.
(c) Solutions 6, 7 and 8 (only for 1 or 2 WD, WN, WL or WZ coaxial cables):
1 Solution 6:
plastic clamp ABS1339.
2 Solution 7:
clamp NSA5516.
3 Solution 8:
-
Install a protection on the coaxial cable (bobbin NSA935510 for WD, WN and WZ

coaxial cable or sleeve NSA5539 for WL coaxial cable).

- Tighten the coaxial cable on the V-support NSA935504 (or equivalent) with cable tie
NSA935401.
(4) For BUS CAN E0807 WX cables:
(Ref. Fig. 046)
NOTE: Do not tighten the cables too much when you install the BUS CAN. It can cause cable
crushing.
- If possible, install WX cables in the electrical harness. If this is not possible, use lacing tape
NSA8420 to attach them out of the harness.
- Harnesses that have WX cables must have tape ASNA5107 as a protection at each attachment
point, when they are attached with clamps NSA5516 or ABS1339 on V- supports (e.g.
NSA935504) or tubular supports.
NOTE: You can attach WX harnesses directly on the support without ASNA5107 tape if cable WX
has the protection of a conduit.
You must connect the BUS CAN on equipment with connectors:

-
E0163/165 + ABS1575 ground module (1 or 2 modules as necessary)
-
E0163/165 with twinax ABS1111
-
EN3646 + backshell EN3660
- EN2997 + backshell EN3660
Derivations must be made on the connector:
- With a solder sleeve E0160 + bonding wire on shunted connector ABS1425 with backshell
EN3660. The bonding wire must be a DR24 cable with a length of
100 mm (3.9370 in.) maximum with a lug NSA936501 on the end and connected on a backshell
EN3660.
- With a solder sleeve E0160 + bonding wire on other connectors. The bonding wire must be a
DR24 cable with a length of
150 mm (5.9055 in.) maximum and a lug on the end. NSA936501 for a connection on a
backshell EN3660 or contact E0170 for a connection on ground module ABS1575. The
derivation must be made with splices E0541.
B. Bend radii
With coaxial cables attached, the minimum bend radius must be equal to 10 times the external diameter
of the largest coaxial cable.
The bend radius must not be less than the minimum permitted radius of the largest cable included in the
harness.
In unusual conditions, you can decreasee this value to 6 times the diameter (not for the A350).
NOTE: These bend radius requirements are not applicable to the leaky line.
C. Addition of coaxial cable

Install the coaxial cable directly on the harness but not untie it.
You must attach the coaxial cable to the related harness with crossed clamps NSA935401.
There must be compliance with routes.
NOTE: Make sure that there is no interference between the heads of the ties and the coaxial cable.
You can add more cables below or on the positioning markers.

Make sure that you can see the indications on these markers.

6. Quadrax cables and harnesses

(Ref. Fig. 047)
A. Installation
(1) General Requirements
Quadrax cables have a strictly calculated length. This length is specified in the AWL.
The overlength for contact repairs is distributed along the quad cable run.
You must install this type of cable in harnesses in a specific direction. The installation drawing and
the marking "A-B" on the cable sheath show the correct direction.
Correct direction is important during the connection of the contact in the connector to prevent damage
to the contact positioning key and prevent twisting of the ends.
The "A" side is related to the end where the red conductor is on the right. At the "A" end, the
conductor colors are, in a clockwise direction: red, green, blue and yellow.
It is necessary to keep color continuity on the two sides of the cut-off connectors (if applicable). Thus,
the cable is always in the same direction in a connection.
- AFDX Data bus cables:
The maximum length of an AFDX data bus cable is 85 m (278.87 ft.) , 75 m (246.06 ft.) (for
A400M) with 6 cuts at 100 Mbits (1 repair included).
The maximum length of an AFDX Data bus cable is 150 m (492.13 ft.) , 100 m (328.09 ft.) (for
A400M) with 7 cuts at 10 Mbits (1 repair included).
Do not apply twisting forces at ends. 400 mm (15.7480 in.) must be the minimum distance of an
AFDX data bus cable between two computers to prevent cable twisting during plug-in.
You can install an AFDX data bus cable in the electrical harness like the other cables but with a
minimum of 250 mm (9.8425 in.) free at ends to prevent cable twisting during plug in.
For all harnesses, it is necessary to tie ends after plug-in, after connection of connectors.
You can install AFDX data bus cables in M and S routes only.
You must include an overlength of 30 mm (1.1811 in.) for contact repairs on AFDX data bus
cable- links.
(2) Procedure
(a) Connect one end of the cable.
(b) Put the cable in position on the route. Tie the cable and let the last 250 mm (9.8425 in.) free.
(c) Prepare the connection at the other end of the cable: put the contact in its insertion position
opposite its related cavity in the connector. It can be necessary to twist the contact moderately.
To prevent direct application of twisting force on the contact, do these steps:
- Record the twisting force to apply on the contact to align the quadrax polarization key and
the connector cavity foolproofing-key (for example approximately 30 to the right).
- Pull the contact back
50 mm (1.9685 in.) from the connector and make a curve with the cable.
B. Bend radii
(1) Quadrax, AFDX and 10 to 0000 gauge copper and aluminum cables
The minimum bend radius is 10 times the external diameter. In unusual conditions, you can decrease
this value to 6 times the diameter (not for the A350).
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Manufacture and Installation of Wiring - Specific Recommendations - Installation
of In-line Standard Items
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Manufacture and Installation of Wiring - Specific Recommendations - Installation
of In-line Standard Items

Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Manufacture and Installation of Wiring - Specific Tying Recommendations -
EFCS Harness with another harness
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Wiring Installation Recommendations - Bend
Radii and Minimum Distances
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Minimum Distances Requirements
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Minimum Distances Requirements
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Distance from Conductive Composite Surface
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Wiring Installation Recommendations -

Additional Protection Installation
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Distance from Fuel Tank Boundary or any
Part of Structure in Fuel Vapour Areas

Distance from Piping

Distance from Piping

Spacers and Separators

Spacers and Separators

Overlength of Wiring
Figure 015.1 / Graphic SH 015.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Separators Application Table
Figure 016.1 / Graphic SH 016.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Conduits, Terminals and Bonding Interfaces
Figure 017.1 / Graphic SH 017.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Draw wire
Figure 018.1 / Graphic SH 018.1 Manufacture and Installation of Wiring - Harness Tying Recommendations -
Distribution and Tying Pitch
Figure 019.1 / Graphic SH 019.1 Manufacture and Installation of Wiring - Harness Tying Recommendations -
Lacing Tape and Cable Ties

Figure 020.1 / Graphic SH 020.1 Manufacture and Installation of Wiring - Harness Tying Recommendations - At
Branches
Figure 021.1 / Graphic SH 021.1 Manufacture and Installation of Wiring - Specific Recommendations - Twisted
Cables

Installation on Moving Mechanical Parts

Installation on Moving Mechanical Parts

Structure Feedthrough Protection

Structure Feedthrough Protection
Breakouts at Terminal Blocks and Monitoring Cables on Circuit Breakers
Figure 027.1 / Graphic SH 027.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Manufacturing Dimension Tolerances of

Cable Harnesses

Overlength of Wiring
Figure 029.1 / Graphic SH 029.1 Manufacture and Installation of Wiring - Harness Length - Datum Location

Overlength at Ends

20-33-20 - SEPARATION / ROUTING (Airbus)

Harness Overlength

Overlength at Ends and Drip Loops

Overlength and Drip Loops
Optical Fiber Cable and Harness
Figure 041.1 / Graphic SH 041.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Optical Fiber Overlength Management
Figure 042.1 / Graphic SH 042.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Coaxial Cables or Harnesses Attached on
Tubular Support
Coaxial Cables
Figure 044.1 / Graphic SH 044.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Specific Clamping or Tying

Recommendations - Coaxial Cables
Figure 045.1 / Graphic SH 045.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Specific Clamping or Tying

Recommendations - Coaxial Cables
E0807 WX Cable and Harness
Figure 047.1 / Graphic SH 047.1 Manufacture/Installation of Wiring - Wiring Continuity and Identification - Quadrax
Wire

SEPARATION / ROUTING (Airbus)
SEPARATION / ROUTING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
General wiring designs used on transport aircraft vary significantly between manufacturers and models. The
continuing safe operation of aircraft during their expected service life depends on the safe transfer of electrical
energy by the electrical wiring interconnection system (EWIS).
The EWIS is designed and installed in aircraft:
-
To prevent the propagation of the effects of electrical faults to other independent power sources,
- To prevent the possibility that the failure of a component in a redundant system could cause the failure of
another related redundant system,
- To avoid electromagnetic interference (EMI) between electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) circuits that
are not compatible.
The chapters that follow give the definition and requirements related to the EWIS separation/routing applied on
aircraft.
A. Routes definition (Ref.20-33-21)
B. Separation/routing rules (Ref.20-33-22)
NOTE: For more information about actual wire routing, refer to :

- AWM chapter 91 for the A300/A310/A300-600 family.
- AWM chapter 94 for the A320 family.
- AWM chapter 91 for the A330/A340 family.
- AWM chapter 91 for the A380 family.
ROUTES DEFINITION (Airbus)
ROUTES DEFINITION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General

For safety reasons and to prevent possible electro-magnetic interference (EMI), the electrical and optical
cables are installed in physically separated routes.
These routes consist of cables grouped together according to the nature of the cables and the type of signal.
The routes are identified by a letter code.
2. Allocation of electrical cables to routes
A. Generation: G
Route G includes cables (e.g. AD, YV or DG) linked to electrical power services such as Integrated Drive
Generator (IDG) (for A300 to A340 family) or Variable Frequency Generator (VFG) (for A380 family),
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU), battery, external power and RAT feeders.
B. Generator excitation route: E
This group of cables is installed together with route G.
C. Power supply route (C/B rating > 15A): P
Route P includes power lines protected by a circuit breaker with a rating equal to or more than 20A.
D. Miscellaneous route (C/B rating < 15A): M
Route M includes AC or DC supply cables protected by a circuit breaker with a rating less than 15A,
ARINC buses, high-level analog signals (> 12V), maximum voltage permissible: 115VAC.
NOTE: As a general rule, data bus cables (i.e. ARINC 429) shall be in route M, but, if necessary for
separation purposes, some ARINC 429 cables can be routed in route S.
NOTE: This route includes monitoring cables related to EFCS and auto flight systems.
NOTE: Safety cables have an 'S' in the FIN. The identification is given directly on the cable or with black
print on a pink sleeve. Safety cables can route in Miscellaneous routes. For more data on Safety
cables refer to 20-53-27.
E. Sensitive route: S
Route S includes cables sensitive to interference such as low level analog signals, etc.
Maximum permitted voltage: 28VDC.
NOTE: When a route has an 'S' in its FIN, the 'S' means 'Sensitive'.
When a cable has an 'S' in its FIN, the 'S' means 'Safety'.
NOTE: Safety cables have an 'S' in the FIN. The identification is given directly on the cable or with black
print on a pink sleeve. Safety cables can route in Sensitive routes. For more data on Safety
cables, refer to chapter 20-53-27.
NOTE: Auto flight and EFCS control cables shall be included in this route for segregation purposes.
They shall not cause interference with other sensitive cables in this route.
F. EFCS Routes
An EFCS route includes EFCS cables. It can also include cables from ATA numbers such as those that
follow and in special cases, from other systems:
For A320 family: 22-65/85 partial + other systems.
For A340 family: 22-85 partial + other system.
For A380 family: other systems.
EFCS routes do not have a special letter for their identification.
Usually, EFCS routes are tied to their related Sensitive or Miscellaneous Routes, but in some cases, they
can be alone. For more data on EFCS cables, refer to chapter 20-53-27.
NOTE: Some cables are part of EFCS but their identification does not obey the EFCS AIRBUS rules.

G. Audio and video route: R

Route R includes analog audio and video lines and specific routings in order to avoid interference (e.g.
sensitive to 400HZ).
H. Routes for coaxial cables: T, U, V
These routes are reserved for coaxial cables.
J. Fuel quantity system route (from A340-500/600 to A380 family only): Q
Route designed to prevent electrical interference and short circuits with other categories of routes.
K. Specific routes (A300 only)
(1) Auto-flight route: A
Route A includes cables for the control and monitoring of the automatic flight systems.
(2) Radio COM and NAV control: C
Route C includes power supply lines for analog systems and control lines for radio communication
(COM) and navigation (NAV).
(3) Provision for special circuit (system 1 and 2): H
Route reserved for special system.
(4) Traffic alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS): SG
Route reserved for cables related to the TCAS system.
(5) Navigation system (coaxial cable): U
Route reserved for the OMEGA 1 and 2 systems with coaxial cables.
3. Routes by programme
The tables that follow give the route codes used to identify the harnesses on the different types of aircraft.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Routes Definition - Harness Identification
SEPARATION / ROUTING RULES (Airbus)

SEPARATION / ROUTING RULES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The main purpose of the separation/routing rules is to prevent:
- electro-magnetic interference between cables,
- physical damage to the Electrical Wiring Installation System (EWIS),
- simultaneous failure of redundant systems.
There are two types of separation:
- Physical distance:
. between the wiring of redundant systems (systems 1 and 2),
. between independent power sources and routes,
. between the harnesses and adjacent non-electrical systems. (For more information, refer to chapter:
Wiring - 20-33-1X)
- Physical barrier:
If it is not possible to comply with the required physical distance, a barrier or other means that gives
protection equivalent to the physical distance can be used. (For more information, refer to chapter:
Harness protection - 20-33-30)
NOTE: Modification to the original Electrical Wiring Interconnection System (EWIS) must be installed to the
same standards as used by AIRBUS.
2. Separation between Systems 1 and 2

No single electrical failure should simultaneously affect electrical supplies of aircraft systems 1 and 2.
Thus, two different electrical routings are defined for the two channels of a redundant system in routes G, P,
M, S and Q:
e.g: 1M and 2M.
The two routes of the same category are kept as far apart as possible. Generally routes are installed on each
side of the fuselage (looking forward: system 1 (odd numbers) on the left and system 2 (even numbers) on the
right).
In specific areas where the two channels are in proximity, the minimum distance between them must not be
less than 25 mm (0.9842 in.) and a physical barrier (protection) must be installed.
NOTE: Mixing of systems 1 and 2 is strictly forbidden, including in racks, boxes and panels.
CAUTION: CONTACT BETWEEN CABLES AND CONDUCTIVE COMPOSITE SURFACES IS STRICTLY

PROHIBITED. A MINIMUM DISTANCE OF 10 MM (0.394 IN.) IS REQUIRED.
3. Route Separation
NOTE: Separation of routes obey the same rules for systems 1 and 2.
NOTE: Different routes arriving at the interface plate must be separated by a maximum distance.
(Ref. Fig. 001)

- On the A320 and A340 programs, the routing is based on a segregation between "Technical" and
"Commercial (mainly in cabin area)" routes in accordance with the applicable drawing sets and the
related labeling.

- On the A400M program, there is a separation in the routing between the "Civil" and "Mission" routes in
relation to the applicable drawing sets and the related labeling.
- On the A380 program and subsequent Airbus civil programs, the routing is based on a segregation
between "Essential" and "Non-essential" routes in accordance with the applicable drawing sets and the
related labeling. (Essential routes are used to carry circuit cables that are requested for aircraft type
certification; The other cables are installed on Non-essential routes)
After maintenance operations, you must install electrical harnesses in accordance with the initial design
and applicable drawing sets.
If you add cables, we recommend that you:
- Use the commercial/non-essential/mission routes as a preferred solution in accordance with the aircraft
program specificity.
- Create new commercial/non-essential/mission routes in accordance with the electrical installation rules
and program specificity.
The minimum distances between the electrical routes that follow are given for customer application
design. You must obey them during the aircraft life. They take into account possible electromagnetic
interference coupling and short circuit hazard between harnesses:
(Ref. Fig. 002)
When you cannot obey these segregation distances for customer application design, you must do a case-
by-case analysis with the Airbus Design Office.

Separation on Fuel System Wiring (A340-500, -600 and A380 only)
NOTE: On Airbus design, there can be smaller segregation distances validated through special analysis
where there is no sufficient room for physical segregation in some local areas.
4. Separation on Fuel System Wiring (A340-500, -600 and A380 only)

For intrinsic safety reasons, wiring associated with the fuel quantity system must be included in the specific Q
route with associated connectors.
5. EFCS Separation
A. EFCS cables
(1) Definition
Electrical Flight Control System (EFCS) cables are cables related to the primary flight control system
and have one of the following ATA numbers that follow in their Functionnal Item Number (FIN):
(2) A300, A300-600 and A310:
Not applicable
(3) A320 family:
ATA chapter 27-92/-93/-94/-95
(4) A330/A340 family:
ATA chapter 27-92/-97/-98
(5) A380:
- AIRBUS PART:
ATA chapter 27-14/-24/-34/-44/-64/-92/-97/-99.
- For SEPDC (HONEYWELL PART):
The items and the related cables listed below are part of EFCS:
3XZJ3, 3XZK5, 4XZJ4, 4XZK6.
- For PEPDC (ECE PART):
The items and the related cables listed below are part of EFCS:
RCCBs: 994CY, 994CL1, 994CL2, 996CR1, 996CR2, 994CT2, 992CT1,995CL1, 995CL2,
991CH, 992CY.
Discretes: 994CY, 994CL1, 994CL2, 996CR1, 996CR2, 994CT2, 992CT1, 995CL1, 995CL2,
991CH, 992CY, 980PC.
CBs: 991CE3, 992CE3, 991CE2, 992CE2, 995CE2, 916CE2, 917CE2, 996CE2, 921CE2,
914CE2, 984CE2, 986CR1, 982CT1,985CL1, 986CR2, 984CT2, 985CL2, 982CY,
EFCS cables are installed in special EFCS routes.
(6) Identification
Usually, EFCS cables identification is by printing directly on the cable. When it is not possible, the
identification is with black print on white sleeves at each end of the cable.
NOTE: For Safety EFCS cables, the identification is with black print on pink sleeves.
B. EFCS routes
(1) Definition
An EFCS route includes EFCS cables. It can also include cables from ATA numbers such as those
that follow and in special cases, from other systems:
For A320 family: 22-65/85 partial + other systems in specific cases.
For A340 family: 22-85 partial + other systems in specific cases.
For A380: other systems in specific cases.
(2) Identification

For A300, A300-600 and A310: Not applicable

For the A320 family, there are dedicated routes:
7M: EFCS system 1 cables routed with 1M routes
8M: EFCS system 2 cables routed with 2M routes
7S: EFCS system 1 cables routed with 1S routes
8S: EFCS system 2 cables routed with 2S routes
For the A330/A340 family: this type of route is identified by a third digit F:
1MF: EFCS system 1 cables routed with 1M routes
1SF: EFCS system 1 cables routed with 1S routes
For A380: this type of route is identified by a third digit F:
1PF: EFCS system 1 cables routed with 1P routes
2PF: EFCS system 2 cables routed with 2P routes
For all aircraft families, EFCS routes are identified with black print on pink sleeves.
C. Dedicated standard items
The EFCS harnesses are equipped with dedicated connectors (VC).
These connectors provide the interface:
- between the various EFCS harnesses,
- between the EFCS harnesses and equipment,
- between the EFCS harnesses and the various VUs to which they are connected.
The EFCS installation uses dedicated ground modules (VG) and ground points (VN).
All items of equipment and standard electrical items dedicated to the EFCS system (connectors, terminal
blocks, ground modules, ground points) are identified clearly and permanently. (Clearly visible, indelible
pink or red labels with black or white printing affixed to the structure adjacent to the equipment and
standard electrical items concerned). (Refer to chapter: Electrical items functional identification - 20-32-
51).
6. Separation of Electrical Items
Generally, the electrical item separation is the same as the electrical route and system separation (dedicated
electrical items depending on the system).
7. Separation of Commercial Systems (A320 to A340 family only)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
In all cases, technical and commercial circuits must be segregated. (Except for A300, where there is no
specific route for commercial systems).
In fuselage area, optional commercial P or M routes must be wired along basic commercial routes.
In crossbeam area, optional commercial P or M routes must be wired separately.
8. Separation of essential/non essential routes (for A380 only)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
In all cases, essential and non essential circuits must be segregated.
- Circuits that are required for type certification or by operating rules are classified "essential" and must be
located in essential routes.
-
Other circuits are classified "non essential" and must be located in non essential routes.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Separation/Routing Rules - Routing for Interface Plate

Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Separation/Routing Rules - Minimum Recommended Distances between Routes
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Separation/Routing Rules - Addition of Optional Wire(s) - Example
PROTECTION (Airbus)
PROTECTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The routing of cable harnesses makes sure that they cannot even temporarily, touch the structure or adjacent
equipment.
Harness protections are used where it is possible for cable harnesses to touch the structure or to obey
segregation rules.
Harness protections can be:
-
Convoluted conduit type, insulating material (Ref. 20-33-31)
- Metallic conduit type, rigid metal tube with an internal insulating coating, overbraided metal with
insulating interior (Ref. 20-33-32)
-
Miscellaneous conduit type, split (open) or closed, textile or elastomer, removable or not (Ref. 20-33-33)
-
Heat shrink conduit (Ref. 20-33-34)
- Tapes. (Ref. 20-33-35)
The chapters that follow give the description and requirements related to each type of electrical harness
protection installed on aircraft.
2. Main Rules and Instructions
A. General
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
All electrical routes inside pylons except G routes must have protection:
- A split conduit EN6049-006 or EN6049-007 for mechanical protection
- A split conduit EN6049-007 for electrical protection.
NOTE: It is permitted to have a distance that is not sufficient or contact between a protected harness and
the structure if this protected harness does not have relative movement against this part of the
structure. (Except for G and P routes)
NOTE: You must protect the cable or small harness at the structural fastener points for routes with:
- 1 cable of 20 or 22 or 24 gauge (Not permitted for 26 gauge)
- Or 1 bifilar cable of 22, 24 or 26 gauge
- Or 2 cables of 22, 24 or 26 gauge
- Or 1 cable of 20 gauge and 1 cable of 22, 24 or 26 gauge.
You can use longer split conduits on harnesses if there is not sufficient distance:
-
Between a harness and the metal structure or
-
Between two harnesses (not for P, G and Q routes).
You can apply this tolerance only if the distance between a harness and the metal structure

is less than 10 mm (0.3937 in.) .

No contact between two harnesses or between a harness and the structure is permitted.
This tolerance is applicable only if split conduit EN6049-006/007 is specified in the drawings.
The conduit extension must not be more than 500 mm (19.6850 in.) . You must use a longer
conduit or add a piece of conduit of the same reference to do the extension.
When you install electrical cables in a conduit, you must obey the rules that follow:
-
You cannot use cable ties and lacing tape in conduits.
-
You must install split conduit with three turns per meter.
- Conduit protection must have minimum
150 mm (5.9055 in.) length.
-
You cannot screw two different size convoluted-conduits together.
- The convoluted conduit must be only one piece. The connection of two conduits to get the
neccessary length is not permitted.
- In high vibrations areas, it is recommended to use open textile conduits or heat-shrink
tubings. (Not flexible electrical conduits)
- You must make sure that there is a draw wire in all conduits that have a length of more than
500 mm (19.6850 in.) and in those where all the cables have a disconnectable termination
such as connnectors, terminal blocks, etc.
- You must make sure that the bend radius (R) of the cable outlet at the conduit ends is
correct. The bend radius must be a minimum of 6 times the outer diameter of the cable. (This
rule is not applicable to the draw wires installed in the conduits)
- You must make sure that there is a drain hole in conduits with a diameter of more than
10 mm (0.3937 in.) and in conduits that have low points.
Drain holes are not necessary:
- For textile conduits.
- For conduits with an external diameter of less than 10 mm (0.3937 in.)
- For conduits on sealed harnesses.
Also, drain loops are used to prevent fluid contamination of the connectors (in lavatories and
galleys, by leaks from water or hydraulic systems, etc.). The same rule is applicable to
protected or unprotected harnesses.
- When you add cables on aircraft, you can use conduits on routes but you must obey
segregation rules.
NOTE: You must install the harness identification label on the harness protection.
- External protection is mandatory on over-braided 'P' routes in all areas and on other routes in
SWAMP areas.
B. Selection
Usually, conduit P/Ns are given in the IPC. You must contact AIRBUS support for all modifications to the
original requirements.
You can select the conduit type in relation to the items that follow:
(1) You must install split (open) conduits on the aircraft in areas with easy access to the harness fastener
attachments. (Support, clamps, cable ties, etc.)
(2) Convoluted conduit is not the recommended protection in vibration areas. You must use these
conduits for sealed harness. Do not use conduits longer than 3.5 m (11.48 ft.) .
(3) You must use split conduit EN6049-008 for punctual Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI) protection
on harnesses without derivation for over braiding repairs and for modification kit. You must not install
EN6049-008 on dynamic harnesses.

(4) You must use split conduit EN6049-009 to give protection to specific cable in harnesses, in fire areas.
(5) You must use conduit NSA935805 for harnesses in movement on A/C doors, related to angle and
cycling rate.
(6) Use split conduit EN6049-007 for segregation of bundle. On segregation of P routes, you must install
EN6049-007 on both P routes.
(7) Protection selection on non over-braided harness.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(8) Protection selection on over-braided harness.
(Ref. Fig. 005)
C. Size Of Conduit
(Ref. Fig. 006)
The selection of the size of the conduit is related to the harness diameter and the conduit length.
To prevent chafing, you must calculate the size of the conduit to get the maximum permitted fill factor.
You can use this spare space for modifications.
- You must not fully fill convoluted, screened and closed conduits.
- Select size of conduit so that the external diameter of the cable harness is:
(1) For conduits with a length less than 2 m (6.56 ft.) :
Filling factor must not be more than 80 per cent of the conduit section at the time of aircraft delivery.
(20 per cent of the section spare space available for the customer)
NOTE: For "xxG" routings (sensitive systems protection), convoluted conduits give electrical
protection. You can adapt the section of the convoluted conduit to the inner diameter routing,
while as near as possible to the cables. Thus, the rule found above (80 per cent of inner
section) is not mandatory for "xxG" routings.
(2) For conduits with a length greater than 2 m (6.56 ft.) :

Filling factor must not be more than 60 per cent of the conduit section at the time of aircraft delivery.
(20 per cent of the section spare space available for the customer)
- For split conduits, a minimum overlap of 45 deg. angle is mandatory (maximum 135 deg. angle).
A larger overlap is used to add cables.
-
For heat-shrink conduits, the size is related to the harness diameter.
D. Length
(Ref. Fig. 001)
- It is not necessary for conduit length to be the same as the harness length. It must only be the length
that the harness can be damaged.
- It is not recommended to use convoluted conduits longer than
3.5 m (11.48 ft.) .
- You must keep sufficient slack between the conduit end and the electrical equipment to prevent
strain on the connection and to keep rubbing on shock-mounted equipment to a minimum. You must
also do this so that insulation characteristics do not decrease because of liquid accumulation in the
conduit at the rear of the connector.
- You must keep a conduit length of
10 mm (0.3937 in.) to 20 mm (0.7874 in.) minimum from the last attachment at each end for all
programmes except for A380. For the A380 programme, the overlength must be 15 mm (0.5905 in.)
to 20 mm (0.7874 in.) minimum.
E. Attachment
(Ref. Fig. 001)

Cable supports must hold the conduit along the conduit run. Usually, attachment P/Ns are given in the
IPC. But you must examine the installation type in relation to the items that follow:
- When the routings of conduits ABS0887/NSA935805 are together, you must attach them with lacing
tape NSA8420.
- When the routing of conduit ABS0887/NSA935805 is along a bundle, you must attach it with cable
tie NSA935401.
-
When a conduit is put into the harness, you can use cable tie NSA935401.

Procedure
NOTE: Attachment selection is also related to the cable support selection which is related to the area. For more information, refer to chapter 20-33-4X -
Bundle attachments.
- For harnesses protected with convoluted conduit ABS0887, E0432, NSA935805 or NSA935806, attachment on the structure is done with "P"
clamps NSA935807 and at the rear of the connector with cable tie NSA935401. (Make sure that the cable tie, when tightened, does not crush the
conduit too much)
-
You must always install end caps NSA935829 on each end of convoluted conduit ABS0887.
- The clamp must make sure the harness is correctly tightened to prevent fretting by chafing of the conduit. It must not let the harness move through
the clamp when light axial pull is applied.
-
Make sure that the conduit attachment is correct.
NOTE: If you cannot get a clamp of the correct size, you must select a clamp with a slightly larger diameter than that of the cable harness you will
attach. To get a correct grip of the clamp in all areas, wind self-adhesive silicone tape ASNA5107 around the conduit.
NOTE: You must not pull on the harness to try to distribute the overlength when the clamps or other cable attachments are gripped.
NOTE: In same cases you can decrease the distance between the metallic structure and the harness protected with convoluted conduit ABS0887 to 0
mm if there is no relative movement between the structure and conduit. This is not applicable to G and P routes. (Refer to 20-33-11)
NOTE: Before installation of the cable tie on the conduit ABS0887, to give protection against crushing, you must wind tape ASNA5107 around it. (Two
layers minimum)
NOTE: For the same system and compatible route category, between two attachment points, you must attach shielded conduits or overbraided
harnesses together with cable ties NSA935401. This is to prevent relative movement and possible damage to the braid.
(1) Attachment selection

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| USE |CONDUIT TYPE | PROCEDURE |
|--------------------------|-------------|--- --------------------------------|
| | | <<P>> clamp NSA935807 with |
| | | washer NSA935808 |
| | |------------------------------------|
| Along conduit run | | Only conduit size > 24: |
| | | Cable support NSA935504 with |
| | | cable tie NSA935401 |
| | | (installation not recommended) |
|--------------------------| |------------------------------------|
| | | Only carbon fuel tank: |
| | Convoluted | Clamp NSA5515 + bobbin NSA935809 |
| Conduit end | conduit |------------------------------------|
| (last attachment) | | Clamp NSA935813 + bobbin NSA935809 |
| | |------------------------------------|
| | | Clamp type NSA5516 |
|--------------------------| |------------------------------------|
| Bundle hinge | | Clamp type NSA5516 |
|--------------------------| |------------------------------------|
| | | Only carbon fuel tank: |
| | | Clamp NSA5515 + bobbin NSA935809 |
| Last attachment point | |------------------------------------|
| before connection | | Clamp NSA935813 + bobbin NSA935809 |
| | |------------------------------------|
| | | Clamp type NSA5516 |
| | | (installation recommended) |
|--------------------------|-------------|------------------------------------|
| All areas but not: | | |
| -Pylons | | |
| -High temperature areas | | Clamp type ABS1339 |
| -Inaccessible | | |
| pressurized areas | | |
| -Moving parts | | |
|--------------------------| Convoluted |------------------------------------|
| -Pylons | conduit | |
| -High temperature areas | ABS0887 | Clamp type NSA5516 |
| -Large diameter bundles | | |
| -Moving parts | | |
|--------------------------| |------------------------------------|
| Inaccessible pressurized | | V support NSA935504 |
| areas | | + tape ASNA5107 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Metallic structure | | Clamp type NSA5516 |

Procedure
|--------------------------| |------------------------------------|
|Wiring of M and S routes | Metallic | |
|in non-metallic structure | conduit | Clamp type NSA5516 |
| (carbon) | | |
|--------------------------| |------------------------------------|
| For intermediate bonding | | Clamp type NSA5516 + ASNA0182 |
|--------------------------|-------------|------------------------------------|
| All areas | Flexible | Clamp type NSA5516 or V cable |
| | conduit | support (e.g. NSA935504) |
| | (split or | |
| | closed) | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3. Procedure
A. Draw Wire
(1) Installation
(Ref. Fig. 007)
A draw wire is an 18 gauge electric cable put in all conduits in which you cannot easily engage an added cable directly. This is recommended when
the conduit length is more than 500 mm (19.6850 in.) . (This is not applicable to conduits where all the cables have a termination that you can
disconnect, such as connectors, terminal blocks, etc.)
The draw wire must protrude by a minimum of 150 mm (5.9055 in.) from the two ends of the conduit.
You must insulate each end of the draw wire with a heat shrink sleeve or a crimped insulating cap (e.g. NSA936601 or NSA936603) to prevent
damage to the other cables.
NOTE: You must use NSA936601 in high temperature areas and NSA936603 in low temperature areas.
You must install a sleeve with the indication "DRAW WIRE" at each end to identify it.
You must fold each end of the draw wire on the conduit and tie.
NOTE: In the pylons, the draw wire bend-back principle must be used as a general rule.
(2) Addition of a new cable with a draw wire

(Ref. Fig. 008)
B. Drain Hole
A drain hole gives protection to the electrical harness from liquid accumulation in the conduit. You must put drain holes in all locations where water can
collect.
Hole diameters must be 3 mm (0.1181 in.) for conduit diameters of less than 16 mm (0.6299 in.) and 6 mm (0.2362 in.) for conduit diameters of more
than 16 mm (0.6299 in.) .
You must put drain holes in all convoluted conduits (e.g. ABS0887, E0432, NSA935805, NSA935806) with low points, but not for:
- Conduits on sealed harnesses
- Conduits in a pressurized compartment
- Movable conduits which let moisture drain
- Small conduits, where the inner diameter is less than
10 mm (0.3937 in.)
- Small conduits used in overbraided harnesses.
(1) For shielded and overbraided conduits
For shielded conduits made of convoluted conduit, drain holes are made during manufacture with a special tool before delivery and installation.
The holes must be made at regular intervals on the full periphery of the conduit.
NOTE: No holes must be made on the shield.
Yellow sleeves identify drain holes or drain hole zones on the two sides.
Drain holes will be made at the lowest point after installation of the conduit. (Refer to 20-25-52 Wire protection tool for detailed process)
WARNING: BE CAREFUL NOT TO CUT YOUR FINGERS. FLAKES OF NICKEL ARE SHARP.
C. Temporary Corrosion Protection (TCP) (Only For Metallic Conduits)

You must apply protection on the metallic end fittings and backshell of the braided conduits and overbraided harnesses after each replacement,
disassembly or reconnection, to give protection from corrosion.
NOTE: You must apply the TCP (or Temporary Protection System (TPS)) after connection and after the bonding check is completed.
NOTE: Before application of TCP, you must put a cover on all unconnected items (connectors, modules, lugs, contacts...), cables and unsealed
connected items (connectors, terminal blocks...). This is to prevent damage to these items.
NOTE: Drain holes of convoluted conduits and equipped shielded conduits must not be blocked by the TCP.
NOTE: Do not apply the TCP on the inner sides of the racks (VU).
NOTE: Do not apply the TCP to the non metallic sheath or the electrical connectors. You can cause damage.
- Use cleaning agents (Material No. 11-016 or 11-026 or 11-027) and a lint-free cloth to remove all contamination from the fitting.

Procedure
- Remove all flakes or blisters (with a non-specific tool) and make sure that you do not cause damage to the base metal while you do this task.
NOTE: A dental or a seal tool (non-metallic tool) is recommended for the removal of flakes and blisters.
- Use a brush or an airless spray to apply a continuous thin and smooth layer of storage preservation (Material No. 15-008) on all the fittings.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Cable Protection - Main Rules
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Cable Protection - Main Rules
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Protection Selection For Non Overbraided Harness
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Protection selection For Non Overbraided Harness
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Protection selection For Overbraided Harness
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Cable Protection - Conduit size selection depending the harness diameter - NSA935805 and ABS0887
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Cable Protection - Draw Wire
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Cable Protection Cable Addition with a Draw Wire
CONVOLUTED CONDUIT (Airbus)
CONVOLUTED CONDUIT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and operation for convoluted conduits. Convoluted conduits are items used for segregation (arc-tracking protection) and
mechanical or fluid protection. (For more information about conduit selection, refer to chapter 20-33-30)
The main convoluted conduits installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- ABS0887A
- E0432
- NSA935805
- NSA935806
2. Description
This type of conduit is convoluted with a larger bend radius than a flexible conduit.
They are made with PTFE and some sizes can be supplied with a braided metal (rustproof steel) external sheath.
In most cases, they are a regular black color.
NOTE: Conduit delivery with continuous drain holes is only with metallic braiding. E.g. NSA935805T and NSA935806T. (Refer to chapter 20-33-32 - Metallic
conduit)
A. ABS0887
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
NOTE: You must use conduit ABS0887 for electrical and fibre optic cables only.
The use of conduits greater than 3.5 m (11.48 ft.) is not recommanded.
Convoluted conduit ABS0887 must be installed:
- For dynamic bundles.
- In inaccessible areas.
- In exposed areas. (E.g.: Landing gear)
Convoluted conduit ABS0887 is not the preferred protection used in vibration areas.
- Spare provision.
(1) P/N identification
NOTE: You can use P/N NSA935401 cable tie or P/N NSA8420 lacing tape to attach conduit P/N ABS0887.
ABS0887 A 06
| | |
| | --- Size code
| ------- Type code | A = Peek conduit (lightweight)
| | B = Peek conduit + braid (refer to 20-33-32)
| | C = Peek conduit + braid + halar (E-CTFE)
| | sheath (refer to 20-33-32)
--------------- Standard P/N

Procedure
(2) P/N characteristics

(a) Temperature
- Conduit code A and B
Minimum operating temperature is -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
Maximum operating temperature is 260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F) .
- Conduit code C
(b) Size code
Conduit code A
------------------------------------------
| SIZE | INSIDE DIA D | MAX BEND RADIUS |
| CODE | mm. (in.) | mm. (in.) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 04 | 3.4 (0.1338) | 18 ( 0.7086) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 06 | 4.6 (0.1811) | 28 (1.1023) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 09 | 7 (0.2755) | 32 (1.2598) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 10 | 7.6 (0.2992) | 35 (1.3779) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 12 | 9.2 (0.3622) | 38 (1.4960) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 14 | 10.8 (0.4251) | 45 (1.7716) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 16 | 12.3 (0.4842) | 51 (2.0078) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 20 | 15.6 (0.6141) | 55 (2.1653) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 24 | 19 (0.7480) | 76 (2.9921) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 28 | 21.8 (0.8582) | 83 (3.2677) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 32 | 25 (0.9842) | 89 (3.5039) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 40 | 31.4 (1.2362) | 102 (4.0157) |
------------------------------------------
Conduit code B (with NiCu braid)
Conduit code C (with NiCu braid + E-CTFE braid)
------------------------------------------
| SIZE | INSIDE DIA D | MAX BEND RADUIS |
| CODE | mm. (in.) | mm. (in.) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 06 | 4.6 (0.1811) | 28 (1.1023) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 09 | 7 (0.2755) | 32 (1.2598) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 10 | 7.6 (0.2992) | 35 (1.3779) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 12 | 9.6 (0.3779) | 38 (1.4960) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 14 | 10.8 (0.4251) | 45 (1.7716) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 16 | 12.3 (0.4842) | 51 (2.0078) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 20 | 15.6 (0.6141) | 55 (2.1653) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 24 | 19 (0.7480) | 76 (2.9921) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 28 | 21.8 (0.8582) | 83 (3.2677) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 32 | 25 (0.9842) | 89 (3.5039) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 40 | 31.4 (1.2362) | 102 (4.0157) |
------------------------------------------

Installation Requirements
B. E0432
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
E0432 A 10 A
| | | |
| | | --- Type code | A code = Specification ABS0746 (Conduit with
| | | | drain hole)
| | | | Without code = Specification E0759 (Conduit
| | | | without drain hole)
| | ------- Size code
| ---------- Material code (A code = PTFE)
--------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Size code
------------------------------------------
| SIZE | INSIDE DIA D | MIN BEND RADIUS |
| CODE | mm. (in.) | mm. (in.) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 04* | 3 (0.1181) | 13 (0.5118) | * Convoluted conduit without
|------|---------------|-----------------| drain holes
| 06 | 4.6 (0.1811) | 16 (0.6299) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 07 | 5.1 (0.2007) | 20 (0.7874) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 09 | 7 (0.2755) | 28 (0.1023) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 10 | 7.6 (0.2992) | 30 (1.1811) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 11 | 8.2 (0.3228) | 32 (1.2598) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 12 | 9.2 (0.3622) | 33 (1.2992) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 14 | 10.8 (0.4251) | 39 (1.5354) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 16 | 12.3 (0.4842) | 43 (1.6929) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 20 | 15.6 (0.6141) | 54 (2.1259) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 24 | 19 (0.7480) | 65 (2.5590) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 28 | 21.8 (0.8582) | 71 (2.7952) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 32 | 24.5 (0.9645) | 76 (2.9921) |
|------|---------------|-----------------|
| 40 | 31.7 (1.2480) | 98 (3.8582) |
------------------------------------------
C. NSA935805
(Ref. Fig. 003)
NOTE: Conduit NSA935805 can be crushed but only at backshell level for correct tightening.
NOTE: Conduit NSA935805 must be used for bundles in movement on A/C doors, taking into account angle and cycling rate.
NOTE: You can use P/N NSA935401 cable tie or P/N ABS8420 lacing tape to attach conduit P/N NSA935805.


NSA935805 T 10 A
| | | |
| | | -- Type code| A code (*) = Specification ABS0746
| | | | (Conduit with drain hole)
| | | | Without code = Specification E0759
| | | | (Conduit without drain hole)
| | ----- Size code
| --------- Conduit code | S code = With metallic braid (20/100)
| | T code = With metallic braid (25/100)
| | Dash (-) code = Without braid
---------------- Standard P/N
(*) Type code A (conduit with drain hole) not applicable for size codes 02, 03
and 04.
(a) Temperature
(b) Size code
---------------------------------------------------------
| CODE | mm. (in.) | WITHOUT SHEATH | WITH SHEATH |
| | | mm. (in.) | mm. (in.) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 02 | 1.4 (0.0551) | 10 (0.3937) | - |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 03 | 2.2 (0.0866) | 13 (0.5118) | - |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 04 | 3 (0.1181) | 16 (0.6299) | - |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 06 | 4.6 (0.1811) | 19 (0.7480) | 22 (0.8661) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 09 | 7 (0.2755) | 32 (1.2598) | 35 (1.3779) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 10 | 7.6 (0.2992) | 35 (1.3779) | 38 (1.4960) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 12 | 9.2 (0.3622) | 38 (1.4960) | 41 (1.6141) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 14 | 10.8 (0.4251) | 45 (1.4416) | 48 (1.8897) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 16 | 12.3 (0.4842) | 51 (2.0078) | 54 (2.1259) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 20 | 15.6 (0.6141) | 64 (2.5196) | 68 (2.6771) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 24 | 19 (0.7480) | 76 (2.9921) | 80 (3.1496) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 28 | 21.8 (0.8582) | 83 (3.2677) | 90 (3.5433) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 32 | 24.5 (0.9645) | 89 (3.5039) | 100 (3.9370) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 40 | 31.7 (1.2480) | 102 (4.0157) | 115 (4.5275) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 48 | 38.1 (1.5000) | 127 (5.0000) | 180 (7.0866) |
---------------------------------------------------------
D. NSA935806
(Ref. Fig. 003)
NSA935806 T 10
| | |
| | ------- Size code
| ----------- Conduit code | S code = With metallic braid (20/100)

| | T code = With metallic braid (25/100)

| | Dash (-) code = Without braid
------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Size code
---------------------------------------------------------
| CODE | mm. (in.) | WITHOUT SHEATH | WITH SHEATH |
| | | mm. (in.) | mm. (in.) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 03 | 2.2 (0.0866) | 10 (0.3937) | - |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 04 | 3 (0.1181) | 12 (0.4724) | - |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 06 | 4.8 (0.1889) | 15 (0.5905) | 9 (0.3543) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 09 | 7.1 (0.2795) | 22 (0.8661) | 13 (0.5118) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 10 | 7.9 (0.3110) | 24 (0.9448) | 14 (0.5511) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 12 | 9.5 (0.3740) | 27 (1.0629) | 16 (0.6299) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 14 | 11 (0.4330) | 30 (1.1911) | 18 (0.7086) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 16 | 12.5 (0.4921) | 33 (1.2992) | 20 (0.7874) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 20 | 16 (0.6299) | 45 (1.7716) | 27 (1.0629) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 24 | 19 (0.7480) | 51 (2.0078) | 31 (1.2204) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 28 | 22 (0.8661) | 68 (2.6771) | 35 (1.3779) |
|------|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 32 | 25 (0.9842) | 85 (3.3464) | 45 (1.7716) |
---------------------------------------------------------
3. Installation Requirements
(Refer to 20-33-30 for main installation rules)
(Refer to 20-33-32 for conduit codes S and T)
NOTE: Convoluted conduits ABS0887/NSA935805 must not be connected together by screwing different sizes together.
When system requirements specify a protection (e.g.: 1MG), the protection is necessarily interrupted when passing through a pressure
seal. The protection (conduit ABS0887) must be terminated as close as possible ( 5 mm (0.1968 in.) MAX.) to the pressure seal but
contact with the pressure seal must be avoided.
A. Drain Hole
(Ref. Fig. 002)
A drain hole protects the electrical bundle from liquid accumulated in the conduit.
Drain holes must be provided in all convoluted conduits (e.g.: ABS0887, E0432, NSA935805, NSA935806) with low points, except
for:
- Conduits located on sealed harnesses.
- Conduits located in a pressurized compartment.
- Moving conduits which allow moisture to drain.
- Small conduits whose inside diameter is less than
10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
- Small conduits used inside overbraided bundles.
(Refer to 20-25-52 wire protection tool for the detailed drain hole procedure).
(1) For shielded conduits
For shielded conduits which are made of convoluted conduit, the drain hole is made during manufacture with a specific tool
before delivery and installation.

Drain holes or drain hole zones are identified on either side by yellow sleeves.
Drain holes will be made after installation of the conduit at the lowest point.
NOTE: In addition, drain loops are provided to prevent fluid contamination of the connectors (in lavatories and galleys, by
leaks from water or hydraulic systems,etc.). Same rule for protected or unprotected bundles.
B. Attachment On The Structure
NOTE: For A380 only, at the end of the conduit, attachment points must be at a minimum of
15 mm (0.5905 in.) to 20 mm (0.7874 in.) from the end of the conduit.
NOTE: Crushing of the PEEK conduits ABS0887 is acceptable if there is no tears on the conduit.
(1) By clamps and V supports

(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
-
NSA935807 for conduit NSA935805 only.
-
MS21103 with bobbin NSA935809 for conduit NSA935805 only.
-
ABS1339 for conduits NSA935805 or ABS0887.
-
NSA5515.
-
NSA5516 for conduits NSA935805 or ABS0887.
-
NSA935813.
- Not recommended solution: V support (example NSA935504) + cable tie NSA935401. You must use a minimum of two
layers of tape ASNA5107 to give protection to the conduit ABS0887 and prevent crushing.
NOTE: Tape ASNA5107 must protrude on the two sides of the V-mount support NSA935504 bya minimum of
10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
(2) Installation on an harness

(Ref. Fig. 006)
- When the conduit is integrated in the harness, you must see it. The head of the cable tie must be positionned to prevent
contact on the harness.
-
When several conduits are routed together, you must attach them with cable tie (e.g. NSA935401).
C. Connection
Attachment at the rear of the connector, on the backshell, is done directly or indirectly:
(1) Type 1 attachment (Directly) on open end piece
(Ref. Fig. 007)
It is done with cable tie NSA935401.
Make sure that the cable tie, when tightened, does not crush the conduit too much.
Type 1 attachment must be used in the conditions that follow:
- For a conduit external diameter of less than
10 mm (0.3937 in.) or size code 6.
- For sealed harnesses.
After installation, you must make sure that the installation of the end conduit on the backshell is correct.
(Ref. Fig. 008)
NOTE: Before installation of the cable tie on the ABS0887 conduit, you must wind ASNA5107 tape around it (2 layers
minimum). This will give protection to the conduit from crushing.
NOTE: End piece NSA935829 must be installed in the ABS0887 conduit at the level of the cable tie when it is attached on
the backshell.
WARNING: ALWAYS USE GLOVES WHEN YOU TOUCH VITON MATERIAL. THIS MATERIAL CAN CAUSE INJURY TO
YOUR SKIN.
(2) Type 2 attachment (Indirectly) on closed end piece

(Ref. Fig. 007)

It is made with the end pieces that follow:
E0074 and E0109, straight.
E0115, right angle.
NSA935829.
(a) With E0074 or E0115
Refer to chapter 20-25-52 cable protection tool for the detailed procedure.
Two procedures are used to install convoluted conduits for waterproof harnesses, small diameter.
(b) With E0109
(Ref. Fig. 009)
-
Cut the convoluted conduit to the necessary length.
-
Slide the connector nut, the outer sleeve and the cable clip NSA935811 onto the conduit.
-
Slide the Viton inner sleeve onto the nipple.
- Smooth the conduit end in the heating furnace, pre-heated to approx.
350 deg.C (662.00 deg.F) , when the correct temperature is reached.
- Engage the conduit end into the heating bush, wait until it is flared and slide it onto the nipple with the Viton inner
sleeve (STEP 1).
- Slide the cable clip onto the flared conduit end and install it with a pair of pliers. The pre-tension valve is correct
when the cables tightly wrap the conduit end (STEP 2).
-
Bend the cable loop in the opposite direction.
- Cut off the protruding cable loop with a side cutter (STEP 2) and push or carefully tap down the remaining cable
ends (approx.
5 mm (0.1968 in.) ) with the bottom side of the pliers (STEP 3).
- Slide the Viton outer sleeve over the cable clip (STEP 4), pull the connector forward and tighten it onto the
connector or angle piece.
(c) With NSA935829
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)

20-33-32 - METALLIC CONDUIT (Airbus)
Turn the end pieces to engage them in the protective conduit (Tools are not necessary).
NOTE: NSA935829 end piece must always be installed on each end of the ABS0887 conduit to prevent crushing of the conduit.
(d) With ABS1358, ABS1359, ABS1360, ABS1361, ABS1362, ABS1363, ABS1365, ABS1366
(Ref. Fig. 012)
- Engage the conduit end into the end piece.
- Tighten the end piece on the conduit.
(e) With end piece that has no thread
(Ref. Fig. 012)
- It is made when the convoluted conduit cannot be tightened on the end piece.
- Add a shrinkable sleeve ABS0916 between the conduit and the end piece.
- Shrink the sleeve with the applicable tool.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Convoluted Conduits - Description ABS0887
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Convoluted Conduit - Draining table for convoluted conduits
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Convoluted Conduits - Description EO432, NSA935805 and NSA935806
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Convoluted Conduit - Attachment by clamps
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Convoluted Conduit - Attachment on the Structure
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Convoluted Conduit - Installation on an Harness
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Convoluted Conduit - Attachment at the Rear of the Connector E0432, NSA935805 and NSA935806
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Convoluted Conduit - Acceptance/Rejection Criteria
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Convoluted Conduit - Installation Procedure E0109
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Convoluted Conduit - Installation Procedure NSA935829
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Convoluted Conduit - Installation Procedure NSA935829
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Convoluted Conduit - Installation Procedure with ABS1358 to ABS1363, ABS1365, ABS1366 and with End
Piece that has no Thread
METALLIC CONDUIT (Airbus)
METALLIC CONDUIT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and procedures for the installation of metallic conduits.
Metallic tubes:
These are used for cable routing when mechanical protection of the cables is necessary, when the conduit must be rigid or to get over areas
that you cannot access.
Screened, convoluted and overbraided conduits:
The metallic braid parts are used to give electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) between all the electrical equipment of the aircraft and to
prevent electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency interference (RFI).
The other parts (convoluted, textile and halar (E-CTFE) conduits) are used to give mechanical protection to the harness.
The metallic conduits installed on the aircraft are divided into 3 sub-families and have the codes that follow:
- Metallic tubes:
NSA3625

- Screened, convoluted conduits:

. Without halar sheath:
ABS0330
ABS0492
ABS0631
ABS0887B
E0469
E0560
NSA935805T
NSA935806T or S
. With halar (E-CTFE) sheath:
ABS0510
ABS0511
ABS0887C
- Overbraided conduits:
ABS1353-003
ABS5315 (For example, used for F00030090 or F00730606)
2. Metallic Tube NSA3625
A. P/N Identification
NSA3625 - 8 - 24
| | |
| | ----- Length code
| ---------- Diameter code
----------------- Standard P/N
B. Procedure
(1) General
This type of harness protection has a different size and geometry which are in relation to the aircraft type and the area where it is
installed.
Before installation of the metallic conduits, the procedures that follow are necessary:
- Flaring at the ends and forming to adapt them to the necessary route.
- External and internal treatment for corrosion protection and cable harness protection.
- When specified on the drawing, a drain hole at the lowest point of the conduit.
(2) Drain hole procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
If necessary, make drain holes.
NOTE: For metallic conduits, the drain hole will be made with a specific tool, and in the workshop, before installation on the cable
harness.
- Drill a hole with an applicable tool at the lowest point of the tube.
- Put the point of tool 59-3-02-24799 or 59-3-02-25151 into this hole for a curved tube or equivalent.
- Install and lock the tube in position with the supports.
With a portable drill, turn the dimpling tool and pull it out.
NOTE: The bend radius must be 6D. As much as possible, if a pipe is bent in many locations, you must use the same bend radius.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the cables, the metallic tubes must have an internal protection. (E.g. PEEK, FEP, etc.)
3. Screened, Convoluted Conduits

ABS0330 - 05
ABS0492 - 06
ABS0510 - 05 A
ABS0511 - 06 A
ABS0631 06 A
| | |
| | ------ Type code | No code = Without drain hole
| | | A = With drain hole
| --------- Size code
----------------- Standard P/N
E0469 A 09
E0560 A 09
| | |
| | ------ Size code
| --------- Metal type code | A = Nickel-plated copper

------------- Standard P/N

NSA935805 T 12 A
NSA935806 T 12 |
| | | |
| | | ------ Type code | No code = E0759 specification
| | | | A = ABS0746 specification
| | |
| | ---------- Diameter type code
| ------------- Conduit type code | S = With braid (20/100)*
| | T = With braid (25/100)*
| | - = Without braid
--------------------- Standard P/N
* diameter of strands
ABS0887 B 06
| | |
| | ---- Size code
| -------- Type code | A = Peek conduit (lightweight) Refer to 20-33-31
| | B = Peek conduit + braid
| | C = Peek conduit + braid + halar (E-CTFE) sheath
-------------- Standard P/N
B. P/N Characteristics
(Ref. Fig. 002)
NOTE: For the characteristics of NSA935805 and NSA935806, refer to chapter 20-33-31 - Convoluted conduits.
(1) Temperature
- For ABS0492, ABS0510, ABS0511, ABS0887B and C, E0469, E0560, NSA935805T and NSA935806T:
- For ABS0330 and ABS0631:
- For ABS0492, ABS0510, ABS0511 and ABS0887C:
- For ABS0330, ABS0631, ABS0887B, E0469, E0560, NSA935805T and NSA935806T:
(2) Size code (only for ABS0887B and ABS0887C, E0469 and E0560)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | INTERNAL DIAMETER mm (in.) |
| SIZE CODE |-------------------------------------------------------|
| | ABS0887B and ABS0887C | E0469 and E0560 |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 04 | - | 3 (0.118) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 06 | 4.6 (0.181) | 4.6 (0.181) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 09 | 7 (0.275) | 7 (0.275) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 10 | 7.6 (0.299) | 7.6 (0.299) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 12 | 9.6 (0.378) | 8.2 (0.322) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 14 | 10.8 (0.425) | 10.8 (0.425) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 16 | 12.3 (0.484) | 12.3 (0.484) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 20 | 15.6 (0.614) | 15.6 (0.614) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 24 | 19 (0.748) | 19 (0.748) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 28 | 21.8 (0.858) | 21.8 (0.858) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 32 | 25 (0.984) | 24.5 (0.964) |
|---------------------|----------------------------|--------------------------|
| 40 | 31.4 (1.236) | - |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Procedures

(1) Drain holes

(Ref. Fig. 003)
NOTE: You can only make drain holes before installation of the conduit on the harness and before installation of the end assembly.
NOTE: In unpressurized areas and pressurized hazardous areas, conduits ABS0887 (screened or not) and conduits NSA935805
without a low point must be drained. This is not applicable for:
- Sealed harnesses.
- Moving conduits, which let moisture drain freely at one end.
- Small conduits, sizes 02, 03 and 04.
NOTE: For screened conduits, drain holes must be put in position around the conduit periphery during manufacturing (no hole in the
screen).
- Only for conduits with halar sheath (step 1):

Use a soldering iron to cut a 20 mm (0.7874 in.) long window in the E-CTFE braid.
The window width must not be more than 30% of the protective conduit circumference.
- Engage a plastic rod in the conduit until it is behind the hole position.
In the necessary hole position, use a blunt needle to put the braid aside with circular movements. (Step 2)
-
Make sure that you find a "crest" of the convoluted hose below.
-
Punch a hole in the convoluted hose with punch pliers or equivalent. (Step 3)
- To make sure that the hole in the braid cannot move in relation to the holes in the convoluted hose, use cable ties to prevent
braid movement. Put them on each side and at a distance of approximately
10 mm (0.3937 in.) to 15 mm (0.5905 in.) from the hole (step 4).
- Engage an applicable mandrel in the hole and solder the braid around the hole along a width of approximately
2 mm (0.0787 in.) to 3 mm (0.1181 in.) . (Step 4)
- Only for conduits with halar sheath (step 5):
Slide a heat-shrinkable sleeve E0718 over the drain hole. The heat-shrinkable sleeve must also have a drain hole.
Shrink the heat-shrinkable sleeve.
(2) Cable protection at conduit end
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
At the end of the conduit and in the area of connecting parts or transitions, the cables and metal parts must not touch.
You must thus give protection to the harness with a protection NSA937210 or ABS5330 or ABS0294 or ASNA5107B or equivalent
which is split and then wound a minimum of two times around the cable harness (you must not shrink it) and attached with lacing
tape NSA8420 or NSA5516.
You must hold the full harness at the conduit outlet to prevent all movement.
(3) Assembly procedure for conduit end with backshell or end fitting
NOTE: If necessary, you must do the locking procedure after you tighten the backshell.
(a) For conduits without halar sheath (ABS0330, ABS0492, ABS0631, ABS0887B, E0469, E0560, NSA935805T and NSA935806T)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
With backshell (ABS0581) or with end piece and conduit fitting (ABS0513, ABS0519, ABS0582, ABS0584 and ABS1023):
Select the conduit end-fitting size in relation to the size of the screened, convoluted conduit.
- Put the related crimping sleeve on the end of the conduit.
- Put the braid back on the convoluted conduit.
- Decrease the length of the conduit by length "A".

Overbraided Conduits
- Select the applicable size for the expansion tool ICORE 16-0987 (Refer to chapter: Wire
protection tools - 20-25-52).
This tool is used to expand the convoluted conduit for easy assembly with the connecting
part.
-
Engage the convoluted conduit until it touches the shoulder, on the connecting part.
-
Put the braid on the shoulder (cut all frayed material at the braid edge).
-
Put the crimping sleeve on the braid until it touches the stop on the connecting part.
- Select the applicable size for the hydraulic/pneumatic crimping tool ICORE 16-0803 or
ICORE 19600 or REMA 58006-00 or THOMAS & BETTS WT3176G or IZUMI 404062
(model 15) (Refer to chapter: Wire protection tools - 20-25-52).
-
Crimp the sleeve with this applicable tool.
- A space of
0.4 mm (0.0157 in.) maximum between the sleeve and connecting part is permitted after
crimping.
- Apply corrosion protection on the space: ARDROX AV30 (Material No. 15-008) or
equivalent (For detailed procedure, refer to chapter: Protection - Main Procedure - 20-33-
30).
(b) For conduits with halar (E-CTFE) sheath (ABS0510, ABS0511 and ABS0887C)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
With backshell (ABS0327, ABS0581) or with end piece and conduit fitting (ABS0519, ABS0582,
ABS0584 and ABS1023):
-
Engage the related crimping sleeve on the end of the conduit.
- Decrease the length of the E-CTFE braid by
10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
-
Engage the braid and E-CTFE braid back on the convoluted conduit.
- Decrease the length of the convoluted conduit by
5 mm (0.1968 in.) .
- Select the applicable size for the expansion tool ICORE 16-0987 (Refer to chapter: Wire
protection tools - 20-25-52).
This tool is used to expand the convoluted conduit for easy assembly with the connecting
part.
-
Engage the convoluted conduit until it touches the shoulder, on the connecting part.
- Engage the braid on the shoulder and against the E-CTFE. (Cut all frayed materialat the
braid edge)
-
Engage the crimping sleeve on the braid until it touches the stop on the connecting part.
- Select the applicable size for the hydraulic/pneumatic crimping tool ICORE 16-0803 or
ICORE 19600 or REMA 58006-00 or THOMAS & BETTS WT3176G or IZUMI 404062.
(Model 15) (Refer to chapter: Wire protection tools - 20-25-52)
NOTE: The crimping procedure is in two steps. The dies have two crimp cavities, identified "1"
and "2", for each step.
- Install the correct dies on the tool.

- Put the connecting part in the tool with crimp cavity "1" until the stop side of the sleeve is
aligned with the edge.
-
Make sure that the parts which stay loose are held in the correct position.
-
Operate the foot switch to start the crimping process.
- Hold the foot switch down until the dies move together and the pressure of the tool
hydraulics increases.
- When step "1" of the procedure is completed, remove the connecting part from crimp cavity
"1", turn it 90 degrees and put it in position in die crimp cavity "2" as for cavity "1".
-
Do the same procedure as for cavity "1".
-
Crimp the sleeve with this applicable tool.
- A space of
0.4 mm (0.0157 in.) maximum between the sleeve and connecting part is permitted after
crimping.
- Apply corrosion protection on the space: ARDROX AV30 (Material No. 15-008) or
equivalent. (For detailed procedure, refer to chapter: Protection - Main Procedure - 20-33-
30)
D. Spare Conduit
You can install spare conduit ABS0887 in the pressure seal to make the installation of cables easier
during the lifetime of the aircraft.
The spare conduit must be installed on harnesses. The conduit length that is not in the pressure seal must
be 60 mm (2.3622 in.) to give two repairs.
The section of the spare conduit must be at least 20% of the harness section.
4. Overbraided Conduits
A. Principle
This type of protection is made of metal strands (ABS5315) machine woven around the electrical harness
during its manufacture.
(For example, this method is used for F00030090 or F00730606 or ABS1353-003)
Several layers are installed:
- An internal protection (ABS0887 or ABS0916 or ABS5330 or ABS0294) between the electrical harness
and the metal braid layer.
- An external protection (ABS0894 or ABS0890 or ABS5334 or EN6049-006/-007) around the metal braid.
NOTE: ABS0890 and ABS0894 are made of E-CTFE (HALAR) and give protection to the metallic
overbraid.
ABS0894 has E-CTFE strands which are machine woven during manufacture of the harness.
ABS0890 is used for repair or when it is not possible to weave ABS0894 during manufacture.
NOTE: More overbraided harnesses must be added out of the harnesses for modifications and repairs.
There is no specified limit on the number of modification kits you can install. The only limit is the
capacity of the backshell.
B. Assembly Procedure For Conduit End With Backshell

(Ref. Fig. 008)
(1) Example of installation:
- Install the braid on the cables (if necessary, first install an internal protection with teflon tape
ABS5330 or ABS0294, convoluted conduit ABS0887 or shrink sleeve NSA937210 and then the
backshell (e.g. backshells ABS0280 or ABS0281) before you connect them to the connector).

-
Identify the metal-overbraid start-stop points with red vinyl adhesive tape ABS5332.
- Make a bonding pigtail at each conduit end of the metal overbraid, on the internal protection
when the length is less than
3 m (9.84 ft.) . For lengths of more than 3 m (9.84 ft.) , there must be intermediate points with a
maximum pitch of 3 m (9.84 ft.) .
This bonding pigtail must have a length of 100 mm (3.9370 in.) to 250 mm (9.8425 in.) . 100 mm
(3.9370 in.) is the recommended length.
- If necessary, you can install an external protection. (Self-welding tape ABS5334, split textile
conduit EN6049-006 or 007, or halar (E-CTFE) braid ABS0890)
(a) Screw the backshell on the connector. (Step 1)
(b) If necessary, install the grounding pigtail around the internal protection and attach it with internal
lacing tape. (Step 2)
-
Put the overbraid end on the backshell.
- You must fold the overbraid end to length "L" and cut it to keep sharp protruding strands to
a minimum.
-
Attach the bonding pigtail area with external lacing tape NSA8420-7.
NOTE: Strand ends must not extend onto the backshell end.
(c) Install a metallic clamping strip E0805-02. (Step 3)

- Wrap the overbraid with self-welding tape ABS5334 at pigtail area.
(d) Tighten the clamp with tool GLENAIR 600-058, BAND-IT A30199 or A40199 or equivalent.
- Wind spirals of self-welding tape in each direction, with a 51% overlap.
- At the end of the spirals, install overlaps of tape. (Step 4)
(2) Crimping end attachment with self-welding tape ABS5334, external protection (case A)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(3) Crimping end attachment with external protection ABS0890, ABS0894, EN6049-006 or 007 (case B)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(4) Crimping end attachment without external protection (case C)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(5) Crimping protection
(Ref. Fig. 009)
When a metallic clamping strip is used, it is necessary to use 5 layers of self-welding tape ABS5334,
to give protection to the harness. (From the cutting edge)
C. Spare Conduits And Spare Cables
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(1) To do modification and maintenance operations on more cables, a spare convoluted-type conduit
(PTFE or equivalent) can be related to the harness.
The conduit size must be a minimum of 20% of the harness section with a minimum diameter of 9
mm (0.3543 in.) .
Make sure that the draw cable is installed in the spare conduit before installation in the harness.
(2) It can be necessary to prepare for more spare cables in the protection.
- The number of spare cables (of the same gauge as the functional cables) must be a minimum of
20% of the number of functional cables in the harness.
-
You must identify the spare cables with a sleeve that has a "spare wire" label and an insulating

end cap NSA936601 at each end. In a harness protection, you must wind teflon tape ABS5330
around the end cap to prevent chafing on the cable.
(3) Examples of installation
(Ref. Fig. 010)
Installation with:
- Backshell and connector
- End fitting
- Pressure seal.
5. Installation Requirements
(Refer to 20-33-30 for main installation rules)
A. Conduit Attachments On The Structure
(Ref. Fig. 011)
-
Conduits are attached with clamps along the conduit run and at the conduit ends.
- If a lightning protection conduit is connected to a non-conductive connector or not electrically
connected at the end fitting, you can install a bonding clamp on the crimping sleeve. This gives
electrical bonding between the conduit and the main aircraft structure.
After installation, you must make sure that the installation of the end conduit on the backshell is correct.
(Ref. Fig. 012)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Metallic Tube - Drain Holes and Tube Preparation NSA3625
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Screened, Convoluted Conduits - P/N Characteristics and Description
ABS0330/0492/0510/0511/0631/887B and C, E0469, E0560 and NSA935805T/806T
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Screened, Convoluted Conduits - Drain Holes ABS0330, ABS0492, ABS0510,
ABS0511, ABS0631, E0469, E0560 and NSA935805T/806T
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Screened, Convoluted Conduits - Cable Protection at Conduit End
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Screened, Cable Protection at Conduit End
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Screened, Convoluted Conduits - Without Halar Sheath-Conduit End Assembly
ABS0513, ABS0519, ABS0581, ABS0582, ABS0584, ABS0887B and ABS1023
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Screened, Convoluted Conduits - With Halar Sheath-Conduit End Assembly
ABS0327, ABS0519, ABS0581, ABS0582, ABS0584, ABS0887C and ABS1023
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Overbraided Conduits - Conduit End Assembly ABS1353-003 and ABS5315
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Overbraided Conduits - Crimping End Attachment with Backshell ABS1353-003
and ABS5315
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Overbraided Conduits - Spare Conduit and Cable ABS5315

Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Screened, Convoluted Conduits - Attachments and Bonding
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Metallic Conduit - Acceptance/Rejection Criteria
MISCELLANEOUS CONDUITS (Airbus)
MISCELLANEOUS CONDUITS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and operation for flexible conduits. As a general rule, flexible conduits are
items used for mechanical protection of the harnesses with more flexibility (hinges) or segregation (arc-
tracking protection), but this is related to the type of flexible conduit and the areas. For more information, refer
to chapter: 20-33-30 (conduit selection paragraph).
This family of conduits is flexible with a larger bend radius than convoluted conduits.
The main flexible conduits installed on aircraft are divided into 2 sub-families and have the codes that follow:
- Open (split) conduits:
ABS0596 - Split elastomer conduit
ABS1552 - Split textile conduit
E0507 - Split textile conduit
EN6049-005 - Split textile conduit
EN6049-008 - Split shielded textile conduit
- Closed conduits:
ABS0125 - Fuel immersion conduit
E0389 - High temperature conduit
EN6049-003 - Expandable conduit
EN6049-004 - Expandable conduit
NOTE: You must not install split conduits in:

Fire areas,
Inaccessible areas,
Fluid immersion areas.
2. Open (split) Conduits:

A. ABS0596

Open (split) Conduits:
(Ref. Fig. 001)

ABS0596 M 001
| | |
| | ------- Size code
| ------------ Type code| M = Double channel section
| | S = Split tube section
| | U = Single channel section
------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Material code
This type of conduit is made of woven aramid and moulded in silicone elastomer.
It gives mechanical and electrical protection to the harness.
(b) Temperature
Maximum operating temperature is 225 deg.C (437.00 deg.F) and 260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F) for 168 operating hours maximum.
(c) Size code
M code
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | DIMENSION D | DIMENSION F | SUPPLY LENGTH |
| CODE | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | mm (in.) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|---------------------|
| 001 | 8 (0.3149) | 8 (0.3149) | 300 (11.8110) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|---------------------|
| 002 | 18 (0.7086) | 9 (0.3543) | 300 (11.8110) |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
S code
----------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | INNER DIA. B | SUPPLY LENGTH |
| CODE | mm (in.) | mm (in.) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| 001 | 6.5 (0.2559) | 300 (11.8110) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| 002 | 9 (0.3543) | 300 (11.8110) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| 003 | 18 (0.7086) | 300 (11.8110) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| 004 | 6.5 (0.2559) | 1000 (39.3701) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| 005 | 9 (0.3543) | 1000 (39.3701) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| 006 | 18 (0.7086) | 1000 (39.3701) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| 007 | 25 (0.9842) | 1000 (39.3701) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| 008 | 38 (1.4960) | 1000 (39.3701) |
----------------------------------------------------
U code
----------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | DIMENSION D | SUPPLY LENGTH |
| CODE | mm (in.) | mm (in.) |
|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| 001 | 18 (0.7086) | 300 (11.8110) |
----------------------------------------------------
(3) Installation procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
-
Select the applicable size. (Refer to the IPC manual or to 20-33-30)
-
Cut to the applicable length.

- Put the harness into the conduit and safety with NSA935401 cable ties along its length at approximately
100 mm (3.9370 in.) intervals.
-
Install more NSA935401 cable ties in the areas where the conduit is loose.
-
Safety each conduit end with two NSA935401 cable ties.
- If necessary, add an NSA935401 cable tie on the harness, as near as possible to the conduit, to prevent movement of the
conduit on the harness.
- If you safety the conduit end with clamps, make sure that the protusion of the conduit is between
10 mm (0.3937 in.) and 15 mm (0.5905 in.) approximately.
NOTE: After installation, it is necessary for the overlap angle of the conduit to be 90 deg. minimum. If not, replace it with the
subsequent larger size.
B. ABS1552
(Ref. Fig. 003)
ABS1552 - 05
| |
| ----------------- Size code
------------------------ Standard P/N
(a) Material code
This type of conduit is made of polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) monofilament.
It gives mechanical protection to the harness.
(b) Temperature
(c) Size code
----------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | INNER DIA. | SUPPLY LENGTH L |
| CODE | mm (in.) | m (ft) |
|--------------------------------------------------------------|
| 05 | 1 to 5 | 150 |
| | (0.04 to 0.20) | (492.12) |
|--------------------------------------------------------------|
| 08 | 5 to 8 | 100 |
| | (0.20 to 0.31) | (328.08) |
|--------------------------------------------------------------|
| 13 | 8 to 13 | 50 |
| | (0.31 to 0.51) | (164.04) |
|--------------------------------------------------------------|
| 19 | 13 to 19 | |
| | (0.51 to 0.75) | |
|---------------------------------| |
| 25 | 19 to 25 | |
| | (0.75 to 0.98) | 25 |
|---------------------------------| (82.02) |
| 32 | 25 to 32 | |
| | (0.98 to 1.26) | |
|---------------------------------| |
| 38 | 32 to 38 | |
| | (1.26 to 1.50) | |
----------------------------------------------------------------
(Ref. Fig. 002)
- Select the applicable size.
- Cut to the applicable length with scissors in one cold pass.
- Wind the conduit around the harness with 3 twists for each
1 m (3.28 ft.)
- The conduit must not be folded on the harness.
C. E0507
(Ref. Fig. 004)
Removable split textile conduit E0507 is superseded by EN6049-005.


E0507 B01 V
| | |
| | ------- Color code | V = Olive green
| ------------ Size code
------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Material
This type of conduit is made of aromatic polyamide textile tape.
(b) Temperature
(c) Size code
-----------------------------------------------
| SIZE | INNER DIA. D |
| CODE | mm (in.) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| B01 | 10 (0.3937) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| B02 | 15 (0.5905) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| B03 | 20 (0.7874) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| C04 | 25 (0.9842) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| C05 | 30 (1.1811) |
-----------------------------------------------
(Ref. Fig. 004)
- Select the applicable size. (Refer to the IPC manual or to 20-33-30)
- Cut to the applicable length.
- Wind the conduit around the harness.
- Make sure that the gripping strips are locked. (The male self-gripping must cover the female strip as shown)
- Secure with a cable tie NSA935401 at each end of the conduit.
NOTE: The self-gripping fastening strips of these conduits let you install them on or remove them from existing harnesses.
D. EN6049-005
(Ref. Fig. 005)
EN6049-005 20 5
| | |
| | ------- Color code | 5 = Olive green
| ------------ Size code
-------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Material
This type of conduit is made of meta-aramid multifilament fibers with a water-repellent protection.
It gives mechanical protection to the harness.
(b) Temperature
(c) Size code
----------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | WIDTH OF CLOSING | DEVELOPED WIDTH (b) | MAX. HARNESS DIA. |
| CODE | STRIP (a) mm(in.) | mm (in.) | mm (in.) |
|------|--------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | 45 (1.7716) | |
| 10 | | + 4 (0.1574) | 10 (0.3937) |
| | | - 4 (0.1574) | |
|------| 13 (0.5118) |---------------------|-------------------|
| | | 60 (2.3622) | |

| 15 | + 2 (0.0787) | + 6 (0.2362) | 15 (0.5905) |

| | - 2 (0.0787) | - 6 (0.2362) | |
|------| |---------------------|-------------------|
| | | 75 (2.9527) | |
| 20 | | + 7 (0.2755) | 20 (0.7874) |
| | | - 7 (0.2755) | |
|------|--------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | 105 (4.1338) | |
| 25 | 25 (0.9842) | + 10 (0.3937) | 25 (0.9842) |
| | | - 10 (0.3937) | |
|------| + 1 (0.0394) |---------------------|-------------------|
| | - 1 (0.0394) | 120 (4.7244) | |
| 30 | | + 12 (0.4724) | 30 (1.1811) |
| | | - 12 (0.4724) | |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
- Wind the conduit around the harness.
- Make sure that the gripping strips are correctly locked.
- Safety with a cable tie NSA935401 at each end of the conduit.
NOTE: To give protection to bundles with a diameter larger than

30 mm (1.1811 in.) , you can wind the conduit in a spiral.
NOTE: In pressurized areas, attach the conduit with lacing tape NSA8420.
NOTE: The self-gripping fastening strips of these conduits let you install them on or remove them from the circuits already in
position.
E. EN6049-006 and EN6049-007

(Ref. Fig. 006)
EN6049-006 05 R 5
EN6049-007 05 - 5
| | | |
| | | --- Color code | 2 = Red
| | | | 3 = Orange
| | | | 5 = Olive green
| | ------- Tracer line identification code:
| | | P = With pink tracer line
| | | R = With red tracer line
| | | Dash (-) = Without tracer line
| ------------ Size code
-------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Material
This type of conduit is made of meta-aramid and:
- Polyphenylenesulfide (PPS) monofilament fibers. (For EN6049-006)
- Polyetheretherketone (PEEK) multifilament fibers. (For EN6049-007)
EN6049-006 is used to give mechanical protection to the harness.
EN6049-007 is used to give mechanical and electrical protection to the harness.
(b) Temperature
For EN6049-006:
For EN6049-007:
(c) Tracer line identification code
This line is used to identify the conduit type:
- Red tracer line: Arm systems.
- Pink tracer line: Fuel systems.

(d) Size code

---------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | OVERLAP ANGLE | MAX. HARNESS DIA. |
| CODE | MEASURED | mm (in.) |
|------|-------------------|----------------------------------------|
| 05 | | 1 (0.0393) to 5 (0.1968) |
|------| Min. 65 deg. |----------------------------------------|
| 08 | | 5 (0.1968) to 8 (0.3149) |
|------| Max. 130 deg. |----------------------------------------|
| 13 | | 8 (0.3149) to 13 (0.5118) |
|------|-------------------|----------------------------------------|
| 19 | | 13 (0.5118) to 19 (0.7480) |
|------| |----------------------------------------|
| 25 | Min. 70 deg. | 19 (0.7480) to 25 (0.9842) |
|------| |----------------------------------------|
| 32 | Max. 110 deg. | 25 (0.9842) to 32 (1.2598) |
|------| |----------------------------------------|
| 40 | | 32 (1.2598) to 40 (1.5748) |
---------------------------------------------------------------------

(Ref. Fig. 002)

(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
-
Select the applicable size. (Refer to the IPC manual or to 20-33-30)
- You must adapt the size of the open conduit to the diameter of the harness until the lip overlap angle is 90 deg. nominal, 135
deg. max. and 45 deg. min.
-
Cut to the applicable length with scissors in one cold pass.
- Wind the conduit around the harness with 3 twists for each meter. (If necessary,you can increase the number of twists: E.g. in
curves)
- For sizes 05, 08, 13 and 19, for easier installation, you can use the ROUNDIT 5-19 tool. (Refer to chapter 20-25-52 for the
detailed procedure)
-
The conduit must not be folded on the harness.
-
There is no direction for the overlap of the conduit.
- The internal ivory line shows the maximum permitted harness. This line must be on the inner side after assembly and must
not be in view.
-
Attach the conduit along the length of the harness with NSA935401-3 cable ties:
(a) Near the ends of the harness ( 450 MM (17.7165 IN.) before the ends), attach the conduit at approximately 150 MM (5.9055
IN.) intervals.
(b) In straight sections (but not when they are in SWAMP areas, in the areas where the conduit is loose or near the end of the
harness), you must increase the interval to 500 mm (19.6850 in.) .
(c) In SWAMP areas, attach the conduit at approximately 150 mm (5.9055 in.) intervals,
- Attach with two NSA935401-05 cable ties at each end of the conduit. One of the cable ties is
20 mm (0.7874 in.) from the end of the conduit.
-
Attach with a NSA935401-05 cable tie at the backshell of a connector.
- If necessary (e.g.: Risk of movement of a conduit put in the middle of a harness between 2 attachment points), add an
NSA935401 cable tie on the harness, as near as possible to the conduit, to prevent movement of the conduit on the
harness.
NOTE: At standard items (e.g.: Splices, diodes, etc.) there must be a minimum overlap of 30 deg. If it is less than 30 deg, you
must add a split conduit of the next larger size.
NOTE: In confined or hot areas, you must replace NSA935401-03 cable ties with lacing tape NSA8420.
NOTE: You must use lacing tape NSA8420 when there is a risk of contact between the cable tie and the unprotected
harnesses after installation.
NOTE: If an adhesive label ABS5342 is necessary, you must install it between the lips of the conduit before attachment with
cable ties.
(4) Specific installations (At Branches)

(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
(a) Direct multiple branches
(Ref. Fig. 009)
1 to 4 harnesses maximum (protected or not) are branched off from the main harness EN6049-006/007.
(b) Multiple branches by sleeve
(Ref. Fig. 009)
1 to 4 harnesses maximum (open conduits EN6049-006/007) are branched off from the main harness EN6049-006/007. This
is specially used when the overlap of the main conduit in the branch area is not sufficient. (Less than 30%)
(c) Simple branch (open conduit/open conduit)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
1 to 2 harnesses maximum (open conduits EN6049-006/007) are branched off from the main harness EN6049-006/007.

(d) Simple branch (open conduit/unprotected harness)

(Ref. Fig. 010)
An unprotected harness is branched off from the main harness EN6049-006/007.
(e) Simple branch (open conduit/rigid conduit)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
A harness protected by a rigid conduit is branched off from the main harness EN6049-006/007.
(f) Simple branch (unprotected harness/open conduit)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
A harness (open conduit EN6049-006/007) is branched off from the main unprotected harness.
(g) T branch
(Ref. Fig. 011)
The branch area is not protected by the open conduit. On each branch it stops 10 mm (0.3937 in.) from the start of the
curvature.
(h) Simple connection (open conduit/rigid conduit)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
On the main harness, a rigid conduit is connected to an open conduit.
F. EN6049-008
EN6049-008 is a self-wrapping protection sleeve.
(Ref. Fig. 012)
EN6049-008 - 06 P 5
---------- -- - -
| | | |
| | | --- Color | 5 = Olive green
| | -------- Tape type | P = With PTFE tape
| | | W = Without PTFE tape
| ------------- Size code
----------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Operating temperature
(a) Material
This type of conduit is made of meta-aramid and Polyphenylenesulfide (PPS) monofilament and nickel-plated copper braid.
It gives mechanical and EMI protection to the harness.
(3) Size code
------------------------------------------
| SIZE | HARNESS | | TYPE |
| CODE | DIA MAX | OVERLAP ANGLE | CODE |
| | mm (in.) | | |
|------|----------|---------------|------|
| 05 | 1 to 5 | | |
|------|----------| | |
| 06 | 5 to 6 | 65 deg | |
|------|----------| to | P |
| 11 | 6 to 11 | 130 deg | |
|------|----------| | |
| 17 | 11 to 17 | | |
|------|----------|---------------| |
| 23 | 17 to 23 | | W |
|------|----------| 70 deg | |
| 30 | 23 to 30 | to | |
|------|----------| 110 deg | |
| 38 | 30 to 38 | | |
------------------------------------------
----------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | THICKNESS mm (in.) |
|-----------|--------------------|
| P | 1.59 (0.0625) |
|-----------|--------------------|
| W | 1.50 (0.0590) |
----------------------------------

(4) Tracer line identification

- A Blue tracer line identify the shielding protection. An Ivory tracer line identify the maximum harness permissible diameter.
(Ref. Fig. 013)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
(Ref. Fig. 015)
NOTE: Do not use the EN6049-008 conduit on movable harnesses.
(a) Preparation
(Ref. Fig. 016)
1 Step 1
- Cut the end of the EN6049-008 conduit with scissors in one pass. (Cut straight the full width of the conduit)
- Carefully remove and cut loose fibers on the edge of the conduit.
2 Step 2
- on the external side of the conduit, cut and remove the sewn green meta-aramid wire to a length of
40 mm (1.5748 in.) from the end of the conduit. (You can use a cutter or a scalpel)
3 Step 3
- Remove the internal protection.
NOTE: This step is only applicable to EN6049-008P conduits.
Use a scalpel or a cutter to cut the internal PTFE protection at a distance of 5 mm (0.1968 in.) from the end of the conduit.
(Do not cut the metal layer)
Cut the internal TPTFE protection a second time at a distance of 40 mm (1.5748 in.) from the end of the conduit. (Do not
cut the metal layer)
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT YOU USE HAND GLOVES TO PREVENT INJURY WHEN YOU INSTALL EN6049-008
CONDUIT BY HAND.
(b) Installation on harness

(Ref. Fig. 017)
- Put the EN6049-008 conduit on the harness. To install size 6, 11 and 17 conduits, you can use the ROUNDIT 5-19 tool.
(Refer to 20-25-52 for full instructions)
- Wind 2 turns of the EN6049-008 conduit (size 6, 11 and 17) around the harness at
- Wind 1 turn of the EN6049-008 conduit (size 23, 30 and 38) around the harness at
- Attach the conduit along the full harness with NSA935401-3 or NSA8420-7 at
(c) Installation on backshells or on accessory branch. (For example: ABS0885)
(Ref. Fig. 018)
- Put the EN6049-008 conduit on the harness.
- Put the metal layer of the EN6049-008 conduit on the backshell.
- Attach the EN6049-008 conduit on the backshell with a metal clamping strip E0805-02.
- Apply ABS5334-01 tape to the metal clamping-strip area.
(d) Installation of the EN6049-008 conduit with a bonding pigtail.
1 Installation of a bonding pigtail not at the end of the EN6049-008 conduit.
(Ref. Fig. 019)
- At the area where you install the bonding pigtail, use scissors to cut a strip that is
40 mm (1.5748 in.) wide in the meta-aramid layer, and remove it. (Do not cut the metal layer)
-
Open the EN6049-008 conduit to install two half shells E0940 of an applicable size around the harness.
-
Close the metal layer of the EN6049-008 conduit on the half shells.
-
Put the bonding pigtail on the metal layer.
- Clamp the bonding pigtal and the metal layer of the EN6049-008 conduit with ametal clamping strip E0805-02 at the
center of the half shells.
- Apply ABS5334-01 tape to the full area with an overlap of
15 mm (0.5905 in.) on the two sides of the half shells.
2 Installation of the bonding pigtail at the end of the EN6049-008 conduit.
(Ref. Fig. 019)

- At the end of the EN6049-008 conduit, cut and remove the last
70 mm (2.7559 in.) of the meta-aramid layer. (Do not cut the metal layer)
- Open the EN6049-008 conduit on the last
70 mm (2.7559 in.) of the conduit to install the two hal shells ABS0940 of an applicable size on the harness.
- Put the half shells at a distance of
- Fold itself the metal layer of the EN6049-008 conduit on the half shells at a distance of
-
Put the bonding pigtail on the metal layer of the EN6049-008 conduit.
- Clamp the bonding pigtail and the metal layer of the EN6049-008 conduit with a metal clamping strip E0805-02 at
the center of the half shells.
- Apply ABS5334-01 tape to the full area with an overlap of
15 mm (0.5905 in.) on the two sides of the halfs shells.
G. EN6049-009
(Ref. Fig. 020)
EN6049-009 - 10
| |
| ------------------------ Size code
--------------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Material
This multi-layer conduit gives protection against fire to harnesses for five minutes. Made of three different materials attached
edge to edge, it is self-wrapping and can be opened.
(b) Temperature
Resistance to fire is five minutes at 1100 deg.C (2012.00 deg.F) .
(c) Size code
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | INNER DIA. mm (in.) | SUPPLY LENGTH L |
| CODE | | m (ft) |
|------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| 10 | 5 to 10 (0.2 to 0.39) | 25 (82.02) |
|--------------------------------------------| |
| 16 | 10 to 16 (0.39 to 0.63) | |
|------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| 24 | 16 to 24 (0.63 to 0.94) | |
|--------------------------------------------| 15 (49.21) |
| 32 | 24 to 32 (0.94 to 1.26) | |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Ref. Fig. 020)

Closed Conduit
(Ref. Fig. 021)

(Ref. Fig. 022)
-
Select the applicable size.
-
Cut to the applicable length in one cold pass with a standard tool such as scissors.
- To use the maximum diameter indicator correctly, make sure that the position of the ivory line is
correct on the overlap direction.
Step 1
-
Put the harness into the conduit EN6049-009.
- Close the left side of the conduit on the harness. Make sure that the conduit is tightly wound.
Step 2
- Hold the closure of the conduit in position with a cable tie
30 mm (1.1811 in.) from the end.
Step 3
- Close the conduit along the full length of the area to be given protection.
Step 4
- Twist the conduit. You must twist the conduit on the harness at
300 mm (11.8110 in.) intervals on average. Do not twist the conduit too much. Make only one
turn each 300 mm (11.8110 in.) .
- Attach the twist at
300 mm (11.8110 in.) intervals with a cable tie and continue.
Step 5
- Install lacing tape NSA8420-9 each
100 mm (3.9370 in.) .
Step 6
- Remove and discard all the cable ties installed in steps 2 to 4.
Step 7
- Sleeve the ends with self-adhesive silicone tape ABS5334-01 to make sure that no fluid can go
into the harness.
(4) End of conduits
(Ref. Fig. 023)
On connectors backshells or termination branches, you must tie the conduits on the harness with cable
ties NSA935401-03 or lacing tape NSA8420-9. You must then add a wrapped layer of EN6049-009-00
to terminate to backshells and breakouts and attach with lacing tape NSA8420-9.
NOTE: Before installation of EN6049-009-00, you can add silicone self-adhesive tape ABS5334-01 to
complete the ends. This adds local waterproof protection.
3. Closed Conduit
(Ref. Fig. 024)
A. ABS0125
ABS0125 03
| |
| ------------ Size code
-------------------- Standard P/N

Closed Conduit
(a) Temperature
(b) Size code
-----------------------------------------------
| CODE | mm (in.) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 03 | 3 (0.1181) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 04 | 4 (0.1574) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 05 | 5 (0.1968) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 06 | 6 (0.2362) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 08 | 8 (0.3149) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 10 | 10 (0.3937) |
-----------------------------------------------
- Slide the applicable length of conduit below the harness.
- Secure with a cable tie NSA935401 at each end of the conduit.
B. E0389 and E0502
E0389 is superseded by EN6049-003.
E0502 is superseded by EN6049-004.
(Ref. Fig. 025)
E0389 V 06
E0502 V 05
| | |
| | ---------- Size code
| --------------- Color code | V = Olive green
--------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Size code
For E0502
-----------------------------------------------
| CODE | mm (in.) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 05 | 2 (0.0787) to 8 (0.3149) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 10 | 5 (0.1968) to 15 (0.5905) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|

Closed Conduit
| 15 | 8 (0.3149) to 24 (0.9448) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 25 | 12 (0.4724) to 36 (1.4173) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 40 | 22 (0.8661) to 60 (2.3622) |
-----------------------------------------------
For E0389
-----------------------------------------------
| CODE | mm (in.) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 02 | 1 (0.0393) to 2 (0.0787) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 04 | 2 (0.0787) to 4 (0.1574) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 06 | 4 (0.1574) to 8 (0.3149) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 08 | 6 (0.2362) to 12 (0.4724) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 10 | 8 (0.3149) to 16 (0.6299) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 15 | 10 (0.3937) to 20 (0.7874) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 20 | 12 (0.4724) to 24 (0.9448) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 25 | 15 (0.5905) to 30 (1.1811) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 30 | 20 (0.7874) to 40 (1.5748) |
-----------------------------------------------
(Ref. Fig. 025)
- Select the applicable size. (The conduit size code is related to the harness diameter which must
correspond to 80% of the size code)
- Cut the conduit to the applicable length. This length is equal to the length of the harness to be
protected (L), plus
50 mm (1.9685 in.) at each end.
-
Put the conduit in position on the harness.
- Crease the conduit to bring it to a length of "L" minus
- Tie with lacing tape NSA8420-1 or -7
10 mm (0.3937 in.) from each end of the conduit.
-
Fold the conduit back over each of its ends to get the length "L".
-
Attach the conduit end ligature with cable tie NSA935401 or lacing tape NSA8420.
NOTE: If one end must be held in the backshell of a connector, the folded length of the conduit must
be larger by 20 to 30 mm. This additional length must be allowed for when the conduit is cut to
length and when the end is shaped. The connector backshell grip is sufficient for cable tie
NSA935401 to be removed.
NOTE: If necessary, to prevent movement of the conduit, transverse movement will be stopped with
lacing tape NSA8420 attached on the harness as near as possible to the conduit.

Closed Conduit
C. E0559, EN6049-003 and EN6049-004

(Ref. Fig. 025)
E0559 A 06
| | |
| | ---------- Size code
| -------------- Color code | A = Natural color
------------------- Standard P/N
EN6049-003 02 5
EN6049-004 02 5
| | |
| | ---------- Color code | 5 = Olive green
| --------------- Size code
----------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Material code
- For E0559:
Braided sheath. (FEP)
- For E6049-003:
Braided polyamide sheath.
- For E6049-004:
Braided polyamide sheath of large expansion.
This gives mechanical protection to the harness.
(b) Temperature
- For E0559:
- For EN6049-003 and EN6049-004:
(c) Size code
For E0559
-----------------------------------------------
| CODE | mm (in.) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 06 | 3 (0.1181) to 8 (0.3149) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 12 | 7 (0.2755) to 16 (0.6299) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 18 | 14 (0.5511) to 28 (1.1023) |
-----------------------------------------------
For EN6049-003
-----------------------------------------------
| CODE | mm (in.) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 02 | 2 (0.0787) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 04 | 4 (0.1574) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|

Closed Conduit
| 06 | 6 (0.2362) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 08 | 8 (0.3149) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 10 | 10 (0.3937) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 15 | 15 (0.5905) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 20 | 20 (0.7874) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 25 | 25 (0.9842) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 30 | 30 (1.1811) |
-----------------------------------------------
For EN6049-004
-----------------------------------------------
| CODE | mm (in.) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 05 | 5 (0.1968) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 10 | 10 (0.3937) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 15 | 15 (0.5905) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 25 | 25 (0.9842) |
|-------------|-------------------------------|
| 40 | 40 (1.5748) |
-----------------------------------------------
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 025)
- Select the applicable size. (The conduit size code is related to the harness diameter which must
correspond to 80% of the size code)
- Cut the conduit to the applicable length. This length is equal to the length of the harness to be
protected (L), plus
-
Put the conduit in position on the harness.
- Crease the conduit to bring it to a length of "L" minus
- Tie with lacing tape NSA8420-1 or -7
10 mm (0.3937 in.) from each end of the conduit.
-
Fold the conduit back over each of its ends to get the length "L".
-
Attach the conduit end ligature with cable tie NSA935401 or lacing tape NSA8420.
NOTE: If one end must be held in the backshell of a connector, the folded length of the conduit must
be larger by 20 to 30 mm. This additional length must be allowed for when the conduit is cut to
length and when the end is shaped. The connector backshell grip is sufficient to remove cable
tie NSA935401.

Closed Conduit
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Miscellaneous Conduit - Description and Installation ABS0596
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Miscellaneous Conduits - Installation on Backshell ABS0596S, ABS1552, E0559,
EN6049-003/004/005/006/007
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Miscellaneous Conduit - Description ABS1552
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Miscellaneous Conduit - Description and Installation E0507
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Miscellaneous Conduit - Description and Installation EN6049-005
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Miscellaneous Conduit - Description and Installation EN6049-006 and EN6049-
007
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Miscellaneous Conduits - Installation EN6049-006/007
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Miscellaneous Conduit - Installation EN6049-006 and EN6049-007
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Miscellaneous Conduit - Specific Installation EN6049-006 and EN6049-007
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Self-Wrapping Protection Sleeve - Identification and Description EN6049-008
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Miscellaneous Conduits -Installation on Backshell EN6049-008

20-33-34 - HEAT SHRINK CONDUITS (Airbus)
Figure 014.1 / Graphic SH 014.1 Miscellaneous Conduits -Installation EN6049-008
Figure 020.1 / Graphic SH 020.1 Miscellaneous Conduits - Description EN6049-009
Figure 021.1 / Graphic SH 021.1 Miscellaneous Conduits - Installation EN6049-009
Figure 022.1 / Graphic SH 022.1 Miscellaneous Conduits - Installation EN6049-009
Figure 023.1 / Graphic SH 023.1 Miscellaneous Conduits - Specific Installation EN6049-009-00
Figure 024.1 / Graphic SH 024.1 Miscellaneous Conduits - P/N Characteristics ABS0125
Figure 025.1 / Graphic SH 025.1 Miscellaneous Conduits - P/N Characteristics and Installation E0389, E0502, E0559,
EN6049-003 and EN6049-004
HEAT SHRINK CONDUITS (Airbus)
HEAT SHRINK CONDUITS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and procedures for the installation of heat shrinkable sleeves when they are used
for the protection of cable harnesses. As a general rule, heat shrinkable sleeves are conduits used for mechanical
protection in fuel vapor areas or to seal harnesses, but this is in relation to the types of heat shrinkable sleeves and
the areas. For more information, refer to chapter 20-33-30. (Conduit selection paragraph)
Heat shrinkable sleeves for the protection of wire harnesses are divided into two sub-families and have the codes
that follow:
- Shrinkable sleeves:
ABS0836
ABS0916
E0126 (ex NSA937211)
E0484
E0718
DAN132
NSA937210
NSA937493

NSA937502
- Shrinkable mouldings:
ABS0266
ABS0312
ABS0791
E0056
E0096 (ex NSA939512)
DAN218
DAN299
DAN301
DAN302
DAN341
2. Shrinkable sleeves
A. General
(1) Use shrinkable sleeves 80 mm (3.1496 in.) in length for the protection of harnesses in:
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(a) Raceways (only for A330/A340) when the installation is not aligned or when the distance between two
raceways is more than:
-
3 mm (0.1181 in.) . (For CF cables)
-
6 mm (0.2362 in.) . (For DK, DM and DR cables)
(b) At the end of a convoluted or braided conduit.
(2) Use shrinkable sleeves ABS0916 or equivalent when system requirements specify protection of the wiring as
near as possible to the connector.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
You can get the same protection if you put a 20 mm (0.7874 in.) heat shrink conduit in the convoluted
conduit.
NOTE: For the description and characteristics of shrinkable sleeves, refer to chapter 20-42-12.
You can also use this type of sleeve:

- For the protection of the terminal. (Refer to chapter 20-48-1X)
- For the protection of the connector cavities behind the contact. (Refer to chapter 20-48-2X)
- To repair the wires in some conditions. (Refer to chapter 20-53-2X)
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
-
Get the applicable shrinkable sleeve.
- Cut to the correct length. (If not supplied to the correct length)
Make sure that the cutting edges are smooth to prevent rupture of the sleeve during shrinking.
-
Install the sleeve on the harness.
-
Get the applicable shrinking tool.
-
Install the applicable reflector on the shrinking tool in relation to the dimensions of the part you will shrink.
- Shrink the sleeve:
With short sleeves, start in the middle of the sleeve and move continuously to the two ends.
For longer sleeves or if a specified position at one end is necessary, start shrinking at the specified end and
move continuously to the other end.
NOTE: During shrinking, turn the sleeve in the heat flow, if possible, to apply the temperature equally.

- Do not let the harness touch the reflector during shrinking.

- Shrinking is completed when the form and contour are flush.
NOTE: You must remove PTFE shrinkable sleeves from the heat source before shrinking is completed, as
residual shrinking occurs during the cool phase.
3. Shrinkable mouldings
A. General
Shrinkable mouldings are used for the protection of harnesses when they must be waterproof or dustproof.
They are used as moulded backshells at the rear of the connectors or as harness separators when the main
bundle is protected.
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(1) Moulded backshells (ABS0266, ABS0791, E0096, DAN218, DAN299 and DAN341)
- Select the applicable shrinkable moulding and the correct size.
NOTE: To increase the strength, it is possible to add bonding of moulding with adhesive sealant, or use
moulding coated on delivery with adhesive sealant.
(a) When used with addition of adhesive sealant:

- Roughen the external side of the shrunken sleeve in the bonding area and the inner side of the
moulding with emery cloth. (Grain 280 or finer)
-
Clean the roughened areas with a cleaning agent.
- In a clean cup, put two equal parts of adhesive sealant components RAYCHEM S1125 (Material
No. 09-531) or equivalent.
- Mix the sealant carefully and apply with a spatula on the shrunken sleeve and the rear connector
bonding areas.
-
Install the moulding on the shrunken sleeve and the rear connector.
-
Select the applicable shrinking tool.
- Install the applicable reflector on the shrinking tool according to the dimensions of the part to be
shrunk.
- Start shrinking at the connector. (You must start shrinking at the point where a specified position is
required)
NOTE: During shrinking, turn the moulding in the heat flow, if possible, to apply temperature equally.

- Shrinking is completed when the moulding fits closely and when the form is flush.
- If used, remove any unwanted sealant immediately with a clean cloth.
NOTE: 90 deg. angle shrinkable mouldings contain a memory and should be at a 90 deg. angle after
shrinking. It can be necessary during the shrinking operation to hold the outlet of the moulding
in its 90 deg. angle position until it is cool.
(b) When delivery-coated with adhesive sealant:

- Roughen the external side of the shrunken sleeve in the bonding area with emery cloth. (Grain
320 or finer)
-
Clean the roughened areas with a cleaning agent.
-
Install the moulding on the shrunken sleeve and the rear connector.
-
Select the applicable shrinking tool.

shrunk.
- Start shrinking at the connector. (You must start shrinking at the point where a specified position
is required)

- If used, remove any unwanted sealant immediately with a clean cloth.
NOTE: 90 deg. angle shrinkable mouldings contain a memory and should be at a 90 deg. angle after
shrinking. It can be necessary during the shrinking operation to hold the outlet of the moulding
in its 90 deg. angle position until it is cool.
(2) Moulding boots (ABS0312, E0056, DAN301 and DAN302)

- Select the applicable shrinkable moulding and the correct size.
- Install the moulding on the harness.
- Select the applicable shrinking tool.
shrunk.
- Start shrinking at the point where a specified position is required.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Shrinkable Sleeves - Installation Procedure - ABS0836/0916, E0126, DAN132 and
NSA937210/211/493/502
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Shrinkable Sleeves - Installation Procedure - ABS0916 or Equivalent
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Shrinkable Mouldings - Installation Procedure - E0096, ABS0266, ABS0312, ABS0791,
E0056, DAN218, DAN299, DAN301, DAN302, DAN341
TAPES (Airbus)
TAPES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description of tapes that have the codes that follow:
- Non adhesive tapes and braid tape:
ABS0294
ABS1353-005
NSA935403
- Adhesive tapes:
ABS5330
ABS5332
ABS5334
ASNA3565
ASNA5107
DAN269

2. Non Adhesive Tapes And Braid Tape

A. ABS0294
ABS0294 A 02
------- - --
| | |
| | --- Size code
| --------- Material code | A = PTFE
----------------- Standard P/N
- Minimum operating temperature is
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
- Maximum operating temperature is
250 deg.C (482.00 deg.F) .
(3) Size code
------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | WIDTH mm (in.) |
|-----------|----------------|
| 02 | 20 (0.7874) |
------------------------------
B. ABS1353-005
ABS1353-005 is a knitted braid used to replace the main braid of harness for repair or modification kit
installation.
ABS1353-005 - 01 A
----------- -- -
| | |
| | --- Material code | A = Nickel-plated copper cable
| -------- Size code
------------------------ Standard P/N
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F) .
(3) Size code
------------------------------
|-----------|----------------|

Adhesive Tapes
| 01 | 36 (1.4173) |
------------------------------
C. NSA935403
NSA935403 tape is used to attach electrical harnesses.
NSA935403 - 01
--------- --
| |
| --- Type code
----------------- Standard P/N
-50 deg.C (-58.00 deg.F) .
250 deg.C (482.00 deg.F) .
(3) Type code
-----------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | WIDTH mm (in.) | THICKNESS mm (in.) | COLOR |
|-----------|----------------|--------------------|-------|
| 01 | 19 (0.7480) | 1 (0.0393) | BROWN |
-----------------------------------------------------------
3. Adhesive Tapes
A. ABS5330
ABS5330 is a PTFE tape with silicone adhesive film.
ABS5330 A 01
------- - --
| | |
| | --- Size code
| --------- Material code (A)
----------------- Standard P/N
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
180 deg.C (356.00 deg.F) .
(3) Size code
------------------------------
|-----------|----------------|
| 01 | 6.35 (0.2499) |
|-----------|----------------|
| 02 | 12.70 (0.4999) |
|-----------|----------------|
| 03 | 19 (0.7480) |
------------------------------
B. ABS5332
ABS5332 is a PVC tape with a pressure-sensitive rubber adhesive available in different colors.

Adhesive Tapes

ABS5332 A 01 B
------- - -- -
| | | |
| | | --- Color code
| | -------- Size code
| -------------- Material code | A = PVC
---------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Size code
------------------------------
|-----------|----------------|
| 01 | 19 (0.7480) |
------------------------------
(3) Color code
----------------------------
| COLOR CODE | COLOR |
|------------|-------------|
| B | BLUE |
|------------|-------------|
| G | GREEN |
|------------|-------------|
| R | RED |
----------------------------
C. ABS5334
ABS5334 is a self-adhesive silicone tape resistant to high temperatures.
ABS5334 A 01 B
------- - -- -
| | | |
| | -------- Size code
| -------------- Material code
---------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Description
-----------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | WIDTH | THICKNESS | TAPE | COLOR |
| CODE | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | COLOR | CODE |
|------|-------------|--------------|-------|-------|
| 01 | | 0.5 (0.0196) | BLACK | B |
|------| 19 (0.7480) |--------------|-------|-------|
| 02* | | 0.3 (0.0118) | RED | R |
-----------------------------------------------------
* You must use size code 02 (red color tape) only for repair.
---------------------------------------------------------------
| | SIZE CODE |
| OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE |--------------|----------------|
| | 01 | 02 |
|-----------------------------|--------------|----------------|
| CONTINUOUS USE | -54 to 260 | -57 to 250 |
| deg.C (deg.F) | (-67 to 500) | (-70.6 to 482) |
|-----------------------------|--------------|----------------|
| OCCASIONAL USE | -65 to 260 | - |

Adhesive Tapes
| deg.C (deg.F) | (-85 to 500) | |

---------------------------------------------------------------
D. ASNA3565
ASNA3565 is glass fabric with adhesive silicone used for electrical insulation.
ASNA3565 2725
-------- ----
| |
| --- Size code
------------- Standard P/N
(2) Size code
------------------------------
|-----------|----------------|
| 2722 | 22 (0.8661) |
|-----------|----------------|
| 2725 | 25 (0.9842) |
|-----------|----------------|
| 2750 | 50 (1.9684) |
|-----------|----------------|
| 2765 | 65 (2.5590) |
------------------------------
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
180 deg.C (356.00 deg.F) .
E. ASNA5107
ASNA5107 is a self-adhesive silicone tape reinforced with glass fabric used as mechanical protection and support
for electrical wiring.
ASNA5107 2503 B
-------- ---- -
| | |
| | --- Color code | Without code = RED
| | | B = Black
| --------- Type code
------------------- Standard P/N
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F) .
(3) Type code
--------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | WIDTH mm (in.) | THICKNESS mm (in.) |
|-----------|--------------------|---------------------|
| 2501 | 12.70 (0.5000) | |
|-----------|--------------------| |
| 2502 | 19.05 (0.7600) | |
|-----------|--------------------| |
| 2503 | 25.40 (1.000) | 0.51 (0.0200) |
|-----------|--------------------| |

Adhesive Tapes
| 2504 | 50.80 (2.000) | |

|-----------|--------------------| |
| 2505 | 76.20 (3.000) | |
--------------------------------------------------------
F. DAN269
DAN269 A25
------ ---
| |
| --- Type code
----------- Standard P/N
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F)
150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) .
(3) Type code
--------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | WIDTH mm (in.) | ADHESIVE MATERIAL |
|-----------|----------------|-------------------|
| 25 | 25 ( 0.9842) | |
|-----------|----------------| |
| 30 | 30 ( 1.1810) | SILICONE BASED |
|-----------|----------------| |
| 45 | 45 ( 1.7716) | |
|-----------|----------------|-------------------|
| 300 | 300 (11.8109) | ACRYLIC BASED |
|-----------|----------------|-------------------|
| A25 | 25 ( 0.9842) | |
|-----------|----------------| |
| A30 | 30 ( 1.1810) | SILICONE BASED |
|-----------|----------------| |
| A300 | | |
|-----------| 300 (11.8109) |-------------------|
| B300 | | ACRYLIC BASED |
--------------------------------------------------
ATTACHMENT (Airbus)
ATTACHMENT - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the general description and requirements related to the elements which attach, route and
install the wiring without damage to the aircraft. These elements are separated into several families.
A. Cable Supports (Ref. 20-33-41)
B. Clamps (Ref. 20-33-42)
C. Raceway Assemblies (Ref. 20-33-43)
D. Tie-wraps (Ref. 20-33-44)

Adhesive Tapes
E. Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting (Ref. 20-33-45)

3. General installation rules (and procedures)
This topic gives the procedures and general rules for the installation of cable attachments.
NOTE: - For overbraided harnesses attached together, tying pitch must be between
75 mm (2.9527 in.) and 100 mm (3.9370 in.) .
- For harnesses with split conduit protection (EMI) (e.g. EN6049-008) attached together, tying pitch must
be between
75 mm (2.9527 in.) and 100 mm (3.9370 in.) .
A. Attachment of harnesses on aircraft

The electrical wirings are attached on the aircraft by a very wide range of clamps and mounts, the choice of which
is defined on the drawing.
Generally, the clamps and their mounts must not be distorted.
When installing harnesses, the bundles will be positioned on the cable supports and held by untightened clamps
so that slight movements can be made to find final installation position.
When the harnesses have been completely positioned and connected, the clamps must be tightened down. This
procedure is not applicable to clamps NSA5516 in order to avoid dislodging the insulating part of the clamp.
All harnesses installed on mechanical moving parts must be attached by clamps NSA5516SCD. For harness dia.
> 25 mm (0.9842 in.) , double clamp must be used.
The distance between two tying points must be 150 mm (5.9055 in.) maximum and on the last 500 mm (19.6850
in.) of the cable 100 mm (3.9370 in.) maximum.
NOTE: If the attachment item is attached on the structure with a screw, after tightening the screw must protrude
from the nut by a minimum length of 1.5 threads.
You can add a mechanical protection (e.g two layers of ASNA5107 tape) on the attachment points:
- To make the harness shape better.
- To adapt the harness diameter to the size of the attachment device.
- When there is mechanical stress on the attachment device (e.g dynamic harness).
- For harnesses installed in V-supports with diameter more than
35 mm (1.3779 in.) .
You must add tape ASNA5107 with all NSA5516 clamps.
You must not use tapes in fuel tanks.
NOTE: It is strictly prohibited to take up overlengths by pulling on the harnesses when the attachments are
tightened.
NOTE: Cable supports E0663 equipped with retainers must in no case be handled before final attachment, as
this may damage the rack.
B. Installation in fuel vapour areas

(Ref. Fig. 001)
NOTE: In these areas, electrical cables must never be in contact with fuel tank boundaries or any part of the
structure.
(1) General installation principle
NOTE: The requirements that follow are not applicable for:

-
G routes,
-
E routes when they are routed inside bobbins,
-
P routes near adjacent parts or structure when:
- Harnesses are protected with split conduits EN6049-006/007/008, ABS0596 or ABS0916,
- Harness overbraiding is protected with EN6049-006/007, ABS0890, ABS0894, ABS1552 and

Adhesive Tapes
ABS5334,
- Harnesses are protected by shielding conduit.
- P routes near fuel tank boundaries when:
- Harness overbraiding is protected with EN6049-006/007/009, ABS0890, ABS0894, ABS1552
and ABS5334,
- Harnesses are protected with shielded conduit.
- Other routes when:
- Harness is protected with convoluted conduit ABS0887 or NSA935805,
- Harness is protected with split conduit EN6049-006/007/008/009,
- Harness runs in a gutter,
- Harness is shielded (overbraiding or screened conduit).
The distance between two cable supports must be the distance between the harness and the fuel
tank boundary or any part of the structure in fuel vapour area minus 10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
(2) Applicable rules if one cable support is broken or loose

General installation rules (and procedures)
(Ref. Fig. 002)

(a) The protections that follow must be installed on the harnesses:
- Split conduit EN6049-006/007, and ABS0596 on the harness,
- Tape ABS5334 or ASNA5107-B in attachment area,
- External protection EN6049-006/007, ABS0890, ABS0894, ABS1552 and ABS5334 on shielded harnesses.
NOTE: The requirements that follow are not applicable for G routes when they are routed inside bobbins.
(b) The minimum distance "D" between the harness and fuel tank boundary must be:
-
25 mm (0.9842 in.) if the harness is protected with a conduit or mechanical protection,
-
10 mm (0.3937 in.) if the harness is protected with split conduit ABS0596 or ABS0887.
(c) The minimum distance "D" between the harness and any part of the structure (this includes pipes, equipments etc.)
-
10 mm (0.3937 in.) if the harness is protected with a conduit or mechanical protection.
C. Cable support installation
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(1) In fuselage
(Ref. Fig. 003)
- Cable supports must be installed every
660 mm (25.9842 in.) maximum but must never be more than 1000 mm (39.3701 in.) when the cables are protected with
ABS0887 conduit.
(2) Inside pylons
350 mm (13.7795 in.) maximum for G routes,
200 mm (7.8740 in.) maximum for other routes.
(3) Inside wing area
450 mm (17.7165 in.) maximum.
(4) Inside tail area
650 mm (25.5905 in.) .
(5) Distance between the connector and the first cable support
Recommended maximum distance is 300 mm (11.8110 in.) , it is necessary for connection/ disconnection of the connector with no
tension on the connection.
This distance can enable to manage when appropriate:
- Drip loop,
- Overlength for repair and stowage.
(6) Distance between the harness and the structure
This distance must not be less than 10 mm (0.3937 in.) . If this length cannot be ensured, a protection must be installed (conduit,
insulation etc.).
(7) Feeder and power cables
For feeder and power cables (routes G and P), a minimum distance of 50 mm (1.9685 in.) is required between these cables and the
aircraft skin (fuselage, wing, fuel tank boundary etc.).
A double insulation is required for feeder G routes and particular P routes (DC cables from TRU to power centres) attachment points.
D. Installation with brackets
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(1) Rules
NOTE: Brackets must be riveted (if not possible, bolts can be used).
- In all cases, P and Q routes must have a dedicated attachment point. An attachment point is considered as dedicated when it is
an individual attachment point for a route.
-
Each route must be installed separately with an individual attachment point on the bracket.
(2) Fixed bracket

- The fixed bracket must be small enough to allow correct bearing while avoiding any wiring contact with fixed support or
structure.
(3) Adhesive bonded brackets
(Ref. Fig. 005)
- You must use adhesive bonded brackets where riveted or bolted cannot be installed (e.g. non conductive surface).
- You must use this type of bracket to attach the harnesses on the aircraft structure (conductive and non conductive).
- The maximum load applied by the harness on each bracket must not be more than 3.3 N.
- The bonded brackets are approved for a maximum load of 5 N.
NOTE: If one attachment point is missing, the minimum distance permitted between the harness and the adjacent structure (this
includes pipes, equipments etc.) must be
10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
- You must not use adhesive bonded brackets:

- To attach dynamic harnesses (e.g. hinges).
- For maintenance areas where bonded brackets can be crushed or stressed by maintenance action.
- On G routes.
E. Installation on metallic or carbon rods (tubes) in all areas but not in fuel tanks
(Ref. Fig. 006)
Installation of the electrical harness requires:
- Insulated bracket ABS1095 + tape ASNA5107 attached on the rod by 2 metallic clamps ASNA0033 and the harness attached on the
bracket by a clamp (e.g. ABS1339).
For harness diameter < 25 mm (0.9842 in.) and if insulated bracket ABS1095 cannot be installed, 2 solutions can be applied:
-
A clamp NSA5516BD + tape ASNA5107-B must be installed on the rod and a clamp ABS1339 on the harness.
-
Two clamps NSA5516BD + tape ASNA5107-B must be installed on the harness and on the rod.
NOTE: The rod must be protected by a layer of black tape ASNA5107-B under the bracket.
F. Installation at metallic tube exit

A clamp must be installed as near as possible to each metallic tube exit and the harness must be centered in the tube by the positioning
of the clamp.
G. Installation inside carbon fuel tank
- You must use an isolated bracket or plastic clamp,
- You must not use metallic brackets in fuel tanks,
- You must attach brackets to carbon parts,
- You must use red cable tie NSA935401 to attach the wiring harness in the fuel tank,
- To prevent condensation in connections, there must be a drip loop in the fuel tanks.
- You must not use tape or lockwire (to prevent filter contamination).
H. Installation outside carbon fuel tank and vapour areas
(Ref. Fig. 007)
Attachment of G feeder routes on fuel tank carbon panel is not permitted (this does not include the A400M).
For the A400M, you must attach the G routes with a minimum of 2 levels of insulation on the non conductive fixed bracket.
(Ref. Fig. 008)
Installation of routes P, M, S, D, X and Q must be done with 2 levels of insulation:
- 1st level:
- Riveted (recommended) or bolted (acceptable) non-conductive bracket.
- 2nd level:
- Clamp ABS1339 (preferred),
- Clamp 5516 + tape ASNA5107 (not preferred),
- Clamp AS62200 (not preferred).
J. Installation outside conductive composite panel
Installation of routes D, T, U, V, P, M, S, X and Q must be done with 1 level of insulation:
- Riveted (recommended) or bolted (acceptable) non conductive bracket.
Installation of route G must be done with two levels of insulation.
K. Installation on conductive composite surface with additional protection
For all routes 10 mm (0.3937 in.) length between cables and composite surface can be accepted if an additional protection is used (the
structure thickness must be > 10 mm (0.3937 in.) :
- For G routes, PEEK additional protection must have a minimum thickness of
3 mm (0.1181 in.) .
- For other routes, PA6.6 additional protection must have a minimum thickness of
2 mm (0.0787 in.) .
L. Attachment point accessibility

Each cable or harness attachment must be installed so that it is easily accessible.

M. Bus bar installation
A minimum of 5 mm (0.1968 in.) between bus bars must respected. Separators must be installed between bus bars and must be secured
to avoid any movement.
A minimum of 5 mm (0.1968 in.) between bus bars and all other metallic items must be respected.
N. G route installation
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
For G route, bobbin ABS0678/ABS1088 or equivalent must be installed in the following cases :
-
Fixed attachment points cannot ensure sufficient distance between G routes.
-
Between two frames, the bobbin must be installed in the middle of the two frames,
- In the curve with small bend radius.
To prevent chafing between two different G routes (for example between two frames), you can add two metal clamps NSA5516 in
butterfly configuration.
In all cases, two levels of insulation (two non-conductive parts), for example insulated bracket and bobbin type (ABS0678/ABS0679
or ABS1086/ABS1089) shall be used to maintain those routes.
Bobbin ABS0678/ABS1088 must be attached with:
-
Metallic clamp ASNA0033 on attachment point level.
-
Cable tie NSA935401-12 between attachment points.
-
Metallic clamp NSA5516CBD.
-
When feeders are routed without a bobbin, the E route must have a dedicated routing.
- When G routes is routed alone (outside the bobbin), the E route must be routed separately.
Contact between feeder cables of the same route is forbidden when they go in different directions.
In this case a minimum distance of 5 mm (0.1968 in.) between cables must be respected.
The number of feeder cables per phase must be limited to three maximum and must be installed at 120 deg. on fairlead guides.
For two cables of the same phase, they must be diametrically opposite each other in the fairlead guide type ABS0678 + ABS0679 or
ABS1088 + ABS1089.
NOTE: G route supports must withstand from

170 deg.C (338.00 deg.F) to 260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F) , depending on the area. G routes must not be attached on tubular
supports and rods.
You can use additional bobbins or lacing tape on G routes to obey the harness routing rules between feeders, or when one
feeder leaves the G route harness. Maximum of two bobbins between two harness attachment points on the structure. (same
reference as the existing bobbins)
P. P route installation
- P routes must be attached with clamps (ABS1339 or NSA5516SCD).
- P routes must not be directly attached to rods.
NOTE: P route can be directly tied on metallic insulated ramp with a cable tie NSA935401, but this is not considered as an attachment
point.
- Two ABS1339 clamps in butterfly configuration can be used for P route attachment. This configuration is mandatory for P route
segregation, when segregation distances between harnesses must be secured.
Q. Metallic supports insulation
Insulating coating must be applied between the cables and the support when cable temperature remains lower than 150 deg.C (302.00
deg.F) .
In hydraulic area and when the temperature is higher than 150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) , PTFE or equivalent protection must be applied.
NOTE: Each end of the metallic support must be protected by end cap.
R. Non metallic support insulation

Non metallic supports can be used when temperature is < 150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) .
For feeder supports, non metallic supports (bobbins) can be used to supply a correct level of insulation when temperature is < 260 deg.C
(500.00 deg.F) .
NOTE: Non metallic supports do not require any protection treatment.
S. Attachment selection depending on the area and harness type

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | ROUTE TYPE |
| AREA | ------------------------------------------------------------|
| | G (with 2 | P | OTHERS |
| | levels of insulation) | | |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| P | |-Low temperature bobbin | | WITH STRAIN: |
| R |-Fuselage | + insulated bracket | |-ABS1339-D |
| E |-Inside Vu| | |-NSA5516BD (for dia. > 48 |
| S |-APU com- |-AS62200 (if routed |ABS1339-D| mm (1.89in.)) |
| . | -partment| together and for | | WITHOUT STRAIN: |
| |- Belly | stressed area) |NSA5516 | V support type (e.g.: |
| A | fairing | |Specific |-NSA935504 for dia.< 48mm |
| R | |-Low temperature bobbin |brackets | (1.89in.) |
| E |-Sponson *| + NSA5516CBD ** + |ABS2022 +|-E0435 for dia. > 48mm |
| A | | insulated bracket |ABS1339 | (1.89in.))*** |
| | | | |Specific bracket ABS2022 +|
| | | | | ABS1339 |
|---|----------|------------------------|------------------------------------|
| |Pylon area|-AS62200 (if routed | |
| N |-Fire and | together and for | NSA5516CBD |
| O |high temp.| stressed area) | |
| N | area > | | AS62200 (not preferred) |
| |120 deg.C |-High temperature bobbin| |
| P |(248deg.F)| + insulated bracket | |
| R |----------|-------------------------------------------------------------|
| E | Fuel area| | |
| S | (inside | NOT APPLICABLE | ABS1339F |
| S | tank) | | |
| U |----------|-------------------------------------------------------------|
| R |-Vibration|-High temperature bobbin| |
| I | area | + insulated bracket |- ABS1339-D for dia.< 48mm (1.89in.)|
| Z |-Section | | |
| E | 19 |-AS62200 (if routed |- NSA5516CBD in SWAMP area and NSA |
| | | | NSA5516BD in other areas for |
| D |-Swamp | together and for | dia. > 48mm (1.89in.) |
| | area | stressed areas) | |
| A |-Hydraulic| |- Omega clamp (specific drawing) |
| R | area |-High temperature bobbin| for dia. > 48mm (1.89in.) |
| E |-Fuel | + NSA5516CBD ** + | |
| A | vapour | insulated bracket |- AS62200 (not preferred) |
| | area | | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* This does not include the hydraulic and APU compartments (only for A400M)
** Limited use
*** Not for convoluted conduit ABS0887/NSA935805
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| AREAS | ATTACHING PARTS |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|All areas but not:- Pylon or | |
| - Nacelle (for A400M) | |
| - High temperature area | Plastic clamp (ABS1339) |
| - Inaccessible pressurized area| |
| - Moving part | |
|-------------------------------------------------|--------------------------|
| - Large diameter harness | |
| - Moving part | |
| - High temperature area | Metallic clamp |
| - Pylon or | NSA5516BD |
| - Nacelle (for A400M) | |
|-------------------------------------------------|--------------------------|
| Inaccessible pressurized area | V support NSA935504 + |
| (harnesses with ABS0887 protection) | black tape ASNA5107-B |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

NOTE: You must install end cap NSA935829 on each end of the conduit ABS0887.
NOTE: When you use conduit NSA935805, you must install the conduit as for conduit ABS0887 without the end cap NSA935829 and without the
black tape ASNA5107-B at the attachment point.
T. VT modules installation
(Ref. Fig. 011)
-
For EFCS VT modules, a ramp must be provided in order to avoid strains on the contacts and in order to manage drip loop when appropriate.
- For other VT modules, a ramp or an attachment point (
150 mm (5.9055 in.) recommended and 300 mm (11.8110 in.) maximum from the module) must be provided in order to avoid any movement
or stress on the wire and on the contacts and in order to manage drip loop when appropriate.
U. Terminal block installation
Attachment points (e.g bobbin for G routes or clamps for P routes) must be provided before VT terminal block in order to avoid any movement or
stress on the wire and on the connections and in order to manage drip loop when appropriate.
V. Tubular support installation
Tubular supports (e.g. D92491070/75) must be used in area where temperature is < 150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) and when clamps or V supports
cannot be installed.
V supports can be used with plastic tubular supports to improve/maintain the orientation of the harness.
V supports must be installed at tubular support ends to prevent harness rotation on the tube.
NOTE: You must install specific cable supports ABS1082 with metallic tubular supports with sufficient protection. You must use them in mechanical
constraint areas (e.g. harness diameter > 25 mm (0.984 in.)).
W. Attachment at conduit ends ABS0887 and EN6049-006/007

(Ref. Fig. 012)
X. Attachment by tie-wrap
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | TYING |
| AREA |---------------------------------------------------|
| | ON HARNESS | ON ATTACHMENT POINT |
|-------------------------|--------------------------|------------------------|
| Inside tank | NOT APPLICABLE | NSA935401 (red colour) |
|-------------------------|--------------------------|------------------------|
| Temperature between | | |
| -55 deg.C and 135 deg.C | NSA935401 (black colour) |NSA935401 (black colour)|
|(131 deg.F and 275 deg.F)| | |
|-------------------------|--------------------------|------------------------|
| Temperature between | | |
| 135 deg.C and 150 deg.C | NSA935401 (black colour) |NSA935401 (black colour)|
|(275 deg.F and 302 deg.F)| | with ABS1339 |
|-------------------------|--------------------------|------------------------|
| Pylons | | |
| High temperature area | NSA8420 lacing tape | NOT APPLICABLE |
| > 200 deg.C (392 deg.F) | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Y. Temperature limit of cable ties, lacing tapes and supports
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Types of route | In all areas except in | High temperature area |
| | high temperature area | > 120 deg.C (248 deg.F)|
|-------------------------|--------------------------|------------------------|
| G | 170 deg.c (338 deg.F) | 260 deg.C (500 deg.F) |
|-------------------------|--------------------------|------------------------|
| P | 150 deg.C (302 deg.F) | 260 deg.C (500 deg.F) |
|-------------------------|--------------------------|------------------------|
| Others types (M, S, Q.) | 135 deg.C (275 deg.F) | 260 deg.C (500 deg.F) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
AA. Backshell selection depending on the area
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Backshell installed with overbraiding ABS1353-003 |
| Related |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| electrical | Low temperature area * | High temperature area ** |
| item | -55 deg.C (131 deg.F) | -55 deg.C (131 deg.F) |
| | to 175 deg.C (347 deg.F) | to 260 deg.C (500 deg.F) |
|---------------|------------------------------|------------------------------|
| Bulkhead | ABS1361/1362/1363 | ABS0932/0933/0934 |
|---------------|------------------------------|------------------------------|

| Connector | ABS1358/1359/1360 | ABS0280/0281 |

| EN2997/3646 | | |
|---------------|------------------------------|------------------------------|
| Pressure seal | ABS1365/1366/1359 | NOT APPLICABLE |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Backshell material = Nickel copper plating over composite
** Backshell material = Stainless steel
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Backshell type | Connector | Area |
|---------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------|
| Straight or elbow E0080-01| E0052 and | Pressurized and non pressurized area|
| or E0080-02 backshell | E0053 | except in small VUs for specific use|
| (aluminium) | | (e.g. pressure seal) |
|---------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------|
| Straight or elbow ABS0638 | E0052 and | Pressurized and non pressurized area|
| (thermoplastic) backshell | E0053 | except on pressure seals and in |
| | | small VUs for main use |
|---------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------|
| Flanged straight or elbow | E0052 and | Non pressurized area in hot area on |
| E0199-02 or E0199-03 | E0053 | connectors EN2997 except for small |
|(stainless steel) backshell| | VUs |
|---------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------|
| | | Pressurized and non pressurized area|
| Flanged straight or elbow | E0052 | except in small VUs used only for |
| NSA938150-01 or NSA938150-| | cable foolproof connectors |
| 03 (aluminium) backshell |-----------|-------------------------------------|
| | E0053 | NOT APPLICABLE |
|---------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------|
| | E0052 | In small VUs (all areas) |
| Simple backshell |-----------|-------------------------------------|
| NSA938150-02 (aluminium) | | NOT APPLICABLE, except risks of |
| | E0053 | contamination/mechanical protection |
| | | in pressurized areas and small VUs |
|---------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------|
| Thread cover ring | E0052 | NOT APPLICABLE |
| NSA938003 (aluminium) | | |
|---------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------|
| Simple backshell | E0053 | NOT APPLICABLE |
|---------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------|
| | E0052 | NOT APPLICABLE |
| |-----------|-------------------------------------|
| Without backshell | | APPLICABLE, except risks of contami-|
| | E0053 | nation/mechanical protection |
| | | in pressurized area and small VUs |
|---------------------------|-----------|-------------------------------------|
| | EN3545XXXM| Pressurized area |
| EN3545-007 backshell |-----------|-------------------------------------|
| (thermoplastic) | EN3545XXXF| Pressurized areas, except on inter- |
| | | face connectors of large VUs |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In pressurized areas, it is mandatory to use backshells for removable connectors. For receptacles that are in VUs when cable supports hold the
cables sufficiently, it is not mandatory to use backshells.
In non pressurized areas, all connectors must be used with backshells.
AB. Backshell orientation
(Ref. Fig. 013)
(1) On circular connectors:
NOTE: In pressurized areas and for A380 program only, you can change the VC backshell orientation given by drawings to obey the harness
routing rules (maximum permitted modification is plus or minus 75 deg.). You cannot apply this for ring shielded backshells (e.g
ABS1138-006).
You can change ABS0638 backshell orientation to prevent water retention when the backshell tail is down.
The elbow backshell orientation (angular) must be specified in drawing definition.

(a) For a connector (front face, contact side), the 0 deg. angle reference is its main master keyway.
(Ref. Fig. 014)
(b) For a pressure seal ABS1378 or ABS1571, the 0 deg. angle reference is its flat surface on the locking-screw head side.
(Ref. Fig. 015)
(c) For elbow backshell, unless specified by drawing, the orientation shall be 180 deg. angle (opposite of the master keyway).
(d) For straight backshell, unless specified by drawing, the orientation shall be 0 deg. angle (side of the master keyway).

(2) On rectangular connectors:

(a) Horizontal Position:
(Ref. Fig. 016)
- For straight backshell:
The reference position 0 deg for straight backshell is when the backshell is installed with the strain relief down (side of chamfers of
connector).
- For elbowed backshell:
The reference position 0 deg for elbowed backshell is when the backshell is installed with the strain relief down (side of chamfers of
connector).
(b) Vertical position:
(Ref. Fig. 017)
- For straight backshell:
If the fixed connector is installed with pin contact (EN3545XXXM) and the pin contact 1 is at the bottom, the strain relief of the straight
backshell is installed on the right side (side of chamfer of connector).
If the fixed connector is installed with socket contacts (EN3545XXXF), and the pin contact 1 is at the bottom, the strain relief of the
straight backshell is installed on the left side (side of chamfer of connector).
NOTE: Pin contact AA for connector with contact size 8 only.

- For elbowed backshell:
(Ref. Fig. 017)
(3) Strain relief of quick-release connectors:

(Ref. Fig. 018)
- There are four procedures to attach backshell ABS1019-005 to receptacles and plugs: straight (0 deg or 180 deg) and angular (90 deg or
270 deg). You must install the backshells in relation to the installation situation. You must attach the cables with cable ties NSA935401.
AC. Installation at output of pressure seal backshell
To have the best sealing possible, the harness must come out straight aligned with the centerline of the pressure seal.
AD. Specific brackets and rods installation
(1) You must use metallic ASNA2327/ASNA2328 brackets:
- For P routes (mechanical aspects).
- For other routes in hot and swamp areas.
(2) You must use plastic ABS1423/ABS1424 rods:
- For all routes, but not in hot and swamp areas.
- On conductive composite surfaces.
(3) You must install rods with spacers:
- You must attach the plastic rods on non-metallic structure with blind rivets ASNA0080/NAS1919 type.
- You must attach the metallic rods on metallic structure with solid rivets EN6081 type.
AE. Protection of harnesses
(Ref. Fig. 019)
In several attachment procedures you must install adhesive tape on the harnesses for protection (e.g. ASNA5107, ABS5334).
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Attachment - Installation in Fuel Vapour Area
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Attachment - Installation in Fuel Vapour Area
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Attachment - Cable Support Installation in Fuselage
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Attachment - Route Installation on Brackets
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Attachment - Installation with Bonded Adhesive Brackets
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Attachment - Installation on Metallic or Carbon Rod
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Attachment - Installation Outside Carbon Fuel Tank and Vapour Area
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Attachment - Installation Outside Carbon Fuel Tank and Fuel Vapour Areas - A400M
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Attachment - G Route Installation
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Attachment - G Route in Butterfly Configuration

Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Attachment - VT Modules and Terminal Blocks Installation
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Attachment - Attachment at Conduit End
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Attachment - Backshell Orientation
Figure 019.1 / Graphic SH 019.1 Attachment - Installation of Adhesive Tape for Protection

20-33-41 - CABLE SUPPORTS (Airbus)
CABLE SUPPORTS (Airbus)
CABLE SUPPORTS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and operation of cable supports. Cable supports are items used to attach and tie the wiring.
NOTE: If you must attach to one support:

- one cable of size 20, 22 or 24, or
- one cable of size 22 or 24, or 26 or
- two cables of size 20, 22 or 24, or
- one cable of size 20 and 1 cable of size 22, 24 or 26,
Cables of length of 150 mm (5.9055 in.) or longer must have a protective sleeve EN6049-006. This is not applicable to the cables that go to
the ground points or bonding points (VN or VG).
NOTE: You can use bonded and plug-in supports only for equipment cables. You must not use wedge-base supports for fly-by-wire (FBW) cables
(you can use wedge-base supports only if FBW cables are given protection with ASNA5107). You must not use bonded, plug-in, wedge-base
and screw-type supports for electrical power supply lines.
You can change the orientation of the mobile supports given in the drawings to obey the harness routing rules. (the maximum permitted
change from the drawing values is plus or minus 90 deg.)
This is not applicable if there is a risk that the harness can touch sharp edges.
Make sure that the harness bend radii and distances in relation to the structure, the other systems and bundles agree with the installation
rules.
The cable supports installed on aircraft are divided in relation to geometry and have the codes that follow:
- Wedge support type:
NSA935513
NSA935514
- U or V-shaped support type:
ABS0677 Single V
ABS0774 Single V
E0254 Single V
E0343 Single V
E0420 Single V
E0659 Single V
E0664 Single V
E0675 Single V
ABS0354 Double V
ABS0355 Double V
ABS0795 Double U
ABS0796 Single U
ABS1082 Single V
ABS1083 Double U
ABS1092 Single V
ABS1093 Single V
ABS1094 Single V
ABS1119 Double V
ABS1127 Double U
ABS2022 Double V
ABS2083 Double V
E0255 Double V
E0660 Double V
E0661
E0663
NSA935504
- U-clamp type:
E0435
NSA935501
- Fairlead guide type:
ABS0678 with ABS0679
ABS1088 with ABS1089 and NSA5516
E0398
E0557
NSA935511
NSA935512

- Through-structure type:
ABS1020
- Separator and spacer type:
ABS0054
ABS0731
ABS1144
ABS1339
ABS1526
E0688
NSA5527
NSA935510
- Specific cases:
ABS1049-003
ABS1049-004
ABS1049-005
ABS1576
- Related items:
ABS1095
ABS1423
ABS1424
ABS1523
ABS1545
ABS1546
ABS1717
ABS5147
ASNA2327
ASNA2328
2. Wedge support type:
This type of cable support has the codes that follow:
NSA935513
NSA935514.
This type of cable support is used in pressurized areas, to attach small to medium sized harnesses ( 25 mm (0.9842 in.) max. dia.).
A. P/N characteristics
NSA935513
NSA935514 - 01
| |
| ------------- Size code
|
------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Temperature
Operating temperature is -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) to 150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) .
(3) Type code
(a) NSA935513-XX
With this type of support the maximum harness diameter must be 10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
----------------------------------------------------------------
| | CABLE HARNESS |
| SIZE |------------------------------------------------|
| CODE | NUMBER | MAX. DIA | ATTACHMENT POINT |
| | | mm (in.) | |
|-------------|-----------|------------------------------------|
| 01 | 1 | 25 (0.9842) | Top |
|-------------|-----------|--------------|---------------------|
| | 1 | 25 (0.9842) | Top |
| 05 |-----------|--------------|---------------------|
| | 2 | 25 (0.9842) | Each side |
|-------------|-----------|--------------|---------------------|
| | 1 | 25 (0.9842) | Top |
| 06 |-----------|--------------|---------------------|
| | 2 | 10 (0.3937) | Each side |
|-------------|-----------|--------------|---------------------|
| 07 | 1 | 25 (0.9842) | Top |
----------------------------------------------------------------
(b) NSA935514-XX
In relation to the size code of the wedge support, the number of cable harnesses is specified as follows:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | CABLE HARNESS |

| SIZE | DESIGNATION |----------------------------------------|

| CODE | | NUMBER | MAX. DIA. | ATTACHMENT |
| | | | mm (in.) | POINT |
|-------------|------------------|--------|--------------|----------------|
| 01 | Male bracket | 1 or 2 | 25 (0.9842) | Side |
|-------------|------------------|--------|--------------|----------------|
| 02 | Female bracket | 1 or 2 | 25 (0.9842) | Side |
|-------------|------------------|--------|--------------|----------------|
| 03 | Washer | - | - | - |
|-------------|------------------|--------|--------------|----------------|
| 04 | Shouldered male | - | - | - |
| | bracket | | | |
|-------------|------------------|--------|--------------|----------------|
| 05 |Shouldered female | - | - | - |
| | bracket | | | |
|-------------|------------------|--------|--------------|----------------|
| | Assembly | | | |
| 06 | (NSA935514-03 | 2 x 2 | 25 (0.9842) | Each side |
| | + NSA935514-04 | | | |
| | + NSA935514-05) | | | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Procedure
(1) Wedge support installation
(a) For NSA935513 only:
(Ref. Fig. 001)
-
Engage wedge half with notch in the hole.
- Install the applicable wedge support with the installation tool and a plastic hammer or with pliers or a specific gun, depending on
the wedge support type and size.
NOTE: You must install wedge support NSA935513 wet, with anti-corrosion paste (Mat. No. 05-002).
(b) For NSA935514 only:

- Install the applicable wedge support. No specific tools are necessary for installation.
NOTE: For combination support NSA935514-06:

- Put washer NSA935514-03 in position on half-support NSA935514-04.
- Engage this assembly in the hole and put the half-support NSA935514-05 in position.
- Tighten to stop 5. Tighten support to end position. Turn a minimum of 1/2 turns and a maximum of 1 1/2 turns.
(2) Cable harness installation

(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
- Put the cable harness in position and attach it with a cable tie NSA935401.
The cables must be held tightly in the support, but must not be constricted or bent.
NOTE: For NSA935513 you must give the harness protection with:
- A split convoluted conduit or a split shrinkable sleeve.
- A self-adhesive tape ASNA5107 (if the harness does not have protection or has an ABS0887 protection).
- A protective bobbin NSA5539 (for harness diameter <
2.5 mm (0.0984 in.) ).
3. U or V-shaped support
(Ref. Fig. 004)
In this group of supports, there are different types:
One-harness fasteners (single V) with the codes that follow:
- ABS0677
- ABS0774
- ABS1082
- ABS1092
- ABS1093
- ABS1094
- E0254
- E0343
- E0420
- E0659
- E0664
- E0675.
Two-harness fasteners (double V) with the codes that follow:
- ABS0354

- ABS2022
- E0255
- E0660.
One-harness fasteners (single U) with the code that follows:
- ABS0796.
Two-harness fasteners (double U) with the codes that follow:
- ABS0795
- ABS1083
- ABS1127.
Multiple-harness fasteners with the codes that follow:
- ABS0355
- ABS1119
- ABS2083
- E0661
- E0663
- NSA935504.
This group of cable supports is used in pressurized areas and sponson (for the A400M) except the APU compartment and hydraulic bay, in
temperature areas < 135 deg.C (275.00 deg.F) only. You must not use it for G and P routes.
NOTE: V supports are not recommended for:

- Small harnesses (dia. <
5 mm (0.1968 in.) )
- Large harnesses (dia. >
25 mm (0.9842 in.) )
- Stressed harnesses.
NOTE: You must install the harnesses with fireproof supports E0663 on blankets.
NOTE: Cable support ABS2022 is used for P, M and S routes.
A. P/N Characteristics
ABS0677 - A - 01
ABS0774 - A01 - A
ABS0795 - A01 - A
ABS0796 - A01 - A
ABS1082 - A - 01 - A
ABS1083 - A - 01 - A
ABS1092 - A01 - A
ABS1093 - A - 01 - A
ABS1094 - A - 01 - A
ABS1119 - A - 01
ABS1127 - A - 01 - A
ABS2022 - A - 01 - A
| | | |
| | | ---- Material code
| | --------- Size code
| -------------- Type code
----------------------- Standard P/N
ABS0354 - 01
ABS0355 - 01
E0255 - 01
E0343 - 01
E0420 - 01
E0659 - 01
E0660 - 01
E0661 - 01
E0663 - 01
E0664 - 01
NSA935504 - 01
| |
| ------------- Type code
-------------------- Standard P/N
E0675 - A - 01 - A
| | | |
| | | ----- Hole code | Code A: for screwing
| | | | Without code: for riveting
| | |
| | ---------- Type code
| |
| --------------- Size code

|
--------------------- Standard P/N
E0254 - 01
| |
| --------------- Size code
|
--------------------- Standard P/N
ABS2083 - MK01 - C
| | |
| | ------ Material Code
| |
| ----------- Type code
|
-------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Temperature
(a) For all these types of support:
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
(b) For ABS2083 (during 60000 h)
105 deg.C (221.00 deg.F) .
(c) For ABS0354, ABS0355, ABS0677 and ABS2083 (during 40000 h):
120 deg.C (248.00 deg.F) .
(d) For ABS0774, ABS0795, ABS0796, ABS1082, ABS1083, ABS1092, ABS1093 (material code B), ABS1119, ABS1127-B and ABS2022:
130 deg.C (266.00 deg.F) .
(e) For ABS2083 (during 5000 h), E0254, E0255, E0420, E0659, E0660, E0661, E0663, E0664, E0675 and NSA935504:
135 deg.C (275.00 deg.F) .
(f) For ABS1093 (material code A), ABS1094 and ABS1127-A:
170 deg.C (338.00 deg.F) .
(3) Type code
(a) For ABS0774:

U-clamp type
A01 and B01 = cable support for aluminum cross-beam.

C01, D01 and E01 = cable support for CFRP cross-beam.
(b) For ABS0796:
A01 = cable support without equipment.
(c) For ABS1082:
A01 = support for aluminum and CFRP cross-beam.
B01 = support for aluminum and CFRP cross-beam.
C01 = support for aluminum cross-beam (not for new design).
C02 = support for aluminum cross-beam.
P01 = distance plate for aluminum and CFRP cross-beam.
S01 = clamp.
(d) For ABS1092:
A01 = cable support for aluminum cross-beam (with clip).
B01 = cable support for CFRP cross-beam (with wedge clip).
(e) For ABS1119:
A = nut for aluminum cross-beam.
B = screw for aluminum cross-beam.
C = nut for CFRP cross-beam.
D = screw for CFRP cross-beam.
K = body for nut attachment.
L = body for screw attachment.
M = screw lock.
S or T = screw.
(f) For ABS2022:
A01 = cable support down.
B01 = cable support up.
P01 = support.
(g) For ABS2083:
A01 = socket for bolt
A02 = socket with ledge
B01 = bolt
B02 = bolt
B03 = bolt
B05 = bolt
H01 = head + nut
H02 = head + nut
H03 = head + nut
H04 = head + nut
H05 = head + nut
H06 = head + nut
H07 = head + nut
H08 = head + plate
H09 = head + plate
P01 = plate
MK01 = bolt + socket
(4) Material code
(a) For ABS1093 and ABS1127:
A = polyetherimide (PEI)
B = polyamide (PA66)
(b) For ABS0774, ABS0795, ABS0796, ABS1082, ABS1083, ABS1092 and ABS2022:
A = polyamide (PA66)
(c) For ABS1094:
A = polyetherimide (PEI)
(d) For ABS2083:

U-clamp type
A = polyetheretherketone (PEEK)
B = polyamide (PA66)
C = titanium
D = CRES (Corrosion REsistant Steel)
B. Procedure
(1) Use the applicable cable support, in relation to the instruction data or the harness diameter.
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
NOTE: When open supports are used, example NSA935504 and equivalent, the diameter of the harnesses must not be more
than the width of the vee. This must include 20% of the harness diameter section for growth provision, in the support.
(2) Install the cable support on the structure.

There are four methods:
(a) Clip-type attachment:
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
1 For ABS0354, ABS0774:
Add a mounting pin and push against the clip to safety the attachment.
You can use a plastic hammer.
NOTE: You must install ABS0354 and ABS0774 wet, with anti-corrosion paste (Mat. No. 05-002).
2 For ABS0795, ABS1082 and ABS1092-A01:

Add a mounting pin and push against the clip to safety the attachment.
NOTE: In relation to the area configuration, you can use several connecting parts (e.g. straps) with ABS0774 (Refer to
para: specific cases).
3 For ABS1083 and ABS1092-B01:

Install the wedge clip and safety with a cable tie NSA935401.
4 For ABS1093:
Install the cable support on the structure. Make sure that the fixing nose is correctly engaged in the drill hole of the
structure.
Then, install the clip to safety the attachment.
(b) Rivet-type attachment:
(Ref. Fig. 008)
For E0254, E0255, E0659, E0664 or NSA935504:
The head of the rivet is held on the cable support side.
(c) Screw-type attachment:
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
1 For ABS0677, ABS1094, ABS1127, ABS2022, E0660, E0675 or NSA935504:
Add a screw type NAS1096 or NAS1801-3 and a clipnut.
2 For ABS0796, add a screw type NAS1801 or NAS1102.
3 For ABS0355, ABS1119, ABS2083, E0420, E0661 or E0663:
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
(Ref. Fig. 012)
(Ref. Fig. 013)
NOTE: You must not use bracket ABS2083 in high vibration and high acceleration areas.
NOTE: After tightening of bracket ABS2083, you must not turn the bracket more than 180 degrees
180 deg.C (356.00 deg.F) .
NOTE: You must install the support ABS2083 wet with anti-corrosion agent (Mat. No. 05-002).
-
Assemble the components to make the cable support.
-
Make sure that the support is correctly turned.

U-clamp type
- Tighten the cable support to between

0.25 m.daN (22.12 lbf.in) and 0.35 m.daN (30.97 lbf.in) .
- After you install and tighten the cable support, make sure that the blade is held correctly and that the
assembly is stable.
4 For E0663 on blankets:

(Ref. Fig. 014)
5 For E0343:
The support is attached to the structure with screws. Cable harnesses with a diameter of max 25 mm (0.9842 in.) are
secured to the support with cable ties NSA935401.
(3) Protection selection for the coaxial cable to be attached
---------------------------------------------------
| Coaxial cable | Bobbin | Bobbin |
| type | NSA935510-XX | NSA5539X |
|-------------------------------------------------|
| WN | 03 | - |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|
| WD | 07 | - |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|
| WL | - | S |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|
| XF | 11 | - |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|
| WZ | - | S |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|
| XK | 01 | - |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|
| XS | 04 | - |
|---------------|----------------|----------------|
| XA | 01 | - |
---------------------------------------------------
(4) Install the harness on the cable support.
(Ref. Fig. 015)
(Ref. Fig. 016)
(Ref. Fig. 017)
(Ref. Fig. 018)
The harness diameter can be 5 mm (0.1968 in.) larger than the width of the V-shaped mobile support given in the
drawings. You must add two layers of ASNA5107 tape on the attachment point.
If the harness diameter is more than 5 mm (0.1968 in.) larger than the V-support width, you can replace the V-support by
a larger support of the same reference family.
Make sure that the harness bend radii and distances in relation to the structure, the other systems and the bundles agree
with the installation rules.
Step 1 - Put protection on the harness at the location of the support:
NOTE: You must use ABS1082C to attach harnesses between floor panels and cross-beams in areas where access is not easy
and where there is a risk of contact (floor attachment screw). You must also use ABS1082C to get the correct distance
between harnesses and floor panels. In this support, you must remove NSA935401 cable ties and replace them with
NSA8420-7 lacing tape.
(Ref. Fig. 016)
NOTE: You must make sure that a coaxial cable (e.g. E0406WD or E0692WN or EN4604-003WZ) has the protection of a bobbin
NSA935510 at the fastener point and that cable E0690WL has the protection of a bushing NSA5539.
NOTE: On harnesses with a diameter more than or equal to

35 mm (1.3779 in.) , use silicone tape NSA935403 or adhesive fiber glass tape ASNA3565 or black tape ASNA5107 to
prevent damage to the periphery of the harness at the location of the support (approximately 2 turns) with 10 mm (0.3937
in.) to 15 mm (0.5905 in.) maximum protrusion on each side of the support.
NOTE: If the diameter of the harness is more than the width of the "V" in the support, add two layers or more of tape ASNA5107
or adhesive fiber glass tape ASNA3565.

U-clamp type
NOTE: For small harnesses (dia.

2.5 mm (0.0984 in.) to 5 mm (0.1968 in.) ) which can easily move between the support and the cable tie, add two layers
of tape ASNA5107 to prevent sliding and attach with NSA935401-04.
NOTE: If support NSA935504 is used to attach optical cables, you must put 3 overlapping layers of tape (e.g. ASNA5107) on the
cables to give them protection. The tape must protrude on each side of the support
5 mm (0.1968 in.) to 10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
NOTE: Harnesses with conduits (ABS0887, shielded conduit,etc.) must have 2 overlapping layers of tape ASNA5107 for
protection.
Step 2 - Attach the harness with cable tie NSA935401:
NOTE: For ABS2022 :

- P-routes must be attached with ABS1339 to the bracket.
- M & S routes must be attached with cable tie NAS935401.
NOTE: On harnesses with a diameter <

35 mm (1.3779 in.) but > 5 mm (0.1968 in.) , the cable tie must have a minimum width of 3.7 mm (0.1456 in.) .
NOTE: On harnesses with a diameter more than or equal to

35 mm (1.3779 in.) , the cable tie must have a minimum width of 7 mm (0.2755 in.) .
NOTE: On harnesses with a diameter more than

25 mm (0.9842 in.) in a straight section, or more than 15 mm (0.5905 in.) at elbow inlets or outlets, after you install the
cable tie, engage the end of the cable tie between the support and the cable tie to make a second loop.
NOTE: On supports E0664 (type codes 11, 12, 13, 14 and 15), you must install a tubular support ABS5147, clipped in the
applicable location. You must hold it in position with lacing tape NSA8420, with the knot on the side.
(Ref. Fig. 008)
NOTE: For small harnesses (dia. < or = to

2.5 mm (0.0984 in.) ) you must add a bobbin NSA5539S and attach them on the V support with NSA935401-04.
4. U-clamp type
E0435
NSA935501.
This type of cable support is used in pressurized areas to attach large diameter harnesses.
This type of cable support is also used with optical cable.
E0435 - A - 01
| | |
| | ----------- Type code
| |
| ----------------- Material Code
|
------------------------- Standard P/N
NSA935501 - S - 4
| | |
| | ------------ Size code
| |
| ----------------- Element code | P: Locking plate
| | S: Support
|
--------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Temperature
For NSA935501:
For E0435:

U-clamp type
(3) Type code

(Ref. Fig. 019)
(a) NSA935501
In relation to the size code of the U-clamp type, different dimensions are specified as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------
| ELEMENT CODE | SIZE CODE | HOLE NUMBER | A mm (in.) |
|---------------|-------------|---------------|------------------|
| | 1 | 2 | 30.48 (1.2000) |
| |-------------|---------------|------------------|
| S | 2 | 4 | 38.10 (1.5000) |
| (old type) |-------------|---------------|------------------|
| | 3 | 6 | 45.72 (1.8000) |
| |-------------|---------------|------------------|
| | 4 | 8 | 53.34 (2.1000) |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
| S | 4 | 8 | 55 (2.1653) |
| (new type) | | | |
------------------------------------------------------------------
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 020)

Fairlead guide type
- Select the applicable U-clamp for the harness diameter.

- Install this U-clamp on the structure with a screw.
- Install the harnesses in the U-clamp.
NOTE: When harnesses are attached to U-clamps NSA935501 S or E0435, they must be made such that each harness or sub-
harness does not have a diameter of more than
35 mm (1.3779 in.) at the support.
NOTE: You must not use plate NSA935501P with support E0435.
NOTE: If the harness diameter is more than

35 mm (1.3779 in.) , you must divide it so that it is less than 35 mm (1.3779 in.) . (Use NSA8420 lacing tape)
- Install the locking plate and attach with cable tie NSA935401.
5. Fairlead guide type
(Ref. Fig. 021)
ABS0678 with ABS0679
ABS1088 with ABS1089 and NSA5516
E0398
E0557
NSA935511
NSA935512.
This type of cable support is used in all areas only to route feeder cables.
ABS1088 A01 A 01
| | | |
| | | -- Size code
| | |
| | ------ Material code : A = polyetherimide (PEI) yellow
| | B = polyetheretherketone (PEEK) grey
| | C = polyetherimide (PEI) black
| |
| ----------Type code : A01 = 5 cavities
| A02 = 4 cavities
| B01 or B02 = 3 cavities
| C01 = 5 cavities
| C02 = 4 cavities
| D01 or D02 = 3 cavities
| D03 or D04 = 3 cavities
| E01 or E02 = 3 cavities
| F01 or F02 = 3 cavities
| G01 or G02 = 3 cavities
| H01 or H02 = 3 cavities
| J01 or J02 = 3 cavities
|
----------------- Standard P/N
NSA935511 - 01
NSA935512 - 01
| |
| -------------- Size code
|
------------------------ Standard P/N
ABS0678 A 01
E0398 A 01
E0557 A 01
| | |
| | ---- Type code
| |

Fairlead guide type
| --------- Material code:

| A = polyetherimide (PEI) (for ABS0678 and E0557)
| A = zytel 103 (for E0398)
| B = polyetheretherketone (for ABS0678)
|
----------------- Standard P/N
(2) Temperature
- For ABS0678, ABS0679, ABS1088, E0398 and E0557:
- For ABS0678 (code A) and ABS1088 (codes A and C):
For ABS0678 (code B) and ABS0679:
For E0398 and E0557:
For ABS1088 (code B):
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 022)
(Ref. Fig. 023)
- Use the applicable fairlead guide type.
- If necessary, install the support on the structure.
NOTE: For ABS0678 and NSA935512:

- Install the applicable bracket between the cable support and the structure.
- Hold the brackets on the structure with rivets or screws.
- Install bobbin NSA935510 on each cable when used on fairleads NSA935511, NSA935512 and E0398.
- Install the cables on the fairlead guide.
- Install the fairlead on the support.
- Hold this assembly with serflex adjustable clamp ASNA0033 or cable tie NSA935401.
NOTE: For ABS1088, because of the shape of the bobbin, the cables adjacent to the nose of the bobbin (in the corner of metal
clamp NSA5516) are not as tight as the other cables. Thus, rubbing can occur between the cables and the bobbin. This
rubbing is permitted because the cable surface is very smooth (roughness <
0.003 mm (0.0001 in.) ).
NOTE: For ABS1088, you must torque adjustable metallic clamp ASNA0033 so that each cable can turn around its axis but not
move along its axis.
(1) Procedure table for ABS1088:

----------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | ASSEMBLED WITH |
|-----------|--------------------------------------------|
| A01 | |
|-----------| ABS1089 with ASNA0033 and NSA935401 |
| A02 | |
|-----------|--------------------------------------------|
| B01 | AS21919WCHXX/MS21919WCHXX |
|-----------| or NSA5516XXND and NSA935401 |
| B02 | |
|-----------|--------------------------------------------|
| C01 | |
|-----------| |
| C02 | |
|-----------| |
| D01 | |
|-----------| |
| D02 | |
|-----------| |
| D03 | |
|-----------| |
| D04 | |

Fairlead guide type
|-----------| ABS1089 with ASNA0033 |

| E01 | or NSA5516 and NSA935401 |
|-----------| |
| E02 | |
|-----------| |
| F01 | |
|-----------| |
| F02 | |
|-----------| |
| G01 | |
|-----------| |
| G02 | |
|-----------|--------------------------------------------|
| H01 | |
|-----------| |
| H02 | ABS1089 with ASNA0033 or NSA5516XXND |
|-----------| or NSA5516XXND and NSA935401 |
| J01 | or AS62200 |
|-----------| |
| J02 | |
----------------------------------------------------------
C. Related items
- ABS0679 bracket
(1) Installation procedure of adjustable metallic clamp ASNA0033
(Ref. Fig. 024)
(Ref. Fig. 025)
Clamp ASNA0033 is used to attach cables with a fairlead (e.g. ABS1088) on a bracket (e.g. ABS1089).
When possible, you must install the screw head of the clamp in the bracket area. If not possible, you must install the screw
head so that there is no contact between the cable and the clamp tongue.
6. Through-structure type
This type of cable support has the code that follows:
ABS1020
This type of cable support is used to route cables through the structure.
(Ref. Fig. 026)
ABS1020 A 04 A
| | | |
| | | ------------ Material code: A = Synthetic rubber
| | | B = Fluorinated silicone rubber
| | --------------- Size code
| |
| ------------------- Type code: A, B or C
|
------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Temperature
- For type codes A and B:
- For type code C:
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 026)
NOTE: You must make a split in ABS1020 type code C from the internal diameter to the external diameter.
When you install ABS1020 type code C on a vertical surface, you must make the split in the top position (12 o'clock position).
7. Separator and spacer type

Fairlead guide type
ABS0054 - Separator
ABS0731 - Spacer
ABS1144 - Spacer
ABS1339 - Clamp
ABS1526 - Spacer
E0688 - Spacer
NSA5527 - Spacer.
You can change the length of an installed spacer to obey the harness routing rules. This is applicable to harness dia. less
than 13 mm (0.5118 in.) , and one spacer only.
You can replace an installed spacer NSA5527 by a new spacer (same reference) with a height of minus or plus 15 mm
(0.5905 in.) max. with respect to the replaced spacer.
Make sure that the harness bend radii and distances in relation to the structure, the other systems and bundles agree with
the installation rules.
NOTE: You must not use ABS0054, ABS0731 and ABS1144 in SWAMP and hot areas.
NOTE: You must use spacers:

- On G route clamps
- In non-pressurized areas
But it is recommended to use ABS0731 or ABS1144.
NOTE: You must use non-conductive fixed brackets where metal spacers are used on conductive composite surfaces. In all other
cases, you must use plastic spacers.
NOTE: You must use metal spacers for G and P routes and for other routes in high temperature or SWAMP areas.
NOTE: You can use two ABS1339 as a separator in non-pressurized areas (butterfly configuration).
NOTE: ABS1339 used in "butterfly configuration" is mandatory for P route segregation when it is necessary to keep segregation
distances between harnesses (between P route(s) and P routes(s) and between P route(s) and other route(s)).
You must not use this configuration in SWAMP and hot areas.
NOTE: You must use spacers ABS1526 and E0688 in pressurized areas only, in VUs, where segregation between stressed
harnesses along short, straight lengths is necessary (e.g. after curves). You must not use these separators for P routes.
These types of cable supports are used to keep separation between the electrical wiring (refer to the segregation rules between
routes). When their use is mandatory, they are shown in the installation drawing.
NOTE: During maintenance, if necessary (for sagging phenomenon, to get correct clearance between harnesses or with the
structure), you can add separators or spacers but you must keep them to a minimum.
NOTE: For EFCS harnesses, the use of spacers or separators must only be a temporary repair. This repair must not stay on the
aircraft more than 20 months. Obey the segregation rules to route the harness at the subsequent maintenance check.
This type of cable support is used in all areas but not hot areas. In these areas, lacing tape NSA8420-2 is used as a separator
(noose-type knot).
(Ref. Fig. 027)
(Ref. Fig. 028)
ABS1144 A 50 A
| | | |
| | | ------------ Material code: A = PA 6.6 (polyamide)
| | |
| | ---------------- Size code
| |
| ------------------- Type code: A, B or C
|
------------------------- Standard P/N
ABS1526 01
| |
| ------------------- Type code

Fairlead guide type
|
------------------------- Standard P/N
NSA5527 - 03-02 - D
ABS0054 A 5
ABS0731 A 01
E0688 01 G
| | |
| | --- Size code (for ABS0054 and ABS0731)
| | or
| | Material code (for NSA5527 and E0688)
| | | Without code:
| | | PA 6.6 (polyamide) (for NSA5527)
| | | or ZYTEL 103R (for E0688)
| | | D code: ALU (for NSA5527) (NOT AUTHORIZED FOR WIRING)
| | | G code: PA 6V0 (for E0688)
| |
| --------- Size code (for ABS0070, E0688 and NSA5527)
| or
| Color and material code (for ABS0054 and ABS0731):
| A = PA 6.6 natural color
|
-------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Temperature
- For ABS0054:
- For ABS0731, ABS1144 and ABS1526:
- For ABS0731:
- For ABS1526:
- For E0688:
Without material code:
With code G:
- For NSA5527 and ABS1144:
(3) Dimensional characteristics

Specific cases
(Ref. Fig. 029)

(Ref. Fig. 030)
B. Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 031)
(Ref. Fig. 032)
(Ref. Fig. 033)
- Select the applicable separator or spacer type.
NOTE: On spacers ABS0054 ("ladder" type), the cable tie must be on the side opposite the spacer.
(Ref. Fig. 032)
NOTE: On flight control circuits, you must not use spacers or separators.
- Hold the harnesses on the separator or spacer with cable tie NSA935401 or lacing tape NSA8420-2 (obey a minimum distance).
You must use spacer NSA5527 with clamps (e.g. ABS1339, NSA5516) or supports NSA935504.
You cannot use spacer NSA5527 directly on cables (on A380 and subsequent programs).
8. Specific cases
- ABS1049-003
- ABS1049-004
- ABS1049-005
- ABS1576.
In some cases (for example in VUs, interface areas, etc.), the structure (rod) or tubular support is used to hold the wiring to make sure that:
- it is not pinched during installation of the VU on the aircraft,
or
- rubbing does not occur during the life of the aircraft.
NOTE: For a coaxial cable, you must wind tape ASNA5107-B around the coaxial cable and the tubular support before you tighten with cable tie
NSA935401.
For a coaxial harness, you must wind tape ASNA5107-B around the harness only before you tighten with cable tie NSA935401.
NOTE: You must attach harnesses on tubular supports with:

- lacing tape NSA8420-7, or
- cable tie NSA935401 (size code 04 for harness diameter less than
35 mm (1.3779 in.) or size code 10 for harness diameter more than or equal to 35 mm (1.3779 in.) ).
NOTE: To be approved, the structure or tubular supports that are metallic must have the protection of special paint (for tubular support) or a heat-
shrinkable sleeve (for spacer rod).
A. Cable support cross-beam ABS1049-003 with bracket connector ABS1049-004 and junction plate ABS1049-005
(Ref. Fig. 034)
You can use this type of cable support when no structural attachment is available in the area of the harness routing.
(1) P/N Characteristics
(a) P/N identification
ABS1049-003 A 01 A
ABS1049-004 A 01 A
ABS1049-005 A 01 A
| | | |
| | | -------- Material code A = Polyamid PA66
| | |
| | ------------ Size code
| |
| --------------- Type code
|
----------------------- Standard P/N
(b) Temperature
(2) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 034)
- In relation to the area configuration, assemble the components, attach the cross-beam to the structure and tighten.
- Install the harness on the cross-beam and safety with cable ties NSA935401.
NOTE: The diameter of the harness must not be more than

20 mm (0.7874 in.) .

Specific cases
B. ABS1576
(Ref. Fig. 035)
To do the installation, you must attach all the parts together.
You must use this type of cable support for harnesses with diameter < 25 mm (0.9842 in.) and in areas where temperature is < 150 deg.C
(302.00 deg.F) and when the installation of clamps or "V" supports is not possible.
ABS1576 - A01
| |
| --------------- Type code
|
----------------------- Standard P/N
(b) Type code
A01 = "T" connecting tube
B01 = "L" connecting tube
C01 = "V" connecting tube
D01 = "U" connecting tube
E01 = end tube
F01 and F02 = intermediate "V" cable support
G10 to G242 = tube
H01 = double "V" cable support
H02 = end support tube
J01 and J02 = insulating support
R01 = raceway
(2) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 035)
- In relation to the area configuration, select and assemble the components with Material No. 08-051 bonding glue. Attach the
assembly to the structure.
-
Install the harness and safety with cable ties NSA935401.
NOTE: In this example, the wiring is attached with cable ties NSA935401 and with cable supports ABS0774. No other protection is
necessary.
C. Example of wiring with spacer rod or tubular support

(Ref. Fig. 036)
(Ref. Fig. 037)
(Ref. Fig. 038)
Spacer rods are metallic and their protection is a heat-shrinkable sleeve retracted with the applicable tool.
Tubular supports are metallic and their protection is special paint applied before installation and wiring attachment.
NOTE: The distance between two cable ties NSA935401 (harness attachment on the tubular support) must be
75 mm (2.9527 in.) maximum.
NOTE: When bundle routing goes on a ramp, you must continue to see the ramp when all bundles are installed.
NOTE: After bundle installation on ramp, the bundle must be as far as possible from the adjacent structure, screws and other bundles.
9. Related items
- ABS1095 Bracket for covering
- ABS1423 Rod for cable support
- ABS1424 Rod for cable support
- ABS1523 Insulator for cable support
- ABS1545, ABS1546 and ABS1717 Adhesive bonded bracket
- ABS5147 Tubular support for cable support (e.g. E0664)
- ASNA2327 Bracket
- ASNA2328 Bracket.
These related items are insulators for cable supports.
NOTE: You must use ASNA2327 and ASNA2328 for P routes and for other routes in high temperature and SWAMP areas.
NOTE: Two metallic clamps ASNA0033 with a protection of tape ASNA5107 attach insulated plastic bracket ABS1095 to a tube (rod). You can thus
use this bracket as a support for a harness support (e.g. ABS1339).
NOTE: You must use ABS1423 and ABS1424 for all routes but not those in high temperature and SWAMP areas and on conductive composite
surfaces.
NOTE: You must not install spacers (e.g. NSA5527) with rods or brackets (e.g. ASNA2327, ASNA2328, ABS1323, ABS1324).

Specific cases
NOTE: You must use ABS5147 in mechanical constraint areas (e.g. harness diameter >
25 mm (0.9842 in.) ). You must attach it on support E0664.
A. ABS1095
(Ref. Fig. 039)
You must attach bracket ABS1095 on a structural circular rod with two metallic clamps ASNA0033. It is used to attach cable supports (e.g.
ABS1339).
ABS1095 A 01 E
| | | |
| | | ------- Type code (without code, E, H or K)
| | |
| | ----------- Dash code
| |
| -------------- Material code
|
------------------- Standard P/N
(b) Temperature
(2) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 039)
(Ref. Fig. 040)
When possible, you must install the screw head of the clamp in the bracket area. If not possible, you must install the screw head so that
there is no contact between the clamp tongue and the protective tape of the structural rod.
(3) Related item
- ASNA0033 adjustable metallic clamp
B. ABS1545, ABS1546 and ABS1717
(Ref. Fig. 041)
It is necessary to bond this type of bracket on the structure with adhesive. You must use it with all cable supports (V supports and P clamps)
that have screw attachments.
ABS1545 A 3 C 12 R
ABS1546 A 3 A 12 A 01
ABS1717 A 3 A 12 A 01
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | ----- Pitch code: 01 = 1.65 mm (0.065 in.)
| | | | | --------- Type code (for ABS1545)
| | | | | Supply condition code (for ABS1546 and ABS1717)
| | | | ------------ Length code
| | | ---------------- Material code for:
| | | Stand-off (ABS1546)
| | | Nut-plate (ABS1545)
| | | Stud (ABS1717)
| | ------------------- Thread code
| ---------------------- Material code for base-plate
---------------------------- Standard P/N
(b) Temperature
(c) Maximum load
The maximum load applied by the harnesses must be 5 N for each bonded bracket.
(d) Type code (for ABS1545) or supply condition code (for ABS1546 and ABS1717)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| P/N | Type code | Configuration |
|---------|-----------------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | - | Basic |
| ABS1545 |-----------------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | R | Reinforced |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Specific cases
| P/N | Code | Pitch code | Supply condition |

|---------|-----------|------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | Without | Without | 1 X ABS1546 |
| |-----------|------------|-----------------------------------------|
| ABS1546 | A | 01 |2 X ABS1546 ganged in horizontal position|
| |-----------|------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | B | 01 |2 X ABS1546 ganged in vertical position |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | Without | Without | 1 X ABS1717 |
| |-----------|------------|-----------------------------------------|
| ABS1717 | A | 01 |2 X ABS1717 ganged in horizontal position|
| |-----------|------------|-----------------------------------------|
| | B | 01 |2 X ABS1717 ganged in vertical position |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(e) Material code
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| P/N | Element | Material | Material | Finish |
| | | code | | |
|-------- |------------|----------|------------------------------|------------|
| ABS1545 | | A | PEI (polyetherimide) | Natural |
| ABS1546 | Base-plate |----------| glass fiber reinforced |------------|
| ABS1717 | | B | 40 % by weight glass fiber | Primed |
|---------|------------|----------|------------------------------|------------|
| ABS1545 | Nut-plate | C | CRES | Passivated |
|---------|------------|----------|------------------------------|------------|
| | | A | CRES | Passivated |
| | |----------|------------------------------|------------|
| ABS1546 | Stand-off | B | PEI (polyetherimide) | Natural |
| | |----------| glass fiber reinforced |------------|
| | | C | 40 % by weight glass fiber | Primed |
|---------|------------|----------|------------------------------|------------|
| ABS1717 | Stud | A | CRES | Passivated |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(a) Materials and tools

Related items
- Cleaning agent (Material No. 11-026A, No. 11-026B, No. 11-026D or No. 11-010)
- LATEX gloves (not specific)
- Protection goggles (not specific)
- SCOTCH BRITE (fine)
- PENTEL 100WS to make marks on unpainted composite material
- STAEDLER 311/312/315 or 316 (black ink) to make marks on grey finish paint
- PENCIL to make marks on primer
- Aluminum oxide paper (grade 100 to 180)
- Dual cartridge HYSOL EA9394
- Gun SETE-MIP CO200PAMRSA (for 200ml dual cartrige)
- Gun Plastic Glue Dispensing PQ50-P (or equivalent) (for 50ml dual cartrige)
- Mixer nozzle MIXPAC MIXER MA6-3-17-S
- Torque wrench SATAIR HARDWARE CB603-2 (for ABS1545 bonding bracket)
- Torque wrench SATAIR HARDWARE CB612 (for ABS1546 and ABS1717 bonding brackets)
- Wrench adaptor SATAIR HARDWARE CB603-1 (for ABS1545 bracket)
- Wrench adaptor SATAIR HARDWARE CB609A3 (for ABS1717 bonding bracket)
- Wrench adaptor SATAIR HARDWARE CB609B3 (for ABS1546 bonding bracket)
- Wrench adaptor SATAIR HARDWARE CB612A3 (for ABS1546 bonding bracket)
- Milling tool ROTAFLEX or RECOULES RB406, 035 or 12L1280-36.
(b) Surface preparation
Clean the surfaces that you will bond with a clean, lint-free cloth and a cleaning agent (Refer to chapter 20-55-10):
For composite "thermosetting" and metallic surfaces, you must use Material No. 11-026A, 11-026B or 11-026D.
For composite metallic surfaces, you must use Material No. 11-010.
NOTE: All surfaces that you will bond with adhesive must be clean with no oil, dirt or other unwanted materials.
- Strip the surface protection with the materials that follow, in relation to the surface type:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Surface type | Abrasive material | Grade | Observations |
|----------------------------|-------------------|---------|-----------------|
| Composite (thermosetting | Aluminum | 100 to | Do not cause da-|
| or thermoplastic) | oxide paper | 180 | mage to fibers |
|----------------------------|-------------------|---------|-----------------|
| Primer coating | Scotch brite | Fine | Remove gloss |
| (PAC33 and P60A) | | | but not primer |
|----------------------------|-------------------|---------|-----------------|
| Primer and top-coat | Scotch brite | Fine | Remove gloss |
| (PU66 and F70A) | | | but not primer |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Bonding procedure
(Ref. Fig. 042)
(Ref. Fig. 043)
NOTE: You must try to bond the brackets on a flat area of the structure. If this is not possible, you can bond the brackets on a concave curved area
of the structure with a radius of curvature of more than
305 mm (12.0078 in.) . You must install the adaptor parallel to the curvature. If this is not possible, you can install the adaptor perpendicular
to the curvature if the radius of curvature is more than 915 mm (36.0236 in.) .
- Clean the base of the bracket with the applicable material.

- Remove the adhesive paper from the adaptor bearing points and discard it.
- To use the adhesive correctly, it must be at
37 deg.C (98.60 deg.F) . For this, you must put the dual cartridge EA9394 in the oven.
- Install the dual cartridge EA9394 in the gun (e.g. SETE-MIP CO200PAMRSA or equivalent).
NOTE: You must make sure that the dual cartridge is not expired.
- Make sure that the material is homogenous (grey and without air bubbles).
1 Step 1 - Apply mixed adhesive to bracket base.
NOTE: You must apply a small quantity of mixed adhesive to the center of the bracket base. The quantity applied must be only sufficient to let
the excess adhesive lightly flow around the full periphery of the base.
For this, the adhesive deposit diameter must be half that of the base diameter.
(Ref. Fig. 042)

2 Step 2 - Put the adaptor in position on the substrate with a template or other approved technique (e.g. laser positioning). Push on the ends of
the adaptor so that the foam pads bond to the substrate.
NOTE: The time between when the adhesive is applied on the fastener and its positioning on the substrate must be as short as possible (a
maximum time of 5 minutes).
3 Step 3 - Push on the center section of the adaptor but do not put pressure on the bracket. The over-centering and the adaptor cause the
adhesive to flow and keep the bracket in position during curing (12 hours minimum at 23 deg.C (73.40 deg.F) ).
After curing, make sure that you can see a continuous bead of adhesive along all edges of the bonded bracket (if not, remove the bracket, clean

Related items
the contact surfaces and bond a new bracket).
NOTE: Total curing time is 120 hours and curing time before installation and control test is 12 hours.
4 Step 4 - To remove the adaptor, hold it with pliers and disengage it from the substrate. Discard the adaptor.
(3) Control test of bonding
(Ref. Fig. 044)
NOTE: You must do a visual inspection of 100% of the bonded brackets.
After 12 hours of curing, you must do a control test on 10% of the bonded brackets. If there is debonding after the test, you must remove the brackets
and replace them with new ones.
(a) For ABS1545
You must use a torque wrench CB603-2 or equivalent and an adaptor CB603-1.
- Put the adaptor in position on the bracket.
- Adjust the torque wrench to 5 N.m (+ 1 N.m).
- TORQUE (in clockwise and counterclockwise direction) until the wrench "clicks".
(b) For ABS1717 and ABS1546
For ABS1717, you must use a torque wrench CB612 or equivalent and an adaptor CB609A3.
For ABS1546, you must use a torque wrench CB612 or equivalent and an adaptor CB609B3 for material code A or CB612A3 for material code B.
- Select the applicable adaptor.
- Turn the knob of the adaptor to attach it to the bracket.
- Adjust the torque wrench to 355 N.m (+ 40 N.m).
- Push down on the handle until the wrench "clicks".
(4) Removal procedure
(a) Bracket removal
(Ref. Fig. 045)
If you find bonding defects during the installation procedure or control test, you must remove the brackets with pliers.
NOTE: For removal, you can use a mallet or a tube as an alternative.
(b) Adhesive removal

(Ref. Fig. 046)
(Ref. Fig. 047)
You must remove the adhesive from the surface after bracket removal but you must keep approximately 0.2 mm (0.0078 in.) of remaining adhesive.
For this, you must use a milling tool (ROTAFLEX, RECOULES or equivalent) with the related cutter or abrasive disk.
NOTE: After adhesive removal, you can install a new bracket on the milled area.
After installation of the new bracket, you must put the same protective material as that removed on the milled areas that are not below the bracket.
(Ref. Fig. 045)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Cable Supports - Description and Installation - NSA935513
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Cable Supports - Cable Installation - NSA935513
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Cable Supports - Cable Installation - NSA935514
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Description - ABS0677, ABS0354, ABS0795 and E0663
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Characteristics
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Characteristics
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Characteristics - ABS0795 and ABS1083
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Procedure - ABS0774, ABS1093 and E0664
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Procedure - ABS1094, ABS1127, E0420-01 and NSA935504
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Procedure - ABS2022
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Installation - E0663
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Decription - ABS0355-03

Related items
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Procedure - ABS2083
Figure 014.1 / Graphic SH 014.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Type - Installation E0663
Figure 015.1 / Graphic SH 015.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Procedure
Figure 016.1 / Graphic SH 016.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Installation Procedure ABS1082
Figure 017.1 / Graphic SH 017.1 Cable Supports - U or V-Shaped Support Installation Procedure
Figure 018.1 / Graphic SH 018.1 Cable Supports - Small Harnesses Protection with V Supports
Figure 019.1 / Graphic SH 019.1 Cable Supports - U-clamp Type Description - E0435 and NSA935501
Figure 020.1 / Graphic SH 020.1 Cable Supports - U-clamp Type Procedure - NSA935501
Figure 021.1 / Graphic SH 021.1 Cable Supports - Fairlead Guide Type Description - ABS0678, ABS1088, E0398, E0557, NSA935511 and NSA935512
Figure 022.1 / Graphic SH 022.1 Cable Supports - Fairlead Guide Type Installation - ABS0678 with ABS0679 and NSA935512
Figure 023.1 / Graphic SH 023.1 Cable Supports - Fairlead Guide Type Installation - ABS1088 with ABS1089 and NSA5516
Figure 024.1 / Graphic SH 024.1 Cable Supports - Fairlead Guide Type - Clamp ASNA0033 Installation - ABS1088 with ABS1089
Figure 025.1 / Graphic SH 025.1 Cable Supports - Fairlead Guide Type - Clamp ASNA0033 Installation - ABS1088 with ABS1089
Figure 026.1 / Graphic SH 026.1 Cable Supports - Through-Structure Type - Description - ABS1020
Figure 027.1 / Graphic SH 027.1 Cable Supports - Separator and Spacer Type Description - ABS0731, ABS1144, E0688 and NSA5527
Figure 028.1 / Graphic SH 028.1 Cable Supports - Separator and Spacer Type Description - ABS0054 and ABS1526
Figure 029.1 / Graphic SH 029.1 Cable Supports - Separator and Spacer Type Characteristics - ABS0054, ABS0731, ABS1144, ABS1526 and E0688
Figure 030.1 / Graphic SH 030.1 Cable Supports - Separator and Spacer Type Characteristics - NSA5527 and NSA935510
Figure 031.1 / Graphic SH 031.1 Cable Supports - Separator and Spacer Type Installation - ABS0731, ABS1144 and NSA5527
Figure 032.1 / Graphic SH 032.1 Cable Supports - Separator and Spacer Type Installation - ABS0054, ABS0731, ABS1144 and NSA5527
Figure 033.1 / Graphic SH 033.1 Cable Supports - Separator and Spacer Type Installation - ABS1526 and ABS1339
Figure 034.1 / Graphic SH 034.1 Cable Supports - Specific cases - Cross-beam Support Type Installation - ABS1049-03, ABS1049-04 and ABS1049-05
Figure 035.1 / Graphic SH 035.1 Cable Supports - Specific cases - Straps Connecting Parts - ABS1576
Figure 036.1 / Graphic SH 036.1 Cable Supports - Specific Cases - Spacer Rod, Tubular Support Type Installation
Figure 037.1 / Graphic SH 037.1 Cable Supports - Specific Cases - Tying on Tubular Support

20-33-42 - CLAMPS (Airbus)
Figure 038.1 / Graphic SH 038.1 Cable Supports - Specific Cases - Tying on Tubular Support
Figure 039.1 / Graphic SH 039.1 Cable Supports - Related Items - Installation Procedure - ABS1095
Figure 040.1 / Graphic SH 040.1 Cable Supports - Related Items - Clamp ASNA0033 Installation - ABS1095
Figure 041.1 / Graphic SH 041.1 Cable Supports - Related Items - Description ABS1545, ABS1546 and ABS1717
Figure 042.1 / Graphic SH 042.1 Cable Supports - Related Items - Bonding Procedure ABS1545, ABS1546 and ABS1717
Figure 043.1 / Graphic SH 043.1 Cable Supports - Related Items - Bonding Procedure ABS1545, ABS1546 and ABS1717
Figure 044.1 / Graphic SH 044.1 Cable Supports - Related Items - Control Test of Bonding ABS1545, ABS1546 and ABS1717
Figure 045.1 / Graphic SH 045.1 Cable Supports - Related Items - Removal Procedure ABS1545, ABS1546 and ABS1717
Figure 046.1 / Graphic SH 046.1 Cable Supports - Related Items - Adhesive Removal - Milling Tools ABS1545, ABS1546 and ABS1717
Figure 047.1 / Graphic SH 047.1 Cable Supports - Related Items - Adhesive Removal - Milling Tools ABS1545, ABS1546 and ABS1717
CLAMPS (Airbus)
CLAMPS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and operation of clamps. Clamps are items used to attach the wiring.
A very wide range of clamps and mounts are used.
The main clamps installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- ABS0396 cushion clamp with protection
- ABS0645 cushion clamp with protection
- ABS0805 bonding clamp
- ABS1339 nylon clamp with protection
- AS62200 to AS62234 cushion clamps with protection
- NSA5515 nylon clamp without protection
- NSA5516 or MS21919 or AS21919 clamps with protection
- NSA5575 bonding clamp
- NSA935807 "P" clamp for convoluted conduit.
NOTE: In pressurized areas and for A380 program only, you can modify the clamp oritentation given by the drawings to observe the harness routing
requirements. Yon can modify the orientation to plus or minus 90 deg. from the drawing values.
This is not applicable if there is a risk of contact with sharp edges.
2. Description
A. ABS0396 Cushion Clamp With Protection
(Ref. Fig. 001)
ABS0396 C 32 F A
| | | | |
| | | | ---- Type code
| | | |
| | | ------- Material code with cushion
| | | or - without cushion (only for type A and K)
| | |
| | ---------- Size code
| |
| -------------- Material code for band
|
------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature, application and color table

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CUSHION | TEMPERATURE | | |
|-------------------| deg.C | APPLICATION | COLOR |
| CODE | MATERIAL | (deg.F) | | |
|--------|----------|-------------|----------------------------------|--------|
| | | |- In high temperature in dry areas| |
| | |-54 deg.C to |- In medium temperature in areas | |
| | | 204 deg.C | with phosphate ester fluid con- | |
| | |(-65 deg.F to| -tamination (e.g. SKYDROL 5008) | White |
| | | 400 deg.F) |- Not resistant to fuels and syn- | |
| F or S | Silicone | | thetic oils. | |
| | |-------------|----------------------------------|--------|
| | |-54 deg.C to | | |
| | | 316 deg.C |- In high temperature areas | Brown |
| | |(-65 deg.F to| | |
| | | 600 deg.F) | | |
|--------|----------|-------------|----------------------------------|--------|
| | |-54 deg.C to |- In areas with phosphate ester | |
| J | Ethylene | 135 deg.C | hydraulic fluid contamination | Purple |
| |Propylene |(-65 deg.F to|- Not resistant to fuels and oils | |
| | | 275 deg.F) | | |
|--------|----------|-------------|----------------------------------|--------|
| | |-54 deg.C to | | |
| CR | Polychlo-| 100 deg.C |- In fuel or oil areas | Black |
| | roprene |(-65 deg.F to|- In ozone areas | |
| | | 212 deg.F) | | |
|--------|----------|-------------|----------------------------------|--------|
| | |-30 deg.C to | | |
| N or K | Polyamide| 100 deg.C |- In SKYDROL 50084 hydraulic | Light |
| | |(-22 deg.F to| fluid, fuel and oil areas | cream |
| | | 212 deg.F) | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) Material code and finish
For band:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
| MATERIAL | TYPE CODE | MATERIAL | FINISH |
| CODE | | | |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|------------|
| C | A, B, C, F and K | Corrosion resistant steel | |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------| Passivated |
| H | D and H | Corrosion resistant steel | |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|------------|
| D | E and G | Aluminum alloy | Anodized |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|------------|
| P | E | Corrosion resistant steel | Passivated |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
For cushion:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
| MATERIAL | TYPE CODE | MATERIAL | FINISH |
| CODE | | | |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|------------|
| F | A, B and C | Silicone | - |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|------------|
| J | A, B, C and F | Ethylene propylene | - |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|------------|
| CR | A | Polychloroprene | - |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|------------|
| S | A and H | Silicone | - |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|------------|
| N | D, E and G | Polyamide | - |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|------------|
| K | E | Polyamide | - |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Size code
------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | | |
|---------------------------| SIZE | INTERNAL DIA. D |
| A | B | C | D | F | H | K | CODE | mm (in) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | | | X | | | | 04 | 0.250 (6.35) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | | | X | | | | 05 | 0.313 (7.95) |

|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | | | X | | X | | 06 | 0.375 (9.53) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | X | | X | | 08 | 0.500 (12.70) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| | | | | X | | |09, 09M | 0.563 (14.29) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | X | | X | | 10 | 0.625 (15.88) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | X | | X | | 12 | 0.750 (19.05) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | X | | X | | 16 | 1.000 (25.40) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | X | | | | 20 | 1.250 (31.75) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | X | | | | 24 | 1.500 (38.10) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | | | | | | | 26 | 1.625 (41.28) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | X | | | | 28 | 1.750 (44.45) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| | | | | | | X | 29 | 1.811 (46.00) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | X | X | | | | 32 | 2.000 (50.80) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | | | | | 36 | 2.250 (57.15) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | | | | | 40 | 2.500 (63.50) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | | | | | | | 48 | 3.000 (76.20) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | | | | | | | 56 | 3.500 (88.90) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|--------|---------------------|
| X | X | | | | | | 58 | 3.625 (92.08) |
------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | SIZE | INTERNAL DIA. D |
|-----------| CODE | mm (in) |
| E | G | | |
|-----|-----|-------|---------------------|
| X | | 04 | 0.260 (6.60) |
|-----|-----|-------|---------------------|
| X | | 05 | 0.323 (8.19) |
|-----|-----|-------|---------------------|
| X | | 06 | 0.322 (8.19 |
|-----|-----|-------|---------------------|
| X | | 08 | 0.510 (12.95) |
|-----|-----|-------|---------------------|
| X | | 12 | 0.754 (19.15) |
|-----|-----|-------|---------------------|
| X | X | 16 | 1.010 (25.65) |
|-----|-----|-------|---------------------|
| X | | 24 | 1.510 (38.35) |
-------------------------------------------
B. ABS0645 Cushion Clamp With Protection
(Ref. Fig. 002)
ABS0645 A 18 E
| | | |
| | | ------- Material code with cushion
| | |
| | ---------- Size code
| |
| -------------- Material code for band
|
------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature

(b) Material code and finish

For band:
--------------------------------------------------------------------
| MATERIAL | MATERIAL | FINISH | COLOR |
| CODE | | | |
|----------|-------------------|---------------------------|-------|
| A | Aluminum alloy | Heat treated or anodized | Grey |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
For cushion:
----------------------------------------------------------------------
| MATERIAL | MATERIAL | FINISH | COLOR |
| CODE | | | |
|----------|--------------------|---------------------------|--------|
| E | Ethylene propylene | - | Purple |
------------------------------- --------------------------------------
(c) Size code
---------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | INTERNAL DIA. D mm (in) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 02 | 3.18 (0.125) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 03 | 4.78 (0.188) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 04 | 6.35 (0.250) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 05 | 7.92 (0.312) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 06 | 9.53 (0.375) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 07 | 11.13 (0.438) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 08 | 12.70 (0.500) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 09 | 14.27 (0.562) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 10 | 15.88 (0.625) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 11 | 17.48 (0.688) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 12 | 19.05 (0.750) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 13 | 20.62 (0.812) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 14 | 22.23 (0.875) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 15 | 23.80 (0.937) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 16 | 25.40 (1.000) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 17 | 26.97 (1.062) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 18 | 28.58 (1.125) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 19 | 30.18 (1.188) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 20 | 31.75 (1.250) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 21 | 33.32 (1.312) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 22 | 34.93 (1.375) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 23 | 36.50 (1.437) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 24 | 38.10 (1.500) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 25 | 39.67 (1.562) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 26 | 41.28 (1.625) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 27 | 42.88 (1.688) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 28 | 44.45 (1.750) |

|-----------|-------------------------|
| 29 | 46.02 (1.812) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 30 | 47.63 (1.875) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 31 | 49.23 (1.938) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 32 | 50.80 (2.000) |
---------------------------------------
C. ABS0805 Bonding Clamp
(Ref. Fig. 003)
ABS0805 - 02
| |
| ------------- Size code
|
------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Size code
---------------------------------------
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 02 | 3.17 (0.125) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 03 | 4.76 (0.187) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 04 | 6.35 (0.250) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 05 | 7.94 (0.312) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 06 | 9.52 (0.375) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 06M | 10.26 (0.404) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 07 | 11.11 (0.437) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 08 | 12.70 (0.500) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 09 | 14.29 (0.562) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 10 | 15.88 (0.625) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 11 | 17.46 (0.687) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 12 | 19.05 (0.750) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 13 | 20.64 (0.812) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 13M | 21.91 (0.863) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 14 | 22.22 (0.875) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 15 | 23.81 (0.937) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 16 | 25.40 (1.000) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 16M | 25.88 (1.019) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 17 | 27.00 (1.062) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 18 | 28.57 (1.125) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 19 | 30.16 (1.187) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 20 | 31.75 (1.250) |
---------------------------------------
(b) Material

Description
Stainless steel
D. ABS1339 Nylon Clamp Type With Protection
(Ref. Fig. 004)
NOTE: Two ABS1339 clamps can be used as separator (butterfly configuration, see 20-33-41).

ABS1339 D 01
| | |
| | ----------- Size code
| |
| ---------------- Variant code | D = brown (general use)
| | F = blue (fuel immersion)
|
---------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Attachment
Tightening torque = 0.42 m.daN
(c) Size code
---------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | PERMITTED HARNESS DIA. |
| CODE | mm (in.) |
|--------|----------------------------------------|
| 01 | 5 (0.197) to 8 (0.315) |
|--------|----------------------------------------|
| 02 | 8 (0.315) to 11 (0.433) |
|--------|----------------------------------------|
| 03 | 10.5 (0.413) to 14 (0.551) |
|--------|----------------------------------------|
| 04 | 13.5 (0.531) to 19.5 (0.768) |
|--------|----------------------------------------|
| 05 | 19 (0.748) to 26 (1.024) |
|--------|----------------------------------------|

Description
| 06 | 25.5 (1.004) to 33 (1.299) |

|--------|----------------------------------------|
| 07 | 32.5 (1.280) to 40 (1.575) |
|--------|----------------------------------------|
| 08 | 39.5 (1.555) to 48 (1.890) |
---------------------------------------------------
(3) Size selection in relation to the coaxial cable to be attached
----------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | RELATED | HARNESS | NUMBER | WIRE TYPE |
| CODE | ITEM | NUMBER |OF CABLES| CODE |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 01 | - | - | 1 | XF |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 02 | NSA5539S * | - | 1 | XM24 |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 02 | - | - | 1 | WD |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 02 | NSA5539S * | - | 1 | WZ |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 02 | NSA5539SV * | - | 1 | WL |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 02 | - | - | 1 | WN |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 02 | - | - | 1 | KW |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 01 | - | - | 1 | KX |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 05 | ASNA5107-B **| 1 | 4 | WD |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 05 | ASNA5107-B **| 1 | 4 | WN |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 04 | ASNA5107-B **| 1 | 4 | KX |
----------------------------------------------------------
* Sleeve
** Tape
For a coaxial harness, you must install 2 layers of tape ASNA5107-B to adapt the harness to the clamp diameter.
For a coaxial cable, no protection is necessary.
If a coaxial cable is given protection with a conduit (e.g. EN6049), no more protection is necessary.
To close clamp ABS1339 you must tighten cable tie NSA935401-05 with the tool set to the minimum tension.
E. Cushion Clamps AS62200 to AS62234 With Protection

Description
(Ref. Fig. 005)

This type of clamp is used:
- Usually on G routes in pylons without bobbin
- Locally on G routes in all areas without bobbin
- Locally on large-gauge P routes with high mechanical/temperature stresses
- Exceptionally on other routes.
NOTE: The rules of installation are the same as those given for the clamp NSA5516.

(Ref. Fig. 005)
(a) Temperature
(2) Dimensions table
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| P/N | LENGTH D | LENGTH E | LENGTH T | LENGTH R | LENGTH C |
| | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | mm (in.) |
|---------|-------------|------------|------------|-----------|------------|
| AS62200 | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------- |-------------|------------|------------|-----------|------------|
| AS62201 |1.57 (0.062) |14.9 (0.587)| | | 7.9 (0.311)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62202 |3.18 (0.125) |15.7 (0.618)| | | 8.7 (0.343)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62203 |4.78 (0.188) |16.5 (0.650)| | | 9.5 (0.374)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62204 |6.35 (0.250) |17.3 (0.681)| | |10.3 (0.406)|
|---------|-------------|------------|0.51 (0.020)|2.3 (0.091)|------------|
| AS62205 |7.92 (0.312) |18.1 (0.713)|+ or - 0.08 | |11.1 (0.437)|
|---------|-------------|------------| (0.003) | |------------|
| AS62206 |9.53 (0.375) |18.9 (0.744)| | |11.9 (0.469)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62207 |11.13 (0.438)|19.7 (0.776)| | |12.7 (0.500)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62208 |12.70 (0.500)|20.5 (0.807)| | |13.5 (0.531)|
|---------|-------------|------------|------------|-----------|------------|
| AS62209 |14.27 (0.562)|22.6 (0.890)| | |14.5 (0.571)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62210 |15.88 (0.625)|23.4 (0.921)| | |15.3 (0.602)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|

Description
| AS62211 |17.48 (0.688)|24.2 (0.953)| | |16.1 (0.634)|

|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62212 |19.05 (0.750)|25.0 (0.984)|0.76 (0.030)| |16.9 (0.665)|
|---------|-------------|------------|+ or - 0.10 | |------------|
| AS62213 |20.62 (0.812)|25.8 (1.016)| (0.004) | |17.7 (0.697)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62214 |22.23 (0.875)|26.6 (1.047)| | |18.5 (0.728)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62215 |23.83 (0.938)|27.4 (1.079)| | |19.3 (0.760)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62216 |25.40 (1.000)|28.2 (1.110)| | |20.1 (0.791)|
|---------|-------------|------------|------------| |------------|
| AS62217 |26.97 (1.062)|29.2 (1.150)| | |21.1 (0.831)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62218 |28.58 (1.125)|30.0 (1.181)| | |21.9 (0.862)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62219 |30.18 (1.188)|30.8 (1.213)| | |22.7 (0.894)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62220 |31.75 (1.250)|31.6 (1.244)| | |23.5 (0.925)|
|---------|-------------|------------| |3.0 (0.118)|------------|
| AS62221 |33.32 (1.312)|32.4 (1.276)| | |24.3 (0.957)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62222 |34.93 (1.375)|33.2 (1.307)| | |25.1 (0.988)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62223 |36.53 (1.438)|34.0 (1.339)| | |26.9 (1.020)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62224 |38.10 (1.500)|34.8 (1.370)| | |26.7 (1.051)|
|---------|-------------|------------|1.02 (0.040)| |------------|
| AS62225 |39.67 (1.562)|35.6 (1.402)|+ or - 0.13 | |27.5 (1.083)|
|---------|-------------|------------| (0.005) | |------------|
| AS62226 |41.28 (1.625)|36.4 (1.433)| | |28.3 (1.114)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62227 |42.88 (1.688)|37.2 (1.465)| | |29.1 (1.146)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62228 |44.45 (1.750)|38.0 (1.496)| | |29.8 (1.173)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62229 |46.02 (1.812)|38.8 (1.528)| | |30.6 (1.205)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62230 |47.63 (1.875)|39.6 (1.559)| | |31.4 (1.236)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|
| AS62231 |49.23 (1.938)|40.4 (1.591)| | |32.2 (1.268)|
|---------|-------------|------------| | |------------|

Description
| AS62232 |50.80 (2.000)|41.2 (1.622)| | |33.0 (1.299)|

|---------|-------------|------------|------------|-----------|------------|
| AS62233 | - | - | - | - | - |
|---------|-------------|------------|------------|-----------|------------|
| AS62234 | - | - | - | - | - |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
F. NSA5515 Nylon Clamp Type Without Protection
(Ref. Fig. 004)
This type of clamp made with nylon (6.6) is heat and skydrol (500b4) resistant.
NSA5515 - 10 P
| | |
| | ----------- Without code = without elastomer nail
| | P code = with elastomer nail
| |
| ------------------ Size code
|
---------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Continuous operating temperature is 100 deg.C (212.00 deg.F) .
Peak operating temperature is 120 deg.C (248.00 deg.F) .
(b) Size code and color
---------------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | COLOR | INTERNAL DIA. D |
| | | mm (in.) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 2 | brown | 3.2 (0.126) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 3 | orange | 4.8 (0.189) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 4 | pink | 6.4 (0.252) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 5 | natural | 7.9 (0.311) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 6 | grey | 9.5 (0.374) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 7 | blue | 11.1 (0.437) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|

Description
| 8 | yellow | 12.7 (0.5) |

|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 9 | brown | 14.3 (0.563) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 10 | orange | 15.9 (0.626) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 11 | pink | 17.4 (0.685) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 12 | natural | 19 (0.748) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 13 | grey | 20.6 (0.811) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 14 | blue | 22.2 (0.874) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 15 | yellow | 23.8 (0.937) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 16 | brown | 25.4 (1) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 17 | orange | 27 (1.063) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 18 | pink | 28.6 (1.126) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 19 | natural | 30.2 (1.189) |
|---------------|-----------|---------------------|
| 20 | grey | 31.8 (1.252) |
---------------------------------------------------
G. NSA5516, MS21919 or AS21919 Clamps Type With Protection
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(1) NSA5516
NSA5516 C A 10 N D
| | | | | |
| | | | | ------- Coating material code (ref. para characteristics)
| | | | |
| | | | ---------- Thickness code | B code = box cushion
| | | | | N code = normal thickness
| | | | | Without code = light thickness
| | | |
| | | ------------- Size code
| | |

Description
| | ----------------- Tab code | A code = clamp without tab

| | | Without code = clamp with tab
| |
| -------------------- Clamp material code (ref. para characteristics)
|
-------------------------- Standard P/N
In pressurized areas, with clamps without tabs, the harness must be given protection by self-adhesive silicone tape ASNA5107.
In non-pressurized areas, with clamps without tabs, the harness must be given protection by silicone tape NSA935403 or equivalent.
When clamp NSA5516 is used on a structural circular metallic or carbon rod, you must install 2 layers of tape ASNA5107-B on the rod.
(b) P/N Characteristics
1 Coating material code
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|COATING | MATERIAL | COLOR | OPERATING TEMP | INSTALLATION AREA |
|MATERIAL| | | deg.C (deg.F) | |
| CODE | | | | |
|--------|-------------|----------|------------------|------------------------|
| D | Silicone | White | -55 (-67) | Dielectric application |
| | | | to | Oil and phosphor-based |
| | | | 260 (500) | ester fluid spray |
|--------|-------------|----------|------------------|------------------------|
| F | Fluorosili- | Blue | -55 (-67) | Oil fluids or fuel |
| | cone | | to | |
| | | | 200 (392) | |
|--------|-------------|----------|------------------|------------------------|
| J | Ethylene | Plain | -55 (-67) | Skydrol |
| | Propylene | purple | to | |
| | | | 140 (284) | |
|--------|-------------|----------|------------------|------------------------|
| S | Silicone | White | -55 (-67) | Dielectric oil and pho-|
| | | | to | -phor ester fluid spray|
|--------|-------------|----------| 260 (500) |------------------------|
| V | Viton | Black | | General |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NOTE: Code S is no longer used and replaced by code D.

Code V is no longer used and replaced by code F in oil fluid or fuel areas and by code D in other areas.
2 Clamp material code

Without code = Material AG5 or 5086, operating temperature is -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) to 80 deg.C (176.00 deg.F) .
C code = CRES or AISI, operating temperature is -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) to 260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F) .

Description
3 Size code
------------------| |-----------------| |-----------------| |-----------------
|SIZE| INTERNAL | |SIZE| INTERNAL | |SIZE| INTERNAL | |SIZE| INTERNAL |
|CODE| DIA. D | |CODE| DIA. D | |CODE| DIA. D | |CODE| DIA. D |
| | mm.(in.) | | | mm.(in.) | | | mm.(in.) | | | mm.(in.) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 02 | 3(0.1181) | | 21 | 18(0.7086) | | 40 | 37(1.4566) | | 59 | 58(2.2834) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 03 | 4(0.1574) | | 22 | 19(0.7480) | | 41 | 38(1.4960) | | 60 | 59(2.3228) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 04 | 5(0.1968) | | 23 | 20(0.7874) | | 42 | 40(1.5748) | | 61 | 60(2.3622) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 05 | 6(0.2362) | | 24 | 21(0.8267) | | 43 | 41(1.6141) | | 62 | 61(2.4015) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 06 | 6.5(0.2559)| | 25 | 22(0.8661) | | 44 | 42(1.6535) | | 63 | 62(2.4409) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 07 | 7(0.2755) | | 26 | 23(0.9055) | | 45 | 43(1.6929) | | 64 | 63(2.4803) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 08 | 8(0.3149) | | 27 | 24(0.9448) | | 46 | 44(1.7322) | | 65 | 64(2.5196) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 09 | 9(0.3543) | | 28 | 25(0.9842) | | 47 | 45(1.7716) | | 66 | 65(2.5590) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 10 | 9.5(0.3740)| | 29 | 26(1.0236) | | 48 | 46(1.8110) | | 67 | 66(2.5984) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 11 | 10(0.3937) | | 30 | 27(1.0629) | | 49 | 48(1.8897) | | 68 | 67(2.6377) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 12 | 11(0.4330) | | 31 | 28(1.1023) | | 50 | 49(1.9291) | | 69 | 68(2.6771) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 13 | 12(0.4724) | | 32 | 29(1.1417) | | 51 | 50(1.9685) | | 70 | 69(2.7165) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 14 | 13(0.5118) | | 33 | 30(1.1811) | | 52 | 51(2.0078) | | 71 | 70(2.7559) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 15 | 14(0.5511) | | 34 | 31(1.2204) | | 53 | 52(2.0472) | | 72 | 71(2.7952) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 16 |14.4(0.5669)| | 35 | 32(1.2598) | | 54 | 53(2.0866) | | 77 | 76(2.9921) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 17 | 15(0.5905) | | 36 | 33(1.2992) | | 55 | 54(2.1259) | | 80 | 79(3.1102) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 18 | 16(0.6299) | | 37 | 34(1.3385) | | 56 | 55(2.1653) | | 81 | 86(3.3858) |
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------|
| 19 | 17(0.6692) | | 38 | 35(1.3779) | | 57 | 56(2.2047) | | 82 | 84(3.3070) |

Description
|----|------------| |----|------------| |----|------------| -------------------

| 20 |17.5(0.6889)| | 39 | 36(1.4173) | | 58 | 57(2.2440) |
-----------------------------------------------------------
(2) Size selection in relation to the coaxial cable to be attached

Description
----------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | RELATED | HARNESS | NUMBER | WIRE TYPE |
| CODE | ITEM | NUMBER |OF CABLES| CODE |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 04 | - | - | 1 | XF |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 07 | NSA5539S * | - | 1 | XM24 |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 07 | - | - | 1 | WD |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 08 | NSA5539S * | - | 1 | WZ |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 06 | NSA5539S * | - | 1 | WL |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 08 | - | - | 1 | WN |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 22 | ASNA5107-B **| 1 | 4 | WD |
|--------|--------------|---------|---------|------------|
| 23 | ASNA5107-B **| 1 | 4 | WN |
----------------------------------------------------------
* Sleeve
** Tape
For a coaxial harness, you must install 2 layers of tape ASNA5107-B to adapt the harness to the clamp diameter.
For a coaxial cable, no protection is necessary.
If a coaxial cable is given protection with a conduit (e.g. EN6049), no more protection is necessary.
(3) MS21919
MS21919 - W D G 8
| | | | |
| | | | ----- Size code
| | | |
| | | --------- Coating material code (ref. para characteristics)
| | |
| | ------------- Clamp material code (ref. para characteristics)
| |
| ----------------- Tab code | W code = with mandatory tab for
| | clamp sizes -2 to -48
| | No code = no tab (prohibited) for
| clamp sizes -1 and -50 to -66
|
----------------------- Standard P/N
1 Material code
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|MATERIAL CODE| | MATERIAL | MAX OPERATING | |
|-------------| COLOR |---------------------| TEMP |INSTALLATION AREA|
|CLAMP|COATING| | CLAMP | COATING | deg.C (deg.F) | |
|-----|-------|-------|---------|-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | E |Purple | | Ethylene | | Phosphate ester |
| | | | | propylene | | hydraulic fluid |
| |-------|-------| |-----------| |-----------------|
| D | F |Yellow |Aluminum | Nitrile | 100(212) |Fuel + fuel vapor|
| |-------|-------| |-----------| |-----------------|
| | G | Black | |Chloroprene| | Petroleum based |
| | | | | | | hydraulic fluids|
|-----|-------|-------|---------|-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | E |Purple | | Ethylene | 136(275) | Phosphate ester |
| |-------|-------| |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | F |Yellow | | Nitrile | |Fuel + fuel vapor|
| |-------|-------| |-----------| 100(212) |-----------------|
| | G | Black | |Chloroprene| | Petroleum based |
| C | | | Cres | | | hydraulic fluids|
| |-------|-------| |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | H |Natural| | Silicone | 204.44(400) | High temp and |
| | | | | | | phosphate ester |
| | | | | | | based fluid |
| |-------|-------| |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | | | |Fluorosili-| | High temp and |
| | J | Blue | | cone | 232.22(450) | petroleum |
| | | | | | | based fluids |

Description
|-----|-------|-------|---------|-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | F |Yellow | | Nitrile | |Fuel + fuel vapor|
| |-------|-------| |-----------| 100(212) |-----------------|
| | G | Black | Low |Chloroprene| | Petroleum based |
| - | | | carbon | | | hydraulic fluids|
| |-------|-------| steel |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | | | | | | phosphate ester |
| | | | | | | based fluid |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Size code
-------------------------| |-----------------------| |------------------------
|SIZE| INTERNAL DIA. D | |SIZE| INTERNAL DIA. D | |SIZE| INTERNAL DIA. D |
|CODE| mm (in.) | |CODE| mm (in.) | |CODE| mm (in.) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| -1 | 1.574 (0.062) | |-19 | 30.175 (1.188) | |-37 | 58.724 (2.312) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| -2 | 3.174 (0.125) | |-20 | 31.749 (1.250) | |-38 | 60.324 (2.375) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| -3 | 4.775 (0.188) | |-21 | 33.550 (1.313) | |-40 | 63.499 (2.500) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| -4 | 6.349 (0.250) | |-22 | 34.924 (1.375) | |-42 | 66.674 (2.625) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| -5 | 7.950 (0.313) | |-23 | 36.525 (1.438) | |-43 | 68.275 (2.688) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| -6 | 9.524 (0.375) | |-24 | 38.099 (1.500) | |-44 | 69.849 (2.750) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| -7 | 11.125 (0.438) | |-25 | 39.700 (1.563) | |-45 | 71.424 (2.812) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| -8 | 12.699 (0.500) | |-26 | 41.274 (1.625) | |-46 | 73.024 (2.875) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| -9 | 14.300 (0.563) | |-27 | 42.875 (1.688) | |-48 | 76.199 (3.000) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
|-10 | 15.874 (0.625) | |-28 | 44.449 (1.750) | |-50 | 79.374 (3.125) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
|-11 | 17.475 (0.688) | |-29 | 46.050 (1.813) | |-52 | 82.549 (3.250) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
|-12 | 19.049 (0.750) | |-30 | 47.624 (1.875) | |-54 | 85.724 (3.375) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
|-13 | 20.650 (0.813) | |-31 | 49.225 (1.938) | |-56 | 88.899 (3.500) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
|-14 | 22.224 (0.875) | |-32 | 50.799 (2.000) | |-57 | 92.074 (3.625) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
|-15 | 23.825 (0.938) | |-33 | 52.374 (2.062) | |-64 | 101.599 (4.000) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
|-16 | 23.399 (1.000) | |-34 | 53.974 (2.125) | |-66 | 104.774 (4.125) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| -------------------------
|-17 | 27.000 (1.063) | |-35 | 55.575 (2.188) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------|
|-18 | 28.574 (1.125) | |-36 | 57.149 (2.250) |
-------------------------| |------------------------
(c) Equivalence table
MS clamps are superseded by AS clamps. MS clamps must be used until existing stocks are depleted.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CANCELLED CLAMP | REPLACEMENT CLAMP | CANCELLED CLAMP | REPLACEMENT CLAMP |
| MS21919- | AS21919- | MS21919- | AS21919- |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| W( )2 | W( )02 | W( )24 | W( )24 |
| W( )3 | W( )03 | W( )25 | W( )25 |
| W( )4 | W( )04 | W( )26 | W( )26 |
| W( )5 | W( )05 | W( )27 | W( )27 |
| W( )6 | W( )06 | W( )28 | W( )28 |
| W( )7 | W( )07 | W( )29 | W( )29 |
| W( )8 | W( )08 | W( )30 | W( )30 |
| W( )9 | W( )09 | W( )31 | W( )31 |
| W( )10 | W( )10 | W( )32 | W( )32 |
| W( )11 | W( )11 | W( )33 | W( )33 |
| W( )12 | W( )12 | W( )34 | W( )34 |
| W( )13 | W( )13 | W( )35 | W( )35 |
| W( )14 | W( )14 | W( )36 | W( )36 |
| W( )15 | W( )15 | W( )37 | W( )37 |
| W( )16 | W( )16 | W( )38 | W( )38 |
| W( )17 | W( )17 | W( )40 | W( )40 |
| W( )18 | W( )18 | W( )42 | W( )42 |
| W( )19 | W( )19 | W( )43 | W( )43 |

Description
| W( )20 | W( )20 | W( )44 | W( )44 |

| W( )21 | W( )21 | W( )45 | W( )45 |
| W( )22 | W( )22 | W( )46 | W( )46 |
| W( )23 | W( )23 | W( )48 | W( )48 |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
( ) represents the same dash No. for MS and AS numbers.
(4) AS21919
AS21919 - W D G 08
| | | | |
| | | | ----- Size code
| | | |
| | | --------- Coating material code (ref. para characteristics)
| | |
| | ------------- Clamp material code (ref. para characteristics)
| |
| ----------------- Tab code | W code = with mandatory tab for
| | clamp sizes 02 to 48
| | No code = no tab
|
----------------------- Standard P/N
1 Material code
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|MATERIAL CODE| | MATERIAL | MAX OPERATING | |
|-------------| COLOR |---------------------| TEMP |INSTALLATION AREA|
|CLAMP|COATING| | CLAMP | COATING | deg.C (deg.F) | |
|-----|-------|-------|---------|-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | E |Purple | | Ethylene | 100 (212) | Phosphate ester |
| |-------|-------| |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| D | F |Yellow |Aluminum | Nitrile | 136 (275) |Fuel + fuel vapor|
| |-------|-------| |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | G |Black | |Chloroprene| 100 (212) | Petroleum based |
| | | | | | | hydraulic fluids|
|-----|-------|-------|---------|-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | E |Purple | | Ethylene | 136 (275) | Phosphate ester |
| |-------|-------| |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | F |Yellow | | Nitrile | 136 (275) |Fuel + fuel vapor|
| |-------|-------| |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | G |Black | |Chloroprene| 100 (212) | Petroleum based |
| C | | | Cres | | | hydraulic fluids|
| |-------|-------| |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | |white | | | | phosphate ester |
| | | | | | | based fluid |
| |-------|-------| |-----------|---------------|-----------------|
| | | | |Fluorosili-| | High temp and |
| | J | Blue | | cone | 200 (392) | petroleum |
| | | | | | | based fluids |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 Size code
-------------------------- ------------------------- -------------------------
|SIZE| INTERNAL DIA. D | |SIZE| INTERNAL DIA. D | |SIZE| INTERNAL DIA. D |
|CODE| mm (in.) | |CODE| mm (in.) | |CODE| mm (in.) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 02 | 3.174 (0.125) | | 17 | 27.000 (1.063) | | 32 | 50.799 (2.000) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 03 | 4.775 (0.188) | | 18 | 28.574 (1.125) | | 33 | 52.374 (2.062) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 04 | 6.349 (0.250) | | 19 | 30.175 (1.188) | | 34 | 53.974 (2.125) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 05 | 7.950 (0.313) | | 20 | 31.749 (1.250) | | 35 | 55.575 (2.188) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 06 | 9.524 (0.375) | | 21 | 33.550 (1.313) | | 36 | 57.149 (2.250) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 07 | 11.125 (0.438) | | 22 | 34.924 (1.375) | | 37 | 58.724 (2.312) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 08 | 12.699 (0.500) | | 23 | 36.525 (1.438) | | 38 | 60.324 (2.375) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 09 | 14.300 (0.563) | | 24 | 38.099 (1.500) | | 40 | 63.499 (2.500) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|

Description
| 10 | 15.874 (0.625) | | 25 | 39.700 (1.563) | | 42 | 66.674 (2.625) |

|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 11 | 17.475 (0.688) | | 26 | 41.274 (1.625) | | 43 | 68.275 (2.688) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 12 | 19.049 (0.750) | | 27 | 42.875 (1.688) | | 44 | 69.849 (2.750) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 13 | 20.650 (0.813) | | 28 | 44.449 (1.750) | | 45 | 71.424 (2.812) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 14 | 22.224 (0.875) | | 29 | 46.050 (1.813) | | 46 | 73.024 (2.875) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 15 | 23.825 (0.938) | | 30 | 47.624 (1.875) | | 48 | 76.199 (3.000) |
|----|-------------------| |----|------------------| |----|------------------|
| 16 | 23.399 (1.000) | | 31 | 49.225 (1.938) | | | |
-------------------------- ------------------------- -------------------------
H. NSA5575 Bonding Clamp
(Ref. Fig. 003)
NSA5575 - 1
| |
| ------------- Size code
|
------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Size code
---------------------------------------
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 1, 1A | 4.80 (0.189) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 2, 2A | 6.40 (0.252) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 3, 3A | 7.90 (0.311) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 4, 4A | 9.50 (0.374) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 5, 5A | 11.10 (0.437) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 6, 7 | 12.70 (0.500) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 8, 8A | 15.90 (0.626) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 10, 11 | 19.10 (0.752) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 12 | 22.20 (0.874) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 14 | 25.40 (1.000) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 15 | 28.60 (1.126) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 16 | 36.50 (1.437) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 17 | 31.80 (1.252) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 18 | 38.10 (1.500) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 19 | 44.50 (1.752) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 20 | 50.80 (2.000) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 22 | 63.50 (2.500) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 24 | 76.20 (3.000) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 26 | 101.6 (4.000) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 27 | 114.3 (4.500) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 28 | 127.0 (5.000) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 29 | 139.7 (5.500) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 30 | 55.00 (2.165) |
|-----------|-------------------------|

Description
| 31 | 63.00 (2.480) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 32 | 66.00 (2.598) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 33 | 70.00 (2.756) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 34 | 75.00 (2.953) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 35 | 71.00 (2.795) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 36 | 82.00 (3.228) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 37 | 86.00 (3.386) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 38 | 80.00 (3.150 |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 39 | 73.00 (2.874) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 40 | 85.00 (3.346) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 41 | 54.50 (2.146) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 42 | 69.50 (2.736) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 43 | 79.50 (3.130) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 44 | 78.50 (3.090) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 45 | 87.40 (3.441) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 46 | 89.40 (3.519) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 47 | 91.00 (3.583) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 48 | 54.00 (2.126) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 49 | 84.00 (3.307) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 50 | 92.00 (3.622) |
|-----------|-------------------------|
| 51 | 40.00 (1.575) |
---------------------------------------
J. NSA935807
(Ref. Fig. 004)
NSA935807 C 12
| | |
| | ----- Size code
| |
| ----------- Material code | C = CRES
| | - (dash) = Aluminum
|
-------------------- Standard P/N

Procedure
NOTE: You can install NSA5516 clamp as an alternative to NSA935807 clamp at the end of convoluted conduits. NSA5516 clamp
has a cushion that prevents contact between the wires and the metal part of the clamp if the conduit moves out of the clamp.

(a) Size code
-------------------------------------------------
| | PERMITTED |MAX. DIA. PERMITTED |
| SIZE CODE | CONDUIT CODE | mm (in.) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 02 | 2 | 3.8 (0.149) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 03 | 3 | 4.2 (0.165) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 04 | 4 | 5.2 (0.204) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 06 | 6 | 8 (0.314) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 09 | 9 | 10.5 (0.413) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 10 | 10 | 11 (0.433) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 12 | 12 | 12.7 (0.500) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 14 | 14 | 14.2 (0.559) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 16 | 16 | 16 (0.629) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 20 | 20 | 19 (0.748) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 24 | 24 | 23 (0.905) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 28 | 28 | 27 (1.062) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 32 | 32 | 30 (1.181) |
|-----------|--------------|--------------------|
| 40 | 40 | 38 (1.496) |
-------------------------------------------------
3. Procedure
A. Selection
Clamp P/Ns are usually given in the IPC, but use the instructions that follow to do a check of the dimensions on installation:
(1) Selection of the type of clamp
(a) You must use P-clamp NSA935807:
- For harnesses with protection, with convoluted conduits E0432, NSA935805 or NSA935806.
(b) You must use clamps ABS1339FXX or NSA5515:
- For harnesses with protection, installed in composite fuel compartments.
(c) You must use clamp NSA5515 or NSA5516 (with silicone tape ASNA5107):
- For harnesses without protection installed in small VUs.
(d) You must use clamp ABS1339:
- On harnesses with protection, with textile conduit EN6049-006/007 or with convoluted conduit ABS0887.
(e) You must use clamp NSA5516XXXXNJ:
- In areas where there is hydraulic fluid (type SKYDROL).
(f) You must use clamp ABS5516XXXXNF or ABS1339FXX:
- In the metal fuel compartments.
(g) You must use clamp ABS5516XXXXND or ABS1339DXX:
- In the other areas.
(h) You must use clamp ABS1339 or NSA5516:
- For temperatures of less than
80 deg.C (176.00 deg.F) .

Procedure
(i) You must use clamp NSA5516CXXXXX:

- For temperatures of more than
80 deg.C (176.00 deg.F) .
(j) You must use aluminum clamps NSA5516:
- Only in pressurized areas
- Only on straight part of the harness.
(k) You must use ABS1339:
- For P routes in pressurized areas and all routes in non-pressurized areas but not G routes.
(l) You can use clamp ABS1339DXX:
- In all areas (with hydraulic projection) but not in fuel compartments.
(m) You must use clamp ABS1339FXX:
- In the metal and composite fuel compartments.
(n) You must not use clamp ABS1339 (in these cases, you must use clamp NSA5516BD):
- In high mechanical/temperature stress areas
- When you cannot get access for the cable tie gun
- For harness diameter of more than
48 mm (1.8897 in.) .
(o) You must use aluminum clamp NSA5516BD:
-
In pressurized areas and non-pressurized areas with protection
-
On a straight part of the harness
-
On single harnesses with or without external protection (shielded or not)
- On multiple harnesses (with protection or not) attached with the same clamp (in this case, it is necessary to put more black
tape ASNA5107-B around the harnesses).
(p) You must use stainless steel clamp NSA5516CBD:
-
In high mechanical stress areas (e.g. junction areas, large diameter harnesses, bends, etc.)
- For harnesses installed at hinges:
- When harness diameter is more than 25 mm (0.9842 in.) , you must attach the harness with 2 clamps NSA5516CBD on
each side
- When harness diameter is less than or equal to 25 mm (0.9842 in.) , you must attach the harness with 1 clamp
NSA5516CBD on each side
- For harnesses with a diameter of more than
48 mm (1.8897 in.)
-
When harnesses move
-
On G routes with bobbin ABS1088 (not the recommended solution)
-
In SWAMP areas.
(q) You must use clamp NSA5516CB with cushion material type D, J or F:
- In pressurized and non-pressurized areas where there is a risk of contamination from fluid leaks and/or spray.
(2) Clamp dimensions (e.g. for NSA5516 and AS62200)
The code size of the clamp diameter must be specified in the installation drawing. When the code size -00 is specified in drawing, the
manufacturer must select the clamp size adapted to the harness diameter in accordance with the parameters that follow:
The clamp must be as small as possible for installation on the wire harness.
- Not too large:
When attached, the clamp must correctly hold the harness to prevent fretting of the harness because of friction.
It must not let the harness move through the clamp when a slight axial pull is applied.
- Not too small:
Clamps must be fully closed but they must not crush the harness (no wires must be pinched between the 2 clamp fastener
lugs).
The clamp lugs must not be twisted and must be correctly aligned.
The clamp must be adapted to the harness to avoid sagging.
If the code size given in installation drawing does not fulfill the requirements above, the manufacturer must change the code
size to a minimum of -2 or a maximum of +2 in relation to the specified one.
B. Installation
(1) Clamp installation on a rod
(Ref. Fig. 006)

Procedure
(2) Clamp installation on the harness

(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
- Do a selection of the applicable type of clamp to install.
- Do a selection of the applicable dimensions of the clamp.
For ABS1339, a cable tie must be added next to the clamp to prevent the harness from swelling in the clamp.
------------------------------------------------
| REFERENCE | CABLE TIE TO BE USED |
|----------------------------------------------|
| ABS1139-D | NSA935401-05 (Black) |
|----------------------------------------------|
| ABS1339-F | NSA935401-05R (Red) |
------------------------------------------------
NOTE: The tool volume to install the cable tie must be taken into account for the installation procedure.
NOTE: For the A380 programme, on a simple harness without external protection (shielded or not), use self-adhesive silicone tape
ASNA5107.
NOTE: If it is not possible to get a clamp of the correct size, use a clamp with a diameter that is slightly larger than that of the wire
harness to be attached. Wind self-adhesive silicone tape ASNA5107 around the harness to get a normal grip of the clamp.
- Install the clamp around the harness.
NOTE: For NSA5516 or MS21919 or AS21919:

- The lining must not fall out of the support and the 2 ends must overlap correctly.
- Particular cases for clamp sizes -02, -03 and -04 without tab, wind around the harness, in all areas, self-adhesive silicone
tape ASNA5107.
NOTE: At hinge points, harness with a diameter of more than

15 mm (0.5905 in.) must be held in position at each side of the hinge with two clamps NSA5516 (or equivalent), and
protected by tape ASNA5107 at the location of the clamps.
NOTE: For NSA5515, additional protection can be given by one or more (3 max.) bushings NSA5539.
(3) Clamp installation on coaxial cables

-
For clamp NSA5516, use self-adhesive silicone tape ASNA5107.
- For clamp ABS1339, use self-adhesive silicone tape ASNA5107 for light coaxial (e.g.: ASNE0406(WD), ASNE0692(WN),
ASNE0690(WL), EN4604-003(WZ)) only.
(4) Clamp installation on the structure
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
- Attach this assembly on the structure in relation to the orientation and stacking rules.
Install all clamps with fastener tabs upwards.
Do the checks that follow:
- Attachment holes must not be elongated.
- Clamps must be installed so that the electrical wires do not touch other parts of the aircraft when vibrations occur.
- Keep sufficient slack between the last clamp and the electrical equipment to prevent strain at the connection and to keep
unwanted effects on shock-mounted equipment to a minimum.
The lugs of the clamp are correctly aligned when the clamp is tightened.
NOTE: The conduit must extend

10 mm (0.3937 in.) to 20 mm (0.7874 in.) beyond the last clamp.
NOTE: When the clamps or other cable attachments are held, do not pull the harness to try to apply the overlength equally.
(5) Added protection for NSA5516 and AS21919

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Metallic | A380, A400M and A350 | A320, A330 and A340 |
| clamp | | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| |Tape ASNA5107XXXXB must be added:|Tape ASNA5107XXXXB must be added|
| |- On all harnesses with no |- To make sure there is a good |
| | protection. | grip between the harness and |
| NSA5516 |- To make sure there is a good | clamp: |
| (code N) | grip between the harness and | - Adapt harness diameter to |
| | clamp: | the clamp size. |

Procedure
| | - Adapt harness diameter to | Improve the harness circular|

| AS21919 | the clamp size. | - shape (e.g. multiple harness|
| (normal | - Improve the harness circular | attached in the same clamp).|
| type) | shape (e.g. multiple harness |- For dynamic harness last |
| | attached in the same clamp). | attachment points. |
| | |- For stressed harnesses with |
| | | no protection. |
| | |- P routes harnesses with no |
| | | protection. |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| | Tape ASNA5107XXXXB must be added: |
| NSA5516 | - To make sure there is a good grip between the harness and |
| (code B) | clamp: |
| box | - Adapt harness diameter to the clamp size. |
| cushion | - Improve the harness circular shape (e.g. multiple harness |
| type | attached in the same clamp). |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
On V support, the harness must have a protection of adhesive tape ASNA5107XXXXB or bobbin NSA5539:
- When the harness diameter is more than or equal to
35 mm (1.3779 in.) .
- For small harnesses, when harness diameter is less than
2.5 mm (0.0984 in.) .
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Clamps - Clamp Description ABS0396
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Clamps - Clamp Description ABS0645
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Clamps - Clamp Description ABS0805 or NSA5575
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Clamps - Description ABS1339, AS21919, NSA5515, NSA5516, MS21919 and NSA935807
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Clamps - Clamp Description AS62200 to AS62234

20-33-43 - RACEWAY ASSEMBLIES (Airbus)
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Clamps - Clamp installation NSA5516
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Clamps - Clamp Installation on the Harness ABS1339, AS21919, NSA5515, NSA5516,
NSA935807 and MS21919
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Clamps - Clamp Installation - ABS1339
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Clamps - Clamp Installation on the Structure AS21919, NSA5515, NSA5516, NSA935807
and MS21919
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Clamps - Clamp Installation on the Structure ABS1339, AS21919, NSA5515, NSA5516,
NSA935807 and MS21919
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Clamps - Clamp Installation on the Structure - ABS1339
RACEWAY ASSEMBLIES (Airbus)
RACEWAY ASSEMBLIES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and operation of raceways assemblies. Raceways are items used to transport, secure
and to provide mechanical and EMC
protection of wiring.
The wing raceways do not have Standard P/N but are called up by drawing numbers. The cable retainers and fasteners
that are used on wing raceways have the code that follows :
- ABS0127 (only for A320 family)
- ABS0689 (only for A330-A340 family)
2. ABS0127
ABS0127 - 01
| |
| |
| ----------- Part and Type code : 01 to 06 = fairlead
| T = harpoon tie
| A or B = retainer
|
------------------ Standard P/N
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(1) Operating temperature is -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) to 120 deg.C (248.00 deg.F) .
(2) Standard assembly raceways comprise:
- Harpoon tie (ABS0127 T)
- Fairlead (ABS0127 xx)
- Retainer (ABS0127 x)
- Raceway (no Standard P/N but miscellaneous drawing number possible)
(3) Part and Type code

------------------------------------------------
| PART AND TYPE | DESIGNATION | COLOUR |
| CODE | | |
|-----------------|---------------|------------|
| 01 | FAIRLEAD | BLACK |
|-----------------|---------------|------------|
| 02 | FAIRLEAD | NATURAL |
|-----------------|---------------|------------|
|-----------------|---------------|------------|
| 04 | FAIRLEAD | BLACK |
|-----------------|---------------|------------|
|---------------- |---------------|------------|
|-----------------|---------------|------------|
| A | RETAINER | NATURAL |
|-----------------|---------------|------------|
| B* | RETAINER | NATURAL |
|-----------------|---------------|------------|
| T | HARPOON TIE | BLACK |
------------------------------------------------
* Retainer B is an optional locking device for use with type 03 and 05
fairleads only.
C. Installation Procedure
(1) Installation of harpoon-tie
- Prior to raceway installation, insert harpoon-ties into the raceways, first at each end and then at max.
intervals of
150 mm (5.9055 in.) .
-
Push the harpoon-tie with your hand until the tie-head is fully locked into its related hole in the raceway.
(2) Installation of raceway

(Ref. Fig. 002)
- Install the raceways, ensuring that each raceway is not visually damaged and that they are aligned
correctly. Make sure the raceways do not touch the structure and that the cables cannot chafe the raceway
fins.
-
Fasten the raceway assembly in position.
- Make bonding connections. The coating must not be removed. Probe the foot of the raceway only during
bonding checks.
-
Over seal joints, the bolt threads must be dipped prior to assy where rear overcoating is impossible.
- All potentially dangerous structural items must be protected prior to the installation of the harness (if
necessary, install cap ends at every raceway fin end).
(3) Installation of cables in raceways
(Ref. Fig. 002)
- Make sure that the harpoons are secure in the raceway.
- Install the cable harness in the applicable raceway channel.
- Make sure that:
.The fill factor is not exceeded (max. 65 % in trailing edge or 80 % in leading edge).
.All the cable harnesses lie in the raceway channels without being tensioned or twisted.
.The cables are not snagged in the raceway.
.The cables are equalled out either side of the harpoon ties.
- Take care that no loops have formed in the electrical cables.
-
Take great care to prevent damage to the cables:
.The insulation of the cables must not be damaged or deformed.

.The cables must not lie between the fairlead and the raceway channel wall.
NOTE: When a cable is damaged or broken, the standard procedure is to replace it with a cable that has the
same P/N.
For more data, refer to chapter : Electrical wire repair - 20-53-2x.
-
Take care not to damage the surface protection of the raceway channel.
- Retain the loom in the raceway, using the appropriate type of fairlead:
Insert it on the tail of the harpoon tie until it rests on the cables.
Attach it by inserting a retainer onto the tail of the tie until the cables are correctly held by the fairlead.
If a raceway channel has no cable inside, do not install the fairlead in the channel.
Make sure the retainer has been inserted in the correct direction so that it is locked and cannot be
removed. Do not remove the excess tail of the harpoon tie at this stage.
- When all the cable retention devices have been installed, the tails of the ties shall be attached using an
extended neck tension tool selected to the appropriate tie setting.
-
When the retention devices have been attached, remove the tails with cutters.
- Make sure that :
No foreign objects remain in the raceway (e.g. cut off residues of harpoon ties).
After each channel has been loaded with cables and attached with harpoon ties, fairleads and retainers,
examine the looms to make sure they remain in position in the channel throughout their length.
(4) Installation of spare cables into an existing raceway
(Ref. Fig. 001)
The fairleads have spaces in each side for the installation of spare cables without the need to release the
fairleads from the necessary channels.
Carefully feed the new cables through the fairlead spaces, ensuring that the cables do not become kinked or
entangled at any point.
Secure the newly installed cables to the main cable using NSA935401 cable ties of the appropriate size at the
points between the raceway channel ends.
(5) Harness deviation in raceway
(Ref. Fig. 003)
At deviation level, a mounting bracket must be installed between the retainer and the fairlead.
End cap ABS0493 must be installed at convoluted conduit NSA935805 end.
When you install the conduit, the end cap ABS0493 must be adjacent to the retainer.
Each derivative harness must be attached by cable tie at end of cap level.
(6) Cable Repair by Splicing
For raceway cable splice repairs, use parallel or butt splices according to chapters 20-43-00, 20-43-11, 20-43-12
and as detailed below.
In the wing zones, use only high temperature splices according to chapters 20-43-11 and 20-43-12.
When parallel splices are used, they must be environmentally sealed using special heat-shrink sleeve
NSA937493 according to 20-43-12 figure 2. This sleeve must extend 15 mm (0.5905 in.) either side of the splice
barrel and must be fully shrunk onto cable to ensure fluid sealing.
The splice must be installed:
-
With cables in each end.
-
Fully enclosed within the raceway channel according to chapter 20-33-43.
-
Within a straight section of the raceway.
-
Not on a curved or angled section.
-
Not at a gap
- Not directly under harpoon ties, retainers or cable ties, but the spliced cable shall be maintained to avoid
relative movement.
- So that they are fully visible for inspection.
Also refer to chapters 20-53-20, 20-53-27, 20-53-29 and 20-43-00, 20-43-11 and 20-43-12.

(7) Replacement of harpoon tie

(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
NOTE: Great care shall be taken at all times during the replacement of raceway ties.
-
This will usually require the removal of an existing tie when the head is sufficiently accessible.
- When access is impossible, you must remove only the fairlead and the retainer (harpoon tie is re-
used).
(a) Procedure when the head is accessible:

1 Removal will usually require the cutting through of the located harpoon tie head, which is probably best
carried out by the use of sidecutters. Since most harpoon tie heads are located in generally not easily
accessible positions, make sure when the applicable head is being cut that adjacent harpoon heads are
not damaged and that cutting tools do not damage the raceway or other surface treatments.
- When the harpoon tie head is removed, do not try to pull the harpoon tie tail from the loom without
first parting the cables to assist the passage of the tie platform at the base of the tie.
- Maintain the parting of the cables to facilitate the re-entry of the new harpoon tie into the loom and
the raceway.
-
Discard the old retainers and fit new ones.
2 If the head of the harpoon tie is sufficiently accessible you can use an applicable removal tool to remove
the harpoon tail (this method lets you remove the harpoon tie without cutting the head).
For a more detailed procedure, refer to chapter 20-25-57.
(b) Procedure when the head is not accessible:
- Release the retainer and fairlead with a thin-bladed implement:
- Insert a thin-bladed end between the latch of the retainer and the indentation of the harpoon tie tail
and then gradually remove the retainer up to the tail.
- Remove and discard the retainer.
- Remove and discard the fairlead.
This method requires that the tie portion still be in the raceway and must be reused. Therefore it is
important not to cause damage to the indentation in the tie.
A normal application tool cannot be used to tighten the new fairleads and retainer upon reassembly,
because the tail is already removed.
3. ABS0689
ABS0689 - A 01 L
------- - -- -
| | | |
| | | ----- Delivery code
| | |
| | -------- Size code
| |
| ---------- Type code : B = pressure pad
| A = retainer bridge
|
----------------- Standard P/N
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(1) Operating temperature is -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) to + 120 deg.C (248.00 deg.F) .
(2) Standard raceway assemblies have:
- Retainer bridge (ABS0689AXX)
- Pressure pad (ABS0689B01)
- Raceway (no standard P/N but miscellaneous drawing number possible)

(3) Type and Size codes

-------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | SIZE CODE | DESIGNATION |
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
| A | 01 | RETAINER BRIDGE |
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
|-------------|-------------|-------------------|
| B | 01 | PRESSURE PAD |
-------------------------------------------------
(4) Delivery code
----------------------------------------------------------------
| Delivery | Description | Designation | Delivery | Quantity |
| code | | | condition | of parts |
|----------|-------------|-------------|------------|----------|
| | | ABS0689A01 | | |
| | | ABS0689A02 | | |
| | Retainer | ABS0689A03 | | 1 |
| Without | bridge | ABS0689A04 | Separately | |
| code | | ABS0689A05 | | |
| |-------------|-------------| |----------|
| | Pressure pad| ABS0689B01 | | * |
|----------|-------------|-------------|------------|----------|
| | | | ABS0689A01 | 1 |
| | | ABS0689A01L |------------|----------|
| | | | ABS0689B01 | 8 |
| | |-------------|------------|----------|
| | | | ABS0689A02 | 1 |
| | | ABS0689A02L |------------|----------|
| | | | ABS0689B01 | 9 |
| | |-------------|------------|----------|
| | | | ABS0689A03 | 1 |
| L | Complete | ABS0689A03L |------------|----------|
| | bridge | | ABS0689B01 | 8 |
| | |-------------|------------|----------|
| | | | ABS0689A04 | 1 |
| | | ABS0689A04L |------------|----------|
| | | | ABS0689B01 | 8 |
| | |-------------|------------|----------|
| | | | ABS0689A05 | 1 |
| | | ABS0689A05L |------------|----------|
| | | | ABS0689B01 | 7 |
----------------------------------------------------------------
* Related to the retainer bridge selected.
(1) Installation of raceway
(Ref. Fig. 004)

20-33-44 - TIE-WRAPS (Airbus)
(Ref. Fig. 005)

The raceways must be aligned for installation. To do this, put a steel rule across the webs of the raceways and use your eyes to align the
raceways.
Use an applicable template to put the raceway channels in the correct position in relation to each other.
To put the raceways in the correct height position in relation to each other, use washers AN960D10 or D10L, if necessary.
NOTE: A difference in height of

0.5 mm (0.0196 in.) between raceways is permitted.
If it is not possible to install the raceways aligned (aligned visually with a steel rule) or if the gap between two raceways is more than 6 mm
(0.2362 in.) , the cable harnesses must be supplied with a shrink sleeve with a length of approximately 80 mm (3.1496 in.) as per
NSA937210.
You must make bonding connections.
If the raceways are aligned, you must attach them to their supports as follows:
- Apply sealing compound to the mating faces of raceways and the supports and, if necessary, to the washers AN960. We recommend
that you use a roller to apply the sealing compound to the mating faces. The width of the sealing compound applied to the raceway
mating faces must be approximately
5 mm (0.1968 in.) more than the width of the bearing faces on the supports.
NOTE: Because the mating faces are also used as bonding connections, you must make sure that the faces are cleaned to bare metal
and that there is no sealing compound on the drill holes for anchor nuts.
You can install the raceways and supports after 8 hours but you must install them before 4 days.
NOTE: You must install supports that you will attach to the structure within the extended processing time of 3 hours.
(2) Installation of cables in raceways

(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
- Route the cables in the applicable raceway channel.
Make sure that the maximum fill factor is 65 %.
Make sure that all the cable harnesses are in the raceway channels without tension or twisting.
There must be no loops in the electrical cables.
For junctions of cable harnesses from raceways, the cables must not be routed across the web edges.
- If the gap between two raceways is more than
3 mm (0.1181 in.) for CF cables or 6 mm (0.2362 in.) for DK/DM/DR cables, the cable harnesses must be supplied with a shrink
sleeve (with a length of approximately 80 mm (3.1496 in.) ) as per NSA937210. You must install this on the cables and into the
channels to prevent chafing.
NOTE: You must not shrink the sleeve.
- Manually push the retainer bridges on the raceways until they are engaged.
The retainer bridges are supplied with a "nose" which must point up after installation.
- When all the bridges have been installed, the pressure pads are to be pressed into the retainer bridges so that the cables are properly
attached in the raceway channel.
A little distance between the pressure pads and the cables is allowed.
The pressure pads must engage in the serrations of the bridges and must be positioned in the respective positions supplied for them.
- Take care that:
The insulation of the cables is not damaged or deformed.
The cables do not lie between the pressure pad and the raceway channel wall.
If a raceway channel has no cable inside, do not install the pressure pads in the channel.
Take care not to damage the surface protection.
Make sure that no foreign objects remain in the raceway (e.g. cut off residues of protruding pressure pads).
(3) Cable Repair by Splicing
For raceway cable splice repairs, use parallel or butt splices according to chapters 20-43-00, 20-43-11, 20-43-12 and as detailed below.
In the wing zones, use only high temperature splices according to chapters 20-43-11 and 20-43-12.
When parallel splices are used, they must be environmentally sealed using special heat-shrink sleeve NSA937493 according to 20-43-12
figure 2. This sleeve must extend 15 mm (0.5905 in.) either side of the splice barrel and must be fully shrunk onto cable to ensure fluid
sealing.
The splice must be installed :
- With cables in each end.
- Fully enclosed within the raceway channel according to chapter 20-33-43.
- Within a straight section of the raceway.
- Not on a curved or angled section.
- Not at a gap
- Not directly under harpoon ties, retainers or cable ties, but the spliced cable shall be maintained to avoid relative movement.
- So that they are fully visible for inspection.
Also refer to chapters 20-53-20, 20-53-27, 20-53-29 and 20-43-00, 20-43-11 and 20-43-12.

NOTE: The retainer bridge and the pressure pads shall be removed by hand or with a suitable non-metallic tool (e.g. Plastic screwdriver).
These items are not re-positionable. At each intervention it is necessary to discard and replace them by new ones.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Raceway Assemblies - Details ABS0127 (for A318/A319/A320/A321)
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Raceway Assemblies - Standard Installation ABS0127 (for A318/A319/A320/A321)
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Raceway Assemblies - Harness Deviation ABS0127 (for A318/A319/A320/A321)
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Raceway Assemblies - Details ABS0689 (for A330/A340)
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Raceway Assemblies - Standard Installation ABS0689 (for A330/A340)
TIE-WRAPS (Airbus)
TIE-WRAPS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and operation for tie-wraps. The tie-wraps (or cable ties) are used to attach, tie and bind the wiring.
Tie-wraps must ensure the shape of the bundle and the distribution of the mechanical loads over all cables.
The tie-wraps installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- NSA935401
- NSA8420.
The selection of the type of tie-wrap is related to:
- The type of route of the bundle:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | BUNDLE | BUNDLE |
| | TYING | ATTACHMENT |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Inside tanks | NSA935401 | NSA935401 |
| | RED | Red |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Temperature between | NSA935401 | NSA935401 |
| -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) and | Black | Black |
| 135 deg.C (275 deg.F) | | |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Temperature between | NSA935401 | NSA935401 |
| 135 deg.C (275 deg.F) and | Black | Black |
| 150 deg.C (302 deg.F) | | with ABS1339 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Pylons | | |
| High temperature areas | NSA8420-7 | - |
| > 200 deg.C (392 deg.F) | | |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Fire areas | NSA8420-9 | - |
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
- The type of bundles you will tie (technical or commercial):
In harnesses that include several bundles, you must attach each one with lacing tape NSA8420. It is not permitted to use enclosed cable ties
NSA935401 for technical bundles.
In harnesses that include 1 technical bundle and several commercial bundles, it is permitted to use cable ties for the technical bundle and
lacing tape for the commercial bundles.
In harnesses that include several technical bundles and commercial bundles, you must use lacing tape for all the bundles.
In harnesses that include several commercial bundles, it is permitted to use cable ties for all the bundles.
NOTE: For separation rules, refer to chapter 20-33-2X.

For distances between the tying points on the harnesses, procedures to tie branches and swelling of harnesses, refer to chapter 20-33-1x.
NOTE: You cannot use cable ties NSA935401 in conduits.
NOTE: You can use lacing tape NSA8420 or cable tie NSA935401 on coaxial cables.
If you use NSA935401, you must make sure that the wiring tool (gun) is correctly adjusted and calibrated.
NOTE:
You cannot use cable ties NSA935401 where there is a risk of harness-to-harness contact or cable-to-cable tie head contact. This is

specially applicable in areas where wiring density is high. In these areas, you must use lacing tape NSA8420.
you can add cable ties or lacing tape on a harness to make its shape better.
You must not use NSA935401 cable ties inside harnesses.
The form and structure of the harness must not change.
You must use NSA8420-7 lacing tape inside harnesses and for attachment in hot or confined areas.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE CABLE TIES WITH METAL TABS.
2. NSA935401
(Ref. Fig. 001)
NOTE: The head of the cable tie NSA935401 must not touch the adjacent structure or harness, intermittently or when you remove equipment.
NSA935401 - 03 R
--------- -- -
| | |
| | |
| | ------------- Color code (ref para 2.B.(3))
| |
| ----------------- Dimension code (ref para 2.B.(2))
|
------------------------- Standard P/N
(1) Temperature
Maximum operating temperature is +135 deg.C (+275.00 deg.F) .
(2) Dimension
The dimensions of the tie-wrap are related to the wire bundle diameter you will attach.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| DIMENSION | WIDTH | LENGTH | BUNDLE DIAMETER |
| CODE | mm (IN) | mm (IN) | mm (IN) |
|-----------|---------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | |1.6 mm (0.0629 in.)|
| 03 | 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.) | 102 mm (4.0157 in.) | to |
| | | | 20 mm (0.7874 in.)|
|-----------|---------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | |1.6 mm (0.0629 in.)|
| 04 | 3.6 mm (0.1417.in.) | 150 mm (5.9055 in.) | to |
| | | | 35 mm (1.3779 in.)|
|-----------|---------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | |1.6 mm (0.0629 in.)|
| 05 | 4.8 mm (0.1889 in.) | 204 mm (8.0315 in.) | to |
| | | | 50 mm (1.9685 in.)|
|-----------|---------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | |1.6 mm (0.0629 in.)|
| 06 | 4.8 mm (0.1889 in.) | 302 mm (11.8897 in.)| to |
| | | | 78 mm (3.0708 in.)|
|-----------|---------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | |1.6 mm (0.0629 in.)|
| 08 | 4.8 mm (0.1889 in.) | 389 mm (15.3149 in.)| to |
| | | |109 mm (4.2913 in.)|
|-----------|---------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | |4.8 mm (0.1889 in.)|
| 10* | 7.6 mm (0.2992 in.) | 376 mm (14.8031 in.)| to |
| | | |108 mm (4.2519 in.)|
|-----------|---------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | |4.8 mm (0.1889 in.)|
| 12 | 8.9 mm (0.3503 in.) | 780 mm (30.7086 in.)| to |
| | | |230 mm (9.0551 in.)|
|-----------|---------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| | | |1.6 mm (0.0629 in) |
| 13 | 3.7 mm (0.1456 in.) | 295 mm (11.6141 in.)| to |
| | | | 77 mm (3.0314 in.)|
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
* This dimension code is used to attach small diameter bundles by a double-turn

(eight-shaped) method.
(3) Color code
These cable ties have different colors but on final aircraft wiring, only black, sea green or natural cable ties must remain.
NOTE: Red cable ties must be used in fuel tanks because they are easier to see.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| COLOR | BLACK or | RED | BLUE | GREEN | YELLOW | GREY |
| | NATURAL | | | | | |
|---------|------------|---------|--------|---------|--------|--------|
| COLOR | No | R | B | G | Y | S |
| CODE | Code | | | | | |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Procedure
(1) Installation
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(a) Standard installation
- Use the correct cable tie for the bundle diameter.
- Put the cable tie around the bundle with the section of the locking head on the outer side.
- Select the applicable wiring tool (guns) (Ref. chapter 20-25-51/wiring tool).
Make sure that the gun adjustment is applicable for the bundle diameter you will attach.
NOTE: In some areas where you cannot use a cable tie installation tool (e.g. in areas where access is not easy), you can tighten the
cable tie manually. This is not applicable for "V" clamp attachments or for opposite adjacent cable harnesses where you have
less than
10 mm (0.3937 in.) clearance.
1 Manually installation
-
Engage the free end of the cable tie into the locking head and pull tightly with your hand.
-
Cut the tail as flush as possible with the cable tie head.
- Make sure that no sharp edges protrude from the cable tie head because this can cause damage to adjacent cable harness
or injury to personnel.
NOTE: You must only use this procedure in special cases when there is no access for the cable tie installation tool in a specific
area (after the harness is installed on the aircraft).
2 Installation with tool
NOTE: You must use the correct setting values. If you tighten too much, you will cause damage to the cables and cable ties
(break the head or cause deformation of the strap). If you do not tighten sufficiently, you will not get satisfactory tying.
- Put the gun nose near the cable tie locking head and engage the end of the cable tie.
NOTE: During tightening, make sure that you hold the head of the tool tightly against the head of the cable tie.
- Pull the trigger. The cable tie is tightened and, when you get the necessary tension, it is automatically cut and the tail of the
cable tie is ejected.
-
Do a manual check to make sure that the tie is correctly tightened.
-
Remove and discard the cable tie tail.
-
Make sure that the head of the cable tie does not touch an adjacent bundle.
(b) Special case of coaxial cables


Backshells for Circular Connectors or Pressure Seals
(Ref. Fig. 002)

This type of backshell has for example the codes that follow:
- By cable tie attachment:
E0080 (ex NSA938154) backshell for NAS1599 (E0039, E0040, E0041, E0052, E0053, E0054) and MIL-C-83723 (E0186, E0579,
E0195, E0320, E0321, E0322) connector type.
ABS0638 backshell for NAS1599 (E0039, E0040, E0041, E0052, E0053, E0054) and MIL-C-83723 (E0320, E0321, E0322)
connector type.
NSA938025 backshell for MIL-C-38999 (NSA938026) connector type.
NSA938112 backshell for MIL-C-26500 (E0077, E0079, E0110) connector type.
EN3660-017, EN3660-018 and EN3660-019 backshell for PREN3645.
- By clamp attachment:
E0020 backshell for MIL-C-26482 (E0007) connector type.
NSA938150 backshell for NAS1599 (E0039, E0040, E0041, E0052, E0053, E0054)
ABS0872 backshell for MIL-C-26482 connector type.
E0850 and E0851 backshell for MIL-C-26482 and UTE C 93-422 (E0076, E0150, E0151, E0152 and E0153) connector type.
NSA938163 backshell for MIL-C-26500 (E0070, E0079, E0110) connector type.
E0344 backshell for MIL-C-5015 (E0093, E0094, NSA938931 and NSA938932) connector type.
NSA938155 backshell for MIL-C-5015 (NSA938931, NSA938932, E0093, E0094) connector type.
NSA938921 backshell for MIL-C-5015 (NSA938925, E0111, E0233) connector type.
E0199 backshell for MIL-C-83723 (E0195, E0197) connector type.
ABS0090, ABS0126 and ABS0587 backshell for PREN2997 (E0452, E0454) connector type.
E0455 backshell for PREN2997 (E0451, E0452, E0454) connector type.
E0618 backshell for MIL-C-38999 (E0545, E0610, E0611, E0612) connector type.
EN3660-004 (ex E0199 and E0455) and EN3660-005 (ex E0199 and E0455) backshell for PREN2997 and PREN4067 connector
type.
EN3660-020 and EN3660-021 backshell for PREN3645.
- Without bundle attachment:
E0021 thread protector for MIL-C-26482 (E0007) connector type.
NSA938003 thread protector for NAS1599 (E0052, E0053, E0054) connector type
ABS0271 backshell for NAS1599 (E0052, E0053, E0054) connector type.
ABS0517 and ABS0518 backshell for NAS1599 (E0052, E0053, E0054) and MIL-C-83723 (E0195, E0320, E0322) connector types
and E0073 pressure seal.
ABS1057 backshell for ABS1054-003 and ABS1054-004 connectors.
ABS1452 and ABS1513 backshell for ABS1340, ABS1343, ABS1426 and ABS1427 connectors.
E0515 backshell for NAS1599, MIL-C-83723 and PREN2997 connector type.
EN3660-003 (ex E0199 and E0455) backshell for PREN2997 and PREN4067 connector type.
A. E0080, ABS0638, NSA938025, NSA938112, EN3660-017, EN3660-018 and EN3660-019 backshells
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
For example:
Backshell: E0080 - 01 - 12 C
| | | |
| | | ----- Color code : C = black
| | | N = olive green
| | |
| | --------- Size code (08 to 24)
| |
| ---------------- Type code : 01 = straight
| 02 = elbowed
|
------------------------ Standard P/N
Protective pad alone: E0080 - CP1
| |
| ---------- Material code (green color)
|
------------------- Standard P/N
EN3660-017 A 1 A 09
EN3660-018 A 1 A 09

EN3660-019 A 1 A 09
| | | | |
| | | | ------------ Shell size code
| | | -------------- Strain relief adaptor type :
| | | A-without protective pad and ground lug
| | | B-with protective pad and ground lug
| | | C-with protective pad and without ground lug
| | | D-without protective pad and with ground lug
| | ----------------- Coupling nut :
| | 1-without self-locking device
| | 2-with self-locking device
| ------------------- Material Code
------------------------ Standard P/N
(a) Temperature (for E0080, ABS0638 and NSA938112 only)
For EN3660-017, EN3660-018 and EN3660-019:
For class A and N:
For class W:
(b) Material Code
For EN3660-017, EN3660-018 and EN3660-019:
A = Aluminum alloy/Black anodized plating
N = Aluminum alloy/Electroless nickel plated
W = Aluminum alloy/Olive drab cadmium plated
(3) Shell size codes for EN3660-017, EN3660-018 and EN3660-019 backshells
-----------------------------
| SHELL SIZE | NUMBER OF |
| | TEETH |
|------------|--------------|
| 09 | 12 |
|------------|--------------|
| 11 | 16 |
|------------|--------------|
| 13 | 20 |
|------------|--------------|
| 15 | 24 |
|------------|--------------|
| 17 | 28 |
|------------|--------------|
| 19 | 32 |
|------------| -------------|
| 21 | 36 |
|------------|--------------|
| 23 | 40 |
|------------|--------------|
| 25 | 44 |
-----------------------------
NOTE: The installation of composite backshell ABS0638 must be the same as metal backshells E0080 in almost all aircrafts
areas. But this is not applicable to hot areas when an important mechanical resistance is necessary (e.g. pressure seals)
and to connectors for which electrical continuity is necessary.
NOTE: You must install plastic backshell ABS0638 in top or lateral position (+ or - 90 deg. angle) to prevent liquid accumulation.
- Install the backshell on the cables before you connect them to the connector.
- Tighten the backshell on the connector.
- Tighten the backshell with pliers UTICA 529 or equivalent.

NOTE: Tighten the backshell ABS0638 with strap wrench DMC BTBS609 (or DMC BTBS611 or GLENAIR TG70 or equivalent).
NOTE: To make it easier to tighten the backshell, you can use a tightening support SOURIAU 8500-30 or equivalent.
- On a metal backshell, install a protective pad E0080-CP1 or NSA935404 between the backshell and the harness. (No
protective pads are necessary on plastic backshells).
(Ref. Fig. 004)
-
Attach the harness to the backshell with a cable tie NSA935401.
-
If necessary, safety the connector (ref 20-51-12).
NOTE: When backshell ABS0638 is installed in a vibration area, you must do the locking with an adhesive material (ref 20-51-
12).
NOTE: To unlock backshell ABS0638, use a strap wrench DMC BTBS609 (or DMC BTBS611 or GLENAIR TG70 or equivalent).
B. E0020, NSA938150, ABS0872, E0850, E0851, NSA938163, E0344, NSA938155, NSA938921, E0199, ABS0090, ABS0126,
ABS0587, E0455, E0549, E0580, E0617, EN3660-004, EN3660-005, EN3660-020, EN3660-021 and E0618 Backshells
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
For example:
NSA938150 - 01 - 10
| | |
| | --------------- Size code (08 to 24)
| |
| ---------------------- Type code
|
------------------------------- Standard P/N
EN3660-004 N 08 A 1
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | ----------- 1 = no nut with 3 holes for lockwire
| | | | 2 = 1 nut with 4 holes for torque
| | | --------------- Variant code (A, B, C or D)
| | ------------------- Shell size code
| ------------------------ Material class code (A, K, N or W)
-------------------------------- Standard P/N
E0618 A 13 N
| | | |
| | | |
| | | ----------- Material code
| | --------------- Shell size code
| -------------------- Variant code
| ------------------------ Standard P/N
EN3660-020 N 09
| | |
| | --------------- Shell size code
| ------------------ Material code
------------------------ Standard P/N
EN3660-021 X XX
| | |
| | --------------- Shell size code
| ------------------ Material code
------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
For NSA938150:
Minimum operating temperature is -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F)
Maximum operating temperature is 175 deg.C (347.00 deg.F)
For ABS0587, ABS0872, ABS0126 and E0455:


For E0850 and E0851:
For code F:
For code W:
For NSA938921:
For ABS0090, E0199, E0344 and NSA938155:
For EN3660-004 and EN3660-005:
For class A and N, maximum operating temperature is 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F)
For class K, maximum operating temperature is 260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F)
For class W, maximum operating temperature is 175 deg.C (347.00 deg.F)
For EN3660-020 and EN3660-021:
For class K:
For class N:
For class W:
(b) Material code
For E0618:
N = Stainless Steel Passivated (for screws)/Aluminum Alloy (for body)-nickel plating protection
S = Stainless Steel Passivated
W = Stainless Steel Passivated (for screws)/Aluminum Alloy (for body)-cadmium plating protection
For EN3660-020 and EN3660-021:
K = Stainless Steel/Passivated
N = Aluminum/Electroless nickel plated
W = Aluminum/Olive drab cadmium plated
(c) Variant Code
For E0618:
----------------------------------------------------------------
| CODE | VARIANT DEFINITION |
|------------|--------------------------------------------------|
| | Standard ring fastener with 3 holes for diameter |
| A | 0.5mm (0.02 in) lock wire, with equal distance |
| | between the holes. |
|------------|--------------------------------------------------|
| | Self-locking ring fastener. The self-locking |
| B | device must operate satisfactorily after 60 |
| | backshell connect/disconnect cycles. |
|------------|---------------------------------------------------
(3) Shell size codes for EN3660-004 and EN3660-005 backshells
--------------------
| SHELL | NUMBER |
| SIZE | OF TEETH |
|---- |----------|
| 08 | 12 |
|-------|----------|
| 10 | 15 |
|-------|----------|
| 12 | 21 |
|-------|----------|
| 14 | 24 |
|-------|----------|

| 16 | 30 |
|-------|----------|
| 18 | 33 |
|-------|----------|
| 20 | 36 |
|-------|----------|
| 22 | 39 |
|-------|----------|
| 24 | 42 |
|-------|----------|
| 28 | 54 |
--------------------
(4) Shell size codes for EN3660-020 and EN3660-021:
-----------------------------
| SHELL SIZE | NUMBER |
| | OF TEETH |
|------------|--------------|
| 09 | 12 |
|------------|--------------|
| 11 | 16 |
|------------|--------------|
| 13 | 20 |
|------------|--------------|
| 15 | 24 |
|------------|--------------|
| 17 | 28 |
|------------|--------------|
| 19 | 32 |
|------------| -------------|
| 21 | 36 |
|------------|--------------|
| 23 | 40 |
|------------|--------------|
| 25 | 44 |
-----------------------------
(5) Shell size codes for E0618.
--------------------
| SHELL | NUMBER |
| SIZE | OF TEETH |
|-------|----------|
| 09 | 12 |
|-------|----------|
| 11 | 16 |
|-------|----------|
| 13 | 20 |
|-------|----------|
| 15 | 24 |
|-------|----------|
| 17 | 28 |
|-------|----------|
| 19 | 32 |
|-------|----------|
| 21 | 36 |
|-------|----------|
| 23 | 40 |
|-------|----------|
| 25 | 44 |
--------------------
- Screw the backshell on the connector.
- Tighten the backshell with pliers UTICA 529 or equivalent.
NOTE: To make it easier to tighten the backshell, you can use a tightening support SOURIAU 8500-30 or equivalent.

-
If necessary, safety the connector (ref 20-51-12).
- You can wind silicone tape NSA935403 (except in fuel areas) or ASNA5107 (for pressurized and non pressurized areas)
around cable harnesses for small diameters to make up for differences in diameter.
-
Attach the harness to the backshell with the clamp.
NOTE: The clamp must touch and be held on the backshell by two screws.
(7) Special procedure for ABS0090 and ABS0126

NSA8420
- Remove and discard the cable tie tail.

(c) Special case of optical fiber cables
Optical bundles are tied only by lacing tape NSA8420 or cable ties NSA935401-04 after protection by a
bushing NSA5539 installed on each optical cable at each attachment point.
NOTE: The position of the cable-tie installation guns must be equivalent to position 3 max. of gun GS2B so as
not to change the optical and mechanical properties of the fiber.
When you tie an optical harness to an electrical harness tied by NSA935401, the heads of the ties must not
touch the optical harness after installation.
(2) Removal
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
To remove a cable tie with a plastic tab, there are two methods: with or without cutting of the locking head without
damage to the cables (Refer to chapter 20-25-51):
-
With cutting of the locking head, you must use the pliers RENNSTEIG 80075004 or KNIPEX 7902125S1.
- Without cutting of the locking head, you must use the pliers KNIPEX 8605150S02.
To remove a cable tie with a metallic tab (used before 1991), you must cut the cable tie with scissors held
parallel to the cables so that the metallic tab does not fall into the bundle between the cables.
Remove and discard the cable tie.
3. NSA8420
In general, cable bundles will be tied:
- by NSA8420-5, -7 or -9 in high temperature areas.
In bundles that include several technical harnesses, each one must be attached with lacing tape NSA8420. It is not
permitted to use enclosed cable ties NSA935401.
NSA8420 - 1
------- -
| |
| |
| ---------- Dimension code
|
------------------- Standard P/N
(1) Temperature
Maximum operating temperature is related to the dimension code.
(2) Dimension code
------------------------------------------------------------------------
| DIMENSION | TEMPERATURE | DIMENSION | CONDITION |
| CODE | | mm (in) | |
|-------------|---------------------------|---------------|------------|
| 0 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 2.5 (Dia.) | Thread |
| | TO 121 deg.C (249.8 deg.F)| (0.10) | |
|-------------|---------------------------|---------------|------------|
| 1 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 1.55 x 0.33 | Tape |
| | TO 232 deg.C (449.6 deg.F)| (0.06 x 0.01) | |
|-------------|---------------------------|---------------|------------|
| 2 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 2.67 x 0.33 | Tape |
| | TO 232 deg.C (449.6 deg.F)| (0.11 x 0.01) | |
|-------------|---------------------------|---------------|------------|
| 3 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 2.28 x 0.3 | White Tape |
| | TO 121 deg.C (249.8 deg.F)| (0.09 x 0.01) | |

NSA8420
|-------------|---------------------------|---------------|------------|
| 4 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 3.55 x 0.38 | White Tape |
| | TO 121 deg.C (249.8 deg.F)| (0.14 x 0.01) | |
|-------------|---------------------------|---------------|------------|
| 5 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 3 (Dia.) | Thread |
| | TO 360 deg.C (680 deg.F) | (0.12) | |
|-------------|---------------------------|---------------|------------|
| 6 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 2 (Dia.) | Braid |
| | TO 232 deg.C (449.6 deg.F)| (0.08) | |
|-------------|---------------------------|---------------|------------|
| 7 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 3.17 x 0.40 | Tape |
| | TO 427 deg.C (800.6 deg.F)| (0.12 x 0.02) | |
|-------------|---------------------------|---------------|------------|
| 8 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 1.52 x 0.30 | Tape |
| | TO 175 deg.C (347 deg.F) | (0.06 x 0.01) | |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------|
| 9 | -55 deg.C (-67 deg.F) | 2.8 x 1.04 | Tape |
| | TO 1100 deg.C (2012 deg.F)| (0.11 x 0.04) | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Procedure
(1) Installation
The installation procedure for the lacing tape is related to the knot type used and the type of cables you will attach.
(a) Double clove hitch
(Ref. Fig. 005)
This type of knot is used to tie harnesses and attach labels with lacing tape NSA8420-7.
It is also used to tie harnesses in fire areas with lacing tape NSA8420-9.
-
Step 1. Make a single clove hitch
- Step 2. Then put one end of the lacing tape through one of the loops of the single clove hitch. This
operation makes a double clove hitch.
-
Step 3. Tighten the knot sufficiently so that it does not slide on the harness.
-
Step 4. Then make the closing knot which includes 2 loops and not a double knot.
- Step 5. Cut each tape end approximately
6 mm (0.2362 in.) from the knot with scissors or cutting pliers.
If the lacing tape is used in high temperature or vibration areas, you must safety the knot with CAF4 (MAT
No. 08-004).
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(b) Hanging knot
(Ref. Fig. 007)
This type of knot is used to separate P, G, X and E routes in high temperature and SWAMP areas with lacing
tape NSA8420-5.
1 For two routes (2 cables):
(Ref. Fig. 008)
- Step 1. First, to attach the cables (or routes), wind the lacing tape perpendiculary around them the
necessary number of turns ("A" turns given in the dimensional table). Make sure that you get the
distance "d" given in the dimensional table.
(Ref. Fig. 007)
- Step 2. Wind each end of the lacing tape (1 and 2) the necessary number of turns around the tape
and parallel to the cables (or routes). Make sure that you get the distance "d".
-
Step 3. Make a single knot and tighten it to complete the hanging knot.
-
Step 4. Safety the knot with CAF4 (MAT No. 08-004).
(Ref. Fig. 006)
Cut each tape end approximately 10 mm (0.3937 in.) from the knot:
- With a heat stripper or a hot soldering iron (without application of CAF4).

NSA8420
- With scissors or cutting pliers + application of CAF4 (MAT No. 08-004) at each end of the lacing
tape.
2 For two routes (3 cables):
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
This type of knot is used when an E route must go through a G route. The "energization" cables are held
at the same distance between the cables of the "generation" route.
- Step 1. First wind end "2" of the lacing tape around the cables as shown. You only use end "1" at the
end of the procedure to complete the knot.
- Step 2. Then wind end "2" of the lacing tape around the lacing tape in the space between the top
cable of the G route and the E route. Wind end "2" the necessary number of turns and make sure that
you get distance "d".
Go over the cables of the E route.
- Step 3. Wind end "2" the necessary number of turns (same as in step 2) in the space between the
bottom cable of the G route and the E route. Make sure that you get distance "d".
- Step 4. Make a double knot with the 2 ends of the lacing tape around the cable of the G route.
Tighten the knot.
Safety the knot with CAF4 (MAT No. 08-004).
(Ref. Fig. 006)
Cut each tape end approximately 10 mm (0.3937 in.) from the knot:
-
with a heat stripper or a hot soldering iron (without application of CAF4).
-
with scissors or cutting pliers + application of CAF4 (MAT No. 08-004) at each end of the lacing tape.
(c) Whipping knot for overbraiding

This type of knot is used to tie overbraiding harnesses with lacing tape NSA8420-7.
1 To attach the straight part of the harness
(Ref. Fig. 011)
(Ref. Fig. 012)
-
Step 1. With the lacing tape, make a loop along the harness in the necessary position.
- Step 2. Hold the loop in its position and move end "1" until it is perpendicular to the harness.
Wind end "1" of the tape five turns around the harness on the loop. Make sure that there is no
overlap of the turns and that you sufficiently tighten the tape.
- Step 3. While you keep the tension on the lacing tape, lift the loop and wind end "1" of the tape 2
more turns around the harness.
-
Step 4. Put end "1" of the lacing tape through the loop.
- Step 5. Pull end "2" of the lacing tape along the harness to tighten the loop on end "1" of the lacing
tape. Pull the knot thus made below the first 5 turns of the lacing tape. While you pull the knot, hold
the whipping knot in position.
- Step 6. The view shows the position of the end knot below the first 5 turns of the lacing tape. Cut the
lacing tape approximately
3 mm (0.1181 in.) from each side of the whipping knot.
2 To attach separation branches of a harness
(Ref. Fig. 013)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
(2) Removal
(Ref. Fig. 015)
To prevent unwanted damage to an electrical conductor, lacing tape NSA8420 must be cut with cutting pliers (e.g.
FACOM 39516, KNIPEX 7902125S1 or equivalent):
- Only at the knot in this lacing tape.
- You must not cut the tape on the circumference of the harness.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Tie-wraps - Description and Installation NSA935401

NSA8420
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Tie-wraps - Installation and Check NSA935401
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Tie-wraps - Removal NSA935401
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Tie-wraps - Removal NSA935401
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Tie-wraps - Double Clove Hitch Installation Procedure NSA8420-7 and NSA8420-9
Figure 005.2 / Graphic SH 005.2 Tie-wraps - Double Clove Hitch Installation Procedure NSA8420-7 and NSA8420-9
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Tie-wraps - Safetying of the Knots NSA8420-5, NSA8420-7 and NSA8420-9
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Tie-wraps - Dimensional Table for Hanging Knot Installation NSA8420-5
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Tie-wraps - Hanging Knot for 2 Routes (2 Cables) NSA8420-5
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Tie-wraps - Hanging Knot for 2 Routes (3 cables) NSA8420-5
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Tie-wraps - Hanging Knot for 2 Routes (3 cables) NSA8420-5
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Tie-wraps - Whipping Knot for Overbraiding NSA8420-7
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Tie-wraps - Whipping Knot for Overbraiding NSA8420-7
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Tie-wraps - Separation Knot for Overbraiding NSA8420-7
Figure 014.1 / Graphic SH 014.1 Tie-wraps - Separation Knot for Overbraiding NSA8420-7
Figure 015.1 / Graphic SH 015.1 Tie-wraps - Removal of lacing tape NSA8420
BACKSHELL , END PIECE AND CONDUIT FITTING (Airbus)
BACKSHELL , END PIECE AND CONDUIT FITTING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and installation of the backshells, end pieces and conduit fittings used on aircraft.
These items are divided into 5 sub-families
(Ref. Fig. 001)
listed by paragraph in the table that follows:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| REFER TO | REFER TO | REFER TO | REFER TO | REFER TO |
| PARA. 2 | PARA. 3 | PARA. 4 | PARA. 5 | PARA. 6 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| ABS0090 | ABS0364 | ABS0591 | ABS0280 | ABS0519 |
| ABS0126 | ABS0388 | E0074 | ABS0281 | ABS0521 |
| ABS0271 | ABS0699 | E0109 (4) | ABS0327 | ABS0523 |
| ABS0517 | ABS0700 | E0115 (5) | ABS0581 | ABS0524 |
| ABS0518 | ABS1019-005 | NSA935827 | ABS0841 | ABS0580 |
| ABS0587 | ABS1069-003 | NSA935829 | ABS0842 | ABS0582 |

NSA8420
| ABS0638 | ABS1239-006 | | ABS0936 | ABS0583 |

| ABS0872 | E0312 | | ABS0937 | ABS0584 (7) |
| ABS1057 | E0365 | | ABS1138-003 | ABS0585 |
| ABS1452 | E0393 | | ABS1138-004 | ABS0693 |
| ABS1513 | E0448 | | ABS1138-005 | ABS0694 |
| E0020 | EN3545-007(3)| | ABS1138-006 | ABS0695 |
| E0021 | NSA938422 | | ABS1358 | ABS0885 |
| E0080 (1) | | | ABS1359 (6) | ABS0886 |
| E0199 | | | ABS1360 | ABS0932 |
| E0344 | | | ABS1361 | ABS0933 |
| E0455 | | | ABS1362 | ABS0934 |
| E0515 | | | ABS1363 | ABS1023 |
| E0549 | | | ABS1365 | |
| E0580 | | | ABS1366 | |
| E0617 | | | E0075 | |
| E0618 | | | E0550 | |
| E0850 | | | E0740 | |
| E0851 | | | E0760 | |
| EN3660-003(2)| | | | |
| EN3660-004(2)| | | | |
| EN3660-005(2)| | | | |
| EN3660-017 | | | | |
| EN3660-018 | | | | |
| EN3660-019 | | | | |
| EN3660-020 | | | | |
| EN3660-021 | | | | |
| NSA938003 | | | | |
| NSA938025 | | | | |
| NSA938112 | | | | |
| NSA938150 | | | | |
| NSA938155 | | | | |
| NSA938163 | | | | |
| NSA938921 | | | | |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) ex NSA938154
(2) ex E0199 and E0455
(3) ex E0393
(4) ex NSA935820
(5) ex NSA935827
(6) ex ABS0893
(7) ex ABS0334
NOTE: Permitted tolerances applicable in pressurized areas and for A380 program only: You can change the orientation of
the VC backshells given in the drawings to obey the harness routing rules (the maximum permitted change is plus or
minus 75 deg.). This is not appicable to ring shielded backshells (e.g ABS1138-006).
This tolerance is applicable to orientation of ABS0638 backshells to prevent water retention when the backshell tail
is down.
Make sure that the harness bend radii and distances in relation to the structure, the other systems and bundles
agree with the installation rules.
2. Backshells for Circular Connectors or Pressure Seals

Backshells for Rectangular Connectors
- Strip the cable to the correct length in relation to the type of backshell you will install.
-------------------------------------------------
| backshell | stripping length |
|-------------|---------------------------------|
| ABS0090 | 34 mm (1.34 in.) |
|-------------|---------------------------------|
| ABS0126 | 58 mm (2.28 in.) |
-------------------------------------------------
- Fold back the braid along the cable insulation.
- Install the backshell on the cable.
- Shrink the conductors, crimp and insert the contacts on the connector.
- Tighten the backshell on the connector and make sure that the pin points in the correct direction.
- Comb the braid on the conical bush.
- Install the conical bush on the rear of the backshell.
- Cut the braid strands flush with the backshell.
- Tighten the cable grip with tape NSA935403-01 to give the cable protection.
- Safety the assembly (Refer to 20-51-12).
(8) Special procedure for E0199, E0455 and EN3660 backshells installed with pressure seals
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(a) When the diameter of the harness is smaller than the diameter of the backshell:
- You must install silicone tape NSA935403 (thick tape) or ASNA5107 (thin tape) around the cable harness for
mechanical protection and padding.
(b) When the diameter of the harness is larger than the diameter of the backshell:
- You must use spacers to prevent mechanical stress on the harness.
NOTE: The spacers must be shown on the definition drawings.

You can use spacers only on backshells installed at the rear of the pressure seals.
You must not use spacers on backshells installed at the rear of the connectors.
NOTE: When a backshell does the electrical continuity, you must not use spacers. The half-clamp(s) must directly
touch the backshell body.
(c) For straight backshells (e.g. EN3660-004), install four spacers NSA5527-03-04D (two on each screw) between the
two half-clamps.
(d) For 90 deg. angle backshells (e.g. EN3660-005), install two spacers NSA5527-03-04D (one on each screw)
between the half-clamp and the backshell.
C. E0021, NSA938003 Thread Protector, ABS0271, ABS0517, ABS0518, ABS1057, ABS1452, ABS1513, E0515 and
EN3660-003 Backshells
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
NSA938003 - 10
E0515 - 08
| |
| ----------------- Type code
|
-------------------------- Standard P/N
ABS1452 A 18-02 B
| | | |
| | | -------- Type code: no code = type A
| | | B = type B
| | -------------- Size code
| -------------------- Material code
-------------------------- Standard P/N
ABS1057 - 08 A 01
ABS0271 - 08 A

ABS0517 - 08 P
ABS0518 - 01 A
E0021 - 12 D
ABS1513 - 20
| | | |
| | | ------------ Cable type code
| | ---------------- Material code
| ------------------ Size code
------------------------- Standard P/N
EN3660-003 N 08 A 1
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | ----------- 1 = no nut with 3 holes for lockwire
| | | | 2 = 1 nut with 4 holes for torque
| | | --------------- Variant code (A, B, C or D)
| | ------------------- Shell size code
| ------------------------ Material class code (A, K, N or W)
-------------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
For ABS0517 and ABS0518
For ABS1057:
Maximum operating temperature is 125 deg.C (257.00 deg.F) for Material code A and 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F)
for Material code B.
For ABS1452:
Maximum operating temperature is +175 deg.C (+347.00 deg.F) for Material code A.
Maximum operating temperature is +260 deg.C (+500.00 deg.F) for Material code C.
For EN3660-003:
For class A and N, maximum operating temperature is 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F)
For class K, maximum operating temperature is 260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F)
For class W, maximum operating temperature is 175 deg.C (347.00 deg.F)
(3) Shell sizes and torque values for EN3660-003 backshell
------------------------------------
| SHELL | NUMBER | TORQUE VALUES |
| SIZE | OF TEETH | m.daN (lbf.in)|
|-------|----------|-------------- |
| | | |
| 08 | 12 | |
|-------|----------| |
| 10 | 15 | |
|-------|----------| |
| 12 | 21 | |
|-------|----------| 0 .45 |
| 14 | 24 | (39.828) |
|-------|--------- | |
| 16 | 30 | |
|-------|--------- | |
| 18 | 33 | |
|-------|----------|----------------|
| 20 | 36 | |
|-------|----------| 0.9 |
| 22 | 39 | (79.657) |
|-------|----------| |
| 24 | 42 | |
|-------|----------|----------------|

| 28 | 54 | 1 (88.507) |
------------------------------------
(4) Installation Procedure for ABS1452
(Ref. Fig. 008)
- Slide the cables unequipped with contacts through the shell and the thermoplastic insert. Use the correct side of
the backshell assembly.
(Ref. Fig. 007)
If necessary, slide the sealing sleeves ABS0992 onto the cables.
-
Install the contacts on the cable (strip the cable, crimp the contact).
-
Engage the contacts on connector.
-
Engage the sealing sleeves in the grommet of the connector.
-
Slide the insert on the sealing sleeves ABS0992 until it covers the grommet.
-
Install the metallic shell on the insert and TORQUE onto the connector to the correct values.
(a) Torque values table for ABS1452 backshell

------------------------------------------------
| BACKSHELL | TORQUE VALUES m.daN (lbf.in) |
| SIDE |----------------------------------|
| CODE | MIN | MAX |
|-----------|----------------|-----------------|
| 8 | 0.54(47.79) | 0.66(58.41) |
|-----------|----------------|-----------------|
| 18 | 1.44(127.45) | 1.76(155.77) |
|-----------|----------------|-----------------|
| 20 | 1.8(159.31) | 2.2(194.72) |
|-----------|----------------|-----------------|
| 24 | 2.34(207.11) | 2.86(253.13) |
| ----------|----------------|-----------------|
| 28 | 2.61(231.00) | 3.19(282.34) |
------------------------------------------------
3. Backshells for Rectangular Connectors
This type of backshell has, for example, the codes that follow:
- Assembly by clips:
E0312 backshell for MIL-C-24308 (E0237, E0362) connector type.
E0393 backshell for PREN3545 (E0390) connector type.
EN3545-007 (ex E0393) backshell for PREN3545 connector type.
ABS0364-C backshell for ABS0364-A and ABS0364-B connector.
ABS1019-005 backshell for ABS1019-003 and ABS1019-004 connector.
ABS1239D for ABS1239B connector.
- Assembly by screws:
ABS0388 backshell for MIL-C-24308 (E0237) connector type.
ABS0699 backshell for MIL-C-24308 (ABS0713, E0237 and E0302) connector type.
ABS0700 backshell for MIL- C-24308 (E0237) connector type.
ABS1069-003 backshell for MIL-C-24308 (ABS0713) and ABS1145 connectors.
E0365 backshell for MIL-C-24308 (E0237, E0362 and NSA938361) connector type.
E0448 backshell for MIL- C-24308 (E0237, E0362) connector type.
NSA938422 backshell for MIL-C-24308 (E0237, E0362, E0302, NSA938361) connector type.
A. Backshell Assembly by Clips (E0312, E0393, EN3545-007, ABS0364-C, ABS1019-005 and ABS1239D)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
Example : E0393 D 01
| | |
| | -------------------- Type code
| |

| ------------------------ Size code

|
----------------------------- Standard P/N
Example : ABS1239 D 01 A A
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | -------- Material code
| | | ------------ Form code
| | ---------------- Size code
| --------------------- Type code
---------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Maximum operating temperature is 125 deg.C (257.00 deg.F) and 175 deg.C (347.00 deg.F) for ABS1239D.
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
(Ref. Fig. 012)
- Install the backshell on the cables before you connect them to the connector
- Install the backshell on the connector in the correct position and direction.
For EN3545-007 only:
(Ref. Fig. 013)
For harness diameter < 5mm (0.20 in), you must install self-adhesive tape ASNA5107-B or bobbin NSA5539.
NOTE: Do not use the bobbin NSA5539 to increase the diameter with cables outside.
- For harness diameter < 2.5mm (0.098 in) you must install a bobbin NSA5539S for the protection of the
cables before you tighten the harness on the backshell with cable tie NSA935401-03.
- For harness 2.5mm (0.098 in) < diameter < 5mm (0.20 in) you must wind 2 layers self-adhesive tape
ASNA5107-B around the cable before you tighten the harness on the backshell with cable tie
NSA935401-03.
For E0393 and EN3545-007 only:
- In the vertical position, make sure that the N 1 contact is at the bottom left and the backshell on the right
(seen from the front connector).
- In the horizontal position, make sure that the N 1 contact is at the top left and the backshell on the
bottom (seen from the front connector).
For ABS0364-C and ABS1019-005 only:
(Ref. Fig. 011)
When this type of connector is assembled, you must be very careful when you install the backshell.
If installed correctly, the strain relief is easily pushed into the groove and you can feel it engage at the
end.
If not installed correctly, you can feel a light resistance along the full insertion length. Also, the cables are
pushed to the side, away from the connector axis.
-
Attach the harness to the backshell with a cable tie NSA935401.
B. Backshell Assembly by Screws (ABS0388, ABS0699, ABS0700, ABS1069-003, E0365, E0448 and NSA938422)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
Example : ABS0388 A 15 A
| | | |
| | | ---------------- Provisioning code:
| | | A = With cable tie
| | | No code = Without cable tie
| | |
| | -------------------- Size code (09 to 50)
| |
| ------------------------ Type code : A = 15 deg. angle
| B = Straight

|
----------------------------- Standard P/N
Example : ABS1069-003 A 15
| | |
| | ---- Size code
| |
| -------- Type code: A = Full backshell
| (shell + cover)
| B = Shell
| C = Cover
|
----------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Size code (for ABS1069-003 only)
--------------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | NUMBER OF CABLE EXITS ON REAR SIDE |
|-----------|------------------------------------|
| 09 | 2 |
|-----------|------------------------------------|
| 15 | 3 |
|-----------|------------------------------------|
| 25 | 4 |
|-----------|------------------------------------|
| 37 | 5 |
|-----------|------------------------------------|
| 50 | 6 |
--------------------------------------------------
(a) For ABS0388, ABS0699, ABS0700, E0365, E0448 and NSA938422

(Ref. Fig. 014)

(Ref. Fig. 015)
(Ref. Fig. 016)
- Install the backshell on the cables before you connect them to the connector (for ABS0388,
E0448 and NSA938422 only).
-
Install the backshell on the connector.
-
Attach the backshell onto the connector with the screws.
-
Put silicone tape NSA935403 or equivalent on the harness to give it protection.
- Attach the harness to the backshell:
- For ABS0388, ABS0699, ABS0700 and E0448 only:
With a cable tie NSA935401.
- For E0365, divide the cables into three parts and put each part in front of the backshell
E0365 between the small openings. Put cable ties NSA935401 through these small
openings and tie the three parts of the harness.
- For NSA938422 only:
With the clamp that you install.
(b) For ABS1069-003
1 Pre-assembly for KB24, KD24, WF24, VNC22, VNC24, MH and UD cables
(Ref. Fig. 017)
(Ref. Fig. 018)
(Ref. Fig. 019)
1- Slide a 30 mm (1.1811 in.) shrinkable sleeve (1) E0126-04B or ABS0916B05 on the cable
(2).
NOTE: For cables VNC22, VNC24 and WF24, you must first install one more
30 mm (1.1811 in.) shrinkable sleeve E0126-03B or ABS0916B03 to increase the
diameter of the cable.
- Slide the crimp sleeve (3) on the cable.

- Strip the cable to the length "A".
NOTE: The length "A" is related to the installation of the cable in the backshell. We
recommend that you install the cable straight onto the backshell (cable exit in front
of cable entry). It can be installed with many shifts to the right or left side. In these
cases, the stripping length must be longer (see stripping length table).
NOTE: With VNC22 and VNC24, a larger length of unstripped cable is necessary to extract
the contacts with the extraction tool without damage to the connector.
To keep the longer cable in the backshell, do not use the first output in a straight
line. Use an output with a gap of at least two outputs.
For aluminum cables VNC22 and VNC24, the minimum stripping length is 58 mm
(2.2834 in.) .
2- Cut the braid (4) to the length "B" which must be < 7 mm (0.2755 in.) AND < 14 mm
(0.5511 in.) for cables VNC22 and VNC24.
3- Expand the braid (4).
- If installed, remove the cable protection and cut the filler.
- Fully slide a 15 mm (0.5905 in.) shrinkable sleeve (5) E0718-02 onto the cables (6) against

the expanded braid (4) and shrink.

4- Slide the end piece (7) against the expanded braid (4). The braid must not go on the stop
of the end piece. Decrease the length of the braid if necessary.
5- Stretch the braid (4) along the end piece (7).
6- Fully slide the crimp sleeve (3) on the end piece (7) and crimp with crimping tool M22520-
5-01 and die M22520-5-07.
The end piece must not move in relation to the braid until the end of crimping.
If necessary, slide shrinkable sleeve E0126-03B or ABS0916B03 to the end of the cable
insulation and shrink. Start on the end piece side.
7- Fully slide the shrinkable sleeve (1) on the crimp sleeve (3) and shrink. Start on the end
piece side.
8- Strip the insulation of the conductors and crimp contacts on the conductors.
2 Pre-assembly for KB24 or KD24 with a bonding lead, gauges 24, 22 and 20
(Ref. Fig. 019)
(Ref. Fig. 020)
(Ref. Fig. 021)
1- Slide a 30 mm (1.1811 in.) shrinkable sleeve (1) E0126-04B or ABS0916B05 on the cable
(2) and bonding lead (3).
- Slide the crimp sleeve (4) on the cable (2) and bonding lead (3).
2- Cut the braid (5) to the length "B" which must be a maximum of 7 mm (0.2755 in.) .
3- Expand the braid (5).
- If installed, remove the cable protection and the filler.
the expanded braid (5) and shrink.
4- Slide the end piece (8) against the expanded braid (5). The braid must not go on the stop
of the end piece.
- Strip the bonding lead to the length "C" which must be the same as the width of the end
piece.
5- Stretch the braid (5) and the stripped end of the bonding lead (3) along the end piece (8).
6- Fully slide the crimp sleeve (4) to the stop of the end piece (8). The end piece must not
move in relation to the braid until the end of the crimping.
Make sure that the bonding lead is in the correct position.
The braid and the end of the conductor of the bonding lead must be flush with the stop of the
end piece. If necessary, decrease their length.
Crimp the crimp sleeve with the bonding lead and the braid with crimping tool M22520-5-01
and die M22520-5-07.
piece side.
8- Strip the insulation of the conductors and crimp contacts on the conductors.
3 Pre-assembly for two WF24 cables
(Ref. Fig. 019)
(Ref. Fig. 022)
(Ref. Fig. 023)
1- Slide a 30 mm (1.1811 in.) shrinkable sleeve (1) E0126-04B or ABS0916B05 on the two
cables (2).
- Slide the crimp sleeve (3) on the cables.

- Strip the cables to the length "A".
2- Expand the braids (4).

- If installed, remove the cable protection and the fillers from the two cables.
the expanded braids (4) and shrink.
3- Slide the end piece (7) against the expanded braids (4). The braid must not go on the
stop of the end piece. Cut it, if necessary.
4- Stretch the braids (4) along the end piece (7) and put them in position regularly around its
circumference.
5- Fully slide the crimp sleeve (3) on the end piece to the stop and crimp with crimping tool
M22520-5-01 and die M22520-5-07.
The end piece must not move in relation to the braid until the end of the crimping.
piece side.
7- Strip the insulation of the conductors of the two WF24 cables and crimp contacts on the
conductors.
4 Pre-assembly for WX26 or TK26 cables
(Ref. Fig. 019)
(Ref. Fig. 024)
NOTE: You can only use WX26 and TK26 cables if two or three cables are connected for
one ferrule ABS1069-004.
1- Slide a 30 mm (1.1811 in.) heat shrinkable sleeve E0718-04 and the crimp sleeve onto
the cables.
- Strip the cables to the length "A".
2- Comb out the strands of the braid with a FACOM brush 270 or equivalent. Be careful not
to cause damage to the conductor and break the shielded braids.
3- Put each braid at 180 degrees for 2 cables or 120 degrees for 3 cables.
- Cut the braid to between
7 mm (0.2755 in.) and 10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
- Slide a
15 mm (0.5905 in.) heat shrinkable sleeve E0718-02-15 onto the cables against the
expanded braid and shrink.
4- Slide the end piece on the cable and put the braid on it.
- Fully slide the crimp sleeve on the end piece and crimp with crimping tool M22520-5-01
and die M22520-5-07.
- If necessary, the length of the braid can be decreased to prevent its protrusion from the
crimp sleeve.
5- Slide the shrinkable sleeve E0718-04 on the crimp sleeve and shrink. Start on the end
piece side.
6- Strip the conductors and install contacts on the conductors.

5 Pre-assembly for two VNC24 cables

(Ref. Fig. 025)
1- Slide a 30 mm (1.1811 in.) shrinkable sleeve ABS0916B05 on the two cables.
-
Slide the crimp sleeve on the cables.
- Strip the cables to a length of
58 mm (2.2834 in.) .
-
Distress the strands, comb them and move them to one side of the cable.
- Cut the strands to a length of
7 mm (0.2755 in.) .
-
If installed, remove the cable protection and cut the filler.
- Fully slide a
15 mm (0.5905 in.) shrinkable sleeve E0718-02 onto the two cables against the
expanded braid and shrink.
2- Slide the end piece against the expanded braid.
- Align the braid and make sure it is parallel with the sleeve of the end piece. Put it in
position regularly around its circumference.
-
The braid must not protrude more than the stop of the end piece. Cut it, if necessary.
-
Fully slide the crimp sleeve on the end piece to the stop of the end piece and crimp.
- The end piece must not move in relation to the braid until the end of crimping.
3- Fully slide the shrinkable sleeve on the crimp sleeve and shrink. Start on the end
piece side.
4- Strip the conductors and install contacts on the conductors.
6 Pre-assembly for MLB22 or TK22 cables
(Ref. Fig. 026)
1- Slide a 30 mm (1.1811 in.) shrinkable sleeve (1) ABS0916B05 (or equivalent) on the
cable.
- Slide one more (2)
30 mm (1.1811 in.) shrinkable sleeve ABS0916B03 (or equivalent) in position to
increase the diameter of the cable.
-
Slide the crimp sleeve (3) on the cable.
-
Strip the cables to the length "A".
2- Flare the strands of the braid, comb them and move them to one side of the cable.
- Cut the strands to a length of
14 mm (0.5511 in.) .
- If installed, remove the cable protection and the filler.
3- Fully slide a 15 mm (0.5905 in.) shrinkable sleeve (4) E0718-02 onto the cable against
the expanded braid and shrink.
-
Fold the strands as shown in Figure.
-
Put the end piece (5) on the cable and slide it to the strands.

-
The strands must not protrude more than the stop of the end piece.
- Slide the crimp sleeve (3) on the end piece to the stop of the end piece and crimp with
crimping tool M22520-5-01 and die M22520-5-07.
4- Slide the shrinkable sleeve (2) to the end of the cable insulation and shrink. Start on the
end piece side.
- Slide the first shrinkable sleeve (1) on the end piece and shrink. Start on the end piece
side.
-
Strip the conductors and install contacts on the conductors.
7 For standard cables

Pre-assembly is not necessary, but you must install a shrinkable sleeve E0126 on each
cable. The length of the sleeve is related to the position and bending of the cable in the
backshell.
For coaxial WZ cable, you must install a 40 mm (1.5748 in.) sleeve E0126-04B. The cable
must go in the cavity of the backshell in front of the cavity for the contact so that the cable is
as straight as possible. You must attach the cable with cable tie NSA935401.
8 Final assembly
a- For standard cables
(Ref. Fig. 027)
- Install each cable as straight as possible on the backshell. When not specified by
drawings, define the cable exits. Define the length and the bend radii of the cables. If
necessary, bending is possible but you must strip the cables, in relation to the cable
exit used.
NOTE: You must not bend coaxial cables but install them straight into the backshell.
-
Strip the cable end and crimp contacts.
-
A sleeve must be on all cables that go through one cable exit.
-
Then put the wired contacts in a shrinkable sleeve ABS0916 and shrink it.
-
The sleeve must not be crimped by the geometry of the cable exit.
-
Insert the contacts in the connector and install the connector in the backshell.
- Before you attach the cables, make sure that the bend radii are correct inside the
backshell.
-
The cables must be tied with cable ties NSA935401.
- Make sure that the head of the cable tie is on the outer side and in the recess of the
backshell.
- When you install the end piece on the backshell, make sure that the pin of the end
piece is on the top. Also make sure that the spring is there and in the correct condition.
-
You must close the cable exits that you do not use with cap ABS1069-005.
-
Put the cover on the backshell and tighten the screws.
b- For pre-assembly cables
-
Coaxial cables must be installed straight into the backshell or as straight as possible.
-
Install each cable as straight as possible into the backshell. If the subsequent output is

already used (for example by a coaxial cable), use the other adjacent outputs.
-
You must use the minimum bend radii of cables to fill the backshell.
-
Cables must not touch the walls of the backshell.
-
Cables must not be compressed.
-
Insert the contacts in the connector and install the connector in the backshell.
-
Close the locking clip ABS0656 and tighten screws ABS0665.
- When you install the end piece on the backshell, make sure that the pin of the end
piece is on the top. Also make sure that the spring is there and in the correct condition.
- You must twist multiple twisted cables approximately one half to three quarter turns
before insertion into the backshell.
-
You must close the cable exits that you do not use with cap ABS1069-05.
-
Put the cover on the backshell and tighten the screws.
9 Final assembly of the connector branching

(Ref. Fig. 028)

Backshells for Convoluted Conduits with Circular Connectors
a- Assembly without protective sleeve

- Make sure that when you attach the harness and the label, this does not cause damage in the area where cables are
crimped or twisted.
b- Assembly with protective sleeve EN6049
-
The branched harness must be divided into many branches.
- The cables related to a cable exit must make a branch. You can put the cables from two adjacent cable exits together in
the same branch. You cannot do this with coaxial cables.
-
Each branch must have a protective sleeve EN6049 adapted to the diameter of the branch.
-
The branches must be tied with lacing tape NSA8420 or cable tie NSA935401.
- The first position where the branches are tied together is a minimum of
200 mm (7.8740 in.) from the backshell. This length can be decreased to 150 mm (5.9055 in.) with a backshell with a
size of between 09 and 25.
- You must attach the label to a branch that is as near as possible to the backshell. You must do this without a change to
the geometry of the branches.
- Make sure that when you attach the harness and the label, this does not cause damage in the area where cables are
crimped or twisted.
(4) Related items
- ABS1069-004: End piece and crimp sleeve for ABS1069-003 backshell.
- ABS1069-005: Cap for ABS1069-003 backshell.
4. Backshells for Convoluted Conduits with Circular Connectors
(Ref. Fig. 029)
(Ref. Fig. 030)
(Ref. Fig. 031)
This type of backshell has for example the codes that follow :
- E0074 and E0109 (ex NSA935820), straight for NAS1599 connector type (E0039, E0040, E0041, E0052, E0053 and E0054)
- E0115 (ex NSA935827), right angle for NAS1599 connector type (E0039, E0040, E0041, E0052, E0053 and E0054)
- NSA935829 and ABS0591
They are used with convoluted conduits with the codes that follow:
NSA935805 and NSA935806 (except for ABS0591 which is used with NSA935805-09 only).
For the installation of convoluted conduits with this type of backshell, refer to chapters 20-25-52 and 20-33-31.
E0074 - 06 - 08 - 3
E0109 - 06 - 08 - 3 - S
E0115 A 06 - 08 - 3 |
| | | | | |
| | | | | ---------- Material type (only for E0109)
| | | | -------------- Nut locking type (3 = holes for lockwire)
| | | ------------------ Backshell size code
| | ----------------------- Conduit size code
| -------------------------- Nut type code (only for E0115):
| A = With ring
| B = Without ring
------------------------------ Standard P/N
NSA935829 - 14 A
| | |
| | ---------------- Material code: No code = 2024
| | A = PTFE
| | B = Nylon
| | C = PTFE natural (white)
| ------------------- Backshell size code
---------------------------- Standard P/N
ABS0591 - 01
| |
| --------------------- Backshell size code
---------------------------- Standard P/N
(1) Material type (for E0109 only)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | MINIMUM OPERATING | MAXIMUM OPERATING |
|MATERIAL TYPE| TEMPERATURE | TEMPERATURE |

|-------------|------------------------------|------------------------------|
| No code | -45 deg.C (-49.00 deg.F) | 250 deg.C (482.00 deg.F) |
|-------------|------------------------------|------------------------------|
| S | -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) | 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Conduit size code for ABS0591, E0074, E0109 and E0115
------------------------------------------------
| CONDUIT | BACKSHELL SIZE CODE |
| SIZE |------------------------------------|
| CODE | ABS0591 | E0074 | E0109 | E0115 |
|---------|---------|--------|--------|--------|
| 04 | - | - | 08 | - |
|---------|---------|-----------------|--------|
| | | 08 | |
| 06 | - |-----------------| 08 |
| | | 10 | 10 | |
|---------|---------|-----------------|--------|
| | | 10 | |
| | |-----------------| |
| 09 | 01 | 12 | 10 |
| | |-----------------| |
| | | 14 | |
|---------|---------|-----------------|--------|
| 10 | - | 10 | 12 | - |
|---------|---------|--------|--------|--------|
| | - | - | - | 12 |
| |---------|--------------------------|
| | - | 14 |
| 12 |---------|--------------------------|
| | - | 16 | - | 16 |
| |---------|--------------------------|
| | - | 18 |
|---------|---------|--------------------------|
| | - | 14 | - | - |
| |---------|--------|--------|--------|
| | - | - | 16 | - |
| 14 |---------|--------|--------|--------|
| | - | 20 | - | - |
| |---------|--------|--------|--------|
| | - | 22 | - | - |
|---------|---------|--------|--------|--------|
| | - | 20 | - | - |
| 16 |---------|-----------------|--------|
| | - | 22 | - |
|---------|---------|-----------------|--------|
| | - | - | - | 16 |
| |---------|--------|--------|--------|
| 20 | - | - | 20 | - |
| |---------|-----------------|--------|
| | - | 22 | - |
|---------|---------|-----------------|--------|
| 24 | - | 18 | - | 18 |
|---------|---------|--------|--------|--------|
| 28 | - | - | - | 20 |
|---------|---------|--------|--------|--------|
| | - | - | - | 22 |
| 32 |---------|--------|--------|--------|
| | - | - | - | 24 |
------------------------------------------------
(3) Backshell size code for NSA935829
(a) Code A, B and no code
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
|BACKSHELL| LENGTH mm (in.) |
| SIZE |----------------------------------------------------------------|
| CODE | A | B | C | D | E |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|------------|------------|

| 6 | | 9 | 4.8 | 6.4 | 7.4 |

| | | (0.354) | (0.189) | (0.252) | (0.393) |
|---------| |------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 9 | | 11.5 | 7.2 | 8.7 | 10 |
| | | (0.453) | (0.283) | (0.342) | (0.393) |
|---------| |------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 10 | | 12.2 | 8 | 9.4 | 10.6 |
| | | (0.480) | (0.315) | (0.370) | (0.417) |
|---------| 11.2 |------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 12 | (0.441) | 14 | 9.5 | 11 | 12.5 |
| | | (0.551) | (0.374) | (0.433) | (0.492) |
|---------| |------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 14 | | 15.4 | 11.1 | 12.6 | 13.9 |
| | | (0.606) | (0.437) | (0.496) | (0.547) |
|---------| |------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 16 | | 17.3 | 12.7 | 14.3 | 15.8 |
| | | (0.681) | (0.499) | (0.563) | (0.622) |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 20 | 12.7 | 20.7 | 15.9 | 17.7 | 19.2 |
| | (0.5) | (0.815) | (0.625) | (0.696) | (0.756) |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 24 | 14.3 | 24.3 | 19 | 21 | 22.7 |
| | (0.563) | (0.956) | (0.748) | (0.826) | (0.893) |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 28 | | 27.7 | 22.2 | 24.5 | 26.2 |
| | | (1.090) | (0.874) | (0.964) | (1.031) |
|---------| |------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 32 | | 31.2 | 25.4 | 28 | 29.7 |
| | 20.5 | (1.228) | (0.999) | (0.102) | (1.169) |
|---------| (0.807) |------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 40 | | 37.7 | 31.8 | 34.3 | 36.2 |
| | | (1.484) | (1.252) | (1.350) | (1.425) |
|---------| |------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 48 | | 44.4 | 38.1 | 40.7 | 42.5 |
| | | (1.748) | (1.499) | (1.602) | (1.673) |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|------------|------------|
| 64 | 26.5 | 56.7 | 50.8 | 53.3 | 55.3 |
| | (1.043) | (2.232) | (1.999) | (2.098) | (2.177) |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) Code C
--------------------------------------------------
|BACKSHELL| LENGTH mm (in.) |
| SIZE |--------------------------------------|
| CODE | A | B | C |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|
| 04 | 11 | 6 | 2.53 |
| | (0.433) | (0.236) | (0.099) |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|
| 06 | | 8.3 | 3.7 |
| | 12 | (0.326) | (0.145) |
|---------| (0.472) |------------|------------|
| 09 | | 10.8 | 6.11 |
| | | (0.425) | (0.240) |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|
| 10 | | 11.4 | 6.69 |
| | 13 | (0.448) | (0.263) |
|---------| (0.512) |------------|------------|
| 12 | | 13.4 | 8.09 |
| | | (0.527) | (0.318) |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|
| 14 | | 14.9 | 9.65 |
| | | (0.586) | (0.379) |
|---------| |------------|------------|
| 16 | 14 | 16.5 | 10.94 |
| | (0.551) | (0.649) | (0.430) |
|---------| |------------|------------|
| 20 | | 20 | 14.05 |

| | | (0.787) | (0.553) |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|
| 24 | 15 | 23.9 | 17 |
| | (0.590) | (0.940) | (0.669) |
|---------|------------|------------|------------|
| 28 | | 29 | 19.59 |
| | | (1.141) | (0.771) |
|---------| |------------|------------|
| 32 | 17 | 31.2 | 22.37 |
| | (0.669) | (1.228) | (0.880) |
|---------| |------------|------------|
| 40 | | 38.8 | 28.72 |
| | | (1.527) | (1.130) |
--------------------------------------------------
For E0074 and E0115 refer to chapter 20-25-52 and 20-33-31.
For E0109 and NSA935829 refer to chapter 20-33-31.
5. Backshells for Screened and Overbraided Conduits with Circular Connectors or Pressure Seals
(Ref. Fig. 032)
(Ref. Fig. 033)
(Ref. Fig. 034)
(Ref. Fig. 035)
(Ref. Fig. 036)
(Ref. Fig. 037)
(Ref. Fig. 038)
(Ref. Fig. 039)
(Ref. Fig. 040)
(Ref. Fig. 041)
(Ref. Fig. 042)
(Ref. Fig. 043)
This type of backshell has for example the codes that follow:
- ABS0280, ABS0281 and ABS0581 backshells for NAS1599 connector type (EN3646-008 (ex E0052), EN3646-003 (ex E0053), EN3646-
004 (ex E0054)), EN2997-003 and EN2997-008.
-
ABS0936 and ABS0937 backshell for ABS0122 pressure seal.
- ABS0327 backshell for NAS1599 connector type for EN3646-008 (ex E0052), EN3646-003 (ex E0053) and EN3646-004 (ex E0054)
connectors.
- E0075 backshell for NAS1599 connector type (E0039, E0040, E0041, EN3646-008 (ex E0052), EN3646-003 (ex E0053) and EN3646-004
(ex E0054)).
-
E0550 backshell for MIL-C-38999 (E0545, E0610, E0611, E0612) connector type.
-
-
E0760 backshell for EN3645-001 and MIL-C-38999 connectors.
-
ABS0841 and ABS0842 backshell for EN3646-008 (ex E0052), EN3646-003 (ex E0053) and EN3646-004 (ex E0054) connectors.
-
ABS1138-003, ABS1138-004 and ABS1138-005 backshell for MIL-DTL-389999 connector type.
-
ABS1138-006 backshell for EN2997 and EN3646 connectors.
-
ABS1358, ABS1359 (ex ABS0893), ABS1360, ABS1361, ABS1362 and ABS1363 backshell for EN3646 and EN2997 connectors.
-
ABS1359 and ABS1360 for ABS1378 and ABS1571 pressure seals.
-
ABS1365 and ABS1366 backshell for ABS0122 and ABS1378 pressure seals.
(1) Backshells
ABS0327 V 08 - 06
ABS0581 V 08 - 06 A
ABS0841 A 08 - 06 P
ABS0842 A 14 - 14 P
| | | | |
| | | | ----------- Material type code
| | | -------------- Conduit size code

| | | ----------------- Lockwiring type code (for ABS0581)

| | ------------------- Backshell size code
| ----------------------- Conduit type code
----------------------------- Standard P/N
ABS0280 - 10 - 14
ABS0281 - 18 - 20
ABS0936 - 22 - 16
ABS0937 - 22 - 16
| | |
| | ---------------- Conduit size code
| --------------------- Backshell size code
----------------------------- Standard P/N
E0075 - 06 - 08 - 3
| | | |
| | | -------------- Lockwiring type code
| | ------------------ Backshell size code
| ----------------------- Conduit size code
------------------------------ Standard P/N
ABS1138 A 01A
ABS1138 B 01 A A 01A
ABS1138 C 01 A A 01A
ABS1138 D 08 A
| | | | | |
| | | | | -- Size and type code of the connecting part ABS1138-003
| | | | | (01A or 03A)
| | | | ------ Backshell material code : A = Aluminum alloy
| | | --------- Backshell type code
| | ------------ Backshell size code
| ---------------- Standard number abbreviation: A = 003 for ABS1138-003
| B = 004 for ABS1138-004
| C = 005 for ABS1138-005
| D = 006 for ABS1138-006
--------------------- Standard P/N

Backshells for Screened and Overbraided Conduits with Circular Connectors or
Pressure Seals
ABS1358 - 10 - 14 C
ABS1359 - 12 - 16 C
ABS1360 - 10 - 14 C
ABS1361 - 10 - 20 C
ABS1362 - 10 - 20 C
ABS1363 - 19 - 20 C
| | | |
| | | -------------- Harness protection code: B or C
| | ----------------- Conduit size code
| ---------------------- Backshell size code
----------------------------- Standard P/N
ABS1365 - 22 - 20 B 1
ABS1366 - 22 - 24 B 1
| | | | |
| | | | ----------- Pressure seal type code
| | | -------------- Harness protection code: B or C
| | ----------------- Conduit size code
| ---------------------- Backshell size code
----------------------------- Standard P/N
E0550 M 25 20 A
E0740 Z 25 20 H
| | | | |
| | | | --------------- Strain relief adaptor type code
| | | ------------------ Strain relief adaptor size code:
| | | -For E0550: 04,12,20
| | | -For E0740: 04 to 20
| | ---------------------- Shell size code :
| | -For E0550: 11,17,25
| | -For E0740: 11 to 25
| -------------------------- Material code
------------------------------- Standard P/N
E0760 W 13 08 C L
| | | | | |
| | | | | ------------ Protection code:
| | | | | -No code=without layer
| | | | | -L=PTFE
| | | | --------------- Backshell length
| | | ------------------ Strain relief adaptor size code 03 to 20
| | ---------------------- Shell diameter size code 09 to 25
| -------------------------- Class code
------------------------------- Standard P/N
(1) Temperature
For ABS0280, ABS0281, ABS0936 and ABS0937
Maximum operating temperature is +200 deg.C (+392.00 deg.F)
For ABS0581
For ABS0327
For ABS1138-004, ABS1138-005 and ABS1138-006
For ABS1358, ABS1359, ABS1360, ABS1361, ABS1362, ABS1363, ABS1365 and ABS1366
For E0760 :
-For class code F :
-For class code W :

Pressure Seals
-For class code K :
For E0740 :
For class code Z and N:
(2) Material Code
For E0550:
M=Aluminum
For E0740:
N=Aluminum
Z=Stainless Steel
For E0760:
F=Aluminum alloy
K=Stainless Steel
W=Aluminum alloy
(3) Conduit size code
(a) For ABS0280, ABS0281 and E0075
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CONDUIT SIZE CODE | BACKSHELL SIZE CODE |
| ------------------------------------|---------------------------------------|
| E0075 | ABS0280 | ABS0281 | E0075 | ABS0280 | ABS0281 |
|-----------|------------|------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 06 | - | - | 08, 10 | - | - |
|-----------|-------------------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| - | 08 | - | 08 | 08, 10, 15 |
|-----------|-------------------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 09 | - | - | 10, 12, 14 | - | - |
|-------------------------------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 10 | 12, 14, 16 | 10, 12, 14 | 08, 10, 11 |
| | | | 12 |
|-------------------------------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 12 | 12, 14, 18 | 12 | 12, 15, 16 |
|-------------------------------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 14 | 14 | 14 | 14, 16, 18,| 08, 10, 12 | 08, 14, 16, |
| | | | 20 | | 18 |
|-----------|------------|------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 16 | - | 16 | 18, 20 | - | 14, 15, 18 |
|-----------|------------|------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| - | 18 | 18 | - | 12 | 20, 21 |
|-----------|------------|------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 20 | 20 | 20 | 16, 20, 22 | 15 | 20 |
|-----------|------------|------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| - | 22 | 22 | - | 08, 22 | 22 |
|-------------------------------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 24 | 20, 22 | 08, 12, 15 | 22 |
| | | 22, 26 | |
|-------------------------------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 28 | 28 | - | 22, 24 | 38, 46 | - |
|-----------|------------|------------|------------|------------|-------------|
| 32 | - | - | 24 | - | - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
(b) For ABS0327 and ABS0581
-------------------------------------------------
| CONDUIT | BACKSHELL SIZE CODE | CONDUIT |
| SIZE |-------------------------| TYPE |
| CODE | ABS0327 | ABS0581 | CODE |
|---------|------------|------------|-----------|
| 06 | 08, 10 | 08, 10, 12 | |
|---------|-------------------------| |
| 09 | 08, 10, 12, 14 | |
|---------|-------------------------| |
| 10 | 12, 14 | |
|---------|-------------------------| |
| 12 | 14, 16, 18,| 12, 14, 16 | A, B, V |
| | 20, 22 | 18, 20, 22 | and W* |
|---------|------------|------------| |

Pressure Seals
| 14 | 18, 20 | 18, 20, 22 | |
|---------|------------------------ | |
| 16 | - | 14, 20, 22 | |
|---------|-------------------------| |
| 20 | 18, 20, 22, 24 | |
|---------|-------------------------| |
| 24 | - | 18, 22, 24 | |
| | | 28 | |
|---------|-------------------------| |
| 32 | - | 24 | |
-------------------------------------------------
* For ABS0327 only
(c) For ABS0841 and ABS0842
------------------------------------------------------------
| -----------------------|---------------------------------|
| ABS0841 | ABS0842 | ABS0841 | ABS0842 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
| 08 | 08 | 06 | 06 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
| 10 | 10 | 06, 09, 10 | 06, 09, 10 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
| 12 | 12 | 06, 09, 10, 12 | 06, 09, 10, 12 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
| 14 | 14 | 09, 12, 14, 16 | 06, 09, 12, 14,|
| | | | 16 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
| 16 | 16 | 12, 14, 16, 20 | 12, 14, 16, 20 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
| 18 | 18 | 14, 16, 20 | 14, 16, 20 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
| 20 20 16, 20, 24 | 16, 20, 24 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
| 22 | 22 | 20, 24 | 20, 24 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
| 24 | 24 | 20, 24 | 20, 24, 32 |
|-----------|------------|----------------|----------------|
(d) For ABS1358, ABS1359, ABS1360, ABS1361, ABS1362 and ABS1363
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|CONDUIT| BACKSHELL SIZE CODE |
| SIZE |---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CODE | ABS1358 | ABS1359 | ABS1360 | ABS1361 | ABS1362 | ABS1363 |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 06 | 08, 10 | o8 to 28 | 08 to 28 | - | 06 | 19 |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 09 | 08 to 18 | 08 to 28 | 08 to 28 | 06 | 06, 07, 10 | 19 |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 10 | - | - | - | 15, 19 | 07 | - |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 12 | 08 to 22 | 08 to 28 | 08 to 28 | 07, 13 | 07 | 19 |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 14 | 10 to 24 | 08 to 28 | 08 to 28 | 19 | 07, 10 | 19 |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 16 | 12, 16 | 12 to 28 | 12 to 28 | 10, 13, | 10, 19 | 19 |
| | 18 to 24 | | | 19 | | |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 20 | 18 to 24 | 12 to 28 | 12 to 28 | 10, 13, | 10, 13, 19 | 19 |
| | | | | 15, 19 | | |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 24 | 18 to 24 | 16 to 28 | 16 to 28 | 13, 15, | 13, 15, 19 | 19 |
| | | | | 19 | | |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 28 | 22, 24 | 24, 28 | 24, 28 | 13, 15, | 19 | - |
| | | | | 19 | | |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 32 | 22, 28 | 24, 28 | 24, 28 | 19 | - | - |
|-------|-----------|----------|----------|---------|------------|------------|
| 40 | - | 24, 28 | 24, 28 | - | - | - |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Pressure Seals
(e) For ABS1365 and ABS1366
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | BACKSHELL SIZE CODE |
| CONDUIT |------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SIZE | ABS1365 | ABS1365 | ABS1366 | ABS1366 |
| CODE | (for ABS01222 | (for ABS1378 | (for ABS1378) | (for ABS0122 |
| | PRESSURE SEAL) | AND ABS1571 AND ABS1571 | PRESSURE SEAL)|
| | | PRESSURE SEALS)| PRESSURE SEALS)| |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 06 | - | 24, 28 | 24, 28 | - |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 09 | - | 24, 28 | 24, 28 | 08 |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 10 | - | 36 | - | - |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 12 | - | 24, 28 | 24, 28 | - |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 14 | - | 24, 28, 36 | 24, 28, 36 | - |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 16 | - | 24 ,28, 36 | 24, 28, 36 | 12 |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 20 | 22 | 24, 28, 36 | 24, 28, 36 | 16 |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 24 | 16, 22 | 24, 28, 36 | 24, 28, 36 | 16, 22 |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 28 | 16 | 24, 28, 36 | 24, 28, 36 | 22, 28 |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 32 | 22, 28 | 28, 36 | 24, 28, 36 | 22, 28 |
|----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 40 | - | 28, 36 | 24, 28, 36 | - |
-----------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 48 | - | 28, 36 | - | - |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(f) For ABS0936 and ABS0937
------------------------------------------------------------
| |---------------------------------|
| | ABS0936 | ABS0937 |
|------------------------|----------------|----------------|
| 16 | 22, 26 | 22 |
|------------------------|----------------|----------------|
| 22 | 16, 22, 30 | 16, 22, 30 |
|------------------------|----------------|----------------|
| 28 | 30 | 30 |
------------------------------------------------------------
(4) Harness protection code
(a) For ABS1358, ABS1359, ABS1360, ABS1361, ABS1362, ABS1363, ABS1365 and ABS1366
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| Code | Harness protection |
|--------------|------------------------------------------------------|
| B | Overbraiding |
|--------------|------------------------------------------------------|
| C | Braided conduit used with ABS0887 convoluted conduit |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
(5) Table of strain relief adaptor/backshell compatibility
For E0550 and E0740
---------------------------------------------
| STRAIN RELIEF | BACKSHELL | ADAPTOR |
| SIZE CODE | SIZE CODE | TYPE CODE |
|---------------|------------|--------------|
| 04 | 11 | A |
|---------------|------------|--------------|
| 06* | 13 | - |
|---------------|------------|--------------|
| 10* | 15 | - |
|---------------|------------|--------------|
| 12 | 17 | M |
|---------------|------------|--------------|

Pressure Seals
| 12* | 19 | - |
|---------------|------------|--------------|
| 16* | 21 | - |
|---------------|------------|--------------|
| 16* | 23 | - |
|---------------|------------|--------------|
| 20 | 25 | A |
---------------------------------------------
*only for E0740
(6) Conduit Type Code
(a) For ABS0327 , ABS0581, ABS0841 and ABS0842
------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CONDUIT TYPE CODE | |
|---------------------------| CONDUIT P/N |
| FOR ADAPTOR | FOR CRIMP | |
| | SLEEVE | |
|-------------|-------------|------------------------------------------|
| A | A | E0432 and NSA935805 |
|-------------|-------------|------------------------------------------|
| B | B | NSA935805T |
|-------------|-------------|----------------------------------------- |
| | V * | ABS0330 * |
| V |-------------|------------------------------------------|
| | VW | ABS0330 *, ABS0510, ABS0511, ABS0631 ** |
|-------------|-------------|------------------------------------------|
| W * | W * | ABS0492 * |
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* For ABS0327 only
** For ABS0581, ABS0841 and ABS0842 only
(7) Adaptor material code
(a) For ABS0327, ABS0581, ABS0841 and ABS0842
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Code | MATERIAL | FINISH |
|--------|--------------------------------------------------------------------|
| P | ALUMINUM ALLOY | PASSIVATED CADMIUM PLATED |
|--------|---------------------------|----------------------------------------|
| A | ALUMINUM ALLOY | CHROMIC ACID ANODISED |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(8) Size and type code for ABS1138-003, ABS1138-004 and ABS1138-005
------------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | SIZE CODE | THREAD ON DIAMETER "A" | THREAD ON DIAMETER "B"|
| CODE | | (mm) | (mm) |
| | | | |
|------|--------------|------------------------|-----------------------|
| | 01 | M18 x 1-6H | 0.3750-18 |
| A |--------------|------------------------|-----------------------|
| | 03 | M18 x 1-6H | 0.3750-18 |
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(9) Size and type code for ABS1138-006
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | SIZE CODE | THREAD ON DIAMETER "C"| THREAD ON DIAMETER "D"|
| CODE | | (mm) | (mm) |
|------|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| | 08 | 0.5000-20 | 0.7500-20 |
| |--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| | 10 | 0.6250-24 | 0.8750-20 |
| |--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| | 12 | 0.7500-20 | 1.0000-20 |
| |--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| | 14 | 0.8750-20 | 1.1875-20 |
| |--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| | 16 | 1.0000-20 | 1.3125-18 |
| A |--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| | 18 | 1.0625-18 | 1.3125-18 |
| |--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| | 20 | 1.1875-18 | 1.3125-18 |
| |--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|

Pressure Seals
| | 22 | 1.3125-18 | 1.3125-18 |
| |--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| | 24 | 1.4375-18 | 1.3125-18 |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
(10) Size code for E0760

Pressure Seals
---------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | THREAD ON DIAMETER "A" (mm) |
|------------|------------------------------|
| 9 | M12 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 11 | M15 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 13 | M18 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 15 | M22 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 17 | M25 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 19 | M28 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 21 | M31 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 23 | M34 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 25 | M37 x 1-6H |
---------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------
|------------|------------------------------|
| 11 | M15 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 13 | M18 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 15 | M22 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 17 | M25 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 19 | M28 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 21 | M31 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 23 | M34 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 25 | M37 x 1-6H |
---------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------
|------------|------------------------------|
| 11 | M15 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 17 | M25 x 1-6H |
|------------|----------------------------- |
| 25 | M37 x 1-6H |
---------------------------------------------
(13) Tightening torque
(a) For ABS0280 and ABS0281
----------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE |-----------------------------------------------|
| | MIN. | MAX. |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 08 | 0.10 (8.851) | 0.35 (30.978) |

Pressure Seals
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 10 | 0.11 (9.736) | 0.40 (35.403) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 12 | 0.16 (14.161) | 0.50 (44.254) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 14 | 0.20 (17.702) | 0.60 (53.104) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 16 | 0.26 (23.012) | 0.65 (57.53) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 18 | 0.29 (25.667) | 0.70 (61.955) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 20 | 0.35 (30.978) | 0.75 (66.381) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 22 | 0.43 (38.058) | 0.80 (70.806) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 24 | 0.52 (46.024) | 0.90 (79.657) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 28 | 0.56 (49.564) | 1.00 (88.507) |
----------------------------------------------------------------
(b) For ABS1358, ABS1359, ABS1360, ABS1365 and ABS1366
----------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE |-----------------------------------------------|
| CODE | MIN | MAX |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 08 | 0.30(26.552) | 0.34(30.093) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 10 | 0.32(28.322) | 0.38(33.633) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 12 | 0.42(37.173) | 0.48(42.484) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 14 | 0.50(44.254) | 0.56(49.564) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 16 | 0.55(48.68) | 0.61(53.99) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 18 | 0.60(53.104) | 0.68(60.185) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 20 | 0.65(57.53) | 0.75(66.381) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 22 | 0.70(61.955) | 0.80(70.806) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 24 | 0.80(70.806) | 0.90(79.657) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 28 | 0.90(79.657) | 1.00(88.507) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 36 | 0.95(84.082) | 1.05(92.933) |
----------------------------------------------------------------
(c) For ABS1361, ABS1362 and ABS1363
----------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE |-----------------------------------------------|
| | MIN. | MAX. |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 06 | 0.32 (28.322) | 0.35 (30.978) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 07 | 0.32 (28.322) | 0.35 (30.978) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 10 | 0.46 (40.713) | 0.50 (44.254) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 13 | 0.46 (40.713) | 0.50 (44.254) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|
| 15 | 0.46 (40.713) | 0.50 (44.254) |
|--------------|-----------------------|-----------------------|

Pressure Seals
| 19 | 0.46 (40.713) | 0.50 (44.254) |
----------------------------------------------------------------
(1) For ABS0280, ABS0281, ABS0327, ABS0581, ABS0841, ABS0842, ABS0936, ABS0937 and E0075:
Tighten the backshell ABS0280-16 with open-end wrench FACOM 20-27.
Refer to chapter: Metallic conduit - 20-33-32 and para.: Overbraiding Conduit.
(Ref. Fig. 044)
(2) For ABS1138-004, ABS1138-005 and ABS1138-006
(Ref. Fig. 045)
(Ref. Fig. 046)
(Ref. Fig. 047)
(a) Example of installation with ABS1138-006 and screened conduit
1 Install all the parts (1), (2), (3) and (4) of the backshell on the cables before you connect them to the connector.
Slide a heat-shrinkable sleeve (5) (E0126 or ABS0916) on the cables.
2 Strip the insulation (6) 60 mm (2.3622 in.) from the end of the cables (7).
3 Comb, divide and twist the braid (8), make several braids.
Cut the cables (7) 35 mm (1.3779 in.) from the end of the insulation (6).
Strip each cable and crimp the contacts (9).
4 Insert the contacts into the rear of the connector (10).
5 Screw the backshell (1) at the rear of the connector (10) and tighten.
Insert each twisted braid (8) in the cutouts (11) of the backshell (1).
NOTE: We recommend that you put only one braid in a same cutout. If this is not possible, put the twisted braids so
that they give equal cross-sections in the cutouts.
6 Turn the nut (2) and tighten. Make sure that the braids in the backshell are not under mechanical stress. To do this,
lightly push the braids down with a blunt tool (an adjustment screwdriver for example).
7 Slide the shrinkable sleeve 10 mm (0.3937 in.) from the end of the cable and shrink it.
8 Cut the twisted braids (8) and bend them back over the nut. The braid may not protrude from the nut (2) more than 2
mm (0.0787 in.) . Distribute the braid around the nut (2).
9 Screw the adaptor (3) on the backshell (1) and secure with adhesive (Material No. 08-002) or applicable lockwire.
10 Screw the backshell ABS0638 (4) on the adaptor (3) and secure with adhesive (Material No. 08-002) or applicable
lockwire.
Attach the harness on the backshell ABS0638 (4) with NSA935401 cable tie or equivalent.
NOTE: To avoid the opening of the connector during a rework operation, you can remove the ABS0916 sleeve and
replace it after rework by self-welding tape ABS5334.
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT THE BACKSHELL ABS1138-006 DOES NOT TURN AT THE SAME TIME AS THE
ADAPTOR. THIS WILL PREVENT SHEARING OF CABLE SHIELDS AND DAMAGE TO THE CONNECTOR
TEETH.
(b) Removal procedure with ABS1138-006 and screened conduit

(Ref. Fig. 048)
(Ref. Fig. 049)
1 To release the harness from the backshell ABS0638 (4), cut and remove the cable tie NSA935401 or equivalent. To
disengage the backshell ABS0638 (4) from the adaptor (3), hold the adaptor (3) stable with the first jaw pliers
(GLENAIR TG69 or equivalent) while you turn the backshell ABS0638 (4) counterclockwise with the second jaw
pliers (GLENAIR TG69 or equivalent).
2 To disengage the adaptor (3) from the backshell ABS1138-006 (1), hold the backshell ABS1138-006 (1) stable with
the first jaw pliers (GLENAIR TG69 or equivalent) while you turn the adaptor (3) counterclockwise with the second
jaw pliers (GLENAIR TG69 or equivalent).
3 Unclamp the twisted braids (8) from the nut (2).
Manually unscrew the nut (2) from the backshell ABS1138-006.
4 Install the connector (10) on the tightening support.

Pressure Seals
Unscrew the backshell (1) with jaw pliers (GLENAIR TG69 or equivalent) that you turn counterclockwise.
5 Clean all signs of grease, oil or contamination from the threaded areas of the connector (10) and the backshells (1)
and (4) with cleaning agent and a lint-free cloth (refer to chapter 20-55-50).
Make sure that the bonding connection teeth on the threaded area of the connector (10) are still intact.
If any teeth on the connector (10) are broken, you must replace the connector with a new connector.
(3) For ABS1358, ABS1359, ABS1360, ABS1361, ABS1362, ABS1363, ABS1365 and ABS1366
(Ref. Fig. 039)
(Ref. Fig. 040)
(Ref. Fig. 041)
(Ref. Fig. 050)
(a) With screened convoluted conduit without halar sheath:
(Ref. Fig. 039)
1 Select the backshell size in relation to the size of the screened convoluted conduit.
Slide the braid back over the convoluted conduit.
2 Fully screw the convoluted conduit into the backshell and slide the braid over the end of the backshell up to the stop
of the backshell.
3 Install the metallic clamping strip E0805-02 2 mm (0.0787 in.) minimum from the end of the braid.
4 Wrap the metallic clamping area with self-welding tape ABS5334 (5 layers minimum).
(b) With screened convoluted conduit with halar sheath:
(Ref. Fig. 040)
(Ref. Fig. 041)
1 Select the backshell size in relation to the size of the screened convoluted conduit.
Slide the braid and halar back over the convoluted conduit.
2 Fully screw the convoluted conduit into the backshell.
Slide the braid over the end of the backshell up to the stop of the backshell
3 Install the metallic clamping strip E0805-02 2 mm (0.0787 in.) minimum from the end of the braid.
4 Slide the E-CTFE BRAID (HALAR) over the clamping strip E0805-02 and tie with lacing tape NSA8420-07.
5 Wrap the end of the conduit with self-welding tape ABS5334 (5 layers minimum).
(c) With split conduit to give protection to optical-fiber cables (for ABS1358 and ABS1359 only)
(Ref. Fig. 051)
NOTE: Optical-fiber cables must not be attached to the backshell.
1 Select the backshell size in relation to the size of the split conduit.
2 Slide the split conduit over the end of the backshell.
3 Tighten the split conduit on the backshell with cable tie NSA935401 or metallic clamping strip E0805.
NOTE: Use a strap wrench to untighten a backshell with notched hex nut to prevent damage to the nut.
(4) For E0760

Other Conduit Fittings
(Ref. Fig. 052)

This type of backshell has 4 opposite holes (for tightening) on its periphery.
- Install the two
2.5 mm (0.0984 in.) diameter pins on the wrench FACOM 116-50 or equivalent.
- Start the tightening of the backshell by hand.
You must use a sliding-jaw pin wrench FACOM 116-50 for tightening. Engage the pins of the tool in 2 opposite holes of the backshell and tighten.
- Use a sliding handle (e.g. FACOM R120 or equivalent) and individual connector locking tool (e.g SOURIAU 8500-30 or DMC CM837RB10) or
tightening support (e.g SOURIAU 8500-30 or OCETA OCE23-270) to hold the connector.
D. Related Items
- ABS1364 Nut for ABS1361, ABS1362 and ABS1363 backshells.
(Ref. Fig. 050)
6. Other Conduit Fittings
A. Definition
Other conduit fittings are divided into 3 sub-families:
- Adaptors
(Ref. Fig. 053)
(Ref. Fig. 054)
This type of conduit fitting is used to connect miscellaneous items together (backshell/adaptor/end piece etc.).
- Conduit junction items
(Ref. Fig. 055)
(Ref. Fig. 056)
(Ref. Fig. 057)
This type of conduit fitting is used to join the same or different types of conduits.
- End pieces
(Ref. Fig. 055)
(Ref. Fig. 058)
This type of conduit fitting is used at the end of a conduit.
B. Conduit Fittings Installed on Aircraft
- ABS0885 conduit junction item
- ABS0886 conduit junction item
- ABS0519 end piece - bulkhead with ABS0513 cable support
ABS0521 adaptor
ABS0523 end piece - bulkhead
ABS0524 adaptor
ABS0580 adaptor
ABS0582 end piece
ABS0583 adaptor
ABS0584 (ex ABS0334) end piece
ABS0585 conduit junction item
ABS0693 end piece
ABS0694 adaptor
ABS0695 adaptor
ABS0932 end piece
ABS0933 end piece
ABS0934 end piece
ABS1023 end piece
C. ABS0885
This type of backshell is a split conduit junction item used to join ABS0887 PEEK conduits or overbraided harnesses together.
(Ref. Fig. 056)
ABS0885 T G 2 K 1 B 1 A
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | -- Branch adaptor size code
| | | | | | | ---- Branch adaptor type code (1 or 2)
| | | | | | ------ Exit adaptor size code
| | | | | -------- Exit adaptor type code (1 or 2)
| | | | ---------- Entry adaptor size code
| | | ------------ Entry adaptor type code (1 or 2)
| | -------------- Conduit junction item size code (D, G or K)
| ---------------- Conduit junction item type code (T or Y)
--------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Adaptor and conduit junction item size codes
For adaptor type 1:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
|CONDUIT|ADAPTOR|JUNCTION| ADAPTOR | ADAPTOR | ADAPTOR |
| SIZE | SIZE | SIZE | DIAMETER "A" | DIAMETER "B"| LENGTH "C" |

| CODE | CODE | CODE | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | mm (in.) |

|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------|-------------|
| 06 | A | D,G,K | 4.3 (0.169) | 10.7 (0.421) | |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------| |
| 09 | B | D,G,K | 6.7 (0.264) | 13.6 (0.535) | |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------| |
| 10 | C | D,G,K | 7.3 (0.287) | 14 (0.551) | |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------| |
| 12 | D | D,G,K | 8.9 (0.350) | 16 (0.630) | |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------| |
| 14 | E | G,K | 10.5 (0.413) | 17.6 (0.693) | 25.6 (1.00) |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------| |
| 16 | F | G,K | 12.0 (0.472) | 19.3 (0.760) | |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------| |
| 20 | G | G,K | 15.3 (0.602) | 22.6 (0.890) | |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------| |
| 24 | H | K | 18.7 (0.736) | 26.7 (1.051) | |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------| |
| 28 | J | K | 21.5 (0.846) | 30.9 (1.216) | |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------| |
| 32 | K | K | 24.7 (0.972) | 34.5 (1.358) | |
|-------|-------|--------|----------------|---------------|-------------|
| 40 | L | K | 31.1 (1.224) | 42 (1.654) | 41 (1.614) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
For adaptor type 2:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|ADAPTOR|JUNCTION| OVERBRAIDED CONDUIT DIAMETER | ADAPTOR | ADAPTOR |
| SIZE | SIZE |--------------------------------| DIAMETER "D"| LENGTH "E" |
| CODE | CODE | MAXI. mm (in.) | MINI. mm (in.)| mm (in.) | mm (in.) |
|-------|--------|----------------|---------------|-------------|-------------|
| D | D | 11.7 (0.460) | |13.1 (0.515) | 31.8 (1.252)|
|-------|--------|----------------| |-------------|-------------|
| G | G | 17.4 (0.685) | 5 (0.196) |19.5 (0.767) | 33.8 (1.330)|
|-------|--------|----------------| |-------------|-------------|
| K | K | 28.1 (1.106) | |31.5 (1.240) | 39.8 (1.556)|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(a) With overbraided conduits
(Ref. Fig. 059)
(Ref. Fig. 060)
1 Install the adaptor type 2 over the internal protection of the overbraided harness.
2 Position the adaptors on the half conduit junction body, making sure their adaptation is correct.
Install the second half conduit junction body carefully.
3 Temporarily attach the conduit junction body, crossing two turns of self-welding tape ABS5334.
Attach the adaptor, overlapping with self-welding tape ABS5334 (start the overlap, internal protection side).
4 Slide the overbraid over the ends of the conduit junction body.
Remove the crossed self-welding tape ABS5334 from the conduit junction body.
Clamp the overbraid on the conduit junction item with metallic clamping strip E0805-02.
5 Do 5 layers of self-welding tape ABS5334 above the cutting edge of the metallic clamping strip.
6 If installed, slide the E-CTFE (halar) on the conduit junction end, over the clamped overbraiding.
Attach with lacing tape NSA8420-07.
7 Wrap with self-welding tape ABS5334 over the end harness connection area.
(b) With screened convoluted conduits
(Ref. Fig. 061)
(Ref. Fig. 062)
1 Install the convoluted conduit fully in the adaptor ABS0885 type 1.
2 Slide the metallic braid over the adaptor and install it on the half conduit junction body, making sure that it is correctly adapted.
Install the second half conduit junction body carefully.
3 Attach the ends of the conduit junction body with the metallic clamping strip E0805-02.
4 Do 5 layers of self-welding tape ABS5334 above the cutting edge of the metallic clamping strips.
5 If installed, slide the E-CTFE (halar) over the adaptor and attach with lacing tape NSA8420-07.
6 Wrap with self-welding tape ABS5334 over the end harness connection area.
D. ABS0886
This type of backshell is a conduit junction item used to join ABS0887 PEEK conduits or overbraided harnesses together.
(Ref. Fig. 057)
ABS0886 A 06 - 06

| | | |
| | | -------- Exit size code
| | ------------- Entry size code
| ---------------- Type code (A or B)
--------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Conduit junction item entry or exit size codes
1 For conduit junction item type "A":
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | DIAMETER "A" | DIAMETER "B" | DIAMETER "C" | LENGTH "D" |
| CODE | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | mm (in.) |
|--------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 06 | 10.7 (0.421) | 4.3 (0.169) | | 7.8 (0.307) |
|--------|----------------|----------------| |---------------|
| 09 | 13.6 (0.535) | 6.7 (0.263) | | 10.2 (0.401) |
|--------|----------------|----------------| |---------------|
| 10 | 14 (0.551) | 7.3 (0.287) | | 11 (0.433) |
|--------|----------------|----------------| |---------------|
| 12 | 16 (0.630) | 8.8 (0.350) | | 12.6 (0.496) |
|--------|----------------|----------------| |---------------|
| 14 | 17.6 (0.693) | 10.5 (0.413) | | 14.2 (0.559) |
|--------|----------------|----------------| 53 (2.086) |---------------|
| 16 | 19.3 (0.760) | 12 (0.472) | | 15.8 (0.622) |
|--------|----------------|----------------| |---------------|
| 20 | 22.6 (0.890) | 15.3 (0.602) | | 19 (0.748) |
|--------|----------------|----------------| |---------------|
| 24 | 26.7 (1.051) | 18.7 (0.736) | | 22.1 (0.870) |
|--------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 28 | 30.9 (1.216) | 21.5 (0.846) | 54 (2.126) | 25.3 (0.996) |
|--------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 32 | 34.5 (1.358) | 24.7 (0.972) | 56 (2.204) | 28.5 (1.122) |
|--------|----------------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 40 | 42 (1.653) | 31.1 (1.224) | 58 (2.283) | 34.8 (1.370) |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 For conduit junction item type "B":
-------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | DIAMETER "E" | DIAMETER "F" | LENGTH "G" |
| CODE | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | mm (in.) |
|--------|----------------|----------------|----------------|
| 06 | 10.7 (0.421) | | |
|--------|----------------| | |
| 09 | 13.6 (0.535) | | |
|--------|----------------| | |
| 10 | 14 (0.551) | | |
|--------|----------------| | |
| 12 | 16 (0.630) | | |
|--------|----------------| 19 (0.748) | |
| 14 | 17.6 (0.693) | | |
|--------|----------------| | |
| 16 | 19.3 (0.760) | | 52 (2.047) |
|--------|----------------| | |
| 20 | 22.6 (0.890) | | |
|--------|----------------| | |
| 24 | 26.7 (1.051) | | |
|--------|----------------|----------------| |
| 28 | 30.9 (1.216) | 20 (0.787) | |
|--------|----------------|----------------| |
| 32 | 34.5 (1.358) | 22 (0.866) | |
|--------|----------------|----------------| |
| 40 | 42 (1.653) | 24 (0.945) | |
-------------------------------------------------------------
(a) With overbraided conduits
(Ref. Fig. 063)
(Ref. Fig. 064)
1 Slide the internal protection in the conduit junction item.


Install a metallic clamping strip E0805-02 to attach the metallic braid on the conduit junction item . Make sure that the metallic clamping
strip is installed 7 mm (0.2755 in.) from the braid stop.
3 Do 5 layers of self-welding tape ABS5334 above the cutting edge of the metallic clamping strip E0805-02.
4 If installed, slide the E-CTFE (halar) on the conduit junction end, over the clamped overbraiding.
5 Attach with lacing tape NSA8420-07.
6 Wrap with self-welding tape ABS5334 above the clamping area.
The procedure that follows gives protection for the junction between conduit junction item ABS0886 and a connector backshell with
shielded cables that have with solder sleeve bonding:
7 Slide the cables through the backshell.
8 Install the split conduit EN6049-008 between the conduit junction item ABS0886-B and the backshell.
Wrap the split conduit around the cables doing an overlap of 90 deg angle for each layer (double overlap).
Install a metallic clamping strip E0805-2 to attach the split conduit on the conduit junction item and on the backshell.
Before tightening of metallic clamping strip, make sure that the stripped end of the bonding leads have been installed between the end of
backshell and the end of the split conduit.
(b) With screened convoluted conduits
(Ref. Fig. 065)
(Ref. Fig. 066)
1 Fully screw the convoluted conduit into the conduit junction item.
2 Slide the metallic braid over the conduit junction item until it touches the braid stop.
Install a metallic clamping strip E0805-02 to attach the metallic braid on the conduit junction item. Make sure that the metallic clamping
strip is installed 7 mm (0.2755 in.) from the braid stop.
3 Do 5 layers of self-welding tape ABS5334 above the cutting edge of the metallic clamping strip E0805-02.
4 If installed, slide the E-CTFE (halar) over the conduit junction item.
5 Attach with lacing tape NSA8420-07.
NOTE: The procedure that follows is used to give protection to the junction between conduit junction item ABS0886 and a connector
backshell with shielded cables equipped with solder sleeve bonding.
(Ref. Fig. 067)

7 Slide the cables through the backshell.
8 Install the split conduit EN6049-008 between the conduit junction item ABS0886-B and the backshell.
Wind the split conduit around the cables with an overlap of 90 deg. for each layer (double overlap).
Install a metallic clamping strip E0805-2 to attach the split conduit on the conduit junction item and on the backshell.
Make sure before you tighten the metallic clamping strips that the stripped ends of the bonding leads are installed between the end of the
backshell and the end of the split conduit.
9 Wind self-welding tape ABS5334 on the clamping areas.
(4) Related items
- ABS0586-21 blanking cap for ABS0580 and ABS0583 adaptors size 21.
- ABS0935 nut for ABS0932 end piece.
(Ref. Fig. 068)
E. ABS0519, ABS0521, ABS0523, ABS0524, ABS0580, ABS0582, ABS0583, ABS0584 (exABS0334), ABS0585, ABS0693 ABS0694, ABS0695,
ABS0932, ABS0933, ABS0934, ABS1023
(Ref. Fig. 053)
(Ref. Fig. 054)
(Ref. Fig. 055)
(Ref. Fig. 058)
(Ref. Fig. 069)
-
For end pieces:
ABS0519 V 06 - 06
ABS0582 V 08 - 06 P
ABS0584 V 12 - 06 P
ABS0693 V 14 - 14 P
ABS0932 - 19 - 16
ABS0933 - 19 - 16
ABS0934 - 19 - 16
ABS1023 V 12 - 06
| | | | |

| | | | ----------- End piece material code

| | ------------------- End piece size code
----------------------------- Standard P/N
ABS0523 - 09 A 1
| | | |
| | | ----------- End piece type code: 1 = Round nut
| | | 2 = Hexagonal nut
| | -------------- Material code (A or P)
| ------------------ End piece size code
-------------------------- Standard P/N
- For adaptors:
ABS0521 - 01 P
ABS0524 - 29 A
| | | |
| | | ----------- Adaptor type code: 1 = Round nut
| | | 2 = Hexagonal nut
| | -------------- Material code (A or P)
| ------------------ Adaptor size code
-------------------------- Standard P/N
ABS0580 A 09 A
| | | |
| | | ----------- Material code (A or P)
| | -------------- Adaptor size code
| ------------------ Adaptor type code: A = "T" type
| B = "X" type
------------------------ Standard P/N
ABS0583 - 09 A A
| | | |
| | | ---------- Material code (A or P)
| | -------------- Adaptor type code: A or B
| ------------------ Adaptor size code
-------------------------- Standard P/N
ABS0694 - 10 - 10 P
ABS0695 - 09 - 10 P
| | | |
| | | ---------- Material code
| | -------------- Adaptor size code dia. B
| ------------------ Adaptor size code dia. A
-------------------------- Standard P/N
- For conduit junction item:
ABS0585 V 12 - 12 P
| | | | |
| | | | ----------- Material code
| | ------------------- Conduit junction item size code
----------------------------- Standard P/N
- For crimp sleeve (optional marking):
VW - 06
| |
| -------------------------- Conduit size code
------------------------------- Conduit type code
(a) Temperature
For ABS0932, ABS0933 and ABS0934:
(b) Material code
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Code | MATERIAL | FINISH |
|--------|--------------------------------------------------------------------|
| P | ALUMINUM ALLOY | PASSIVATED CADMIUM PLATED |
|--------|---------------------------|----------------------------------------|
| A | ALUMINUM ALLOY | CHROMIC ACID ANODISED |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Conduit and end piece or conduit junction item size codes
1 For end pieces ABS0519, ABS0582, ABS0584, ABS0693, ABS1023 and for conduit junction item ABS0585:

---------------------------------------------------------------------
|CONDUIT| END PIECE OR CONDUIT JUNCTION ITEM SIZE CODE | CONDUIT |
| SIZE |-------------------------------------------------| TYPE |
| CODE |ABS0519|ABS0582 |ABS0584|ABS0693 |ABS0585|ABS1023| CODE |
|-------|-------|--------|-------|--------|-------|-------|---------|
| 06 | 06 |08 to 17| 12 |08 to 10| 06 | - | |
|-------|-------|--------|-------|--------|-------|-------| |
| 09 | 07 |08 to 93| 15 |08 to 10| 09 | 12, 14| |
|-------|-------|--------|-------|--------|-------|-------| |
| 10 | 08 |09 to 17| - |10 to 12| 10 | - | |
|------------------------|-------|--------|-------|-------| |
| 12 | 09 |12 to 21| 18 |10 to 17| 12 | - | |
|-------|-------|--------|-------|--------|-------|-------| |
| 14 | 10 |12 to 29| 20 |12 to 19| - | - | A, B |
|-------|-------|--------|-------|--------|-------|-------| or V |
| 16 | 11 |12 to 19| - |12 to 21| 16 | - | |
|-------|-------|--------|-------|--------|-------|-------| |
| 20 | 13 |17 to 29| 26 |16 to 23| 20 | - | |
|-------|-------|--------|-------|--------|-------|-------| |
| 24 | 15 |17 to 29| 30 |17 to 23| 24 | - | |
|-------|-------|--------|-------|--------|-------|-------| |
| 32 | 19 |21 to 29| - | - | - | - | |
|-------|-------|--------|-------|--------|-------|-------| |
| 40 | 23 | - | - | - | - | - | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
2 For end pieces ABS0932, ABS0933 and ABS0934:
-----------------------------------------------------------
|CONDUIT| END PIECE SIZE CODE |
| SIZE |-------------------------------------------------|
| CODE | ABS0932 | ABS0933 | ABS0934 |
|-------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 08 | 06 | - | - |
|-------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 10 | 07 | 07 | - |
|-------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 11 | 19 | - | - |
|------------------------|----------------|---------------|
| 16 | 10 or 19 | 10 or 19 | 19 |
|-------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 21 | 13 | 13 | - |
|-------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 22 | 19 | 19 | 19 |
|-------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 24 | 13 | - | - |
|-------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 25 | 15 | - | - |
|-------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 28 | 15 | - | - |
|-------|----------------|----------------|---------------|
| 30 | 19 | 19 | 19 |
-----------------------------------------------------------
(d) Size code
1 For adaptors ABS0521, ABS0694 and ABS0695:
----------------------------------------------------------------
| THREAD ON | THREAD ON | ADAPTOR SIZE CODE |
| DIAMETER "A" | DIAMETER "B"|-----------------------------|
| (mm) | (mm) | ABS0521 | ABS0694 | ABS0695 |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 1.81256-16 | 1.0625-18 | 01 | - | - |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 1.81256-16 | 1.3125-18 | 02 | - | - |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 1.0625-18 | 1.0625-18 | 03 | - | - |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 1.3125-18 | 1.1875-18 | 04 | - | - |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 1.4375-18 | 1.3125-18 | 06 | - | - |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 0.7500-20 | 0.7500-20 | 05 | - | - |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 0.5625-24 | 0.5625-24 | 07 | - | - |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|

| 0.6250-24 | 0.6250-24 | - | 10 | - |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 0.5625-24 | - | - | - | 09 |
|----------------|---------------|---------|---------|---------|
| - | 0.6250-24 | - | - | 10 |
----------------------------------------------------------------
2 For end piece ABS0523 and adaptors ABS0580 and ABS0583:
------------------------------------------------
| THREAD ON | SIZE CODE |
| DIAMETER "A" |-----------------------------|
| (mm) | ABS0523 | ABS0580 | ABS0583 |
|----------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 0.5625-24 | 09 | 09 | 09 |
|----------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 0.7500-20 | 12 | 12 | 12 |
|----------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 1.0625-18 | 17 | 17 | 17 |
|----------------|---------|---------|---------|
| 1.3125-18 | - | 21 | 21 |
------------------------------------------------
(e) Conduit type code
1 For end pieces ABS0519, ABS0582, ABS0584, ABS0693, ABS1023 and for conduit junction item ABS0585:
-----------------------------------------------------------------
| CONDUIT TYPE CODE | |
|------------------------------------------| CONDUIT P/N |
| FOR END PIECE OR | FOR CRIMP SLEEVE | |
| CONDUIT JUNCTION ITEM | | |
|-----------------------|------------------|--------------------|
| A | A | E0432 |
| | | NSA935805 |
|-----------------------|------------------|--------------------|
| B | B | NSA935805T |
|-----------------------|------------------|--------------------|
| | | ABS0510 |
| V | VW | ABS0511 |
| | | ABS0631 |
-----------------------------------------------------------------
(f) Tightening Torque
- For ABS0932, ABS0933 and ABS0934
--------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | TORQUE VALUES m.daN (lbf.in) |
|-----------------------------|------------------------------|
| ABS0932 | ABS0933 | ABS0934 | MIN | MAX |
|---------|---------|---------|---------------|--------------|
| 06 | - | - | 0.30(2.655) | 0.36(3.186) |
|---------|---------|---------|---------------|--------------|
| 07 | 07 | - | 0.38(3.363) | 0.46(4.071) |
|---------|---------|---------|---------------|--------------|
| 10 | 10 | - | 0.60(5.310) | 0.72(6.373) |
|---------|---------|---------|---------------|--------------|
| 13 | 13 | - | 0.90(7.966) | 1.08(9.559) |
|---------|---------|---------|---------------|--------------|
| 15 | - | - | 1.10(9.736) | 1.32(11.683) |
|---------|---------|---------|---------------|--------------|
| 19 | 19 | 19 | 1.50(13.276) | 1.80(15.931) |
--------------------------------------------------------------

Sealing of the Backshell
For detailed procedure refer to chapter: Metallic conduit - 20-33-32.

(Ref. Fig. 068)
(4) Related item (only for ABS0519 end piece)
- ABS0513 cable support
(Ref. Fig. 069)
(Ref. Fig. 070)
For shielded conduits fastened directly on the structure by a screw nut device, only the locking nut is secured by lockwire.
ABS0513 - 06 C
| | | |
| | | ------------------- Material code : C = stainless steel
| | | No code = aluminum
| | |
| | ------------------------ Size code
| --------------------------- Type code
-------------------------------- Standard P/N
(b) P/N characteristics
1 Material code, temperature and type code
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | | OPERATING TEMPERATURE | | |
| MAT. | MATERIAL | FINISH |-----------------------| TYPE CODE | DESIGNATION |
| CODE | | | MINIMUM | MAXIMUM | | |
| | | | deg.C | deg.C | | |
| | | | (deg.F) | (deg.F) | | |
|------|-----------|--------|-----------|-----------|-----------|-------------|
| C | STAINLESS | PTFE | -55 | +250 | | |
| | STEEL | COATED | (-67) | (+482) | | |
| |-----------|--------|-----------|-----------| - | SUPPORT |
| - | ALUMINUM | PTFE | -55 | +100 | | |
| | | COATED | (-67) | (+212) | | |
|------|-----------|--------|-----------|-----------|-----------|-------------|
| B | ALUMINUM |ANODISED| -65 | +200 | A | SUPPORT |
| | | | (-85) | (+392) | | |
|------|-----------|--------|-----------|-----------|-----------|-------------|
| S | SILICON | - | -65 | +200 | G | GROMMET |
| | RUBBER | | (-85) | (+392) | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 Size code
(Ref. Fig. 069)
(Ref. Fig. 070)
a Type -
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | 06 | 09 | 10 | 12 | 14 | 16 | 20 | 24 | 32 | 40 |
|--------------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|
| DIAMETER mm | 9.90|11.50| 13 |14.60|16.20|17.80| 21 |24.10|30.50|36.80|
| "A" (in.)|0.390|0.453|0.512|0.575|0.638|0.701|0.827|0.949|1.201|1.449|
|--------------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|
| LENGTH mm | 4.50| 6.50| 7.50| 8.50| 9.50| 10 |13.50|15.00|20.50|25.50|
| "B" (in.)|0.177|0.256|0.295|0.334|0.374|0.394|0.531|0.610|0.807|1.003|
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
b Type A
----------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | 06 | 09 | 10 | 12 | 14 |
|--------------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|
| DIAMETER mm | 9.90|11.50| 13 |14.60|16.20|
| "A" (in.)|0.390|0.453|0.512|0.575|0.638|
|--------------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|
| LENGTH mm | 4.50| 6.50| 7.50| 8.50| 9.00|
| "B" (in.)|0.177|0.256|0.295|0.334|0.374|
----------------------------------------------
c Type G
----------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | 06 | 09 | 10 | 12 | 14 |
|--------------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|
| DIAMETER mm | 4.20| 6.50| 7.20| 8.80|10.30|
| "A" (in.)|0.165|0.256|0.283|0.346|0.405|
|--------------|-----|-----|-----|-----|-----|
| LENGTH mm | 2.60| 4.90| 5.60| 7.20| 8.70|
| "B" (in.)|0.102|0.193|0.220|0.283|0.342|
----------------------------------------------
(c) Installation procedure
1 ABS0513 type
- Install the nut, tighten and safety.
NOTE: Before installation of the cable tie, you must give protection to the harness. To do this, add:

- A sleeve E0484 on the backshell,

- A sleeve NSA937210MB (slotted), ABS5330, ABS0294 or ASNA1507-B wound two times around the harness.
2 ABS0513 type A
- Install the grommet ABS0513 type G and the backshell on the cables before you connect them to the connector.
- Install the nut, tighten and safety.
NOTE: As an alternative to ABS0513 you can use a clamp NSA5516BD or ABS1339 to attach the harness.
7. Sealing of the Backshell

(Ref. Fig. 071)
- Sealing sleeves can be installed between the rear of the backshell and the bundle (with a protection by conduit or not).
The difference between the two diameters (backshell and harness) can be so large that one size of heat shrinkable sleeve cannot to cover the two diameters. Thus
it is necessary to use 2 different size sleeves.
-
The heat shrinkable sleeve adapted to the bigger diameter is shrunk before the sleeve adapted to the smaller diameter.
- Where protection against fluid ingress is necessary, seal the join with adhesive sealing compound.
Where the second (smaller) sleeve is below the larger sleeve, seal the join with adhesive sealing compound Mat.N 09-531 (e.g RAYCHEM S1125)
When more than one sleeve are used to make the change from the connector to the harness, seal each join with adhesive sealing compound.
8. Acceptance/Rejection Criteria
(Ref. Fig. 072)
(Ref. Fig. 073)
(Ref. Fig. 074)
After installation, you must make sure that the installation of the cables on the backshell is correct.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Structure of the Topic
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Installation - E0080, NSA938003 and NSA938150
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Description - EN3660-017, EN3660-018, EN3660-019, EN3660-020 and EN3660-021.
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - ABS0638 Backshell Orientation and In tallation of Protective Pad
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Description - E0618
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Special Installation Procedure E0199, E0455 and EN3660

Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Layout ABS1452
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Installation Procedure ABS 1452
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - E0393 and EN3545-007
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Description and Installation - E0393 and EN3545-007
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Installation - ABS0364-C and ABS1019-005
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Installation - E0312
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Attachment of Cables on Backshell EN3545-007
Figure 014.1 / Graphic SH 014.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Installation - ABS0388
Figure 015.1 / Graphic SH 015.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Installation - ABS0699 and ABS0700
Figure 016.1 / Graphic SH 016.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Installation - NSA938422
Figure 017.1 / Graphic SH 017.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Installation Procedure - ABS1069-003
Figure 019.1 / Graphic SH 019.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Wire Stripping and Crimping Tool - ABS1069-003

Figure 024.1 / Graphic SH 024.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Installation Procedure ABS1069-003
Figure 029.1 / Graphic SH 029.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - E0074 and E0115
Figure 030.1 / Graphic SH 030.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - E0109
Figure 031.1 / Graphic SH 031.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - ABS0591 and NSA935829
Figure 032.1 / Graphic SH 032.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - ABS0327, ABS0581 and E0075
Figure 033.1 / Graphic SH 033.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - ABS0280, ABS0281, ABS0936, ABS0937 and E0760
Figure 034.1 / Graphic SH 034.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N characteristics and installation - ABS1138
Figure 035.1 / Graphic SH 035.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - ABS0841 and ABS0842
Figure 036.1 / Graphic SH 036.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - ABS1358, ABS1359 and ABS1360
Figure 037.1 / Graphic SH 037.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - ABS1361, ABS1362 and ABS1363
Figure 038.1 / Graphic SH 038.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and Description - ABS1365 and ABS1366
Figure 039.1 / Graphic SH 039.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - Installation Procedure - ABS1358, ABS1359, ABS1360, ABS1361, ABS1362, ABS1363,
ABS1365 and ABS1366

ABS1365 and ABS1366
ABS1365 and ABS1366
Figure 042.1 / Graphic SH 042.1 Backshell, End Piece and Conduit Fitting - P/N Characteristics and description - E0550 and E0740

20-40 - STANDARD ELECTRICAL ITEMS AND CONNECTING PARTS (Airbus)
STANDARD ELECTRICAL ITEMS AND CONNECTING PARTS (Airbus)
STANDARD ELECTRICAL ITEMS AND CONNECTING PARTS - DESCRIPTION AND

OPERATION
1. General
The following chapters give the main description and operation for all the standard electrical items and
connecting parts used on the aircraft.
2. Structure of the Chapters that Follow:
A. Sleeves, Caps and Ferrules (Ref. 20-42-XX)
B. Splices and Pressure Seals (Ref. 20-43-XX)
C. Connectors, Terminal Blocks and Grounding Items (Ref. 20-44-XX)
D. Miscellaneous Electrical Items (Ref. 20-45-XX)
E. Circuit Breakers, Relays and Relay Bases (Ref. 20-46-XX)
F. Contacts and Terminals (Ref. 20-48-XX)

20-42 - SLEEVES, CAPS AND FERRULES (Airbus)
SLEEVES, CAPS AND FERRULES (Airbus)
SLEEVES, CAPS AND FERRULES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter is applicable to sleeves, caps and ferrules used on aircraft:
- Insulation (20 42 1X)
- Shield Termination (20 42 2X)
- Identification Items (20 42 3X)
INSULATION (Airbus)
INSULATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description, installation and identification of the sleeves and end caps used on aircraft:
A. Sealing Sleeves (20-42-11)
The sealing sleeves used for insulation have the code that follows:
ABS0992
B. Shrink Sleeves (20-42-12)
The sleeves used for insulation have the codes that follow:
ABS0061
E0126 (ex NSA937211)
E0484
E0718 (ex NSA397494)
NSA937210
NSA937493
NSA937502
C. End Caps (20-42-13)
The end caps used for insulation have the codes that follow:
ABS0065
NSA936601
NSA936603
NSA936604
SLEEVES - SEALING (Airbus)
SLEEVES - SEALING - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Sealing sleeves are used on the cables at the rear of the connectors to give protection to the contacts from moisture and
miscellaneous liquids.
Sealing sleeves installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- ABS0992 sealing sleeve
- ABS2089 sealing sleeve
2. Sealing Sleeve
A. ABS0992
(Ref. Fig. 001)
ABS0992 B 01

| | |
| | ---------------- Size code
| -------------------- Type code
------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Type code
------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | SPECIFICATION |
|-------------|--------------------------------------------|
| A | Long sleeve (Old design, before June 2003) |
|-------------|--------------------------------------------|
| B | Long sleeve (New design, after June 2003) |
|-------------|--------------------------------------------|
| C | Only for copper cable on equipment side |
| | and for size 4 cavities |
------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
-65 deg.C (-85.00 deg.F) .
200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) . (Continuous)
260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F) . (Peak)
(3) Allocation table
(Ref. Fig. 002)
This table gives the size of the sleeve to use for the cables and the contacts.
ABS0992 is always used with other products, in relation to the size code.
This sleeve must be added after installation of E0718 sealing sleeve for ABS1340, ABS1343, ABS1426 and ABS1427
connector.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
Before crimping of the contact, make sure that the sealing sleeve is engaged on the cable, with the rigid side pointed at
the connector.
After the contact is installed on the connector, manually push the sealing sleeve into the cavity at the rear of the
connector until it touches the bottom.
B. ABS2089
(Ref. Fig. 004)
ABS2089 A 01
| | |
| | ---------------- Size code
| -------------------- Type code
------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Type and size code
------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | USE WITH CONNECTOR |
|-------------|--------------------------------------------|
| A | E0545F11-81 |
| | EN3645-002 size 8 cavities |
| | EN4165 modules size 8 cavities |
|-------------|--------------------------------------------|
| B | For ABS1683 with EN4165 size 8 cavities |
| | and for ABS1685 |
------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | SIZE | CONTACT| USE WITH |
| CODE | CODE | CODE |-----------------------------------------|

| | | | CONTACT | CABLE |
|-------|-------|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| | | | EN3155-074M08 | ABS1503KD24 |
| A | 01 | QUADRAX| EN3155-075F08 | ABS0972KB24 |
|-------|-------|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| | | | EN3155-065M0810 | ABS0949AD10 |
| B | 02 | POWER | EN3155-066F0810 | EN2267(DR10) |
| | | | ABS2230F0810 | |
| |-------|--------|-------------------|---------------------|
| | | | EN3155-065M0808 | ABS0949AD08 |
| | 03 | POWER | EN3155-066F0808 | EN2267(DR08) |
| | | | ABS2230F0808 | |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
END
Material
---------------------------------------------
| COMPONENTS | MATERIAL |
|-----------------|-------------------------|
| Resilient Part | Silicon elastomer |
|-----------------|-------------------------|
| Rigid Part | Thermoplastic |
---------------------------------------------
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
-65 deg.C (-85.00 deg.F) .
200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) .
(3) Allocation Table
(Ref. Fig. 003)
This sleeve must be added after installation of E0718 sealing sleeve for EN3645 connector.
Before crimping of the contact, make sure that the sealing sleeve is engaged on the cable, with the rigid side pointed at
the connector.
After the contact is installed on the connector, manually push the sealing sleeve into the cavity at the rear of the
connector until it touches the bottom.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Sealing Sleeves - P/N Characteristics ABS0992
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Sealing Sleeves - Allocation Table for Contacts and Cables ABS0992
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Sealing Sleeves - Allocation Table for Cables after Installation of Sealing Sleeves E0718 - ABS0992
and ABS2089
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Sealing Sleeves - P/N Characteristics ABS2089
SHRINK SLEEVES (Airbus)
SHRINK SLEEVES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description and the primary characteristics of heat shrink sleeves.
The primary function of these sleeves is to:
-

Give protection to the terminal. (Ref. 20-48-1X)

-
Give protection to the connector cavities at the rear of the contact. (Ref. 20-48-2X)
-
Repair the cables in some cases. (Ref. 20-53-2X)
- Give protection to the harnesses and electrical bundles.
The description and procedures for the installation of heat shrink sleeves used to give protection to cable bundles are given.
(Ref. 20-33-34)
Shrink sleeves installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- Low temperature shrink sleeves:
ABS0061
ABS0836
ABS0916
ABS1247
E0126 (ex NSA937211)
E0718 (ex NSA937494)
NSA937502
- High temperature shrink sleeves:
E0484
DAN132
NSA937210
NSA937493
2. Low-Temperature Shrink Sleeves
A. ABS0061
(Ref. Fig. 001)
ABS0061 B 06
| | |
| | ------------ Size code
| --------------- Color code: B = Black
-------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Shrinkage temperature is 150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) to 175 deg.C (347.00 deg.F)
(b) Length
Supply length is 75 mm.
(c) Size code and shrinking tools
(Ref. Fig. 001)
B. ABS0836
(Ref. Fig. 002)
ABS0836 B 01
| | |
| | ------------ Size code
-------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Shrinkage temperature is 125 deg.C (257.00 deg.F) to 350 deg.C (662.00 deg.F) .
(b) Length
Supply length is 1200 mm (47.2441 in.) .


(Ref. Fig. 002)
------------------------------------------------------------
| | INNER DIA mm (in.) | SHRINKING TOOL |
| SIZE |-------------------------|-------------------------|
| CODE | BEFORE | AFTER | NORM | P/N |
| | SHRINKING | SHRINKING | | |
|------|------------|------------|---------|---------------|
| 01 | 3 (0.118) | 1 (0.039) | | |
|------|------------|------------| | |
| 02 | 6 (0.236) | 2 (0.079) | | |
|------|------------|------------| | |
| 03 | 9 (0.354) | 3 (0.118) | | |
|------|------------|------------| | 695-01-A4-433 |
| 04 | 12 (0.472) | 4 (0.157) | | |
|------|------------|------------| RAYCHEM | OR |
| 05 | 19 (0.748) | 6 (0.236) | | |
|------|------------|------------| |CV1981-42V-960W|
| 06 | 24 (0.945) | 8 (0.315) | | |
|------|------------|------------| | |
| 07 | 40 (1.575) | 13 (0.512) | | |
|------|------------|------------| | |
| 08* | 80 (3.149) | 30 (1.181) | | |
-----------------------------------------------------------
* Code no longer procurable, you can use stocks as available.
C. ABS0916
You must use this type of sleeve:
- In vibration areas.
- On sealed harnesses.

Low-Temperature Shrink Sleeves
- For local mechanical protection. (But not for temperatures >

135 deg.C (275.00 deg.F)
- On active item terminations. (E.g.: Resistors diodes...)
- On terminal lugs. (E.g.: NSA936507TG, E0422TR)
ABS0916 B 06
| | | |
| | | --------- Length code (Without code = standard delivery)
| | ------------ Size code
-------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Shrinkage temperature is 175 deg.C (347.00 deg.F) .
(b) Length code
--------------------------------------
| LENGTH CODE | LENGTH mm (in.) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| No code | Coil |
| |(Standard delivery)|
|----------------|-------------------|
| 22 | 22 (0.866) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 25 | 25 (0.984) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 35 | 35 (1.377) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 40 | 40 (1.574) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 45 | 45 (1.771) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 50 | 50 (1.968) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 55 | 55 (2.165) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 60 | 60 (2.362) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 65 | 65 (2.559) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 70 | 70 (2.755) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 75 | 75 (2.952) |
|----------------|-------------------|
| 80 | 80 (3.149) |
--------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------
|SIZE|------------------------------|------------------------------|
|CODE| BEFORE | AFTER | NORM | P/N | HEAD |
| | SHRINKING | SHRINKING | | | |
|----|--------------|---------------|------|---------------|-------|
| 03 | 3.2 (0.126) | 1.6 ( 0.063) | | | PR13 |
|----|--------------|---------------| | |-------|
| 04 | 4.8 (0.189) | 2.4 (0.094) | | | |
|----|--------------|---------------| | | |
| 05 | 6.4 (0.252) | 3.2 (0.126) | | | PR12 |
|----|--------------|---------------| R | | |
| 06 | 9.5 (0.374) | 4.8 (0.189) | A | 695-01-A4-433 | |

|----|--------------|---------------| Y | |-------|
| 07 | 12.7 (0.500) | 6.4 (0.252) | C | OR | PR24 |
|----|--------------|---------------| H | |-------|
| 08 | 19 (0.748) | 9.5 (0.374) | E |CV1981-42V-960W| |
|----|--------------|---------------| M | | |
| 09 | 25.4 (1) | 12.7 (0.500) | | | PR24A |
|----|--------------|---------------| | | |
| 10 | 38 (1.596) | 19 (0.748) | | | |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
D. ABS1247
ABS1247 A 85
| | |
| | ---- Size code
| ---------- Type code: A = Black
------------------ Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
-40 deg.C (-40.00 deg.F) .
120 deg.C (248.00 deg.F) .
(3) Size code
--------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE | INTERNAL DIA | INTERNAL DIA | LENGTH |
| CODE | BEFORE SHRINKING | AFTER SHRINKING | m (ft) |
| | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | |
|------|------------------|-----------------|----------|
| 85 | 85 (3.346) | 25 (0.984) | |
|------|------------------|-----------------| |
| 95 | 95 (3.740) | 29 (1.141) | |
|------|------------------|-----------------| |
| 115 | 115 (4.527) | 34 (1.338) | |
|------|------------------|-----------------| |
| 140 | 140 (5.511) | 42 (1.653) | 1 |
|------|------------------|-----------------| (0.003) |
| 160 | 160 (6.299) | 50 (1.968) | |
|------|------------------|-----------------| |
| 180 | 180 (7.086) | 60 (2.362) | |
|------|------------------|-----------------| |
| 195 | 195 (7.677) | 102 (4.015) | |
--------------------------------------------------------
(4) Tool
-----------------------------
| SHRINKING TOOL |
|---------------------------|
| NORM | P/N |
|---------|-----------------|
| RAYCHEM | CV1981-42V-960W |
-----------------------------
E. E0126 (Ex NSA937211)
E0126 - 04 F
NSA937211 - 004 F
| | |
| | |
| | ------- Color code and type
| ----------- Size code
-------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature


(b) Length
Supply length is 1200 mm (47.2441 in.) or coils depending on the sleeve diameter.
E0126-XXX, NSA937211-XXXX
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE |------------------------------|------------------------------|
| CODE | BEFORE | AFTER | NORM | P/N | HEAD |
|----------|---------------|--------------|------|---------------|-------|
| 01X/001X | 2.4 (0.094) | 1.2 (0.047) | | | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| | | |
| 02X/002X | 3.2 (0.126) | 1.6 (0.063) | | | PR13 |
|----------|---------------|--------------| | | |
| 03X/003X | 4.8 (0.189) | 2.4 (0.094) | | | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| | |-------|
| 04X/004X | 6.4 (0.252) | 3.2 (0.126) | | | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| | | |
| 05X/005X | 9.5 (0.374) | 4.8 (0.189) | | | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| R | | PR12 |
| 06X/006X | 12.7 (0.500) | 6.4 (0.252) | A | 695-01-A4-433 | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| Y | | |
| 07X/007X | 19 (0.746) | 9.5 (0.374) | C | OR | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| H | |-------|
| 08X/008X | 25.4 (1) | 12.7 (0.500) | E |CV1981-42V-960W| PR24 |
|----------|---------------|--------------| M | |-------|
| 09X/009X | 38 (1.496) | 19 (0.746) | | | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| | | PR24A |
| 10X/010X | 51 (2.008) | 25.4 (1) | | | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| | |-------|
| 11X/011X | 76 (2.992) | 38 (1.456) | | | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| | | no |
| 12X/012X | 102 (4.016) | 51 (2.008) | | | head |
|----------|---------------|--------------| | |-------|
| 13X/013X | 1.6 (0.063) | 0.8 (0.031) | | | |
|----------|---------------|--------------| | | PR13 |
| 14X | 1.2 (0.047) | 0.6 (0.024) | | | |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
(d) Color code and type
E0126-XXX
--------------------------------------------
| COLOR CODE | COLOR | TYPE |
|------------|-------------|---------------|
| B | BLACK | |
|------------|-------------| |
| D | RED | |
|------------|-------------| |
| E | ORANGE | |
|------------|-------------| |
| F | YELLOW | SELF |
|------------|-------------| EXTINGUISHING |
| G | GREEN | |
|------------|-------------| |
| H | BLUE | |
|------------|-------------| |
| J | VIOLET | |
|------------|-------------| |
| L | WHITE | |
|------------|-------------|---------------|
| A | TRANSPARENT | NOT SELF |
| | | EXTINGUISHING |
--------------------------------------------

NSA937211-XXXX
----------------------------
| COLOR CODE | COLOR |
|------------|-------------|
| A | TRANSPARENT |
|------------|-------------|
| B | BLACK |
|------------|-------------|
| D | RED |
|------------|-------------|
| F | YELLOW |
|------------|-------------|
| H | BLUE |
|------------|-------------|
| J | VIOLET |
|------------|-------------|
| L | WHITE |
----------------------------
F. E0718 (ex NSA937494)
E0718 - 01 - 30
NSA937494 - 01 - 30
| | |
| | |
| | ------- Length code
| ----------- Size code
-------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Length
---------------------------------
| LENGTH CODE | LENGTH mm (in.) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| no code | 1200 (47.243) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 10 | 10 (0.393) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 15 | 15 (0.590) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 20 | 20 (0.787) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 22 | 22 (0.866) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 25 | 25 (0.858) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 30 | 30 (1.181) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 35 | 35 (1.377) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 40 | 40 (1.574) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 45 | 45 (1.771) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 50 | 50 (1.968) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 55 | 55 (2.165) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 60 | 60 (2.362) |
|-------------|-----------------|
| 70 | 70 (2.755) |

|-------------|-----------------|
| 75 | 75 (2.952) |
---------------------------------
E0718-XX-XX, NSA937494-XX-XX
---------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE |-----------------------------|-----------------------------|
|-------|--------------|--------------|------|---------------|------|
| 00-XX | 1.2 (0.047) | 0.6 (0.024) | | | |
|-------|--------------|--------------| | | |
| 20-XX | 1.6 (0.063) | 0.8 (0.031) | | | |
|-------|--------------|--------------| | | |
| 01-XX | 2.4 (0.094) | 1.2 (0.047) | | | PR13 |
|-------|--------------|--------------| | | |
| 02-XX | 3.2 (0.126) | 1.6 (0.063) | | | |
|-------|--------------|--------------| | | |
| 03-XX | 4.8 (0.189) | 2.4 (0.094) | R | | |
|-------|--------------|--------------| A | 695-01-A4-433 |------|
| 04-XX | 6.4 (0.252) | 3.2 (0.126) | Y | | |
|-------|--------------|--------------| C | OR | |
| 05-XX | 9.5 (0.374) | 4.8 (0.189) | H | | |
|-------|--------------|--------------| E |CV1981-42V-960W| PR12 |
| 06-XX | 12.7 (0.500) | 6.4 (0.252) | M | | |
|-------|--------------|--------------| | | |
| 07-XX | 19 (0.745) | 9.5 (0.374) | | | |
|-------|--------------|--------------| | |------|
| 08-XX | 25.4 (1) | 12.7 (0.500) | | | PR24 |
|-------|--------------|--------------| | |------|
| 09-XX | 23 (0.905) | 6.4 (0.252) | | | PR19 |
|-------|--------------|--------------| | |------|
| 10-XX | 50.8 (2) | 25.4 (1) | | | PR24A|
---------------------------------------------------------------------
(d) Allocation table
- This table is related to the installation of E0718 sleeves for correct sealing of contacts in EN3646 connectors grommets.
E0718-XX-XX
------------------------------------------------------
| | CABLE GAUGE |
| CONTACT |-----------------------------------------|
| SIZE | 26 | 24 | 22 | 20 | 18 | 16 |
|------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| SIZE | | 00-30| 20-30| 20-30| 01-30| 01-30|
| CONTACT | - | 20-20| 01-20| 01-20| | |
| 12 | | 01-15| | | | |
|------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| SIZE | | 20-30| 20-30| | | |
| CONTACT | - | | | - | - | - |
| 16 | | | | | | |
|------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| SIZE | | | | | | |
| CONTACT | 00-30| - | - | - | - | - |
| 20 | | | | | | |
------------------------------------------------------
(3) Procedure
(a) You can use these sleeves as shield stops. (Refer to 20-42-22)
(b) You can use these sleeves to increase the diameter of the cables for correct sealing of the contacts in the grommet of the
connectors.
G. NSA937502
(Ref. Fig. 003)

NSA937502 - 02
| |
| ----------- Size code
------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature

High-Temperature Shrink Sleeves

(b) Length
Supply length is 1200 mm (47.2441 in.) .
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | INNER DIA mm (in.) | | SHRINKING TOOL |
| SIZE |-----------------------------| |-----------------------------|
| CODE | BEFORE | AFTER | COLOR* | NORM | P/N | HEAD |
| | SHRINKING | SHRINKING | | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------|--------|------|---------------|------|
| 02 | 3.2 (0.126) | 0.6 (0.024) | BROWN | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------|--------| | | PR13 |
| 03 | 4.8 (0.189) | 1.5 (0.059) | GREY | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------|--------| R | |------|
| 04 | 6.4 (0.252) | 2 (0.079) | WHITE | A | 695-01-A4-433 | |
|------|--------------|--------------|--------| Y | | |
| 05 | 9.5 (0.374) | 3.4 (0.134) | RED | C | OR | |
|------|--------------|--------------|--------| H | | PR12 |
| 06 | 12.7 (0.500) | 5 (0.197) | BLUE | E |CV1981-42V-960W| |
|------|--------------|--------------|--------| M | | |
| 07 | 19 (0.748) | 8 (0.315) | YELLOW | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------|--------| | |------|
| 08 | 25.4 (1) | 10.2 (0.402) | BLACK | | | PR24 |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
* THE COLOR IS NOT RELATED TO THE SIZE CODE
----------------------------------
| CABLE | CABLE GAUGE |
| TYPE |------------------------|
| | 26 | 24 | 22 | 20 | 18 |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|
| RF | 02 | - | - | - | - |
----------------------------------
(3) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 004)
You can use this sleeve as end insulation on one or more cables that are not connected. In this case, install the applicable sleeve. Shrink
and crush (when the sleeve is still hot) the free end of the sleeve with flat-nose pliers.
3. High-Temperature Shrink Sleeves
A. E0484
E0484 K MJ 05 40
| | | | |
| | | | ---- Length (mm)
| | | ------- Size code
| | ---------- Type code
| ------------- Color code: K = Grey
---------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Length
The length of sleeve necessary for each type is given in millimeters. For length code 00, the sleeves are supplied in reels of 15 m
(49.21 ft.) to 50 m (164.04 ft.) depending on the diameter.
E0484KMJXXXX
---------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE |-----------------------------|------------------------------|


|------|--------------|--------------|------|---------------|-------|
| 01XX | 2.9 (0.114) | 1.7 (0.067) | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------| | | PR13 |
| 02XX | 4.0 (0.157) | 2.9 (0.114) | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------| | |-------|
| 03XX | 7.8 (0.307) | 4.6 (0.181) | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------| | | |
| 04XX | 10 (0.394) | 6.5 (0.255) | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------| R | | PR12 |
| 05XX | 15 (0.590) | 9.6 (0.377) | A | 695-01-A4-433 | |
|------|--------------|--------------| Y | | |
| 06XX | 21 (0.827) | 13 (0.511) | C | OR | |
|------|--------------|--------------| H | |-------|
| 07XX | 29 (1.141) | 20 (0.787) | E |CV1981-42V-960W| PR24 |
|------|--------------|--------------| M | |-------|
| 08XX | 41 (1.614) | 27 (1.062) | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------| | | |
| 09XX | 51 (2.007) | 33 (1.299) | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------| | | PR24A |
| 10XX*| 66 (2.598) | 40 (1.575) | | | |
|------|--------------|--------------| | | |
| 11XX*| 70 (2.756) | 50 (1.960) | | | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
* No longer procurable, you can use stocks as available
E0484KMJXXXX
----------------------------------------------
| CABLE | CABLE TYPE |
| GAUGE |------------------------------------|
| | AKA/AKB/CF | DE/DK | DG | DJ/DL |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 22 | - | - | - | 01XX |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 20 | - | - | - | 01XX |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 18 | - | - | - | 01XX |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 16 | 01XX | 01XX | - | 01XX |
| | | | | 02XX |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 14 | 01XX | 01XX | - | - |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 12 | 01XX | 01XX | - | - |
| | | 02XX | | |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 10 | 02XX | 02XX | 02XX | - |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 8 | - | 03XX | 03XX | - |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 6 | - | 03XX | 03XX | - |
| | | | 04XX | |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 4 | - | - | 03XX | - |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 2 | - | - | 05XX | - |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 1 | - | - | 05XX | - |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 0 | - | - | 05XX | - |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 00 | - | - | 05XX | - |
| | | | 06XX | |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 000 | - | - | 06XX | - |
|-------|------------|-------|-------|-------|
| 0000 | - | - | 06XX | - |
----------------------------------------------

B. DAN132
DAN132 - B - 02
| | |
| | ---- Size code
| ---------- Material code
------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Size code and shrinking tools
DAN132-XX
---------------------------------------------------------------------
| SIZE |---------------------------|--------------------------------|
|------|-------------|-------------|---------|---------------|------|
| 01 | 3.2 (0.126) | 1.6 (0.063) | | | |
|------|-------------|-------------| | | PR13 |
| 02 | 4.8 (0.189) | 2.4 (0.094) | | | |
|------|-------------|-------------| | |------|
| 03 | 6.4 (0.252) | 3.2 (0.126) | | | |
|------|-------------|-------------| | | |
| 04 | 9.5 (0.375) | 4.7 (0.187) | | | |
|------|-------------|-------------| | | |
| 05 | 12.7 (0.500)| 6.3 (0.250) | | 695-01-A4-433 | |
|------|-------------|-------------| RAYCHEM | OR | PR12 |
| 06 | 15.9 (0.625)| 7.9 (0.312) | |CV1981-42V-960W| |
|------|-------------|-------------| | | |
| 07 | 19.1 (0.750)| 9.5 (0.375) | | | |
|------|-------------|-------------| | | |
| 08 | 22.2 (0.875)| 11.1 (0.437)| | | |
|------|-------------|-------------| | |------|
| 09 | 25.4 (1.000)| 12.7 (0.500)| | | |
|------|-------------|-------------| | | PR24 |
| 10 | 31.8 (1.250)| 15.9 (0.625)| | | |
|------|-------------|-------------| | |------|
| 11 | 38.1 (1.500)| 19.1 (0.750)| | | |
|------|-------------|-------------| | | PR24A|
| 12 | 50.8 (2.000)| 25.4 (1.000)| | | |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Material code
---------------------------------------------------------
| MATERIAL | MATERIAL | COLOR | APPLICATION |
| CODE | | | |
|----------|-----------------|-------|------------------|
| A | Cross linked | Black | Light weight |
| | thermally- | | application |
|----------| stabilised | |------------------|
| B | fluoroelastomer | | Fluid resistant |
---------------------------------------------------------
(d) Length
-----------------------------------------------------
| SIZE CODE | MATERIAL CODE | LENGTH mm (in.) |
|-----------|---------------|-----------------------|
| 01 to 07 | | 3000 (118.110) |
|-----------| |-----------------------|
| 08 | | 2200 (86.614) |
|-----------| |-----------------------|
| 09 | A | 1500 (59.055) |
|-----------| |-----------------------|
| 10 and 11 | | 3000 (118.110) |
|-----------| |-----------------------|

| 12 | | 1500 (59.055) |
|-----------|---------------|-----------------------|
|-----------|---------------|-----------------------|
| 01 to 04 | | 5000 (196.850) |
|-----------| |-----------------------|
| 05 to 09 | B | 3000 (118.110) |
|-----------| |-----------------------|
| 10 to 12 | | 1500 (59.055) |
-----------------------------------------------------
C. NSA937210
(Ref. Fig. 005)
You must use this type of sleeve:
- For mechanical protection (in high-temperature areas >
135 deg.C (275.00 deg.F) ) after shrinking.
- In vibration areas after shrinking.
- For segregation between harnesses in confined areas only. (Two sleeve thicknesses are necessary without shrinking)
NSA937210 - MB01 00
| | |
| | --- Length (mm)
| -------- Size code
----------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
(b) Length
------------------------------------
| LENGTH CODE | LENGTH in mm (in.) |
|-------------|--------------------|
| 00 | 1200 (47.243) |
|-------------|--------------------|
| 30 | 30 (1.181) |
|-------------|--------------------|
| 40 | 40 (1.574) |
|-------------|--------------------|
| 50 | 50 (1.968) |
|-------------|--------------------|
| 60 | 60 (2.362) |
------------------------------------
NSA937210MBXXXX
-------------------------------------------------------------------
| | INNER DIA mm(in.) | SHRINKING TOOL |
| SIZE |----------------------------|-----------------------------|
|------|--------------|-------------|------|---------------|------|
| 01XX | 2 (0.079) | 0.6 (0.024) | | | |
|------|--------------|-------------| | | PR13 |
| 02XX | 3.2 (0.126) | 0.9 (0.035) | | | |
|------|--------------|-------------| | |------|
| 03XX | 6.4 (0.252) | 1.6 (0.063) | | | |
|------|--------------|-------------| R | | |
| 04XX | 9.5 (0.374) | 2.4 (0.094) | A | 695-01-A4-433 | |
|------|--------------|-------------| Y | | |
| 05XX | 12.7 (0.500) | 3.7 (0.146) | C | OR | PR12 |
|------|--------------|-------------| H | | |
| 06XX | 15.9 (0.626) | 4.5 (0.177) | E |CV1981-42V-960W| |
|------|--------------|-------------| M | | |
| 07XX | 19 (0.748) | 5.7 (0.224) | | | |
|------|--------------|-------------| | |------|
| 08XX | 25.4 (1) | 7.1 (0.279) | | | |
|------|--------------|-------------| | | PR24 |
| 09XX | 32 (1.260) | 8.8 (0.346) | | | |

-------------------------------------------------------------------
NSA937210MBXXXX
---------------------------------------------------------------------
| CABLE | CABLE CODE |
| CODE |----|------------------------------------------------------|
| | - | 26 | 24 | 22 | 20 | 18 | 16 | 14 | 12 | 10 | 8 | 6 |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| DK | - | - |02XX| - |02XX|03XX|03XX|03XX|03XX|03XX|03XX|04XX|
| | | | | | | | | | | |04XX|08XX|
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| DJ | - | - | - |02XX|02XX|02XX|03XX|03XX|03XX|03XX|04XX|04XX|
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| GJ | - |0120|0120|0120|0220|0220|0220|0220|0320|0320| - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| GPB | - | - | - |0320|0320|0320|0320|0420| - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| HA |0420| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| HD |0420| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| HG | - | - |0525| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| HP | - | - | - |0320| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| MH | - |0220|0220|0220|0320|0320|0320|0320|0420|0420| - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| MLA | - |0120|0120|0120|0120|0220|0220|0220|0320|0320| - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| MLB | - |0220|0220|0220|0320|0320|0320|0320|0320|0420| - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| MLC | - |0220|0220|0220|0320|0320|0320|0320|0420|0420| - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| MLD | - |0220|0220|0320|0320|0320|0320|0320| - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| MLE | - | - | - | - | - |0320|0320|0420|0420| - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| MLG | - | - |0320| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| MME | - | - | - | - | - |0320|0320|0420|0420| - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| ST | - |0220|0220|0220|0220|0220|0220| - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| TT | - |0220|0220|0220|0220|0320|0320| - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| UE | - |0220|0220|0220|0320|0320|0320| - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| WC |0420| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| WR | - | - | - | - | - |0320|0420|0420| - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| WF | - | - |0320| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| WX | - |0220| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| XE |0220| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| XF |0420| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| XU | - | - |0220| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| YK | - | - | - |0320| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| YK* |0320| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| YK** |0120| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| YT | - | - | - |0320| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|

| YZ |0420| - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - | - |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
* NSA935298
* NSA935306

Specific Stripping Procedure
----------------------------------------------------------
| CODE |------------------------------------------------|
| | 4 | 2 | 1 | 0 | 00 | 000 | 0000 |
|-------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| DJ | 05XX | 05XX | 06XX | 06XX | 07XX | 08XX | 08XX |
| | | 06XX | 07XX | 07XX | 08XX | | |
|-------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| DG | - | - | 05XX | 06XX | 07XX | 07XX | 08XX |
|-------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| DK | 05XX | 05XX | 06XX | 07XX | - | - | - |
| | | 06XX | | | | | |
|-------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| YK | - | - | 03XX | 03XX | - | - | - |
----------------------------------------------------------
(3) Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 005)
You can use these sleeves as shield stops. (Refer to 20-42-22)
D. NSA937493
NSA937493 - 001
| |
| --- Size code
------------ Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Length
Supplied by lengths or in cut sleeves, maximum length variation 20%.
NSA937493-XXX
------------------------------------------------------------------
| | INNER DIA mm(in.) | SHRINKING TOOL |
| SIZE |---------------------------|-----------------------------|
|------|-------------|-------------|------|---------------|------|
| 001 | 3.8 (0.150) | 0.5 (0.019) | R | | PR13 |
|------|-------------|-------------| A | |------|
| 002 | 6.4 (0.252) | 1.5 (0.059) | Y | 695-01-A4-433 | |
|------|-------------|-------------| C | OR | |
| 003 | 8.9 (0.350) | 3 (0.118) | H |CV1981-42V-960W| PR12 |
|------|-------------|-------------| E | | |
| 004 | 9.5 (0.374) | 4.5 (0.177) | M | | |
------------------------------------------------------------------
NSA937493XXXX
---------------------------------------------------------------------
| CODE |-----------------------------------------------------------|
| | 26 | 24 | 22 | 20 | 18 | 16 | 14 | 12 | 10 | 8 | 6 | 4 |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| AK | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| AKB | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| BE | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| PD | - | - | 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| - | - | - |

| QD | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| RD | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| SG | | | | | | | | | | | | |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| CF | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| PF | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| QF | - | 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 002| - | - | - |
| RF | | | | | | | | | | | | |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| DE | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| PE | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| QE | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| RE | - | - | 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| - | - | - |
| SE | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| TG | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| UG | | | | | | | | | | | | |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| DK | 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 002| 002| 002|
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| PG | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| QG | 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 002| 002| 002|
| RH | | | | | | | | | | | | |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| SF | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| SFB | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| TJ | - | - | 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| - | - | - |
| TJB | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| UK | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| UKB | | | | | | | | | | | | |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| SJ | - | 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| - | - | - | - | - |
| | | | | | | | 002| - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| SS | 001| 001| - | 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| ST | 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| 001| - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| TK | 001| 001| 001| 002| 002| 002| 001| 001| 001| 001| - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| TT | 001| 001| 001| 002| 002| 002| - | - | - | - | - | - |
|-------|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|
| UD | 001| 001| 002| 002| 002| 002| 001| 001| 001| 001| - | - |
|-------|---------|---------|---------|---------|---------|---------|
| UE | 001| 001| 002| 002| 002| 002| - | - | - | - | - | - |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
4. Specific Stripping Procedure
A. With E0259HE cable installed with E0390, E0170 and E0161 to E0166 connectors.
(Conductor-insulation diameter adaptation)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
Stripping table for NSA937210MB02 and NSA937494-04-30
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| | STRIPPING |
| |-------------------------------------------------------------|
| CABLE | LENGTH mm (in.) | TOOL |
| TYPE |---------|---------|---------|-------------------------------|
| | A | B | C | NORM | P/N | COLOR |
|-------|---------|---------|---------|-----------|-----------|-------|
| HE | 40 | 15 | 5 |STRIPMASTER| 45-2020-1 | BLUE |
| | (1.575) | (0.590) | (0.197) | | | |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Shrinking table for NSA937210MB02 and NSA937494-04-30
------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | SLEEVE | SLEEVE | SHRINKING TOOL |
| CORE |NSA937210MB02XX|NSA937494-04-30| |

| GAUGE |---------------|---------------|------------------------------|
| | LENGTH 'D' | LENGTH 'E' | NORM | P/N |HEAD|
| | mm (in.) | mm (in.) | | | |
|-------|---------------|---------------|---------|---------------|----|
| 24 | 45 (1.771) | 30 (1.181) | RAYCHEM |CV1981-42V-960W|PR13|
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 1: Strip the cables to the length "A".
Step 2: Slide on and shrink the sleeve NSA937210MB02 5 mm (0.1968 in.) from the end of each conductor.
Make sure that the lengths "B" and "D" are correct.
Step 3: Slide and shrink the sleeve NS937494-04-30 on the cable. Make sure it is centered on the end of the cable insulation. You
will adjust the conductor protrusion at contact installation.
B. With E0291SW cable installed with NAS1599, ARINC600 or E0390 connectors.
(Used as shield stop)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
Stripping table for E0718-01 and NSA937494-01
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
|CONTACT|CONNECTOR| LENGTH mm (in.) | TOOL |
| TYPE | TYPE |-------------------------------|----------------------|
| | | A | B | D | E |NORM| P/N |COLOR|
|-------|---------|-------|-------|-------|-------|----|-----------|-----|
|PA2000 | NAS1599 | 4.5 | 9 |0 to 1 | | | | |
|SA2000 | |(0.177)|(0.354)|(0 to | - | | | |
| | | | | 0.039)| | | | |
|-------|---------|-------|-------|-------|-------| S | | |
| DF22 | | | | | | T | | |
| DG22 | | | | | | R | | |
| FA22 | ARINC600| 4.5 | 32.5 | 18 | - | I | | |
| FF22 | |(0.177)|(1.279)|(0.708)| | P | 45-2020-1 | BLUE|
| FG22 | | | | | | M | | |
| LA22 | | | | | | A | | |
|-------|---------|-------|-------|-------|-------| S | | |
|DV2200 | | 3.5 | | | | T | | |
|FV2200 | |(0.137)| 25 | | 4 | E | | |
|-------| E0390 |-------|(0.984)| - |(0.157)| R | | |
|DV2001 | | 5 | | | | | | |
|FV2001 | |(0.197)| | | | | | |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shrinking table for E0718-01 and NSA937494-01
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| CABLE | | | SLEEVE | |
|----------| CONTACT|CONNECTOR| E0718-01 OR | SHRINKING TOOL |
| | | TYPE | TYPE | NSA937494-01 | |
|TYPE|GAUGE| | |--------------|-------------------------------|
| | | | | LENGTH 'C' | NORM | P/N | HEAD |
|----|-----|--------|---------|--------------|------|-----------------|------|
| | | PA2000 | NAS1599 | 35 | | | |
| | | SA2000 | | (1.378) | | | |
| | |--------|---------|--------------| | | |
| | | DF22 | | | | | |
| | | DG22 | | 20 | R | | |
| | | FA22 | ARINC600| (0.787) | A | CV1981-42V-960W | PR13 |
| SW | 24 | FF22 | | | Y | | |
| | | FG22 | | | C | | |
| | |--------|---------|--------------| H | | |
| | | DV2200 | | | E | | |
| | | FV2200 | | 15 | M | | |
| | |--------| E0390 | (0.590) | | | |
| | | DV2001 | | | | | |
| | | FV2001 | | | | | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 1: Strip the cable to the lengths "A" and "B", related to the connector and contact used.
Step 2: Slide a sleeve E0718-01 or NSA937494-01 on the cable and shrink. Make sure that the lengths "C", "D" and "E" are correct.
C. With E0349WC cable installed with NSA938601F03 connector
(Ref. Fig. 008)

Stripping procedure for NSA937494-05-25

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | STRIPPING |
| |---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CABLE | LENGTH mm (in.) | TOOL |
| TYPE |---------|---------|---------|--------|------------------------------|
| | A | B | C | D | NORM | P/N | COLOR|
|-------|---------|---------|---------|--------|-----------|-----------|------|
| WC | 11 | 20.2 | 6.8 | 15 |STRIPMASTER| 45-2020-1 | BLUE |
| | (0.433) | (0.795) | (0.268) | (0.591)| | | |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shrinking procedure for NSA937494-05-25
------------------------------------------------------
| SLEEVE | SHRINKING TOOL |
| NSA937494-05-25 | |
|-----------------|----------------------------------|
| LENGTH 'E' | NORM | P/N | HEAD |
| mm (in.) | | | |
|-----------------|---------|-----------------|------|
| 25 (0.984) | RAYCHEM | CV1981-42V-960W | PR13 |
------------------------------------------------------
Step 1: Strip the cable to the lengths "A", "B","C" and "D".
Step 2: Slide and shrink the sleeves NSA937494-05-25 on the cable.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Shrink Sleeves - P/N Characteristics and Shrinking Tools ABS0061
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Shrink Sleeves - P/N Characteristics and shriking ABS0836
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Shrink Sleeves - P/N Characteristics and Shrinking Tools NSA937502
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Shrink Sleeves - Sleeve Used as End Cable Insulation - NSA937502
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Shrink Sleeves - P/N Characteristics and Shrinking Tools NSA937210
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Shrink Sleeves - Specific Stripping Procedure NSA937210MB02 and NSA937494-04-30
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Shrink Sleeves - Specific Stripping Procedure E0718-01 and NSA937494-01
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Shrink Sleeves - Specific Stripping Procedure NSA937494-05-25
END CAPS (Airbus)
END CAPS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
End caps are used to isolate the end of a cable that is not connected.
High and low temperature end caps installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- NSA936601 sealing end cap, high temperature.
NSA936604 sealing end cap, low temperature.
- ABS0065 heat shrinkable end cap.
NSA936603 heat shrinkable end cap.
2. Sealing End Caps
A. NSA936601
NSA936601 CA 11 12

| || | |
| || | ------------ Max. permitted dia. in 1/10 mm
| || ---------------- Min. permitted dia. in 1/10 mm
| |------------------- Type code
| -------------------- Cap
--------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Color identification
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
This table gives the size of the cap to use for the cable type and gauge.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(a) Cable stripping
1 For end cap CA0910 only:
- Strip the cable to the length "L".
- Fold and twist the stripped cable.
2 For the other end caps:
- Do not strip a normal cable before you install a sealing end cap.
Only make a clean cut on the cable.
- Never isolate a shielded or coaxial cable with an end cap crimped at the core shielding end. Do as shown below:
Cut the shielding 30 mm (1.1811 in.) to 40 mm (1.5748 in.) from the core insulator end.
Put a heat shrinkable sleeve at the shielding end.
Crimp an end cap at the core end.
(b) Crimping procedure
- Open the crimping dies of the applicable crimping tool.To do this, close the handles until the certi-crimp ratchet
releases.
-
Install the end cap in the die. (Cap ring "B" color is the same as tool die color)
- Lightly close the tool handles but do not change the shape of the end cap. Make sure that the end cap is fully
engaged in the tool and that the rings are in the center position in the crimping dies.

Heat-Shrinkable End Cap
- Put the cable (stripped for CA0910 or unstripped for the other caps) in the end cap.
- Hold the cable in position and fully close the tool handles.
The handles open automatically and you can remove the crimped end cap.
B. NSA936604
NSA936604 CA 09 31
| || | |
| || | ------------ Max. permissible dia. in 1/10mm
| || ---------------- Min. permissible dia. in 1/10mm
| |------------------- Type code
| -------------------- Cap
--------------------------- Standard P/N
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(a) Temperature
(b) Color identification
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(a) Cable stripping
- For cable DK10, strip the cable to the length A.
- For the normal cables, it is not necessary to strip the cable before you install the sealing end cap.
- Never isolate a shielded or coaxial cable with an end cap crimped at the core shielding end. Do as shown below:
Cut the shielding 30 mm (1.1811 in.) to 40 mm (1.5748 in.) from the core insulator end.
Put a heat shrinkable sleeve at the shielding end.
Crimp an end cap at the core end.
(b) Crimping procedure
-
Get the applicable crimping tool and put the insulation adjustment pins in position 1.
-
Open the crimping dies of the applicable crimping tool. To do this, close the handles until the certi-crimp ratchet releases.
-
Install the end cap in the die. (Cap ring "B" color is the same as tool die color)
- Lightly close the tool handles but do not change the shape of the end cap. Make sure that the end cap is fully engaged in the tool
and that the rings are in the center position in the crimping dies.
-
Put the unstripped cable in the end cap.
- Hold the cable in position and fully close the tool handles.
The handles open automatically and you can remove the crimped end cap.
- Make sure that after crimping, you can see a dot mark on the crimping area. (The dot mark is an indication that you used the
correct tool)
3. Heat-Shrinkable End Cap
A. ABS0065
ABS0065 CD0100
| |
| ------------------- Size code
---------------------------- Standard P/N
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(a) Temperature
(b) Color

ABS0065 color is black.

(a) Cable stripping
- Do not strip a cable before you install a sealing end cap.
(b) Shrinking procedure
- Install the end cap on the cable.
- Heat shrink the end cap with the applicable tool.
B. NSA936603
NSA936603 C C 0100
| | | | |
| | | | ------------ Max. permitted dia. in 1/10mm
| | | --------------- Min. permitted dia. in 1/10mm
| | ------------------ Type code
| -------------------- Cap
--------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Color
NSA936603 color is black.
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(a) Cable stripping
- Do not strip a cable before you install a sealing end cap.
(b) Shrinking procedure
- Install the end cap on the cable.
- Heat shrink the end cap with the applicable tool.
NOTE: To prevent deterioration of the part to be covered during shrinking, it is recommended to operate as quickly as possible.
(c) Check after shrinking

Make sure that the end cap:
- Shows no sign of overheating.
- Is shrunk in an equal manner.
- Shows no signs of incipient cracks or tearing.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 End Caps - P/N Characteristics and Crimping Tools NSA936601
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 End Cap - Allocation Table NSA936601
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 End Cap - P/N Characteristics and Crimping Tools NSA936604
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 End Cap - Allocation Table NSA936604
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 End Caps - P/N Characteristics and Shrinking Tools ABS0065
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 End Caps - P/N Characteristics and Shrinking Tools NSA936603
SHIELD TERMINATIONS (Airbus)

SHIELD TERMINATIONS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter gives the description, installation and identification of the sleeves and ferrules used on aircraft:
A. Solder Sleeves (20-42-21)
The solder sleeves used for shield termination have the codes that follow:
ABS0237
E0160
NSA937790
B. Crimp Sleeves and Ferrules (20-42-22)
The crimp sleeves and ferrules used for shield termination have the codes that follow:
NSA937503
NSA937504
NSA937505
SOLDER SLEEVES (Airbus)
SOLDER SLEEVES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Solder sleeves installed on the aircraft have the codes that follow :
ABS0237
E0160
NSA937790
2. Identification and Characteristics
A. ABS0237
(1) Characteristics
(Ref. Fig. 001)
ABS0237 - 02
| |-------------------------- Item code
|
|----------------------------------- Standard P/N
(b) Temperature
Maximum continuous operating temperature is 175 deg.C (347.00 deg.F) .
Minimum continuous operating temperature is -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
Maximum peak operating temperature is 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) .
(2) Installation
(a) Wire stripping
- XF cable
Refer to Method "H" Procedure.
- Other cable types
Refer to Method "E" Procedure.
(b) Shrinking tools
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(c) Procedure
- XF cable
- Other cable types
Refer to Method "E" Procedure.
B. E0160
(1) Characteristics
(Ref. Fig. 002)
E0160 - 1 - 1 H
| | | |-------------------------- Color code (H = clear blue)
| | |------------------------------ Size code
| |---------------------------------- Climatic code: 1 = 150 C to 200 C
|---------------------------------------- Standard P/N

(b) Temperature
Minimum operating temperature is 150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) .
(2) Installation
(a) Wire stripping
- XF cable
- Other cables
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
Refer to Method A, B, C, D, E, F or G Procedure in relation to the Installation Method allocation table.
(b) Shrinking tools
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(c) Procedure
- XF cable
- Other cables
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
NOTE: The recommended tools to install E0160 solder sleeves are RAYCHEM IR tools, but in some specific conditions you can use
hot air generator. With hot air generators you cannot be sure of the result because it is related to user experience.
Refer to Method A, B, C, D, E, F or G Procedure to agree with the Installation Method allocation table.
C. NSA937790
(1) Characteristics

Wire Stripping Procedure (method "A" to "H")
NSA937790 - 03
| |-------------------------- Size code
|
|----------------------------------- Standard P/N
(b) Temperature
Only use this temperature on nickel-plated braided cables which can be continously used at 200
deg.C (392.00 deg.F) or more and at 400 deg.C (752.00 deg.F) for a period of 10 minutes
minimum.
(2) Installation
(a) Wire stripping
Refer to Method A or D Procedure.
(b) Shrinking tools
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(c) Procedure
Refer to Method A or D Procedure.
3. Wire Stripping Procedure (method "A" to "H")
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
(Ref. Fig. 012)
(Ref. Fig. 013)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
(Ref. Fig. 015)
(Ref. Fig. 016)
(Ref. Fig. 017)
(Ref. Fig. 018)
(Ref. Fig. 019)
(Ref. Fig. 020)
(Ref. Fig. 021)
(Ref. Fig. 022)
NOTE: If the wire must be connected to a connector through a backshell, make sure that length "L" is sufficient
after installation to have a minimum length of
10 mm (0.3937 in.) + or - 5 mm (0.1968 in.) between the solder sleeve and the end of the backshell.
(Ref. Fig. 023)
A. Method "A" (Ref. Fig. : Method "A")

(1) Strip the bonding wire to the length A (detail A1)
(2) Make a circular cut at a distance L (detail A1).
(3) Remove the insulation.
(4) Unwind the braid (detail A2).
(5) Cut the braid to get the length B (detail A3).
B. Method "B" (Ref. Fig. : Method "B")

(1) Strip the bonding wire to the length A (detail B1)

(2) Make a circular cut at a distance L (detail B1).
(4) Cut and remove the braid (detail B2).
(5) Make a circular cut at a distance C (detail B2).
(6) Move the external insulation to get the length B (detail B3).
C. Method "C" (Ref. Fig. : Method "C")
(1) Strip the bonding wire to the length A (detail C1)
(2) Make a circular cut at a distance L (detail C1).
(3) Remove the cable insulation.
(4) Cut and remove the braid to get the length B (detail C2).
D. Method "D" (Ref. Fig. : Method "D")
(1) Strip the bonding wire to the length A (detail D1)
(2) Make a circular cut at a distance L (detail D1).
(4) Cut and remove the braid to get the length B (detail D2).
(5) Move the braid rearward on the insulation (detail D3).
E. Method "E" (Ref. Fig. : Method "E")
(1) Strip the bonding wire to the length A (detail E1)
(2) Make three circular cuts to get the dimension B (detail E1).
(3) Make a longitudinal cut and remove the insulation (detail E2).
F. Method "F" (Ref. Fig. : Method "F")
(1) Strip the bonding wire to the length A (detail F1)
(2) If necessary, install the rear mount connector on the wire (detail F2).
(3) Install the shrinkable sleeve on the wire (detail F2).
(4) Install the ferrule on the wire (detail F2).
(5) Cut and remove the insulation and the braid to get the dimension L (detail F3).
(6) Unwind the polyimide tape (detail F3).
(7) Remove the packing (detail F3).
(8) Make a circular cut at a distance C (detail F3).
(9) Move the external insulation to get the dimension D (detail F4).
(10) Wires HG are made with UD and XM wires.
To install solder sleeves for these wires refer to :
- Method "A" for UD wire
- Method "C" for XM wire.

G. Method "G" (Ref. Fig. : Method "G")

(1) Strip the bonding wires to the lengths A and B (detail G1).
(2) Cut the insulation and the braid to get the different dimensions (detail G1).
H. Method "H" (Ref. Fig. : Method "H")
(1) Strip the XF coaxial cable with the NO-NIK 023 stripping tool.
(2) Strip the DR24 cable (this will be the grounding cable) with the cutter and cutting pliers.
4. Installation Procedure (method "A" to "H")
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
(Ref. Fig. 012)
(Ref. Fig. 013)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
(Ref. Fig. 015)
(Ref. Fig. 016)
(Ref. Fig. 017)
(Ref. Fig. 018)
(Ref. Fig. 019)
(Ref. Fig. 020)
(Ref. Fig. 021)
(Ref. Fig. 024)
A. Method "A" to "G"
- Move the selected sleeve horizontally along the coaxial wire and bonding wire assembly.
NOTE: You must make sure that you put the solder sleeve on the cable in the correct position.
NOTE: You can install a maximum of three bonding wires with the ABS0237 solder sleeve. Make sure that
the bonding wires are in the correct position before shrinking.
(Ref. Fig. 025)
-
Turn the sleeve as it moves along the bonding wire to make sure that it does not catch on the strands.
-
Adjust the solder preform to the center of the stripped part of the bonding wire and shield.
-
Install the assembly in the applicable tool but do not turn it.
- Heat the center of the sleeve until the sleeve shrinks:
The solder ring melts and flows into the strands of the bonding wire and shield and the sealing rings
melt and flow.
The collapse of the solder ring does not show solder flow. Continue to apply heat until the solder flows
into the strands.
-
Let it become cool for a few seconds before you touch it.
- Make sure that the solder sleeve is correctly shrunk.
(Ref. Fig. 026)
(Ref. Fig. 027)
- Do a check :
.that there are no balls of solder,
.for correct shrinkage of the sleeve (no flaring),
.that there is no overheating,
.that there is no solder rejection (cable SJ and ST ...).

- Insulation procedure (for wires HG and WC only).

For wire HG (Method F):
Install the shrinkable sleeve (detail F5 and F6).
Retract the sleeve.
For wire WC (Method G):
Strip the triaxial wire conductor.
Install the three shrinkable sleeves (1), (2) and (3).
Retract the sleeves (1), (2) and (3) (detail G3).
Attach the two bonding wires with the cable tie (detail G2).
Install the shrinkable sleeve (4) on the two ferrules.
Retract the sleeve (4) (detail G4).
B. Method "H" (Ref. Fig.: Method "H")
This is a special procedure to connect the coaxial cable XF and the DR24 cable, with solder sleeve
ABS0237-03 or E0160-1-1H.
-
Slide ABS0237-03 or E0160-1-1H onto the XF cable.
- Engage the DR24 grounding cable between the solder sleeve ABS0237-03 or E0160-1-1h and the
screening part of the XF cable. Make sure that no strands of the DR24 conductor unwind.
- Retract the solder sleeve ABS0237-03 with an infrared tool or a hot air generator. Retract the solder
sleeve E0160-1-1H with an infrared tool.
5. Solder Sleeve Repair and Replacement
(Ref. Fig. 026)
(Ref. Fig. 027)
(Ref. Fig. 028)
(Ref. Fig. 029)
A. Types of defects or damage
(1) Heating of connection not sufficient: you can repair the connection by re-heating of the solder sleeve.
(2) Incorrect position: remove the sleeve and install a new solder sleeve.
(3) Cracks on the solder sleeve:
- If the solder connection is in the correct condition, shrink a new solder sleeve without the solder
ring.
-
If the solder connection is defective, remove the damaged sleeve and install a new solder sleeve.
(4) Overheating of the solder sleeve or the cable insulation: cut the damaged part of the cable and make a
new connection with a new solder sleeve.
B. General requirements for the replacement of a damaged solder sleeve
You can replace a damaged solder sleeve at the same location on a cable only one time.
To do this, you must install a yellow identification sleeve NSA937201 behind the new solder sleeve to
identify the replacement.
When a solder sleeve identified with a yellow sleeve must be replaced, do not install the new solder sleeve
at the same location. It is necessary to do a new stripping operation to install the new solder sleeve at a
different location on the cable.
C. Removal Procedure
(1) Shrinking Tools
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 030)

NOTE: We recommend that you use a hot air gun that will apply heat to the sleeve on all its
circumference. An IR gun will only apply heat at a local point of the sleeve.
(2) Procedure
(a) Apply heat to the sleeve for 3 to 4 seconds. The heating time must be sufficient to melt the solder
but not too long (this is to prevent damage to the cable).
(b) Use gloves or a cloth and immediately pull the solder sleeve out of the cable.

20-42-22 - CRIMP SLEEVES, FERRULES (Airbus)
NOTE: Do not apply too much pressure on the cable. If you do, you can cause damage to the
cable shield (separation of the shield strands).
(c) Disconnect the bonding lead and remove the identification sleeve (if applicable).
(d) Make sure that no solder sleeve debris stays at the location where the sleeve was installed on
the shield, and on the twisted pair contacts.
D. Installation Procedures
(1) Installation Procedure for a First Replacement
(a) Select a new solder sleeve.
(b) Engage a yellow identification sleeve NSA937201MA of a length of 20 mm (0.7874 in.) onto the
cable to identify the replacement. The size of the sleeve must agree with the diameter of the
cable (Refer to chapter 20-42-31).
(c) Engage the new solder sleeve onto the cable.
(d) Install the new solder sleeve at the same location as the old one and shrink it (Refer to paragraph
4 "Installation procedure").
(e) Put the identification sleeve behind the solder sleeve and attach it with lacing tape NSA8420-7
(Refer to chapter 20-33-44).
(2) Replacement of a Solder Sleeve Identified with a Yellow Sleeve
(a) Method "A"
(Ref. Fig. 009)
-
Strip the bonding wire to the length A (if applicable).
-
Cut and remove the visible braid.
- Make a circular cut at a distance L of
10 mm (0.3937 in.)
-
Fold the cable to break the tubing.
-
Remove the insulation.
-
Unwind the braid
-
Cut the braid to get the length B.
- Install the new solder sleeve and the bonding lead (Refer to paragraph 4 "Installation
Procedure" for more information).
(b) Method "E" Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 016)
-
Strip the bonding wire to the length A (if applicable).
- Install a heat shrinkable sleeve NSA937493 on the cable to recover the visible braid. The
sleeve must overlap the cable insulation by
10 mm (0.3937 in.) minimum at each side (refer to chapter 20-42-12).
-
At
20 mm (0.7874 in.) from the heat shrinkable sleeve, make three circular cuts to get the

dimension L.
-
Make a longitudinal cut and remove the insulation.
- Install the new solder sleeve and the bonding lead (refer to paragraph 4 "Installation
Procedure").
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Solder Sleeves - P/N Characteristics and Shrinking Tools ABS0237
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Solder Sleeves - P/N Characteristics E0160
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Solder Sleeves - Installation Method Allocation Table E0160
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Solder Sleeves - Installation Method Allocation Table E0160
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Solder Sleeves - Shrinking Tools E0160
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Solder Sleeves - P/N Characteristics and Shrinking Tools NSA937790
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "A" : Stripping Characteristics E0160 and NSA937790
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "A" : Installation E0160 and NSA937790
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "B" : Stripping Characteristics E0160
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "C" : Stripping Characteristics E0160
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "B" and "C" : Installation E0160
Figure 014.1 / Graphic SH 014.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "D" - Stripping Characteristics E0160 and NSA937790
Figure 015.1 / Graphic SH 015.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "D" : Installation E0160 and NSA937790
Figure 016.1 / Graphic SH 016.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "E" : Stripping Characteristics ABS0237 and E0160
Figure 017.1 / Graphic SH 017.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "E" : Installation ABS0237, E0160 and NSA937790
Figure 018.1 / Graphic SH 018.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "F" : Stripping Characteristics E0160
Figure 019.1 / Graphic SH 019.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "F" : Installation E0160

Figure 020.1 / Graphic SH 020.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "G" : Stripping Characteristics and Installation E0160
Figure 021.1 / Graphic SH 021.1 Solder Sleeves - Method "G" : Insulation E0160
Figure 022.1 / Graphic SH 022.1 Solder Sleeves - Stripping Procedure ABS0237 and E0160
Figure 023.1 / Graphic SH 023.1 Solder Sleeves - Connection to a Connector through a Backshell
Figure 024.1 / Graphic SH 024.1 Solder Sleeves - Final Assembly ABS0237 and E0160
Figure 025.1 / Graphic SH 025.1 Solder Sleeves - Installation of Several Bonding Wires - ABS0237
Figure 026.1 / Graphic SH 026.1 Solder Sleeves - Defects Representation
Figure 030.1 / Graphic SH 030.1 Solder Sleeves - Shrinking Tools ABS0237
CRIMP SLEEVES, FERRULES (Airbus)
CRIMP SLEEVES, FERRULES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Crimp sleeves and ferrules installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
NSA937503 Crimp Sleeve, High Temperature
NSA937505 Crimp Sleeve, Low Temperature
NSA937504 Ferrule
2. Crimp Sleeves
A. NSA937503
NSA937503 - FB 11 16
| | | |-------------- Maximum diameter
| | |----------------- Minimum diameter
| |-------------------- Ferrule code
|----------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Maximum operating temperature is 260 deg. C (500 deg. F).

(b) Color identification and Crimping Tools

(Ref. Fig. 001)
NOTE: You can use as an alternative solution :

- E0160 solder sleeve in the zones where the maximum temperature is less than
200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F)
- NSA937790 solder sleeve in the zones where the maximum temperature is more than
200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
B. NSA937505
NSA937505 - FB 06 11
| | | |-------------- Maximum diameter
| | |----------------- Minimum diameter
| |-------------------- Ferrule code
|----------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Color identification and Crimping Tools
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
C. Crimp Sleeve Installation Procedure
(1) Wire Stripping
Wire stripping is given in 20-25-10.
(2) Stripping Characteristics
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(a) Strip the wire to get the dimension A (detail A).
(b) Cut and flare the shield to get the dimension B (detail B).
For spiral-wound shield: (detail B)
- unwind the shield braids
- cut them to get the dimension C.
(c) Divide the braids in two opposite strands (detail C).
(d) Lightly twist them.
If there is too much braid: (detail D)
- cut some wires to the length of the ferrule (dimension D)
- twist the remaining wires into two strands.
(3) Crimp Sleeve installation
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(a) Put the ferrule on the conductor. The shield must be between the support sleeve and ferrule skirt.
(detail E)
For spiral-wound shield: (detail F)

- the shield braids must go through the ferrule inspection holes.

(b) Install the bonding wires.
(c) Put the assembly in the crimping tool.
(d) Fully close the tool handles until the ratchet releases.
(e) For spiral-wound shield:
- cut off the unwanted braid wires which go through the ferrule inspection holes.
(f) Only for SJ24 wire: (detail G)
- install a heat-shrinkable sleeve NSA937210MB01
- heat-shrink the sleeve.
(g) Slide the insulation sleeve on the crimped ferrule.
(h) Install the assembly in the crimping tool.
Use the same tool die to crimp the insulation sleeve and to put it in the correct position as the
tool you used to crimp the ferrule.
(i) Fully close the tool handles until the ratchet releases.
D. Shielded Termination Installation Procedure

Ferrules
NOTE: Use the insulating sleeve of the NSA937503FB crimp sleeve only when it is impossible to shrink
sleeve NSA937210MB, in zones of temperature >
200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) and use shrink sleeve E0718 in zones of temperature < 200 deg.C
(392.00 deg.F) .
NOTE: The shielding termination is the same in relation to the type of shielding (braided or helicoidal)
(1) Shielded Termination with NSA937210MB or E0718 sleeve

(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(a) Take the appropriate sleeve.
(b) Cut a circular notch with a cutter or equivalent at distance L of 60 mm (2.3622 in.) (STEP A).
(Length L must be as short as possible but sufficient for insertion, extraction and 2 repairs during
the first wiring).
With a backshell, length L must include:
- the length of the backshell.
- cable connections that are spaced.
There must be a distance of 10 mm (0.3937 in.) to 20 mm (0.7874 in.) between the rear of the
backshell and the sleeve.
Length L is then between 60 mm (2.3622 in.) and 80 mm (3.1496 in.) .
(c) Remove the insulation from the cable.
(d) Splay the shielding strands of the conductor or conductors (STEP B).
(e) Cut the shielding braid flush with the insulation.
(f) Place the strands parallel to the cable.
(g) Install the sleeve on the cable (STEP C).
(h) Shrink the sleeve with hot air generator STEINEL or equivalent (STEP D).
Make sure that there are no signs of overheating on the wire and the insulating sleeve.
(2) Shielding Termination with insulating sleeve of NSA937503FB crimp sleeve
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(a) Select the appropriate insulating sleeve.
(b) Cut a circular notch with a cutter or equivalent at distance L of 60 mm (2.3622 in.) (STEP A).
(Length L must be as short as possible but sufficient for insertion, extraction and 2 repairs during
the first wiring).
With a backshell, length L must include:
- the length of the backshell.
- cable connections that are spaced.
There must be a distance of 10 mm (0.3937 in.) to 20 mm (0.7874 in.) between the rear of the
backshell and the sleeve.
Length L is then between 60 mm (2.3622 in.) and 80 mm (3.1496 in.) .
(c) Remove the insulation from the cable.
(d) Splay the shielding strands of the conductor or conductors (STEP B).
(e) Cut the shielding braid flush with the insulation.

Ferrules
(f) Place the strands parallel to the cable.

(g) Select the applicable crimping tool in relation to the colour of the insulating sleeve.
(h) Slide the insulating sleeve onto the cable (STEP C).
(i) Insert the cable-sleeve assembly between the jaws of the pliers and crimp (STEP D).
(j) Fully operate the tool until the safety ratchet releases (STEP E).
After crimping, the insulating sleeve must not slide on the cable.
3. Ferrules
A. NSA937504
NSA937504 - 01
| |-------------------- Type code
|----------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Utilization and Crimping Tools
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
B. Ferrule Installation Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(1) Engage the post-insulated sleeve on the cable.
(2) Engage the ferrule (Yellow color) on the cable.
(3) Remove the external insulation along a length of 110 mm (4.3307 in.) .
(4) Push the shielding braid against the external insulation to loosen the braid.
(5) Cut the braid at 18 mm (0.7086 in.) from the external insulation.
NOTE: Keep the polyimide tape (Amber color) between the wires and the braid.
(6) Push the braid rearward.

(7) Engage the silicone sleeve (E0484KMJ03) length: 25 mm (0.9842 in.) on the cable.
(8) Shrink the silicone sleeve.
(9) Install the braid support between the silicone sleeve and the braid.
(10) Fold the braid on the sleeve.
(11) Put the crimping ferrule in position on the braid.
(12) Engage the bonding wire between the ferrule (Yellow color) and the braid.
(13) Crimp the assembly.
(14) Cut the braid wires that come out from the crimp.

Ferrules
(15) Cut the polyimide tape at approx. 1 mm (0.0393 in.) from the ferrule.
(16) Put the post-insulated sleeve on the crimped ferrule.
NOTE: You must engage the bonding wire through the sleeve.
(17) Crimp the assembly.
NOTE: The crimped sleeve must not be on top of the ferrule that you crimped at step 5.
C. Alternative Insulation Procedure

It is possible to insulate bonding wires as follows :
- Silicone sleeve E0484MJ0527
- Kynar sleeve E0718-70-25
Shrink the silicone sleeve and then the Kynar sleeve.
NOTE: After shrinking, Kynar sleeve E0718-70-25 must never protrude beyond silicone sleeve
E0484MJ0527
4. Allocation table
(Ref. Fig. 002)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Crimp Sleeves/Ferrules - P/N Characteristics and Tools NSA937503 and
NSA937505
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Crimp Sleeves - Allocation Table for Wires NSA937503, NSA937504 and
NSA937505
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Crimp Sleeves/Ferrules - Stripping Characteristics NSA937503 and NSA937505
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Crimp Sleeves/Ferrules - Installation NSA937503 and NSA937505
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Crimp Sleeves/Ferrules - Allocation Table for Wires NSA937210MB
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Crimp Sleeves/Ferrules - Shielded Termination Installation Procedure
NSA937210MB
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Crimp Sleeves/Ferrules - Shielded Termination Installation Procedure
NSA937503FB
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Crimp Sleeves/Ferrules - P/N Characteristics and Tools NSA937504
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Crimp Sleeves/Ferrules - Installation NSA937504
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Crimp Sleeves/Ferrules - Installation NSA937504
IDENTIFICATION ITEMS (Airbus)

Ferrules
IDENTIFICATION ITEMS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow give the description of the identification sleeves and labels used on the aircraft.
NOTE: For more informations (about using and installation), refer to chapter 20-32-20 or 20-32-50.
A. Identification Sleeves (20-42-31)

The sleeves used for identification have the codes that follow:
E0646 (ex NSA937204) - unicut
NSA937201
NSA937202
NSA937203
B. Identification Labels (20-42-32)
The labels used for identification have the codes that follow:
ABS1475
E0248
NSA931029
C. Auto-Adhesive or Stickable Labels (20-42-33)
The auto-adhesive or stickable labels used for identification have the codes that follow:
ABS0724
ABS5342
E0470
E0683
NSA931025
NSA931026
NSA931028
NSA931031
SLEEVES - IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
SLEEVES - IDENTIFICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
High and low temperature identification sleeves installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
E0646 high temperature sleeve (ex NSA937204)
NSA937201 (ex NSA937490) high and low temperature sleeves
NSA937202 low temperature sleeves
NSA937203 low temperature sleeves taken from NSA937202 MC0300 sleeve
NSA937492 high temperature sleeve
NOTE: You must use white sleeves to identify copper cables and grey sleeves to identify aluminum cables.
NOTE: Near the rear part of the lugs connected to the three phase units, install the sleeves that follow:
- Red for the phase A
- Yellow for the phase B
- Blue for the phase C.
NOTE: After shrinking, make sure that the identification sleeve can move along and turn easily around the
cable or harness. Make sure that you can read the printing easily.

Ferrules

A. E0646 (ex NSA937204)
This type of sleeve is for the identification of:
- Items connected on cables connected to control and indicating equipment. (Switches, annunciator
lights, magnetic indicators)
-
BF and CF cables on small VUs.

(Ref. Fig. 001)
NSA937204 MF 15 A1
E0646
| | | |
| | | ------------- Code marked on sleeve
| | ----------------- Type code
| --------------------- Type and color code
----------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Color
The sleeve color is yellow.
(b) Diameter code
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(c) Marking
Numbers 6 and 9 are underlined to prevent confusion.
(Ref. Fig. 003)

20-42-32 - LABELS - IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
B. NSA937201 (ex NSA937490)

This type of sleeve is used for the identification of:
- Cables (MA, MD, ME and MG)
- Aluminum cables (AD)
- Optical cables and special cables
- Spare cables and draw cables
- Harnesses for temperatures of more than
260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F)
- Standard electrical items (resistors) installed on terminal blocks
- Diodes.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
NSA937201 MA 02 00
| | | |
| | | ------------------ Color code
| | ---------------------- Inner diameter code
| -------------------------- Type code
---------------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Type code
(Ref. Fig. 004)
- Type code
(b) Color
(Ref. Fig. 005)
- Color code
- For pink sleeves, use black characters for safety cables.
(c) Diameter code and shrinking tools
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(d) Temperature
- Minimum shrinking temperature is
120 deg.C (248.00 deg.F)
- Maximum shrinking temperature is
240 deg.C (464.00 deg.F) .
(3) Marking
(a) For type codes ME, MG, MH and MD, use TMS90 system:
- In non SKYDROL areas, you must do 1 print and 2 permatizings.
- In SKYDROL areas, you must do 3 prints and 2 permatizings.
(b) For type codes MR, MT, MK and ML, use SIX system (with ZEBRA 140 or TYCO T408M or TYCO T312M printer):
- After printing, no permatizing is necessary.
- Make sure that the printing is resistant and that you can read it.
NOTE: For this type of sleeve, you can also use: IBM 6742-2, LEXMARK 2390 or LEXMARK 2400 printer.
For more details, refer to chapter 20-25-65.

(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
(Ref. Fig. 012)
(Ref. Fig. 013)
C. NSA937202
NSA937202 MC 01 00
| | | |
| | | ------------- Procurement code
| | ----------------- Inner diameter code
| --------------------- Type code
----------------------------- Standard P/N

(2) Characteristics
(a) Color
(b) Diameter code
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
D. NSA937203
(Ref. Fig. 001)
NSA937203 - 01 - 5
| | |
| | ---------------- Number marked on sleeve (0 to 9)
| --------------------- Type code
----------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Color
(b) Diameter code
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(c) Marking
Numbers 6 and 9 are underlined to prevent confusion.
E. NSA937492
NSA937492 001
| |
| -------------------- Inner diameter code
---------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Diameter code
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(b) Temperature
260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F)
- Minimum shrinking temperature is
320 deg.C (608.00 deg.F)
- Maximum shrinking temperature is
375 deg.C (707.00 deg.F) .
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Identification Sleeves - Characteristics E0646, NSA937201, NSA937203 and NSA937204
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Identification Sleeves - Characteristics E0646, NSA937202, NSA937203, NSA937204 and NSA937492
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Identification Sleeves - Allocation Table for Wires E0646 and NSA937204
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Identification Sleeves - Inner Diameter Code NSA937201
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Identification Sleeves - Color Code and Tools NSA937201
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Identification Sleeves - Allocation Table for Terminals NSA937201
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Identification Sleeves - Allocation Table for Wires NSA937201

LABELS - IDENTIFICATION (Airbus)
LABELS - IDENTIFICATION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Identification labels installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
ABS1475 label
E0248 label (4 to 6 holes)
NSA931029 label
A. ABS1475
This type of label is for marking of electrical harnesses and you can use it in skydrol areas.
(Ref. Fig. 001)
ABS1475 - 01
| |
| --------- Lettering code
---------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
70 deg.C (158.00 deg.F) .
(b) Lettering code
----------------------------------------------------------------------
| LETTERING | WORDING | LETTERING | BACKGROUND |
| CODE | | COLOR | COLOR |
|-----------|---------------------------------|-----------|------------|
| | first | | | |
| | line | CAUTION | | |
| 01 |--------|------------------------| | |
| | second | | | |
| | line | FUEL TANK HARNESS ONLY | | |
|-----------|--------|------------------------| red | white |
| | first | | | |
| | line | CAUTION | | |
| 02 |--------|------------------------| | |
| | second | | | |
| | line | PROBE SIDE | | |
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(3) Marking
This type of label is supplied printed.
(4) Installation
The installation is the same as for E0248.
Refer to chapter 20-32-51.
B. E0248
This type of label is for the identification of:
- EFCS specific equipment (connectors, terminal blocks, relays) with pink colored labels.
-
Harnesses for temperatures of more than

150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) .

- Rack connectors. (ARINC 404A and ARINC 600)
- Ground modules and grounding points.
- Splices.
- Harnesses in pressure seal areas. (On each side of the panel)
- Coded equipment items.
- Circuit breakers, relays and connectors.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
E0248 A 2 - 4H 9 P R
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | --- Procurement code | No code = TMS90 system
| | | | | | | R = 6 system
| | | | | | | T = Thermal transfer
| | | | | ------ Variant code | P = Pre-cut label
| | | | | | No code = Label without precutting
| | | | --------- Color code
| | | ------------- Holes number code (4 or 6)
| | ----------------- Size code
| -------------------- Material code
------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature

20-42-33 - LABELS - SELF-ADHESIVE OR STICK TYPE (Airbus)
(Ref. Fig. 002)

(b) Size Code
(Ref. Fig. 002)
If not available, you can change a 6-hole label to a 2-hole labels.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(c) Color code
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(d) Material code
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(3) Marking
(a) For E0248 XX-XXXX, use TMS90 system:
- In non SKYDROL areas, you must do 1 print and 2 permatizings.
- In SKYDROL areas, you must do 3 prints and 2 permatizings.
(b) For E0248 XX-XXXXR, use SIX system (with LEXMARK 2390 printer):
- After printing, you must do 1 permatizing.
- Make sure that the printing is resistant and that you can read it.
NOTE: For this type of label, you can use: IBM 6747-2, LEXMARK 2390, LEXMARK 2400, ZEBRA 140 or TYCO T408M
printer.
For more detailed procedure, refer to chapter 20-25-65.
(4) Installation
C. NSA931029
NOTE: You can use ABS0724 as an alternative to this identification label.

NSA931029 - 02 R
| | |
| | ------------- Color code
| ----------------- Type code | 01 = Standard
| | 02 = Skydrol resistant
------------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Color code
---------------------------------------------
| CODE | LETTERING COLOR | BACKGROUND COLOR |
|------|-----------------|------------------|
| R | WHITE | RED |
|------|-----------------|------------------|
| J | BLACK | YELLOW |
|------|-----------------|------------------|
| B | WHITE | BLUE |
|------|-----------------|------------------|
| V | WHITE | GREEN |
|------|-----------------|------------------|
| N | YELLOW | BLACK |
---------------------------------------------
(3) Installation
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Labels - P/N Characteristics ABS1475
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Labels - P/N Characteristics E0248

Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Labels - Creation of 2-hole label with a 6-hole label
LABELS - SELF-ADHESIVE OR STICK TYPE (Airbus)
LABELS - SELF-ADHESIVE OR STICK TYPE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Self-adhesive or stick labels installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
ABS0724
ABS0970
ABS5342
E0470
E0683
NSA931025
NSA931026
NSA931028
NSA931031
A. ABS0724
NOTE: You can use this label as an alternative to NSA931025-01 and -02, NSA931026/028/029/031 and E0470.
This type of label is used in areas of small contamination by phosphate ester base hydraulic fluids. (E.g. Skydrol 500B4)
ABS0724 - 035 A 075
| | | |
| | | --- Width size code
| | ------- Color code
| ----------- Height size code
-------------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
120 deg.C (248.00 deg.F) .
(b) Color code
----------------------------------------------------------------------
| COLOR CODE | BACKGROUND | LETTERING | BACKGROUND COLOR FOR LETTERS |
|------------|------------|-----------|------------------------------|
| A | White | Black | - |
|------------|------------|-----------|------------------------------|
| B | Blue | White | - |
|------------|------------|-----------|------------------------------|
| J | Yellow | Black | - |
|------------|------------|-----------|------------------------------|
| K | Blue | Black | Pink |
|------------|------------|-----------|------------------------------|
| N | Black | Yellow | - |
|------------|------------|-----------|------------------------------|
| P | Pink | Black | - |
|------------|------------|-----------|------------------------------|
| R | Red | White | - |
|------------|------------|-----------|------------------------------|
| S | Black | White | - |
|------------|------------|-----------|------------------------------|
| V | Green | White | - |
----------------------------------------------------------------------

(3) Marking
For marking, use EPSON STYLUS COLOR 3000 printer. (Refer to chapter 20-25-65)
(4) Installation
NOTE: The minimum installation temperature is

10 deg.C (50.00 deg.F) .
In areas that have contamination, apply a protective layer of varnish ( 5 mm (0.1968 in.) wide) DAN1172 around the label to seal
the edges.
B. ABS0970
NOTE: ABS0970 label must be in the correct condition and easy to read during the full life of the aircraft. If the label is damaged, it is
necessary to replace it.

ABS0970 - 21 - A
| | |
| | --- Material code
| --------- Label type code
----------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
85 deg.C (185.00 deg.F) .(For: Material code A)
150 deg.C (302.00 deg.F) . (For: No material code)
- Minimum installation temperature is
10 deg.C (50.00 deg.F) .
(b) Type code allocation table
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| SUPPORT TYPE | TYPE CODE |
|----------------|----------------------------------------------------|
| Small VUs | 01, 02, 07 |
|----------------|----------------------------------------------------|
| Other supports | 04, 15, 16, 21, 22, 25, 27, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63 |
| | 65, 67, 68* |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
68* = Available for material code 'A' and 'No code'.
(3) Material code.
--------------------------------------------------------------------
| MATERIAL CODE | MATERIAL | APPLICATION |
|---------------|----------------------------|---------------------|
| Without | Polyimide + adhesive film | Exterior, Structure |
|---------------|----------------------------|---------------------|
| A | Polyester + adhesive film | Interior |
--------------------------------------------------------------------
(4) Marking
For marking, use a heat transfer printer. (E.g.: BRADYPRINTER BP - THT - 300X Plus II)
(5) Installation
NOTE: The surface must be fully clean, without grease, and dry.
Remove the back paper from the label and apply it tightly on the surface.
NOTE: Never put dirt on the adhesive surface of the label.
In contamination areas, to give protection to the label, apply a layer of varnish (Material No. 07-018) over and around the edges
of the label on an extended area of 5 mm (0.1968 in.) .
To guarantee varnish protection, apply a second layer of varnish after the full curing of the first varnish layer. (Wait 1 hour at 20
+1 -1 deg.C (68.00 +1.80 -1.80 deg.F) )

C. ABS5342
ABS5342 A 01 WT
| | | |
| | ------- Type code
| ----------- Material code
----------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
135 deg.C (275.00 deg.F) .
(b) Color code
-----------------------------
| COLOR CODE | BACKGROUND |
|------------|--------------|
| WT | White |
|------------|--------------|
| YL | Yellow |
|------------|--------------|
| OR | Orange |
|------------|--------------|
| RD | Red |
|------------|--------------|
| BL | Blue |
|------------|--------------|
| GR | Green |
|------------|--------------|
| WP | White/purple |
-----------------------------
(c) Type code
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE CODE | LABEL TYPE |
|------------|--------------------------------------------------------|
| 01 | Tape with liner |
|------------|--------------------------------------------------------|
| 02 | Preprinted with liner and black central vertical line |
|------------|--------------------------------------------------------|
| 03 | Preprinted with liner "tip clamp" |
|------------|--------------------------------------------------------|
| 04 | Preprinted with liner "critical breakout location" |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
D. E0470
NOTE: You can use ABS0724 as an alternative to this label.
This type of label is used in non-Skydrol areas for the identification of:
- Panels and racks.
- Electrical boxes. (Small and large VUs)
- Electrical item FINs in electrical boxes. (Small and large VUs)
(Ref. Fig. 001)
E0470 A 01 R
| | | |
| | | --- Provisioning code | R = SIX system
| | | | No code = TMS90 system
| | ------- Size code
| ---------- Color code | A = White
| | P = Pink
--------------- Standard P/N

(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
-40 deg.C (-40.00 deg.F) .
125 deg.C (257.00 deg.F) .
(3) Marking
(a) For E0470 XXX, use the TMS90 system:
You must do 1 print and 2 permatizings.
(b) For E0470 XXXR, use the SIX system (with LEXMARK 2390 printer):

Identification and Characteristics
After printing, you must do 1 permatizing.

Make sure that the printing is resistant and that you can read it.
NOTE: For this type of label, you can also use: IBM 6742-2, ZEBRA 160, TYCO T408M, LEXMARK 2390 or LEXMARK
2400.
For more data, refer to chapter 20-25-65.
E. E0683
NOTE: This label is only used in non-Skydrol areas.

E0683 ML 1 Y
| | | |
| | | --- Color code | W = White
| | | | Y = Yellow
| | ------ Thickness code
| ---------- Type code
--------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
135 deg.C (275.00 deg.F) .
(3) Marking
For marking, use a typewriter.
(4) Installation
- Wind the label around the harness and shrink at
130 deg.C (266.00 deg.F) .
F. NSA931025
NOTE: You can also use ABS0724 as an alternative to the material codes 01 and 02 of this adhesive label.
This type of label is used:

- To show special precautions adjacent to optical connectors.
- For the identification of circuit breaker panels or electrical boxes. (Large and small VUs)
NSA931025 - 01 A
| | |
| | --- Size code
| ------- Material code
----------------- Standard P/N
(2) Characteristics
(a) Temperature
-55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
120 deg.C (248.00 deg.F) , and 260 deg.C (500.00 deg.F) only for material code 09.
(b) Material code
----------------------------------------------------------------
| MATERIAL | BACKGROUND | LETTERING | MATERIAL | BONDING |
| CODE | | | | |
|---------------------------------------------------------------|
| 01 | | | Plastic | Self- |
|------------| Black | White | film | adhesive |
| 02 | | | | |
|---------------------------------------------------------------|

| 03 | Black | White | | |
|---------------------------------------| | Self- |
| 04 | Red | White | | adhesive |
|---------------------------------------| | |
| 05 | White | Black | Metallic | |
|---------------------------------------| label |-----------|
| 06 | Black | White | | Bonded |
|---------------------------------------| | with |
| 07 | Red | White | | adhesive |
|---------------------------------------| | (Material |
| 08 | White | Black | | No. |
|---------------------------------------------------| 09-001B) |
| 09 | Grey | Black | Titanium | |
-----------------------------------------------------------------
In non-pressurized areas, use varnish (Material No. 07-018) to give protection to metallic labels.
(3) Installation procedure with rivets ASNA2709 for non-adhesive labels
(Ref. Fig. 002)
G. NSA931026
This type of label is used on the polymethacrylate (plexiglass) strips installed on the front face of circuit breaker panels. This label,
printed on NSA931026 material, is of the SPRINT 639 type. Specially made, it is pre-cut to the support dimensions. Each slip shows
a 10-digit code number printed on a yellow paper label, attached at the rear of the index slip. A 6 mm (0.2362 in.) hole is punched to
put the slip into position on the aircraft strip.
NSA931026 - 01
| |
| --- Code number
------------- Standard P/N
WARNING: DO NOT GET THE FLUID ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES. IF YOU DO:
- FLUSH IT AWAY WITH CLEAN WATER
- GET MEDICAL AID.
WARNING: YOU MUST ALWAYS WEAR RUBBER GLOVES WHEN YOU DO THIS PROCEDURE TO PREVENT INFECTION.
(2) Procedure
(a) Material and tools
- Petroleum ether: Petrol G
- Scalpel
- Hollow punch-outer diameter
5 mm (0.1968 in.)
(b) Installation
NOTE: There must be a good flow of air through the work area.
-
The polymethacrylate support must be cleaned and fully degreased before you install the printed adhesive slip.
-
Clean the support with a cloth made moist with petroleum ether solvent: Petrol G.
-
Select the index slip (10-digit code) that agrees with the polymethacrylate strip support in position on the panel.
- Use the scalpel tip to remove the yellow paper label and bond on the rear of polymethacrylate strip. The label will let
you find the index slip code easily if the slip is replaced.
- Remove the protective paper of the adhesive label on a length of approximately
80 mm (3.1496 in.) to 100 mm (3.9370 in.) . Start from the punched end and fold it back.
- The hole punched in the slip and the hole punched in the support must be aligned when adhesive part of the slip is
installed on the strip.
-
Apply pressure to the slip end and fully remove the protective paper. Install the label on the support.
-
With a roller, apply pressure to full surface of the printed slip.
NOTE: You must not cause contamination of the adhesive surface: do not touch with your fingers.

- When the adhesive slip is correctly attached, use a hollow punch to make holes for the screws. During this operation,
put the label on soft material with its face against this soft material.
-
Attach the strip on the panel.
-
When you apply torque, be careful not to cause crumpling or tearing of the front face of the plastic strip.
(c) Replacement of index slip

-
Remove the strip.
-
Remove the index slip and peel it away from the polymethacrylate strip.
- If the adherence is too strong, use a heat gun to melt the adhesive. Carefully increase the temperature of the surface
to approximately
60 deg.C (140.00 deg.F)
- Clean the support surface with cloth made moist with petroleum ether solvent: Petrol G. Let it air dry and install the
new index slip.
-
Install the strip on the panel.
NOTE: The gun must use a 24V power supply or you must supply the heat gun through a safety transformer with isolated
circuits.
H. NSA931028
NOTE: You can also use ABS0724 as an alternative to this self-adhesive label.

NSA931028 - 02 A
| | |
| | --- Size code
| ------- Type code | 01 = Standard
| | 02 = Skydrol resistant
----------------- Standard P/N
J. NSA931031
NOTE: You can also use ABS0724 as an alternative to this self-adhesive label.
This type of label is used in Skydrol areas and has white lettering on red background.
NSA931031 - R 01
| | |
| | --- Size code (01 or 02)
| ------- Presentation code
----------------- Standard P/N
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Self-Adhesive Labels- Characteristics E0470
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Self-Adhesive Labels - Installation of Non-adhesive Label with rivets ASNA2709 NSA931025

20-43 - SPLICES AND PRESSURE SEALS (Airbus)
SPLICES AND PRESSURE SEALS (Airbus)
SPLICES AND PRESSURE SEALS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter concerns the description, installation and identification of splices and pressure seals used on
aircraft.
A. Splices
(1) Butt splices (Ref. 20-43-11)
ABS0249
E0360
E0541
NSA936803
NSA936805
NSA936807
NSA936813
(2) Parallel splices (Ref. 20-43-12)
NSA936808
NSA936809
(3) Crimp-end splices (Ref. 20-43-13)
E0301
E0543
NSA936830
(4) Miscellaneous junction items (Ref. 20-43-19)
E0535
B. Pressure seals
(1) Pressure seals type DTP (Ref. 20-43-41)
E0073
E0739
NSA934501
NSA934502
NSA934504
(2) Pressure seals-compound filled (Ref. 20-43-42)
NSA934710
SPLICES (Airbus)
SPLICES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

WARNING: DO NOT REPAIR UNSATISFACTORY CABLES IN FUEL TANKS. SUCH REPAIR IS NOT
PERMITTED (REFER TO SFAR 88 REQUIREMENTS FOR FUEL IGNITION PREVENTION). IF YOU
FIND AN UNSATISFACTORY CABLE IN A FUAL TANK, YOU MUST REPLACE IT WITH A NEW
ONE THAT HAS THE SAME P/N.

1. General
A. Main rules
NOTE: Splicing of G routes, EFCS and Safety cables is not approved as a permanent repair. (Refer to
chapter: Repair of EFCS and Safety Cables - 20-53-27).
NOTE: As an exception, splices are allowed for M and S routes in basic design to ensure the transition
from standard cables to fire-resistant cables cables in wing fire areas.
NOTE: There are limits to the use of splices for repair:

- In general, you can use only three splices on a same length of cable for each section (between
two ends).
- For G routes, EFCS and Safety cables you can use only three splices for each electrical line.
NOTE: The splice must be in view.

Splices must be staggered along a cable loom to prevent contact between them.
Use of splices is not permitted:

-
in looms or installations that have a high degree of flexibility or movement.
-
in a wire routing with a curve (small bend radius).
-
below a cable tie.
-
below a clamp or a different type of cable support.
-
in a conduit or a different type of wire protection which does not let the splice stay in view.
-
inside connector backshells .
- below galley and/or toilet areas, unless a special device gives good protection from the infiltration of
liquids. This special device could be an umbrella or a drip loop at each end of the splice to prevent
such infiltration.
- inside Fuel Tanks .
B. Splices
(1) Butt splices (Ref. 20-43-11)
ABS0249
E0360
E0541
NSA936803
NSA936805
NSA936807
NSA936813
(2) Parallel splices (Ref. 20-43-12)
NSA936808
NSA936809
(3) Crimp-end splices (Ref. 20-43-13)
E0301
E0543
NSA936830

(4) Miscellaneous junction items (Ref. 20-43-19)

E0535
C. Pressure seals
(1) Pressure seals type DTP (Ref. 20-43-41)
E0073
E0739
NSA934501
NSA934502
NSA934504
(2) Pressure seals-compound filled (Ref. 20-43-42)
NSA934710
This chapter concerns the description, installation and identification of splices used on aircraft.
D. Butt Splices (Ref. 20-43-11)
Butt splices have the codes that follow:
ABS0249
E0360
E0541
NSA936803
NSA936805
NSA936807
NSA936813
E. Parallel Splices (Ref. 20-43-12)
Parallel splices have the codes that follow:
NSA936809
NSA936808
F. Crimp-end Splices (Ref. 20-43-13)
Crimp-end splices have the codes that follow:
E0301
E0543
NSA936830
G. Miscellaneous Junction Items (Ref. 20-43-19)
Miscellaneous Junction Items have the codes that follow:
E0535
BUTT SPLICES (Airbus)
BUTT SPLICES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Butt splices installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- ABS0249 Butt splice
- E0360RK High temperature butt splice
- E0541 Butt Splice
- NSA936803RA High temperature butt splice for copper wires
- NSA936805RE Low temperature butt splice for copper wires
- NSA936807RB Butt splice for aluminum wires
- NSA936813RH Butt splice for aluminum wires or for copper/aluminum wires.

2. ABS0249
ABS0249 A
| |____________Color or material code |A = green/Alumel
| |B = grey/Chromel
|___________________Standard P/N
(1) Temperature
C. Connection Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(1) Insulation
Do the insulation with crimp sleeves.
(2) Wire stripping
Strip the wire to the length "A".
(3) Crimping
- Use the applicable crimping tool related to the splice reference number.
- Put one end of the splice in the crimping tool die.
- Close the crimping tool handles sufficiently to hold the splice but do not tighten at this step.
- Put the stripped wire end in the splice barrel.
- Tightly hold the wire in the barrel.
- Crimp the splice. To do this, fully close the tool handles until the ratchet releases.
- Remove the splice from the crimping tool.
- Do the same procedure from step 2 for the other end of the splice.
- Do a check to make sure that the splicing is correct.
3. E0360
E0360RK2220
| |
| -------------- Reference No.| R = Splice Code
| | K = Type
| | 22 = Sequence No.
| | 20 = Size Code
|
-------------------- Standard P/N
NOTE: E0360 is an assembly which has:

- 2 sleeves NSA937210MBXXXX
- 1 splice NSA936812-XX.
(1) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 002)

(1) Insulation
- Do the insulation with the shrinkable sleeves supplied:
Install these sleeves on the cables before stripping.
Shrinking is done after crimping.
(2) Wire stripping
- Use the applicable tool.
(3) Crimping
(Ref. Fig. 003)
- Make sure that the insulation sleeves are on the cables.
- Put one end of the splice in the crimping tool die.
- Make sure that the splice is in the correct position against the positioner.
NOTE: For different barrel types, the position against the positioner is not the same.
- Close the crimping tool handles sufficiently to hold the splice in position but do not crimp at this
step.
-
Put the stripped end of the cable in the splice barrel.
-
Tightly hold the cable in the barrel.
-
Crimp the splice. To do this, fully close the tool handles until the safety ratchet releases.
-
Remove the splice from the crimping tool.
-
Do the same procedure from step 2 for the other end of the splice.
NOTE: For barrel type 4 and 5 only, the second crimping operation must be done opposite to the first
one.
For others barrel types , the two crimping operations must be along the brazing seam
centerline and on the same side.

After crimping, the gap between insulation cable and splice is 0.5 mm (0.0196 in.) max.
(4) Insulation sleeve shrinking
- Put the sleeve 1 (the shorter sleeve) in the correct position on the splice.
- Let the sleeve become cold.
- Put the sleeve 2 (the longer sleeve) in the correct position on the splice.
- Make sure that the sleeves are in the correct condition.
4. E0541
E0541-10
| |
| ------------Splice Size Code
-----------------Standard P/N
(Ref. Fig. 004)

(1) Temperature

NSA936803

(2) Materials
There are 2 types of splice available:
- Nickel-plated splice.
- Tinned splice.
(1) Insulation
- Put the shrinkable sleeve supplied on the wires before stripping.
For E0807 WX26 cable, make sure that the heat shielded sleeve ABS1471-09 is on the wires.
For connection of coaxial cable XF with DR24 cable, slide the sleeve NSA937502 and then the
shrink sleeve E0718-02 (length 30 mm (1.1811 in.) ) on the DR24 cable.
(2) Wire stripping
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(a) Preparation of E0807 WX 26 cable:
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
- Strip the external insulation over a length of
50 mm (1.9685 in.) .
- Cut the braid over a length of
15 mm (0.5905 in.) .
- Cut the wires to agree with the applicable procedure (1+1, 2+1 or 2+2).
- Strip the wire to length "A".
(b) Preparartion for connection of XF and DR24 cables:
(Ref. Fig. 011)
- Strip the DR24 cable with the cutter and cutting pliers.
(c) For other cable types:
- Strip the wire to length "A".
(3) Crimping
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(a) For connection of XF cable with DR24 cable:
(Ref. Fig. 011)
-
This is a special procedure to connect the coaxial cable XF and the DR24 cable. Before you

NSA936803
connect these two cables, do shielding continuity with a DR24 grounding cable and the
coaxial cable XF (Ref. 20-42-21 method "H"). Then:
-
Engage the conductor of the DR24 cable on one end of the E0541-10 splice.
- Engage the conductor of the XF cable on the other end of the E0541-10 splice. Keep a gap
of
1.5 mm (0.0590 in.) + or - 0.5 mm (0.0196 in.) between the insulation and the E0541-10
splice.
- Crimp each end of the E0541-10 splice with AD1377S crimping tool. The positioner of the
tool must go into the gap of
1.5 mm (0.0590 in.) .
(b) For other cable types:
- Use the applicable crimping tool.
- Make sure that the insulation sleeve is on the wires.
(For E0807 WX 26 cable, make sure that heat-shielded sleeve ABS1471-09 is on the
wires.)
- Slide the splice on the wire.
(Ref. Fig. 012)
- Make sure that the conductor is in the correct position in the splice.
- Put the splice against the end stops in the crimping tool die.
- Crimp the splice. To do this, fully close the tool handles until the safety ratchet releases.
- Make sure that the splicing is correct.
- Do the same procedure for the other end of the splice.
(Ref. Fig. 013)
NOTE: The two crimping operations must be along the brazing seam centerline and on the
same side.
(4) Insulation sleeve shrinking
NOTE: The minimum shrinking temperature for E0541 is

340 deg.C (644.00 deg.F) .
(a) For all cable types:

- Put insulation sleeve E0541 in the correct position on the splice.
- Select the applicable tool.
- Make sure that the sleeve is in the correct condition.
(b) Only for E0807 WX 26 cable and ABS1471-09 installation:
- Before shrinking, make sure that the length of the assembly (insulation to insulation) is
80 mm (3.1496 in.) .
-
Put heat-shielded sleeve ABS1471-09 on the center of the crimped assembly.
- Make sure that the tinned braid of the heat-shielded sleeve is not welded to the insulation of
the cable.
-
Shrink the sleeve with the applicable tool.
-
Increase the temperature at the center of the sleeve until it shrinks.
-
Move the hot air source to the edges of the sleeve to continue to increase the temperature

NSA936803
and shrink the sleeve. Make sure that the tin melts correctly.
-
Make sure that the sleeve is in the correct condition.
(c) For connection of the coaxial XF and DR24 cables:

(Ref. Fig. 011)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
- Slide the shrink sleeve E0718-02 onto the splice E0541-10 and retract it with a hot air
generator.
- Slide the NSA937502-02 sleeve onto the sleeve E0718-02. The sleeve must cover the two
coaxial XF cable and DR24 cable insulations.
-
Put an E0248A2-4H9P label onto the NSA937502-02 sleeve.
5. NSA936803
NSA936803 RA2220
| |
| | A = Type
| | 22 = Sequence No.
| | 20 = Wire Gauge Reference
|
------------------------ Standard P/N
NOTE: NSA936803 is an assembly which has:

- an adapter NSA936810-XX
- a sleeve NSA936811-XX
- a splice NSA936812-XX.
Two types of barrels can be available but the installation is the same.
(1) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 015)
(Ref. Fig. 016)
(1) Insulation
Do the insulation with the crimp sleeve supplied.
Install this sleeve on the wire before stripping.
Sleeve crimping is done after splice crimping.
(2) Wire stripping
- Strip the wire to the length "A".
(3) Crimping
- Make sure that the insulation sleeve is installed on the wire.
- If necessary, install the adapters on the wire.
- For splice RA1212 on a gauge 14 wire only:
- Put the stripped wire in the ferrule
- Put the assembly in the splice barrel

NSA936803
- Tightly hold the wire in the barrel

- Put the assembly in the crimping tool die
- Make sure that the splice is in the correct position against the positioner
- Close the crimping tool.

- For other splice references:
- Put one end of the splice in the crimping tool die
- Close the crimping tool handles sufficiently to hold the splice in position but do not crimp at this step.
- Put the stripped end of the wire in the splice barrel.
- Crimp the splice. To do this, fully close the tool handles until the safety ratchet releases.
- Do the same procedure from step 2 for the other side of the splice.
NOTE: For barrel type 1 only, the second crimping operation must be done opposite to the first one.
For barrel type 2, the two crimping operations must be along the brazing seam centerline and
on the same side.

(4) Insulation sleeve crimping
-
Put the insulation sleeve in the correct position.
- Install the sealing adapters below the sleeve. They must show out of the sleeve along a
dimension of
0.80 mm (0.0314 in.) .
-
Put one side of the insulation sleeve in the crimping die.
- Apply a light force to the tool handles. Do this carefully so as not to change the position of the
assembled items.
-
Crimp the sleeve. To do this, fully close the tool handles until the ratchet releases.
-
Remove the assembly from the crimping tool.
-
Do the same procedure from step 2 for the other end of the sleeve.
-
Do a check to make sure that the sleeves are in the correct condition.
6. NSA936805
NSA936805 RE2420
| |
| | E = Type
| | 24 = Minimum wire gauge
| | 20 = Maximum wire gauge
|
----------------------- Standard P/N

NSA936803
NOTE: If necessary, use a nylon adapter to adjust the diameter of the wire.
(1) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 017)
(1) Insulation
The insulation is done with the color-coded nylon sleeve.
(2) Wire stripping
(3) Crimping
- If necessary, put the adapter on the wire.

NSA936807
-
Put one splice end in the crimping tool die.
step.
-
Put the stripped end of the wire in the splice barrel. Make sure it touches the stop.
-
Tightly hold the wire in the barrel.
-
-
Remove the splice from the crimping tool.
-
-
Do a check to make sure that the splicing is correct.
7. NSA936807
NSA936807 RB0808
| |
| | B = Type
| | 08 = Minimum wire gauge
| | 07 = Maximum wire gauge
|
----------------------- Standard P/N
- This type of splice is used to connect aluminum wires or aluminum with copper wires.
(1) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 018)
(1) Insulation
-
Do the insulation with shrinkable sleeves.
- For the connection of a gauge 4 aluminum wire to a gauge 6 copper wire, do the insulation with
KYNAR sleeve ASNE0718.
(2) Wire stripping
(3) Crimping
-
Use the applicable crimping tool related to the splice reference number.
-
Remove the locking pin and open the crimping head.
-

NSA936807
Remove the plastic blanking plug which closes the aluminum barrel.
-
Be careful not to move the inhibitor.
-
Put one end of the splice in the crimping die.
-
Close the head and install the locking pin.
step.
- Engage the two insulation sleeves (
70 mm (2.7559 in.) and 80 mm (3.1496 in.) ) on the wire (For connection of an aluminum wire to
a copper wire).
-
Remove and keep the opposite blanking plug. Make sure that the wire is in the correct position.
-
Put the stripped end of the wire in the splice barrel.
-
-
-
Install the blanking plug.
-
Remove the locking pin.
-
Open the crimping head and remove the splice from the crimping machine.
-
Remove the inhibitor, if necessary.
-
- Do a check of the crimping. Crimping is correct when:
- you can see the figure related to the wire gauge on the splice.
- this figure is in the correct position.
(4) Sleeve shrinking
- Put the shorter sleeve (
70 mm (2.7559 in.) ) in the correct position on the splice.
You must see the sleeve along a length of 0.5 mm (0.0196 in.) minimum on each side of the
wire.
-
-
Let the sleeve become cold.
- Put the longer sleeve (
80 mm (3.1496 in.) ) in the correct position on the splice.
-
-
Make sure that the sleeves are in the correct condition.
8. NSA936813
NSA936813 RH0604
| |

NSA936807
| | H = Type
| | 06 = Copper wire gauge
| | 04 = Aluminum wire gauge
|
----------------------- Standard P/N
- This type of splice is used to connect gauge 4 aluminum wires or gauge 4 aluminum wire with gauge
6 copper wire.
Example:
Aluminum wires: E0438 YV 4, NSA935308 YU 4, NSA935290 YA 4.
Copper wires: E0262DK 6, NSA935131DG 6.
(1) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 019)
(1) Insulation
- Do the insulation with 2 shrinkable sleeves E0484MJ with E0718 (the use of these two sleeves
together is mandatory) or sleeve ABS0916 (or equivalent).
Install these sleeves on the wires before stripping.
(2) Wire stripping
- Strip the wire to the length "A" of
15 mm (0.5905 in.) from the wire end.
- Make a mark
25 mm (0.9842 in.) from the wire end.
(3) Crimping
(Ref. Fig. 019)
-
Use the applicable crimping tool, head and die.
-
Make sure that the insulation sleeves are engaged on the wires.
- Put one end of the splice in the crimping tool die with the cross marking aligned with the
crimping die.
-
Lightly push the tool pedal to hold the splice in position but do not crimp at this step.
- Put the stripped wire end in the splice barrel. The
25 mm (0.9842 in.) mark must be at the splice end.
-
-
Crimp the splice. To do this, push the pedal until the ratchet releases.
-
Remove the splice from the crimping head.
- Crimp the other end of the splice as follows:
- Turn the crimping head by 180 deg.
- Put the other end of the splice in the crimping head. Turn the splice by 180 deg. and do the
second crimping in a direction opposite that of the first crimping.
- Do a check of the crimping. Make sure that:
- The nipple is present
- The dimension "B" is smaller than 1 mm (0.0393 in.) after crimping.

NSA936807
(4) Sleeve shrinking

- Put the sleeve E0484 in the correct position on the splice.
- Let the sleeve become cold.
- Put the sleeve E0718 in the correct position on the splice.
- Make sure that the sleeves are in the correct condition.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Splices - Stripping and Crimping Tools ABS0249
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Butt Splices - P/N Characteristics and Tools E0360
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Butt Splices - Crimping Tools E0360
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Butt Splices - P/N Characteristics and Tools E0541
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Butt Splices - Installation Procedure for WX Cable - Method 1 + 1 - E0541
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Butt Splices - Installation Procedure for XF Cable E0541
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Butt Splices - Crimping Procedure - E0541
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Butt Splices - Crimping Procedure - E0541
Figure 014.1 / Graphic SH 014.1 Butt Splices - Installation Procedure for XF Cable E0541
Figure 015.1 / Graphic SH 015.1 Butt Splices - P/N Characteristics and Stripping Tools NSA936803
Figure 016.1 / Graphic SH 016.1 Butt Splices - Crimping Tools NSA936803
Figure 017.1 / Graphic SH 017.1 Butt Splices - P/N Characteristics and Tools NSA936805

NSA936807
PARALLEL SPLICES (Airbus)
PARALLEL SPLICES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The desired result is a connection between several cables through a splice without changes to the cable
electrical and mechanical characteristics.
Parallel splices installed on aircraft have the code that follow:
- NSA936809RG High Temperature Parallel Splice
- NSA936808RF Low Temperature Parallel Splice
NOTE: Parallel splices are for copper cables only and must not be used for:
- Large thermocouple cables.
- Large gauge differences.
2. NSA936809
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
NSA936809 RG 0002
| | |
| | -------- Item number
| -------------- Type code
---------------------- Standard P/N
(1) Temperature
(1) Wire stripping
(Ref. Fig. 001)
- Select the applicable insulation sleeve "B".

NSA936808
-
Install the sleeve (heat-shrinkable) on the wire before stripping.
- If necessary, to increase the diameter of the cable, you can add one or two compensation
sleeves. Slide the compensation sleeve(s) NSA937493 onto the cable before stripping.
-
Strip the wires to the length "A" with the applicable tool.
(2) Crimping procedure and tools

(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
- Select the applicable splice according to the wire section.
NOTE: A table gives the list of wire gauges and the related sections (Ref. 20-32-21)
-
Select the applicable tool and setting for the splice.
-
Make sure that it is in good condition.
- Position and center the splice in the indenter or between the tool dies. If the brazing seam is
visible on the splice, place and center it opposite to the punch.
-
Squeeze the tool handles to hold the splice in the crimping position.
-
Insert the stripped cables in the splice and make sure that all strands are inserted.
- Move the two handles together or apply pressure to perform the crimping operation. Make sure
complete crimping is obtained (ratchet release or automatic opening of dies).
-
- Make sure that the connection is in the correct condition and that:
The cable insulator does not penetrate into the splice barrel.
The crimping indents are centered.
The stripped conductors do not protrude excessively (visible length < 1.5 mm (0.0590 in.) ).
(3) Insulation of splices
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
If necessary, shrink the compensation sleeve(s).
- Slide the insulation sleeve "B" in position and shrink it.
3. NSA936808
(Ref. Fig. 004)
NOTE: Can be replaced by NSA936809
NSA936808 RF 0001
| | |
| | -------- Item number
| -------------- Type code
---------------------- Standard P/N

NSA936808
(1) Temperature
(1) Wire stripping
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
-
Select the applicable insulation sleeve "B".
-
Install the sleeve (heat-shrinkable) on the wire before stripping.
- If necessary, to increase the diameter of the cables, you can add one or two compensation
sleeves. Slide the compensation sleeve(s) NSA937502 onto the cable before stripping.
-
Strip the wires to the length "A" with the applicable tool.
(2) Crimping procedure and tools

(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
- Select the applicable splice according to the wire section
NOTE: : A table gives the list of wire gauges and related sections (Ref. 20-32-21)
-
Select the tool and setting applicable for the splice.
-
Make sure that it is in good conditions.
- Position and center the splice in the indenter or between the tool dies. If the brazing seam is
visible on the splice, place and center it opposite to the punch.
-
Squeeze the tool handles to hold the splice in the crimping position.
-
Insert the stripped cables in the splice and make sure that all strands are inserted.
- Move the two handles together or apply pressure to perform the crimping operation. Make sure
complete crimping is obtained (ratchet release or automatic opening of dies).
-
- Make sure that the connection is in the correct condition and that :
.The cable insulator does not penetrate into the splice barrel.
.The crimping indents are centered.
.The stripped conductors do not prodrute excessively (visible length < 1.5 mm (0.0590 in.) ).
(3) Insulation of splices
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
- If necessary, shrink the compensation sleeve(s).
- Slide the insulation sleeve "B" in position and shrink it.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Parallel Splices - Stripping and Shrinking Tools NSA936809
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Parallel Splices - Crimping Tools NSA936809

NSA936808
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Parallel Splices - Examples of Uses of Compensation Sleeves NSA936809
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Parallel Splices - P/N Characteristics NSA936808
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Parallel Splices - Crimping and Shrinking Tools NSA936808
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Parallel Splices - Examples of Uses of Compensation Sleeves NSA936808
CRIMP END SPLICES (Airbus)
CRIMP END SPLICES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
NOTE: All splices are subject to specific limitations, before you do a splice repair, refer to Main Rules 20-53-
29.
Crimp end splices installed on aircraft have the following codes :

NSA936830 1 Conductor crimped end splices
E0301 2 Conductors crimped end splices
E0543 3 Conductors crimped end splices
2. Crimped end Splices
A. NSA936830
(Ref. Fig. 001)
NSA936830 - 22
| |
| ------------- Contact size
|
------------------------ Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Minimum operating temperature is : -55 deg.C (-67.00 deg.F) .
Maximum operating temperature is : 175 deg.C (347.00 deg.F) .
B. E0301
(Ref. Fig. 001)
E0301 - 01
| |
| ------------- Reference No.
|
---------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature

NSA936808

C. E0543
(Ref. Fig. 001)
E0543 - 01
| |
| ------------- Reference No.
|
---------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
3. Connection Table
(Ref. Fig. 002)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Crimp End Splices - Contacts Layout E0301, E0543 and NSA936830
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Crimp end Splices - Connection Table
MISCELLANEOUS CABLE JUNCTION ITEMS (Airbus)
MISCELLANEOUS CABLE JUNCTION ITEMS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Miscellaneous junction items installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- E0535 sealed junction with integrated resistor
2. E0535
(Ref. Fig. 001)
E0535 - W5 - 10 K J
| | | | |
| | | | ------ Tolerance code: F = 1%
| | | | G = 2%
| | | | J = 5%
| | | |
| | | --------- Unit code: U = ohm
| | | K = Kohm
| | |
| | ------------ Resistor value
| ----------------- Resistor power code: W25 = 0.25W
| W5 = 0.5W
| 1W = 1W
------------------------ Standard P/N

NSA936808
(1) Temperature
C. Connection table
(Ref. Fig. 002)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Miscellaneous Junction Items - P/N Characteristics E0535
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Miscellaneous Junction Items - Connection Table
PRESSURE SEALS (Airbus)
PRESSURE SEALS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter concerns the description, installation and identification of pressure seals used on aircraft.
A. Grommet type Pressure Seals (Ref. 20-43-41)
B. Compound Filled Pressure Seals (Ref. 20-43-42)
C. Adhesive Sealant Pressure Seal (Ref. 20-43-43)
2. Installation procedure
(Ref. Fig. 001)
A. Positioning

20-43-41 - D.T.P. - TYPE PRESSURE SEALS (Airbus)
- The pressure seal must be installed on the interface mounting plate with two half parts to make removal
easier.
-
It is recommended to install the mounting plate on the pressurised side.
-
The flange of the pressure seals must be installed on the pressurised side.
- A minimum of
20 mm (0.7874 in.) ( 50 mm (1.9685 in.) for the pressure seal without backshell) of the secured bundle
straight part, aligned with the center line of the pressure seal, must be installed on both sides of the
pressure seal.
B. The pressure seal filling rate must take into account:
- Harness section.
- + 20% of the harness section for spare.
-
2.5 mm (0.0984 in.) clearance between spare surface and mechanical part.
C. Positioning of end of conduit
(Ref. Fig. 002)
NOTE: You must prevent contact between the conduit(s) and the pressure seal.
(1) Harness with one conduit protection

- End of conduit must be as near as possible (
5 mm (0.1968 in.) maxi) to the pressure seal.
(2) Harness with several conduits as protection:
- End of conduits can be installed at
10 mm (0.3937 in.) to the pressure seal.
D. Specific cases
(1) On ABS1571
A 10 mm (0.3937 in.) length of the conduit end must be installed inside pressure seal.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Pressure Seal - Installation Procedure
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Prsessure Seal - End of Conduit Positioning
D.T.P. - TYPE PRESSURE SEALS (Airbus)
D.T.P. - TYPE PRESSURE SEALS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The grommet-type pressure seals installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- ABS0717 Feed-Through
ABS0834 Feed-Through
ABS1128 Feed-Through
E0073 (ex NSA934700) Feed-Through
-
ABS0634 Fireproof
ABS0681 Fireproof

E0739 Fireproof
NSA934501 Fireproof (2 passages)
NOTE: The use of small gauge cables in large diameter pressure seal cavities makes the installation of a heat-
shrink sleeve NSA937210 or equivalent on the cable necessary to make up for the difference in diameter
and to ensure sealing.
2. Feed-Through Pressure Seals

A. ABS0717
ABS0717 - 01
| 02
| |
| ------------------ Type code
--------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Minimum operating temperature is: -65 deg.C (-85.00 deg.F) .
Maximum operating temperature is: 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) .
(b) Cavity arrangement code
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(a) Preparation
-
Make sure that the installation area is clean.
- Attach the pressure seal to the structure, while you make sure that the direction of installation of
the grommet is correct.
-
Make sure that the O-ring is installed and that it is in the correct position in the groove.
- Tighten the nut of the grommet to between
0.36 m.daN (31.85 lbf.in) and 0.42 m.daN (37.16 lbf.in) .
-
Safety with a lockwire.
-
Engage the accessories (threaded ring, backshell with strain-relief, etc.) onto the cable harness.
-
Cut the wires at right angles.
NOTE: The wire cut must be clean, with no protruding parts or burns, to prevent damage to the
grommet of the pressure seal.
(b) Insertion of the electrical wires

- The tools and electrical wires must be clean and must be aligned with the axis of the hole during
insertion to prevent damage to the grommet.
NOTE: Do not use lubricants for the installation of the wires in the grommets.
- Use your hands to pull the wires through the holes of the grommet (do not use the installation
tool).
NOTE:
Cables with a rough surface (e.g. E0438YV) can cause damage to the grommet during

insertion. Thus, you must install a

200 mm (7.8740 in.) shrinkable sleeve (e.g. NSA937210MB0500 or MB0600) in the hole of
the grommet before you install the cables. You can then pull the cables easily through the
shrinkable sleeve in the grommet. After installation of the cables, carefully cut the shrinkable
sleeve open longitudinally or pull it to the end of the cables to remove it.
- Slowly pull the wires through the pressure seal until they are in their correct position.
- Seal the holes not used with blind cables or sealing plugs.
- Install the accessories (threaded ring, backshell with strain-relief, etc.) on the pressure seal.
B. ABS0834
ABS0834 - 24 - N 01
| | | |
| | | ------------ Part type code
| | -------------- Finish code N = Nickel
| ------------------ Shell size code
--------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(a) Preparation
- Remove the grease from the surfaces and clean them with a lint-free cloth and a small quantity
of cleaning agent (Material No. 11-003).
- Attach the pressure seal to the structure, while you make sure that the direction of installation of
the grommet is correct.
-
Make sure that the O-ring is installed and that it is in the correct position in the groove.
- Tighten the nut of the grommet to between
1.23 m.daN (108.84 lbf.in) and 1.37 m.daN (10.10 lbf.ft) .
-
Engage the accessories (threaded ring, backshell with strain-relief, etc.) onto the cable harness.
(b) Insertion of the electrical wires

- Cut the wires at right angles.
NOTE: The wire cut must be clean, with no protruding parts or burns, to prevent damage to the
grommet of the pressure seal.
-
Wind tape around the end of the cable.
- The tools and electrical wires must be clean and must be aligned with the axis of the hole during
insertion to prevent damage to the grommet.
NOTE: Do not use lubricants for the installation of the wires in the grommets.
- Engage the wire.

- Slowly pull the wire through the pressure seal until it is in its final position.
- Safety the cable with the cable tie so that the cable will not move in the pressure seal.
- Inject compound (Material No 09-002B) around the base of the wires.

- Clean off unwanted sealant with solvent (Material No 11-003).

(4) Wire addition procedure
- Clean and remove the grease from the by-pass tube with solvent (Material No 11-003).
- Wind tape around the end of the wire.
- Engage the wire to be added in the by-pass tube.
- Slowly pull the wire through the by-pass tube until it is in its final position.
- Remove the tape around the end of the wire.
- Safety the wire with the cable tie so that the wire will not move in the by-pass tube.
- Fill the by-pass tube with compound (Material No 09-002B).
- Clean off unwanted sealant with solvent (Material No 11-003).
(5) Wire replacement procedure
- Cut the wire to be replaced on each side of the pressure seal.
- Install a shrinkable sleeve or end cap on each end of the wire.
- Add the new wire through the by-pass tube in accordance with the cable addition procedure.
NOTE: In some high-density cable harnesses, it may not be possible to add replacement cables without
the removal of the damaged cables. This will depend on the number and type of the cables to be
replaced.
C. ABS1128
NOTE: Use pressure seal ABS1128 for feeder G and E route.

ABS1128 A 01 A 01
| | | | |
| | | | ------- Arrangement code
| | | ---------- Color code: A = Black anodized
| | -------------- Shell size code
| ----------------- Type code
----------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
- Engage the accessories related to the pressure seal. (Identification sleeves, rings or backshells)
- Strip the cable over a length of
10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
- Put a
15 mm (0.5905 in.) long heat-shrinkable sleeve E0126 (or equivalent) on the stripped part.
- Heat shrink the sleeve.
- Pull each cable into the related cavity, you can use insertion tool P/N 057-0820-00 if delivered.
- Remove tool 057-0820-00 after each cable insertion. (If you use insertion tool)
NOTE: Use tool 057-0820-00 with cable size 01 and 04.
NOTE: Hold and pull the cables at right angles to the pressure seal faces.
- Engage the cables slowly into the pressure seal to prevent friction heat.
- Engage the sealing plugs sufficiently so that they are centered in the pressure seal.

- Plug cavities that are not used.

- Tighten the rings and backshells. (On aluminum structure, TORQUE value is
5 m.daN (36.87 lbf.ft) )
- Remove the sleeve E0126 (or equivalent) used to make it easier to pull the cables through.
(4) Cable addition procedure
- Remove the sealing plug from cavity not used.
- Refer to the cable installation procedure to insert the cable to be added.
(5) Cable replacement procedure

Fireproof Pressure Seal
- Cut the cable that you must replace on each side of the pressure seal.
- Install a shrinkable sleeve or end cap on each end of the cable.
- Remove the sealing plug from the cavity not used.
- Refer to the cable installation procedure to add the new cable through the cavity not used.
- If no cavities are available, cut and remove the cable you must replace and insert the new cable.
D. E0073 (ex NSA934700)
NOTE: Use pressure seal E0073 for feeder G and E route.

E0073 - 14 - 4 T N
| | | | |
| | | | ------- Protective coating
| | | ---------- Variant code (Grommet and O-ring in special
| | | silicone)
| | ------------- Arrangement code | 4 : Size
| | |12 : Cavity
| ------------------- Casing code
---------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
NOTE: To use small gauge cables in large-diameter pressure seal cavities, it is necessary to install a heat-shrink sleeve
NSA937210 or equivalent on the cable to adjust for the difference in diameter and to make sure that sealing is
correct.
- Engage the accessories related to the pressure seal (identification sleeves, rings or backshells).
- Strip the wire over a length of
10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
- Put a
15 mm (0.5905 in.) long heat-shrinkable sleeve E0126 (or equivalent) on the stripped part.
- Heat shrink the sleeve.
- Pull each wire into the related cavity.
- In all cavities not used, install a sealing plug NSA934701.
- Tighten the rings and backshells.
- Remove the sleeve E0126 (or equivalent) used to make it easier to pull the wires through.
NOTE: Hold and pull the wires at right angles to the pressure seal faces.
- Engage the wires slowly into the pressure seal to prevent friction heat.
- Engage the sealing plugs sufficiently so that they are centered in the pressure seal.
(4) Wire addition procedure
- Remove the sealing plug from the cavity not used.
- Refer to the wire installation procedure to insert the wire to be added.
(5) Wire replacement procedure
- Cut the wire to be replaced on each side of the pressure seal.
- Install a shrinkable sleeve or end cap on each end of the wire.
- Remove the sealing plug from the unused cavity.

- Add the new wire through the unused cavity in accordance with the wire installation procedure.
- If no cavities are available, cut and remove the wire to be replaced and insert the new wire.
(6) Attachement torque values
(Ref. Fig. 011)
3. Fireproof Pressure Seal
NOTE: Used in non-pressurised area to isolate area from high temperature.
A. ABS0634
(Ref. Fig. 012)
ABS0634 - A
| |
| ------------- Type code (A or B)
--------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Resistance to fire is 1100 deg.C (2012.00 deg.F) for 20 mn.
(b) Cavity arrangements
(Ref. Fig. 012)
B. ABS0681
(Ref. Fig. 013)
ABS0681 - 01
| |
| ------------ Type code
--------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
NOTE: Resistance to fire is

1100 deg.C (2012.00 deg.F) for 1100 deg.C (2012.00 deg.F) for 20 min

(Ref. Fig. 014)
(c) Attachment torque values
----------------------------------------------------------
| TYPE | TIGHTENING TORQUE m.daN (lbf.in) |
| CODE |----------------------------------------|
| | MIN. | MAX. |
|--------------------------------------------------------|
| 01 | | |
|---------------| 2.4 (212.418) | 2.9 (256.671) |
| 02 | | |
|---------------|--------------------|-------------------|
| 03 | 1.6 (141.612) | 1.8 (159.313) |
|---------------|--------------------|-------------------|
| 04 | | |
|---------------| 4.68 (414.215) | 5.72 (506.263) |
| 05 | | |
|---------------|--------------------|-------------------|
| 06 | | |
|---------------| | |
| 07 | 2.4 (212.418) | 2.9 (256.671) |

|---------------| | |
| 08 | | |
----------------------------------------------------------
C. E0739
E0739 - 01
| |
| ------------ Type code
--------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Continuous operating temperature is -65 deg.C (-85.00 deg.F) to 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) .
(b) Cavity arrangement
(Ref. Fig. 015)
D. NSA934501 (2 passages)
NSA934501 - 02
| |
| ------------ Type code
--------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 016)
(3) Attachment torque values
(a) TORQUE to between 3.2 m.daN (23.59 lbf.ft) and 3.9 m.daN (28.76 lbf.ft) .
E. NSA934502 (13 passages)
NSA934502 - 13
| |
| ------------ Type code
--------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 016)
F. NSA934504 (4 passages)
NSA934504 - 01
| |
| ------------ Type code

--------------------- Standard P/N

(a) Temperature
(b) Type code
--------------------------------------------------
| PART CODE | CABLE SIZE | CABLES NUMBER |
|------------------------------------------------|
| 01 | 00 | 4 |
|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| 02 | 1 | 4 |
|---------------|----------------|---------------|
| | 0 | 3 |
| 03 |----------------|---------------|
| | 1 | 1 |
|---------------|----------------|-------------- |
| | 0 | 3 |
| 04 |----------------|---------------|
| | 4 | 1 |
--------------------------------------------------
(c) Cavity arrangements
(Ref. Fig. 016)
G. Installation Procedure
NOTE: The cables that go through the fire seal must have a (
20 mm (0.7874 in.) ) straight part after the fire seal and be secured by an attachment as near as possible, so that the
cable and the edge of the fire seal do not touch.
(1) Flexible Wires (Gauge < or = 20)

(Ref. Fig. 010)
- Cut the cables and make sure that there are no burrs or wires that come out.
- Install the wire in the guiding tool.
- Guide the tool nose through the cavity until the tool main body protrudes a small distance from the opposite side.
- Remove the removable nose.
- Carefully feed the cable through the tool.
- Carefully remove the tool from the bung.
(2) Other Wires

20-43-42 - PRESSURE SEALS - COMPOUND FILLED (Airbus)
(Ref. Fig. 010)

Prepare the end of the conductor as follows:
- Strip the wire over a length of
10 mm (0.3937 in.) .
- Put a
15 mm (0.5905 in.) long heat shrinkable sleeve NSA937211-XXX on the stripped part.
- Heat-shrink the sleeve.
- Push the cable through the feed through.
- Carefully pull on the cable until it is in the correct position.
(3) Insulation
(Ref. Fig. 010)
You must install a sealing plug in all unwired cavities.
All the smallest wires must be prepared to ensure insulation with a shrink sleeve. If more than one sleeve is required, the outer
sleeve must be longer than the inner sleeve.
H. Wire addition procedure
- When one unwired cavity is available, hold the sealing plug and insert the new wire.
J. Wire replacement procedure
- Cut the wire at each end of the pressure seal, hold the damaged wire and insert the new one.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Cavity Arrangements ABS0717
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Cavity Arrangement ABS0834
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Cavity Arrangement ABS1128
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Pressure Seal - Installation ABS1128
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Cavity Arrangements E0073
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Sealing Plug and Insulation E0073, NSA934502 and NSA934504
Figure 011.1 / Graphic SH 011.1 Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Attachement Torque Values E0073
Figure 012.1 / Graphic SH 012.1 Fireproof Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Cavity Arrangement ABS0634
Figure 013.1 / Graphic SH 013.1 Fireproof Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - P/N Characteristics ABS0681
Figure 014.1 / Graphic SH 014.1 Fireproof Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Cavity Arrangements ABS0681
Figure 015.1 / Graphic SH 015.1 Fireproof Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Cavity Arrangement E0739
Figure 016.1 / Graphic SH 016.1 Fireproof Pressure Seal - Grommet Type - Cavity Arrangements NSA934501, NSA934502 and NSA934504
PRESSURE SEALS - COMPOUND FILLED (Airbus)

PRESSURE SEALS - COMPOUND FILLED - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Compound-filled pressure seals installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- ABS0122 Aluminum shell for high temperature
- NSA934710 Nylon shell for low temperature.
2. ABS0122
This pressure seal has an aluminum shell with an O-Ring and a hexagonal nut.
ABS0122 28
| |
| ------------------ Shell size
-------------------------- Standard P/N
(Ref. Fig. 001)
(1) Temperature
Operating temperature is -55 DEG.C (-67.00 DEG.F) to 200 DEG.C (392.00 DEG.F) .
(2) Material:
Shell and nut: Aluminum alloy, nickel plated
O-Ring Elastomeric-fluorosilicone.
WARNING: USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS ONLY WITH A GOOD FLOW OF
AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA.
DO NOT SMOKE.
C. Procedure
(1) Materials and tools
- Adhesive tape (Not specific)
- Temporary cable tie: NSA935401
- SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-052) or (Material No.: 09-012E)
- CLEANING AGENTS (Material No.: 11-003)
- BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUNDS (Material No.: 08-004)
- Extrusion gun: SEMCO model 650
- SEMCO cartridge
- Dia.
4 mm (0.1574 in.) polyethylene nozzle
CAUTION: DO THE PREPARATION PROCEDURE VERY CAREFULLY. IF THE SURFACE OF THE PARTS IS NOT FULLY CLEAN
AND DRY, THE SEALANT WILL NOT BOND CORRECTLY TO THE PARTS. THE PRESSURE SEAL WILL THUS NOT
BE CORRECTLY SEALED.
(2) Preparation
- Find the point of passage on the cable bundle and make a mark to show its position.
- Remove the cable ties at this point along a length sufficient for easy access to the cables in the middle of the bundle (minimum
75 mm (2.9527 in.) on the two sides of the mark).
- Clean and remove the grease from all the parts to be reactivated, with CLEANING AGENTS (Material No.: 11-003) or
equivalent.
- The surfaces must be fully dry before you apply the SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-052) or (Material No.: 09-012E).
- If necessary, install a spring spacer.
- Cut the spring spacers to a length slightly shorter than that of the seal fitting.
- Put the spring spacers on each cable gauge 20 and less. For cable gauges 22 and 24, install two cables into one spring
spacer.
NOTE: If a PTFE conduit is used for harness modification, the two sides of the conduit must be closed and sealed.
- The conduit length out of the pressure seal must be

60 mm (2.3622 in.) to give two repairs.

(3) Preparation of the Compound

- In a container, weigh the necessary quantity of SEALANTS base (Material No.: 09-052) or (Material No.: 09-012E) (Refer to
tables that follow).
- Add the applicable weight of SEALANTS hardener (Material No.: 09-052) or (Material No.: 09-012E) (Refer to tables that
follow).
-----------------------------------------
| MATERIAL 09-052 |
|---------------------------------------|
| 2 % Mix - 12 minutes POT LIFE |
|---------------------------------------|
| BASE WEIGHT | HARDENER WEIGHT |
| RTV9161 | N9162 |
|---------------------------------------|
| 50 g (1.76 oz) | 1g (0.03 oz) |
| 100 g (3.52 oz) | 2g (0.07 oz) |
| 150 g (5.29 oz) | 3g (0.1 oz) |
| 200 g (7.05 oz) | 4g (0.14 oz) |
| 250 g (8.81 oz) | 5g (0.17 oz) |
| 300 g (10.58 oz) | 6g (0.21 oz) |
-----------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| MATERIAL 09-012E |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| 10% Mix | 0.1% Mix |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| BASE WEIGHT | HARDENER WEIGHT | BASE WEIGHT | HARDENER WEIGHT |
| RTV88 | RTV9910 | RTV88 | DBT |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| 50 g (1.76 oz) | 5 g (0.17 oz) | 50 g (1.76 oz) | 0.5 g (0.01 oz) |
| 100 g (3.52 oz) | 10 g (0.35 oz) | 100 g (3.52 oz) | 1 g (0.03 oz) |
| 150 g (5.29 oz) | 15 g (0.53 oz) | 150 g (5.29 oz) | 1.5 g (0.05 oz) |
| 200 g (7.05 oz) | 20 g (0.70 oz) | 200 g (7.05 oz) | 2 g (0.07 oz) |
| 250 g (8.81 oz) | 25 g (0.88 oz) | 250 g (8.81 oz) | 2.5 g (0.08 oz) |
| 300 g (10.58 oz) | 30 g (1.05 oz) | 300 g (10.58 oz) | 3 g (0.10 oz |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- Fully mix the two components (e.g. with a drill with a mixer end fitting).
- When you have a homogeneous mixture, apply the compound.
NOTE: The pot life of the compound is related to the quantity of catalyst in the base product.
Select the proportions in relation to the time necessary to do the work. For cable addition or repair procedures:
-
When (Material No.: 09-052) is used, it is recommended to use the 2 % mix which gives a pot life of 12 minutes.
- When (Material No.: 09-012E) is used, it is recommended to use the 10% mix (with hardener RTV9910) or the 0.1%
mix (with hardener DBT) which gives a pot life of 60 minutes minimum.
NOTE: For (Material No.: 09-052), the compound is fully cured after 72 hours.
Heating in an oven can decrease the curing time, as shown in the table below for a 2 % mix:
----------------------------------------
| MATERIAL 09-052 |
----------------------------------------
| TEMPERATURE | CURING TIME |
|--------------------------------------|
| 30 DEG.C (86 DEG.F) | 6 hours |
| 35 DEG.C (95 DEG.F) | 5.5 hours |
| 40 DEG.C (104 DEG.F) | 5 hours |
| 45 DEG.C (113 DEG.F) | 4.5 hours |
| 50 DEG.C (122 DEG.F) | 4 hours |
----------------------------------------
NOTE: For (Material No.: 09-012E), the compound is fully cured after 24 hours.
You can increase the pot life if you put the mixed material in a refrigerator with a minimum temperature of 0 deg.C (32.00
deg.F) .
You can decrease the cure time with a low heat of up to 93 deg.C (199.40 deg.F) maximum.
WARNING: DO NOT GET THE COMPOUND ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES.

IF YOU GET IT ON YOUR SKIN:

- REMOVE AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE WITH A CLEAN CLOTH

- REMOVE THE REMAINING COMPOUND WITH SOAP AND FLUSH WITH
CLEAN WATER.
IF YOU GET IT IN YOUR EYES:
- GET MEDICAL AID IF NECESSARY.
(4) Sealing procedure

(Ref. Fig. 002)
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
- Loosen the threaded end fitting that holds the protective sheath and move it sufficiently away from the body of the pressure
seal.
-
Install a colored cable tie (NSA935401) on the cables at the nominal position of the base bearing face on the bulkhead.
- On the pressure seal, measure and record the distance 'D' between the base bearing face and the outer end of the threaded
part.
-
Put a split plastic washer on the cables at distance 'D' from the colored cable tie.
- Seal the washer with adhesive tape and a thin bead of BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUNDS (Material No.: 08-004) to the
cables.
-
Put a temporary cable tie behind the plastic washer to hold the cables and prevent washer movement.
-
Let the BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUNDS (Material No.: 08-004) dry.
-
Remove the colored cable tie from the bulkhead bearing face.
- Make sure that the parts on which you must apply the SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-052) or (Material No.: 09-012E) are clean
and dry.
- Apply a thin layer of SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-052) or (Material No.: 09-012E) to the inner face of the pressure seal, to the
cables and to the spring spacers, if installed.
- Let it dry for 40 minutes to 90 minutes. (Refer to the product data sheet).
NOTE: Obey the venting time of the adhesive before you fill with the sealants. The cables must be moved apart during this time so
they do not bond together. If there is contamination of the adhesive, clean it off and do the operation again.
- Move the body of the pressure seal against the plastic washer.
NOTE: There must be no movement of the washer. There must be no lateral or tensile loads applied to the cables.
- Put the coupling nut of the sheath on the pressure seal.

- Put the pressure seal in the vertical position.
- Move the cables apart then fill with SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-052) or (Material No.: 09-012E).
- Hold the extrusion gun (SEMCO 650) nozzle constantly in contact with the compound surface to prevent air inclusion.
- Squeeze the cables together with a cable tie NSA935401.
- Adjust the cables to the center of the pressure seal.

NSA934710
-
Complete the filling operation.
- Wait until SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-052) or (Material No.: 09-012E) is fully cured
(approximately 72 hours at room temperature).
NOTE: There must be no movement of the pressure seal (and no lateral or tensile loads applied on
the cables) during the two subsequent hours, at a minimum.
- Loosen the coupling nut.

- Remove the cable tie behind the washer.
- Remove the plastic washer.
- Remove BONDING AND ADHESIVE COMPOUNDS (Material No.: 08-004) runs, if necessary.
- Remove SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-052) or (Material No.: 09-012E) runs, if necessary.
- Put the coupling nut of the sheath on the pressure seal.
- Clean the installation area.
- Install the pressure seal with O-ring and related nut.
NOTE: The O-ring must be in the correct position in the pressure seal groove and not damaged
during installation.
- TORQUE the nut to the applicable torque value.

- Safety the nut with lock-wire.
D. Associated Items
- Backshell ABS1365 and ABS1366. (Refer to 20-33-45)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
NOTE: If the pressure seal backshell holds the straight part of the bundle, it must be oriented on the
radius curvature side.
3. NSA934710
This pressure seal has two symmetrical nylon half-shells with two flange shapes. The half-shells have several
filling injection holes. The flange of the pressure seal is installed on the pressurized side.
NSA934710 T 11
| | |
| | ------------- Type code
| ------------------ Part code
-------------------------- Standard P/N
(1) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 006)
Operating temperature is 105 DEG.C (221.00 DEG.F)
(2) Part code and type
T = Seal
E = Spring spacer
WARNING: USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS

ONLY WITH A GOOD FLOW OF AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA.

NSA934710

DO NOT SMOKE.
C. Procedure
NOTE: Spare conduit ABS0887 can be installed in the pressure seal to make installation of the cables
during the lifetime of the aircraft easier.
(Ref. Fig. 007)
- Spare conduits must be installed on bundles. The conduit length out of the pressure seal
must be
60 mm (2.3622 in.) to give two repairs.
- The two sides of the spare conduit must be closed and sealed with material number: 09-
002B.
- The spare conduit must be attached on the two sides of the pressure seal on the harness
with lacing tape NSA8420.

- Adhesive tape (Not specific)
- SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-002B) or (Material No.: 09-016)
- CLEANING AGENTS (Material No.: 11-016 or 11-026 or 11-027) or equivalent
- Extrusion gun: SEMCO model 650 or PYLES model 950
- Dia
4 mm (0.1574 in.) polyethylene nozzle
- SEMCO cartridge
- Protective adhesive tape
50 mm (1.9685 in.) width
- Crepe paper adhesive tape
19 mm (0.7480 in.) width.
CAUTION: DO THE PREPARATION PROCEDURE VERY CAREFULLY. IF THE SURFACE OF THE

PARTS IS NOT FULLY CLEAN AND DRY, THE SEALANT WILL NOT BOND CORRECTLY
TO THE PARTS. THE PRESSURE SEAL WILL THUS NOT BE CORRECTLY SEALED.
(2) Preparation
-
Find the point of passage on the cable bundle and make a mark to show its position.
- Remove the cable ties at this point along a length sufficient for easy access to the cables in the
middle of the bundle (minimum
75 mm (2.9527 in.) on the two sides of the mark).
- Clean all the parts to be reactivated, with CLEANING AGENTS (Material No.: 11-016 or 11-026
or 11-027) or equivalent.
- The surfaces must be fully dry before you apply the SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-002B) or
(Material No.: 09-016).
(3) Preparation of the compound
- In a container, weigh the necessary quantity of SEALANTS base (Material No.: 09-002B) or
(Material No.: 09-016).
- Add the applicable weight of SEALANTS accelerator (Material No.: 09-002B) or (Material No.:
09-016) (Refer to table that follows).

NSA934710
----------------------------------------------
| MAT | PART OF | PART OF |
| NUMBER | BASE | ACCELERATOR |
|--------------------------------------------|
| 09-002B | 7.5 | 1 |
|--------------------------------------------|
| 09-016 | 10 | 1 |
----------------------------------------------
- Fully mix the two components (e.g. with a drill with a mixer end fitting).
- When you have a homogeneous mixture, apply the compound.
NOTE: The pot life of the compound is related to the quantity of catalyst in the base product.
Select the proportions in relation to the time necessary to do the work.
The cure time is also related to the background temperature.
- Before filling, clean and remove the grease from all the parts to be reactivated, with CLEANING
AGENTS (Material No.: 11-003) or equivalent.
-
The surfaces must be fully dry before you apply the SEALANTS.
WARNING: DO NOT GET THE COMPOUND ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES.

IF YOU GET IT ON YOUR SKIN:
- REMOVE AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE WITH A CLEAN CLOTH
- REMOVE THE REMAINING COMPOUND WITH SOAP AND FLUSH WITH
CLEAN WATER.
IF YOU GET IT IN YOUR EYES:
- GET MEDICAL AID IF NECESSARY.
(4) Sealing procedure

(Ref. Fig. 008)
- Cut the spring spacers to a length slightly shorter than that of the seal fitting (
25 mm (0.9842 in.) to 40 mm (1.5748 in.) in relation with the pressure seal shell).
- Put the spring spacers on each cable gauge 20 and less, on two cable gauges 22 and 24 or on
each twisted bundle. (Ref. detail A)
-
Put the spacers in position in the seal fitting. (Ref. detail B)
NOTE: Obey the venting time of the adhesive before you fill with the sealants. The cables must be
moved apart during this time so they do not bond together. If there is contamination of the
adhesive, clean it off and do the operation again.
- Put the gun nozzle between each cable and move it while you extrude the compound to apply
SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-002B) or (Material No.: 09-016) on all the cables.
- Make sure that the nozzle is at the surface of the product level to prevent the formation of air
bubbles. The necessary pressure is approximately
3 bar (43.5113 psi) .
-
Install the half shells (1 and 2) of the seal when the assembly is correctly filled.
- Use a cable clamp and tighten it slowly until the half-shells are correctly put together, then
discard the clamp. (Ref. detail C)
NOTE: During the filling and curing procedures that follow, the half shells must stay correctly aligned.
There must be no lateral or tensile loads applied to the cables.

NSA934710
- Wind protective adhesive tape (

50 mm (1.9685 in.) width) three times around the end of the seal fitting. (Ref. detail D)
- Close with adhesive tape and crepe paper (
19 mm (0.7480 in.) width). (Ref. detail E)
-
Do the same operation at the other end of the seal.
-
Make a hole in the tape at one of the injection holes of the seal fitting. (Ref. detail E)
- Fill the flange with SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-002B) or (Material No.: 09-016) and attach the
seal fitting.
- Inject the SEALANTS (Material No.: 09-002B) or (Material No.: 09-016) through the first hole
until it shows between the gaps or on the cables.
-
Close the hole with adhesive tape.
-
Make another hole and do the filling operation again.
-
Do the same with all the holes of the seal fitting.
- After the curing time (approximately 72 hours at room temperature), remove the tape and clean
off unwanted sealant with CLEANING AGENTS (Material No.: 11-016 or 11-026 or 11-027) or
equivalent.
-
Make a seal all around the pressure seal flange.
-
Seal all the pressure seal attachments.
WARNING: USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS ONLY
WITH A GOOD FLOW OF AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA.
DO NOT SMOKE.
4. Cable Addition Procedure

A. Tools
- Cutter
- Gimlet-type manual tool.
B. Consumable Material
- Adhesive tape - High temperature ASN-A3565,
19 mm (0.7480 in.)
- CLEANING AGENTS (Material No.: 11-016 or 11-026 or 11-027) or equivalent.
C. Job Set-Up
(Ref. Fig. 009)
- Check if you can add new cable.
To do this, the diameter of the harness already installed plus that of the cable to be added must be
less than the interior diameter of the pressure seal. There is usually enough space for 3 18-gauge
cables.
In addition, the axis of the harness must be perpendicular to the structure that supports the pressure

NSA934710
seal.
NOTE: If you cannot add new cable, you can:

-
Remove the sealant.
- Clean the pressure seal and each cable of the harness already installed with a CLEANING
AGENTS. (Material NO.: 11-016 or 11-026 or 11-027)
-
Add the new cable on the harness.
-
Do the sealing procedure again.
CAUTION: ALWAYS POINT THE TOOL TO THE EDGE OF THE SHELL TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE
CABLES.
ONLY MANUAL TOOLS ARE PERMITTED.
D. Addition Procedure
(Ref. Fig. 009)
(Ref. Fig. 010)
-
Remove and open the semi-shels of the pressure seal.
- Put a protection of high temperature adhesive tape on the cable bundle for
100 mm (3.9370 in.) approx. on each side of the pressure seal.
-
With a cutter, make a horizontal cut in the compound to get a flat surface.
- Clean and degrease the pressure seal with a CLEANING AGENTS (Material No.: 11-016 or 11-026
or 11-027) or equivalent.
-
If necessary, slide the spring spacer(s) on the cable(s) to be added.
-
Install the cable(s) on the pressure seal.
-
Close the semi shell of the pressure seal.
-
Fill with compound.
-
Remove the cable protections.
WARNING: USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS ONLY
WITH A GOOD FLOW OF AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA.
DO NOT SMOKE.
5. Cable Replacement Procedure

20-43-43 - ADHESIVE SEALANT PRESSURE SEAL (Airbus)
A. Tools
- Scissors
- Cutter.
- Gimlet-type manual tool.
B. Consumable Material
- Adhesive tape - High temperature ASN-A3565,
19 mm (0.7480 in.) .
- CLEANING AGENTS (Material No.: 11-016 or 11-026 or 11-027) or equivalent.
C. Replacement Procedure
- Cut the cable to be replaced on each side of the pressure seal.
- Install a shrinkable sleeve or end cap on each end of the cable.
- Add the new cable in accordance with the cable addition procedure.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Pressure Seal (Compound Filled) - P/N Characteristics ABS0122
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Pressure Seal (Compound Filled) - Sealing Procedure ABS0122
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Pressure Seal (Compound Filled) - P/N Characteristics ABS1365 and 1366
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Pressure Seal (Compound Filled) - Characteristics NSA934710
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Pressure Seal (Compound Filled) - Spare conduit Addition procedure NSA934710
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Pressure Seal (Compound Filled) - Sealing Procedure NSA934710
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Pressure Seal(Compound Filled) - Cable Addition Procedure ABS0122 or NSA934710
Figure 010.1 / Graphic SH 010.1 Pressure Seal (Compound Filled) - Cable Addition Procedure ABS0122 or NSA934710
ADHESIVE SEALANT PRESSURE SEAL (Airbus)
ADHESIVE SEALANT PRESSURE SEAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The adhesive sealant pressure seals installed on the aircraft have the codes that follow:
- ABS1378
- ABS1571
2. ABS1378
(Ref. Fig. 001)
NOTE: P/N no more procurable after april 2006, replaced by ABS1571.
ABS1378 - 1 - B
| | |
| | ------------- Harness size code
| ----------------- Shell size code
----------------------- Standard P/N

(1) Temperature
Minimum operating temperature is -55 DEG.C (-67.00 DEG.F) .
Maximum operating temperature is 105 DEG.C (221.00 DEG.F) .
(2) Shell, harness and accessory sizes
NOTE: You must not use the ABS1378 pressure seal with E0438YV cables.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SHELL | HARNESS | HARNESS DIAMETER |
| SIZE | SIZE | ----------------------------------------------------------|
| CODE | CODE | NON-PREPARED mm (in.) | PREPARED mm (in.) |
|-------|---------|-----------------------------|-----------------------------|
| | A | 0 to 12 (0 to 0.472) | 12 to 14 (0.472 to 0.551) |
| 1 |---------|-----------------------------|-----------------------------|
| | B | 10 to 22 (0.393 to 0.866) | 24 to 26 (0.944 to 1.023) |
|-------|---------|-----------------------------|-----------------------------|
| | C | 15 to 27 (0.590 to 1.063) | 30 to 32 (1.181 to 1.260) |
| 2 |---------|-----------------------------|-----------------------------|
| | D | 25 to 35 (0.984 to 1.378) | 39 to 41 (1.535 to 1.614) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------------------------------------------------
| SHELL | SIZE OF PERMITTED ACCESSORY |
| SIZE |-------------------------------------|
| CODE | REAR FACE | FRONT FACE |
|-----------|------------------|------------------|
| 1 | 24 | 28 |
|-----------|------------------|------------------|
| 2 | 28 | 36 |
---------------------------------------------------
C. Procedure
- LATEX gloves EPIKA (or equivalent)
- Protection goggles ASTROFLEX AF4000 (or equivalent)
- ETHYL ACETATE (Material No. 11-570) or alcohol
- Adhesive sealant ABS5499-01 (SCOTCH 3M 5313)
- Self-welding tape ABS5334 or DEUTSCH 609-0032-50
- Shaping tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00
- Fastening wrench DEUTSCH 057-0854-00
- Dynamometric torque wrench TORQUELEADER TBN65,
0.5 m.daN (44.24 lbf.in) to 2.5 m.daN (18.43 lbf.ft) or equivalent with 9 X 12 attachment
- Wrench adapter size 42 with 9 X 12 end fitting DEUTSCH 057-0853-42
- Wrench adapter size 29 with 9 X 12 end fitting DEUTSCH 057-0852-29
- Dynamometric torque wrench TORQUELEADER TSN55,
1.5 m.daN (11.06 lbf.ft) - 5.5 m.daN (40.56 lbf.ft) or equivalent
- Hook wrench adapter DULAC ET NOZIERES SADI & TESSIERI & COLOMBINI 9142729637 (size 28) or 9142729634 (size
36)
- Dynamometric screwdriver,
0.2 m.daN (17.69 lbf.in) with 6.35 mm (0.2500 in.) square pin (not specific)
- Dynamometric torque wrench, end 6 sides
2.5 mm (0.0984 in.) , 0.05 m.daN (4.42 lbf.in) (not specific)
- Tape measure (not specific)
- Scissors FACOM 841 or equivalent
- Rule (not specific)
WARNING: USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS ONLY WITH A GOOD FLOW
OF AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA.
DO NOT SMOKE.
(2) Preparation
(Ref. Fig. 002)

- If there will be no conduits (e.g. ABS0887 or NSA935805) used for segregation on each side of the pressure seal, go directly to
(3).
-
It is not permitted to put a conduit directly through a pressure seal.
(a) Step 1:
- Install all the cables and conduits on the form board.
(b) Step 2:
- Put a mark of the structure reference on one cable.
(c) Step 3:
-
Install all the cables and conduits in one half shell of the pressure seal.
-
Put a mark on the conduits at the two ends of the pressure seal.
- With a cutter, cut and discard the parts of conduits between the two marks that identify the pressure seal ends. Be very
careful not to cause damage to the cables.
NOTE: You must not install end caps NSA935829 at the ends of conduits ABS0887 installed in the pressure seal.
(d) Step 4:
If use of shrinking sleeves ABS0916 is specified in the drawing to give protection to the cables in the pressure seal, you must
install the shrinking sleeves so they go 20 mm (0.7874 in.) minimum into the conduits.
WARNING: USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS ONLY WITH A GOOD FLOW
OF AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA.
DO NOT SMOKE.
(3) Installation
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(a) Step 1:
- Cut approximately
80 mm (3.1496 in.) of black adhesive sealant ABS5499-01.
If the group of cables you will prepare is less than 80 mm (3.1496 in.) in length (juxtaposed cables), the length of the
adhesive sealant you will cut will be approximately 5 mm (0.1968 in.) larger than the width of the cables.
(b) Step 2:
- Identify the position of the panel with a colored mark
100 mm (3.9370 in.) from the panel.
-
76 mm (2.9921 in.) from the colored mark, put the cables in the middle of the sealant and press them flat (without overlap).
Make sure that none of the two ends are covered.
- Cut each end of the sealant
2 mm (0.0787 in.) from the cables.
NOTE: For large cable gauges, make sure there is some space between the cables to make sure that there is a layer of sealant
on all the periphery of each cable.
(c) Step 3:
- On the first layer of cables, install a second piece of adhesive sealant and press the cables.
- Remove the protective tape from this sealant.
- Install a new layer of cables.
- Do these operations as many times as necessary until all cables are installed.
- Complete with a piece of adhesive sealant. Make sure that you remove the protective film.
(d) Step 4:
- Press the cables and roll them up to make a cylindrical harness.
- Remove the protective film from the first piece of adhesive sealant.
(e) Step 5:
- Remove the protective film from the ABS5334 self-welding tape.
- Wrap the harness with one layer of tape ABS5334 with a minimum overlap of 51%.

- The tape applied must have a minimum length of

145 mm (5.7086 in.) and must be a maximum of 20 mm (0.7874 in.) from the colored mark.
- You must complete the ends of the tape with two turns of the tape on the same position.
NOTE: The sealant must not come out when you wrap with the tape.
(f) Step 6:
- Install the harness in the tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00. Make sure that the distance between the colored mark and the grip
strap axis is
76 mm (2.9921 in.) .
- Torque with a screw driver to
0.2 m.daN (17.69 lbf.in) (do not tighten the mechanism too much).
The side screw of the slide must not align with the red mark of the tool.
-
Remove the tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00.
(g) Step 7:
- Measure the circumference of the harness
76 mm (2.9921 in.) from the colored mark and find the diameter of the harness to be obtained (dia: D):
------------------------------------------------------------------------
| HARNESS | MEASURED CIRCUMFERENCE | DIAMETER TO BE OBTAINED |
| SIZE CODE | mm (in.) | (DIA. D) mm (in.) |
|------------|-----------------------------|---------------------------|
| A | 37 to 44 (1.456 to 1.732) | 12 to 14 (0.472 to 0.551) |
|------------|-----------------------------|---------------------------|
| B | 75 to 82 (2.952 to 3.230) | 24 to 26 (0.945 to 1.023) |
|------------|-----------------------------|---------------------------|
| C | 94 to 101 (3.700 to 3.976) | 30 to 32 (1.181 to 1.260) |
|------------|-----------------------------|---------------------------|
| D | 122 to 129 (4.803 to 5.078) | 39 to 41 (1.535 to 1.614) |
------------------------------------------------------------------------
- If necessary, add self-welding tape ABS5334 at the center of the wrapping to adjust and then reshape to get the applicable
diameter.
(4) Installation
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(a) Step 8:

ABS1571
- Move the grip and tow to

94 mm (3.7007 in.) from the colored mark.
(b) Step 9:
- Move the bush and install it against the grip and tow.
- Make sure that the text on the bush and the grip and tow is written in the same direction.
(c) Step 10:
- Engage the assembly into the half box.
(d) Step 11:
- Close with the second half box and tighten the 4 screws to
0.05 m.daN (4.42 lbf.in) .
- On the back screw side of the pressure seal, wind silicone tape NSA935403 or ASNA5107 on the harness to get a diameter that
is almost the same but more than the diameter of the cable tie support of the back screw.
(e) Step 12:
- Install the pressure seal in the tool DEUTSCH 057-0854-00 to lock it in rotation.
- Tighten the back screw with the tool DEUTSCH 057-0852-29 or 057-0853-42 to torque as follows:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SHELL SIZE CODE | BACK SCREW TORQUE VALUE |
|-------------------|----------------------------------------------------|
| 1 | 20 m.N (+ or - 3) (177 lbf.in (+ or - 27)) |
|-------------------|----------------------------------------------------|
| 2 | 25 m.N (+ or - 3.7) (221 lbf.in (+ or - 33)) |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
(f) Step 13:
- Install the pressure seal in the panel cut-out and tighten the nut with hook wrench 9142729637 (size 28) or 9142729634 (size 36)
and TORQUE as follows:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SHELL SIZE CODE | NUT TORQUE VALUE |
|-------------------|---------------------------------------------------|
| 1 | 20 m.N (+ or - 2) (177 lbf.in (+ or - 18)) |
|-------------------|---------------------------------------------------|
| 2 | 25 m.N (+ or - 2.5) (221 lbf.in (+ or - 22)) |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
(g) Step 14:
- Install the cable tie NSA935401 with the head on the side opposite the cable tie support.
(5) Installation with a cable with ABS0887 or NSA935805 protection
(Ref. Fig. 007)
A maximum length of 10 mm (0.3937 in.) of the convoluted conduit ABS0887 or NSA935805 is engaged in the pressure seal.
WARNING: USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS ONLY WITH A GOOD FLOW OF AIR
THROUGH THE WORK AREA.
DO NOT SMOKE.
(6) Added cable

-
Fully disassemble the pressure-seal.
- With a non-aggressive tool (e.g. scissors with round edges), cut the self-welding tape along its length to get access to the adhesive
sealant.
-
Remove the self-welding tape.
-
Add, without overlap, the new cables on the periphery of the harness.
-
Cover them with a piece of adhesive sealant.
-
Install some new self-welding tape layers (refer to para. 2.C.(2)(e)) and continue the installation procedure.

ABS1571

DO NOT SMOKE.
(7) Cable replacement

-
Fully disassemble the pressure-seal.
- With a non-aggressive tool (e.g. scissors with round edges) cut the self-welding tape along its length to get access to the adhesive
sealant.
-
Remove the self-welding tape and the adhesive sealant.
-
Separate the harness and clean the cables with ETHYL ACETATE (Material No. 11-570) or ALCOHOL.
-
Replace the damaged cables.
-
Prepare the harness (refer to para. 2.C.(2)).
-
Install the pressure seal (refer to para. 2.C.(3)).
NOTE: You can disassemble/assemble the pressure seal 10 times maximum but you must replace the grip and tow with a new one each
time (you cannot use the grip and tow again).
- Grip and tow set for assembly:

----------------------------------------------------------------
| HARNESS | PREPARED HARNESS DIAMETER | GRIP AND TOW SET |
| SIZE CODE | mm (in.) | P/N |
|-----------|---------------------------|----------------------|
| A | 12 to 14 (0.471 to 0.551) | 609-0037-12 |
|-----------|---------------------------|----------------------|
| B | 24 to 26 (0.945 to 1.023) | 609-0037-22 |
|-----------|---------------------------|----------------------|
| C | 30 to 32 (1.181 to 1.260) | 609-0037-27 |
|-----------|---------------------------|----------------------|
| D | 39 to 41 (1.535 to 1.614) | 609-0037-35 |
----------------------------------------------------------------
D. Related items
- Backshells ABS1359, ABS1365 and ABS1366. (For ABS1365 and ABS1366,refer to 20-33-45)
(Ref. Fig. 008)
NOTE: If the pressure seal backshell holds the straight part of the harness, it must be on the radius curvature side.
3. ABS1571
(Ref. Fig. 009)
ABS1571 - 01 B 01
| | | |
| | | ------- Overbraiding accessory code
| | --------- Harness size code
| ----------- Shell size code
------------------- Standard P/N
(1) Temperature
Minimum operating temperature is -55 DEG.C (-67.00 DEG.F) .
Maximum operating temperature is 105 DEG.C (221.00 DEG.F) .
(2) Shell, harness and accessory sizes
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | HARNESS DIAMETER |
| SHELL | HARNESS |-------------------------------------------------------|
| SIZE | SIZE | NON-PREPARED mm (in.) | PREPARED mm (in.) |
| CODE | CODE | | |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| | A | 0 to 12 (0 to 0.472) | 12 to 14 (0.472 to 0.551) |

ABS1571
| 01 |---------|---------------------------|---------------------------|
| 11* | B | 10 to 22 (0.394 to 0.866) | 22 to 24 (0.866 to 0.945) |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| | C | 15 to 27 (0.59 to 1.062) | 27 to 29 (1.063 to 1.142) |
| 02 |---------|---------------------------|---------------------------|
| | D | 25 to 35 (0.984 to 1.378) | 35 to 37 (1.378 to 1.457) |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
* For maintenance application, to replace ABS1378-1.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
| OVERBRAIDING ACCESSORY CODE | REAR FACE | FRONT FACE | BACKSCREW |
| | | | KIT CODE |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------|-----------|
| Without code | Without | Without | |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------| G01 |
| 01 | Without | With | |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------| or |
| 02 | With | Without | |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------| G02 |
| 03 | With | With | |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------|-----------|
| 04 | Thread adapter | Without | G01 |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------|-----------|
| 05 | Without | Without | |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------| G03 |
| 06 | Without | With | |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------| or |
| 07 | With | Without | |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------| G04 |
| 08 | With | With | |
|-----------------------------|----------------|-------------|-----------|
| 09 | Thread adapter | Without | G03 |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SHELL | SIZE OF PERMITTED ACCESSORY |
| SIZE |-----------------------------------------|
| CODE | REAR FACE | FRONT FACE |
|------------------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| 01 | 20 | 28 |
|------------------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| 02 | 28 | 36 |
|------------------------------|---------------------|-------------------|
| 11 | 24 | 28 |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
C. Procedure
(1) Material and tools
-
LATEX gloves EPIKA. (Or equivalent)
-
Protection goggles ASTROFLEX AF4000. (Or equivalent)
-
Adhesive sealant ABS5499-01 (SCOTCH 3M 5313)
-
Self-welding tape ABS5334.
-
Shaping tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00.
-
Cutter.
-
Scissors FACOM 841 or similar.
-
Rule. (Not specific)
-
Tape measure. (Not specific)
- Dynamometric torque wrench, capacity
0.2 m.daN (17.69 lbf.in) to 0.35 m.daN (30.97 lbf.in) .
-
Fastening wrench DEUTSCH 057-0898-00.
-
Dynamometric arm
0.5 m.daN (44.24 lbf.in) to 2.5 m.daN (18.43 lbf.ft) with 9x12 DEUTSCH ends:

ABS1571
057-0901-03 for size 01.

057-0902-04 for size 02.
- Dynamometric torque wrench, end 6 sides 7/64, capacity
0.15 m.daN (13.27 lbf.in) to 0.165 m.daN (14.60 lbf.in) .
- Dynamometric torque wrench, box crowfoot attachment SNAP-ON 2" AN850832B (or DEUTSCH 057-0899-03) for sizes 01 and 11
and 2 5/8" AN850842B (or DEUTSCH 057-0900-04) for size 02.
-
Silicone tape NSA935403.
-
ETHYL ACETATE (Material No. 11-570) or ALCOHOL. (To replace the cables)
DO NOT SMOKE.
(2) Preparation
(Ref. Fig. 002)
- If there will be no conduits (e.g. ABS0887 or NSA935805) used for segregation on each side of the pressure seal, go directly to (3).
- It is not permitted to put a conduit directly through a pressure seal.
(a) Step 1:
- Install all the cables and conduits on the form board.
(b) Step 2:
- Put a mark of the structure reference on one cable.
(c) Step 3:
-
Install all the cables and conduits in one half shell of the pressure seal.
-
Put a mark on the conduits at the two ends of the pressure seal.
- With a cutter, cut and discard the parts of conduits between the two marks that identify the pressure seal ends. Be very careful
not to cause damage to the cables.
NOTE: You must not install end caps NSA935829 at the ends of conduits ABS0887 installed in the pressure seal.
(d) Step 4:
If use of shrinking sleeves ABS0916 is specified in the drawing to give protection to the cables in the pressure seal, you must install
the shrinking sleeves so they go 20 mm (0.7874 in.) minimum into the conduits.
(3) Installation
(Ref. Fig. 010)
(Ref. Fig. 011)
(Ref. Fig. 012)
(Ref. Fig. 013)
(Ref. Fig. 014)
(Ref. Fig. 015)
(a) Step 1:
- Cut approximately
80 mm (3.1496 in.) of black adhesive sealant ABS5499-01.
If the group of cables you will prepare is less than 80 mm (3.1496 in.) in length (juxtaposed cables), the length of the adhesive
sealant you will cut will be approximately 5 mm (0.1968 in.) larger than the width of the cables.
(b) Step 2:
- To identify the position of the structure and the orientation of the pressure seal (pressurized/non-pressurized area) add a colored
mark
114 mm (4.4881 in.) from the structure reference mark.
-
90 mm (3.5433 in.) +/- 3 mm (0.1181 in.) from the colored mark, put the cables in the middle of the sealant and press them flat
(without overlap). Make sure that the two ends are not covered for approximately 2 mm (0.0787 in.) .

ABS1571
NOTE: If you use multicore twisted cables, you must open them locally so the sealant tape will be put between the cable cores.
NOTE: For large cable gauges, you must make sure that there is some space between the cables. This is to make sure that there is a
layer of sealant on the full periphery of each cable.
(c) Step 3:
- On the first layer of cables, install a second piece of adhesive sealant and press the cables.
- Remove the protective tape from this sealant.
- Install a new layer of cables (If necessary).
- Do these operations as many times as necessary until all cables are installed.
- Complete with a piece of adhesive sealant. Make sure that you remove the protective film.
(d) Step 4:
- Press the cables and roll them up to make a cylindrical harness.
- Remove the protective film from the top sealant tape.
(e) Step 5:
-
Remove the protective film from the ABS5334 black self-welding tape.
-
To cover the sealant tape and the harness, stretch the ABS5334 tape up to 250% with an overlap between layers of 40 to 50 %.
- The applied tape must have a minimum length of
230 mm (9.0551 in.) when overbraided accessories are used or 145 mm (5.7086 in.) when overbraided accessories are not used. It
must be at a maximum distance of 20 mm (0.7874 in.) from the colored mark.
(f) Step 6:
- Install the harness in the tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00. Make sure that the distance between the colored mark and the grip strap axis
is
90 mm (3.5433 in.) + or - 3 mm (0.1181 in.) .
- Shape the harness with an automatic screwdriver then with a torque screwdriver to a TORQUE value of
0.2 m.daN (17.69 lbf.in) . If the harness is made of multi-core twisted cables, TORQUE to a value of 0.35 m.daN (30.97 lbf.in) .
- You must do the tightening procedure 3 times with 30 seconds between each time you tighten to make sure that you give the harness
a compact shape.
NOTE: Be careful not to tighten the mechanism too much. The grip stop mark must not align with the red mark on the tool.
- Remove the tool DEUTSCH 057-0750-00.

(g) Step 7:
- Measure the circumference of the harness at
90 mm (3.5433 in.) from the colored mark and find the diameter to be obtained (dia: D):
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
| HARNESS | MEASURED CIRCUMFERENCE | DIAMETER TO BE OBTAINED |
| SIZE CODE | mm (in.) | (DIA. D) mm (in.) |
|------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| A | 37 to 44 | 12 to 14 |
| | (1.457 to 1.732) | (0.472 to 0.551) |
|------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| B | 69 to 75 | 22 to 24 |
| | (2.716 to 2.953) | (0.866 to 0.945) |
|------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| C | 85 to 92 | 27 to 29 |
| | (3.346 to 3.622) | (1.063 to 1.142) |
|------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| D | 110 to 117 | 35 to 37 |
| | (4.331 to 4.606) | (1.378 to 1.457) |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
- If necessary, add self-welding tape ABS5334 at the center of the wrapping to adjust and then reshape to get the applicable diameter.
(h) Step 8:
- Move the grip and tow to
108 mm (4.2519 in.) (+ or - 3 mm (0.1181 in.) ) from the colored mark.
(i) Step 9:
- Move the bush and install it against the grip and tow.
- Make sure that the text on the bush and the grip and tow is written in the same direction.
- Put the assembly in the half box without screws.
- Close with the second half box and tighten the 4 screws to
0.15 m.daN (13.27 lbf.in) min. - 0.165 m.daN (14.60 lbf.in) max. with a dynamometric torque wrench, end 6 sides 7/64.
(j) Step 10:
- On the back screw side of the pressure seal, wind silicone tape NSA935403 or ASNA5107 tape on the harness to get a diameter that
is almost the same but more than the diameter of the cable tie support of the back screw.

ABS1571
(k) Step 11:

- Put the pressure seal in DEUTSCH 057-0898-00 or equivalent to lock it in rotation.
- Assemble the back screw and tighten to a torque as specified below with a dynamometric arm with 9x12 DEUTSCH ends.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SHELL SIZE CODE | TORQUE VALUE | DEUTSCH ENDS |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| 01/11 | 2 m.daN (+ or - 0.2) | 057-0901-03 |
| |(17.699 lbf.in. (+ or - 1.769))| |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| 02 | 2.5 m.daN (+ or - 0.2) | 057-0902-04 |
| |(22.124 lbf.in. (+ or - 1.769))| |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(l) Step 12:
- Install cable tie NSA935401 with the head on the side opposite the cable tie support.
(m) Step 13:
1 Harness without overbraid
- If the harness does not have overbraiding and if no backshell is used, put the applicable overbraiding accessory on the harness
and then slide it over the pressure seal. Make sure that you do not cause damage to the cable insulation.
-
Wind self-welding tape ABS5334 on the overbraiding accessory.
-
When the overbraiding accessory is correctly attached in the correct position, install a cable tie NSA935401 at each end.
2 Harness with overbraid

- Put and slide the applicable overbraiding accessory over the pressure seal. Make sure that you do not cause damage to the
cable insulation.
- Wind self-amalgamating tape ABS5334 on the whole overbraiding accessory. Make sure that you do not cover the whole of
pressure seal part.
-
Put the harness braid over the pressure seal against the housing edge of the pressure seal.
-
Install a metallic clamp strip E0805-02.
-
Cover the metallic clamp with three layers of self-amalgamating tape ABS5334.
(n) Step 14:

- Install the pressure seal in the panel cut-out and tighten with a dynamometric torque wrench with box crowfoot attachment as shown
below:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| SHELL | TORQUE | BOX CROWFOOT ATTACHMENT |
| SIZE CODE | VALUE | |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| 01/11 | 2 m.daN (+ or - 0.2) | SNAP-ON 2" AN850832B |
| |(17.699 lbf.in. (+ or - 1.769)| DEUTSCH 057-0899-03 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| 02 | 2.5 m.daN (+ or - 0.2) | SNAP-ON 2 5/8" AN850842B |
| |(22.124 lbf.in. (+ or - 1.769)| DEUTSCH 057-0900-04 |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(4) Cables added or repaired
It is possible to change the harness to add or remove cables with disassembly of the pressure seal.
Before you assemble the pressure seal, replace the grip and tow with a new one as shown in the table that follows:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
| SHELL | HARNESS | PREPARED HARNESS | GRIP AND TOW |
| SIZE CODE | SIZE CODE | DIAMETER | DEUTSCH SET |
| | | mm (in.) | P/N |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| | A | 12 to 14 | 054-0032-12 |
| | | (0.47 to 0.55) | |
| 01/11 |-------------|----------------------|------------------|
| | B | 22 to 24 | 054-0032-22 |
| | | (0.87 to 0.94) | |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| | C | 27 to 29 | 054-0032-27 |
| | | (1.06 to 1.14) | |
| 02 |-------------------------------------------------------|
| | D | 35 to 37 | 054-0032-35 |
| | | (1.38 to 1.46) | |
-----------------------------------------------------------------------

ABS1571

DO NOT SMOKE.
(5) Added cables

- Fully disassemble the pressure seal.
sealant.
- Remove the self-welding tape.
- Add, without overlap, the new cables on the periphery of the harness.
- Use a piece of adhesive sealant to give them protection.
- Install some new self-welding tape layers (refer to para. 3.C.(3)(e)) and continue the installation procedure.
DO NOT SMOKE.
(6) Cable replacement

- Fully disassemble the pressure seal.
sealant.
- Remove the self-welding tape and the adhesive sealant.
- Separate the harness and clean the cables with ETHYL ACETATE (material No. 11-570) or ALCOHOL.
- Replace the damaged cables.
- Prepare the harness (refer to para. 3.C.(2)) and continue the preparation and installation procedure.
D. Related items
- Backshells ABS1358, ABS1359, ABS1365, ABS1366, EN3660-003, EN3660-004 and EN3660-005.
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Adhesive Sealant Pressure Seal - P/N Characteristics ABS1378
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Adhesive Sealant Pressure Seal - Preparation with Conduits ABS1378 and ABS1571
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Adhesive Sealant Pressure Seal - Preparation ABS1378
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Adhesive Sealant Pressure Seal - Installation ABS1378
Figure 007.1 / Graphic SH 007.1 Adhesive Sealant Pressure Seal - Installation with a Convoluted Conduit ABS0887 ABS1378
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Adhesive Sealant Pressure Seal - P/N Characteristics ABS1365 and ABS1366
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Adhesive Sealant Pressure Seal - P/N Characteristics ABS1571

ABS1571

20-44 - CONNECTORS, TERMINAL BLOCKS AND GROUNDING ITEMS
(Airbus)
CONNECTORS, TERMINAL BLOCKS AND GROUNDING ITEMS (Airbus)
CONNECTORS, TERMINAL BLOCKS AND GROUNDING ITEMS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
The chapters that follow concern the description, installation and identification of different connectors used on aircraft.
NOTE: Precautions using connectors and routing

To prevent errors when similar connectors are in the same area, each connector has a mechanical coding.
To prevent cross connections when there is a distance of less than 300 mm (11.8110 in.) between connectors, the connectors must
have different sizes, polarizations or contact arrangements.
If this is not possible, a minimum number of 10 connectors must be polarized before you use the same key way position.
The length of cable can be sufficiently reduced to prevent any incorrect connection.
Routings that arrive at identical connectors shall be such that permutations are impossible.
NOTE: Precautions using chains

Not recommended solution.
If it is not possible to change the routing and the connector configuration, to prevent the possible permutation of connectors, small
chains or leads must be provided.
The chains or leads shall be crimped on the lugs and screwed to a backshell or equivalent to make sure that chain/plug connections
are correctly held in position.

A. Circular Connectors (Ref. 20-44-1X)
B. Rectangular Connectors (Ref. 20-44-2X)
C. Coaxial Connectors (Ref. 20-44-3X)
D. Quadrax Connectors (Ref. 20-44-4X)
E. Terminal Blocks (Ref. 20-44-5X)
F. Grounding Items (Ref. 20-44-7X)
CIRCULAR CONNECTORS (Airbus)
CIRCULAR CONNECTORS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
This chapter is applicable to the description, installation and identification of connectors used on aircraft.
2. Structure of the Chapters that Follow
- Connectors Type NAS1599 (Ref. 20-44-11)
- Connectors Type MIL-C-26482 (Ref. 20-44-12)
- Connectors Type MIL-C-5015 and EN6047 (Ref. 20-44-14)
- Connectors Type PREN 2997 (Ref. 20-44-16)
- Miscellaneous Circular Connectors (Ref. 20-44-19).
3. General Installation Rules (and Procedures)
This topic gives the procedure for the assembly and installation of electrical connectors.
NOTE: When you connect an electrical line:

- Connect the power supply wires to sockets.
- Install the sockets in a movable connector.
NOTE: Before you connect the cables into the connectors, refer to the manufacturing document to find the accessories (e.g. backshell/strain
relief) that you must install and to find if the cable harness has a protective conduit.
4. Definition
Circular connectors contain a plug (the movable part), and a receptacle (the fixed part). The receptacle is attached to the structure (the

(Airbus)
housing or the panel) with hardware (a square or round flange) or with an applicable nut (with no flange).
In non-pressurized areas, it is mandatory to use a backshell for all the connectors. In pressurized areas, it is mandatory to use a backshell
only for the movable part. For receptacles and in VUs, it is not mandatory to use a backshell when clamps or ramps hold cables sufficiently.
5. Standard Procedures
To do a correct coupling of circular connectors, it is necessary:
- To make sure that the plug and the receptacle have the same polarization
- To make sure that the fixed connector is in the correct position
- To push to connect.
A. Assembly
(1) Example of assembly for E0111 and E0233 connectors
(Ref. Fig. 001)
Connectors are supplied assembled. You must disassemble all the parts before installation of the cables and contacts:
-
Crimp the contacts on the cables.
-
Slide the cables through the backshell and the ferrule.
- Push the contacts through the rear face of the grommet and the rear insulator. Make sure that the contacts are in the correct
position in the rear insulator.
-
Install the ceramic rings on the contacts (Refer to chapter 20-48-23 para. 2.C.).
-
Slide the front insulator on the contacts against the rear insulator.
-
Slide the ferrule on the grommet.
NOTE: Make sure that the slots on the front and rear insulator and the ferrule are aligned.
- Insert the assembly in the shell.

- Screw the backshell on the shell.
B. Polarization
To prevent errors when equivalent connectors are in the same area, each connector has a mechanical coding. This coding has a system
of pins and slots, the angle of which can change.
To prevent cross connections when there is a distance of less than 300 mm (11.811 in.) between connectors, the connectors must have
different sizes, polarizations or contact arrangements.
To do polarization, turn the insulation in the unit.
The keyway axis (largest pin or groove) is the reference. In the "N" or "Nocode" position, it is the same as the axis of symmetry of the
contact arrangement.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
When you see the insulation on the contact side, you turn it clockwise for the plug connector and counterclockwise for the receptacle
connector. Do angular shifts related to the primary positioning pin or groove.
(Ref. Fig. 003)
Example
ABS1495 T 01 F P N
| |
| ------------------- Polarization code
|
--------------------------------- Standard P/N
C. Positioning
It is not recommended to put the connectors in position in the horizontal plane.
Fixed connectors must be in the same position on the aircraft.
Circular connectors are installed with the main keyway at the top on panels or boxes and vertically installed fixed connectors.
(Ref. Fig. 002)
When the connector is horizontally installed (not the recommended solution), the keyway must point to the aircraft forward reference.
It is recommended to put the fixed connector, the nuts and the washers in position on the wiring side of the panel.
D. Installation
When it is in correct position, you can attach the receptacle with:
- A round flange (with nut)
(Ref. Fig. 004)
NOTE: You must tighten the knurled nut manually until you cannot feel movement. You must then tighten the nut with rubber-jaw pliers
by 1/8 thru 1/4 turn. Make sure that you do not cause damage to the connector during tightening.
-
A square flange (with bolt or with a self-locking anchor plate only in areas without easy access).
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)

(Airbus)
You must use the screws shown in the drawing.
For example: non-magnetic screws near ADF antennas.
(1) In pressurized areas
You must attach fixed connectors with square flanges - type E0053 or equivalent - with a minimum of two opposite screws.
You can attach connectors for non-essential systems (e.g.: ABS0364 or equivalent) installed in the cabin for commercial electric
systems in a connector bracket with two opposite quick-release fasteners.
You can attach connectors for essential systems (e.g.: E0053) in a connector bracket with two opposite quick-release fasteners.
You must attach E0444 (steel) and E0454 (alloy) fixed connectors with four screws.
(2) In non-pressurized areas
You must attach steel or alloy connectors (E0053 or equivalent) with four screws.
(3) In fuel tanks
Use jam nut connectors.
NOTE: You can attach round flange receptacles to the structure with adhesive (sealing is done with an O-ring or with adhesive).
(a) Example of installation (examples of connectors ABS0496 and ABS0504)

(Ref. Fig. 007)
-
Make sure that the connector area is clean (in and out of the tank panel) and that there is no contamination.
- Put a small quantity of adhesive EC776 (Material No. 09-007A) or PR1005L (Material No. 09-007) at three locations, at
approximately equal distances on the flange groove of the connector body. Immediately put the O-ring in the flange groove
and let the adhesive sufficiently cure for approximately 5 min. Before you install the connector in its cut-out, make sure that
the O-ring is in the correct position.
-
Install the washer and the nut.
-
TORQUE to the correct value:
-----------------------------------------------------------
| SHELL SIZE | TORQUE |
| OF THE |--------------------------------------------|
| CONNECTOR | m.daN | lbf.in |
|------------|----------------------|---------------------|
| 8 | 0.38 to 0.44 | 33.6 to 38.4 |
|------------|----------------------|---------------------|
| 16 | 1.23 to 1.36 | 109 to 120 |
|------------|----------------------|---------------------|
| 22 | 2.36 to 2.61 | 206 to 228 |
-----------------------------------------------------------
- Use sealant MC238A (Material No. 09-001E) or MC238B (Material No. 09-002E) or PR2001B (Material 09-002F) to make a
fillet around the connector mounting flange and the tank panel.
-
Safety the nut as given in the drawing requirements.
E. Connection of the plug and receptacle

Circular connectors are supplied with a screw connection or with a bayonet lock to connect the two parts. To connect the plug and the
receptacle, put the keyway of the plug in front of the slot of the receptacle. Carefully push in the contact axis and then turn the plug
clockwise into the receptacle.
On some connectors (EN2997, EN3645), you must tighten the movable connector on the attached connector until you cannot see the red
or blue line.
(Ref. Fig. 008)
Do a visual check of locking with studs that you see through the locking ring or with coloured strips that go out of view when the plug is
locked.
For the bayonet system, if you hear a click, then the plug is fully and correctly locked.
F. Insulation and protection of electrical connectors
(1) General case
(a) Dummy contact
- You must put dummy or male contacts in all empty cavities of the connector side that has pins.
- You must put dummy or male contacts in all empty cavities for A380, A400M and A350 programs.
(b) Dummy receptacle
- You must put a dummy plug (sealing plug) on the plugs and receptacles when required by the definition. This is in relation
to their location (Refer 20-48-40).
- You must connect a plug that is not used to a dummy receptacle (protective cover) in order to prevent movement, and thus
damage, during flight.
-
You must put a dummy receptacle (protective cover) on receptacles that are not used.

(Airbus)
A chain attaches the protective cover which is near the applicable receptacle to the structure (Refer 20-54-51).
(2) In contamination areas
You must not put electrical connectors in position near fluid projection/spray areas (e.g. hydraulic pumps in landing gear bay).
Where electrical and hydraulic connections are near each other, you must not put the electrical connections in position below
removable (e.g. screwed) pipe couplings or hydraulic equipment (crimped pipe connections are not removable).
If it is not possible to obey the above instructions, you must put mechanical protection on the connections to prevent contamination
damage.
Where there is a risk of fluid contamination to boxes or panels, you must use covers larger than the applicable item(s) to give them
mechanical protection (e.g umbrella, etc.).
The umbrella must be plastic to prevent temperature conductivity (condensation).
The specific requirements in the table that follows are mandatory.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| | | PRESSURIZED AREA |
| | NON-PRESSURIZED |------------------------------------------------|
|CIRCUIT| AREA + PRESSURIZED | | IN VU |
| | HAZARDOUS AREA | OUT OF VU |-------------------------------|
| | | | CU CABLE | ALU CABLE |
|-------|--------------------|----------------|------------|------------------|
| |- Sealed connector |- Sealed |- Non sealed|- Sealed connector|
| VC (1)| (grommet) | connector | connector | (grommet) |
| |- Dummy contacts | (grommet) |- Dummy |- Dummy contacts |
| |- Sealing plugs |- Dummy contacts| contacts | |
|-------|--------------------|----------------|----------- |------------------|
| |- Sealed connector |- Sealed |- Non sealed|- Sealed connector|
| VT (2)| (grommet) | connector | connector | (grommet) (6) |
| |- Sealing plug | (grommet) (6) | (7) | |
|-------|--------------------|------------------------------------------------|
| VT (3)|- Umbrellas and | No protection |
| | covers | |
|-------|--------------------|------------------------------------------------|
| VN (4)| No protection | No protection |
|-------|--------------------|------------------------------------------------|
| VG (5)| - | No protection |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1) Connectors
(2) Modules
(3) Terminal blocks
(4) Grounding point
(5) Grounding module
(6) If EFCS circuits or S cables, add sealing plugs
(7) If EFCS circuits or S cables, use connector with grommet and sealing plugs
G. Locking procedure
You must safety the connectors and backshells after installation.
You can do this with lockwire or locking paste (Refer to chapter 20-51-10).
You must use red identification marks to show correct position after torquing and safetying (Refer to chapter 20-51-50).
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Circular Connectors - Example of Assembly for E0111 and E0233 Connectors
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Circular Connectors - Positioning
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Circular Connectors - Polarization
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Circular Connectors - Round Flange
Figure 005.1 / Graphic SH 005.1 Circular Connectors - Square Flange
Figure 006.1 / Graphic SH 006.1 Circular Connectors - Anchor Plate

20-44-11 - CONNECTORS TYPE NAS1599 (Airbus)
CONNECTORS TYPE NAS1599 (Airbus)
CONNECTORS TYPE NAS1599 - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

1. General
Connectors type NAS1599 installed on aircraft have the codes that follow:
- E0039 (ex NSA938104) Plug-Screw Locking related to:
E0040 (ex NSA938105) Receptacle-Square Flange and
E0041 (ex NSA938106) Receptacle-Round Flange.
- ABS0497 Plug-Bayonet Locking related to:
ABS0496 and ABS0504 Receptacle-Jam Nut
ABS0498 Receptacle-Round Flange.
- ABS0592 Free Plug-Bayonet Locking related to:
ABS0594 Receptacle-Jam Nut and
ABS0595 Receptacle-Square Flange.
- ABS1425 Connector-Shunted.
- E0052 Plug-Bayonet Locking related to:
E0053 Receptacle-Square Flange and
E0054 Receptacle-Round Flange.
- EN3646 Connector-Bayonet Locking.
- NSA938000 Plug-Bayonet Locking related to:
NSA938001 Receptacle-Square Flange and
NSA938002 Receptacle-Round Flange.
2. Screw Locking Connectors
A. E0039 (ex NSA938104) Plug, E0040 (ex NSA938105) and E0041 (ex NSA938106)
E0039 R 18 T 31 P N F
E0040 | | | | | | |
E0041 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | ---- Variant code
| | | | | | ------- Orientation code
| | | | | ---------- Type of contact | P = Pin
| | | | | | S = Socket
| | | | |
| | | | -------------- Contact arrangement code
| | | ----------------- Screw locking
| | --------------------- Shell size
| ------------------------- Environmental class
------------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Variant code
-----------------------------------------------------------
| | Type of interfacial | Contact |
| Code | seals for pin-type contacts | Supply |
| | and rear grommet | |
-----------------------------------------------------------
| A | | Supplied |
|------| Fluorosilicone |-----------------|
| C | | Not supplied |
|------|--------------------------------|-----------------|
| E | | Supplied |
|------| Special Elastomer |-----------------|
| F | | Not supplied |
-----------------------------------------------------------

(c) Contact arrangement code

(Ref. Fig. 001)
(Ref. Fig. 002)
(3) Torque Values
(Ref. Fig. 003)
(4) Related items:
Backshell ABS0638.
Special backshell E0080.
Backshell NSA938150.
3. Bayonet Locking Connectors
A. ABS0497 Plug - ABS0496, ABS0498 and ABS0504 Receptacles
ABS0496 12 12 S N
ABS0497 | | | |
ABS0498 | | | |
ABS0504 | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | ------- Orientation code (N, W, X, Y, Z)
| | | ---------- Type of contact | P = Pin
| | | | S = Socket
| | |
| | -------------- Contact arrangement code
| |
| |
| ------------------ Shell size
------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Maximum operating temperature is 100 deg.C (212.00 deg.F) for ABS0497 and ABS0498, and 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) for
ABS0496 and ABS0504.
(b) Special Considerations
When ABS0497 is recorded as ABS0498 it must be resistant when put fully and continuously into fuel plus 2% water.
(3) Contact arrangement code
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(4) Related items
Backshell ABS0503 for ABS0496 receptacle
Backshells E0080 and E0199 for ABS0504 receptacle
B. ABS0592 Plug - ABS0594 and ABS0595 Receptacles
ABS0592 S 22 41 P N F
ABS0594 S 22 41 S N F
ABS0595 S 22 41 P N F
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | -- Delivery Code | F = without contact
| | | | | | | E = with contacts
| | | | | |
| | | | | ----- Polarization code | N = normal
| | | | |
| | | | -------- Type of contact | P = pin
| | | | | S = socket
| | | ----------- Contact Arrangement Code
| | |
| | --------------- Shell Size Code
| ------------------- Material Code | S = Stainless Steel
------------------------- Standard P/N


(a) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
C. ABS1425 Shunted Connector
ABS1425 S 14B19 N F
| | | | |
| | | | ------ Delivery Code | F = without contact
| | | | | E = with contacts
| | | |
| | | --------- Polarization Code | N = normal
| | -------------- Contact Arrangement Code and Finish Code
| | (B = black anodized, N = nickel-plated)
| ------------------- Type of Contact | P = pin
| | S = socket
------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(4) Shunt connection
(Ref. Fig. 008)
D. E0052 Plug - E0053 and E0054 Receptacles
E0052 R 22 B 41 S N F C
E0053 | | | | | | | |
E0054 | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | - Use Code (optional)
| | | | | | | --- Variant code (Not shown for plug)
| | | | | | ------ Orientation code
| | | | | --------- Type of contact | P = Pin
| | | | | | S = Socket
| | | | |
| | | | ------------- Contact arrangement code
| | | |
| | | ---------------- Screw locking
| | -------------------- Shell size
| |
| ------------------------ Version code | R = Non conductive protection
| | N = Conductive protection
| | (nickel-plated)
| | W = Conductive protection
| | (cadmium-plated)
------------------------------ Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
Maximum operating temperature is 175 deg.C (347.00 deg.F) for R and N version codes and 200 deg.C (392.00 deg.F) for
W version code.

(b) Variant code

-----------------------------------------------------------
|Variant| Type of interfacial | Contact |
| Code | seals for pin-type contacts | Supply |
| | and rear grommet | |
|-------|--------------------------------|----------------|
| C | Fluorosilicone | Not supplied |
|-------|--------------------------------|----------------|
| E | | Supplied |
|-------| Silicone Elastomer |----------------|
| F | | Not supplied |
-----------------------------------------------------------
(c) Use code (only for SOURIAU connectors)
NOTE: Only for contact arrangement codes:

14-12, 14-15, 16-8, 16-21, 20-16, 20-39, 22-41 and 24-31.
This code shows that coaxial contact NSA938172 is used.
(d) Contact arrangement code

(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(3) Related items:
Backshell ABS0638.
Special backshell E0080.
Thread-protecting bush NSA938003.
Backshell NSA938150.
Protective cap NSA938005.
E. EN3646 connector
EN3646 A 0 1006 M N
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | | ---------- Polarization
| | | | ------------- Type of contact and delivery code
| | | ------------------ Contact arrangement code
| | ---------------------- Housing type
| ------------------------- Connector model
------------------------------ Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Connector model
Y = hermetic receptacle with housing soldered contact.
A = sealed receptacle with contact.
RS = sealed receptacle with crimped contact.
WS = sealed receptacle with crimped contact.
(c) Housing type
0 = receptacle, square flange mounting.
1 = receptacle, round flange, soldering mounting.
3 = Protective cover for receptacle.
4 = Protective cover for plug.
5 = Dummy receptacle.
6 = Plug.
7 = Receptacle, jam nut mounting.
(d) Type of contact and delivery code

Connection Table
------------------------------------------------------------
| | | With contact | With specific |
| | Without | standard barrels | contact size 20 |
| Contacts | contacts | EN3155-XXX2020 | with special |
| | | EN3155-XXX1616 | barrel |
| | | EN3155-XXX1212 | EN3155-XXX2018 |
|----------|----------|------------------|-----------------|
| Male | A | M | C |
|----------|----------|------------------|-----------------|
| Female | B | F | D |
------------------------------------------------------------
(e) Contact arrangement code
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)
(Ref. Fig. 007)
(f) Related items:
Cover for receptacle EN3646 A 3 XXX.
Cover for plug EN3646 A 4 XXX.
Dummy receptacle EN3646 A 5 XX.
Straight backshell ABS1358.
45 degrees backshell ABS1359.
90 degrees backshell ABS1360.
Backshell ABS0638.
F. NSA938000 Plug - NSA938001 and NSA938002 Receptacles
NSA938000 R 22 B 41 S N C
NSA938001 | | | | | | |
NSA938002 | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | ---- Variant code
| | | | | | ------- Orientation code
| | | | | ---------- Type of contact | P = Pin
| | | | | | S = Socket
| | | | -------------- Contact arrangement code
| | | ----------------- Bayonet locking
| | --------------------- Shell size
| ------------------------- Sealed black anodized
------------------------------- Standard P/N
(a) Temperature
(b) Variant code
C = without contact.
Nothing with contacts.
(c) Contact arrangement code
(Ref. Fig. 004)
(Ref. Fig. 005)
(Ref. Fig. 006)

Connection Table
(Ref. Fig. 007)

4. Connection Table
(Ref. Fig. 009)
Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Type NAS1599 Connectors - Contact Arrangements E0039 Plug
Figure 002.1 / Graphic SH 002.1 Type NAS1599 Connectors - Contact Arrangements E0039 Plug
Figure 003.1 / Graphic SH 003.1 Type NAS1599 Connectors - Assembly Torque Values E0041
Figure 004.1 / Graphic SH 004.1 Type NAS1599 Connectors - Contact Arrangements ABS0496, ABS0497, ABS0504,
ABS0592, ABS0594, ABS0595, E0052, EN3646, NSA938000
ABS0592, ABS0594, ABS0595, E0052, EN3646, NSA938000
ABS0594, ABS0595, E0052, EN3646 and NSA938000 Plugs
E0052, EN3646 and NSA938000 Plugs
Figure 008.1 / Graphic SH 008.1 Type NAS1599 Connectors - Shunt Connection ABS1425
Figure 009.1 / Graphic SH 009.1 Type NAS1599 Connectors - Connection Table

A330 Espm 1

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

A330 Espm 1

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Customer : XF Manual: ESPM

Type : A330 Selected effectivity: 111-111

INTRODUCTION - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

NOTE: For users of this manual

The ESPM is broken down in two main chapters:

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 1 of 5

e.g.: M 81969 / 01-01

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 2 of 5

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 3 of 5

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 4 of 5

GPS Global Positioning System

Text continues : see text below

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 5 of 5

SAFETY PRACTICES (Airbus)

SAFETY PRACTICES - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT NO AC OR DC POWER SOURCE IS CONNECTED TO THE AIRCRAFT

A. Electrical Safety Practices.

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 1 of 6

WARNING: USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND OTHER SPECIAL MATERIALS

Figure 001.1 / Graphic SH 001.1 Safety Practices - Typical Tag

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 2 of 6

STANDARD TOOLS - GENERAL (Airbus)

STANDARD TOOLS - GENERAL - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Before use, you must examine each tool for:

STRIPPING TOOLS (Airbus)

STRIPPING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 3 of 6

2. Structure of the Chapters

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STRIPPING OF ELECTRICAL CABLES

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STRIPPING OF ELECTRICAL CABLES DESCRIPTION

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 4 of 6

C. Stripping Procedure for each Applicable Tool:

(1) Scalpels, cutters, cable knives or equivalent:

(a) Conditions of application

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 5 of 6

(b) Insulation stripping procedure

Text continues : see text below

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 6 of 6

STRIPPING TOOLS (Airbus)

STRIPPING TOOLS - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

2. Scalpels, cutters or equivalent tools

A. Example of stripping tools

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 1 of 6

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 2 of 6

| LB198 | LB5212 | L5217 | |

B. Example of stripping tools that use IDEAL blades

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 3 of 6

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 4 of 6

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 5 of 6

| E0267 | QG | 3 X DK24 to | refer to E0262DK |

Text continues : see text below

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 6 of 6

(2) Stripping-tool allocation table

These pliers have an engraved arrow on the jaws.

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 1 of 2

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 2 of 2

(2) Stripping tool allocation table

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 1 of 1

Print Date: Feb 13/12 Local Time Page 1 of 1

SPECIFIC STRIPPING PROCEDURE (Airbus)

SPECIFIC STRIPPING PROCEDURE - DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

- Step 1: Strip each core to the length "A".